Skip to main content

Full text of "Asiatic researches, or, Transactions of the Society instituted in Bengal for inquiring into the history and antiquities, the arts, sciences and literature of Asia"

See other formats 


Pent 
ay 
fy 


oe GLB BA 


aw more 


\ PRO SCIENT/7 > ——% 


= 


/ \ \ / 
\ Zz 7 5 \\4 7 /\ 
\\ \ Vy} Ae ENN ee —yeuy \ \ 
LA — t | 
| Pet | - = % % 
ry sy | 2 NE SN 
\ /, Os y q \ \ \ 
is V pora ~~ | \\~ A 
Af / Zz {i= \\\ | 
| ACH \\ 
} 1 /fe | Were) 
\ \ — \ \ O}l/ 
4 2. = = ) q et | 
C | — 3 i} ‘, 
1 It > | } \ : 
1 tt i } }] \ A 
Ex - / ie: 
\ | Ee / YH} / 
\ \/ 
/ ye | 
YZ 
/ ; = | Y 
Vw SALUTE \ SY// y 
- \ / { 
.N j y, 
if ~< \ | / A 
WZ / \ \ SL 
AWN ’/ } \ { y 
al WA — x \ <a 
\ 4 / W, % 
j Cat {i 


\ | 


’ 


* 


Evanston, tHttrols 


, 
, 


Forrett Biblical Institute 


25 


“3 \ eh : . “7 5 " f 
ee «4 : Se x - : : ' oe 4 MY 1 Sa 
: jo oie i ; hy er eee hh 7 x a ee eV Pee SSCA gees 


an . an iS - ~ 
ee ae es ’ , 


\ 2 
t, 54 


ASTATIC RESEARCHES: 


OR, 


TRANSACTIONS 


OF THE 


SOCIETY INSTITUTED IN BENGAL, 


For inquiring into the 
History and Antiquities ; 
THE 
ARTS, SCIENCES, AND LITERATURE, 


OF 


ASIA. 


VOLUME THE TENTH. 


‘PRINTED VERBATIM FROM THE CALCUTTA EDITION. 


LONDON: 


PRINTED FOR VERNOR, HOOD, AND SHARPE; J. €UTHELL; J. WALKER ; 
4 LACKINGTON, ALLEN, AND co.; OTRIDGE AND SON; LONGMAN, HURST, 
-REES, ORME, AND BROWNE; R. FAULP*R ; SCATCHARD AND LETTERMAN ; 
R. LEE; J. MAWMAN; J. MURRAY; J. ASPERNE; BLACK, PARRY, AND 
KINGSBURY; AND E. LLOYD; 
At the Union Printing-Office, St. John’s Square, by W. Wilson. 
— 


1811. 


Le v.10 
xii . ae 
L0G2 
Garrett Biblical Institute 
Evanstony Hlinols 


af 


199¢@ 


Tl. 


IL. 


IV. 


a 2 

<=) 

2 

™ 

oc VI. 

ou 

<= 
VI. 

~ Vu. 


Ix. 


CONTENTS. 


== 


I. Remarks on the State of Agriculture in the District of 


Dindjpur. By Wi CAR BY sc ccte dhalntealeoiniciols.s:antia 
An Essay on the Sacred Isles in the West, with other 
_Essays connected with that Work. By Capt. F. Wit- 


ford eereeseeeeeeeeen erervreeos tere eeerers e#8 . 
On the Languages and Literature of the Indo- Chinese 
Nations. By J. LEyDEN, M.D.«-+-- ev eeeceee of 


An Account of Trigonometrical Operations in crossing the 
Peninsula of India, and connecting Fort St. George 
with Mangalore. By Capt. WILLIAM LAMBTON. 
Communicated by the Hon. WILLIAM PETRIE, Esq. 


Governor of Fort St. George +++++ersecsreeeres, 


An Account of the Male Plant, which furnishes the Medi- 
cine generally called Columbo, or Columba Root. By 
Doctor ANDREW BERRY, Member of the Medical 
Board of Fort St. George eee ece sevees ceecnscene 

On Sanscrit and Précrit Poetry. By HENRY THOMAS 
COLEBROOKE, ESQ. -seereceesesceccercseevece 

Remarks upon the Authorities of Mosukman Law. By 
3% F. HARINGTON, Esq. Pee e rons cscesecessogee 

An Account of Astronomical Observations taken at the 
Honourable Company’s Observatory, near Fort S¢é. 
George, in the East Indies, in the years 1806 and 
1807. To which are added some Remarks on the 
Declination of certain Stars and of the Sun, when near 
the Zenith of that place. By Capt. JonN WARREN, 
of H. M. 33d Regiment of Foot +++-+sseceeceeee 

‘Translations of two Leiters of NADIR SHAH, with In- 
troductory Observations in a Letter to the President. 
By Brigadier-General JOHN MALCOLM veseeerees 


A 2 


158 


290 


385 


389 


475 


513 


526 


| 


I TAKE this opportunity to correct two passages in former 
Essays; one in the [Vth Vol. of the Asiatic Researches, p. 382: 
and the second in the first part of my Essay on the Sacred Isles in 
the West, p. 302. 

In the latter, I said that the famous Pr‘a‘N-PURi went no further — 
than El-Catif and Baharein, in his way to Egypt. But I was 
mistaken; for he even attempted to go up the Tigris, and went 
even as far as Mocha. 

In the former, I asserted that by the Surya-much‘hi-gangd, PR A‘N- 
PURI meaut the Volga: but I was equally mistaken ; for, from his 
narrative, he certainly understood the Shat-al-Arab, or the united 
stream of the Tigris and Euphrates. 

I seldom saw Pr'a‘N-PuRi, and he hardly condescended to an- 
swer my inquiries: hence the information which he communicated, 
was vague and desultory. I did not advert then to what Mr. 
DUNCAN has said on the subject in the Vth Vol. of the Asiatic 


Researches. 
F. WILFORD. 
BENARES, Feb. 20th, 1808. 


MEMBERS 


OF THE 


ASPATICSOCLETY, 


1808. 


PATRONS. 


Tux Ricur Honovraste GILBERT LORD MINTO, 
GovERNOR GENERAL. 

LIEUTENANT GENERAL HEWETT, CoMMANDER IN 
CHIEF. 

JOHN LUMSDEN, Esa. and . Members of the Supreme 

H. T. COLEBROOKE, Eso. Council. 

Presipent, H. T. COLEBROOKE, Ese. 

ist Vice Presipent, J. H. HARINGTON, Esq. 

od Vicre Presipent, Docror JOHN FLEMING. 

Sir JOHN ROYDS, Kynicur. Hi 

H.’P.\FORSTER;) Eso. 

J. FARQUHAR, Eso. 

R. HOME, Esq. 

J. BENT LEY, Eso. \ 

a es SMITH, Eso. { 

JAMES HARE, Junior, M.D. 

W. LL. GIBBONS, Esa. 

RevereND W. CAREY, . J 


Secretary, WILLIAM HUNTER, M. D. 
Treasurers, Messrs. TRAIL, PALMER, anp CO. 
Acrnt in Evrore; Coronet MICHAEL SYMES. 


¥ 


Committee of Papers, 
with the President, 
Vice - Presidents, 
and Secretary. 


MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. 


MEMBERS. 


Whitelaw Ainslie, M. D. 


Hon. John Cochrane. 


J. E. Colebrooke, Esq: 
H. Compton, Esq. 
William Cowper, ‘Esq. 
Burrish Crisp, Esq. ~ 
John Crisp, Esq. 


Robert Alexander, Esq. 
James Alexander, Esq. 
David Anderson, Esq. 
Dr. James Anderson. 
Lieut. J. Anderson. 


Thomas Daniel, Esq. 
George Davidson, Esq. 
Samuel Davis, Esq. 

W. A. Devis, Esq. 

Jolin Dickens, Esq. 
James Dinwiddie, LL. D. 
W. Dorin, Esq. 

G. Dowdeswell, Esq. 

C. D’Oyly, Esq. 

Hon. Jonathan Duncan. 


Capt. John Baillie. 

P. C. Baird, Esq. 

Francis Balfour, M. D. 
Sir G. H. Barlow, Bart. 
James Barton, Esq. 
W..B. Bayley, Esq. 

John Bebb, Esq. 
Reverend J. Bell.’ 
Andrew Berry, M. D. 
Robert Biddulph, Esq. 
Robert Blake, Esq. 
Richard Blechynden, Esq. 
W.C. Blacquiere, Esq. 
Admiral Bligh, F. R.S,. 
William Boag, Esq. 
Charles Boddam, Esq. 

‘R. H. Boddam, Esq. 
Lieut. Col. Joseph Boden. 
Thomas Brooke, Esq. 
Ralph Broome, Esq. 

Rev. David Brown. 

Hon. C. A. Bruce. 

Rev. Claudius Buchanan, D.D. 
Francis Buchanan, M. D. 
Sir William Burroughs, Bart. 


Major W. Burton. 


N. B. Edmonstone, Esq, - 
John Eliot, Esq. 

Hon. J. Elliot. 

Francis Ellis, Esq. 
Walter Ewer, Esq. 
Walter Ewer, jun. Esq. 


Major G. H. Fagan. 
Robert Farquhar, Esq. 
Leopold Fichtell, Esq. 
John Fombelle, Esq. 
Nicholas Fontana, Esq. 
Francis Fowke, Esq. 
Lieut. Col. Charles Fraser. 
Rev. N. G. Fuglsang. 


Col. John Garstin. 


Captain B. Camac. 
J. Borthwick Gilchrist, LL. D. 


Alexander Campbell, M. D. 

Mumford Campbell, Esq. Francis Gladwin, Esq. 

Lieut. John Canning. J. Goldingham, Esq. 

Sir Codrington E. Carrington,| R. T. Goodwin, Esq. 
Knight. F. D. Gordon, Esq. _ 

Charles Chapman, Esq. Lieut. Col. H. M. Gordon. 


MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. 


C. Gowan, Esq. 
Thomas Graham, Esq, 
Charles Grant, Esq. 
James Grant, Esq. 
William Grant, Esq. 


Lieut..Col. Henry Haldane. 
Alexander Hamilton, Esq. 
Captain W. Hamilton. 


Lieut. Col.. Tho. Hardwicke. 


James Hare, Esq. M: D. 
Herbert Harris, Esq. 
Warren Hastings, Esq. 
Francis Hawkins, Esq. 
W.N. W. Hewitt, Esq. ° 
Benjamin Heyne, M. D. 
W. Hickey, Esq. 

Henry Hodgson, Esq. 
D. Hopkins, Esq. 
Francis Horsley, Esq. 
Colonel Houghton. 
James Howison, Esq. 
Osias Humphries, Esq. . 
John Hunter, Esq. 


' 


Jamesi Irwin, Esq. if 
A. H. Kelso, Esq. 

Sir John Kennaway, Bart. 
Richard Kennaway, Esq. 
Colonel W. Kirkpatrick. 
Colonel Alexander Kyd. 


Major William Lambton. 
Thomas Law, Esq. 

Rev. Francis Lee, A. M. 
R. Leny, Esq. 

J.C. Leyden, M. D. 

Rev. P. Limrick. 

Charles Lloyd, Esq. 

Lieut. Col. Herbert Lloyd: 
Lieut. A. Lockett. 


Lieut-Col. Colin Macauley. 


Lieut. Gen. Hay Macdowal, 
Major Colin Mackenzie. 
Lieut. Colonel J. Macdonald, 
F.R.S. 
Donald Macnabb, Esq. 
Francis Macnaghten, Esq. 
Colonel Allen Macpherson. 
Sir John Macpherson, Bart. 


| Brig. Gen. John Malcolm. 


Sir Charles W. Malet, Bart. 
William Marsden, Esq. 
Bartholomew Marsh, Esq. 
Greeme Mercer, Esq. 
Major Edward Moore, F.R.S. 
Edmund Morris, Esq. 
Captain W. Morrison. 
Captain James Mouat. 

W. R. Munro, M.D. 

Sir Joho Murray, Bart. 
Thomas Myers, Esq. 

S. Nicolson, Esq. 

Hon. Frederick’ North. 


Captain J oseph O’ Halloran. 
Gore Ousley, Esq. - 


Major Gen. William Palmer. 
Jolin Palmer, Esq. 
George Parry, Esq. 

John David Paterson, Esq. 
Colonel William Paterson. 


T. D. Porcher, Esq. 


Thomas Raban, Esq. 
Thomas Rafiles, Esq. 
Henry Ramus, Esq. 

John Rawlins, Esa. 

Lieut. Col. D. T. Richardson. 
M. Ricketts, Esq. 

Colonel R. E. Roberts. 
Captain Thomas Robertson. 
George Robinson, Esq. 
John Romer, Esq. 

James Ross, Esq. 


MEMBERS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY. 


W. Roxburgh, M. D. 
Alexander Russell, Esq. 
Sir Henry Russell, Knight. 


Robert Saunders, Esq. 
Helenus Scott, Esq. 
Lieut. Col. Richard Scott. 
Thomas Scott, Esq. 
Daniel Seton, Esq. 

J. W. Sherer, Esq. 

John Shoolbred, Esq. 
George Sotheby, Esq. 
Peter Speke, Esq. 

Sir George Staunton, Bart. 
Major Charles Stewart. 


Sir Thomas Strange, Knight. 


Captain M. Stewart. 
James Stuart, Esq. 
Captain B. Sydenham. 
Col. M. Symes. 


Captain T. W. Taylor. » 
John Taylor, Esq. 


Right Hon. Lord Teignmouth. 


Rev. William Tennant. 
George Thompson, Esq. 
Captain F. Thompson. 


Isaac Titsing, Esq. 
Henry Trail, Esq. 
H. St. G. Tucker, Esq. 


Lord Viscount Valentia. 


Captain John Warren. 
Major Francis Wilford. 
Charles Wilkins, Esq. 
John Lloyd Williams, Esq. 
Lieut. Col. H. Worsley. 


Captain J. Young. 
John Zoffany, Esq. 


eee 


HONORARY MEMBERS. ~ 


M. Carpentier de Cossigny. 
Rev. D. John. 

Rev. Thomas Maurice. 

M. Volney. - 
Sir William Ouseley, Bart... 


Major L. Dundas Campbell. 


TRANSACTIONS 


OF THE 


ASIATIC SOCIETY. 


I. 


Remarks on the State of AcricutturRE, in the District 
of Dina‘sPur. 


BY W. CAREY. 


Bits soil of the district of Dindjpur is consider- 
ably diversified. In the southern part the 
ground rises in gentle acclivities, which run from 
north to south, and are divided from each other by 
vallies running between them ;. the whole resembling 
large waves, or rather the appearance of the sea when 
there is a great swell. The width of each valley is 
two or three miles, and that of the elevations about 
the same. Each valley is watered with one or two 
little streams, as the Zunguam, the Puérnabhavé, and 
several others, which empty themselves either into 
the Mahdnandé or the Ganges. These small rivers 
swell in the rainy season to large lakes, fifty or sixty 
miles in length, and two or three in breadth, oyerflow- 
ing all the low lands, which are dry in the cold sea- 
B 


2 REMARKS ON AGRICULTURE 


son. These vallies, at the distance of fifty miles 
from the Ganges, are scarcely higher than the surface 
of its waters; when therefore that river is swollen by 
the periodical rains, the waters of the vallies are not 
only prevented from running off, but are so much 
increased as to be navigable for vessels of very consi- 
derable burden. 


The soil f the elevated portions of land is in ge- 
neral a stiff clay, in some places black, and somewhat 
porous, in others white and tenacious. ‘The soil of 
some of the vallies resembles that of the elevated 
parts, and that of others is rich and loamy, with 
ubstratu m, at a greater or lesser depth, of the same 
kind of clay which forms the higher grounds. These 
low lands are for the most part covered with long 
grass of different sorts, and afford pasture to a great 
number of buffaloes and to large herds of other 
cattle. 


The northern parts of the district are more level 
than the southern ones, have a loamy soil, and are 
well cultivated. Some tracts of clay land are, how- 
ever, to be found, and it is probable that clay is the 
substratum of the whole. 


The higher lands in the southern parts of the dis- 
trict are principally inhabited by A/usulmans, and the 
vallies by Hindus. The mode of cultivation and the 
productions of the elevated parts, differ widely from 
those of the vallies, so that those who have been ac- 
customed to one of these sorts of land only, ¢an sel- 
dom manage the other to advantage. 


On the higher clay lands very little besides rice 
is produced, and, except in very small spots which 


IN. Dinaspur. °° a 


are well ‘manured, only one crop in a year. The 
Joamy vallies which do not lie so low as to endanger 
the inundating of the crop, produce,' not only rice, 
but also a good crop of mustard, or pulse in the cold 
season. The land which produces two crops in a 
year is called Pdalli, and is usually let at a rupee and 
half per Bigha.. That which produces only one crop 
is called Ahar, and is usually let at twelve annas per 
Bigha. 


The people of the district of Dinajpur are, in ge- 
neral, extremely poor, and their farming utensils are 
therefore proportionably simple and wretched. A 
plough drawn by two bullocks, serves to prepare the 
soil. The plough is compused of four pieces; viz. 
the Langal or body of the plough, which is a piece 
of wood forming two sides of. an obtuse-angled tri- 
angle, the other side being wanting, with a hole near 
the obtuse angle to admit a staff of wood or bamboo 
about six feet long, called the Is. This staff may be 
called the beam of the plough, and is the part to 
which the bullocks are yoked, going between them 
and resting on the yoke by which they are coupled. 
The ploughshare (Phal) is a flat plate of iron, nearly 
of a lozenge shape, which is fastened to the under 
patt of the Langal, to prevent its being worn by the 
soil. The handle is a piece of wood, or bamboo, 
about two feet long, fastened to the upper extremity 
of the Langal, and furnished, at a small distance from 
its upper end, with a pin about six inches long, called 
the Mut, to assist the hand in guiding the plough. 


- The oxen draw double, or side by side, being 
coupled together with the Jual, or yoke, which 
passes over the necks of both of them at once, The 


lower edge, which lies on the necks of: the cattle, 
Bg 


4 REMARKS ON AGRICULTURE 


is straight. The upper edge has two elevations, one 
over the neck of each ox, but is cut down at the 
middle and at each end, so as to remain about two 
inches deep. Four bamboo pins are passed through 
the yoke, one at each end, and two in the middle, 
which, descending on each side the animal's neck, are 
connected by a cord under its throat. The beam of 
the plough rests on the middle of the yoke, and is 
fastened to it by a cord. 


Only.one person attends a plough, holding the 
handle in one hand, and occasionally pulling the tails 
of the oxen with the other, to guide them, or strik- 
ing them with a stick to quicken their pace. A pair 
of oxen may be purchased for six or eight rupees, a 
plough for five annas, and a yoke for four. An in- 
strument called Mai is drawn over the field after it 
has been sufficiently ploughed. This may be called 
the harrow of the Hindus. It is made of bamboo, 
in the form of a ladder, and is four or five feet in 
length. A cord, fastened to the centre of this rude 
iustrument, is connected with the centre of the yoke, 
and the driver stands on the harrow, assisting its 
operation by his weight, and guiding the cattle with 
his hands. Land pulverized and laid smooth with 
the Mai retains it moisture, and is fit to receive seed 
in dry weather, several days longer than it would be 
if this was neglected. The Hindus call the opera- 
tion, when performed for that purpose, Rasbandhan, 
or the confining of the moisture. 


In dry seasons it is often necessary to water the 
fields. For this purpose an instrument called a Jant 
is used. The Jant is a trough of light wood, from 
twelve to sixteen feet long, somewhat curved to admit 
agreater depth in the middle, the bottom is five or six 


IN DINAJPUR. . 5 


inches wide, the height of the sides in the middle 
part is six or eight inches, gradually decreasing to- 
wards the ends, one of which is excavated toa point, 
to prevent the water from running back and being 
lost. When this instrument is used, it is slung to 
three bamboos placed erect and crossing each other 
in the centre; along and heavy bamboo, loaded at 
the further end with a large ball of earth, is then 
faftened to the end which is to be plunged into the 
water, and thrown over the three erect bamboos, 
resting on the top of them. A person standing on a 
stage, even with, or somewhat below the surface of 
the water of a pond, river, &c. then plunges the end 
of the Jant into the water, with his foot, by which 
means it is filled. The weight at the end of the long 
bamboo assists him in raising it out of the water, and 
throwing its contents into a small reservoir, or pit, 
from which it is conveyed into the fields, by chan- 
nels cut for that purpose. Two feet, or twoand a half, 
is the height to which water can be thrown to effect 
by this machine; when the height is greater, two, 
three, or more Jants are used, and in that case the 
water is thrown into small reservoirs or pits, at a pro- 
per height above each other, and sufficiently deep to 
admit the next Jant to be plunged deep enough to 
fill it. Water is by this means sometimes conveyed 
to the distance of a mile or more on every side of a 
large tank or reservoir of water.* I have seen fifty 
or sixty Jants at one time, ina large receptacle of 


* Qu. Is not this the watering with the foot mentioned in ‘Scrip- 
ture, Deut. xi. ver. 10, and may not there be an allusion to the facility 
with which this water is directed at the will of the husbandman, ‘in 
Proy. xxi. ver. 1 2 

B3 


6 REMARKS ON AGRICULTURE 


water called Mahipal-dighi, about six coss* from 
Dindjpur. TO mTe) et 9 

To remove earth from one place to another, ayoke 
of bamboo is furnished with two appendages, called 
Bharua, somewhat resembling a coarse sieve, the 
outside composed of split bamboos wattled or twisted 


over each other, and the middle part of twine, woven 


somewhat like the bottom ofa sieve. These vessels are 
abeut a foot and a half in diameter; when loaded 
with earth, or any other substance, they are carried 
with the yoke. The yoke lies across one shoulder, 
one weight hanging before and the other behind, 
and is occasionally shifted from one shoulder to the 
other. eH ALM 

The Kodali, or digging-hoe is, in this district,’ set 
much more towards the earth than in the southern 
parts of Bengal, forming an angle’ of about six de- 
grees with the handle, whereas about Calcutta the 
angle is not more than thirty degrees. This instru- 
ment is used to dig the earth, or to grub up roots, and 
destroy the coarse grass, when land is to be first broken. 
up. ‘The Kodali is a very useful instrument, answer- 
ing the purpose of both spade and hoe. » ; 


The last instrument of husbandry which I shall 
mention is the Kastya or Indian sickle. The blade 
is curved, and edge-toothed like a sickle, but it is 
much smaller and more rude than the Hwropean one. 
The length of the blade is about eight or ten inches, 
and its greatest width one and a half. It is fixed in . 
a rude handle; and is used to cut corn, grass, or 
even brushwood upon occasion, being to the Hindu 
avery useful instrument, although a Ezropean la- 


In Dinaspur. “7 
bourer Would ‘scarcely pick one of them up if he saw 
it lie in'the road. a 


Rice is the staple production of the district. Four 
kinds (including several varieties) are principally cul- 
tivated; viz. the Bhadui, so called from its ripening 
in the month Bhddar, the Hemat so denominated 
fiom its ripening in the cold season, the Buna, and 


Bohara. 


~~ The first of these is chiefly, though not exclusive- 
ly, cultivated on the lower, and loamy lands; on 
these soils it is constantly sown by broad cast, in 
March, April or May, and the quantity sown depends 
upon the quantity of rain which falls im those months. 
The season of cultivation is sometimes extended near 
a’month longer'than it would otherwise be, by trans- 
planting the rice, while young, into the fields, or 
thé more elevated lands. | When it is sown early 
. nthe higher lands, a second crop is sometimes pro- 
duced upon the same spot; but, that whichis sown late 
ini the season, ripening proportionably late, so much 
interferes with the planting of the Hemat rice, that 
the latter crop is often scarcely worth the gathering. 


This rice, when sown on the lower and loamy soils, 
requires weeding. A large quantity of weeds, par- 
ticularly panicum ciliare, often springs up among it: 
these weeds, if not extirpated, infallibly ruin the 
crop. It is also necessary to open the soil, after a 
heavy shower, by drawing a large drag over it; but 
no other attention is requisite, till the harvest, when 
it is cut and housed in the usual way. 


The Hemat rice is usually cultivated on the higher 
and strong lands, a stiff soil being better calculated to 
B4 


$8 REMARKS ON AGRICULTURE 


retain the water after the end of the periodical rains; 
This rice is usually sown at the end of May, or the be- 
ginning of June, in small beds, as thick as it can pos- 
sibly grow. The plants come up in three or four 
days after the seed is sown, till which time the 
ground is kept barely moist: after the plants appear 
it should be kept quite moist, but not flooded. . As 
soon as the rains commence and the earth is well wa- 
tered, this rice is planted out in beds, (or compart- 
ments) each of which is surrounded with a balk, or 
border, about ten inches high, and a foot wide, to 
prevent the water from running off. 


When a field is first formed, these mounds or bor- 
ders are thrown up with the Kodali. The earth is 
then repeatedly ploughed, till it is completely mixed 
with the water, and reduced to a,soft mud. . Five, 
six, and sometimes eight ploughings' are. necessary, 
to destroy the weeds and completely dissolve the 
clods, after which it is smoothed by drawing the 
Mai over it, till the surface is so level that the water 
stands at an equal height in every part. When the 
field is thus prepared, the young plants are trans- 
planted from the seed-bed by the hand; eight or ten 
of them being usually planted in one hole. These 
holes, which are about nine inches asunder, are made 
by forcing the hand with the young plant into the 
mud; the plants are left there in an erect position, 
after which the admission of water settles the roots. 
When the whole spot is planted, water is admitted 
from a neighbouring compartment, or from a ditch, 
a trench or some other reservoir, and if possible con- 
stantly kept at the height of at least three (or four) 
inches. If there be too much water in the field, 
it is allowed to run off, by cutting a passage for it 
through the border, and when a sufficient quantity 


IN DINAJPUR, 9 


is fun off, the rest is retained, by shutting the pas- 
sage with a clod of soft earth. This crop requires 
no weeding, or at most but a very trifling one, the 
water being sufficient to destroy the noxious weeds. 
If the season be very dry, the field must Le supplied 
with water from some neighbouring pond or reser- 
voir, as the only means of preserving the crop: at- 
tention to this is peculiarly necessary while the 
plants are young, for if the earth be permitted to 
grow hard, the plants seldom thrive afterwards; 
when they have acquired a size sufficient to over- 
shadow the ground, the moisture is retained fora 
long time, and the crop sufiers less, but water is 
absolutely necessary to the perfection of a crop of 
rice. In November this crop begins to ripen, and 
the harvest is usually finished by the end of Decem- 
ber. As there is little fear of rain at this season, the 
crop is housed and stacked, without any loss or dif- 
ficulty. 


The Buna rice is usually sown in April or May, in 
low lands, where a flood of several feet deep may be 
expected; if the floods come suddenly while the 
plants are young, the water rises above them and the 
crop is lost; but if the plants are strong and the 
water increases gradually, the rice will grow as fast as 
the water rises. This crop will answer tolerably well, 
if the water be four, six, or even eignt feet in depth, 
the stalks sometimes acquiring the length of ten or 
even fifteen feet; but as they are weak and lie in 
an oblique position, they do not easily rise above 
eight feet of water. This crop ripens in November. 
The upper part of the plants on one man’s land being 
drawn by a gentle stream, or by some other cause, 
often fall on his neighbour's field and occasion quat- 
rels at the time of reaping. 


10 REMARKS on AGRICULTURE 


The Bohara rice is sown in October or November 
like the Hemat, and about January planted at the 
bottoms of tanks, or pits, or on very low ground where 
it can be supplied with water. ~ It is ‘treated® in 
every respect like the Hemat, and ripens in Apvil or 
May. ‘This is an excellent sort of rice, but the quan- 


tity cultivated-is necessarily small. 


The next article of cultivation is indigo, a plant 
for which many parts of this district are improper, as 
it will not grow on the white clay lands called Balka, 
is sparingly produced on the black or red clays, and 
as most of the soft and loamy parts lie so low as tobe 
subject to sudden inundations, which infallibly de- 
stroy the crop. 


The proper season for sowing indigo is in April 
and May. Some have sown it at the end of Septem 
ber or the beginning of October, and others in any 
month from October to March. That sown in Sep- 
tember, or October, or even in November, will fre- 
quently produce a crop, if the land be not low and 
damp. It is better to sow on low damp soils, in 
December, January and February, when the season 
wilksoon become warm enough to obviate the danger 
arising from the soil. Some have sown a winter 
crop with this indigo, which as it affords the young 
plants a shelter in the cold season, may be esteemed 
a good method. Mustard, ripening very early, is 
the most improper for this purpose, because it leaves 
the indigo exposed at the very season in which it re- 
quires shelter. The young plants at this season of 
the year, are often greatly mjured by the treading of 
cattle ; and the crop is seldom so good as that which 
is sown in the proper season. If the season be 
favourable, and the whole crop be sown in March, 


* 


in Dinaspur. 11 


April or May, (for which repeated rain is absolutely 
necessary,) and be weeded before the periodical rains 
set in, an abundant crop may be expected. Indigo 
sown in June seldom repays the labour of ‘the’ hus- 
bandman, the rains, then settmg in, usually injure 
the plant’while young, or produce weeds tn such 
abundance, that it is choked by them, and generally 
perishes. : 

The present method of cultivating indigo is sub- 
ject to many inconveniences, and therefore lable to 
many objections; but as the whole business is con- 
ducted by giving advances of money to the Ryots, 
previously to their sowing the seed, and by receiv- 
ing the produce at a certain numbcr of bundles of a 
given measure for a rupee, and as many’ of them 
scarcely ever intend to fulfil their engagements, the 
application of a remedy ‘would be difficult, especi- 
ally as the devising of it must depend upon expe- 
riments, to the making of which the poverty and 
prejudices ‘of the cultivators would prove an almost 
imvincible obstacle. | 


Corchorus olitorius, Corchorus capsularis, and Cro- 
talaria juncea are sown in April, May, or June. The 
fibres of these plants are much used for cordage, 
and for making sackcloth, and are very valuable 
for these purposes. The A’schynomene cannabina, 
is sometimes, though but seldom, sown in this dis- 
trict, but is more abundantly cultivated in the 
southern parts of Bengal. ‘The fibre of this plant is 
less valuable than that of the Corchorus. ‘There are 
two varieties of the Crotalaria juncea; one, sown 
at this season, often grows ten or twelve feet high ; 
the other variety is sown in October, and rises to the 
height of four or five feet. 


12 REMARKS ON AGRICULTURE 


After the earth is properly ploughed, cleansed, 
and pulverized, the seeds of these plants are sown 
very thickly. The natives say that they should be 
sown so close together that a serpent cannot creep 
between them. ‘This prevents the plants from throw- 
ing out blanches, which would be highly injurious 
to the fibre. 


As the growth of these plants is exremely rapid, 
the crops suffer but little from weeds; if the weeds 
however should be numerous, they must. be extir- 
pated by the hand. 


When the Sana* has done flowering, and the seed 
vessels have nearly attained their full size, sometime 
before the seeds ripen, it is cut down, and tied in 
small bundles, each containing ten or a dozen plants. 
The bundles are then set upright in water (about a 
foot or a foot and a half of the lower part of the stalk 
being immersed) and continue in that situation one 
day; by this means the upper, and comparatively 
tender, part of the stalk is somewhat dried. This oc- 
casions a greater similarity in the quality of the fibre 
taken from different parts of the same plant. 


After the Sana has thus stood erect for one day, 
it is steeped in a pond, or some other receptacle of 
water, to promote the separation of the fibre from 
the stalk. This process is as follows: a number of 
the small bundles abovementioned are laid one upon 
another, so as to form a heap five or six feet wide, 
on each side of which three or four stakes are previ- 
ously set, to prevent its falling down. A quantity of 
cow-dung is then spread over the heap, about two 


* Crotalaria juncea. 


IN DINAJPUR. 93 


or three inches in thickness; upon this a layer of 
straw of about a foot and a half, and over the whole a 
_ quantity of earth sufficient to sink the heap till the 
upper part is five or six inches below the surface of 
the water. In two days and a half, or three days at 
farthest, the putrid fermentation is carried to a suffie 
cient extent. 


The Sana is then taken out, and the fibre stripped 
from the stalk in the following manner. A man 
standing up to his knees in the water, takes a few of 
the stalks, and, having broken them about a foot 
from the lower end, holds them with the large ends 
from him, and strikes them on the surface of the 
water, till the broken pieces are separated and fall 
off. Then turning them, he takes hold of the fibres 
which are freed from the broken pieces, and beats 
the small ends, in the same manner, on the water, 
till the fibre is entirely separated from the stalks; a 
few strokes are sufficient, and by a few more it is 
cleansed from any mucus, or fragments of stalks 
which may adhere toit. Itis then dried and packed 
up for the market. 


The chief thing to be attended to in this process, 
is the proper regulation of the putrid fermentation ; 
if this be not carried to a sufficient extent, the fibre 
will not separate, and if carried too far, the quality 
is injured. The most experienced natives account 
two days and a half a proper medium. The fermen- 
tation is doubtless quickened or retarded by the 
state of the weather, but the difference occasioned 
thereby is so small, that the Bengal farmers entirely 
disregard it. | 


The Crotalaria, cultivated in the neighbourood. of 


14 REMARKS on AGRICULTURE 


Calcutta, and probably that cultivated in all the 
southern parts of Bengal, is accounted much inferior 
to that cultivated in the northern parts of the coun- 
try. The natives attribute this to the difference of” 
soil. This may have some effect, but it is probable 
that the variety cultivated in the south, is inferior 
to that cultivated in the north; as, even there, the 
large variety is preferred to the smaller one. 


Phaseolus Mungo is usually sown in small fields 
about the beginning of June, and generally produces 
a good crop; it will thrive only on high and good 
land. Phaseolus radiatus is sown in July and August, 
on land where another crop has failed, and, not un- 
frequently, on old sward, or on land which could 
not be regularly cultivated. The seed is scattered 
over the land, often without any ploughing at all, 
and at most the plough is only drawn over the sur- 
face so as to make a few slight scratches. This crop 
ripens in October. It is obvious that much produce 
is not to be expected from such a mode of culture. 
The crops are indeed light, but are often sufficient 
to pay the rent of the land. A more rational me- 
thod of cultivation would doubtless be far more 
productive. 3 af 


The low and loamy soils, after’ haviig produced 
a crop of early rice, are usually sown with the seeds 
of some other plant, in October or November.’ The 
mode of culture for all the cold season crops is near- 
ly alike. ‘The natives seldom begin to sow till about 
the full moon in October, supposing ‘that the ‘soil 
possesses 2 pernicious’ quality, which ‘burns up the 
young plants, till the cold season is well set im.  In- 
deed, before that time, the quantity of moisture in 
the soil is too great, and the heat of the season un- 


IN DINAsPuR. 15 


friendly to {these productions; so that though the 
plants will come up, they are yellow and sickly, and 
either soon perish, or continué small, stunted, and 
unproductive. q 

' Mustard seed is sown in great quantities at this 
season. Three kinds are usually cultivated; viz. 
Surshapa,* vulg. Sursha, Raya,f and Sheta Sursha.t 
The first is the most esteemed, though the other two 
kinds are as productive, and perhaps more so. The 
Sinapis dichotoma rises about two or three feet in 
height, flowers in the latter end of November, or the _ 
beginning of December, and is usually ripe in Janu- 
ary. S. ramosa grows sometimes five or six feet high. 
It flowers m the end of December, or in January, and 
ripens in February. . glauca grows two or three 
feet-high, and ripens in February. This kind, having 
a strong and disagreeable smell, is less valued than 
the other sorts. When the crops of mustard are 
ripe, the plants are carefully pulled up by the hand, 
and carried to a place in the field, smoothed and pre- 
pared for the purpose, where it is soon after thrashed 
and winnowed. 


Flax,§ though abundantly cultivated in the cen- 
tral parts of Bengal, for its use in making oil, is 
but little cultivated in this district. The natives 
know nothing of the use of its fibre to make thread. 
The oil-men usually mix the linseed with a quantity 
of mustard seed, to promote the expression of the oil, 
This so injures its quality; that Jndian linseed oil is 
unfit for’painting, or ‘the ‘other useful purposes: to 
which it is applied'in' Europe. "09 oe 
I I IE TR IO tees 


ry Sinapis dichotoma. at Ss. ramosa, A f le S. glauca, 
§ Linum usitatissimum. 


16 REMARKS ON AGRICULTURE 


Many parts of this district are very proper for the 
cultivation of wheat and barley, notwithstanding 
which, very little of either is sown. The kind 
of wheat found in these parts is bad, the flour pro- 
duced therefrom is of a very dark colour, and con- 
sequently finds no market among Europeans. ‘The 
native merchants on this account make no advances 
for it, and this want of a market is the reason alleged 
why it is not cultivated to a greater extent. For 
the purpose of making a trial I sowed Patna wheat, 
on a large quantity of land, in the year 1798; the 
flour produced from which was of a very good quality, 


Several kinds of pulse are sown at the commence- 
ment of the cold season, the principal of which are 
Kesari,* Mashuri,f and Bit.{ The seeds of the first 
of these kinds are sometimes scattered among the 
stubble of the Buna rice, and produce a good crop 
without further trouble, but the most usual way 
is to sow it on land previously well ploughed and 
cleansed, in the same manner as for the other coid 
season crops. 


Tobacco is cultivated to a considerable extent 
on low and loamy land. The seeds are sown on 
a small plat or seed bed, soon after the conclusion 
of the rains, where they are shaded, and watered, 
if necessary, till they are large enough to be trans- 
planted into the field. The land for tobacco must 
be well ploughed, and manured, after which the 
young plants are transplanted in rows, much in the 
manner that cabbages are planted in England, and 
at the same distance. The young plants require con- 
tinual attention, the ground between them must be 
ET A I 


* Lathyrus sativa. + Ervum lens. t Cicer arietinum. 


IN DINAJPUR. tg 


repeatedly loosened, and the earth drawn to the roots, 
till they have acquired a sufficient growth: they are 
then cut and dried for use. 


The egg plant,* and several species of capsicum, 
are planted at the same time, and in exactly the same 
manner, as tobacco. The fruit of the egg plant is 
much used all over Jndia, as an article of food, as is 
the capsicum to give a pungent taste to several Indian 
dishes. I have not observed that these plants are 
planted in this district at any time except the com- 
mencement of the cold season, and there is reason to 
suppose that they would not succeed if they were ; 
though in the southern parts of Bengal, they pros- 
per very well when planted at the commencement of 
the rainy season. Several other plants are cultivated 
as articles of food, some to a greater and others to a 
less extent. The cucurbitaceous plants are often 
sown in the fields, and the advantage of cultivating 
them is considerable. The sorts most cultivated are 
cucumbers of two sorts, the one sown in April and 
yielding fruit through the rainy season, and the 
other sown from November to February, and yield- 
ing fruit till the rainy season sets in. Karaila,ft 
Terbtz,f Didh Kushi,|| Jhinga,§ Taroi,{ Kankrol,** 
Lai,t+ Kaddatt{ and the Konhra, or Pumpkin.{§ 
The three last of these are suffered to run over the 
houses, and sometimes on a bamboo stage, and pro- 
duce fruit sufficient for the expenditure of the cul- 
tivator, besides furnishing a large quantity for the 
markets. 


* Solanum Melougena. + Momordica carantia. 

t Cucurbita citrullus. || Trichosanthes anguina. 
§ Cucumis pentangylus. q Cucumis acutangulus. 
** Momordica mixta. ++ Cucurbita lagenaria. - 
bee 


Cucurbita alba, §§ Cucurbita pepo. 
Cc 


18 REMARKS ON AGRICULTURE 


The sweet potatoe* is planted at different seasons 
in different parts of Bengal, but in this district it is 
planted at the beginning of October. The ground is 
previously ploughed to as great a depth as possible, 
and then cuttings, taken from a small spot reserved 
for that purpose, are planted; these cuttings soon 
take root, and afterwards require no further care, till 
the roots are fit to be taken up, which begins to be 
the case at the end of December, and continues till 
May, during which time the produce is dug up and 
carried to market as it suits the convenience of the 
cultivator. Another variety, of a white colour, 
which has very little sweetness, and a small species 
of yam,f the root of which is about the size of a 
goose’s egg, are cultivated in the more northern parts 
of the district. The cuttings of the plants‘of the 
convolvulus, and the small roots of the yam, are 
planted in April or May, and the produce brought to 
market in October or November. ' 


Three varieties of the Arum esculentum, (Cacha 
of the Hindus,) are usually planted in March or 
‘April. The cultivation of these roots, occupies a 
considerable portion of the soil, and the produce is 
_ as important as potatoes to the people of England. 
The offsets from the root are planted in rows, about 
a foot and a half or two feet asunder, and as the plant 
increases in size, are earthed up as potatoes are in 
Europe. The periodical rains bemg ended, the leaves 
die away; after which, from November to March, 
the roots are taken up, and carried to market, as 
suits the convenience of the cultivator. These roots 
abound with a farinaceous substance, er rather with 


* Convolvulus batatus, + Diescorea. 


IN DINAJPUR. 19 


a viscous, ‘starchy substance, and are esteemed very 
nutritive. The Man Cachié,* and the OLf are cul- 
tivated in small spots. The root of the first of these 
is often two or three feet long, and nine inches ora 
foot in diameter.: It:is necessary to lay this root to 
dry for two months or more, otherwise it is too acrid 
to: be eaten; after this it is very wholesome, though 
not very palatable. As all the sorts. of Caché will 
keep for almost any:length of time, it might be 
worth ‘attention as an article Pe provision for sea 
voyages. : 


In shady situations, iia the soil is-rich and 
loamy, ginger and turmeric flourish. » The offsets are. 
planted at the same time with, and the whole culture 
is exactly the same as that observed for the arum. 
The leaves die off, like those of arum, soon‘after/the 
rains, and the roots are fit to be taken up in January. 
The turmeric is very deficient in colour, andthe gin- 
ger less pungent, if taken up too soon. The farmers 
therefore let it remain in the ground till the leaves 
are entirely dried up.. Ginger is usually sold green, 
and only a small proportion dried for foreign market 
or home consumption. After the roots of the tur. 
meric have been well cleansed: and picked, they are 
boiled over a fire: made with’ the decayed leaves :of 
the plant, (the natives supposing suchva fire to have 
a peculiar kind of virtue,) after which they are well 
dried in the sun, and. reduced to powder by the 
Pedal, or by the wooden mortar and penta In this 
" State they are usually carried to market. ~The: roots 
are sold likewise betore they are pulverized. 


- A, Campanulatum. + Arum macrorhizon. 


30 REMARKS ON AGRICULTURE 


On moderately high spots, where the soil is good, 
the sugar-cane is planted in February and March. 
The spot designed fer sugar-canes is usually surround- 
ed with a ditch, the earth dug from which is heaped 
up round the field, in the manner of a wall, and 
serves to defend it from cattle. After the spot has 
been well ploughed, or dug up with the Kodali, cut- 
tings of ripe canes, consisting of about three joints, 
are planted somewhat slanting, in rows, about two 
feet, or at most three feet distance, and about a foot 
asunder in the rows. The fields must be often wa- 
tered and cleansed from weeds. When the canes are 
about four feet high, they are tied in bunches, about’ 
three or four stalks forming a bunch: this permits 
the air to circulate among them, and facilitates their 
ripening. The canes, when ripe, are cut, and either 
carried to the mill or to the market. 


The cultivation of the plantain is a profitable 
branch of husbandry, requiring but little labour, and 
making a certain return. Spots near to the habita- 
tion are chosen for this purpose, to guard against the 
depredations of thieves. The young plants or suck- 
ers are taken from old plantations, and planted at 
about six or eight feet distance each way. They 
may be planted at any time of the year, but May or 
October is usually chosen. The root is all cut off 
previously to planting, except a small part with a 
few fibres. The ground is ploughed, either before or 
after planting, as it suits the convenience of the far- 
mer; and acrop of some other plant is advantageous- 
ly cultivated on it, the first year. In the second year 
the trees produce fruit, and continue to do so for 
some years; each clump will produce about two 
bunches ina year, It is necessary to plant a new 
field at the end of three or four years ; because, when 


IN DINAJPUR. 91 


the clumps become large, the fruit is small, and the 
bunches contain a smaller number of fruit. 


The Cytisus Cajan is frequently sowed round fields 
of sugar-canes, egg-plant, and other things: this, 
while it makes a slight and well looking fence, is 
also a source of profit to the cultivator. 


At present the poverty, prejudices, and indolence 
of the natives strongly operate. against improve- 
ments in agriculture. Could an adequate remedy be 
found for these evils, many other things might be 
cultivated with great advantage. Hemp would flou- 
rish in many spots; cotton, scarcely cultivated at all 
in the district, might be cultivated to a large extent ; 
if proper methods were taken to introduce the best 
kinds, the culture of wheat and barley might occupy 
many thousands of Bighas, which now lie in an un- 
cultivated state.* The culture of some species of 
Hibiscust would be profitable, and furnish one of the 
most durable fibres for cordage, and, perhaps for 
coarse cloths. 


The cultivation of timber has hitherto, I believe, 
been wholly neglected : several sorts might be plant- 
ed all over this district, and indeed all over Bengal, 
and would soon furnish a very large share of the tim- 
ber used in the country. The Sisd,{ the Andaman 
red-wood,|| the Jaca-tree,{ the Teak, ] the Mahoga- 


* J have not observed that any of the smaller grains, such as Pas- 
palum, Holcus, &c. are cultivated in this district: they would un- 
doubtedly prosper in many situations. _ 

+ Particularly H. cannabinus, H. surattensis, and H. strictus. 

t Dalbergia Sissoo. || Pterocarpus Dalbergius. 

§  Artocarpus integrifolius. — q Tectona grandis. 


C3 


— = 


92 REMARKS ON AGRICULTURE 


ny,*. the Sattin-wood,t the Chakrdsi,t the Tuna,|j 
and the Sirisha,{ should, be principally chosen. 
The planting of these trees single, at the distance of 
a furlong from each other, would do no injury to 
the crops of corn, but would, by cooling the at- 
mosphere, rather be advantageous. In many places, 
spots now unproductive, would be improved by 
clumps or small plantations of timber, under which 
ginger and and turmeric might be cultivated to great 
advantage. | 


In some situations SAl,7 Pitsdl,** Jaral,tf? and 
some other sorts of less note would prosper. 


Indeed the improvements that might be made in - 
this country by the planting of timber, can scarcely 
be calculated. Teak,{t{ that most useful wood, 1s at 
present brought from the Burman dominions, though 
It would grow in any part of Bengal, and perhaps 
in any part of Hindostan. It appears, from the 
annals of the National Museum of Natural History, 
that the French naturalists have begun to turn their 
attention to the culture of this valuable tree, as 
an object of national utility. This will be found im- 
practicable in France, but may perhaps be attempted 


_ somewhere else. To England, the first commercial 


country m the world, its importance must be obvious, 
and the further encouragement |||] of the culture of it 
in this country, will eventually furnish a supply of 
excellent timber for ship building and various other 


* Swietenia Mahogani. +, Swietenia chloroxylon. 
Yt Swietenia Chukrassa. + |puCedrela tana. MH 

§ Mimosa Seereesa. .. {- Shorea robusta. 

** The genus of tree is mot yet deterniined. | , 

++ Lagersticemia flos regine. tt Tectona. grandis. 


Ii] The cultivation of ‘Yeak has been encouraged by Government. 


IN DINAJPUR. 5 (OS 


important purposes, and obviate all apprehensions of 
the failure of the market where it is purchased, or of 
the destruction of the forests which have hitherte 
supplied it. 


Most of the Palms, though useless as timber, de- 
serve the attention of the agriculturist. ‘The Sago- 
tree* would grow in all the high parts, and the 
Date-tree,t planted close, would greatly improve 
many spots now wholly unproductive. ‘The juice of 
this tree is manufactured into sugar, in some parts of 
Bengal, and is highly valuable for that and other 
purposes. It is common to let a tree of this kind for 
two annas a year. Two hundred of these trees 
might be planted on a Bigha, which lets for a rupee 
and a half; this would be productive of a large in- 
come, after the first eight or ten years. 


Few attempts have yet been made to improve or- 
chards. The Mango, and other fruit trees, are often 
planted so close as to choke each other, and but little 
regard is paid by the planter to the quality of the 
fruit. Scarcely any attempt has been made to na- 
turalize foreign fruits; even the Orange tree is al- 
most a stranger to several parts of Bengal, though 
some late experiments prove that it might be intro- 
duced with success. The laudable attempts made 
by several Europeans excepted, the improving of 

_ fruits, by grafting, or by raising improved varieties 
from seed, has scarcely been attempted. In short, 
the fruits of Hindostan are not far removed from a 
state of nature. | 


* Saguerus Rumphii. 
+ Phoenix Silvestris. 


C 4 


94, REMARKS ON AGRICULTURE 


The remedy for these evils is obvious to every one, 
and the application of it would fully reward any per- 
son who would engage heartily in it. 


In this district several obstacles to agriculture pre- 
sent themselves to the farmer. Large numbers of 
wild buffaloes and hogs infest the fields, and make 
it necessary for the farmer to watch his crop, from 
the time it appears above ground, till the harvest is 
gathered in: as this watching is impracticable beyond 
a certain extent, is attended with much danger, and 
often ineffectual, the cultivation carried on by an in- 
dividual must be proportionably limited. 


The inundations which are occasioned by the sud- 
den overflowing of the rivers, frequently destroy the 
crop through a large extent of country, or so much 
injure it, that by this alone, the laborious husbandman 
is often so reduced in his circumstances, as to be un- 
able, or so discouraged as to be afraid, to carry on the 
cultivation of the soil with any degree of spirit. The 
beasts might be destroyed, or their ravages pre- 
vented, in various ways; but it is difficult to provide 
sufficiently againt the effects of inundations. 


Perhaps the encouragement of cold season crops 
would be the best remedy for both: for the long 
grass being destroyed by the cultivation of the low 
lands, the wild animals would find no shelter, and in- 
deed no sustenance, when the crop was off, which 
might occasion them to desert the country, and the 
cold season crop, though often less valuable than a 
crop of rice, might prove a remuneration for the la- 
bours of the cultivator, and by some improvements ~ 


might be brought to such a state as to become a source 
of considerable profit. 


IN DINAJPUR. 25 


Though these remarks relate chiefly to the district 
of Dinajpur, yet it is obvious that many of them will 
equally apply to the other parts of Bengal. 

The improvement of live stock, and introduction of 
dairies, the fencing and manuring of land, the intro- 
duction of wheel carriages, and a number of improve- 
ments of a similar kind, have not been hinted at, be- 
cause the present state of society seems to render 
them to a great degree impracticable. Yet the rapid 
progress of agricultural improvements in England 
encourages the hope, that a gradual improvement may 
also be effected in Hindostan. 


Sa 


REFERENCES TO THE FIGURES. 
PLATE I. 
Fig. 1.—The Plough. 

a. The Langala, or body of the plough. 

b. The Is, or beam. 

c. ‘The Phala, or share. 

d. The share, fixed on the plough. 

e. The handle. | 

J. The Moot, or peg, to assist in holding the plough. 
Fig. 2.—The Jooal, Beng, or Yoke. (Sans. Yuga.) 


20 REMARKS, &c. 


a. ‘Theunder edge, which rests on the neck of the 
bullock. 


b. 6. The elevations on the upper part. 


c.c.c.c. The pins, by which it is fastened to the 
neck of the ox. 


Fig. 3.—The Mai, or harrow. ( hid Los'tbhedhand.) 
Fig. 4.—The int, slung for raising water. 
a. The Jant. | | 
b. The end, ederied to a point. 
c. ¢. c. The bamboo to which it is slung. 


d. The bamboo, loaded at one end, to assist in 
raising the end 6 out of the water. 


e. A man working it. 


f. The reservoir, or channel, into which the water 
is thrown. 


Fig. 5-—The Bharua. 
a. Bank, or yoke. 


b. b. The Shikya or Geta by Sitch the weigye is 
suspended. 


c.c. The receptacles, in which the earth or other 
substance 1 is carried. 


Fig. 6.—The Kodali, or digging-hoe. 
oo) «Fig. 7.—The:Kastya, or sickle.» 


" VolX. Plate 1. 


6 English Feet 


1 


Il. 


An Essay onthe Sacren [sues in the West, with other 
Essays connected with that Work. 


BY CAPTAIN F. WLLFORD. 
ESSAY V. 


Origin and Decline of the Curistian Reiicion im 
INDIA. 


I. IT appears, that long before Curist, a renova- 
tion of the universe was expected all over the world, 
with a Saviour, a King of Peace and Justice. This 
expectation is frequently mentioned in the Puran‘as : 
the Earth is often complaining that she is ready to 
sink back into Patdla under the accumulated load 
of the iniquities of mankind : the Gods also complain 
of the oppression of the Giants. Visunu comforts 
the Earth, his consort, and the Gods, assuring them, 
that a Saviour would come, to redress their griev- 
ances : and put an end to the tyranny of the Daityas, 
or Demons. ‘That, for this purpose, he would be 
incarnated in the house of a shepherd, and brought 
up among shepherds. The followers of Bupp’Ha 


unanimously declare, that his incarnation in the 


womb of a virgin, was foretold several thousand 
years, though some say one, thousand only, before it 
came to pass.* 


__A short time before the birth of Curist, not only 
the Jews, but the Romans, on the authority of the 


* See also As. Res. vol. vi. p. 267. 3 


28 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


Szbylline books, and the decision of the sacred col- 
lege of the Etrurian augurs, were all of opinion, 
that this momentous event was at hand. This was 
equally the case in the east, and a miraculous star di- 
rected the holy men, who were living in anxious ex- 
pectation, where to find this heavenly child. At that 
time the Emperor of Jndia, uneasy at these prophecies, 
which, he conceived, portended his ruin and the 
loss of his empire, sent emissaries to inquire whether 
such a child was really born, in order to destroy 
him: and this happened exactly the 3101st year of 
the Cali-yuga, which was the first year of the Chris- 
tian Era. This traditionary account is known all over 
India ; and is equally current among the learned and 
the ignorant. But the Hindus fancy, that these old 
prophecies were fulfilled in the person of Crisuna. 
What induced the Brahmens to adopt this idea, is 
not so obvious. It is possible, however, that they 
saw plainly, that if they admitted these prophecies 
to have been fulfilled about the time of Curist, 
some material alteration must, of course, have taken 
place in their religion. The Magi of scripture, who 
came from the east, where equally expecting this reno- 
_ vation ; and the star served only to guide their steps. 
This expectation, of a renovation of the world, pre- 
vailed also among the Gothic tribes in the north: but 
after waiting patiently for some time, certain enterpris- 
ing men set themselves up, for the promised Manv,, 
or new Apam; and were acknowledged as such. 
According to their traditionary accounts, they were 
nettled, and puzzled with some strange reports from 
the east, about the appearance of some 4sir, Asa, 
Gods, or god-like men; and GyLFzE is supposed to have 
been sent to inquire into the truth of these reports. 
His embassy is the ground work of the £dda, which 
concludes with these remarkable words. “The new 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 29 


Ase then took to themselves the names of the an- 
cient ones: and gave themselves to be the real Ase, 
or Geds.” Opin was one of them, and advancing 
towards the north, Gyre surrendered his kingdom 
tohim. In consequence of these notions of a change 
in this sublunary world, a new system of religion in 
Britain, was set up in opposition to the old one, ac- 
cording to the ingenious Mr. CLeLanp: and this, he 
thinks, must have happened some time B. C. but, I 
think it happened later; for Heweisr and Horsa 
were in the tenth degree of lineal descent from this 
new Opin; who, of course, was contemporary with 
Trenmor, who was deified by Fin-Gat his great 
grandson, who appointed him an Elysium,. from 
which the sons of the feeble were excluded, and 
priests also, I believe. That Fixcarand his followers 
held in contempt the old religion, is obvious from the 
ancient Galic Poems. Probably the defeat of the 
druids in Anglesea, for so we may call it in spite of 
their spells, and holy texts churned from their sacred 
Vedas, accelerated their ruin, and that of their reh- 
gion: this, with some obscure prophecies, foretelling 
that a total change in civil and religious matters, 
was going to take place, induced many clever and 
enterprising persons to avail themselves of all these 
circumstances; and to give out, either, that they 
were this expected divine being, or to deify their 
own ancestors. Frneat succeeded most completely : 
for, till very lately, many of the Irish, among the 
poorer class, believed, that the souls of the departed 


went into the Elysium of Trenmor and Mac 


Cowat, according to the industrious inquirer J. 
Goop, who lived above 200 years ago: and, if the 
Christian religion had not prevailed soon after, 
Trenmor would have been considered, in time, 
as the supreme being. In the same manner, the 


30 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


Emperor Avucustus was of course consecrated ‘a 
God, after his death; and, both before and after, 
temples were erected in his honour, and saerifices: 
offered to him. The courtiers of Antony, acting up- 
on the same principles, declared; that he was Osrris 
redivivus, born again, and that Creoparra was Isrs. 
Virert adds, that the renovation: of the world, so 
long foretold, was going to take place;'and begin with 
the golden age as usual: then the Argonauts, in due 
time, with the 4rgo, would teappear: and that there 
would be another Typuts, a Trojan war again, in 
which AcniLies would signalize himself. ; 


The Hindu traditions, concerning this wonderful 
child, are collected in a treatise called the Vicrama- 
charitra, or history of Vicrama‘pitya. This I have 
not been able to procure, though many learned Pan- 
dits have repeated to me, by heart, whole pages from 
them. Yet I was unwilling to make use of these 
traditions, till I found them in the large extracts 
made by the ingenious and indefatigable Major C. 
Mackenzie of the Madras establishment, and by 
him communicated to the Asiatick Society. 

When I mentioned «the Sidylline verses, I by no 
means intended the spurious ones, which are deserv- 
edly rejected by the learned: but the genuine ones, 
such as they existed in the time of Vrreri; whose 
testimony is unquestionable, and incontrovertible. 
-Whether these prophecies were really written by in- 
spired women, is not now the question: they were 
certainly current all over the west, and this is enough 
for my purpose. ‘There were several of them, and the 
most ancient were from the east. There was a Per-. 
sian, a Chaldean, an Egyptian, and also, according to 

Pausanras and Exran, a Judaia, or Jewish Sibyl from 


) 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION “IN INDIA. 3) 


Palestine. ‘Such women probably never existed: but 
the prophetical verses, that were attributed to them, 
were extracted from the sacred records of their re- 
spective countries. The fourth eclogue of VirGrr is 
entirely on the subject of this long expected renova- 
tion of the world. 


The last great age, foretold by sacred rhymes, 


In the original it is, foretold by the Cum@an 
SIBYL. | 


Renews its finished course ; Saturnian times 

Roll round again, and mighty years, begun 

From their first orb, in radiant circles run. 

The base degenerate iron offspring, (or the Cali-yuga) ends, 
A golden progeny (of the Créta, or golden age) from heaven descends: 
O chaste LuciNA,, speed the mother’s pains: 
And haste the glorious birth ; thy own APOLLO reigns ! 

The lovely boy, with his auspicious face ! 

The son shall lead the life of gods, and be 

By gods and heroes seen, and gods and heroes see. 

Another Ty PHIs shall new seas explore, 

Another Argo land the chiefs upon the Iberian shore : 

Another HELEN other wars create, 

And great ACHILLES urge the Trojan fate. 

O of celestial seed! O foster son of Jove! 

See, labouring nature calls thee to sustain - 

The nodding frame of heaven, and earth, and main : 

See to their base restored, earth, seas and air. 


These are the very words of Visunv to the Earth, 
when complaining to him and begging for redress. 


It is obvious, that Virert considered the moment- 
ous events of the Trojan war, the expedition of Jason 
in the Argo, and the rape of Heten or Lacsumt, 
as the necessary concomitants of a renovation of 
the world. The Cali-yuga, according to Virett, 
ended a little before Curist, of whom he had no 


$2 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


knowledge: and according to Hesrtop, and the 
Jainas in India, the Cali-yuga began about 1000 years 
B. C. and lasted, of course, the same number of 
years, which were natural ones in the west, but are 
considered as divine years in Dndia. 


About 60 years before the birth of Currst, the 
capital of the Roman Empire was alarmed by pro- 
digies, and -also by ancient prophecies, announc- 
ing, that an emanation of the deity was to be born 
about that time, and that a renovation of the world 
was to take place. In the year of Rome 690 and 
63 B. C. the Senate, having been convened on the 
ninth day before the calends of October, or the 
23d of September, in order to prepare against im- 
minent dangers threatening the Empire, the whole 
city was alarmed by new causes of anxiety. P. Nicer. 
Ficutus, the intimate friend of Cicero, who was 
then, consul, having heard C. Ocravius apologising 
to the Senate for his coming so late, on account of 
his wife having been just brought to bed, exclaimed, 
you have then begot a lord and master unto us. This 
Ficu us wasin such estimation at Rome, that he was 
reckoned among the most learned men: and such was 
his superior knowledge of the mathematics, and other 
sciences grounded upon them, that he was believed 
to deal in the occult sciences. That exclamation of 
his threw so much more terror into the minds of the 
Conscript Fathers, as for a few months before, it was 
constantly reported, that nature was bringing forth a 
king unto the world, and it was said, that the same 
was asserted in the Szdylline verses. Besides, oracles to 
that purport were constantly brought in from the most 
distant parts of the world. On this account, and more 
particularly on account of a prodigy that had just 
happened at Rome, the Senate terrified, issued a 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 3s 


decree, that no father, during the course of that year, 
should presume to lift up from the ground, or bring 
up a new-born male child. However, those among 
the Conscript Fathers, whose wives were with child, 
had the decree suppressed: and these prophecies and 
prodigies were afterwards applied to Aucusrus, who 
was born during the consulate of M. Turtius Cr- 
CERO*, sixty-three years before Curist; but fifty- 
six according to several writers in the east, such as 
the author of the Lebtarikh and others. Hence it is, 
that Nicoto pe Conti, who was in Bengal, and 
other parts of Jrdia in the fifteenth century, insists 
that Vicrama’pITYA was the same with Aucustus, 
and that his period was reckoned from the birth of 
that Emperor, fifty-six years B.C. 


In the year 119 B.C. in the time of Martvs, such 
direful prodigies appeared, that the sacred college 
of Heteuria, ou being consulted, declared that the 
eighth revolution of the world was at an end: and 
that another, either for the better, or the worse, was 
going to take placet: and Juvenat, who lived in 
the first century, declares that he lived in this ninth 
revolution, which was then going on{: for the 
Etruscans reckoned twelve of these revolutions, 
each of one thousand years, according to some: but 
according to others, these twelve revolutions consti- 
tuted what they called the great year. 


It may be asked, what prophecies are to be found 
in the Purdn‘as concerning this Saviour and avenger. 
I observed before, that the Hindus would have it, 


* See Supplement to T1T. Liv. cii. Decad. c. 39. 
+ PLUTARCH in SYLLAM, p. 456. 
} JUVENAL, Satyr, xiii, v.28. 


34 ORIGIN 'AND DECLINE OF THE 


that these prophecies were fulfilled long before, in: 
the person of Cxisuna. In this, they were wiser’ 
than the Jews, who, by insisting that the Messran is 
not yet come, have plunged themselves into inextri- 
cable difficulties, and have been forced, at last, to 
give up any further inquiry into the time of his ap- 
pearance. In this manner, many of the Samaritans, 
m order to elude the prophecies concerning Curist,) 
msist that they were fulfilled in the person of 
Josuua, whose name is the same with Jesus, and 
who, according to the Hebrew text, was contempo- 
rary with Crisnna; and they have also a book of: 
the wars of JosHua with Scausec*, which may be 
ealled their Mana-Bua’RAT. 


When I said, that the Hindus conceived, that the 
prophecies concerning a Saviour of the world, were 
fulfilled in the person of Carisuna, I do by no means 
wish to convey an idea, that he was Curist, from 
- whom he is as distinct a character, and person, as 
Josuua; and whose name, with the general outline 
of his history, existed long before Curisr. “ Yet 
the prolix accounts of his life,” to use the words of 
Sir W. Jones, “are filled with narratives of a most 
extraordinary kind, and most strangely variegated. 
This ‘incarnate deity of Sanscrit romance, was not 
only cradled, but educated among shepherds ; a ty- 
rant at the time of his birth, ordered all the male 
infants to be slain. He performed amazing, but ridi- 
culous miracles, and saved multitudes, partly by his 
miraculous powers, and partly by his arms: and 
raised the dead, by descending for that purpose into 
the infernal regions. He was the meekest and best 
tempered of beings, washed the feet of the Brahmens, 


" 


* Reland de Samarit, p. 15, &c. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 35 


and preached, indeed sublimely, but always in their 
favour. He was pure and chaste in reality, but exhi- 
bited evety appearance of libertinism; lastly, he was 
benevolent and tender, and yet fomented and con- 
ducted a terrible war.” The Vadus, his own tribe,. 
and nation, were doomed to destruction for their sins, 
like the descendants of Yauupa or Yuna, which is 
the true pronunciation of Jupa. They all fell, in ge- 
neral, by mutual wounds, a few excepted, who lead 
through Jambu-dwipa a miserable and wretched life. 
There are some to be found in Gurjarat’: but they 
are represented to me as poor and wretched. ‘“ This 
motley story must induce an opinion,* that the spu- 
rious gospels, which abounded in the first ages of 
christianity, had been brought to India, and the 
wildest parts of them ingrafted upon the old fable of. 
Crisuna.” Several learned missionaries are also of 
that opinion, though they carry the comparison too 
far. The real name of CrisHna was Caneya, and 
he was sur-named Crisuna, or the black, on account 
of his complexion. 


The Hindus, having once fixed the accomplish- 
ment of these prophecies to a period greatly anterior 
to the Christian Era, every thing in their books was 
either framed, or new modelled accordingly; and 
particularly in the Puranas, every one of which is 
greatly posterior to our era: though many legends, 
and the materials in general, certainly existed before, 
in some other shape. Yet, as inconsistency and con- 
tradiction are the concomitants of falshood and de- 
ceit, it may be supposed, that some circumstances 
and particulars, tending to remove the veil they have 
attempted to throw over these events, may have 


v4 is. Res. vol. 1. p. 2, 3. 
De 


36 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


escaped them. This is very probable; but as I 
never had the most distant idea of ever investigating 
this subject, till very lately, I may probably have 
overlooked many passages of this nature; and I re- 
collect now only two material ones, which I men- 
tioned before. These prophecies, in the Puranas, 
concerning this Saviour, declare, that he was to ap- 
pear in the latter end of the third, and in the begin- 
ning of the fourth age: which can, by no means, be 
reconciled to the Christian Era, according to their 
mode of reckoning. The two passages, alluded to, 
are to be found in the Padma and Gam'es‘a-puramas. 
In the first, Batt, an antediluvian, and in the fifth 
generation from the creation, is introduced request- 
ing the God of Gods, or Visunu, to allow him to 
die by his hand, that he might go into his paradise 
in the White Island. Visunvu told him, it was a 
favor not easily obtained ; that he would, however, 
grant his request: but, says VisHNu, you cannot 
come into my paradise now; but you must wait, till 
I become incarnate in the shape of a boar, in order 
to make the world undergo a total renovation, to 
establish, and secure it upon a most firm and perma- 
nent footing: aud you must wait a whole Yuga, till . 
this takes place, and then you will accompany me 
inte my paradise. A whole Yuga, or Maha-yuga, 
consists of 4,320,000 divine, or more probably 4,320 
natural years.* “These, reckoned from the fifth ante- 
diluvian generation, will fall in, very nearly, with 
the beginning of the Christian Era, according to the 
Septuagint, and Josepuus’s computation, As to the 


* These are a component part of the great year, or period of 
12,000 years, used both in the east, and in the west, and also in 
Persia. In India they say that these are divine years; but in 
Etruria and Persia, they insisted, that these were only natural 
years. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 37 


number of years, they are written 5,000 in round 
numbers in the Gares‘a-purdnia; and, as these 5,000 
-years are not said to be divine ones, we have a right 
to suppose, that they were meant originally for na- 
tural years. Gawe’s‘a, who is identified with Visunu, 
and has also an inferior paradise in the White Island, 
and another in the Euvine or Icshu Sea, thus says to 
a King of Cast or Benares, an_antediluvian, and 
who, like Baxi, wished much to be admitted into 
his elysium: ‘“ you cannot now enter my paradise in 
the White Island ; you must wait 5,000 years,” when, 
it seems, it was to be opened. “ But in the mean 
time, you may reside in my other paradise in the 
Euvine Sea.” In the same manner ACHILLES, with 
Castor and Potiux, and. I believe Capmus, :PE- 
LEus, &c. after residing a long time in the /Vhite 
Island in the Icshu Sea, were ultimately translated 
into the the original White Island in the White Sea. 


The White Island in the Eucine or Icshu Sea, has 
much affinity with the Limbus Patrum, or paradise 
of departed ancestors, who waited there for the 
coming of Curist, who was to opem the celestial, 
and real paradise, for their reception. 


Divines in India declare, that the surest proof of 
the divine mission of an dvatdra is his coming being 
foretold: that prophecies concerning a Saviour. are 
often repeated in them, some very plain, and others 
rather obscure: that they are, in short, one of the 
fundamental supports of their religion and creed. 
That Crisuwa is considered as the first, in dignity and 
principal incarnation; and that the others are greatly 
inferior to this, and merely introduced to bring on 
the grand system of regeneration. In his time, the 
divine oracles were committed to writing, with a 

Dis 


/ 


Be.) ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


more complete and perfect system of moral duties, 
and religious worship: and a race of Bra’hmens more 
pure, more enlightened, was introduced into Jndia. 
Crisuna is the last Avatava; or manifestation of the 
deity, but one; which, according to) their sacred 
books and ours, will appear a little before the general 
dissolution of the world. 


But let us return to ol manifestation of VisHnu 

in the:shape of a Boar, mentioned in the former 
passage. ‘This manifestation is acknowledged to be 
that of the white Boar: for according to the Tapi- 
Chand'a, a section of the Scanda-purdna, the Calpa of 
ithe Boar cousists:of four inferior ones, denominated 
-from four. manifestations of the great Boar. ‘The 
efirst subordinate Calpa is that of the Curma-Varéha, 
for Tortoise-boar, this is the Curma-Avatara: the se- 
cond was that of Adi-Varaha, called Adi-ndtha also, 
particularly by the Jainas: this is the Varaha Ava- 
-téra: the third is, that of Vardha, with \the title of 
Crisun a: and the fourth, and present, Calpa, is that 
of the Vhite Boar, and- which is very little noticed 
in the Puranas. In the P) abhasa-chand‘a,, a section 
of the Scand'a-purana also, these four Calpas have 
different names; and to them three more are added, 
“making in all seven Calpas: and we are now in the 
seventh. ‘These are the Calpas of Visunu, under 
the seven different denominations of S’Riya-vRATTA, 
-Wamana contemporary with Bat, Vasra‘NGs, 
CaMALA-PRABHU (Camuxtus Deus), Swanarta, 
Purvusuotrama, and the seventh, Dairya-SuDAna. 
‘In the fourth Calpa of CAMALA-PRA BHU, ‘and which 
is called also the Calpa of Vara‘na, says the author, 
was born Jcsuwa‘cu the son of Noan, in the Tréta’ 
or second age: and the four last Calpas answer to _ 
the four Calpas of the Boar, the last of which is that 


a 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 39 


of Daitya-Supana, thus called from Vishnu com- 
pletely overthrowing the empire of the Daityas or 
Demons. These four Calpas are obviously to be 
reckoned from the flood. The Calpa of Purusuor- 
TAMA, answers to that of Crisona; whose birth was 
followed by a general massacre of all the male. chil- 
dren, through the whole country, by Cawnsa, in 
order to destroy him. But let us return to this won- 
derful child, who was to manifest himseif to the 
world, when 3100 years of the Cali-yuga were elapsed, 
that is to say in the 3101, answering to the first year 
of the Christian Era, according to the Cumdarica- 
chand’a, and the Vicrama-charitra. According to 
the same respectable authority, the purpose of his 
mission, was to remove from the world wretchedness 
and misery: and his name was to be ‘Saca, or 
the mighty and glorious King. 


‘Sa‘Liva’HaNA was the son. of a Tacshaca, or car- 
penter; and was born, and brought up in the house 
of a potmaker, God is called Deva-Tasut’a,, or 
God the artist. or creator, in Sanscrit ;\ and also 
Deva-Tasut‘a’, from which is derived Dreo-Tat or 
Tevurart in the west, called Twasur‘a’ or Tutsto by 
the German tribes. He produced Mannus, man, 
the first Manu, who had three sons. | In Greece, ac- 
cording to Pinpar, God the father of mankind, and 
creator of the world, was called warie Apssoréyyns, ' the 
father and best artist. ‘This carpenter, the father of 
‘SA‘LIVA HANA was not a mere mortal, he was, the 
chief of the Zacshacas, a serpentine tribe, famous in 
the Purdnas. There, they are declared to be the 
most expert artists and mechanics in the world;, and 
they are by no means confined to a few trades; but 
their skill embraces every branch. When the ele- 
phant Arravara, with Be immense retinue in the 
Sides 4 


40 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


same shape, came, in his way to the plains of Utara- 
Curu or Siberia, to worship at Prabhasa in Gurjardat, 
they planned and executed a road for him through 
the N. W.* quarter of Jndia, which is said still to 
exist. The Zacshacas, or Tachas, have, as usual, two 
countenances, that of serpents, and a human one, 
which they assume at pleasure. 


The chief of them is obviously the same with the 
Serpent AcaTno-Damon, the Demi-urgos, Opifex, 
and artist of the Egyptians, Greeks, Gnostics, Basili- 
dians, &c. These sectaries asserted, that the serpent 
was the father, and author of all arts and sciences: 
and this serpent, they said, was the Christ, who waé 
thus the son of a carpenter and artist; and at the 
Same time an incarnation of the great serpent, ex- 
actly like ‘Sa’tiva’nana, the ‘Saca, or mighty and 
glorious King. ‘Sa’ttva’HANA was the son, or rather 
an incarnation of the great serpent; and his mother 
was also of that tribe, and incarnate in the house of 
a pot-maker. She conceived at the age of one year 
and a half, the great serpent gently gliding over her, 
whilst she was asleep in her cradle. 


The heresy of the Ophites spread widely at a very 
early period: they extolled the serpent, as the author 

of the science of good and evil. Such was, they 
_ Said, the majesty and the power of the brass serpent, 
exposed upon a stake in the desert, that whatever 
man looked up to him was immediately cured. In 
the same manner that the serpent had been exalted 
upon a stake in the desert, for the good of the 
people, so it was necessary that Curist should be 
exalted also, upon a stake or cross, for the good of 
a a 

* Cuméricd-c’handa, p. 156. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 41 


mankind ; and, in a scriptural sense, this serpent was 
the type of the Saviour of the world. 


The pot-maker used to make figures of .clay of all 
sorts, to amuse his grandson, who soon learned to 
imitate them; but he endued them with life. His 
mother carried him one day to a place full of ser- 
pents, telling him “go and play with them; they 
are your relations :” the child went and played with 
them, without fear, and without receiving the least 
injury. These two particulars are never omitted by 
the narrators. 


About that time Vicrama’pitya, the Emperor of 
India, was made very uneasy, by general rumours, 
that the old prophecies were accomplished in the 
person of a child born of a virgin, and who would 
conquer /ndia, and all the world. He sent emissaries 
every where to inquire into the truth of this extraor- 
dinary event, and find out this heaven-born child, 
They soon returned, and informed him, that it was 
but too true, and that the child was then in his fifth 
year. VickAma’DITyA immediately raised a large 
army in order to destroy the child, and his adherents, 
in case he should have any. He advanced with all 
possible speed, and found the child surrounded with 
-inumerable figures of soldiers, horses, and elephants. 
‘These the child endued with life, and attacked Vi 
CRAMA‘DITYA, who was defeated, and left on the 
field of battle, mortally wounded by the hand of 
young ‘SaLiva’Hana.* The dying monarch onl 
begged of his conqueror, that he would allow his 
own period to be equally current all over India 
with his. This the child granted, and then cut off 


* See Asiat. Research. Vol. IX. p. 118, 120. 


42 . ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


his head, which he flung into the middle of the 
city of Upayini, though at an immense distance. 
In the mean time Vicrama’pitya’s army fell back 
toward Ujjayinit, pursued by ‘Sa‘trva‘Hana’s forces, 
and in their way crossed the Narmada. There. the 
army of Sa’Liva’HANA, consisting of soldier's of mere 
clay, was suddenly dissolved, and disappeared in the 
waters of the river. After this, we hear no more of 
Sa‘LivAHANA, except that he disappeared in the 
79th year of the Christian Era, which is the first, of 
his period. His name is not even mentioned in the 
lists, either of the Emperors of Jndia, or of the Kings 
of Ujjain. Immediately after the death of Vicra- 
MA’DITYA, his wife was delivered of a son, whom 
they wanted to crown Emperor of India, in the same 
manner as if ‘Sa‘L1va’HANA had never existed: but; 
being a posthumous child, he could not succeed to 
the empire; he was, however, perfectly eligible to 
the throne of the kingdom of A/dlava ; and was of 
course immediately crowned at Ujjain. 


This tock place, according to the Cumdaricax 
chand'a, in the first year of the Christian Era, 
when ‘Sa’Liva‘HANa was in his-fifth year; and it is 
remarkable, that our Saviour was equally in his fifth 
year at that time. The principal circumstances of 
this legend are taken from the Apocryphal Gospel of 
the infancy of Jesus, written in Greek in the third 
century ; of which an Arabic translation, made ata 
very early period, is still extant. Henry SyKe has 
given a translation of it in Latim, with some frag- 
ments still remaining of the Greek original. In 
these fragments it is declared, that the infant JEsus, 
when five years of age, amused himself with making 
figures of clay, which he endued with life. This 
idle story is mentioned also in the Koran, and is well 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 43 


known to M/uselmans. This remarkable coincidence 
of historical facts, legendary tales, and also of times, 
im my humble opinion, cannot be merely accidental. 


Those, who acknowledge, that-there are four Vi- 
.CRAMAS, always consider Sa’LivaA’HANA as one of 
them, and assert that he had of course a famous 
bard at his court called Caripa’sa. Thus, when‘cal- 
Jed Vicrama’pitya, he always- appears alone as 
King of Pratish'tana, and as such he is represented 
in the appendix to the Agni-purana. ‘This is the fa- 
‘mous King of Pratish’ téna, with the title of "T'r1-Vi- 
CRAMA, or with the triple energy, as we have seen 
hefore: but his real name was V1-Sama-SILa, or 
simply Sama-Siza. As Pratishtdna is acknowledged 
to belong exclusively to Sa’tiva’HaNna, as Ujjayint 
does to Vicrama DiTya, whatever King, called Vr1- 
CRAMA, or ViICRAMA'DITYA, 1S represented as sove- 
reign of Pratishtana, the same is Sa’Liva‘HANA: 
and, when we find a Vicrama'DITYA said to have 
lived or reigned eighty-four years, him we must con- 
clude to be Sativa’HANA, according to the learned 
Paniits, and astronomers, who gave me this informa- 
tion. 


There was a King at that time called VicraMaAmt- 
TRA, the seventeenth from Cuanpracupta, accord- 
ing to the Bhégavat; Brahmén'da, Vayu and Vishnu- 
Purdnas ;* and VicrRaMAMITRA or VICRAMITRA, 
as it is erroneously spelt, is synonymous with Vicra~ 
MA DITYA or Vicram ARCA; and that VicraMaAMI- 
TRA was intended for Vicrama’Ditya, by.the com- 
pilers of the Purdn‘as, admits of no doubt, for they 
say, that his father was GuosHa-RaJa, who was the 
same with GANDHARUPA, as we have seen before. 


* Sections on Futurity. 


44 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


Sa/LIVA’HANA is considered under three different 
points of view, according to the three different objects 
and purposes of his mission; and accordingly he is 
said to be either an incarnation of BrauMA, of Siva, 
or of VisHnu. He is sometimes considered as con- 
jointly possessing these three powers, and he is then 
said to be Tri-VicraMa. 


When the object of his mission is declared té be 
to destroy the kingdom, and power, of the Daityas 
or demons, he is then said to. be an incarnation of 
‘Siva; as in the legends of Sama ‘Sina King of 
Pratish tana. | 


In consequence of this destruction, a regeneration 
takes place, as attested in the legends of the good Man- 
DAVYEH called Sutasrua, or he who was crucified. 
Sa‘Liva’HaNwa is then said to be an incarnation of 
Brauma’: and this is the general opinion of thein habi- 
tants of the Dekhin, according to A. Rocrr, and 
others. . 

} | | 

But, when considered independently of these two 
energies, meek and benevolent, doing good to all man- 
kind, he is then Visunu, and this is the opinion of the 
‘Sa’Liva'Nsas in the provinces of Benares and Oude. 


Thus we see, that ‘Sa’t1va‘Hawa goes through the 
Tkimurtt1; and when these three energies are 
considered as united in him, he is then V1-Sama- 
Siza-Trt Vicrama King of Pratish'tdna, called also 
Saileyadhdra, or simply ‘Saileyam, in a derivative 
form. T 

Prarvisn'ra’wa is the usual Sunscrit expression for 
any consecrated place or spot, and it implies here, the 
holy and consecrated city, and is.synonimous with the 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 45 
Bet-ai-Kaddes, and Bet-al-Mokaddes of the Mussel- 


MANS. 


‘SatLeya-D’na’r'a’ another name for it, is men- 
tioned in the beginning of the Jyotirvidabharana an 
astronomical treatise, in which the author, giving an 
account of the six ‘Sacas, says that ‘Sa’Liva/HANA 
would appear at ‘Saileya-@hara, or the city firmly 
seated upon a rock, which compound alludes to the 
city of Sion, whose foundations are upon the hol 
hills, “ the city of our God, even upon his holy hill.” 
‘Saileyam would be a very appropriate name, for it is 
also, in a derivative form from ‘Saz/a, and is really the 
same with ‘Saileya-dhard: and the whole is not im- 
probably borrowed from the Arabic Dar-al-Salam, or 
Dar-es-Salem, the house of peace, and the name of 
the celestial Jerusalem, in allusion to the Hebrew 
name of the terrestrial one. The Sanscrit names 
of this city of the King of ‘Saileyam, or ‘Salem imply 
its being a most holy place, and consecrated apart, 
and that it is firmly seated upon a stony hill. 


I mentioned, in the preceding essay, that ‘Sa‘z1- 
VA‘HANA was also called SaMuDRA-PA‘LA, that is 
to say, fostered by, or the son of, the ocean. This 
implies, that either he, or his disciples, came by sea; 
and this notion has a strong resemblance with a pas- 
sage from the second book of Hsdras, in which Curist 
is represented, as ascending from the sea, firmly seat- 
ed upon a rock, This christian romance is of great 
antiquity, for it is mentioned by Irenazus, CLemENs 
of Alexandria and TerRTULLIAN, who considered it as 
a book of some antiquity, and almost canonical. 


Att these sacred, and most expressive epithets, 
the Hindus have applied to an ancient city in India 


4G ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF. THE 


now called Pattana, on the banks of the Godaveri: 
but with what propriety, will appear: hereafter.. Be 
this as it may, whether in Jvdia or out of it, there 
at ‘Satleyam, Sativa’HANA’ was to be born, of a 
virgin, one year and a half old: his father was to be 
the great Zacshaca or carpenter, and himself was to 
live in the humble cottage of a pot-maker. This le- 
gend is somewhat differently told by others, as we 
have seen in our account of Vicrama’piTya. His 
mother was a married woman; but her husband, a 
Brdahmen, died, whilst she was still very young. She 
conceived by the great Tacshaca, carpenter or artist, 
and when her pregnancy became obvi ious, her two 
brothers, ashamed of her seemingly unwarrantable 
behaviour, left Pratish'tana, and the unfortunate 
young woman, thus unprotected, found an asylum in 
the humble cottage of a pot-maker: and, in the Vi- 
CRAMA-CHARITRA, sheis said to be his daughter: whilst 
according to deo eicr legend, ‘Siva was incarnated in ~ 
the womb of the wife of King Sura-MauEnpDRA’‘DI- 
Tya-BHuU-PATI, and there was born, under the name 
of Sama-Sizta-Tri-Vicrama, or with the triple 
energy. 


It is declared in the VrcraMA-cHARITRA, that the 
birth of -this divine child, from a virgin, had been 
_ foretold one thousand years before it happened, nay 
some say two thousand. That a Saviour was ex- 
pected with a regeneration of the universe, all over 
the’ more civilised parts of world, in consequence 
of certain old prophecies, cannot be denied, at least 
in my humble opinion. It was firmly believed - in 
the west: it was so in the east; and in the inter- 
mediate countries among the Hebrews, it was a fun- 
damental tenet of their religion. Whether this notion 
was borrowed from the Jews or not, is immaterial to 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 47 


the present subject. It is by no means necessary to 
have recourse to this expedient, in order to account 
for this once prevailing opinion, and I am rather in- 
clined to think, that this was not the case. . 


The time of his birth is thus ascertained from 
the Cumdrica-chan‘da, a section of the Scanda-puradna,* 
in which we read, Yatah trishu sahasréshu s‘até cha- 
pyadhicéshu cha; ‘Saca nama bhavishyas'cha yotida- 
ridra haraca. ‘“ When three thousand and one hun- 
dred years of the Cali-yuga are elapsed, then ‘Saca. 
will appear and remove wretchedness and misery 
from the world.” But it is necessary to observe here, 
that this is the first year of his reign, and that it has 
nothing to do with the first of his era. In the same 
manner, the author of that section says, that the 
first year of Vicrama‘DITya’s reign answered to 
the 3021 of the Cali-yuga, which date is equally un- 
connected with the first year of his era. In the ap- 
pendix to the Agni-purana, we find that ‘Sa’tiva- 
HANA began his reign 312 years after the death 
of Cua‘n’acya, and CHANDRAGUPTA, which places 
it also in the first year of our era. It is remarkable 
however, that in the appendix to the dgni-puran‘a, 
and the copy from it in the dyim-Acberi, the years 
are computed, or reckoned, from the first of ‘SA’tI- 
VA/HANA’S reign, answering to the first of Curist, 
but not from the first of the former’s era. 


‘Sa/LivA HANA died in the year of our era 79, and 
he lived eighty-four years. According to the Vi- 
CRAMA-CHARITRA, he was in the fifth year of his 
age, when he manifested himself to the world, and 


Dee whine 


eer aR a EP A ATEN 


* Paragraph 42. 


45 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


defeated Vicrama’pITyA. This places his manifes~ 
tation in the first of the Christian Era, when Curis? 
was also in his fifth year and in the latter end of it, for 
he was really born four years before the beginning 
of uur era. ; 


This places, also, the accomplishment of the old 
prophecies, VicraMma’piTya’s inquiries after this 
divine. child, born of a virgin, exactly in the first 
year of our era. For. a thousand years before that 
event, the goddess Cari had foretold him, that 
he would reign, or rather his posterity, according to 
several learned commentators in the Dekhin, as men- 
tioned by Major Mackewztg, tilla divine child, born 
of a virgin, should put an end, both to his life and 
kingdom, or to his dynasty, nearly in the same words 
of Jacos* foretelling to Jupau, that the sceptre 
should not depart from him, or his Dynasty, until 
SHILOH came, SA LIVA’HANA or King Sa’La. 


As to his character, it is declared in the Cumdricda- 
chan‘da, as we have seen before, that he would come 
for the purpose of removing wretchedness, and mi- 
sery, from the world. 


In the appendix to the Agni-purdna, it is declar- 
ed that in the holy and consecrated city of Pratish’- 
téna, firmly seated upon a rock, called Saileya-dhard 
or ‘Saileyam, through the mercy of ‘Srv, would appear 
Sa’Liva‘HANA, great and mighty, the spirit of righ- 
teousness. and justice, whose words would be truth it- 
self, free from spite and envy, and whose empire would 


extend all over the world (or in other words, that the 
OR 


* Genesis, chap. 49, v. 10, 


———e=— = rl 
“~~ . ’ 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. _ 49 


people would be gathered unto him) the conveyor 
of souls to places of eternal bliss. On account of 
this benevolent disposition, he is compared in the 
Vansavali to DHANANJAYA or ARssUNA, Whose 
character is so well delineated in the inscription on a 
pillar at Buddal. He did not exult over the ignorant 
and ill favoured: he neither vainly accepted adula- 
tion, nor uttered honey words, and was the wonder of 
all good men. His wonderful equanimity on all oc- 
casions, and with regard to every one, of whatever 
rank in life, and whatever might be their natural fa- 
culties, and mental dispositions, are implied by the 
epithet of Vi-Sama-Sixa bestowed upon him. 


His conception was miraculous, and in the womb 
of a virgin: he was the son of the great artist, and 
the virtue of his mother was at first suspected: but 
choirs of angels came down to worship her. His 
birth was equaily wonderful: choirs of angels with 
the celestial minstrelsy attended on the occasion, 
showers of flowers fell from on high. The King of 
the country, hearing of these prodigies, was alarmed, 
and sought in vain to destroy him. He is made ab- 
solute master of the three worlds, heaven, earth and 
hell: good and bad spirits acknowledge him for 
their lord and master. He used to play with snakes, 
and tread upon the adder, without receiving the 
least injury from them : he soon surpassed his teachers; 
and, when five years of years of age, he stood before a 
most respectable assembly of the doctors of the land, 
and explained several difficult cases, to their admira- 
tion, and utmost astonishment; and his words were 
like ambrosia. 


In the copies of the Vansavali, current through 


50 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


the western parts of India, he is constantly called Sa- 
MUDRA-PA LA; because either he, or some of his dis- 
ciples, came by sea; and he is of course the same 
with the Mléchhavatara, or incarnation of the deity 
among foreign tribes, mentioned in several astrono- 
mical tracts; and he is mentioned, in that character, 
in the section erroneously attributed to the Bhavi- 
shya. There he is declared to be Ru‘wape’s'A’DHI- 
PATI-SACES WARaA, the lord and master of the empire 
of Rome; and the author of the sacred period cur- 
rent through that vast empire; and which, accord- 
ing to the appendix to the Agni-purdn'a, began to 
prevail over that of Vicrama Dirya in the year 676 
of our era. We have seen before, that he was born 
for the purpose of removing misery from the world, 
and to check the power of the demons; and, at the 
earnest intreaties of the subaltern deities on earth, 
and all good men, who were groaning under their 
tyranny, Siva comforted them, and assured them, 
that after a certain time, he would be incarnated in 
the character of Vi-Sama-Siia, with the title of Tri- 
VicramMa, or with the triple energy. 


The occasion of his being born, is declared also in 
the Vrihat-cutha. ‘The gods, being vexed by the 
wicked, went to Mana~-peva, and said, “‘ you and 
Visunu, have destroyed the Asuras or Demons, but 
they are born again as Allech'has, who constantly 
vex us and the Brahmens. They will not allow 
sacrifices to be performed, but destroy the imple- 
ments and holy utensils: they even carry away the 
daughters of the Munis.” Mauna-pr'va promised 
relief, and caused one of his forms, or emanations, 
called Ma‘tyava’na, to be incarnated, saying to 
him, “go and destroy the wicked: all the world 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 51 


will submit to thy power, as well as good and wicked 
spirits.” Then Mana’pE'va appeared to the father, 
informing him, that his wife would conceive, and 
the fruit of her womb be an incarnation of the deity: 
and he directed that his name should be Vicrama. 
When his mother had conceived, she became resplen- 
dent like the morning sun; and this resplendence 
answers to the Nur of the Muselmans, from which 
Issa proceeded. Immediately: all the heavenly 
Spirits came down to bow to her, and worship her. © 
When the child was born, the celestial music was 
heard, and a shower of flowers took place. The high 
priest, who was childless, obtained also a son, as well 
as the prime minister. 


In the legends relating to ‘Sa’Liva/HANA, it 1S in. 
general asserted, that his mother being found with 
child, her character suffered so much, that her two 
brothers, through shame, left their native country. 


In the present legend, Sa’tiva’nana, under the 
name of Vi-Sama-Sixa with the triple energy, is 
represented as the son of a King, and as residing at 
Pratisht'ana, the consecrated city, or Saileyam. We 
are then informed, that young Vi-Sama-Sria made 
a surprising progress in learning, and soon surpassed 
his teachers. His father then resigned the king- 
dom to him, and Sama-Si1La became king of heaven, 
earth and hell; all spirits, good and bad, obeyed his 
orders; his resplendence was like that of the sun, 
and his fame reached the White Island in the White 
Sea. The scene is then transferred to Ujjain, where 
he appears like Vicrama’piTya: then follows a mi- 
aute account of his words; but even then, there is 

E@ 


52 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


no mention made of his wars with Sa’LIvA‘HANA, 
for a very obvious reason, though in the latter part 
the story is somewhat misrepresented. 


Let us now consider Sama-Siia or ‘Sa’La-va‘Ha- 
NA, an incarnation of the great Jacshaca, in the hum- 
ble cottage of a pot-maker in the skirts of Sazleyam, 
or the consecrated city, as related above.* 


‘Though without teachers in that humble station, 
he surpassed all the learned in knowledge and wis- 
dom; and I have already mentioned the famous will, 
which puzzled all the princes and learned men of the 
country, till a solution of the mystery was given by 
‘Sa‘LivA HANA, Who was then in the fifth year of his 
age.f 


There is a curious account of ‘Sa’Liva HANA, and 
of his crucifixion, in the Radja Tarangin’?, or history 
of Casmir. There we read, that 145 years after the 
accession of Vicrama’pitya to the throne, there 
appeared King ‘Aryya, who was before prime mi- 
nister of King Jaya-In pra, and whose name signifies 
the lord of victory, or of victorious hosts. _It was 
decreed, that he should be wretched, and persecuted 
all his life’ time, and ultimately that he should die 
upon a cross; that he would be brought to life again, 
through the assistance of a Phani-Canyd, or damsel of 
the Serpentine tribe; and then would become a great 
and powerful monarch. The King, having been circum- 
vented by his enemies, threw into a loathsome dun- 


* Page 39. 
+ As. Res, vol. ix. p..128. 


. CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. pe] 


gveon SaANDuHI-MatiI, for such was the name of his 
prime minister. But his enemies were not satisfied, 
and they informed the King, that Sarasva’ti, divine 
wisdom, or collectively those endued with divine 
knowledge, had declared that he would be a King. 
Java-Inpra, called CuHanpra in the Ayin-Acberi, 
ordered him immediately to be crucified. There he 
remained, till his flesh dropped off, or was torn, off by 
wild beasts. A certain holy man happened to pass 
by, and reading his destiny in the Brahmanda, or in 
his scull, immediately resolved to bring him to life 
again. For this purpose he performed the pia, and 
after the usual ceremonies and invocations, he rung 
the bell, and was surrounded by a fiery meteor, 
which announced the presence of the Vogznis, or 
forms of Der'vi: Then, arming himself with a sci- 
mitar, as usual on such appearances, he went to the 
forest, where the prime minister hung upon the 
cross. He was immediately surrounded by Yéginis, 
one of whom, the Phani-canyd I mentioned before, 
arranged the bones together, and SanpuI-mMatTi 
stood upon his legs. The King, hearing of this, 
went to the forest, when all the Yégznis disappeared : 


this resurrection of Sanpui-MATI took place in Mu- 4 


‘ni-puri, or the city of holy contemplators. He then 
ascended the throne, and, on account of his transcen- 
dent virtues, was called Aryya-Ra‘sa, or the good 
King. 


The author gives us then an account of his excel- 
lencies,,and of his worth; and informs us that he 
was a servant and favourite of Mana’peva. The 
ways of the supreme being, says he, are wonderful, and 
truly pass all understanding and belief; yet there 


are similar instances recorded of old, such as in the 
By3 


54 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


case of Paricshita, &c.* The difference between the 
two eras of Vicrama’piTyA and SarivaHANa, is 
made here to be 145 years, according to the compu- 
tation used all over the Dekhin: for in the northern 


parts of India, they reckon only 135. 


King Aryya is the same with the Pra~Aryya- 
stra of the followers of Gaurama in Siam, and 
other countries to the eastward of it. This signifies 
the mighty and venerable Sire, or chief of the ‘Ary- 
yas or Christians: and with him Bupp’Ha waged 
war, as well as with his disciple Pra-Swawa, thus 
called because he loudly preached against the doc- 
trine of Bupp’ua. The Aryya-Ra’sa is also the 
same with De’va-I'wasuta or Deva-Ta’'t, who was 
crucified by order of Bupp’Ha. King ‘Aryya was 
succeded in the throne by Gora pity a, the grandson 
of king Yupuisuruira, the immediate predecessor 
of Prerapa’pityA, who brought VicraMa‘DITYA 
from distant regions to Casmir, and made him King 
of that country. Prera’pa’pirya, and VicramMa~ 
DITYA are epithets synonymous, or very nearly so. 


Many learned Hindus, for several centuries past, 
conceive that the eldest Vicrama’pirya was far 
from being contemporay with ‘Sa‘Liva‘HANa ; and of 
course conclude, that he is not the famous Sacapwi- 
SHI or SACA’RI, that is to say the enemy of Sa‘tr- 
VA HANA; and consequently they suppose, that ‘Sa- 
ca’RI must have been the epithet of some more 
modern VicraAma’‘pitya. ‘This notion is counte- 
nanced certainly in several of the lists, which I have 
produced; and the author of the Raja-Tarangini ac- 


* See Réja Tarangini, and the extract from it in the Ayin 
Acheri, history of the Kings of Cashmir. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 55 


knowledges, that it was the opinion of many; and 
though he does not countenance it, shews plainly, 
that in his time it was by no means anew idea.* 
The compiler of the Vansévali seems willing to adopt 
it, when he says that many learned men reject the 
whole, as altogether fabulous, and unwarrautable. 
Their reason, I am told is, that Saca is the Mir’cu- 
HA VATA’RA, who did not appear, or rather whose pe- 
riod was not known in Jndia, till about 1200 years 
ago. In conformity to this idea, in the section at- 
tributed to the Bhavishya-Purdna, Saca is declared 
to be the lord and master of Rome, which is to be 
taken in a spiritual sense: and in the 4gni-purana, 
the introduction of his period into Jndia is made to 
correspond with the year 676 of Curisrt. 


This Miléch’hacatdra, or incarnation of the deity 
among foreign tribes, is peculiarly noticed in the 
Romaca-Siddhanta, an astronomical treatise, accord- 
ing to the system of the Rémacas, or Romans, called 
Romaicor (Pepeno,) by the Greeks. This treatise is 
said to be very voluminous, and is so scarce, that I 
have not been able to procure it; and I believe it is 
not to be found at Benares.. This deficiency I have 
been able to supply from the Surydrun‘a-samvada, the 
Sidd hanta-Raja, and the Strya-Sidd*hanta. The sun, 
having been appointed by Brahma, to be the eye wit- 
ness of all transactions in this world, and to regulate 
the hours and time, refused to obey, and withdrew 
into the desert, to perform tapasya, in order to be re- 
united to the Supreme Being. In consequence of 
this refusal, he was cursed by Purv‘nu’Ta, or InpDRa, 
and Virancui, or Brauma’ In the Strya-Siddhan- 


* Saca‘ri Vicraméditya iti sabhramamas'ritaib, anyair atranya- 
tha lec’hivis‘amv4di cadarthitam, 
E 4 


56 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE , 


< 


ta, it issaid, that Maya, the chief engineer of the 
Daityas, and the son of Twasw ra’, made tapasya in 
honour of the sun, in order to obtain astronomical 
knowledge; the sun appeared to him, and said, “ I 
know the rectitude of thy heart, and I am much 
pleased with thy ¢apasya. I shall.therefore impart 


unto thee the doctrine of Time, and of the revolu-- 


tions of the planets. But as no body can bear my 
tefulgence, and as it is not in my power to stop my 
course, for a single moment (for this reason go back 
to thy own puri, town, or place of abode, and there I 
shall impart unto thee knowledge, in the town of 
Romaca, where I shall become the MLE'cHHAVATA™ 
RA, through the curse of Brauma’). This form of 
mine, here present, will teach thee every thing :” 
then the sun, having directed this new form to teach 
him, disappeared, and Maya bowed himself to the 
ground before this emanation. . 


The siéca between the two brackets is not found 
in general in the copies of the Stirya-siddhdnta ; yet 


Without it there seems to be something wanting: - 


but whether an interpolation or not, its purport 
is established in the following astronomical treatises. 
In the beginning of the Stdd’hanta-Rdja, the au- 
thor says, from history (Itihdsa) I know, that Bua’s- 
CARA-SURYA became a Rémaca, through the curse 


of Purv'Hu’TA and Vrrancut. He became a VYavana 
in Rémaca-pattana, and in the garb and countenance 


of a Rémaca, he composed a most complete treatise 
on astronomy. 


In the beginning of the Stirydrun‘a-samvada, the 
sun is introduced, saying, ‘‘ I gave the Rémaca-Sidd’- 
hanta to Rémaca, whilst living among the Vavanas, 
in consequence of Brauma’s curse. R6maca taught 


bas CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. oF 


it Rémacd-nagaré in the town of Rome, for he dwelt 
among the AZ/éch’has in consequence of that curse ;” 
_ Rémaca-puri is the town of Rome inthewest. “Then,” 
says druna, “ how came you to assume the counte- 


* nance of a Mléch’ha in the west, in a land of unrigh- 


teousness.” “ BraHMa’ cursed me,” answered the 


sun, “and said be thou born in the west, in Rémaca- 


« 


pura, and of the Jlléch’has, who are ignorant of the 
Védas, of the Yajna, or of the proper mode of perform- 
ing sacrifices, Carma, religious rites and discipline ; 
who have rejected sarvadharma, all religious duties, 
are dush'ta, inclined to evil, ndstica, heretics; and 
who (the Romans) are a Yavana tribe, guilty of 
every sort of uncleanliness. ‘Thus, in that shape, I 
taught them astronomy.” 


This Mie‘cH HA'VATARA, oO” superior incarnation* 
of the deity among foreign tribes, RUMA-DF’s'A-PATI 
the lord of the country or empire of Roum, or Rome, 
(because his doctrine, institutes, and laws precail through 
it ;) Rémaca-nagaré, said to reside in Rome its metropo- 
lis, (because he is revered and worshipped there with 
unusual magnificence ;) ‘SAceswara the lord of a sa- 
cred period, (or as L think it should be understood, after 
whom it is denominated,) is obviously Jesus Curist; 
at least it appears sotome. From his being a Séces- 
ward, the Hindus suppose him also to be a great as- 
tronomer. In the Sdrya-Stddhanta, he is repeatedly 


ealled ‘Sri-SuRyva’nsa, or the blessed Su’rva’nsa; 


he is also styled Kémaca-AvatTaRa, or simply 
Rémaca. In consequence of this, ‘SaALiva’Hana 
is considered all over Jndia as a great astronomer, or 
as a prince remarkably fond of astronomy.t 


4 


** Inferior incarnations are denominated Avantura. 
+ See also Mr. GENTIL’s Voyage, p. 214 and 238. 


58 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


Various are the opinions about ‘Sa‘Liva‘HANA : in 
’ general it is believed, that he did not die, but was 
translated to heaven, being a ‘Saca; after having 
retired, for many years, into the desert, to give him- 
self up to heavenly contemplation. 


I have mentioned, that the Hindus represented 
Sa LivA HANA in his fifth year, exactly like our Sa- 
viour in the first year of the Christian Era: it was 
not in consequence of deep chronological investiga- 
tions, that they seemingly attempted - to correct the 
igre of Dionysius Exicuus, or the httle; but 
because it was so in the Apocryphal Gospel of the 
infancy of Jesus, or rather because it was the general 
opinion in the east, that Jesus manifested himself to 
the world at thatage. ‘Sa‘Liva'HANna did not marry, 
nor had he any offspring : for even in India, he is 
looked upon as a mysterious, and supernatural being, 
and called an Utpata, or prodigy. 


Thave thus arranged and brought together all the. 
information I could procure, concerning ‘Sa Liva- 
HANA, under that name, or any of his well known 
titles, ‘and as King of Pratishténa: for'Sa'Liva'HANA 
and. that holy city are intimately related to each 
other, and cannot be separated. Yet we find Sa Li- 
VAHANA sometimes leaving Praiishtana, and going 
to reside at Ujjain, after the defeat of Vicrama‘DI- 
TYA; as in the legends relating to him, under the 
names of VI-SaAMA Sia, and Daanansava. It is 
nearly the same with Vicrama’ pity, whose his- 
tory 1s equally connected with Ujjihdn, or Ujjayini ; 
I.mean the real one, for there were several of 
them. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION 1N INDIA. 59 


There are many other legends, concerning a cer- 
tain holy man, who seems to be meant for Sa Liva- 
HANA; but as the application is not so obvious, they 
will be inserted ina distinct place by themselves. 


The followers of Bupp’HA and Jina, as well as the 
followers of BrRanma, claim Sa’Liva’HaNna as their 
own; and in the Calpa-sutra-Calicad, ‘Sa LIvA‘ HANA, 
as his name is generally written, is said to be a form 
of Jina, with the title of Sa BAcA-pPaTI, or SRa‘BA- 
ca-PAtTI. The followers of Gautama, the Bédhi- 
‘Swata in Siam, and the Burman Empire, called him 
Deva-=Tart, whichis a corruption from Deva-Tasu- 
va‘or Deva-Twasnra, the divine artist, or Tac- 
shaca: and that it 1s so, is asserted from the Buddha- 
charitra in my possession, wherein he is called Vis- 
vacarMA. ‘They say, thas he was a collateral form, 
or the brother of Bupp’ua, and they are fully per- 
suaded, that he is the same with Curistr. Their 
being made contemporaries, shews that through, this 
whole romance, there is an obvious allusion to the 
wars and feuds between their followers in subsequent 
ages. ° 


This singular mode of treating historical events, 
is not peculiar to the Hindus ; for the Greeks seldom 
distinguished between the tutelar deities, and their 
disciples, associates or followers, who were called by 
their titles. These tutelar deities were supposed to 
lead their armies in an invisible manner, though they 
sometimes appeared, and victory was always ascribed 
tothem. Thus the wars of the Wuhamedans with the 
Spanards, might be ascribed to Munamen, and Sr. 
Jaco the champion of Spain, who led-constantly her 
armies, and destroyed very many Moors: hence he 


60 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


is called Sr. Jago Mara Moros. Droporus, the 
Sicilian, says the same of ALEXANDER the son of 
JuritEK;* and, though dead, he was supposed to 
be at the head of the armies, and to regulate the 
conduct of their chiefs, and thus every victory was 
ascribed to him. 


In many parts of the Peninsula, Christians are 
called, and considered, as followers of Bupp'Ha ; and 
their divine legislator, whom they confound with the 
apostle of Jndia, is declared to bea form of Bupp'Ha, 
both by the followers of Branma, and. those: of 
Jina: and the information I had received on that 
‘subject, is confirmed by F. Pautiyo.t 


Some legendary tales, obviously relating to the 
death of our Saviour, have found also their way into 
the Peninsula. There was a certain Peishé-cara 
Brahmen (for thus the Christians were called, and 
Curisr in the Apocryphal Gospels, and by the Ja- 
nicheans was considered as a Peishé-car Brahmen, an 
artist, manufacturer, or carpenter,) who came to a 
certain place, and there loudly proclaimed, that all 
persons in distress should come to him; and that he 
would take them under his protection, and EVEN LAY 
pown his life for them. He was then sitting like a 
Muni, or contemplator; and many came io him: 
among them was a thief, who had robbed the King’s 
palace to a considerable amount. . The officers of 
justice soon arrived in pursuit or him, but the holy 
man would not deliver him up, saying, that he was 


a nc 


* Diod. Sic. p. 660 and 678. 
+ Systema Brahmanicum, p. 161. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 6} 


ready to die in his place; and in that of all those 
who claimed his protection. The King ordered, that 
the holy man should suffer immediate “death, upon a 
Sula or ‘Suli, which means a stake, either one for em- 
paling, or a gibbet, or cross. Crucifixion being un- 
known to the Hindus, they of course, have no name 
for it: and Suda or ‘Suli., originally a stake, signifies 


also a gibbet, or the cross > exactly like Stauwros in 
Greek. It is so even in the Persian language; and 
so it was among the Romans, according to SENECA ;* 
crucifixion signified both empaling and extending 
the arms upon a cross bar; for these two modes of 
punishment were equally 1 in use among them: a cir- 


cumstance very little known. 


Then the holy man was stretched upon the ‘Suda, 
amidst the lamentations of the surrounding multi- 
tude, to whom he observed, that he came for that 
purpose, (to atone with his life for the sins of others). 
The Sula was suddenly changed into a -Sdla, or tree 
loaded with flowers ; a pushpa-carsha took place, as 
usual on such occasions; that is to say, it rained 
flowers from on high; a celestial car, with divine 
choristers, came down. to translate into heaven the 
holy man, who, taking the thief by the hand, said, 
“thou shalt also be with me in Caildsa ot paradise.” 
Thus they went to Cai/dsa in the presence of an im- 
mense crowd, who with uplifted hands, loud huzzas, 
and tears of joy, testified their satisfaction, at the 
sudden change. ‘The AZuselmans, and the Mani- 
cheans, with many other sectaries, will not allow 
that Curisr was ‘really crucified. Some say, that 
it was a mere illusion; others allege, that he 


‘7 ¢ 


* SENECA de Consol. ad Marcium, p. ¢. 20. 


62 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


disappeared, and went to heaven. The Manicheans, 
who spread their errors at a very early period, not only 
in the northern parts of Jndia, but also.in the Pen- 
insula, always represented Cuuist crucified upon a 
tree, among its foliage and flowers. Though this 
legend is not applied to Sa‘ti-va‘HAN, or SA’LA-vA~ 
HAN, as it is pronounced in the Dekhin ; yet, when 
the good Peishé-car Brahmen was stretched upon the 
‘Sula or Suli, he was really ‘Suli-odhana, or cross borne: 
and when the Su/a was changed into a Séda or tree, 
he was certainly ‘Sdla-vahan, or Sali-cahan, he was 
exalted, or borne upon the tree. Though the pu- 
nishment of the cross be unknown to the Hindus, 
yet the followers of Bupp’ua have some knowledge 
of it, when they represent Deva-Tar, crucified by 
order of Bupp’HA upon an instrument somewhat re- 
sembling a cross, according to the account of several 
travellers to Stam, and other countries. 


We read in Sanscrit lexicons, that Sa’LIVA‘HAN Was 
also called Ha’ta a plough: it should be Ha ta-va- 
HANA, or in composition, Ha‘Li-va'Hana; he who 
was borne, or crucified upon a plough. The old 
Indian plough had originally the shape of the letter 
Y, like the old Latzan Furca, or bifurcated stump of 
a tree. Toone branch the plough-share was fixed ; 
and the other branch served as ahandle. In the sta- 
tues of Visunu, and Bara-ra‘ma, the plough in 
their hands is represented nearly in that manner; 
and, from that circumstance, BALA-RAMA is called 
also Hata, and Has, or he with the plough. 


The legend of the good Peishé-car Brahmen, 1s 
found in Major Mackenzie's historical sketches 
of the ancient kings of Varangola, otherwise I should 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 63 


not have presumed to insert it here. It is inter- 
woven can the history of the first Kings of that 
country, and of course the compilers by no means 
entertained.an idea, that it was anterior to the Chrzs- 
tian Era. 


As I was mentioning this traditionary legend to 
some learned Pandits, they informed me, that the 
same, or one at least very much like it, was to be 
found in the MJaha-Bharata, the Sahyddri-chanda a 
section of the Scanda-purdna, and in the Bhagavata 
also. I produced the books, and they pointed out, 
the respective pages immediately. I read the whole, 
and found it illustrated with circumstances of a most 
extraordinary nature. 


In the Bhagavata, and its commentary, this legend 
is only alluded to. In the Alahé-Bharata there is a 
short account of the transaction ; but in the Sahyddri- 
chanda the legend is drawn to a very great length,* 
and. the principal features, and circumstances in these 
legends, which in reality are but one, are the follow- 


ing. . 


_» There appeared, in the Dekhin, a most holy Brah- 
men, of those called Petshé-caras, Tacshacas, ‘Sdbacas, 
or handicraftmen, and whose name was Manpa-, 
vyaH. He proclaimed, that he came for the sole 
purpose of relieving the distressed ; and that what- 
ever men claimed his protection, he would readily 
grant it to them, and even lay down his own life for 
them. Very many of all descriptions came accord- 


* Bhagavata; Section 1.p.13. Mah4-Bh4rata; Section 1. 


64 CRIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


ingly; and among them a thief, who being pursued 
by the officers of justice, claimed his protection, 
which he readily granted, and was really crucified in 
his room. He then ascended into heaven, and took 
the thief along with him. 


This circumstance is otherwise related in the above 
Puranas. A numerous banditti had taken shelter 
near the holy man, thinking themselves safe: but 
the officers of justice arriving, they were seized, and 
immediately crucified. The holy man was supposed 
to be a thief, numbered among them, and crucified 
also. He did not open his mouth, but remained ab- 
sorbed in holy contemplation, imwardly repeating 
sacred names, with his aris extended, and uplifted. 


Whilst on the cross, all the Rishis crowded from 
all parts of the world, in the shape of birds, to see 
him, and comfort him. A certain thief, who was 
also covered with leprosy, and, in consequence of it, 
deprived of the use of his limbs, was accidentally 
dropped at the foot of the cross, wrapped up like a 
_. child in his swaddling clothes. The man, after re- 
maining there some time, was perfectly cured; and, 
being irradiated, repented, lived to a good old age, 
and obtained eternal bliss. A thick darkness over- 
spread the face of the world; and the animated | 
creation was in the utmost distress, and consterna- 
tion. The holy man, being afterwards taken down 
from the cross, descendedin to hell, and there encoun- 
tered, and overcame, death, or Yama. . Thena ge- 
neral renovation of the world took place, under 
the inspection of BranMa. The holy man, from his 
having been crucified, was ever since called SuLAs- 
rua, or the cross-borne, which is synonymous with 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 65 


‘Sativa Hana. If we prefix to this abstract the 
legends concerning the infancy of Sa‘Liva‘HANA, 
and the era of his manifestation, we shall have the 
principal circumstances of the life of our Saviour, 
either from the true Gospels, or from the Apocryphal 
ones. 


There are two singular circumstances in these le- 
gends: the first is that it was decreed, that the iron 
should pierce the body of Manp’avyau as well as 
that of Crisuna, because both were accursed, though 
guiltless. The second is, that neither Crisuxa nor 
Manpavyan died, the first in consequence of his 
wound, nor the second after being crucified; and 
both are represented as contemporaries. 


The Christian sectaries in the first ages, and Mu- 
HAMED himself with the AMJuslemans to this day, 
highly reprobated the idea of Curist dying upon the 
cross, and even considered it almost a blasphemy. 
Crisuna, though guiltless, was involved in the ge- 
neral curse denounced against his whole tribe, ‘by 
which all the Vadus were doomed to be pierced with 
iron, and to die. Neither Crisona nor Manpa- 
vyau could die; but they were to be breught, as 
near as possible, to the point of death, that the words 
of the Muni should not be done away. Besides, 
Yama, as King of death, has a claim upon every in- 
dividual, and with regard to some exalted characters, 
he must be satisfied, and a compromise must take 
place. But another difficulty arises; Yama cannot 
condemn a man to die, without some reason; it 
would be unjust in him, who is also King of justice. 
All incarnations of the deity, however dignified and 
exalted, such as that of Crisuna, which is ‘considered 
as the first in rank, and the most perfect of all; all 

F 


66 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


manifestations of the deity, I say, on becoming 
flesh, are more or less subjected to the infirmities, 
and even the weakness of human nature, being Cer- 
tainly involved, in some measure, in the gloom of 
maya, or worldly illusion. In this case, YAMA is 
always sure to find some taint of negative guilt, in 
consequence of which he can at least bring them to 
death’s door: and it was found that MANDAVYAuH, in 
his infancy, had destroyed a feeble and innocent 
insect, by piercing him either with a needle or witha 
- blade of grass. This fatal needle was the only thing 
that Curist ever possessed in this world; yet, how- 
ever insignificant in itself, it was certainly a worldly 
implement, and it prevented his admission into hea- 
ven, according to Aduselmans in India ; neither will: 
he ever be admitted till after his second manifesta- 
tion, at the end of the world. Others say, that he 
was admitted into the fourth. only, instead of the 
highest heaven, on that account. 


We read in the Maha-Bharata, that there was a 
most holy and pious Brahmen called Manp‘avyau, 
who was making tapasya with his arms uplifted, ab- 
sorbed in holy contemplation. Some /éptras, lifters 
or thieves, placed themselves near him, with thetr 
stolen goods, thinking to be safe; but the King of 
that place, who was in pursuit of them, ordered them 
to be crucified, and as the holy man gave no answer, 
he was numbered among them, and crucified with _ 
the rest. In the night-time, all the Rishzs, hearing 
of his misfortune, flocked from all quarters, in the 
shape of birds, to comfort him. In the mean time 
the thieves died on the cross; but the holy man te- 
mained meditating, without uttering a word, with 
his arms uplifted. The King hearing this, immedi- 
ately saw that Manp’vyAu was a Rishi, and hastened 


< 


‘CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 67 


to take him down from the cross; and then falling 
at his feet, humbly begged his forgiveness. Imme- 
diately the Rishi descended into hell, and asked the 
King of death, and of justice, how he could allow 
him to be crucified, as he was guiltless, Yama an- 


swered, that in his infancy he had pierced an inno- 


cent insect with a blade of grass. The Rishi said, 


that at that age he could not incur guilt of any kind, 


and of course drove him out of the infernal king- 
dom; and willed, that he should be born of the 
womb of a woman. of the ‘Sudra tribe. This was 
effected in the house of VicuitTravirya, who was 
dead; but Dwarpa’yana, or Vya’sa, raised seed to 
him, through his wife and a handmaid. Yama was 
born of the latter under the name of Vipu’ra, and 
remained on earth 100 years, during which the go- 
vernment of the infernal regions was committed to 
Aryama’, according to the Bhdgavata. In the 
Sahyadri-chanda, we have a most prolix account of 
this momentous event, which I shall give in ab- 


* stract. 


‘ Whatever man listens with due attention to this 
legend, his sins shall be remitted. In the forest of 
Dandaca, in the Sahyddri mountains in the Dekhin, 
on the banks of the river Pranitad, was the hermit- 
age of Manpavyan, a most holy Rishz, most bene- 
volent, and no accepter of persons. There he re- 


mained, between five fires, entirely taken up with 


holy contemplation, and inwardly repeating sacred 
names. A numerous banditti, with the goods they 


had stolen, being pursued by the King at the head 
of a strong party, took shelter near the holy man. 
_ As soon as the King came, he ordered them all to be 


crucified immediately ; and the holy man was num- 
bered among them, and from his being crucified, he 


F 2 


68 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


was, from that time, surnamed Sulastha, or the cross- 
borne. 


“There lived in the adjacent village a most vir- 
tuous and faithful wife, who was married to a thief, 
and a debauchee, whose whole body was covered 
with leprosy: some of his limbs had dropped, and 
others were deprived of motion. He was very fond 
of gambling, and his faithful wife used to carry him, 
wrapped up like a child im swaddling clothes, to a 
gambling house, where he spent'a great part of the 
night, when she carried him back im the same man- 
ner. It was midnight, and the night very dark, she 
passed near the cross, and stumbling against it, she 
shook it violently, aa let her husband fall at the 
foot of it. The holy man being put to great pain, 
said to her, at the rising of the sun, thy husband 
shall die. Such are the powers of a virtuous and 
faithful wife, that she forbade the sun to rise. A 
thick darkness covered the face of the world, and | 
lasted 10,000 years, during which the gods and the 
created beings were in the utmost distress and con- 
ster nation. 


‘ All the gods, with ‘Srva and Brauma, went to 
Visunu the preserver, who resides on the northern 
shores of the Vhite Sea, that is to say, in the sacred 
isles in the west. Wisunu was very much embar- 
rassed, as he did not wish to reverse the decrees of 
either of two such exalted characters. After some 
consideration, he said to the gods, “ ANasuya’, the 
wife of ATri, 1s most virtuous and faithful; go to 
her, and prevail upon her to go and speak to the 
wife of the thief, when they will together come to 
“some arrangement.” Anasvu’ya’ consented, and after 
having discussed the matter with her, every thing was 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 69 


settled. In her character of a virtuous and faithful 
wife, she ordered that the husband should live; and 
Guw’‘avati, the thief’s wife, ordered the sun to rise. 
Still it was necessary to satisfy the holy Manp‘a- 
vyan, whose words could not be done away. They 
agreed, that in future all married women, when it is 
dark, or night, should remain as in a state of widow- 
hood, taking off their nuptial dress and ornaments. 
The benevolent Manp’avyau was easily pacified, 
the sun rose as usual, darkness was dispelled; the 
holy man, who had remained all the while absorbed 
in contemplation, with his arms uplifted, descended 
from the cross; the leper, at the foot of it, was 
cured of his disease, lived to a good old age, and 
obtained eternal bliss; and the two virtuous and 
faithful wives were crowned with honor and glory. 
The air was filled with numberless choirs of celestial 
minstrels, singing heavenly strains, and the whole 
concluded with a shower of flowers from on high. 
In the mean time, the animated beings had all pe- 
rished ; and BrauMa’ was directed to proceed imme- 
diately to a new creation, and a general renovation 
of the world took place. 


II. Christianity certainly had made a great pro- 
gress in the Peninsula, even at a very early period. 
The venerable Panranus of Alerandria visited India, 
about the year 189, and there found Christians, who 
had a copy of the Gospel of St. Marrxuew in He- 
brew, which he carried to Alexandria, where it existed 
in the time of JERomE. Frumerntius, the Apostle 
of Abyssinia, who had resided a long time in Jndia, 
and spoke the language remarkably well, preached 
the Gospel in the southern parts, where he had great 
influence, and was highly respected, having been 
for many years prime minister, and regep* of one 


F"3 


70 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


of the Kings, during his minority. There he con- 
verted many Hindus, and built many churches, and 
then went to Abyssinia. He came to India with his 
brother Apesius, along with their paternal uncle, a 
native of Tyre, who was a Christian, and a very 
learned man. He travelled into the interior parts of 
India as a philosopher, and having satisfied his cu- 
riosity, he re-embarked on his way back with his 
two nephews; but, happening to put into a certain 
harbour, in order to get a supply of water, they 
were, at their landing, suddenly attacked by the na- 
tives. Many perished, and the rest were carried 
ito captivity. Among the former was the uncle; 
but his two nephews were presented to the King, 
who took particular notice of them, and they were 
afterward raised by him to the first dignities of the 
state. ‘They obtained leave to revisit their native 
country, when Frumenrius was ordained a bishop; 
and m that character went back to Jndia. At the 
council of Nice, in the year 325, the Primate of 
India was present, and subscribed his name. ‘In the 
year followmg, Frumentivus was consecrated P7i- 
mate of India, by Atuanasivus, at Alevandria. ‘He 
resided in the Peninsula, and the Christians there 
had always a bishop, called the Primate of India. 
The Christian religion made also some progress in 
the north of India. Musmus, bishop of dAdul, on 
the Abyssinian shores, visited the northern parts of 
India im the latter end of the fourth century, in com- 
pany with the famous Pattaprus, a Goth from 
Galatia. When they arrived on the borders of Jn- 
dia, they were both disgusted with the climate. 
PaxLLapius went back, but Muszus proceeded to 
the lesser Bochara; where, it seems, he was more 
- successful. Yet there was at Sirhind, or Serinda, a 
seminary for Christians, in the sixth century: for, in 


~ 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 71 


the year 636, two Monks, who had long resided 
there, returned to their native country; and being 
at Constantinople, the Emperor Justintan sent for 
them, to inquire into the nature and origin of silk, 
and he prevailed upon them to go back to Sirhind, 
in order to bring from thence the eggs of the real 
. silk butterfly. 


Tuerorurtus, the famous Arian bishop,* was a 
native of Dicus, now Diu in Gurdét; and, as he 
was remarkably black, he was sirnamed the Blacka- 
moor. His Hindu name was probably Deo-pa’‘t, 
perfectly synonymous with THxorniius in Greek, 
He flourished in the times of the great Constan- 
TINE, and of his sons; and he had been sent to 
Constantinople with others as hostages. T'rom this 
circumstance it appears, that the inhabitants of 
Gujrat, who have been always famous as pirates, 
had ill used the Roman traders. There was a great 
trade carried on at that time to India, by the Ro- 
mans; and there was an annual fair held at Batné, 
for the vent of Indian and Chinese commodities, and 
there was. a great concourse of merchants, many of 
whom were settled there. It was situated at some 
distance from the eastern bank of the Euphrates, and 
nearly in the same latitude with Antioch. He was 
very young when he was sent to Constantinople, 
where he studied, became a Christian, and embraced 
a monastic life. He was afterwards ordained a 
bishop, and sent to Arabia by Constantius, in 
order to promote the interests of the Christian reli- 
gion. He met with great opposition from the Jews, 


~ 


* See Philistorgius, Sozomenes, &c. } 


F 4 


72, ORIGIN AND DECLINE of THE 


who Were very numerous in'that country; but stc- 
ceeded at last, and built three churches, for the be- 
nefit chiefly of the Roman traders. One was at Taphar 
or Tapharon, now Dafar, and the metropolis of that 
country ; the second was at Aden, near the straits of 
Babelmandel, and the third near the entrance of the 
Persian Gulf. From thence he went by sea to Diu, 
his native country, visited several parts of India, 
comforting the Christians, introducing wholesome 
regulations, and spreading the errors of Arius. He 
thence returned to Antioch, according to Suipas, 
where he lived a long time, highly respected. He 
accompanied afterwards Consrantius GALLus into 
Germany, as far as Petavium, now Pettaw in Stiria, 
in the year 354. . 


Marutna, a Hindu, and a bishop of Suphara, now 
Sufferdam, assisted at the Synod of Sides, in Pamphy- 
lia, in the year 383. He was afterward translated to 
the bishoprick of JZeyaferkin, on the borders of 
Mesopotamia, when Yezprsixp I., King of Persia, 
charmed with his piety, was very near becoming a 
Christian; and Curysostom speaks highly in favour* 
of our bishop. According to the Notitia of NiLus 
Doxopatrius, the Greek Patriarch of Antioch, or- 
dained a certain Ramocyris Metropolitan of India ; 
and, from his name, there is every reason to believe 
that he was also a native of India, where the appella- 
tion of Ra’Ma-Gir is by no means uncommon. 
Cosmas INDICO-PLEUSTES, who visited Jndia about 
the year 522, says, that there were churches and 
priests, with the whole liturgy, in Ceylon: also on 


* Photi Biblioth. p. 38, &c. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION. IN INDIA. 73 


the Afalabar Coast, and in the north west of Jndia. 
In these countries, says he, there are a vast number 
of churches. 


The Mission of St. Tuomas to India, with the 
surprising progress of the Christzan religion, are facts, 
m my humble opinion, suthciently ‘authenticated. 
Jerome, who died in the year 420, speaks of the Mis- 
sion of St. THoatas to India, as a fact universally ac- 
knowledged in his time : but I must refer the sceptic 
reader to the works of Fapricius, and AssEMANNI, 
unfortunately not to be procured in. this country. 
But the learned history of the Anglo-Saxons by Mr. 
Turwer will abundantly make up for this deficiency, 
in his dissertation on the embassy of the bishop of 
Shireburn, sent by the great ALrRED, to the tomb of 
St. Tuomas in India. That the holy Apostle suf-— 
fered martyrdom in Jrdia, is sufficiently proved: but, 
at the same time, it is certain also, that his body was 
afterwards carried back, and deposited at Edessa, as 
attested by Rurinus, who went to Syrza in the year 
371, and remained there twenty-five years. The 
place, however, where he was first entombed, became 
a famous place of pilgrimage, where probably, they 
kept some particles of his body, either true or false: 
but the chief relic was his blood; which had impreg- 
nated’ the spot, where he suffered mar tyrdom. This 
earth was carried, in small quantities, all over the 
Peninsula ; and, being drank with water, proved most 
efficacious, in all sorts of diseases, and complaints. 
His tomb at Edessa was probably destroyed, during 
the wars of the Emperors of the west with the Per- 
slans ; or afterwards by the AZuselmans. 


In the sixth century, Grecory of Tours, the fa- 
ther of French history, became acquainted with a 


74 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


respectable man, called ‘T11z0poRus, who had visited | 
the tomb of St. Tuomas in Zvdia. In the ninth cen- 
tury, S1GHELM bishop of Shireburn was sent there 
also by ALFRED, in consequence of a vow. Now, 
these two clergymen were too orthodox to worship 
the tombs and relics of an heretic, a Nestorian of the 
name of THomas, as has been supposed by many; and 
they were too near the time, in which he lived, to have 
been imposed upon. The two Jduselmans, who 
visited that place soon after SiGHELM, mertion the 
church of Tuomas, on the Coast of Coromandel, as 
well as Marco Pozo about the year 1292, long be- 
fore the Portugueze had found their way to éndia, 
M. Poto says, that Christians and Afuselmans were 
very numerous in the Peninsula. 


The place where he suffered martyrdom, that is to 

say, the country about J/adras, was seldom visited 
_ by merchants, as there was no trade. — His body, 
or tomb at least, was in a small city of that ceun- 
try, and the native AZuselmans, and Christians, held 
it in great veneration. Pilgrims, from distant coun- 
tries, came to visit this holy place; and the earth 
impregnated with his blood, was given in some beve- 
rage, to sick and infirm people; and miracles were 
often performed there. In speaking of Aden in 
Arabia, he informs us, that “ St. THomas was. said 
to have preached there, before he went to Maabar in 
India, where he suffered for Curis, and there reposes 
to this day his most holy body. In that country 
_ (Maabar ) the Christians are good soldiers, and re- 
markable for their honesty.” 


The inhabitants say, that the holy Apostle was a 
great prophet, and they call him Avariia, which in 
their language signifies a holy and pious man, As 


$ 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 75 


Marco Poto has given us the meaning of the word 
Avariia, it is very easy to reascend to its pure and 
original form, which is 4v-Aryya in Sanscrit ; and, 
as he says, that the Christians there were highly 
respected, being good soldiers, and above all, good 
and holy men, remarkable for their integrity, they 
were certainly 4v-Aryyas, or ‘Aryyas, as well as their 
holy Apostle. The word Avaria is derived from the 
Sanscrit compound Av-Aryya, from two words per- 
fectly synonymous, dva, and Aryya. The first is 
rendered in lexicons, by ‘Sudd*ha, or Pavitra, equally 
implying holiness, and purity. It js often used in 
composition, where it enhances the sense. One of 
the titles of Bupp’ua is Ava-Lécrrta, or Ava-Léca- 
wa‘, the holy sovereign of the world: Ava-réHa 
or A-roHA, well seated: This word is very often 
pronounced Axa, and more particularly so, in the 
S. W. parts of Jvdia: and the same M. Poto men- 
tions in the country of Laé, arace of most pious men 
called Abraiani and Abraiam in the M.S.S. But the 
editors thought proper to write that word, Abraja- 
mim; because they conceived that they were Bréh- 
mens. But itis much more probable, that it is the 
same word with Avariiam, or Avariia, which he 
mentioned before. Ab-Aryya in the objective case, 
im the singular number, makes 4b-Aryyam, and Ab- 
‘Aryyan in the plural, in the first case. These Abraia- 
nt, says he, have in abhorrence lying, theft,- and 
cheating. «They marry but one wite, and abstain 
from intoxicating liquors, and flesh. They eat mo- 
derately, and their fasts are long, and most severe: 
otherwise, says he, they are idolaters.. He then 
mentions other idolaters in that country; but from 
the context, entirely different from the 4é-Aryyas : 
who it seems, were only degenerated Christians, who 


76 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


had in great measure relapsed into the errors of their 
ancestors, and of their contemporaries. 


From the situation, assigned to the country of Laé, 
by M. Potro, these wood “people, with the most au- 
stere manners, called ‘Ary ‘yyas, seem to be the same 
with the holy and rigid penitents, and anchorets 
mentioned in the third century by Protemy in the 
country of Aridca, a derivative form from ‘Aryya, un- 
der the name of Ty, abassi Magi, from the Sanscrit Ta- 
paswi, pronounced Tabdasa in the Tamuli Dialect; and 
which signifies contemplators, and by inyplication 
men performing austere penances, like the anchorets 
in the wilds of Thebes, and Tabenna in Egypt ; which 
denominations are probably derived from Tapa, aus- 
terities, and 7apé-van, the wilderness of austerities. 
The Aryyas are mentioned in the Brahman da-puréd- 
na* as a powerful tribe of foreigners (Mdléch’ha) liv- 
ing among the mountains of the Dekhin. 


ProteMy says, that Ariaca belonged to the Sa- 
dinci, a strange name certainly for a tribe. I suspect 
howev er, that it is derived from the Sanscrit Sda’- 
hana, and that the ‘Aryyas were thus denominated by 
the native Hindus, in the same manner, that the Por- 
tugueze were styled is Bengal, T’hachurs, rulers or 
lords, and the English all over India are called Saheb- 
locas, or Sahéb- logues, and the most apposite Sanscrit 
expression for the above epithets is Sadhana: the En- 
glish ave often styled by learned Pandits, Sadhana- 
“‘Engriz : and the famous Budsa is often called Sad- 
hana Bhéja. M. Poto mentions also Abraians on the 


* Section of the Earth. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 77 


Pearl-Fishery Coast ; these were consulted by the 
fishermen; but, he says that they were bad men, 
and great sorcerers: and their descendants, to this 
day, are not much better, According to the acts of 
St. Tuomas, and other notices, the holy Apostle em- 
barked at dden in Arabia, in his way to India, where 
he landed at a place called Halabor, and afterwards 
Salo-patan, synonymous with ‘Sdlo-pur, or ‘Sdla-bu- 
ram, Hdla-buram; and now Cranganor. He was 
well received by Maspevus, called also Srcamus, 
King of that country, whose son Zuzawn he convert- 
ed, and afterwards ordained him a Deacon. The 
Apostle, long after, suffered martyrdom, at a place 
called Calamina, known afterwards by the name of 
Maliar-pur, or the city of Pea-cocks, from the Sdns- 
crit Meytr-pura; and the same which is called 
Mahar-pha by Protemy. Its present name is St. 
THOME, salted: by the Arabs, during the middle ages, 
Betuma, or Beit-Thoma, the house or church of 
Tuomas. . 


Maspeus, the name of the King, who kindly re- 
ceived St. Tuomas, Zuzawn that of his son, and 
Secamus his own surname, are all Hind? denomina- 
tions. Muspeus is for Baspeo, the usual pronunci- 
ation of Vasu-peva in the spoken dialects. Sxrca- 
mus is for SuGAMa, synonymous with SuGat, and 
shews that he was a follower of Bupp’Ha: and San- 
GAMA, even now, is not an uncommon name in 
India, particularly i in the Penmsula. Zuzawn is for 
SAJANA, or SEZAN, as written by Father Grorer. 
It is the name of the father of Bupp’Ha, called also 
Asana, by the Purdnics ; and the disciple and suc- 
cessor of Manes, who pretended to be an incarnation 
of Bupp’ua, was called Sistnivs. 


78 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


The place of his martyrdom is called Calamina by 
Hippotytus, according to Mr. Turner. Calamina 
is a Tamuli denomination, and literaily signifies earth, 
and stones, alluding to the nature of the soil. It is 
synonymous with ” Mana-para, which -signifies the 
same thing, according to F. BartroLemMeo, a mis- 
slonary acquainted with both the Sanscrit and Tamuli 
languages: but I by no means conceive them to 
be the same place. Célé or Célu in Tamuli signifies 
a stone, or Callow in French, and Mana earth. “Thus, 
point Calymere, the true name of which is Cald-me'du, 
signifies the stony hill. There were two bishops of 
the name of Hirrotytus, one of whom resided in 
Arabia, and they were contemporaries. ‘The latter 
probably wrote the treatise concerning the pere- 
grinations of the Apostles, and died, A. D. 230.* 
DonotHeus, another bishop, born in the year 254, 
wrote also on the same subject ; and some fragments 
of his work are to be found at the end of the Chroni- 
con Paschale. There he asserts, that St. Tuomas died 
at Calamita (Cala-me du, ) which is synonymous with 
Calamina, or nearly so. 


Some MManicheans, at a very early period, went 
to the Malabar Coast: for, according to La Crozr, 
in his history of Christianism in India, the Christians 
of that country said, that, before they had sub- 
mitted to the jurisdic tion of the C atholicos, ov Nesto- 
rian Patriarch, and of course, before iis arrival of 
Mar-Tuome’,, there came into their country a cer- 
tain Mawnacavassar, who preached a new doctrine, 

seduced the people by his prestiges, and introduced 
his errors. La Crozer did not understand the mean- 


* Series Patrum, p. 62. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 79 


ing of the word Mannacavassar; but suspected 
that he was a Manichean. He was called, by the 
people of the Dekhin, Mani-Cavissar, which signi- 
fies the bard, the prophet Manz. Cavissar is de- 
rived from the Sanscrit Cavi, poetry, songs, and 
Is'wara, lord, chief: Cavrs’aAr, for Cavyrs'wara, 
signifies the lord of the song, or the chief bard, and 
is used in that sense in the Peninsula, according to 
Major MacKkENZIE. 


The two Afuselman travellers in the ninth centu- 
ry, and the Nubian Geographer, probably on their 
authority, declare, that there were many Christians, 
Manicheans, Jews, and Muselmans in Ceylon: and 
that the King encouraged their public meetings, and 
that the learned Hindus of that country used to fre- 
quent them; and that the King kept secretaries ta 
write down their respective histories, and the exposition 
of their doctrines and laws. ‘These two travellers were 
in Ceylon, at that time; and these meetings, as well 
as the places at which they were held, are called 
Charchita by the Purdn'ics, and appointed for the pur- 
pose of making Charchd, search or investigation, into 
new dogmas, and opinions, which began to disturb 
the peace of the country. 


The Muhamedans in India acknowledge the early 
establishment of the Christians in that country. Fer- 
RisuTa, in his general history of Hindostan, says: 
“ Formerly, before the rise of the religion of Islam, 
‘a company of Jews and Christians came by sea into 
the country (Malabar) and settled as merchants or 
Pishcéras. ‘They continued to live there: until the 
rise of the Muselman religion.”* 


* Asiat. Reg. Miscell. p. 151. 


80 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


Ill. The deciine of the Christian religion in India, 
must be attributed, in a great measure, to the pro- 
gress, equally rapid and astonishing, of Zslamism, in 
Syria, Persia, Egypt and Arabia. ‘The Christians in 
these countries, being in a state of distraction, no 
longer sent pastors to India; as we are informed in 
a letter written in the seventh century, and_ still 
extant, according to Mr. Turner. There we see 
the Nestorian Patriarch Jususasus of Abiabene, re- 
proaching the Metropolitan of Persia, with having 
shut the doors of the episcopal imposition of hands, 
before many people of Jndia: that the sacerdotai 
succession had been interrupted, from the maritime 
borders of Persia, down to Colon, or Coilan, a space 
of above 1200 Farsangs. This agrees with what is 
related by AZuselman writers, who say, that in the 
reion of the Carre AppuLMALEc, in the latter end 
of the seventh century, the Christians of India sent 
to Simon, the Syrian and Jacobite Patriarch of Alex- 
andria, requesting that he would send them a bishop.* 


The bulk.of the Christians of St. Thomé, according 
to Mr. Wrepvr, like the ‘Aryyas, consisted of con- 
verts from the higher classes ; and they were nearly 
upon the same footing with the Brahmens, and Nairs 
or nobles. They were originally much respected by 
the Hindus, and native princes ; and they considered 
themselves equal in rank with the Brahmens and 
Nairs, and claimed the same exemptions and priyi- 
leges, which were granted to them. Many amongst 
them, preserve till now the manners, and mode of 
life of. the Brahmens, as to personal-cleanliness, and 
abstaining from animal food: and the Roman missiona- 


* See D’HERBELOT’s Biblioth, Orient. v. Hend. u. Sind p- 415. 


? 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. $i 


ries, in general, adopt the same regimen, in order to 
gain credit among.them. 


’ These Christians were then very properly deno- 
minated “4ryyas and Tacshacas, or Peishcdra Brvh- 
mens, ‘shese and their Kings probably introduced 
the Christian Era into their country: but, in the 
same manner, that their sanctity, and their power in 
Incia are foretold in the Puran‘as, their fall is equally 
mentioned. When, says the compiler of the Vayu- 
Purana, their time is come, the ‘Aryyas will pass 
away, like the rest. 


These good ‘Aryyas are called ‘Sdlwas, ‘Sdlavas and 
‘Salyas in the Cumdarica-chan'da. These three forms 
are regular, but the last, according to Mr. Jo1n- 
VILLF, prevails in the Dekhin, and Ceylon; where 
they are called ‘Sdlé, Sdlyas, and Chdllyas, because, I 
suppose, they were the followers of ‘Sa’ta. ‘They are 
called also in that country, ‘Saca-R@ja-vansas, and. 
Sdla-cdnsas in the western parts of India. They are 
now followers-of Bupn’Ha; and in the Penmsula the 
Christians are included in the general denomination 
of Bauddhists, and their divine legislator is considered 
as a form of Bupp’Ha. 


The chief of the Sdlyas, or Aryyas, is called ‘Aryya@ 
‘stra by the followers of Bupp'ua, a Sanscrit com- 
pound implying as much. He was overthrown by 
Bupp ua, and yet he is called Pra~Aryya-sira, or 
Pra-Aria-seria, the venerable Sire, or chief of the 
“Aryyas. 


-The Manicheans, and the Muselmans, on the au- 
thority of the Apocryphal Gospel of the childhood 
of Curist, and that of St. Barnasas, of which 


82 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


they have copies in Arabic, Persian, and even in the 
western languages of Africa, represent Curisr, as 
the most complete Tacshaca, that ever existed. He 
was not only an excellent carpenter and statuary; 
but he was deeply skilled in the combination of all 
sorts of colours. For this reason, the ingenious H. 
Sykr, who has given us a translation of the Gospel of 
Curisi’s childhood, from the Arabic, and some frag- 
ments of the original in Greek, says, that dyers in 
Persia, consider Curist as their patron. It seems 
indeed, that the greatest part of. the Christians, in 
Arabia and Persia, were handicraftmen: and that 
they were accordingly called Peishe-cdras, both be- 
cause they were really so, and because they were 
the followers of the great Tacshaca or Peishe-cara. . 
According to D’Hergetor, the disciptes of Curist 
were called in Persian and Arabic, Kassarins or Kas- 
sdruns, and Havdryuns, that is to say, fullers and 
bleachers: and the priests of the Christians of St. 
Tuomas are called Kassanars to this day, perhaps 
for Kassdruns. - 


Mr. Jornvittr, in his account of Ceylon,* men- 
tions the arrival of numerous families of these Peishe- 
ciras, Peish-cdrs, into that island; and declares, that 
they were all artificers, and handicraftmen, as im- 
plied by their name, which is truly of Perszan origin ; 
though used all over Jvdia, in the northern parts of 
which, it is gencrally pronounced Peishe-Rdz. Ac- 
cording to T. Hyper, the Pdrsis in India, are all arti- 
ficers, and those in Karman deal chiefly in woollens, 


There were formerly Brdhmens in India, says the 


* As. Res. vol. vii, ps 433, 443. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION 1N INDIA. 83 


same gentleman, who were handicraftmen, such as 
weavers, weaving stuffs variegated with gold and 
silver, and of divers colours. These were called, from 
that circumstance, Peish-céri-Brdhmens. But they 
could not be followers of Branma’; for the employ- 
ments of weavers, and dyers, are absolutely incom- 
patible with the sacerdotal class: in extreme distress 
a Brahmen may sell stuffs, but even then, under very 
peculiar restrictions. They might however have 
called themselves Brdkmens, at least their priests, 
without any impropriety ; for every priest is really a 
Brahmen in his own religion. A few individuals 
might have become weavers; but then, they would 
lose their cast, and it is impossible that a numerous 
body. of Brdhmens should follow that profession. It 
is then much more probable, that they were not, 
strictly speaking, Brahmens of Hindu extraction; 
but the followers of a new religion, introduced. by 
foreigners, the disciples of a Petsh-cara, and them- 
selves Peish-caras, or at least many of them. 


- Their first arrival in Ceylon, happened nearly 
about 1845, after the famous war between Ra‘wa 
and Ra’vana, called the Ravana-Yudd@ha. Rama 
lived thirteen generations before the Cali-yuga, an- 
swering to about 400 years; and the Cati-yuga be- 
gan 1370 years before Curist. The completion of 
the 1845 years will then fall about 77 years after 
Curist. Visaya, according to Captain Manowy, 
was the first King of Ceylon, after this period of 
1845; during which, the island was desolate, and 
overrun by Demons. Then, says the same gentleman, 
the Christian natives insist, that this King Visgaya 
was crowned 77 years after the birth of our Saviour. 
This King Visaya was not a Bauddhist: for the. ~ 
ninth King after him ran the first who embraced 

12 : 


84 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


that religion; and his name was Deveni-patr. Alt 
the missionaries to China, were really Tacshacas, or 
Peish-cara-Brahmens, in the strictest sense of the 
word, as well as the pious Moravians: and Paut the 
Apostle was a Tacshaca, and a Peish-cira-Brahmen: 
and, by the account of Mr. Wrepe in his narrative 
of the Christians of St. Thomé, they were formerly 
Peish-caras: for, says he, they were in fact the only, 
or at least, the principal merchants in the country, 
tili the arrival of the Arabs. 


The ingenious Mr. Jornviirr, on the authority of 
several treatises in the Afagad‘hi language, the names 
of which he rientions, says, that there were even. 
Kings among these Persh-cara-Brahmens, in the Pen= 
insula, to the trumber thirty-five :* from the context, 
it appears, that some were in a collateral, and others 
in a successive line. The names of their kingdoms, . 
or rather their Metropolitan Cities, were Solo-patan ; 
Maha-patan (now Patan, the Baitana of ProLemy in 
the Dekhin, on the banks of the Géddveri, to the 
southward of Dowletabad); Curu (now Cauri, or: 
Coyr); Gadahare (Gauda); Macanda, (now Mahé- 
cunda-pillt); and Cés't. This is confirmed in the 
Bhégavat, Vayu, and Brahman da-purdas, in which 
it is declared { that Aryyd, or Saca, and ‘Sdlava was 
the name of a dynasty of Kings in India; and who 
were to be immediately followed by the mvasion of 
numerous swarms of other foreign tribes; and of the 
dynasty of these ‘Sacas, there were five and twenty 
Kings, according to the Purdn'‘as in the chapters on 
futurity. 


Solo-pdtan was a sea-port town, according to Cos-: 


ft As. Res. vol. vii, p. 443. ¢ In the Sections on Futurity. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 85 


mAs InpoPLEusTES, about the middle of the sixth 
century, on the Pepper or Malabar Coast. There 
were, says he, five sea-ports famous for trade, Parts, 
Mangarouth, Salou-patna, Nalo-patana, and Poudu-pa- 
tana; and all these names are truly Indian. There 
are several places in the Peninsula, called Parti-guddy, 
or fort of Parti. Mangarouth seems.to be Alanga- 
lore, and Nalo-patana, Nali-suram; Salou-patana is 
called Sooloo-patonow by the people of Ceylon, and 
had Kings of its own of the Peishe-caré-Brahmen 
tribe, or Christians. 


‘Salo-patan, otherwise ‘Sdlo-buram, and ‘Sdlo-pur, is 
the same with Héla-bor where St. Tuomas landed, 
and its present name is Cranganore. There he con- 
verted ‘Sayawna son of the King of that country. 


We read in the history of the Christians of St. 
Tuomas, that they had Christian Kings of ther own ; 
the first of whom, was called Batrartre, from the 
Sanscrit Bali-arhat. After several successions, one 
of these Christian Kings dying without male issue, 
adopted the King of Dzamper for his son, according 
to the custom of the country, though he was a hea- 
then, and appointed him his successor, 


That a society of Peishé-caras, weavers, and handi- 
craftmen, however numerous, should have Kings of 
their own, is inadmissible; unless they were upon 
such a footing, as the Christians were tormerly in the 
Peninsula. St. Tuomas converted the son of the 
King of some country on the coast of Malabar ; and 
the Puranas declare, that there was a dynasty of 
‘Aryya Kings. 


The name of Avdryya is not totally unknown in 
G3 : 


86 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


the Peninsula: they have still in great veneration, a 
cer‘ain Sibyl of divine origin, most pious, and good, 
called ‘Avya‘r; and who lived in the ninth century. 
A translation of some of her moral sentences, is in- 
serted in the seventh vol. of the Asiatic Researches, 
It seems she was conversant with the Christians of 
that country ; for among her proverbs, there are some, 


that are far from being in the usual style ot the 
Hindus. | 


The descendants, or followers, of ‘Sa’LAVA‘HANA 
are mentioned in the commentary upon the Cadpa- 
druma. In religious matters, and particularly in the 
east, they generally call the followers of any reformer, 
or legislator, his descendants. In the above com- 
mentary '‘Sa’rAva’HANA is declared to be a Jaina, 
meaning, either a follower, or aform of Jina. He is 
called there also, a ‘Srdvaca, or ‘Sévaca; that is to 
say a Peish-cara. In the western parts of India, as 
in Gurjar‘dt, they call all tradesmen, banyans, &c. ‘Sd- 
wacas, or Sabacas. The famous Carica’cHa‘RyA is 
supposed to have visited ‘Sa’Lava'Hana, at Pratish- 
tanain the Dekhin; and, according to the above com- 
mentary, he was born 993 years after the ascension of 
Jina, or 43 years B.C. “He travelled all over the 
Peninsula, teaching, and explaining the doctrine of 

INA; and particularly among the ‘Sdbacas. He is 
supposed to have taught ‘Sa’Lava’ HANA some pecu-_ 
liar rites, to be observed at the full, and new moon ; 
which, he promised, he would enjoin his descendants, 
or followers to observe. The posterity of a ‘Sébaca, 
or Peish-cdra, particularly in India, were necessarily 
Peish-caras, and ‘Sdbacas. A patronymic denomina- 
tion was also given to them; for they are called ‘Sé/- 
was, Sdlavas, aud ‘Sélbas in the Cumarica-c’handa, an- 
swering to the Arabic expression, of Ashab-al-Salib, 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 87 


or Salb, the followers of the cross, or of him, who 
was crucified. According to A. RoceEr, there is still 
in the Dekhin a considerable tribe of men called ‘Sa- 
lavadis, trom the Sauscrit ‘Sdlavadicas, the Sdélavas or 
followers of Sa’‘La. 


In the Véyu-purdn‘a, they are called Sacas, and in 
that passage, this name is used in the room of ‘Aryya 
te be found in other Puranas; and it is declared 
there, that they would appear with the dnd’hras and 
Pulindas ; the dynasty of the first began in the year 
191 after Curis: -and it is obvious from the context, 
that the dynasty of the Sacas, ‘Aryyés, or Salcas was 
contemporary with those of the dnd’hras, and Pu- 
lindas ; though we cannot fix precisely the time when 
it began. By Pulindas, they understand dynasties 
of Kings from the lowest and vilest classes in India, 


The descendants, or followers of King Saca, are 
called by Mr. JornvitLE, and Captain Manony, 
‘Saca-Raja-Vansas, a true Sanscrit expression, imply- 
ing as much: and we have seen, that there are still 
in the Dekhin, and Ceylon, some families or tribes so 
called to this day. I was greatly surprised, sometime 
ago, to hear from most respectable Pandits, that there 
was in the district of Benares, and in the province of 
Oude, a tribe of Rajaputras, who boasted of their de- 
scent from Sa’Lava’HANA; and that the chief of that 
tribe was considered as a living hereditary deity, 
and a form of Visunu, like their Sire Sa‘Lava‘Ha- 
wa. What is still more surprising, is, that this chief 
does what he can to conceal his divinity, and to 
make people believe, that itis not so. But in despite 
of his endeavours, some peculiar circumstances will 
occasionally betray him; and such an instance, it is 
said, happened last century. They are descended 


88 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


more probably from the followers of another SA‘LA- 
VA'HANA, a Manichean, or Maw es’himself, as T ob- 
served before. . 1O83 


rere " ‘ < 
‘ - 


As these Rajaputs call themselves Vais'yas, syno-— 
hymous with Sravaca or tradesman, it seems, that 
they orginally followed that protession. Probably 
some will say, that if the ‘Saca-Réaja-Cumdras, had 
been once Christians, they wust of course have lost 
their cast. This might be the case now: but; 1 do 
not believe it was'so formerly; aud then, the Pu 
rdwas afford us immediate remedy, for in the chap- 
ters on futurity, it is declared, that the Kines of 
Magad’ha would raise men of the lowest classes to 
the rank of Brahmens, and other superior casts; ex- 
actly like Jrrozoam, and other Kings of Ysrael. 
This prophecy was to take place, after the fall of the 
Andhra dynasty in the seventh century.* 


Besides, a whole district, a whole tribe, might em- 
brace another religion, without losing cast; the full 
exercise of its privileges being always confined to 
theinselves. For we must not think, that persons 
of the same cast, will communicate one with another 
all over dndia, and eat together, or of food dressed by 
another. The communication is confined to a few 
families in their neighbourhood, whom they know 
to be strict observers of the rules relative to their 
cast. The rest of the tribe are in a great measure 
outcasts to them. This almost incredible adherence 
to the punctilio of casts, was in a great measure ow- 
ing probably to the rapid increase of the religion of 
Bopp’, then afterwards of that of Curist, and 


i 


* See Brahman'da and Véyu-purdn'as, Section on Futurity. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA, 89 


Muuamen, and of the heresy of Manes, in the N, 

W. parts of Jndia, and also on the coast of Malébar, ' 
and Ceylon. Among the Christians in the Peninsula, 

be they Protestants, Roman Catholics, or Nestorians, 

there are Braéhmens, who are neatly upon tne same 

footing with the other Brdhmens: and, when ac- 

quainted with them, such civilities, as are usual 

amon well bred people, are never omitted. The 

Christian Brdhmens most rigorously abstain from 

beef, and animal food, though they say they can eat 
ofit. The greatest part of the Bradhmens in Persia, 

- Turan, and near Baku, eat beef, but never of the flesh 
of the cow, like many of the L:gyptians of old. There 
are several of these Brahmens settled at Benares ; and 
they are acknowledged as such, though not much 
respected, being nick-named V’éda brash'tas, or break- 
ers of the Védas; for a Brahmen si.ay be a heretic 
Without losing his cast, which is not so much con- 
nécted with his creed as might be supposed. In 

short, the Hindus acknowledge themselves, and it 
appears from their sacred books, that they ate beef 
formerly; but. they took care to inform me, at the 
same time, that they never ate of the flesh of the cow. 

Tt is deciared, that there are no Cshettris now, or in 

other words, that the second class no longer exists. 

Yet those, who have been raised to that rank from 
the lowest classes, are treated as such by every 

Brahmen. 


We read in the institutes of Menu, that all the 
C’hasyas, or those who inhabit the snowy mountains, 
have lost their cast, Yet they must have recovered 
it; for there are numerous families of Brahmens in. 
those countries, particularly in Almorah or Comanh, 
and much respected at Benares, who by no means 
consider the bulk of the inhahitants, who are Chasyas, 


90 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


as gutcasts. They assured me on the contrary, that 
they considered them as belonging to the second 
class, and that they are treated as such by every 
Brahmen, in despite of Menu and of the Purdnicas. 


Let us suppose some extensive district in India 
solely inhabited by Europeans, and that these were 
entirely willing to conform, in every thing, to the re- 
higion of BrRauma, and the manners of the Hindus. 
Their resolution would be highly approved. of by 
every Bréhmen; and they would soon find many to . 
officiate, and pray for them, on their being of course 
paid for their trouble. Let us add to this, numerous 
grants of land, villages, honours, privileges, and an 
entire submission to their will, they would soon treat 
them as Cshettris, as they do the present Raputs. 
It is true, they could neither intermarry, nor eat 
with the other Hindus, but the four great classes ne- 
ver intermarry, nor eat, but with particular families 
of the same tribe in their own class. After a few 
_ generations, they would say of these Europeans, what 

they say of the present Rayputs and Méhrattas, that 
they were not originally Cshettris nor Brdhmens, 
and are a spurious race. This would not do, it is 
true, for a single individual, who would find himself 
insulated, and lost entirely, unless he assumed the 
character of an anchoret or penitent. I had long 
conversations with learned Pandits, on the subject, 
and this was their opinion, and that even. they might 
have Brdhmens of their own, by studying their sa- 
cred books, and obtaining the necessary knowledge, 
which would not be attended with iuch difficulty.. 
With regard to their ancestors having ate beef, this 
could be no objection, as there is nota Hindu, whose 
ancestors, at some remote period, it is true, did 
not eat beef, and every sort of animal food, except 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN: INDIA. 91 


perhaps a few unclean sorts. Whatever man, say 
the learned, performs the duties (Carma) of a Cshet- 
tri, him you must consider as a Cshettr?. But what 
should put an end to the controversy, at least in my 
humble opinion, is that the M/dhrdttas, a numerous 
and respectable tribe of Brahmens, and Cshettris, axe 
acknowledged, all over India, to be foreigners from 
the western parts of Persia, who left their native 
country not 1200 years ago, as I shall shew in the 
appendix. Even though this alleged origin of the 
Mocirdttas should prove untrue, yet the universal 
acknowledgment of it 1s very much in favour of my 
assertion. 


The followers of Brauma’, and those of Bupm’na, 
were by no means indifferent to the progress of fo- 
reign creeds. ‘They often ordered conferences to be 
held, where the principles of these religions were 
inquired into, the history of their legislators, &c. 
This was practised in Ceylon in the ninth century, 
according to Renaupor’s two Muselman travellers ; 
and Bréhmens unanimously acknowledge, that this 
was their practice formerly, with regard to the Baudd’- 
hists ; and that these conferences were called Charché, 
or investigation, search, Cherche in French; and that 
towns appointed for that purpose, were called 
Charchita-nagari, one of which is mentioned in the 
Cumarica-chanda. ‘In the year 3291 of the Cali- 
yuga (or 191 after Curisr) King ‘Supraca will reign 
in the town of Cua‘RcHITA NAGARA, and destroy the 
workers of iniquity.” ‘This pomts out a persecution 
in religious matters, at a very early period. These 
conferences ended in bloodshed, and the most cruel 
and rancorous persecution of the followers of Bun- 
DHA, even from the confession of the Brédhmens 
themselves. They were tied hand and foot, aad 


92 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


thus thrown into rivers, lakes, ponds, and sometimes 
whole strings of them. Be this as it may, the fol- 
lowers of Bupp’Ha did not fail to retaliate whenever 


jt was in their power; for Dr. F. Bucnanan informs 
me, that m the Dekhin the Jainas make their boast 
of the cruelties that they exercised at different times — 


upon the Brdhmens, and that there are even inscrip- 
tions still extant in which they are recorded. ‘This 
general persecution was begun bya Brahmen called 
CuMA’RILLA-BHATTA CHA’RYA, and carried on after- 
wards by Sancara’cua Rys, who nearly extirpated 
the whole race. It is difficult to say when this 
took place; but as there were vast mumbers of 
Baud@hists in the Peninsula, in the Gangetic 
Provinces, and Gujar@t, in the ninth, tenth, 
and eleventh centuries, this general proscription 
could not of course have taken place at these pe- 
tiods. It is very probable that the Christians were 
occasionally involved in these persecutions, as the 
Christians of St. Tuomas are considered as Baud- 
dhists inthe Dekhin, and either their divine legisla- 
tor, or his apostle Tuomas, is asserted to be a form 
of Bupp Ha. 


The Hindus, and more particularly the followers 


of Bupp’Ha and Jina, fancy, that there are hidden ~ 


mysteries in certain numbers. It was so formerly 
in the west, among the heathens, the Jews, and the 
Christians. All over the world, the numbers one and 


three were considered as radical; and their combina- — 


tion was subject to whimsical rules. They are by 
no means to be added together, for ome and three, 
jn a mystical sense, are but one and the same thing. 
“We might suppose, that the square, and cube of 


three would be sacred numbers; but it is by no- 


means the case, Light is the mystical number, and 


—— t= * 


mae se ee, 
‘ 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 93 


three times eight, or twenty-four, is a sacred num- 
ber; and being multiplied by ‘¢hree, the product 
is mystical also, and the number of years of Jina’s 
life. The reason is, that one stands in the centre 
“representing Jrna, who is three and one. Light 
forms sprang from this toward the eight corners 
of the world, and each of these is three and one: 
but we cannot say, that these eight forms, with 
the original oze in the center, make either niné, or 
twenty-seven; for though each collateral form is per- 
fectly distinct from each other, yet it is individually 
the same with the original one. Sectaries, at an 
early period entertained accordingly strange notions 
concerning the number of years that Curtstr lived 
concealed, performed the duties of his ministry, and 
lastly about the length of his life. They conceived 
that every circumstance relating to so’ exalted a 
character, was mysterious. Some insisted that he 
lived thirty, thirty-three, forty, and others nearly, 
but not quite fifty years. StTerpHanus Gosarus has 
collected many of these idle notions, in the extracts 
-made of his works by Puortivs. 


Iy is not obvious at first, why ‘Sa‘tIva‘HANA is 


made to have lived eighty-four years; but it appears’ 
to me, that this number was in some measure a 


sacred period among the first Christians, and also the 


Jews, and introduced in order to regulate Easter- 
day; and it is the opinion of the learned, that’ it 
began five years before the Christian Era, and the 
fifth year of that cycle was really the fifth of Cunis?, 
but the first only of his manifestation to the world, 


according to the Apocryphal Gospels; and it was 


also the first of the Christian Era. In this manner~ 


the cycle of eighty-four years ended on the 79th 
of the Christian, which was the first of ‘Sa’tiva- 


‘ 


94 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


HANA’S Era, and was probably mistaken for the pe- 
riod of his life. It is mentioned by St. EprpHantus, 
who lived about the middle of the fourth century.* 


IV. The followers of Bupp’Ha, in Siam and the 
Burman Empire, mention the wars of their legislator 
with Deve-Ta’t, who, they say, is the legislator of 
the Christians. He is the same who is called a Tac- 
shaca also by the Hindus, and who manifested him- 
self in the first year of the Christean Era. They 
say that he was either a brother, or a relation of 
Bupp’Ha; or in other words, he was a collateral 
form of Buppn’Ha. They acknowledge some confor- 
mity between his doctrine and theirs; because, as 
they say, his disciples borrowed many things from 
Bupp’HA. He allowed them, however, to kill and 
eat all sorts of animals, and seduced very many of 
the disciples of Bupp'Ha; and, aspiring to sove- 
reignty, he waged war against Samawn‘a-Gau- 
taMa. He appeared at the head of a new sect, and 
engaged several kings and nations to join him. He. 
had the gift of miracles, and asserted that he was a. 
god. Dr'vz-Tar being several times worsted in this 
war, made overtures of peace, and Saman’a-Gav- 
TAMA consented, on condition that he would sub-. 
scribe to three articles which he was going to pro- 
pose. These were to worship, first, God; then his. 
word; and thirdly, the person who imitates di-. 
vine perfection, or,- in other words, to worship 
Bupp ua. This last article was rejected by Dr'vE- 
Ta’r or his disciples, and they went to war again; 
when De've-Ta’t was defeated in the forest of 
‘Salatiyah in the Peninsulat He was taken pri- 


eS 
* See BASNAGE’s History of the Jews, page 436. English 


translation. i 
4 This is noticed also in the As, Res. vol, vis p. 269. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 95 


soner, and empaled alive, with his limbs trussed up, - 
upon a double cross; and in that state hurled into 
the infernal regions. Saman’a-Gaurama, however, 
foretold, that in the end he would really become a 
god. Bupp’Ha, or Gautama is also represented 
waging war with Pra-Arra-Serta, for Pra-Aryya- 
‘Stra, the venerable chief, or Sire of the Aryyds or 
Christians ; and another chief of them, called Pra- 
Swane, or Pra-Swana, from his loudly preaching 
against the doctrine of Gauramua. Bupp’Ha and 
De'va-Twasu1'a’ are made contemporaries in this 
romance: but this can be no objection ; for it is only 
in allusion to the wars of their followers in subse- 
quent times. The learned are very well acquainted, 
that this mode of writing history once prevailed in 
the west at a very early period. 


The beginning of the seventh century is remark- 
able for the introduction of new eras among the 
civilized nations of the world. The Christian Era 
was introduced at Constantinople in the year 526; 
but, as the learned observe, it was a hundred years 
before it was generally adopted, and this was in the 
beginning of the seventh century. 


7 


In Persia, the era of YezDEGIRD began in the 
year 632; that of the Hera was introduced by 
Omar in the year 638. Those of Siam with the 
Burmdhs have an era beginning in the year 638; 
but as they borrowed every thing relating, either to 
their religion or their astronomy, from Ceylon, and 
the Peninsula of India, this period must have origi- 
nated there. The Japanese consider the ascension of 
the latter Bupp'Ha, under the name of Guso-sosaTz, 
as a memorable epocha; and it happened in the year 
631, because they say that he lived only fifty-nine 


96 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


years, and he was born in the year 572. According to 
the ‘Satrujaya-mahatmya, tne translation into heaven 
of Guso-Bosatz or Gasa-Vastsuta, that is to say, 
he who abides in the mortal frame of an elephant, 
and called in the above treatise Ski-HASTI-S'ENA, 2 
compound nearly of the same import, happened three 
years, eight months and fifteen days before the time 
of the Panchmaras, or Mvnamep and his four asso- 
ciates; that is to say, he died in November 617. 
But if we suppose with the Pawran‘ics, that he lived 
sixty-six years, his ascension will fall in the year 
638, according to the computation of the Burmans 
and Siamese. This Bupp ua was born in the year 
500, and reigned sixty-six years, according to the 
Cumdrica-chanda, in some copies of which we 
read 62 and 64; but he appears to be the same with 
Gasa-VasisutA, both being represented as the last" 
incarnation of Bupn’Ha; the Japanese having mis- 
taken the era of his manifestation as a god, or his 
death, for that of his manifestation as a man. 


Thus the Jainas in India say, that their legislator 
died in the year 1036 B.C. which the divines of 
Tibet consider as the year of his birth. 


The Christians of India, in the seventh century, 
were actuated by the same principles, and chose the 
supposed yeat of Curist’s ascension for the first of 
their new era. They were at that time in Jndia in 
the most. profound ignorance, through the want of — 
pastors, as we observed before; aud their religion 
was a strange medley of the Chrisizan, and of that 
of. Bupp’Ha, which prevailed at that time in the 
Peninsula ; insomuch, that M. Poxo considered some 
of the ‘Aryyas, in despite of their virtues, as idolaters. 
‘SALI-VA’HANA, or De'va-Tat, was considered as a 
brother or relation of Bupp’uA. » 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 97 


Our blessed Saviour entered on his mission when 
thirty years of age, like Bupp’Ha ; and like him, 
he was born of a virgin: the additional years were 
introduced from their mistaking the ecclesiastical 
cycle of 84 years for the period of his life ; and like 
them, the Christians made a point of reckoning their 
era from this supposed year of his ascension. This 
was not peculiar to the Hindus; the Christians of 
Egypt chose the various manifestations of Curisr, 
during his ministry, and the different events of his 
life, in preference to that of his birth. According 
to the appendix to the Agni-purama, the era of ‘Saca, 
or ‘SA‘LAVA‘HANA, was introduced into India, or 
began to prevail, in the year corresponding to that of 
Canisr 676, exactly 135 years after the death of 
a certain VicramaDitya. The bloody wars be- 
tween these two exalted characters, are supposed to 
have been only about their respective eras; and ViI- 
cRA MADITY4, in his dying moments, thought of no- 
thing but his era; whilst it is the general opinion, 
that it began at his death, and of course he could 
not be the author of it. One would imagine that 
‘Sa’LAVA/HANA’S era would have begun the moment 
that he became a ‘Saca, by putting to death another 
‘Saca, such as VicraMA’DITYA was; but it happened 
otherwise: ‘Sa’‘LAvAHANA thought no more of his 
own era, which was introduced after his death, by his 
followers, or adherents in the Dekhin; for it never 
was used in any other part of India except Bengal. 


It is therefore my humble opinion, that the Chris- 
tian Era was introduced, and new modelied in India 
by the Christians, and the Aryya, or Salacva, Kings, 
on the decline of the Christian religion; and used 
by them and other Hindus in their intercourse with 


them. 3 
q H 


98 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


It is supposed, that the Braéhmens are too proud to 
borrow any thing from their neighbours ; but this is 
by no means the case; and whenever they are ac- 
quainted with the circumstance, they will most can- 
didly acknowledge it, particularly astronomers and 


hysicians. . 
J 


After the conquests of ALexanper, and for many 
centuries after, there seems to have been an eager 
desire in India for foreign arts and sciences, curiosi- 
ties, instruments of music, wine, and even beautiful 
damsels from Greece. According to Eran and 
Dio Curysosrom, the Hindus, as well as the Persians, 
had the works of Homer translated into their native 
languages: and Puitostratus says, that they were 
well acquainted with the ancient heroes of Greece ; 
and that they had statues made by Grecian artists. 
And this is very possible, as the Greeks of Bactriana 
were in possession of the Panjab for more than a 
hundred and iwenty years. The Kings of Magad’ha 
repeatedly wrote to the successors of ALEXANDER 
for sophists, or learned men, from Greece ; and lately 
the famous Jaya-Srnua, Rdja of Jaypur, wrote to 
the King of Portugal for learned men, and he had 
several sent to him; and the King of France sent 
him also an astronomer, P. Bouprer. He had the 
elements of Evuciip translated into Sanscrit, part of 
which fell into the hands of Mr. Davis. There, it 
is said, that this valuable book, originally written by 
Vis‘vacarMa, or Twasur'a’, the artist god, had 
been lost for many thousand years; but was rescued 
from obscurity by the extraordinary efforts of Jaya- 
SINHA. 


He had also another voluminous treatise, called the 
Sidd@’hanta-Samrat, on geometry and astronomy, en- 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 99 


tirely compiled from various authors from the west. 
The greatest part of it is now in my possession, and 
was procured at Jaypur by Colonel Cotutns, resi- 
dent with Srnpra. Mr. Davis informs me also, 
that at the same time the work of THEropostus, on 
the sphere was translated into Sanscrit. As these 
thefts are not recorded, the circumstance is hardly 
known now to any of the natives. JAya-sINH’A 
had also an extract made of all the constellations in 
SENEx’s celestial planisphere, and instead of 72 aste- 
risms, he had 144 made out, by splitting all those 
that would admit of it into two or three new ones. 
The royal oak of course has found its way there, 
under the name of Jula-vricsha, the radical or 
primeval tree; and the Jndian is called ‘Sarendra, or 
the chief of archers; and as the Aindus have no 
altars, the constellation of that name has been con- 
verted into a footstool. 


There is a famous astronomer, whose works, or at 
least part of them, are still extant, well known all 
over India, and declared to have been a foreigner, as 
implied by his name of Yavana‘cua’RyA, or the 
Grecian philosopher, and who lived, according to tra- 
dition, a little before the time of Munamep. The 
Hindus give the name of Yavanas, or Greeks, to the 
inhabitants of the countries to the west of India, 
probably because the Greeks were once masters of 
Persia, and afterwards the seat of empire was fixed 
at Constantinople. From the account they give of 
him, it does not appear that he was a native of 
Greece, but only deeply skilled in the learning of 


the Greeks, having probably attended the university 
at Alevanaria. 


They say that he was a Bréhmen, born in Arabia, 
H 2 


100 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


the inhabitants of which country were at that time 
followers of Branuma’, and that the Sanscrit lan- 
guage was studied and well understood there by the 
learned. He came to Jndia, where he resided for a 
long time, and in his old age he returned to his na- 
tive country, in order to end his days at Mécshés- 
wara-sthan, or Mecca, in the performance of reli- 
gious duties. Dr. Buchanan informs me, that he 
saw in the Dekhin several tribes of Jainas, who in- 
sisted that they came originally from Zecca or Ara- 
bia ; and that they were expelled by Munamep, or 
his successors. 


There are certainly followers of Brauma’ and 
Brdahmens to this day in Arabia ; and I am credibly 
informed, by natives of that country, that in the inte- 
rior parts there are still many idolaters, whom they 
suppose to be followers of Brauma’, or Hindus, as 
they call them. The greatest part of the old names 
of places in Arabia are either Sanscri¢t or Hindi: and 
PLiny mentions two celebrated islands on the south- 
ern coasts of Arabia, in which there were pillars with 
inscriptions in characters unknown, I suppose, to the 
Greek merchants who traded there: but these were 
probably Sanscrit ; as one of these two islands was 
called Jsura or Is'‘wara’s island, and the other 
Rinnea, from the Sanscrit Hriniyd, or the island of 
the merciful goddess. 


The Hindus claim Mecca as a place of worship be- 
longing to them, and certainly with good reason. 
They say, that they were allowed to go and worship 
there for several centuries after the introduction of 
the religion of Munamep; -but were afterwards 
positively forbidden even to approach this sacred 
place. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 101i 


I always conceived, that there was only one sage 
of the name of YavaANacHARYa, Who was consi- 
dered as a foreigner; but having consulted lately 
several learned astronomers, they informed me, that 
there were no less than five who are considered as 
foreigners. Their names are C’natta, C’xutta, 
Romaca, Hitxa’sa, and Disuawa ; these, it is said, 
were Vévanas or Greeks. They certainly have very 
little resemblance with any Greek proper names, 
which we are acquainted with. Be this as it may, 
they are all supposed to have returned to their na- 
tive country, with an intention to end their days at 
Mecca. From this circumstance, I suspect that they 
were Greeks from the famous university of Aleran- 
dria, and Mecca was at a very early period a famous 
place of wotship.. Guy Partin mentions a medal of 
ANTONINUS, in which it is called Adoca the sacred, 
the inviolable, and using its own laws: and of this I 
took notice in my essay on Semiramis. . The: uni- 
versity at Alevandria was in a flourishing state, from 
the time of the Protemirs to the fourth and fifth 
centuries, and even till the time of MunameEp. 
Hindus often visited that famous city ; for Pronemy 
conversed with several in the third century, who ap- 
pear to have been well-informed men. 


These five foreign astronomers. wrote many books, 
but few remain; and the reason, inthe very words 
of my learned friends, is, that the substance of these 
treatises having been incorporated into more jrecent 
tracts, they were of course neglected, and afterwards 
lost. This acknowledgment from .b7dhmens surprised 
me not a little; but I find that astronomers in gene- 
ral, and learned physicians, are much more tractable 
and conversable than the other Hindus. 

H 3 


102 CRIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


Whatever may be our opinion about these five 
strangers, their names, and their country; yet from 
such an acknowledgment, and more particularly so 
from Hindus, we may rest assured, that there is 
some truth in it. The Hindus reckon three and twen- 
ty famous astronomers, eighteen of whom were na- 
tives of India ; and the five others, foreigners. These 
they insist were natives of Arabia: and if so, they 
were called Yavanacharyas, not because they were of 
Grecian extraction: but because they were skilled in 
the learning of the Greeks. Indeed their names, 
or rather surnames, appear to be Arabic. HALiacE, 
and CaTHANn are names well known to Arabian’ 
writers: and Esn-Drissawn is the name of a famous 
impostor born at dessus. Of Romaca or the 
MrecwHa’vata’ra, I took particular notice before, 
and DisHan is the name of Omar in several copies 
of RaGuu-na’THA’s list; and it was he who first 
established’ the era of MuHAmMeEp in the year of 
Curist 638, and for this reason, they supposed him 
also to be a great astronomer, as well as Romaca. 


There is another astronomer, called Cancua or 
Caweuam, and Cancuen, whom the Hindus sup- 
pose to have been a foreigner; yet Muselman writers 
say, that he was a Hindu, and perhaps he lived on the 
western frontiers of India. By D’Herse ort he is 
called Cancan-alt-Hinpi, KenKrErR, Krencar and 
Cancua. He wrotea treatise on astrology, in Hindi 
or rather Sanscrit, which was translated into Arabic, 

-and is said to be extant. He is perhaps the same 
with Mancuen, who, according to D’HERSsrxLo7, 
made so conspicuous a figure at the court of Harun- 
at-Rasnip, about the year 808, asa physician. The 
famous Danpamis or Dama-Damis is unknown to 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 103 


the Hindus; but the Muselmans in India call him 
Tumtum, and D’Herserot Tuomrxom-ar-Henpt, 
He is noticed by Aput-Fazix in his preface to tne 
third volume of the Ayin-Acberi. He was probably 
thus called, because he lived upon a Dumdum, or 
Dumdumé, which is a platform of earth, now more 
generally called a Chebootra or Thand, trom Sthana a 
stand. 


As the names, or rather the surnames of these fo- 
reigners, are in great part derivable from the Arabie, 
and from no other language, it is not improbable, 
but that several, if not all of them, were from Ara- 
bia, whatever their religious tenets might have been. 
The first of them, according to tradition, lived a 
little before Munamep, when the schools of Aler- 
andria, and Berytus in Phenice, were still flourishing. 
From that period, learning began to revive among 
the followers of MunaMmep; and of course this learn- 
ed man flourished, from the latter end of the sixth, 
or from the beginning of the seventh century to the 
time of At-Mamun, who reigned at Balkh in the 
tenth, and till the invasion of India by the Musel- 
Mans. 


The Hindus, at an early period, were famous for 
their knowledge of astronomy and astrology. The 
Jatter is entirely grounded upon the former ; and the 
accuracy of the decisions, and predictions, depends 
entirely upon the precision, with which the conjunc- 
tions, oppositions, and the various aspects of the hea- 
venly bodies are ascertained. In the first century, 
Hindu astrologers were in high estimation and repute’ 
at Rome, and none but the richest men could afford to 

H 4 


104 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


employ them. It appears, from Arrraw on the au- 
thority of MreastuEners,* that in the time of ALEx- 
ANDER, they had almanacks, with predictions con- 
cerning the weather, and impending calamities, such 
as they have at present, but more particularly son 
the Peninsula. STRABO says, that the Bréhmens pro- 
fessed astronomy ;} and he extols, at the same time, 
the attention they paid to learning. Q. Currivs ‘tes 
tifies, that they skilfully observed the motions of the 
heavenly bodies.t | Eusressus, who lived in - the 
third and the beginning of the fourth-century, says 
that it was a Hindu, who first delineated schemes of 
the heavens, or the principal constellations. His 
name was AnpuBartus, and he was considered as the 
founder of astronomy in India, and was famous for 
his skill and wisdom. According to Eusrsivus, he 
lived soon after the flood, in the western parts of Jn- 
dia ; and this famous astronomer probably formed, and 
delineated the twenty-seven lunar mansions,’ which 
seem to be the exclusive property of the Hindus. 
The opinion of Eusrsivs, and the other learned au- 
thors whom I have mentioned, was certainly that of the 
age in which they lived; and Srzaso says, that the no- 
tions of the Hindus concerning the universe, and the 
sphericity of the earth, were the same with those of the 
Greeks. They had a code of laws in the time of ALEx- 
ANDER, and they wrote upon a sort of paper; for 
thus I understand the words # ewer vas nexgornutvers, UP= 
on cloth well beaten.{ Srrazo takes notice, that in 
his time some asserted, that the Hindus were ac- 
quainted with the use of letters, whilst others denied 
it. He adduces the above passage from Ne‘arcuus in 


= ARRIAN de Indicis, + Lib. 15. 
t Lib. 8. § SrrRABo, lib. 15. p. 717. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 105 


proof of the former assertion; but the passage against 
it from MrcasTHENES 1s by no means conclusive; 
and seems to me, on the coutrary, to prove that they 
were acquainted with the use of letters; for it 1m- 
plies only that they used no writing in their courts 
of justice m camp, where every thing was settled in 
a summary way; and it is even so to this‘day. Be- 
sides, says our author, such is the probity of the 
Hindus, that all the time ‘he was in the camp of San- 
prRocuPtros, which consisted of 400,000 men, none 
‘but petty thefts were ever brought before these 
courts, and they (the judges) even could not write. 
Under such circumstances, neither any code of laws, 
nor much learning, or any writing, were necessary ; 
common sense and integrity were the only requisites 
on the'part of the judges.* 


During ‘the first centuries of ‘the Christian Era, 
the Hindus were very fond of ‘travelling. Their King’s 
sent frequent embassies to the Roman and Greek 

mperors: and some of these Embassadors \went as 
far as Spain. Others visited. Alevandria and Egypt, 
where Proxemy, in the third century, saw them, and 
conversed with them. Some of these Embassadors 
had long conferences, at Babylon, or rather Seleucia, 
with the famous. BAaRDESANEs:: and ‘pilgrimages to 
the Sthan-of Mahd-Bhaga, now Mabog, or Bambyke 
in Syria, were very common, according to Lucran, 
as cited by the authors of the ancient Universal His- 
tory. Evento this day, pilgrims from India go to 
Persia, Georgia, Moscow, and Arabia, Bootan, China, 
and even Siberia. ‘ 


ss * STRABO, lib, 15. p. 609. 


106 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


We are not to suppose, that there never was any 
intercourse between India and the more western 
countries of the old continent. ‘There were diviners 
and soothsayers in Syria and Palestine, from beyond 
the east, that is to say from beyond Persia, and of 
course from Jndia, 700 years before Curist, accord- 
ing to Isarau; and these, long after, found their 
way even to Rome; and, according to some, it was a 
Hindu, that had been shipwrecked in the Red Sea, 
who first pointed out the way to India by sea.* 
Xerxes, when he invaded Greece in the year 480 
B. C. had a large body of Hindus with him, whose 
officers were men of respectability, and there is little 
doubt but that they had Brdahmens with them. 


Three hundred years before our era, the Carthagi- 
nians had numerous elephants from India, and their 
mahots or drivers were Hindus. They seldom used 
the African elephants, which, says Puiny, were timo- 
rous, and could not bear the sight of the elephants 
from India.t The Carthaginians had no proper 
name for an elephant, and from the mahots they 
adopted the Hindu name Gaja, which they pronounc- 
ed Gaisa. Till that time, they, as well as the Phe- 
nicians their ancestors, called them Elaph or Alpha, 
beeves or oxen :{ and the Romans, when they saw 
Pyrruus’s elephants, called them also Luce Boves, 
and this was in the year 280 B. C. 


Porystvs || informs us, that in the year answering 
re 
* STRABO, p. 98 and 100. 
Sautmas. Exercitat. Plinian. p. 217. 


t HeEsycu. under the word Alpha. 
i} Poxys. Lib. 1. p. 42. and Lib. 8, p. 200. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 107 


to 251 B.C. Mererius defeated Asprusar in Sicily, 
killed six and twenty of his elephants, took one hun- 
dred and four, and sent them to Rome, with their 
drivers, who were Hindus. According to the same 
author, when Hannrspat crossed the Rhone 218 
years B. C. the drivers of his elephants were also 
Hindus ; and after this period, we find a Hindi word 
for an elephant introduced into J¢taly; for till that 
time, they called them large oxen. This name was 
Barrus, or Baro, as it is written by Istporus,* who 
says, that it was a Hindu denomination: Baro and 
Baronem in the objective case, are from the Sanscrit 
Baran'a and Baéran'am. From Barrus or Baro, the 
Latins made barritus, to express a noise like that 
made by an elephant, and also the verb barrire ; and 
probably the word Edur is derived from it. 


When Mantivs marched, at the head of an army, 
through Caria and Pamphylia, 189 years B.C. he 
came to the banks of a river, near the fort of Thabu- 
sion, called the river Indus, or of the Hindu; trom a 
Hindu mahot, who fell into it from his elephant, and 
was drowned ;f and this was on the borders of the 
greater Phrygia. Sometime before this, we read in 
Axcrpuron’s letters, that Hindus of both sexes, in 
the ‘capacity of servants, were not uncommon in 
Greece. Several emiyrations took place from India, 
and we find some tribes of Hindus settled in Colchis, 
where are Hindus to this day; and Hesycutus as- 
serts, that the Simdi of T'hrace came originally from 
India.t~ When Q. Merectius Crier was proconsul 
of Gaul, 59 years B. C. the famous Arrovisr king of 


* Isrpor. de origin. 
+ Tit. liv. lib. xxxviti. C. 14. 
$ Bryant’s Mythol. Vol. 3d. p. 217. 


108 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


the Swevt made a present to him of some Hindus, 
who had been shipwrecked on the German shores. 
They were merchants, who had ventured thus far 
from their native country.* In the Vrihatecatha we 
read of several Hindu merchants, who visited the 
Sacred Isles in the west, and being shipwrecked, they 
were made slaves; and some of them were so fortu- 
nate, as to obtain their liberty, and to revisit their 
native country. It is declared there, that they went 
a great part of the way by land, and then embarked 
ata place called Jtanca:~ another harbour is men- 
tioned also under the name of Pauta-pur, and this 
subject I shall resume when I come to treat of the 
Sacred Isles. SvRAHLENBERG saw a Hindu at To- 
bolsk, who went from India to that place, through 
China. Brut saw another Hindu. from Madras, on 
the banks of the Argoné ; and Mr. Duncan, Gover- 
nor of Bombay, introduced another to my acquaint- 
ance, who had been there also. The distance from 
the Indus to England is one fourth less than that 
-from Madras to Tobolsk through China ;t and the 
embassadors of Porus travelled as far as Spain 24 
years B. C. The constant embassies, sent from India 
to the Emperors of Rome and Constantinople, are well 
known to the learned, even as late as the sixth cen- 
tury ; but in the seventh, the growmg power of the 
Muhamedans became an insurmountable obstacle to 
any further intercourse. Besides, the present state 
of society, manners and politics in the west, make it 
impossible for Hindu pilgrims to travel through E£u- 


* Cornel. Nepos apud PLiIn. SUETON. CicERo in Vatin. c. 10. 
PuiuTarcu, &c. 
+ Vrihat-cat’hé Lambace or Section the 5th called also Cha- 


turddrica. ; 
} STRAHLENBERG p. 103. Asiat. Researches vol. vi. 483. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 109 


rope. ‘They would be stopped at every step, and oc- 
casionally confined; and instead of alms, they would 
receive insults only from the lower classes. 


But the most famous of all, was the embassy sent 
by Porus to Aucustus: the embassadors went to 
Spain, where he was at that time, 24 years B. C. ac- 
cording to Orosrus; and the purport of their com- 
mission was to enter into an alliance with him. But, 
as some time was spent before any progress could be 
made in this affair, other embassadors were sent by 
Porus, some years after, when they found the Em- 
peror at Samos. This Poxus in his letter boasted, 
that he was lord paramount over 600 kings; and, in 
the supplement to the Bhavishya-purdna, it is de- 
clared, that no less than 800 kings were the vassals 
of the famous Vicrama’pirya. With them were. 
also embassadors from Panpion, king of the south- 
ern parts of the Peninsula; and they had in their 
train a Brahmen, a native of Brigugosha (now Ba- 
roach) called Cuanca the Sarmana, ZarManos 
Cuacas. He chose to remain behind, and attached 
himself to Aucustus, in whose service he remained 
for some time, in the capacity, it seems, of an augur 
or soothsayer.* 


When the Emperor was at Athens, Can‘ca the 
Sarmana caused himself to be initiated into the sa- 
cred mysteries, though it was not the usual time; and 
soon after he voluntarily ended his days on a funeral 
pile. Catanus followed ALtexanpeER of his own 
accord, and ascended likewise the funeral pile at 
Pasargada. There was even a large detachment of 


* Srraso. Dio, PLuTARCH and NicoL. DAMASCEN. 


110 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


Hindus, who followed ALExaNnDER into Persia, and 
which we find on the borders of Media, with Eume- 
Nes, eight years after the death of the former. It 
was commanded by the brave Ketrus, probably 
Kevru, or the fiery meteor of war; and there was cer- 
tainly little, or no compulsion used by the Greeks, 
for they took even their wives and families along 
with them. Kererus died fighting valiantly, and his 
two wives insisted upon burning themselves with the 
dead body; but it was found that the eldest was 
with child, and therefore she was prevented from fol- 
lowing her husband. The youngest went triumphant- 
ly, and was led by her brother, and other relatives, 
and servants, to the funeral pile.* 


CrLauptius received also an embassy from a king 
of Ceylon: and when Trasan was marching against 
the Parthians in the year 103, some princes of India 
sent embassadors to him, requesting him to settle 
some disputes between them and their neighbours, | 

robably the Parthians. It is remarkable, that dur- 
ing this expedition, Trasan was constantly rode 
with oysters from Great Britain; and which were 
preserved fresh, by a particular process, discovered 
by one of the first epicures of the age. There were 
embassadors from India sent to Anronrnus Prous, 
to DiocreTIAN, and Maximian; to ‘THEODOSIUS, | 
Heracrivs, and Justixran; and we read ft of two 
Hindu kings, putting themselves under the protection 
of DiocteTrianw and Maxrmian, and their names 
were Gennoton and Esatecu. In the year 274, 
Auretian took Palnyra, and made Queen ZenoBra 


* Pyopor. Sic. lib. xix. C. 2. 
¢ Anc. Univ. Hist. vol. xviii. p. 78. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 111 


prisoner. There he found a body of Hindus, whom 
he carried to Rome, to grace his triumph. Damas- 
cius, who was contemporary with JusTInIAN, in 
his life of Istporus, relates several curious anecdotes 
of Severus, a Roman, but by birth an African, and 
who lived in the time of the Emperor ANTHEMIUs. 
SEvERus was a philosopher of most austere manners, 
and great learning, and fond of the society of learned 
men. After the death of that Emperor in 473, he 
retired to Alerandria, where he received at his house 
several Braéhmens from India, and whom he treated 
with the greatest hospitality and respect. Dates and 
rice were their food, and water their beverage, and 
they shewed not the least curiosity, refusing to go 
and see the most superb fabrics and palaces, with 
which that famous city was adorned.* 


It is remarkable, that ancient travellers make no 
mention of the monstrous statues of the Hindus. 
The historians of ALEXANDER take notice of the 
Sibe, carrying among their standards the image of 
Hercutes, whoever he was. The Suraseni round 
Muttra on the Jumnd, had also a statue of Hercu- 
LES,f or BaLa-DEVA. PuiLosrrarus takes notice 
of some figures cut out of the rock beyond Hardwar ; 
but these statues had nothing monstrous in them, no 
more than those made by Grecian artists in the Pan- 
jab, according to the same author. It is not improba- 
ble then, that at that time the Hindus had not yet at- 
tempted to represent, either in stone or wood, their 
monstrous deities. “They were first introduced to our 


* Photii Bibliotheca, p. 1040 and SurpAs v. SEVERUS. 
+ Asiat, Researches, vol, v. p. 294. 


112, ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


knowledge by Jews, according to CLaupian, who 
wrote in the fifth century, and who says: 


Jam frugibus aptum 
FEquor, et assuetuim sylvis delphina videbo : 
Jam cochleis homines junctos, et quidquid inane 
Nutrit JUDAICIS, qua pingitur India, velis. 


From this it appears, that in his time the Romans 
adorned their houses with tapestries, worked by 
Jews, and representing all the wild and monstrous 
figures of Hindu mythology, such as men growing 
out of shells. This is an obvious allusion. to ‘San- 
c’Ha’surA, and his tribe living in shells, and peeping 
eut of them in ‘Shancha-dwipa or Zangh-Bar. 


In the year 529, a king of the Hemiarites in dra- 
bia, called At-Mon par, a general name for the kings 
of that tribe, and generally residing at Hirah, invaded 
Syria; and the Roman exarchs, or Governors, were 
obliged to fly to India for shelter, and certainly by 
sea, as the Romans were at war with the Persians,* 
and probably they found no other means of escaping, 
but by getting on board of some ship just going to 
sail for Lndia. 


There were at Rome augurs, and diviners from all 
nations, but mostly from Chaldea. ‘There were some 
from Armenia, Egypt, and even a few Jews, and 
particularly women from that nation. There were 
also astrologers, says JuvENatL,{ from Phrugia 
and India; and none but very rich people employed 
these, and this was about the middle of the first — 


; peed he ee 


* Dv Fresnoy Chronolog, A, D. 529. 
+ Sat. vi. v. 584 and 549. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 1138 


century. There were many /Zindus at Alexandria, 
according to Proremy, who lived in the beginning 
of the third century. The inhabitants of Europe, at 
an early period, did by no means show so much 
readiness in leaving their native homes to visit dis- 
tant countries, and particularly Jndia. We are told 
that PyrHacoras and Democritus visited the 
Hindu sages ; but these accounts are delivered in too 
vague a manner, to deserve any credit. 


The first European upon record, who visited India, 
is ScyLax, a Greek and experienced seaman, sent by 
Darius Hysraspes above 500 years B. C. to explore 
India. For this purpose he went to Caspatyrus or 
Caspapyrus, now Coshabpoor upon the Hydaspes, called 
also Indus, and by the Hindus the lesser Stndhu 
or Sindh. Waving made the necessary arrangements, 
he sailed down a large river, which flowed toward 
the east, and then he entered the ocean, and re- 
turned by the way of the Red Sea,, and sailed to the 
bottom of it, where his voyage ended, after a circum- 
navigation, ‘both on the river and by sea, of two and 
thirty months. ‘This river is unfortunately called the 
Indus by Hrrovotus; otherwise, from the particu- 
lars, such as the course of that river, and the time 
that his circumnavigation lasted, one would suppose 
that it was the Ganges; and indeed many learned 
men are of that opinicn. 


The next European who visited India was the phi- 
losopher Pua#pow, about 430 years B. C. but it was 
not an act of his own. He is said to have been an 
Elean, probably because he was a native of E/ea in 
the ‘ae Asia. It is recorded of him, that he was 
taken, and detained by Jndians and afterwards sold 
by them asa slave. It is probable, that he had been 

7 J 


114 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


sold first to some Persian nobleman, sometime after 
appointed to the government of some district in 
India, where Puapon was carried away by a party 
of Hindus. Be this as it may, we find him afterwards 
at Athens, as a slave again, to a man, who kept wo- 
men and handsome young men, for the purpose of 
prostitution. He was redeemed by ALciBiaDEs at 
the request of Socrates, whose disciple he became. 
He founded the Hiac school, called Hretrian after- 
wards, from its having been transferred to Eretria in 
Eubea, by Menepemus his successor.* 


There was a regular trade carried on, to India, from 
the accesson of the Protemres to the throne of 
Egypt, to the conquest of that country by the Ro- 
mans, which did not cease till the middle of the se- 
venth century, when the growing power of the Mu- 
hamedans put an insurmountable obstacle to a regular 
intercourse. The Grecks-under the ProLtemisgs, had 


settlements at Callan near Bombay; but they were © 


driven out of them by the native kings. It seems 
also from the Peutingerian Tables, that the Romans 
had a considerable settlement near Muziris now 
Mirjee, where they had erected a temple in honour of 
Aveustus ;f and they had also two cohorts, or 1200 
men, to protect their trade. The imports and ex- 
ports were the same as they are to this day, as it ap- 
pears from Arrian’s Periplus, and the Justinian 
code. | | 


The Greek Kings of Bactriana ruled over all the 
countries on the banks of the Jndus, even as far as 
Sirhind, during a period of 129 years, that is to 


* See Suipas, Hzsycutus de illustrib; and LAERTIUS. 
+ See Peutingerian Tabies. 


| 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 115 


say from the year 255 to 126 B. C. Even some of 
them were in possession of the western parts of the 
Gangetic provinces: and DemeErrivs is mentioned as 
one of them; and according to Sig. Bayer, he 
never was King of Buctriana or Balk, but of some 
inland part of India, extending beyond the Ganges, 
about the year 195 B.C. According to Strago, his 
predecessor Mrenanver conquered the countries to 
the east of the Hypanis, as far as the Jumnd.* His 
_ empire extended from Pattalena, to Zizerus, which I 
take to be the small, but famous lake called Jid-jer, 
or the spring of Jid, noticed by Cresras, under the 
name of Sid, and a little to the westward of the Jumnd 
and Dilli.t ms 


To these conquests Demetrius added some mari- 
time countries to the eastward of Patalene, such as 
Sigertis, and the kingdom of Tessariostus, now the 
countries of Cachha and Gujjar dt, as I shall show in 
the appendix. . 


There are now numerous Hindus roving all over 
Arabia and Persia, as far as Astrachan, or settled in 
some places of trade for a few years only, when they 
return to India.{t for I take no notice here of nu- 
merous tribes of Hindus, who are considered as na- 
tives of Persia, Turan and Colchis or Georgia: they 
are called Hindi all over these countries, and have 
been settled there from time immemorial.§ 


* Srraso, Lib. 11. p. 516. 

“+ See Maurice’s Modern History of Hindoston, vol. 1. p. 95. 
It is called erroneously Bhedar in the Ayin-Acberi, vol. 2. p. 107. 

t Forster's Travels, vol. 2. ~ 

§ According to the late Nabob Meupi-Aui-KuHAn, a native of 
Mesched, See Essay on the origin of Mecca, Asiatic Researches, vol. 6. 


re 


‘ 


116 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


From the Malabar Coast they go to Mosambique, 
where they have agents, who generally reside there 
seven or eight years; and STRAHLENBERG takes no- 
tice of a merchant from the Malabar Coast, at Astra- 
chan.* From Surat and Gujjarat, they go to Mascat 
and other trading places in Arabia, where Brah- 
mens are to be found also, according to N1zBUHR. 
Arrtan in his Periplus says, that the inhabitants 
of the island of Dioscoridis (now Socotora,) consisted 
of Arabs and Hindus, with a few Greeks, settled 
there on account of the trade to India. ‘The famous 
Pra‘n-purt told me, that when he was at Baha- 
rein on the Persian Gulf, he was informed by the 
Hindus, whom he found settled there, that they used 
to go formerly to Egypt, where they had houses of 


agency, but that they had left off going there for - 


about two or three generations. 


This shows, that there was between the Greeks, 
Romans, Carthaginians and the Hindus, a constant 
and reciprocal intércourse (which is by no means the 
case now) for a period of 1200 years at least: and to 
which nothing, but the overgrowing power of the 
Muselmans, could put a stop. In visiting the sages 
of Babylonia and Egypt, the Hindus must have been 
greatly surprised, and their vanity humbled, when 
they heard them talk of their remote antiquity. 
Then, and not before, in my opinion, they resolved 
not to be behind hand with any of them; and cer- 
tainly they have succeeded wonderfully. Neither 
the Greeks and Romans, nor the Turdetani, a Galic 
nation, though settled in Spain, according to STRABO, 
carried history, and the beginning of things, beyond 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 117 


a period of 6000 years, exactly like the Jews, and 

Hindus formerly, according to Mecasruenrs. ‘The 

Gothic tribes entertained also the same nations, as 

peneets from the cosmogony of OrpHEus, who was a 
roth.* 


The Hindus had the system of the Yugas long be- 
fore; but this was not peculiar to them, for it pre- 
vailed all over the west, and Hestop, who lived be- 
tween 900 and 1000 years before Curist, declares 
that Cali-yuga was just beginning; and the Jainas 
assert that it began about that time. Though the 
Yugas are of a very great antiquity all over the world, 
yet the Hindus did not think of stretching their du- 
ration to such an enormous length, till a period com- 
paratively modern ; and the Yugas in the west were 
also the component of their grand Calpa, which con- 
sisted equally of 12,000 years, but with this differ- 
ence, that in the west these were considered as na- 
tural years, which is not the case in the east, at least 
now. 


The first time we heard, in the west, of this extra- 
vagant system of chronology, was about the middle 
of the ninth century; when we were informed by 
Axpu-Mazar, a famous astronomer, who lived at the 
court of Ar-Mamuwn at Balkh, that the Hindus rec} 

_koned from the flood or the beginning of the Cal- 
yuga, to the Hejra, 720,634,442,715 days, or 3725 
years. 


There is obviously a mistake, originating either 
with the transcriber or translator: but it may be ea- 


* See GESNER’s notes on the fragments of ORPHEUS, also 
FapRricius Cod, Pseudepigr. 


118 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


sily rectified. There is exactly that number of years, 
from the beginning of the Cali-yuga to the Hejra: 
but that immense number of days are reckoned from 
the creation to the Cali-yuga, according to BRawMaA- 
Gupra’s system. Mr. Davis, after reading this pas- 
sage in my manuscript, kindly undertook to examine 
it more particularly, and I beg leave to refer to his 
learned note on the subject, in the appendix at the 
end of the essay on VickaMma’pitya and SaLiva- 
HANA,” 


Till that time, the extravagant numbers of the 
Hindus. were unknown to the Greeks and Romans, 
with whom they kept up a constant intercourse, 
That the Hindus concealed the whole from them, is 
inadmissible: for it is natural to suppose, that they 
were equally vain with the rest of mankind. Weare 
well acquainted with the pretensions of the Egyptians 
and Chaldeans to antiquity: and surely they did 
not take the trouble of mventing fables to conceal 
them. On the contrary, MEGAsTHENES, a man of no 
ordinary abilities,; who had spent the greatest part 
of his life in India, ina public character, and was 
well acquainted with the chronological systems of 
the Egyptians, Chaldeans and Jews, made particular 
inquiries into their history, and declares, according 
to Cremens of Alexandria, that the Hindus and 
Jews were the only people, who had a true idea of 
the création of the world, and the beginning of 
things: and we learn from him, that the history of 
the Hindus did not go back above 5042 years, from 
the invasion of Zndia by ALExanpeR. Manuscripts 
differ; some have 5042, or 6042: others have 5402 
> tc nh ec i cn ON 
* As. Res. v. 9. p. 242. 

_ + See Asiatic Researches, vol. 5. p. 290. 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 119 


years, and three months; for he calculated even the 
months; but the difference is immaterial in the pre- 
sent case. 


This period of the Hindus was adopted afterwards 
by the Persians, or was common .to both: and the 
latter reckoned, from the creation to the era of Mz- 
LIC-sHAH, in the year 1079 of Curist, 6,586 years ;* 
that. is, they placed the creation 5507 years before 
Curist. It appears also from Grorce of Trebizond, 
that the Persians reckoned, from the flood to the 
year of Curist 632, or eraof YEzpEJIRD, 3,735 
years, ten months, and twenty-three days, conform- 
ably to the ideas of Apu-mazar: and this is again 


the period of the Cal-yuga of the Hindus. From 


ALEXANDER’s entering Jndia, to the same era of Mz- 
LIc-sHAu, there are 1408 years, which deducted from 
6,586; there remains 5178; and this I believe was 
originally the true reading in MreasTHENes’s ac- 
count of India. Be this as it may, the difference, re- 
latively speaking, is not very considerable, and is im- 
material in the present case. 


Curist was the son of a carpenter, and himself a 
carpenter, or Zacshaca in Sanscrit. The Persians 
called him a Peishé-cara, handicraftman and _ trades- 


‘man. In the Calpa-druma-Cailicd, a treatise of the 


Jainas, and in my possession, ‘Sa’La-va‘Hana, Called 
by the Hindus a Tucshaca, and said to be also the son 
of a Tacshaca, Tash'td, or Twashta, is declared to 
have been a ‘S?’avaca or ‘Sdvaca, a tradesman :-and in 
the western parts of Jndia, as in Gurzar‘dt, all ban- 
yans and tradesmen are called ‘S@vacas. The words 
of the Calica are, ‘Sa‘Lava’uana Ndma Raja Jaina; 
Parama ‘Sravaca-pati. The King. called ‘Saava’- 
7 \) 


* BAILLI’s Astronom. Ind. p 251. 
14 


120 CRIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


HANA Was a Jaina, and the lord and master of thé 
‘Sriacacas,” or ‘Sdbacas, as more generally written and 
pronounced. 


Even the name of ‘Sa’ti-vaA‘HAN, ‘Sa‘LiBAN, and 
‘Sa’LBAN, as he is called in the spoken dialects, seems 
to be of Persian and Arabic origin, as well as Petsheh- 
-car, the name of his followers. Salib, or Sulib, signi- 

.fies a stake, a cross, a gibbet, the Roman Furca-; like 

the Greek Eravgec, Salib or Salb signifies also crucified, 
and in the plural form, it becomes Sdlub, and Salban, 
Ashab-al-Salib, means the Christians in Arabic, 
that is to say, the followers of the crucified. The 
best Sanscrit expression for this is ‘Suliva, ‘Sdlava, 
or Sawa in a derivative form, and these are indif- 
ferently pronounced Sdlaba, or ‘Salba, and in the 
plural number ‘Sdlabdn, and Sdlban. In the Cumé- 
rica-c handa, these ‘Sdlavas, or Salbans, are mentioned, 
in the same page with ‘Saca, or Sa’LA-VAHANA, 
and as existing at the time this Purana was written. 
The copy of that section of the Scanda-purén'a in my 
possession, was written about 230 years ago in Gur- 
jarat: and the writer or transcriber, well knowing, 
that ‘Sdvaca was a title of ‘Saca, or Sa‘Liva’HANA, 
wrote first ‘Sévaca, instead of ‘Saca; but recollecting 
himself, and finding that there was a redundant syl- 
lable in the verse, he drew two small strokes with 
the pen across the middle syllable, showing, that it 
was to be left out, and the whole word to be read 
‘Saca. In the Lucknow copies of this section, no 
mention is made of Saca, and the whole verse is 
omitted. 


The copies from Chitra-cuita, have the whole verse; 
but the name of ‘Saca is variously written, sometimes 
‘Sacra, Sraca, &c. These readings are obviously 
erroneous, There were no other copies of that sec- 


q 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 191 


tion at Benares but those procured from Chitra-cita, 
and Lucknow, till I was lately presented with a neat 
copy 230 years old, from Gujarat, by a Pandit of 
that country. The Lucknow copies are tolerably ac- 
curate; but those from Chitra-ciéita are miserably 
mangled, through the carelessness of transcribers. 
The passage relating to ‘Saca, is in the following 
words; Tatah trishu sahasrésh ‘sate chapyadhicéshi 
cha; ‘Sacd° nama bhavishyas'cha yétidaridra haracah = 
and whether we read ‘Saca or ‘Savaca, it points to the 
same individual. , 


The idea that Sa1tiva’HANA was borne on a tree, 
eross, or furca, they might have borrowed from the 
Manicheans, who represented Curist stretched upon 
a tree. Véhana, béhana, and vaha or baha, are nouns 
derived from the verb vah, veho, to carry; and used 
both im an active and passive sense. ‘Thus Havya- 
wahana is one of the titles of dgnz, or fire. InpDRa 
is called Mégha-vaéhana, or the cloud borne; Gand’- 
ha-vdha is the wind, from its being the vehicle of 
perfumes. The clouds loaded with water are called 
Vari-vaha. Thus Sdl-bah, Hal-bah, ‘Sal-bahana, &c. 
may signify either he who carries his cross, or who 
was borne, or exalted upon the cross. Crue ifer is 


one of the titles of Curist, perfectly answering to 
“Sala-baha. 


_ The Hindus are very fond of forms or emanations, 

which they consider to be the same with the original 
from which those emanations sprang; and disciples 
are very often considered as so many forms of their 
masters. It is then very possible, that they should 
have considered. the Apostle and disciple, who first 
preached the Gospel in Jndia, as a form of Curist, 
or as Curist_ himself, after several centuries had 
elapsed; and thus possibly have mistaken the year 


p 
199 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


of the death of the form, or disciple, for that of his 
principal. Now some of the Apostles lived. to a 
great age; and St. Tuomas, for instance, is sup- 
posed to have lived seventy-three years, and to have 
suffered martyrdom about the seventy-fourth or se- 
venty-fifth year of the Christian Era, 


The year of the death of Vicrama‘rca, and that 
of the manifestation of ‘Sat-pa’HAN, are acknow- 
ledged to be but one and the same; and they are 
obviously so, according to the Cumdrica-chawda, 
that remarkable year was the 3101st of the Cak- . 
yuga, and the first of the Christian Era, thus coin- 
ciding also with the Samaritan text, which is a re- 
markable circumstance. 


__ Some learned Pandits, from the western parts of 
India, are of opinion, that the era of Vicrama’pI- 
TYA was originally reckoned from the first year of 
his reign, in the year 3044; and that, after a reign 
of fifty-six years, his death happened in the year 
3101. ; 


This was certainly the opinion of the author of 
the Cumaricd-chand'a, and of the Pandits who assisted 
Apu Fazit, who says, in his summary of the his+ 
tory of the Kings of A/é/ava, that Vicrama’DITYA’s 
era began the first year of his reign;, and this makes 
this legend more consistent and probable. 


In the Vrihat-Cathad, ‘Saviva‘Hana is called Nri- 
sinha, or the man-lion, answering to the lion of the 
tribe of Jupa; and one of the forms of Bupp’Ha is 
called Nri-sinha, both by the Pauran‘ics and the 
Baudd’has. “Sacti-sinha, or the energetic lion, is also 
the name of ‘Sa’Liva’HANnaA in the appendix to the 
Agn-puran'a. According to the Vrihat-catha, Vi- 


‘ 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 123 


crAMa’DiItya marched from his capital city Pdtali- 
putra, or Patna, to wage war against Nri-sinna, 
King of Pratisht‘hana. 


VI. The cross, though not an chject of worship 
among the Baudd’has, is a favourite emblem and de- 
vice with them. It is exactly the cross of the A/ani- 
cheans, with leaves and flowers springing from it, 
and placed upon a mount Calvary, as among the 
Roman Catholics. They represent it various ways; 
but the shaft with the cross bar, and the Calvary 
remain the same. The tree of life and knowledge, 
or the Jambu tree, in their maps of the world, is 
always represented in the shape of a A/anichean 
cross, eighty-four Ydjanas (answering to the eighty- 
four years of the life of him who was exalted upon 
the cross), or 423 miles high, including the three 
steps of the Calvary. 


This cross, putting forth leaves and flowers, (and 
fruit also, as I am told) is called the divine tree, the 
tree of the gods, the tree of life and knowiedge, © 
and productive of whatever is good and desirable, and 
is placed in the terrestrial Paradise. Acaptus, ac- 
cording to Puortius,* maintained, that this divihe 
tree in Paradise, was Curist himself. In their de- 
lineations of the heavens, the globe of the earth is 
filled up with this cross and its Calvary. ‘The divines 
of Tibet place it to the S$. W. of Meru, towards the 
source of the Ganges. The Manicheans always re- 
presented Curist crucified upon a tree among the 
foliage. The Christians of India, and of St. Tuomas, 
though they did not admit of images, still enter- 
tained the greatest veneration for the cross. They 


* Phot. Biblioth. p. 403. 


184 ORIGIN AND DECLINE OF THE 


placed it on a Calvary, in public places, and at the 
meeting of cross roads ; and it is said, that even the 
heathen Hindus in these parts paid also great regard 
toit. Ihave annexed the drawings of two crosses, ~ 
from a book entitled the Cshétra-samasa, lately given 
to me by a learned Baudd@’ha, who is visiting the holy 
places in the countries bordering upon the Ganges.* 
There are various representations of this mystical 
symbol, which my friend the Jati could not explain 
to me; but says, that the shaft and the two arms of 
the cross remain invariably the same, and that the 
Calvary is sometimes omitted. It becomes then a 
cross, with four points, sometimes altered into across 
- eramponné, as used in heraldry. 


In the second figure there are two instruments de- 
picted, the meaning of which my learned friend, 
the Jati, could not explain. Neither did he know 
what they were intended to represent ; but, says he, 
they look like two spears: and indeed they look very 
much like the spear and reed, often represented with 
the cross. The third figure represents the same 
tree, but somewhat nearer toits natural shape. When 
it is represented as a trunk without branches, as in 
Japan, it is then said to be the seat of the supreme 
One. When two arms are added, as in our 
cross, the 7rimurti is said to be seated there. When 
with five branches, the five Sugats, or grand forms 
of Bupp'HA, are said to reside upon them. Be this 
as it may, I cannot believe the resemblance of this 
cross and Calvary, with the sign of our redemption, 
to be merely accidental. I have written this ac- 
count of the progress of the Christian religion in 
India, with the impartiality of an historian, fully 


SE 


* Plate 2. 


apm Jo SSOUNSD MD WM oures oy st qoOTM. SVHeMaaAV Ee 9 FO VHS OLMA~Va'TV D eULL 


‘SNVOUROINVAL 


WN 
Ss EZ 
2D | eS 
CE ‘ 
SIVA, 


yy S U 
2 MMT XIN | Wa \ 


—- bn = = 


wA4l\h 


CHRISTIAN RELIGION IN INDIA. 1°25 


persuaded that our holy religion cannot possibly re- 
ceive any additional lustre from it. 


The word Miéch’ha in Sanscrit, does not signify 
literally a foreigner; but it is generally understood in 
that sense by the Paurdniics, when announcing, in a 
prophetical style, the different powers who were to 
tule over India. Hear now, says the author of the 
Vishnu-purdnia, hear now what will come to pass in 
these times: powerful Kings among the ‘Aryya- 
Mléclhas will appear ; they will subvert the reigning 
religion, spoil and deceive the Prajas, or the people. 


In the Bhdgavata, they are called Abrahmavar- 
chasah in the piural, and Abrahmavarchah in the sin- 
gular; because, as they understood not the funda- 
mental tenets of their own religion, through their 
spiritual blindness, and the hardness of their hearts, 
they gave it up to embrace a new one. 


In the Brahman'da we read, then will come the 
Aryya-Mléch’has, who will seduce the people; they 
will be proud, and-at the same time distrustful, as of 
constantly alarmed. 


In the Vayu-purdna it is declared, that generations 
of Kings will rise, and set like the sun. Then will come 
the Aryya-Mlécl’has, who will forsake the Dharma, 
religious creed, Carma worship, Virtha the places of 
pilgrimage of their ancestors; they will seduce the 
people with their new doctrine, and will grow worse and 
worse every day. After them Sarva Mléclvha, all sorés 
of foreign and impure tribes will overrun the country. 


Such is the character given of these good Aryyas, 
ealled Avariiam, and Abraiam, as well as their 


126 ORIGIN AND DECLINE, &c.\ 


Apostle, even as low as the times of Mé Potro in the 
‘13th century. From Abaryyam, the Paurdnics pro- 
bably made 4-Brahma, in order to shew their con- 
tempt of them, but more particularly in the latter 
times, when they grew worse and worse; and M. 
Poto speaks of some of the Abraiam, or Abramiam, 
nearly in the same terms. Yet in his time the deno- 
mination of Avariiam, in Sanscrit Avdryyam, and 
Abdryyam, was applied to them; and he was told 
that it signified good and pious men. 


I had, for a long time past, particularly inquired 
from the Baudd’has whether they knew any thing of 
the wars of Bupp’Ha with Treverar;* but I was 
always answered in the negative. It was my fault 
in some measure; I did not make use of the other 
synonymous names of that enemy of the religion of 
Bupp'ua. I mentioned before, that I supposed that 
TEVETAT was a corruption from De’va-Tasuta, sy- 
nonymous with Dre'va-Twasuta’, or Der'va-Siupi, 
the divine artist, or carpenter, who is more generally 
known under the name of Visva-carmMa, or the 
universal artist. Under this last appellation, TE’vE- 
TA’T is known to tliem. Soon after a learned Jate 
presented me with a book called the Budd’ha-cha- 
ritra, with leave to take a copy, in which the 
wars of Bupp’HA, with Visva-carma, or Dr'va- 
Twasut'a’, are related. It is a most voluminous 
work, and still it is incomplete, and the seat of war 
was in India. 


* In the Lalita vistéra purdna, which was brought by Major 
Knox from Népdél, the name of Budd ’ha’s kinsman and rival is 
DEVADATTA (answering to Deodatus). It is probable, that La- 
LOUBERE'S Tevetat is a corruption of the name of DE’‘VADATTA, 
H. T. C. 


ESSAY VI. 


PART I.--CHAPTER I. 


Of the two Tri-Cu’r'a’p’r1, or Mountains with 
three Peaks; one in the N. W. and the other in the 
S. E. Quarters of the Old ConTINENT. 


I. TRI-CUTADRI, the mountain (4dri) with 
three peaks (77ri-Cuta,) answers to Tpmopypos and 
Tpwaxpios in Greek: for in that language xp» signifies 
properly a peak, summit, and implicitly a headland, 
or promontory. Poryanus calls Mount Méru or 
Meros, Tri--coryphus: it is true, that he bestows 
improperly that epithet on Mount Méru near Cabul, 
which is inadmissible. éru, with its three peaks 
on the summit, and its seven steps, includes and en- 
compasses really the whole world, according to the 
notions of the Hindus and other nations, previously 
to their being acquainted with the globular shape of 
the earth. I mentioned in the first part, that the 
Jews were acquainted with the seven stages, Zones 
or Dwipas of the Hindus; but I have since disco- 
vered a curious passage from the Zohar-Manassé on 
the creation, as cited by Basnace, in his history of 
the Jews.* “There are, says the author, “ seven 
earths, whereof one is higher than the other; for 
the holy-land is situated upon the highest earth, and 
Mount Moriah (or Méru) is in the middle of that 
holyland. This is the hill of Gop, so often men- 


* See English Translation, p. 247. _ 


198 ESSAY ON 


tioned in the Old Testament, the mount of the con- 
gregation, where the mighty King sits in the sides 
of the north, according to Isaran, and there is the 
city of our Gop.”* The Méru of the Hindus has 
the name of Sabha, or the congregation, and the 
gods are seated upon it in the sides of the north. 
There is the holy city of Bréhmd-puri, where resides 
Brauma’ with his court, in the most pure and holy 
land of Llavratta. 


Thus MZéru is the worldly temple of the supreme 
being, in an embodied state, and of the Tr1-Mu’rrrr, 
or sacred 7riad, which resides on its summit, either 
in a single, or three-fold temple, or rather in both: 
for it is all one, as they are one and three. They 
are three, only with regard to men involved in the 
gloom of worldly illusion; but to men who have 
emerged out of it, they are but one; and their three- 
fold temple, and mountain with its three peaks, be- 
come one equally. Mythologists in the west called 
the world, or A/éru, with its appendages, the temple 
of Gop, according to Macrosius. 


Hence this most sacred temple of the supreme 
being, as generally typified by a cone or pyramid, 
with either a single chapel on its summit, or with 
three; either with, or without steps. 


This worldly temple is also considered, by 
the followers of Bupp’Ha, as the tomb of the 
son of the spirit of heaven, whom. I con- 
ceive to be the first man, re-emerging in every 
Calpa, or the first lawgiver, often confounded 
with the.first man. His bones, or limbs were scat- 


* ISATAH, ¢. 14. ¥. 13, Psalm 48, &c. 
- 


-— 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 129 


tered all over the face of the earth, like those of Os1- 
risand Juprrer Zacreus. Tocollect them was the 


first duty of his descendants and followers, and then 


to entomb them. Out of filial piety, the remembrance 
of this mournful search was yearly kept up by a fic- 
titious one, with all possible marks of grief and 
sorrow, till a priest announced, that the sacred relics 
were at last found, This is practised to this day 
by several Tartarian tribes of the religion of Bup- 
p HA; and the expression of the bones of the son of 
the spirit of heaven is peculiar to the Chinese, and 
some tribes in Zartary. 


The Baudd’hists in this country are so close, re- 
served, aud ignorant, in general, that hardly any 
information can be obtained on this subject. Besides, 
they acknowledge that it is so awful a theme, that 
they really av aa to make it a subject of conversa- 
tion. They confess that the pyramids, in which the 
sacred relics are deposited, be their shape what it 
will, are an imitation of the worldly temple of the 
supreme being, and which is really the tomb of the 
first of his embodied forms ; or of his son, in the 
language of the Chinese, Tar turs, and of the Greeks 
also, who were little acquainted with the system of 
emanations and incarnations. They also declare, 
that many of these pyramids do not really contain 
the bones of the Thdcur, or Lord: and though they. 
are to be supposed, and asserted to contain them, 
the real place where they are deposited, should re- 
main unknown, in order to prevent profanation ; 
exactly like the various tombs of Osrris. For this 
reason, the sacred relics, mstead of being deposited 
in the pyramid, are alw ays placed in a small vault 
deep under eround, at some distance from it, as at 


Sdrndt ha, near Benares. 


130 ESSAY ON 


This monument is about fifty feet high, of a cylin- 
drical form, with its top shaped like a dome. Similar 
monuments, but never more than three or four feet 
high, are often erected by Hindus, upon the spot 
where a married woman ‘burned herself with her 
husband. ‘These’ monuments are in general called 
Sat? ; and the enormous one at Sarnath is a sort of 
Sati over the bones of Bupp’Ha. According to tradi- 
tion, it was erected over the ashes of those who fell 
there in battle, im the invasion of the A/uslemans. 
But this is impossible ; as this monument is the chief 
and principal piece of that sacred fabric, which was 
begun many years before the said invasion. The 
only part that was finished is the tomb of Bupp’Ha ; 
all the others, which were intended for the splendor 
of the place, and the convenience of the royal inha- 
bitants and priests, remaining in an unfinished state. 
The secret vault, in which these relics are depo- 
sited in general, is called the Thdcur’s Citi, the 
room or cell of the Lord; and in the inscription 
found amongst the ruins above this cell, it is de- 
clared that SjTuirpa’La and VasanTa, sons of a 
King of Gaur, in Bengal, built this C@ti. It fol- 
lows from hence, that these were the persons who 
deposited there the Thdcur’s bones. In the above 
inscription it is declared, that this happened in the 
year of Vicrama’DiTYA 1089, or of our Lord either 
1017 or 1027.*. In the inscription found at Jsldma- 
bad,} these relics, consisting of a few bones, are 
said to have been deposited in two brass vessels in a 
Cuti, or room under ground. In the account of the 


ere ce «ee et 


* As. Res. v. 5. p, 193. 
+ As. Res. v. 2. 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 131 


discovery of two urns at Sarndtha, it is men- 
tioned that the Céti was eighteen cubits, or twenty- 
seven feet, under oround.* There the relics were 
deposited in an urn, enclosed in a_ vessel of 
marble, in the shape, and of the size of the famous 
Barberini monument. ‘There were a few bones only, 
with various trinkets, which consisted of pieces of 
coloured glass, all of them perforated, with thin 
leaves of gold, and some coarse pearls. These orna- 
ments are “by no means a proof that these bones were 
those of a female. It is more probable, that they 
formed a chaplet used by devout people, or rosaries 
and bracelets, with which the statues of Bupp’Ha 
are generally decorated. .The marble vessel, which 
contained the urn, is more highly finished than that 
of the Barberini monument. The urn itself is of a 
more elegant form than that in the above monument. 
It is in the shape and of the size of a chalice; it has 
no carved figures, but elegant mouldings, exquisitely 
finished, and is of green marble. . I suspect the 
whole to be of foreign : workmanship ; ; for it is totally 
different, both in shape and workmanship, from vases 
in use among the Hindus, either at this day or in 
former times. PurLostratus informs us, that sta- 
tues, by Grecian artists, were by no means uncom- 
"mon in the N. W. parts of Jndia. Srrazo says also, 
that altars of Grecian workmanship were often found 
in the western parts of India; and Arrtan, in his 
Pi ie? takes notice of altars and of small temples 
in the Grecian taste, near Barygaza or Baroach. 
The practice of thus preserving the bones of Bup- 
p'ua is of great antiquity ; for it 1s expressly men- 
tioned by Cremens of stlaven ges, who says, that 


* As. Res. vol. v. p. 181. 
K 2 


132 ESSAY ON 


they were deposited under a pyramid. In the his- 
tory of China we read, that in the year 335, a bone 
of Fo was «sent from India to the Emperor of that 
country, who was highly pleased with this precious 
relic: though his minister Hawyu made a very spi- 
rited remonstrance against this innovation ; and which 
is to be found in Du Haupx’s China. 


The followers of Brauma are not addicted to the 
worship of dead men’s bones, and I know: but one 
instance to the contrary. At Jagan-nat’ha they have 
a bone of Curisuna, which is considered as a most 
precious and venerable relic; so much so, that few 
people are allowed to see it: and Hindus are not fond 


of making it the subject of conversation, any more 
than the Baudd’has. 


The shape of these monuments is always either 
that of a pyramid or of a cone, with some trifling 
deviations occasionally. Thus the cone assumes the 
shape of a trump-roof: sometimes it is formed by 
the revolution of a cymatium, or Ogive round an 
axis; and these two forms are generally said to be in 
the shape of a bell. .A/ount Méru, and the seven 
stories, are represented in the shape of a trump by 
the divines of Ceylon, according to Mr. JornviLLE’s 
delineation in the seventh volume of the Asiatic Re- 
searches. The pyramid is equally subject to the 
same variations, the hips, or angles, being sometimes 
in the shape of a cymatium. As Mount Méru is also 
represented of a, cylindrical form, the tombs of the 
Thacur are equally made in that shape, as that of 
Sarndtha. Sacrifices and offerings are never made m 
Tibet, without placing before the devotees a cone or 
pyramid, the image of Adéré and of the worldly 
Linga. Brdéhmens, instead of either, make a cylinder 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 1383 


of earth, and for the same purpose. This they call 
the primeval Linga; which was represented in the 
west, and to this day in the Dekhin, by a cone, ac- 
cording to Arnosivs and other authors. 


The steps, stories, and retreats are always omitted 
in India: but I was told, that it was considered as 
immaterial. The seven stories, however, are marked 
by lines, in a delineation of the worldly temple and 
tomb of Bupp’Ha, ina large map of the world, ac- 
companying the Cshétra-samasa, a geographical trea- 
tise in my possession. ‘This representation of the 
mountain of Gop struck me forcibly, and was the 
occasion of further inquiries into this subject. It is 
of the same shape with the pyramids’of Egypt: the 
base only is a little shorter, with a small flat top, with 
a chapel in honour of Bupp’Hs. The sides are smooth, 
as in the pyramids; but the seven stories are repre- 
sented by lines, which brings it still nearer to the 
tower of Babel. The pyramids of Egypt are not all 
alike: some are in the shape of a cone; one with 
recesses is mentioned by DE Non, who notices also 
anvther with a circular base. The square base of 
this worldly temple is peculiar to the Baudd’hists of 
Tibet ; for in India the Brdhmens, and the Jainas, 
always give it a circular form. In the representation 
of it in the Cshétra-samasa, it is a square. Though 
_ the dimensions are much neglected, yet in.all these 
monuments at Benares, the most modern, and of 
course the most perfect, are of a conical figure; the 
perpendicular section of which, through the center, 
is an equilateral triangle. There is always a small 
temple on the summit, except one near Benares, 
at a place called Camow'y. Such of these monu- 
ments as belong to the Baudd’has are called the 

3 


134 | ESSAY ON 


temples of Bupp’Ha: they might also be called the 
temples of Bata or Batas, one of the titles of 
Bupp ua, but little known now, and more particu- 
larly so to the vulgar. The word Baias, properly 
pronounced, sounds exactly like Betos in Greek, 
and Betvus in Latin. May we not then reasonably 
suppose, that the temple and tomb of Brzus at Ba- 
bylon, was precisely a similar monument, and caleu- 
lated for the very same purpose. 


On the summit of it was a chapel, dedicated to 
Betus, according to Heropotus. Droporus, the 
Sicilian, says there were three; but this is immate- 
tial: for Baras is three and one. Besides, the 
temple of Hrxopotus probably consisted of three 
chapels. About the center of the tower, im the 
middle, was the tomb of Baas, and near it, in the 
body of the pyramid also, another chapel, exactly as 
in the great pyramid of Giza in Egypt. It is pro- 
pable, however, that the bones of BKexus were not 
deposited in the ostensible tomb, but were concealed 
in a secret vault, in some other part of the pyramid 
or tower. It appears then, that the pyramids were 
similar fabrics, and intended for the very same pur- 
pose. For the Egyptians, the Phenicians likewise, 
had their Betvus, as well as the Babylonians and Hin- 
dus: and this Bretus, it is probable, was originally 
the same through these different countries. ‘In the 
eastern parts of Bengal, particularly toward the Sw- 
derbunds, there is, almost in every village, a repre- 
sentation of this worldly temple, of earth with steps. 
The whole is neatly plastered with a whitish clay; 
and on stated festivals, the statue of some favourite 
deity is placed on the summit, in a small, but 
handsome portable temple. Some of these fabrics 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 135 


are from five to twenty feet high, according to the 
circumstances and zeal of the villagers. These are 
considered as a representation of mount Meéru ; and, 
in the inscription of Sarnath, the conical mount, near 
the sacred repository, is called Méru. : 


Like all the temples and tombs of Betus in Jndia, 
the pyramids had no opening whatever, except one 
or two. It is however pretty certain, that all the 
pytamids were not intended for the reception of the 
bones of Betus. Many were probably intended for 
the burial of a very few exalted and sacred charac- 
ters, like the grand Lamas of Tibet, with a few 
others, who are always buried under pyramids : but 
these are acknowledged to be forms of Bupp’Ha, 
though of an inferior “yank. As the Le Zyptians con- 
cealed most carefully the real place where their 
BeLus was entombed, it is not unlikely that the 
great pyramid was only an ostensible one, and of 
course allowed to remain open. For we are told, 
that the body of him for whom it was intended, 
never was deposited there; or if deposited, it was not 
into the ostensible tomb, but into some secret place 
under the pyramid. The limbs of Osiris were 
buried separately, and on the very spot where Isis 
found them: and he was torn into fourteen pieces ; 
others say six-and-twenty. The general opinion is, _ 
that Isis collected all the pe in a cothn, like’ 
which she made many others, and presented them to _ 
several cities through Egypt ; assuring privately 
every one, that they possessed the real one. It is 
supposed, that Osiris was entombed near Memphis, 
though the spot never was known. © 


The tower of Babel seems then to have been the 
wordly temple of the spirit of heaven, and the tomb 
K 4 


136 ESSAY ON 


of his son, either the first man of the Calpa, ot the 
most ancient king and legislator of the country. 


There were four Adams, and four Budd*has also; 
and we are now under the fourth, according to the 
traditions of the A/uselmans, and of the. Baudd ‘has. 
Apaw’s body was, at his own request, entombed in 
a cave or vault, called Alconuz, in a mountain in the 
center of the world; and of course the A/éru of the 
Hindus, and represented by artificial hills, either of 
stone or earth, and of various shapes, like J/érw. 


His descendants removed to that holy mountain ; 
the wicked offspring of Cain were allowed only to 
dwell at the foot of it, whilst that of SerH were 
‘seated higher up, as far as the top; where they lived 
in great sanctity and purity of manners, every day 
worshipping Gop on the summit of the mountain, 
and visiting the body of Apam in his vault, as the 
means of procuring the divine blessing.* This 
mountain, in the center of the earth, with seven 
steps or stories, or mount JAZéeru, was really the 
mountain of Gop, the worldly temple of the spirit 
of heaven, and the tomb of his son. Coinrvus 
of Smyrna says, that this holy mountain was de- 
picted upon the shield of AcHitLEs; and that on its 
summit resided the efficacy or ‘Sacti of the world, or 
of the supreme being, towering to the skies: and he 
adds, that this most sacred place was very difficult 
of access. 


The limbs, or bones, of this son of the spirit of 
- heaven, Pusencu in Chinese, Bupp’Ha, Osiris, Dio- 
NysIus, or ADAM, were dispersed all over the 


* Anc. Univ. Hist. vol. I. éc. 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 157 


world. Apam’s remains, after the flood, were divi- 
ded among his posterity, and his scw/! fell to the 
share of Suem, who deposited it in a vault on mount 
Catcary, near the holy hill of Moriah or Moreh. 
The inhabitants of Ceylon showed formerly one of his 
teeth; and they have now one of his tusks: for their 
last Apam or Bupp’Ha, was incarnate in the shape 
of an elephant; and ascended into heaven, from the 
summit of the peak of Apam. Muselmans, who 
were settled in the Peninsula, and in that island, at a 
very early period, concluded, and not without some 
plausible ground, that this Bupp’aa must have been 
Apam: and accordingly, Persian writers gravely in- 
form us, that Apam was’ banished to Ceylon, and 
thence translated into heaven, from the summit of 
the peak, which was denominated after him. Za- 
RADES, ZOROADES or ZanratT was the name given, by 
the Chaldeans, to the eldest Zoroaster, claimed 
equally by the Persians. Some say that Brus 
taught the Chaldeans astronomy, whilst others in- 
sist, that it was Zaraprs or ZoOROASTER, whom 
several learned men consider as the same with 
Mizraim, the son of Ham. Be this as it may, the 
eldest ZakADEs was the son of OromazeEs, the spirit 
of heaven, according to Surpas. Like Apam, he 
- directed that his bones should be carefully preserved: 
his precepts for a long time were complied with; 
and his relics, carefully and secretly entombed, like 
those of Baia or Bupp’na, like the limbs of Ostris, - 
and like those of Baccuus at Delphi, became an 
object of worship. The eldest Zoroaster, called 
Zaraves, ZoroavEs and Zaratts by the Chaldeans, 
is probably the same with Betus and the Saurip of 
Arabian writers: and the Goddess ZareTIs was 
probably his consort. Several learned oriental wri- 
ters insist that ZoroaprEs, or ZoROASTER assisted at 


~ 


138 ESSAY ON 


the building of the tower of Babel; and that he is 
the same with Zouac or Nimrop, and that under 
the name of Saurip he built the great pyramid in 
Egypt. The Parsis in Jndia say, that he was a native 
of China; but I suppose that they originally meant 
Bactria, seemingly the native country of the Chinas, 
according to'the Puran‘as, and the eailiest Perscan 
and Arabian authors, who say that formerly the 
country about Samarcand was called Chinistan, and 
its inhabitants Chinas *. 


II. The three peaks of A/éru are, one of gold, the 
other of silver, and the third of iron, stone or earth, 
which is considered as the same. Thus, the iron 
age is generally called the age of stone or earth in 
India. In the west, mankind was produced from 
stones, thrown by Drucation and Pyrrua behind 
‘their backs, in the beginning of the iron age ; and from 
them sprang the present stony or stone-hearted race, 


In consequence of this, some powerful princes are 
declared, in the Puranas and other books, to have 
erected three mountains, of gold, silver, and stone; 
or three pyramids or conical hills, like the three 
peaks of Jéru, though the materials they were built 
with were only stone or clay. PoLtyanus has given 
us the names of these three peaks, AZenon, Candaské, 
and Corasibé; which, however distorted and dis- 
figured, may be still traced back to their original 
standard. For this purpose let us suppose, that 
a traveller asked a Hindu the names of these 
three peaks, the Hindu probably answered Mana, 
Cunt hachya, Cailasépi, or literally in Enghsh, Mana, 


* D’HERBELOT's Biblioth. Orient. voce Tarikh and Tabari, Sir 
W. OvsELEY’s Translat. of Ebn Haucal in the Appendix. 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 139 


Cun'rna’ thus called, Caita’sa also. The first peak, 
it is true, is not known under that name; but it is 
described as such, and this appears tu be its real 
mame. Upon it Brauma’ resides, and his seat is 
called Brahmd-purt, or the town of Brauma’: it is 
also Mana-puri, the town of Mana, or of his heart, 
or the delight of his heart, near the famous lake of 
Mana or Maénasa, the waters of which, proceeding 
from heaven, are the delight of his heart likewise. 
They are otherwise said to proceed from his heart, 
and indeed every thing there is from his heart. The 
obvious meaning of Afana is mind, (mens, ) but it is 
always rendered here heart, because the mind pro- 
ceeds from the heart, according to the Hindus, who 
even are able to trace its track through the body to 
the head. The radical name of Vai-Cuntha 1s 
Cuntha, an ideot. The name of Visunv’s mother, 
in one of his incarnations, during the fifth Manwan- 
tara, was Cun‘Tua or the ideot; and as she was 
very much so, she was called Vi Cun Ha Visunu, 
since that time, is surnamed Var Con vrHa: and 
after him, the peak on which he resides is deno- 
minated likewise. In Cazlasdpi, api signifies also. 
This Tri-caétadri, or mountain with three summits, 
is declared to be the lord of mountains; and of course 
the other 7'ri-coryphean hills, for there are many, are 
considered as inferior to it. The next in rank is the 
three-peak-land in the N. W. emphatically called the 
Wauire island, the island of the Moon, a celestial 
earth ot region, a terrestrial heaven or paradise. 


The next to this is the 7vi-cé‘ta mountain in the 
south-east, including the peninsula of A¢dlaca, Sumé- 
tra, and Ceylon. These two Tri-ci'tddris are declared 
to correspond to each other, in their respective 
quarters, and their 7éja, Cirn‘n‘a, or splendor, are the 


140 - ESSAY ON 


constant theme of the Pauwranitcs and other Hindu 
writers. These two Tri-cétas, or three-peaked- 
islands may probably be the two islands of Cerne, 
east and west, of the ancients. When speaking in 
general terms, the Paurdnics sometimes place them, 
one in the east, and the other in the west. But 
numerous and explicit passages show, that they are 
situated in the N. W. and S. E. quarters of the old 
continent. There are however, some few passages, 
which place them north and south of Aéru; and 
Lanca is now considered as situated on the equator, 
exactly to the south of Ujjayini, Méru, and opposite 
to the island of the moon. The last assigned 
situation was the first I hit upon, on my first ac- 
quaintance with the Puranas, and perplexed me 
very much; as the Pandits, I was acquainted with, 
insisted that the Wuire island, one of the peaks of 
the western 77i-cwta, was in the N. W. quarter, that 
is to say, it occupied the whole space between the 
N. W. and N. points: and that likewise the eastern 
Tri-cétédri was between the S. and S. E. points. 
Unfortunately, they could not then produce the 
necessary vouchers from their sacred books; but in 
the mean time, they exhibited the accompanying 
map of Jambu, in order tu illustrate the subject. 


In the plate, the map of Jambu is represented 
under three different projections. The first is ac- 
‘cording to the ideas of the Pawran‘ics, in which one 
half of the equator is obviously combined with 
another half of the meridian, on the plain of which 
the map is projected. I have marked the degrees of 
longitude upon the equator, and the degrees of lati- 
tude north, upon an arch of the first meridian. No 
notice is ever taken of these particulars by the Pau- 
rénics ; but a little reflection will show the original 


-——_—— =~ 


") 
tds > ‘ 
‘ 
4 
Len 
‘ ; Se eer , 
AS ° > * 
4 Ld F 
% , 2 ae 
ve | ty \ 
‘ ™ ¢ Gp 


Valk. Plate 3. 


Se 
@ 


O-_ 
Romaca pattan 
ov/ Rome : 


qhe 1? ase “ue % sh 
sor Ho. 0 Nee | ole he papy 
- 7 


oe 


° 
40 
3 
jo 


\ 
\ 
0 


MERU 180 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 141 


design of this diagram, though. the projection be 
ever so disfigured *. 


The true projection of it should be in the shape of 
what the ancients called the bottom part of a sling: 
and this was admitted by Dionysius PertieGRres. 
Postpontius before him admitted of it also: but he 
insisted, that the greatest length of this projection 
was in a north and south direction. This sort of 
projection is represented in the third number of the 
same plate. Number IT. represents the same portion 
of the globe, that is to say, the northern part of the 
old continent, as projected in the usual form, upon 
the plain of the first meridian. 


In the first and second numbers, the two T7i-cé ta- 
dris, or islands, abounding with Curzn‘a or resplen- 
dence, are represented diametrically opposite, with 
all due symmetrical arrangement in every part, to 
which the Hindus will always sacrifice truth. There 
are, however, some general outlines, which are 
strictly true. There are really three islands, or dwt- 
pas in the south east, and as many in the north west 
quarter of the old continent, corresponding exactly, 
or nearly so, to each other; and they have also the 
same names. The rest of the superstructure owes its 
origin to the fertile and inventive genius of the 
Hindus, The idea, however, is by no means a 
modern one; nor was it confined to Jndia: for 
ancient writers in the west acknowledged two islands, 
called Cerne, one in the east, and the other in the 
west: the latter, called also Cyrene, was placed near 
the straits of Hercules ; and was said to consist equally 


* Plate III, 


142 ESSAY ON 


of three islands. The eastern Cerne, it is true, was 
said to be near the eastern shores of Africa. ‘This 
mistaken notion arose, through the information of 
the Hindus, who will have it that the dwipa of Eancé 
really joins the shores of ‘Sanc’ha, Zeng, or Africa. 
The Nubian geographer adopted this idea, as well as 
Arabian writers in general. 


The Gods are represented as travelling from one 
Tri-chta to the other; and the grand depot for souls 
after death, 1s at Yama-purit, mn the Peninsula of 
Mialacd ; from which, on certain days fixed for that 
purpose, they set off together for D’harma-purt in the 
north west, which they reach after a painful march 
of twelve months. 


These three islands in the south east, are in general 
called Lanca ; and in every one of them is supposed 
to bea city called a Lancé-puri, and there is actually 
a place of that name in Sumatra, according to Mr. 
Marspen. The walls of these three cities are of the 
same metal with the soil of their respective islands: 
of course the walls and palaces of Lancd-purt in the 
Gold-Island, ave of that metal; and of silver in the 
Silver-Island. In the island of iron, brass, stone, or 
clay, the walls are of these materials: but more 
generally they are said to be either of iron or brass, 
The Gold-Island, or Suvarna, is also called Maha- 
Lancé and Mé-Lancé; from which is probably 
derived its modern name of A4¢dlécaé ; which 1s alse 
called Malachya in the Dévi-puraia. 


These islands were well known to the ancients, un- 
der the appellations of Chryse, Argyrea, and Taprobané. 
That of Taprobané, though generally understood of. 
Ceylon, was also extended to the three islands; for 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 145 


SrePHaNus of Byzantium says, that Argyrea, the 
Stlver-Island, or Sumatra, made part of Taprobané, 
and very properly too: for Taprobané is obviously 
derived from the Hind: Tapu-Rdvana, the island, or 
islands of Ra’vana, who was the lord of them, and 
whose name, in the spoken dialects, particularly in 
the Dekhin, is always pronounced Ra*san. Their 
Sanscrit names are Canchana or the Gold-Island ; 
Rajata the silver one, and Sinhala is Ceylon. On the 
latter the epithet of Zron-Lsland is never bestowed in 
any book which I have seen: but it is understood as 
a matter of course: it was called also the brass 
country by Proremy, though strangely misplaced 
by him. 


From various documents, through different chan- 
nels, he ‘has introduced twice in his map of that 
country, this 7ri-c@tddri, first, as three islands or 
Peninsulas, and also as three countries on the main- 
land, ‘under the names of gold, silver, and ‘brass 
countries. Mr. Danvitte has proved that the 
Peninsula of Malacd, with most of the places belong- 
ing to it, are ¢wice repeated, and made contiguous 


by him. 


In the Gold-Istand, or Afd-Lanca, is the abode of 
Yama, called Yama-puri, or in the spoken dialects 
Jam-cote, a place well known to Arabian and Persian 
writers, It is also called Lancd-purt, Lancd-nagara, 
the town of Zancdé; and the straits of J7dldca are 
called, in the Purdn'as, Lanca-dwdra, or the gates of 
Lancé*, as we shall see in the course of this work.’ 
Canca is another name of Yama or Prurto; and as 
_the place of his abode is in AZdlancé, according to the 

Pe ENE SR ca I a ENE EA iat Leal 
* Scanda-pur dna, section of TAPI-C’HAND’A. - 


144 ESSAY ON 


Purénas, the Lancd-dwéra or gates of Lanca, the 
straits of M4laca might be called also with propriety 
the gates of Canca, Pruto, or Canca-dwara. This 
denomination is never used now by the Pauranies ; 
but there is no doubt, that it was so formerly ; for 
the Cancador of Au1-Cosue1, and other early Musel- 
man writers, is obviously derived from Canca-dwara, 
Canca’s door or gate. It is true, that they make a 
town of it, which they call also more correctly Can- 
cdnor for Caned-nur, which last is acknowledged to. 
be the same with Canca nagara, the town of Canca; 
and in the Dekhin they always say nur or nuru, 
instead of nagar. This town is obviously the same, 
which is called Cocco-nagara or Conco-nagara by 
Protemy. The country of Canea is Cancades‘a in 
Sanscrit; hence Muselman writers call it also Gung-diz. 


Cancapuri or Canca nagara is then the same with 
Fama-puri or Jamcote, called also in the Puranas 
Maha-Lanca-puri, or Ma-Lanca: aud it is probably 
the same with that called Balanca by Protemy, and 
placed by him in Leng. 162° and in 4° 40’ Lat. North. 
It appears, however, that MJuselman writers under- 
stood by it the town of Saba or Zaba: for Yama-purt 
or Jam-cote is a mythological city and never existed. 


We observed before that Protemy has introduced 
into his map the golden country, island or penin- 
sula, not only twice; but that he has likewise 
introduced twice, most of the places belonging to 
that country. Accordingly Conco nagara is again . 
noticed under the name of Coccoro nagara, or Cocco 
nagara; from which A/uselman writers have- made 
Caracor for Canca-rai-ghur, the house or place 
of abode of Canca-ra‘'ya’ or Yama: but they con- 
sider it as the same with Cancanor. ‘This town 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 145 


they call also Canacor, which is some place inthe Gan- 
getic provinces : but I have shown before, that Cana- 
cor or Cancar, was the capital city of the country of 
Gancar-deha, or of the Gangaride in Bengal. 


Jum-cote or Lanca-puri, which D’Herse or writes 
Giamcout, they place, with the Hindus, in the cen- 
ter of the Peninsula, in five degrees of Lat. North, 
and in Long. 176 or 175, according to ApuL-Fazin 
and others; and Protemy places Balonca, or Ma- 
Lancé-puri in Lat. 4° 40’ North, and in Long.’ 162. 
The Longitude of Lancd or Ma-Lanca may be ascer- 
tained from the Purawas ; a circumstance very un- 
usual. YVama-puri is declared in these sacred hooks. 
to be the general rendezvous of the departed from 
all parts of the world, and from which they proceed 
in a body with a proper guard, composed of the ser- 
vants of Yama, to D’harma-puri, which I shall show 
hereafter to be the purgatory of St. Parricx in 
Hiran'ya or Suvarn'eya, the gold island in the west. 
The days and distances are accurately described, 
which summed up amount to 81,554 Yojanas.* The 
breadth of the world is 100,000 Yéjanas, equal to 
180° of longitude: and these 81,554 Yéjanas answer 
of course to 146°48, which subtracted from 180 
degrees, leave 33; the half of which 16’ 30’ is the 
longitude of Dharma-puri, and added to 146° 50’ 
will place Add-Lancaé or Jum-cote in long. 162° 20. 
For these two places are at the furthermost extremities 
of the earth, which forms a perfect circle, sur- 
rounded bya sea, every where of the,same breadth. 
This singuiar route of the departed will be thesubject 
of a separate paragraph. It passes through Jndia, in 


.* Ganiesa Purana, 


L 


146 ESSAY ON 


the direction of the first range of snowy mountains. 
The Pandits, whom Anut-Fazit consulted, placed 
Cancador 1265 YVojanas from Lancd, or the peak of 
Apam, which is in 90° of longitude, according to 
them. Yama-puri is accordingly 12054 Yéjanas from 
Lanca ; some reckon 1242, which will place Yama-puri 
in long. 178°. 29%. 


The commentator on the Sarya-Siddhanta, has re- 
duced that distance very much; for he says that 
Lanca, or the three islands, occupy a space of 30 
degrees along the equator; and this will bring their 
assumed longitude of the easternmost shores of Jdd- 
Lanca nearer to “its real one. 


As Protemy places Md-Lancdé-puri in the same 
longitude with the Pauranics, he must have used 
the same data, and which he had probably received 
from the Hindus whom he conversed with at dleran- 
dria. Ma-Lancad being, according to the Pauraniics, 
in the center of the Peninsula, it must be of course m 
about five degrees of Latitude North: and there it is 
placed by Axput-Faztr: and in 4020’ by Pro.emry. » 
Mé Lancé is called in the Puranas Yamala and Ma- 
laya ; which last denomination it still retains. It is 
styled also Canchana-pada, or with the golden skirts. 
It may be'translated the country of the golden feet, a 
title assumed by the Emperors of Ava, and other 
Kings of that part of the world: and the /alayan 
breeze is as famous in the east, as the Sabgan in the 
west, and its capital was also called Saba or Zaba. 


In the beginning of the Brahmdnda-puran’a, it is de- 
clared, that the strong hold of Yama in T77-cuta, that 
is to say the Peninsula of Malaca, is 100 Yojanas long, 
and 30 broad, which is sufficiently accurate. 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 147 


ProtemMy mentions there a place called MJalaiou- 
colon, probably from the Sanscrit -Malaya-cilam, 
which implies a place on the borders or shores of Ma- 
laya: the same is called Maletur by Marcc-Poto; 
Malaya-tir and Malaya-cilam ave synonymous. Peri- 
mula in Protemy, I suppose to be derived from the 
Sanscrit Pari-Malaya, which implies the same thing. 
For it is probable, that they were acquainted only 
with the ¢iram, tir or culam of the Peninsula: and 
Canchana-pada may also signify the foot, skirts of the 
golden mountain, or Peninsula. 


__ The next island is Sumatra, called in the Pur‘an‘as 

Rajata, or silver island, the Argyre of the western 
geographers, In the Vrihat-catha itis called Naircéla 
or Nalicéra and Srimat, ior the fortunate, and syno- 
nymous with S77 imatra. 


That famous island is called now Sumatra, and a 
former European travellers Symotta. In the same 
book, and in the [7itépades‘a, it is called Carpura, 
or camphire island. In the spoken dialects, that 
word is pronounced Ca‘pur and Cafur. Marco-Poto 
gives the name of Fan/ur to one of its provinces, pro- 
bably for Canfur or Campar, as it is now called. A 
beautiful lake on the island, is mentioned in the Ai- 
topades'a under. the name of Padma-nilaya, or the 
abode of Papma’-DE’VI. 


It is also called AJandara in the Purdn'as: and as 
it is represented as a most delightful country, it may 
be denominated Su-J4andara; and it was called Saman- 
der by former geographers, But it seems, that. this 
appellation is derived from Samander in the spoken 
dialects of India, from the Sanscrit Samudra, which 
signifies the ocean. The author of the Periplus men- 
Sons an island near the Ganges called Oceanis and 

I 37 2 


148 - ESSAY ON 


E1-Eprissr says that the island of Samandar is near 
the Ganges. Probably the author of the Periplus 
confounded it with Ségara island, a name of the same 
import, at the mouth of the Ganges and called also 
Oceanis by Diovorus the Sicilian. The context, 
however of this author, and of more modern geo- 
graphers, show that it cannot be the same island. 
Satmasrus and others improperly laugh at the idea 
of an island at sea being called Oceanis. This Oceanis 
was probably the place of abode of old Samunpra, 


the old man of the sea, often mentioned in romances 
in the east. 


The word Samudra, or Samundur, are pronounced, 
~ Sumundu, and Mundu in the dialects of Ceylon; and 
there is an island of that name mentioned by. an- 
cient geographers in the eastern seas, and supposed 
by them to be the same with Zuprobané or Ceylon ; 
but SrepHanus of Byzantium says that the silver 
island made part of Yaprobané, which is really the 
case. It isalso called by them Palai-Simundu, which 
I take to be a corruption from Pulo-Simundu, Pulo- 
Symotta, the island of Simundu, or Symotta._ 'The de- 
scription of that island, under the name of Simondu, 
does by no means agree with Ceylon: but is easily re- 
conciled with Sumatra, though we know but little of 
the interior parts. 


The large lake called A/egisba, with the metropolis, 
does not exist in Ceylon, but is probably that exten- 
sive lake to the south of Menangcabow, mentioned by 
Mr. Marspen in his map of Sumatra, from which 
several large rivers seem to issue. The harbour of 
Hippuros or [pporus in Pulo-Simundu is called Aypoor 
by DanviLLe, and Jppu by Mr. Marspen from the 
Sanscrit and Hindi ‘J-pura or ‘J-pu, and in a deriva- 
tive from Ai pura, the town of the goddess ‘I or 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 149 


Buava’ni. From this lake issues the river Andra- 
guerii or Indergeree, in Sanscrit Indra-giri ; because 
its source is in the giri, or mountain of Inna, or 
Maghabé; from whom probably the lake in the plains 
below was denominated Maghaba or Megisba, accord- 
ing to Puiny, and Padmd-nilaya or the place of abode 
of Papma’-pe’vi the consort of VisHnu, in the 


Hitopades‘a. 


From this lake issued two rivers, according to 
Puiiny; one called Palesimundus flowed towards the 
south, and towards a town of the same name (perhaps 
the modern Palembang) which was the metropolis of 
the island, and had a famous harbour. The river di- 
vided then into three streams, the smallest of which 


was five furlongs broad, and the largest two miles 


nearly. Thus I translate this passage of Priny : for 

itis impossible that three such large arms of a river 

should fall into a harbour. According to Mr, Mars- 

DEN, this lake communicates with the river of Palem-— 
bang : for, says he, the inhabitants avail themselves 

of this lake in transporting their goods to, and from 

Palembang.* 

The other river, toward the north, and supposed to 
issue’ from that lake, was called Cydara ; probably 
because it flowed through the country of Ru or Aru, 
called Daru by former European travellers: the capi- 


tal of which, on its banks, was probably called Cota- 


Ru, or the town and fort “of Ru. his is the largest 
river in the island, and of course its source far remote 
into the interior parts of the country. ‘The river Szac 
seems to be a branch of it: and the Campar is sup- 
posed to communicate with the river Jndra-giri. Op- 


* History of Sumatra, p. 9. 
L3 


150 ESSAY ON 


posite to this, toward the west, another river flows 
from the Anountdin’ of Indra-giri, and is called “An- 
drapour or Snamupoter from the Sunscrit Indra-pura : 

and I believe that the town is the same whichis ealled 
Andra-Simundu by Protemy, and foisted into Cey- 
lon by him, on a supposition that it was the same island 
with Pulo: Simundu; and ¥ believe that this is not the 
only place in apr obane, that belongs to Pulo-Simunda. 
The mountains of Iwpra, or Mazhabé in the island 
of Sumatra, are fentioned 3 in the V’rihat-cat ha, wider 
the name of Baldéhaca, which is synonymous ‘ with 
Mésha, from its summit being capped with clouds: 

and Inpra, who presides over rain, resides above'the 
clouds: heiée he is called Me'Guava‘Hana, M¥ GHA- 
BA‘HANA, and in conversation’ Mx’ GHABA‘’N; or the 
cloud borne. Thé other mountains in Sumatra; mens 
tioned'in the Vrihat-catha, are Maindca Vrishabha: 
and Chacra. Upon thése’ ‘four mountains, as ‘thany' 
gods are, in the'saiie book, declared to reside and 
to travel occasionally 1 im their self-moving cars to the’ 
Wate Island in the west, in order to pay their respects 
to Visunu, and his consort ABDHITANAYA, or the 
daughter Ge the Ocean. . Naricéla, another name for 
this ‘sland, implies its abounding with cocoa-nut trees, 

the leaties of which being agitated by the winds 
strike against each other, and seem to repeat the 
words Boe-boc or Vac-vac: or the continual noise whieh 
they make is compared by the Hindus to what is_ 
called in Hindi Boc-boc or constant chattering. Su- 
matra is then the island of Boc-boc, Vac-vac or Wace- 
wac of Arabian authors ; who say that the leaves of. 
these trees striking against each other seem to. repeat © 


the word /Vac. ; ‘ 


Sumatra appears to me to be the same island, in 
which JamBuLus is supposed to have resided seven 
years, and from which ty went to ‘Palibothra. The 


, 


4 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 151 


inhabitants, says he, have two tongues, or languages; 
their own first; and probably the J/alay was the 
other, which they spoke fluently, but 1 suppose only 
in the districts bordering upon the sea. JamBy ius 
takes notice, that this island abounded with hot 
springs, which is true of Sumatra, but not of Ceylon. 
They had also an alphabet, consisting of twenty-eight 
letters, divided into seven classes, each of four let- 
ters. There were seven original characters, which, 
after undergoing four different variations each, con- 
stituted these seven classes. They wrote also from 
top to bottom: and that this was the case formerly 
in Sumatra is my opinion.* For the manners of the 
natives of the P/ilippine islands, correspond in so 
many striking particulars, with those of the Sva- 
transt that no doubt can be entertained, says Mr. 
Marsp:in, if not of a sameness of origin, at least of 
an intercourse and connexion, in former times, which 
no longer exists. ‘Shey used to write from top to 
bottom, till the Spaniards taught them to write from 
left to right. The Zagada alphabet in these islands, 
has certainly great affinity with those of Sumatra. 


The two alphabets of the Sumatrans consist 
only, one of twenty-three, and the other of nineteen 
letters: but it is probable that there were two sorts of 
‘them formerly, as in India, and which. were .origi- 
nally the same. One was used by the more civilized 


* Dr. LEYDEN. who had been lately engaged in inquiries concern- 
ing the tribes inhabiting the islands of the eastern Archipelago, partly 
confirms this conjecture by the information, that the mode of writing, 
practised by one of the tribes in Sumatra (the Battes), is perpendi- 
cular: but instead of commencing at the top of the line, the writing 
begins at the bottom. MaRrspDEN’s Batta alphabet is stated to be 
correct, provided the plate be turned in a perpendicular instead of a 
horizontal direction. H.T. C. 

+ History of ‘Sumatra, p. 255. 


L4 


152 ESSAY ON 


and learned classes, and at court; the other was current 
among the lowerclasses, whose poor and barren dialect 
had fewer sounds to express. Be this as it may, the ele- 
ments of their alphabets have an obvious affinity with 
those of the Sanscrit. The Sanscrit alphabet, after strik- 
ing off the double: letters, and such as are used to 
express sounds peculiar to that language, has a sur- 
prising affinity with the old alphabets used in Europe ; 
and they seem to have been originally the same. 
This subject I intend to resume hereafter. The Em- 
perors of Sematra, when endeavouring to introduce 
civilization into their country, opened an intercourse 
with India, but more particularly with the kingdom 
of Magad’ha, and Pahbothra ; for as Mr. Marspen 
judiciously observes*, the Afalay language has re- 
ceived no improvement from the dialects of the Pe- 
ninsula in India. All the Hindi and Sanscrit words in 
that language are such as were in use at the court of 
the Emperors of Jndia, residing in Bahar, and among . 
the better sort of the inhabitants of that country, 


The Kings of Sumatra call themselves Maha-rajas 
to this day ; their prime ministers are called Mantri:} 
which are both Sanscrit terms. In their language 
‘Dewa and Dewata are derived from Déva and Dévaté 
in Sanserit; the first of which signifies God, and the 
other a deity. Among the names of places in Swmatra, 
very few are Sanscrit, but the following are undoubt- 
-edly such; viz. dndragiri, Indrapura, Ipura or Aipura, 
Sinha-pura, Singa-pour, or Sincdpour. 


JAmeuLus.says that this tract of islands, or Lanca, 
consisted of seven principal ones; and to this day in 


* As. Res. v. iy. p. 233. , 


+ Hist. of Sumatra, p. 285, and from Mantri the Portuguese 
wade Mandarin. 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST, 155 


the Peninsula, Lanca is often called Vail-Lanca or 
the seven Lancds; because it consisted of seven 
islands. This information I owe to Mr. Duncan, 
Governor of Bombay. From Yail-Lanca former tra- 
vellers made Vlanca. 


Sumatra is perhaps the island of Sabala mentioned 
in one of the Puranas; and it is the same which is 
called ‘Saivala or ‘Satbala in the Vayu purda, section 
of the earth, and represented as a mountainous region 
in the skirts of Bhadras'va, or that part of the old 
continent between the N. E. and S. E. quarters. From 
‘Saibala, Apuvetus and AristoTLe* probably made 
Phebol or Psebol, as some learned men are inclined 
to read it. The former says, that in the eastern seas, 
there are two large islands, Zaprobane and Phebol: 
ArIstTotLe places the latter opposite to Arabia, and 
we have seen before that the Paurdnics, Arabian and 
Persian authors insist, that Sumatra is close to the 
_continent of Africa. The island of Sabala is probably 
the Samil or Shamel of Ex-Eprisst and other eastern 
geographers, who call it also Sabi. The country of 
Cephala is noticed by former European travel- 
lers; and in the year 1543, adventurers from that 
country plundered and ravaged part of the island of 
Sumatra. : 


III. ‘Let us now pass to the third island, or Sin- 
hala, now Ceylon, Its. Sanscrit. name is a derivative 


form from Sinha; a lion, and it was given to it on 
account of its being inhabited by Szvhalas, or the 


* AriIsToT- de Mundo. 
+ Hist. of Sumatra, p. 6, 


154 ESSAY ON 


offspring of a lion.* It is, however, more generally 
called Lanca in the Purdivas, and is represented there 
as the country of Ravana, or Raban, the brother of 
Cuvéra ; and both were born at the extremities of 
the world, in the N. W. As he was contemporary 
with Ra MAcHANDRA, if there ever was such a being, 
he must have lived about .1800 years before Curisrt. 
The wars of Ra’vana in Lancd, and the adjacent 
countries, are famous all over Jndia, and make an era 
in the history of Ceylon. Traditionary legends in 
that island say, that in consequence of this bloody 
war, the island was depopulated, and remained in that 
state for 18435 years, being only inhabited by Daityas, 
or rather savage tribes. Ceylon was afterwards called 
Salava, or sSdlavam aceording to F. BartTHoLomeEo, 
from the ‘Séeyas, a certain tribe in Jndia, called also 
in the Purdn'as Sdlaeas. The famous peak of ddam 
was called \Sdé/mala, or the mountain of ‘Sdla. It is 
mentioned in the commentary on the Sérya-Sidd’hanta; 
in which it is said, that Maya the offspring of the 
Sun, by the daughter of the divme 7washta in the 
west, came from Rémaca-nagara, or Rome to the 
mountain of Sd/mala in Lancd, to make tapasya in 
honour of the sun, in order to obtain astronomical 
knowledge from him. Another name. for it is Sama- 
nala from Saumya-Nala another son of Twashta, who 
built Ra’ma’s bridge. Twashtd is the chief engineer 
of the gods, and his grand-son Maya of the Daityas. 


The appellation of ‘Sedca, or Salice, as it. was 
called by ancient geograghers of the second century, 
is also a regular derivative form in Saascri¢, from 
Sali or Sas: this denomination was unknown to 
Pury. According to F. BarTHoLoMeEo, and former 

| | 
* As, Res, v. vil. p. 48. 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 155 


travellers, Ceylon was called Ilam, and HHad-ndd, La- 
nar; the country of Ilda, which signifies the earth in 
general. Tra-ndd, or Trandté, another nathe for it, 
sigmfies the three countries, meaning I suppose the 
three islands of Laned. 


The Hleniites reckon the longitude ew po meridian 


eg with the title of ‘Ramon Avanti or € yam, 
Meru, and the mountain of Vutsa in Curu or Siberia, 
which last is most probably an imaginary place in 
that country. The place of Rama was called Arima 
by Muselman writers; and they said that it was un- 
der the equator, and exactly half way between 
the straits of Alevander or Malaca, aud those of Her- 
cules or Gades in the west: and théy gave the name 
ot Gadtr or Gades to these two straits, both leading 
into. two vast. AVediterrancan staag and throug i 
Arima the Hindus, and even some 4rabian authors, 
itis said, made their first meridian to pass. Axt- 
Cosiici a Persian astronomer, who lived about 350 
years ago, says, thatin his time some indus placed 
their first meridian at Cancador ‘a, or Jum-cote in the 
east.* [I believe that some of them did so formerly, 
and this of course occastoned afterwards some con- 

fusion. Their first meridian them passed through the | 
eastern Cerne, and the last through the westeriz_one, 
the several islands of which tract were the original 
islands of the blessed. When this mode of reckoning 
was altered; the meridian was placed in the middle 
of the world, yet it still passed throuh the eastern: 
Cerne ; though through a different part of it. This 


=f 


* Abuitede S Choraania, &e. dese iit. ‘Geach, min, 
vol, iii, p. 9. 


156 ESSAY ON 


induced them also to bring one extremity of the 
western Cerne under the same meridian, probably for 
the sake of symmetry, which was certainly a sufficient 
reason with them. . Thus the iron peaks of the two 
Tri-cutadris fell in the same meridian, and the 
northern one might be about Nova-Zembla. 


This made me suppose, on my first acquaintance 
with the Puranas, that the White Island was an 
Utopian land, and I resolved of course to give myself 
no further trouble about it. The ingenious Mr, 
Baitty would not have failed, to have considered 
this projection of the northern 777-ci/ta, as a confir- 
mation of hisown system. There is another instance 
of the fondness of the AZindus for a symmetrical ar- 
rangement, and noticed by Srraso, as we have seen — 
in the first part. The mountains to the north of Jndia 
are in an oblique direction, and the first range of the 
snowy mountains is in the same line with Romaca- 
pattan or Rome, and Yamapuri or Jumcote, as placed 
by the Hindus, one at the furthest extremities of the 
west, and the other in the same manner toward the 
east, as represented in the second number of the ac- 
companying plate. But as this oblique direction of 
the mountains to the north of Jndia, does not look so 
well in the mode of projection adopted by the Hindus, 
they have represented them in a parallel direction 
with the equator; and with them Jumcote and Rome. 
Strazo highly reprobates that alteration in the direc- 
tion of the mountains to the north of Jndia; and 
which in his time, had been adopted by geopraphers 
in the west. 


The two Gadirs, called the eastern and western 
gates, by Arab and Persian authors, are in an oblique 
direction, and may be called the terrestrial gates ; 


THE SACRED ISLES IN THE WEST. 157 


for in heaven there are also two gateways, one in the 
west in the tropic of Cancer and the other in the east 
in the other tropic. These were called the gates of 
the sun: the southern one was denominated the 
water gate, and the fire gate was in the north. The 
souls of the departed ascend through one gate, and 
those who are to be born again descend through the 
other, according to western mythologists. The Hin- 
dus have also two roads, one in the north or left, 
and the other in the south. Those who follow 
the left path, ascend through the northern road; and 
those, who follow the right one, ascend through the 
southern path. 


* 


{ 


iil. 


On the Laxcuaces and Literature of the Inpo- 
CuinuseE Nations. 


BY J. LEYDEN, M. D. 


THE inhabitants of the regions which lie betweew 
India and China, and the greater part of the islanders 
of the eastern sea, though divided into numerous 
tribes, and equally dissimilar in their languages and 
manners, may yet with propriety be characterized by 
the term Indo-Chinese. Situated between India and 
China, each of which proudly styles itself the most 
ancient among the nations of the earth, they have 
contented themselves with more modest claims to an- 
tiquity, and professed to borrow from one or other of 
their neighbours the principal features of their reli- 


\ 


gion, la\ys and manners. The different periods, how- 


ever, at which these were adopted in different coun- 
tries, the various degrees of civilization, and the pre- 
existing habits on which they were engrafted, have 
produced a diversity of national characteristics, by 
which they are not only distinguished from the Jndian 
and Chinese nations, but also from one another, not- 
withstanding their common mixed origin. 


. The intercourse of Europeans with the Indo-Chinese 
nations, though, for the first two centuries after the 
arrival of the Portuguese in the east, scarcely inferior 
to that which was carried on with India or China, was 
not of such a kind as to furnish us with a very accu- 
rate or extensive knowledge of their laws, manners 
or literature; and for more thana century it has been 
rather declining than increasing. Neither, since our 


ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE, &c. 159 


late rapid acquisitions in Indian languages and litera- 
ture, have we obtained any important accessions to 
our information in this quarter; though both political 
and literary reasons seem to require them. 


The materials of this imperfect sketch were chiefly 
collected in the course of a voyage, which the state 
of my health caused me to take to the eastern isles, 
in 1805, during which I resided some time at Penang, 
and visted Achi, with some other places on the coast 
of Sumatra and the Malayan peninsula. Cultivating 
an intercourse with a variety of individuals of diffe- 
rent eastern tribes, I availed myself of the facilities 
which the situation presented, to correct the vague 
ideas which I had previously entertained, concerning 
their laneuages, literature and the filiation of their 
tribes. Though my information was chiefly collected 
from native sources, yet it sometimes happened, that 
these were not exactly such as I should have preferred, 
had better been attainab!e; and some times too, from 
the indifferent state of my health and other causes, I 
was no table to avail myself of these sources of infor- 
mation to the extent I could have wished. Feeling 
myself equally embarrassed by the extent of the sub- 
ject, the difficulty of the research, and, perhaps I may 
add, in some instances, by the novelty of the investi- 
gation, I should have hesitated to lay before the 
Asiatic Society these imperfect results, had I had 
any immediate prospect of pursuing the diseusssion. 
I do not however despair of being able, at no very dis- 
tant period, to offer some more minute and correct 
views of several of the subjects treated here in a cur- 
sory manner; and, at all events, I trust this attempt to 
introduce order and arrangement into a subject at 
once so extensive and intricate, and to disentangle it 
from a degree of confusion which seemed almost in- 


160 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


extricable, may not be altogether without its use; 
but may, even where I have failed, serve to point out 
the proper method of investigation. | 


The Jndo-Chinese nations, at a very early period, 
seem to have generally embraced the system of 
Bupp xa. From the want of original historical do- 
cuments, we can only conjecture the period at which 
this eveut took place, in the different regions over 
which it has extended; but at present it is chiefly 
confined to the continent. "The coasts of the Malayan 
peninsula, and of the greater part of the eastern isles, 
are chiefly occupied by the A/oslems. ‘The original 
inhabitants, therefore, being for the most part con- 
fined to the interior of these islands, are still very im- 
perfectly known to Europeans ; so that it is often im- 
possible to determine, whether their religious insti- 
tutions are most connected with the tenets of Brau- 
mA or Bunn Ha, and often to reduce them to any 
known system. From the names and epithets, how- 
ever, of some of their deities, even as given in the 
vulgar and incurious manner of common navigators, 
it is often easy to discover their connexion with the 
grand features of Hindu superstition; but our notices 
concerning them are generally too scanty, and our 
narratives too erroneous, to enable us to classify them 
with absolute certainty. Such is the difference of 
oriental and European manners, that the simplest nar- 
tator is apt to mingle conjecture with observation ; 
while an absurd affectation of superior sagacity anda 
disdain of vulgar superstitions and prejudices, often 


prevent those who have had the opportunity of obser~ 


vation, from detailing the most useful pieces of in- 
formation, or induce them to reject, as anile and use- 
less fables, the mythological narratives which would 
enable us to determine the origin of a nation ora tribe. 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 161 


With the exception of the Malays, and perhaps 
some rude tribes of; mountaineers, the ‘nations. who 
occupy the gountites which, extend from India to 
China, provess only one religion, and adhere almost 
solely to the system of Bupp'ua. In so vast an 
extent of country some diversity of local institutions 
is always to beexpected ; but the spirit of the system 
and its influence, on. the manners of the people,, in 
the, same state of civilization, is essentially the same 
from Chatigan to China. This system in its grand 
features identifies itself with that which prevails 10 
Nepal, Butan, and Tibét, and has extended itself over 
the immense regions of Chin, Cham, and Japuén, or 
China, Tartary, and Japan....Though it does not 
appear that all the nations who occupy this pro- 
digious extent of territory employ the same learned 
language i in. the preservation of their sacred books 
and. religious tracts, yet this is the case with the 
Indo-Chinese nations, who, with the Stnghalese, or 
inhabitants of Ceylon, uniformly employ the Bali or 
Pali,,.in the,sacred compositions of the Buddhist 
sect. This language does not exist as a vernacular 
tongue, but is the language of religion, learning, and 
science, and appears to have exerted an influence 
over the vernacular languages of the Indo-Chinese 
nations, similar to that which the Sanscrit has exhi- 
bited among the popular languages of Hindostan and 
Dek hin. 


The Malayu language, and the more original lan- 
guages of the eastern isles, seem in their original 
formation, to haye been polysyllabic, like Sanscrit, 
Pali, and ‘the spoken dialects of India. The modifi- 
cations which these languages have received from 
a foreign source, seem for the most part, to have 
been effected, rather by the immediate agency of San- 

M 


162 on THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 

scrit than of Pali? though the influence of this latter 
is not to be entirely excluded. But several of them 
have been a second time modified, by the imtro- 
duction of ‘rabic, ‘as the language of religion and 
learning, aftet the conversion ‘of several of these 
tribes to the AZahummedan faith. 


The vernacular’ Zndo-Chinese languages on the con- 
tinent, seem all to be, in their origmal. structure, 
either purely monosyllabic, like the spoken languages 
of China, or they incline so much to this class, that 
it may be strongly suspected, that the few original 
polysyllables which they contain, have ‘either been 
itnmeédiately derived from the Pali, ‘or formed of 
coalescing monosyllables.' These languages are’ all 
prodigiously varied by accentuation, like the spoken 
languages of China; and every foreign modification 
which they have received seems to have been imme- 
diately derived from the Pali. dit 

In the paucity of existing monuments, relative ‘to 
the Indo-Chinese wations, no better'method' presented 
itself, either for classing their tribes, or laying a 
foundation. for historical researches, than by €x- 
aminiig the mutual relation of the several languages 
which are current among them. This method, when 
applied on an extensive scale, is always the surest 
clue for developing the origin of a nation, and indi- 
cating the revolutions to which it may have been 
subjected, either by foreign conquest or colonization. 
After the relations of the language itself, the ancient 
monuments and compositions, preserved in it, claim 
our regard; and I have therefore noted, under their 
respective heads, such as have come to my knowledge ; 
premising that my opportunities of procuring this 
species of information have’ been very unfavourable, 

‘and of examining them, very limited. 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 163 


The Indo-Chinese languages may be considered in 
the following order. 


Polysyllabic languages. Monosyllabic languages. 
1 Malayu, ' 7 Rukhéng, 
2 Jawa, $8 Barma, 
3 Bagis, 9 Mén, 
4 Bima, 10 Thay, 
5 Batta, 11 Khodhmén; 
6 Gala, or Tagala. 12 Law, 
13 Anam. 


The learned language. 
14 Pah. 


I. Matayu.—The Malayu language, sO pro- 
nounced in the AZalaya peninsula, but by Europeans 
generally denominated A/alay,.1s used by, the, nume- 
rous, and enterprising nation of that name, who are 
termed Khék bythe Siamese, and Masi by the Bar- 
mas. ‘This language, which from its sweetness, has 
been termed the Jzalian, and from its widely extended 
use, the Hindostani of the Last, though it coincides 
with the monosyllabic languages in its general con- 
struction and analogies, 1s properly polysyllabic in 
its form. Having spread. itself over a.great extent 
of country, not ‘only i in the Adalaya peninsula, but 
far among the eastern isles; and having been propa- 
gated by : a race more skilled in arms than in letters, 
it has branched out into almost as many dialects as 
states, by mixing in different proportions with the 
native languages ‘of the aboriginal races. ‘This is the 
circumstance which renders the investigation of the 
origin and relations of the AZalayu language a matter 
of difficulty, as it becomes necessary to examine the 
history of the nation, as well as the structure and 
composition of the language itself. Though used 
by a nation of compar a late origin, at least with 

3) 


¢ 


164 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


respect to the principal features which it at present 
presents, the history of this nation is still very ob- 
scure, rather, it may be presumed, from the want of 
investigation, than from the want of materials for its 
illustration. The history of the origin and progress 
of the Malayu tongue, of course partakes of this 
obscurity; but notwithstanding the great diversity 
which occurs in the spoken dialects, in the bazar 
jargon, or as the Malays term it, the Basa Dagang, 
of the several Malay states, the Basa Jawi or written 
language of composition, is nearly the same in all; 
and the popular, or vernacular languages; are reck- 
oned pure, in proportion as they approximate to the 
written language. 


Assuming therefore the Basa Jawi as the standard 
of comparison, the J/alayu language, m its present 
state, consists of three principal component parts. 
The first of these, which is rather the most copious 
and current in the language of conversation, may, 
perhaps, in the present state of our knowledge, be 
regarded as original, though it is not only connected 
with the insular ianguages, but with some of the mono- 
syllabiv, as Barma and T’hay. The second, which is 
obviously derived from the Sanscrit, is rather inferior 
in the number of vocables* to the first, though as far 
as regards general use,. greatly superior to the third 
part, which is derived from the Arabic. As a spoken 
language, the MJalayu exists in the greatest purity 
in the tin countries, or the peninsula of Malaya, 
which is-obviously the Temala of Protemy. Temata 
is a regular derivative from the VJalay vocable tema, 
which signifies ¢7z, and from this, among other cir- 
cumstances, we may be permitted to infer the high 
antiquity of the basis of the AMJalay language, from 
its giving name to the Cassiterides of the east. The 


1 
> 


ae 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 165 


Malayu language is spoken in its greatest purity in 
the states of Kzddeh or Tanna Say, Perak, Salangér, 
Killung, Johor, Tringgano, Pahang, and as far as 
Patani, where it meets the Siamese. Among the 
western JZalays in general, it is spoken with more 
purity than among the more easterly isles, but on 
the coast of Sumatra, or Puléw Purichu, it is inter- 
mixed with the Batta and other original languages. 
The Menangkabow race, who seem at an early period 
to have ruled the whole island of Sumatra, whose 
chief assumes the name of Mana’ Ra’‘sa’ of Raya’s, 
and derives his origin from Lankapura, speak a dialect 
ef Malayu, which differs considerably from that of 
the peninsula; but which seems, as far as I can 
judge, to coincide in many respects with the Jawa 
or Javanese language. The race have probably de- 
rived their origin from Lankdpira in Java. |The 
Malayu dialects of Riyéw and Linga seem to be ~ 
mixed with Javanese, as are those of the Malay 
states on the island of Java. The dialect of Pantiana 
and Sambas, is purer than that of Borneo or of 
Banjar ; but that of Passir, on the east coast of 
Borneo, is greatly mixed with the original language 
of Celebes, or the Bugis. The Malays of fitakes 
speak a dialect greatly mixed with Bzgis, while 
those of the Moluccas and the more eastern isles 
have adopted such a multitude of foreign words, 
that their dialect sometimes seems to be quite a 
different language. The simplicity of structure 
which the Adalayu language possesses, in common 
with those of the monosyllabic class, greatly facili- 
tates this adoption of foreign terms ; and the practice 
is so prevalent in the more easterly isles, that the 
term Basa Timor, or the eastern language, is currently 
applied to every kind eee 3 
M3 


166 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


As the Malayu language, from its wide extent and 
the adventurous spirit of the nation, seems to have 
exerted, im the eastern isles, a modifyi ing influence, 
similar to that of the Sanscrit in Hindostan and 
Dekhin, and of the Pah among the Indo-Chinese 
nations; it becomes necessary to examine it somewhat 
more particularly ; especially as some of the opinions 
I have been led to adopt concerning it, are somewhat 
different from those which have been entertained by 


names of great authority. . 


The Malay language, according to Marspen, 
whose opinion has been rather admitted than con- 
firmed by Sir W. Jones, is “a branch or dialect of 
the widely extended language, prevailing throughout 
the islands of the dr chipelago, to which it gives 
name, (which may be understood to comprehend the 
Sunda, Philippine, and Molucca islands) and those of 
the South Sea; comprehending, between Madagascar 
on the one hand, and aster Island on the other, 
both inclusive, the space of full 200 degrees of lon- 
gitude. ‘This consideration alone,” adds that able 
author, “is sufficient to give it claim to the highest 
degree of antiquity, and to originality, as far as that 
term cau be applied. The varions dialects of this 
speech, though they have a wonderful accordance in 
many essential properties, have experienced those 
changes which separation, time, and aecident pro- 
duce; and, in respect to the purposes of intercourse, 
may be classed mto severai languages, differing con- 
siuerably from each other*.” In another paper, 
publishes in the Archxologia, vol. VI. this able 
author has successfully exhibited ia variety of in- 
stances of coincidence, both in sound and: nh: 


* Asiat. Research, Vol. 1V. 


, OF THE INDO-CHINESE. N ATIONS,, 9467 
cation, between the Jfalay and several of the eastern 
dialects. By attempting to prove, too, much, how- 
ever, I apprehend, that he has Failed essentially. 
He has pointed out a few coincidences, ,but has left 
the mass of the language totally, unaccounted for; 
and as the few coinciding words may all have been 
derived from a common source, it is perhaps a mote 
natural inference to conclude that they have all been 
modified by some general language, than with Sir 
W. Jones, to determine that the parent of them all 
has been the Sanscrit. The same author, in his 
history of Swmatra, seems inclined to think that the 
Malay \anguage was indigenous in the Malay penin- 
sula, from which it extended itself among the eastern 
isles, till it became the lingua franca of that part of 
the globe. The author of the description of Sram, 
in the modern part of the Universal. History, not 
only assigns a very different origin to the language, 
but accounts in a very different manner for its un- 
common extent. Describing A/alacea, he observes, 
“The Malayan tongue is formed out of the languages 
of the different nations which resort hither, by 
selecting the choicest words in’each. Hence it is 
reckoned the most: agreeabie and elegant in all the 
Indies, which quality, joined to its use in_ trade, 
causes it to be learned by the remotest eastern people,” 
A language, formed according to this ingenious idea 
of selection, might probably be remarkably agreeable 
and elegant, but it would be stil more remarkable, 
as a new phenomenon in the history of nations. It 
would certainly be a very uncommon occurence in 
the history of mankind, to discover a nation.so choice 
in matters of abstract sound, and,so refined in their 
organs of hearing, as. to take the trouble to learn a 
copious and unknown language, tor the mere abstract 
pleasure of gratifying this deligate sense or appetite 
RAMS) oT pee a Peary 1; 


168 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


for sweet vocalic sounds. Nevertheless, though the 
author is a little unfortunate in his doctrine of causes, 
the fact to which he alludes is worthy of attention ; 
for it is not necessary to possess a very minute know- 
ledge of the AMalayu language, to be able to call its 
originality in question. It may be safely affirmed, 
that neither the Malay lingua franca of commerce, 
nor any of the maritime dialects of Malayu existed 
previous to the era of MauUMMED, In a state similar 
to that in which they appear at present; and these 
dialects seem to comprehend all that are usually 
included under the denomination of the Malayu 
language. ) 


The Malayu language, in this limited sense, is 
obviously indebted to two foreign sources, for the 
majority of the vocables which compose it, and these 
are the Sanscrit and the Arabic. 


The connection between the Sanscrit and Malayu 
was first remarked by Sir W. Jones, and Mr. 
Maxspen has confirmed the fact, by about fifteen 
examples, selected, as he says, with little pains, from 
a Malay dictionary, which had he been acquainted 
with the Sanscrit language, he might with very little 
labour, have extended to fifteen hundred, or perhaps 
five thousand. Many of the Sanscrit words in the 
- Malayu, as he observes, are such as the progress of 
civilization must soon have rendered necessary, being 
frequently expressive of mental feelings, or such 
modes of thinking as naturally result from the social 
habits of mankind, or from the evils which tend to 
interrupt them. Many of the names of the common 
objects of sensation are also of Sanscrit origin; never- 
theless, the simplest part of the JZal/ayu language, 
and that which is most indispensable to its existence 


-f 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 169 


as a distinct tongue, is certainly not derived from 
the Sanscrit. 


With respect to the connection between drabie 
and VWalayu, Marsven observes, that the latter lan- 
guage abounds with Arabic words, which writers 
affect to introduce, because this display of literary 
skill is, at the same time, a proof of their religious 
knowledge. He adds, that these words are generally 
legal or metaphysical terms, borrowed from the Koran 
or its commentaries, that they are never expressive 
of simple ideas, are rarely used in conversation, and, 
with few exceptions, seem never to have been 
thoroughly incorporated into the language. This 
account of the introduction of Arabic into Maiayu 
is unexceptionably just, excepting with respect to 
the use of Arabic terms in conversation, which is 
affected by all AZalays who have any pretensions to 
literature. The number of Arabic vocables too, that 
have been introduced into Malay compositions, though 
certainly inferior to those of Sanscrit origin, are con- 
siderably more numerous than might be supposed 
from this statement; or rather, as in Persic and 
Turki, it is difficult to assign any bounds to their 
imtroduction, but the pleasure of the writer. It may 
also be observed here, that in the AMJalayu language, 
Arabic plurals are very commonly used as singulars, 
as often happens in 7'urki, and other dialects which 
admit of a mixture of Arabic. Marspen has men- 
tioned another peculiarity, in which Arabic vocables, 
adopted by the Malayu, differ from adopted Sanscrit 
terms. While the 4radic words retain their peculiar 
and harsh pronunciation, those of Sanscrit origin are 
softened down, and assimilated with the rest of the 
language. This observation must likewise be taken 
with many limitations; for numerous words, of dra- 


170 N THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


bic origin, are so completely: assimilated to, the Ma- 
layu pronunciation, that they aré no longer capable 
of being recognized, even by a native drab, unless 
by attention to their radicals; the aiz and ghain, in 
particular, excepting in religious terms, ane very 
gencrally conyerted into di/fand Gf, both in writing 
aud pronunciation. Itis certain; however, that Arabic 
words are naturally untractable, and are apt to have 
a foreign appearance When. assuined into any, other 
language, in spite of all, modifications. .The Arabic 
is a language so complete in itself, and so peculiar in 
its structure, that.it is as little capable of coalescing 
neatly with any other language, as a curved line with 
a straight one. sega Re Pg i 
Marspen has likewise hazarded an opinion, that 
the polish, which the Malayu has derived from 
Sanscrit or Hinduvi, has been obtained immediately 
fiom the natives of Guzerat, previous to the debase- 
ment of the genuine Hinduvi of the northern pro- 
vinces, by the mixture of Arabic nouns, and the 
abuse of verbal auxiliaries. The resort of the people 
of Guzerat to Malacca, he adds, ‘‘is particularly 
noticed by Dr Barros and other authentic writers; 
and it is well known that the Hindu, language has 
been preserved with more purity in that, than in any 
other maritime province of Judia.” ‘To this, it 1s 
sufficient to answer, that the Sgzscri¢ ‘vocables, 
adopted in Afalayu and Guzerdti, are generally pre- 
served purer. in the former than, in the latter; that 


— 


the Guzerdti has no pretensions to be considered as _ 


a pure dialect of Hinduvi, but on the contrary, is one 
of the very first that was corrupted by a.mixture of 
Arabic, and that long prior to the period mentioned 
by De Barros. The Bengali language itself, cor- 
Tupted in pronunciation, as it certaily is, might haye 


Te ne 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS; - 171 


been more safely adopted, as the medium for the 
introduction of Sanscrit vocables into Malayu. Many 
Sanscrit words that are in current use in Bengali, 
likewise occur in Malayu, with:almost the very same 
pronunciation. Of this it is easy to produce a mul- 
titude of imstances.» The following are such as: pre- 
sent themselves spontaneously: | 
Beng.  * Malay. 
Tot’hapi---.-- oe eces ceever ee Tatapi+eeecess but, however. 
Punahs sve cccccrccessvee sere Pisce essevcs farther, again. 
"Futkalé) . sce ccs csc ccvccsccss utkadla «2-oe% then. 
Bongsh tere ecererereeeseces Bangs seseer a raceorfamily, 
Kichhu or Kichhi +--+. -+-+++ Kichi +++«++++ a little, 
Inggit, a signal «+++++++++e+++ Ingat ++++++++ notice,memory, 
Barung, a gift, a thing, a quality. Barang-barang, any thing. 
But it is needless to adduce further instances; as 
the Malay history and the language itself, exhibit 
traces sufficiently clear, to direct us to the’ region, 
with which the J/alays had the most frequent inter. 
course, at an early period, and from which their lan- 
guage seems to have received the most considerable 
modifications, and that is the ancient kingdom of 
Kalinga. Here I am again under the necessity of 
dissenting from Marspex’s opinion. He says, “It 
-is evident, that from the Telinga, or the Tt “moo! the’ 
Malayan has not received any portion of its improve- 
ment.” I apprehend that the express reverse of this 
opinion is evident; for the JZalays, at this very pe- 
riod, know the Coromandel coast by no other name 
than Tanna Keling, the land of Keling or Kalinga: 
a multitude of compositions, current among them, 
profess to be translations from the Basa-Keling, ‘or 
Kalinga language; and the Afalayu lancuage contains 
a gr eat number of words that are Tamul, Malaydlam, 
and Telinga ; though neither Sznscrit, Hinidusi, nor 
Guzerati ; and a variety that are only to be found in 
Telnga, the vernacular language of the Kalinga Desa. 


‘ 


172 OWN THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


For ‘the same reasons that I infer an ancient inter- 
course to have subsisted between the Malays and 
Kalingas, 1 am induced to think that a very intimate 
connection subsisted, at avery early period, between 
the Malays and Javanese. Not only the proximity 
of the island of Java, and the constant intercourse 
between the Malays and Javanese, point to this con- 
nection, but the whole of Malay literature, the state 
of the language, and the whole series of Malay his-. 
tory, confirm it. It is from the Javanese that the 
Malays profess to have received all their earlier 
mythological fables; and a great variety of their 
books profess to be translations from that language: 
even in compositions professedly translated from the 
Keling language, the Javanese name of the story is 
often mentioned: and almost every Sanscrit term, 
that occurs in Malaya, is likewise to be found in the 
Basa Dalam Jawa, the high language of Java, or 
rather the language of the interior; though a mul- 
titude of Sanscrit words, current in the Javanese 
language, are not to be found in the M/alayu. Besides 
many of the Malay states, and those of the greatest 
antiquity, are known to have been founded by 
Javanese adventurers, anterior to the arrival of the 
Arabs: and if the historical traditions of the Malays 
were better known, there are many reasons for sup- . 
posing, that more of them would be found to claim 
the same origin. 


The greater part of the words of Sanscri¢ origin, 
found in A/alayu, do not appear to have been intro- 
duced through the medium of the Bai. In many 
instances, the Malayu form approaches nearer the 
pure Sanscrit than even the Bali itself; and many 
mythological stories exist in Aalayu, and mytholo- 
gical characters are introduced in them, that as far 
as I have been able to learn, do not occur in Bak 


~ 


, 173 


OF THE iNDO-CHINESE) NATIONS. iv 


compositions at all, nor in any of the Jndo-Chinese 
languages of the continent. | 


But after assioning the Arabic and Sanscrit voca- 
bles to their proper sources, a large proportion of 
words in the language will still. remain unaccounted 
for; and these ‘words too, expressive of the most 
simple class of our ideas, and the most remarkable 
objects innature. This part of the language, which 
in comparison of the rest, may be termed native vr 
original, Marspen attributes to what he reckons 
the original insular language of the South Seas ; and 
this original language, again Sir W. Jones pronounces 
a derivative from the Sanscrit. That it is not Sanscriz, 
a very slender knowledge of the two languages. is 
sufficient to evince ; and if this original part should 
itself turn out to be derived, as I apprehend, from 
different'sources, the idea of an original insular lan- 
guage will fall to the ground. Now there are a 
variety of reasons for supposing that this part of the 
Malayu language, which might be imagined the most 
simple and original, is in reality, more corrupted and 
mixed, than those parts which are confessedly de- 
rived from a foreign source. Several of the Alalayu 
terms, which express the most simple and remarkable 
objects in nature, appear to be only gross auricular 
corruptions of true regular terms in the more ancient 
eastern languages, as Jawa, Bagis, T’hay, and Barma; 
and many of the simplest objects are not distinguished 
in Afalayu by simple words, but by compound meta- 
phorical and significant terms. ‘The omission: of 
the first syllable, in words derived from a foreign 
language, whether ancient or modern, is a frequent 
practice in the MJalayu language: thus the Saxscrit 
Avatara becomes Bitara, and thus rumbilum, the 


- moon, in Javanese, becomes Bidun in Malayu—and 


Méputi, which signifies white, in Bugis, becomes puri 


174 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


in’ Malayu. Again the metaphorical term mata-hari, 
which literally signifies the eye ot day, is the only 
native term for the sun; though Chinkerwala, a cor- 
ruption of the Bak term Chakrawala, has been adopted 
m the higher dialect, or poetical. style, termed the 
Basa Dalam. Yhe ALatay term tuhin which signifies 
the aged, is used as synonymous. with dllahtaala, 
which they have adopted from the drabic. A number 
of 7°hay vocables occur in Malayu ; but, for the most 
part, they are neither expressive of our simplest ideas, 
nor of the most remarkable objects in nature, ex- 
cepting perhaps su, the contracted term of Aku, I, 
in Malayu, which 1s the same in 7°hay or Siamese. 
A variety, however, of important words seem to have 
been adopted from the Barma language, especially in 
the verbal auxiliaries ; and in mostof these instances, 
it may be observed, that the Ma/ayu pronounciation 
coincides better. with that of Javay, or Tinnau, than 
with that of the Barmas propet. Thus the substan- 
tive verbal auxiliary of the present, adda, seems to be 
only a modification of the more simple da or déof the 
Barma \anguage. The past: suda of the Barma sy 
dé, the auxiliary of the future jadi of the Barma ra- 
de, pronounced ya-dé or ja-dé, maw, willor may, is a 
modification of the Barma Mi, or minh’, and the per- 
missive auxiliary /éh of the Barma lé. Of the con- 
nection of the A/alayu withany of the spoken dialects 
of China, it is more difficult to speak with accuracy, 
in the present state of our knowledge. Barrow, and 
some other authors of reputation, are inclined to 
attribute the origin of the Ma/ay tribes to the nations 
of China; and that author observes, that many words, 
in the languages of Sumatra, are similar in sound to 
Chinese vocables; and that the corresponding words 
generally express the same idea in both languages. 
Of the value of this opinion it is not easy to speak in 
correct terms, for the proper Chinese languages, are 


i OFTHE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 175 


at least ‘ten in number, andthe dialects of Swmatra, 
vary almost as much, on asmiall scale, as the dialects 
of the Chinese; and te jumble together a number of 
corresponding words'in all those‘dialects, may there- 
fore ‘be no very difficult task. Some coincidences 
there certainly are, between the Aalayu and the 
Chinese-Mandarin language ; thus in tlre first personal 
pronoun, saya and gua, which both signify Zin Afa- 
layu,: very: nearly coincide with the Chinese seaé and 
neo, Which. have the same signification; but, on the 
whole, these coincidencesscem neither very numerous 
not important. . 
reek Ya hs: C 4 

The' Malaya lancuave is extremely well fitted for 
being a Lingua Franca, or general medium of com- 
munication among the eastern isles, by the smooth- 
ness and sweetness of its tone, and the simplicity of 
its structure and construction. Its simple pronouns 
indicate rank and situation, and are almost as nume- 
rous asin Chinese ;' but the different dialects of. the 
Malayu vary considerably, both in the use: of the 
pronouns and of the verbal auxiliaries." It may also 
be observed, that the more mixed and impure any 
dialectof Alatayu is, it is more verbose, more indefi- 
nite in its expressions, and more loaded with useless 
auxiharies and epithets, which encumber the lan- 
guage, without adding either elegance, force, or dig- 
nity. The beauty and elegance of the JAfalayu is its 
simplicity ; and the purity of its minor dialects may » 
often be ascertained by this criterion alone. 


__ The literature of the Malays, though the language 

is well adapted for poetry, is not distinguished by 
many features of originality. A degree of monotony 
and repetition occurs in ali the compositions of the 
monosyllabic languages, which has a great tendency 


176 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


to damp the ardour of composition, and extinguish 
poetical fire. The construction of the Malay is ana- 
logous to that of the monosyllabic languages, and 
there is also considerable similarity in the character 
of its compositions. ‘The most favourite species of 
composition among the AMJalays, is the Pantin, a ° 
word which is generally translated song, but which 
perhaps might with more propriety be rendered 
simile or proverb, as it consists of a simile, proverb, or 
apophthegm versified, and its application. A Pantin 
is a rhyming quatrain, and is always restricted to 
four lines; hence it affects a kind of oracular brevity, 
which is very difficult to be comprehended by Euro- 
peans, who can seldom perceive any connection be- 
tween the similitude and the application. The Ma- 
lays allege, that the application of the image, maxim, 
or similitude, is always accurate; but it may be sus- 
pected that if one half of the verse be for the sense, 
it often happens that the other is only for the rhyme, 
as in the ancient /Velsh triads or triplets, in which 
there is professedly no connection between the na- 
tural image and the moral maxim. These Pantuns 
the Malays often recite, in alternate contest, for 
several hours; the preceding Pantin always fur- 
nishing the catch-word to that which follows, until 
one of the parties be silenced or vanquished, or as the 
Malays express it, be dead, suda mati. Many of these 
Pantins bear no inconsiderable resemblances to the 
Dohras and Kubitas in the ancient Hinduvi and Vruja 
dialects of Hindostan. 7 


The Sayer is another species of composition, which 
is analogous to the Persic Musnevi. Moral poems, re- 
sembling the Pundnaméhs of the Persians, didactic 
works, or descriptive compositions and legendary or 
heraic narratives, are composed in this measure. The 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 177 


Cheritra:or Hikaiat; also denominated Chitra and 
Kuggawin; from the Javanese, is more generally writ- 
ten in prose, but frequently intermixed with verse, 
both in the measures of the Sdyer and Pantin. These 
Cheritras contain the mythological stories current 
among the Malay tribes, and also fragments of their 
history, embellished in a poetical manner.. The three 
great sources of all the JZalay legends are the Java- 
nese, Keling and Arabic languages, but in the com- 
positions of latter date, the characters and incidents 
are so mixed, that it is not always easy to determine 
to which of these sources they ought to be referred. 
There is also one class of stories which the learned 
Malays term Susupin, 1 imagine from an ancient dy- 
nasty of Javanese princes to whom they relate. Some 
of these legends also. coincide in the general story 
with those of the Siamese, as the AZLalay Selimbari 
with the Siamese Khinp’hen; and the Hikaiat Shah 
Murdan with the Siamese Lin-téing. When characters 
familiar in Sanscrit mythology are introduced into the 
Malay \egends, their adventures are generally trans- 
ferred by the Malays to the interior of Java; and 
even Arabian characters are. often represented as per- 
forming their adventures in the Jalay countries.— 
Many of these narratives exist both in prose and 
verse, and of several there seem to be two edi- 
tions; one’ derived immediately from the Javanese 
language, and which commonly contains a consider- 
able numberof Javanese vocables; the other from the 
Keling, which often contains.a certain proportion of 
words more immediately derived from the Sanscrit 
and Telinga. | | 
‘Of this latter class are probably the narratives 
termed Hikaiat ototuvag or Pandu stories, which 


178 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


seem popular versions, or tather abridgements, of 
the different parts of the Adahabh’drata; some of 
which, in reality, give the outline of the story, as 
faithfully as the popular abridgements of it, which 
Ihave perused in Mahrata, Tamut-or Telinga. 1 
am only acquainted with the following Malay —Hi- 
kaiats of this class: Pindawa Lima, the stony. of the 
five Pandus ; Pindawa Jaya, the victory of the Pan- 
dis; Pindawa Berjuddi, the gaming of the Pandis; 
Pindawa Pinjam bali, the Pandis borrowing a ‘Pa- 
lace; Pindawa berjewal kapur, the Pandis selling 
lime. The Jithacat Alaha Raja Buma of Purichu 
Nikassan, or account of the contest between Brauma 
and VisHNnu, professes to be translated from the 
Keling of the dramatist MuncaxartTa Niga‘Ra. The 
Sah-Sipundia, or history of a Keling Rasau, “is pro- 
bably derived from the same source. The Aihkaiat 
Sri Rama is reckoned a Susupun story,’as ‘are the 
Kusoma Indra or history of Inpra, the Balinta Sena, 
the Sah Kobut, or history of the war with the Apes, 
the Rajah ular Ninggawong, the Hikaiat Bida Sari, 
the Hikaiat Raja Pikermadi or VicramMApirya 
Cuerirra, the Hikaiat Derma Rayan, and the: Hi- 
kaiat Kahlo Damna or Malay version of the Kalil e 
Dumana. 7 | 


The following are Javanese relations, the Hikaiat 
Chikkil Wunnungputti Rasan of Kirripin, in the in- 
terior of Java, the Hikaiat Jarana Tamasa, or the 
love of adventures of a chieftain of AZinjapahit, in 
Java, composed by AnpiKa, the Kildna Perbujaya 
Cheritra, or story of a prince of Kirripin, the Misa 
Perbujaya Cheritra, the Misa Kiamong Cheritra, or 
history of a Princess of Daha, in Java, carried ofPby 
Timunoune Barane Cuaxan Brmayand rescued by 


( 


,OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, , W9 


Bie Kara; the Jaran Kilinang Cheritra; the 
Ratu Bader Kisna Cheritra; the Panga Witin, or 
history of Inu Kurrapurtt; the Gambar Wira- 
Putra; the Gambar Sri Ratu Anim-Ani Malayu, 
or.history of Gampar Spi, Princess of Daha and 
Raga Anou’m of Jdalaya ; the Naga Bisaru, or his- 
tory of a Princess of Daha, who was transformed into a 
snake, and confined in a lake, the Putti Kola Bisnu 
or.history of Visunu, the Kinta-Buhin, or history of 
a,chief of Banja skulin in Java, the Kilana Jayang 
Sittru, or history of Ravi JARAN Tinancxu, the 
Angling Dermavi Raja-Cheritra, and the Hikaiat 
Parang Piting, or history of the hatchet. without 
the handle. . To the same source are probably to he 
referred the following, if they are not purely of 
Malay composition ; the Hikaiat Pelandik Jinaka, 
or history of the sagacious hogdeer. The Hikaiab 
Biring Pinggey, or history of a wonderful bird.— 
The Deva Mandi Cheritra, the Sayer Sri Batin, the 
Fitkaiat Bian andthe Hikasat Rajah Boodah. 


eRe: following ar € ¢ modifications of Arabic narratives, 
danaumudatcsl however, to the peculiarities. of the 
Malayu manners and customs. The Hikaiat Anur 
HHumda.. The Hikaiat Rajah. Kheiber, the chief of 
the Jewish tribe of Kipeliat in Arabia. 'The.Hikaiat 
Rajah Hinduk, the Hikaiat Mahummed Hanifah, the 
Aikaiat Khajeh Maimin, the Hikait Eblis, the Hi 
kaiat. Rajah Shah Murdan, the Hikaiat ididin Ibra- 
him-ibn- Adhem, the Hikaiat Sekunder Dulkharneini. 
The Koran is also translated into Malayu in the s same 
par aphrastic manner as into Persie. . 


There are many Malayu compositions of a. histori- 
cal nature, though they are not so common as the 


180 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


classes that have been enumerated: such as the Hi- 
kaiat Rajah-bangsu, which I have not seen, but 
which has been described to me as a genealogical his- 
tory of the Afalay Rasaus. The Hikaat Malaka, 
which relates the founding of that city by a Javanese 
adventurer, the arrival of the Portuguese and the 
combats of the Malays, with ALBUQUERQUE and the 
other Portuguese commanders. The Hekaiat Pitra- 
jaya-Putti, or history of an ancient Rajah of Malacca, 
the Hikaiat Achi, or history of Achi or Achin in’ Su- 
matra and the Hikaiat Hang-Tuha, or the adventures 
of a Malay chief during the reign of the last’ Rajah 
of Malacca, and the account of a Malay embassy sent 
to Mekka and Constantinople, to request assistance 
against the Portuguese. Such historical narratives 
are extremely numerous; indeed there is reason to 
believe that there is one of every state or tribe; and 
though occasionally embellished by fiction, it is only 
from them that we can obtain any outline of the 
Malay history, and of the progress of the nation, 
The juridical customs or traditions of the AZalays 
have likewise been collected into codes of different 
antiquity and authority. Among those of the great- 
est authority are the Undang Undang, and the dddat 
Malayu. ‘The imost ancient of these regulations, 
however, appear to have been adopted from the Ja- 
wanese and Bugis. Particular’states have at different 


periods composed peculiar regulations; as the 4ddat 


Kiddeh, which were compiled by Rajah Sua ALum, 
in An. Heg. 1151. | 

No dramatic compositions, in the AZadyu language, 
have fallen, as yet, into my hands, though many 
of them are said to exist. Scenic exhibitions 
termed “ /ayang-wayang, were till lately, very com- 


= 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 181 


mon in the peninsula of AZalayu, but are now repre- 
sented as less frequently exhibited. The subjects of 
the Malayu dramas are the same as those of their 
histories and romances, from which, like the dra- 
matic compositions of the Siamese and Chinese, they 
only differ in assuming the form of dialogue and 
soliloquy, the progress of the incidents being gene- 
rally the same. | 


The following specimens of the Afalayu Pantin 
and Sayer will exhibit the measure of the verse and 
the style of the composition. ‘The first Pantin is a 
challenge to engage in a poetical contest. ‘The rest 
exhibit the peculiar images introduced, and the man- 

“ner of presenting them in the Pantin. 


Tuan bulu, saya tumiang 
Marileh kita berkiler taji 
Tuan sapulu, saya smbilan 
Marileh kita bersindir nyani. 


You are a bamboo and I am but a slender twig; 
Yet come on, let us sharpen’ our weapons :’ 
You are as ten, and I am only as‘nine; 

Yet come, let us contend‘in ironical verse.’ ’ 


Boah dilama ber pangsu pangsu or 
Samajuga bijinya merah 

», Jangamtuan berpilis bangsu 

_. Samajuga daranya merah. 


. The pomegranate has many partitions, _. 
. But the-seed is equally red in them all : 
mai he) Do ‘not give’an undue preference to:a race of men, 
od For the blood is equally red in them all. - 
Boah mamplum deri Patané = 9? 
Masa sabiji de kulum risa 


N 3 


182 ON THE LANGUAGES) AND LITERATURE 
_. Tuan Islam saya Nasrahi,\ |’ fcoreiepSer gel Pee 
. Sama sara’ manangung dusa.  §)) 
Of all the’ Mangoes of Patani : 
A ripe gne is’ but a mouthful toa stag; 
“You area Moslem ‘and I am a Christian, 
‘But we must equally bear our own faults. 
Tso CIAO DIOIT Dra: 
Batang padi jangan de rariit mire SF YB 
_ Kalu de rardt risa batangnya 
‘Hati mutla janga de tarat’ 8 i 
oomy aft to otidessur ot diaitacoud AWD, DAE 
‘ Kalu de turdt ‘rasa’ badiiiya. De eee H, a 
wih Jean of L.., woilieacigd 9hh to Sevie Ons 
Shake not the rige stalk, gj 6 0. 179 OF OSs 
tev sis \ Lo . 
Ifyou shake itthestalkiisruimed: |! er) me? 8 
Do not yield td, youthfulsinclination, | oil oue 1 10 89 
If you yield your person is ruined. 


Siri kining deri Patant 

Pinang muda deri Malaka, |: 

Pati kining ana’k Nasrani ,; i)! sd suid lolinpi 
Itu membawa badin chilaka. 

The yellow. betel leaf of Patanz, 
The fresh betel-nut of AZulacea; | 
A white yellow christian \danjsel,);..) ou 


e 


Bring a person to total ruin. 


Gendack ‘zat reli 

The following passage of the Sédmbari:is given as 
a specimen of the Sayer verse, in which: theeMalay 
romances and moral poems are generally composed. 
In both measure* and style they exhibit con- 
siderable resemblaiice ‘to the ancient English and . 
French romances} ‘there is little variety of ‘pause or 
accent, and the lite consists indifferently of eight or 
nine syllables, one long syHable being reckoned equi- 
valent to two short. sain teufel ol I 


bers 


. tes 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 


_ Tutkala tuan;lunkah de natang 

Mata mamandang sepurti bintang, 
Chahianya,limpah gilang gumilang, 
Teadaléh abang dapat mamandang 
Pipinya bagei paii de lalang 
Bersambut dangan lehernya jinjang 
Paras separti gumbar dan wayang, 
Barang de makan berbayang bayang 
Dahinya bagei sahari balun 
Kinningnya bintah bagei detillang 
Lalu de ambil jadikan talun 

Mamaki chinchin permata S¢lun 
Changgeynya panjang ber kilat kilat 

, Sepurti mutiara suda tericat 
Pinggangnya ramping terlalu chantils §| | 
Leher laksana gumbar delarik - 
Mungluarkan’ kata yang patah chirdik 
-Bibirnya bagei, patey chicharik 
‘Teada mama laku_her saja 
Giginya itam bukkus ber baja 
; Chartik moilik gilang de Raja 


#4 - Bersinting, katum byinga Seraja, 


Parasnya elok bukun kapalang 


; Jar Intahkan jiwa garangan hilang 


\.-,, Kapada matasuda terpandang 


Fi ats 


(, Teadaléh dapat kumbali pulang. 


When my mistress looks forth from her window, 


‘ ; (Her eye sparkling tee a star, 


_ Its brilliant ays glancing and glittering 
Her elder brother cannot support its lustre ;, 

» Like | the red mangoe is the hue of her cheek, 
“Becoming her tapering neck, 


_ Traversed with shadows whenever she swallows : 
. Her features like those of a statue or scenic figure, 
.. Her forehead like the new moon in its first day, 


N 4 


186, 


184 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Her eye-brows curved, so fair I could devour her, 
Long has she been chosen to be my mistress. 
Wearing a ring set with gems of Ceylon, 

Her long nails shining like lightning, 
Transparent as a string of pearls, 
Her waist slender and extremely elegant, 

Her neck turned like a polished statue, 

Eloquent in the enunciation of her words, © 

Her parting lips like the crimson red wood 

Not by dress, but by herself adorned ; 

Black are her teeth stained with baja powder, -' 
Graceful, slender, appearing like a queen, 

Her locks adorned with the Seraja flowers, 

Her features beautiful with no defect of symmetry, 
My soul is often fluttering ready to depart, 
Glancing eagerly forth from my eyes, 

And quite unable to return to its station: | 


The character generally used by the AJalays, is a 
modification of the Arabic; and, in addition to the 
proper Arabic alphabet, the AZalayu uses six letters, 
of which one is the Persic ché, a second the slurred 
dal, of the Hindostani, two more ‘correspond in power 
to the Persic and Hindostani pa and ga, but are writ- 
ten of a different form, and the remaining two, nga 
and nya, are peculiar in form, but correspond to the 
nasals of the first and second series of the Deva-Na- 
gari alphabet. The Malays of Java, hawever, often 
use the Javanese character, to express their own lan- 
guage, as those of Celebes do the Bugis. In the Ado- 
luccas, the Latin character has obtained some degree 
of currency, even among the Malays, and is some- 
times used by them to express the Aalayu language. 


The Malayu language was one of the first cultivated 
in the east by Europeans. The first attempt to form 
a erammar or dictionary of it, as far as I know, was 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 185 


made by Davip Haex, who published in Malayu and 
Dutch, a vocabulary with some grammatical observa- 
tions. At the request of Cardinal Barsertnr, the 
Dutch was rendered into Latin, and published with 
the Propaganda types at Rome, 1631, under the title 
of “ Dictionarium Malaico-Latinum et Latino-Malai- 
cum, operd et studio Davipis Hatx.” This ‘is 
a work of some merit, but seems to have been 
composed in the Moluccas, and inclines to the 
Basa Timor, or eastern dialect of the AZalayu. The 
author has given a-short list of Zarnata and Por- 
tuguese words, that have been adopted into AMJa/ayu, 
' and some uséful observations on the phraseology. 
Professor TuunBERG, probably by mistake, mentions 
this work as published in 1707. It seems to have 
served among the Dutch, as a basis for similar compi= 
lations. The ‘‘ Malaica Collectanea Vocabularia,” or 
collection of vocabularies, was printed at Batavia in 
1707-8, in 2 vols.'4to. and the ‘ Dictionarium of te 
WVoord ende Spraak bock in de Dutsche en de Maleysche 
Tale,” at the same place in 1708, in 4to, A “ Ma- 
leische. Spraak-kunst” or Malay. Grammar, was pub- 
lished by Groner HeEnprRIc WERNDLY, at Amsterdam, 
im 1726, &vo. A ‘ Nieuwe Woordenschaft in Neder- 
Duitsch, Maleisch en Portugeesch, was also published 
at Batavia in 8v0..1780. The English have also con- 
tributed their share'to the cultivation of this language, 
Bowrey’s Grammarand: Dictionary of the Malay lans 
guage were published at London in 1701, in 4to. after 
_ the author had passed nineteen years in trading among 
the eastern isles. This is a work of great merit and 
labour, and though the English character only is used, 
yet the pronunciation and the signification of words 
are generally given with great accuracy. Bowrey, 
however, had the assistance of the two eminent orfen- 
talists,, Hype and MarsHALL, in its composition, 


186 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE. 


both of whom were excellently skilled, m the lan- 
guage. In 1801 was pubiished at London,, “ A Dic- 
tionary of the Away) tongue, to, which is; prefixed; 
a Grammar of that langage, by James Howson, 
M.D.” .The.authe: tounds his claims ona ten years 
acquaintance with the Malays, and thew lenguege, 
From. the scarcity ‘ot Bowrzw’s work, Lhaye not been 
able to: compare it, with the publication of Dr. Howe 
son, but I suspect the additions of the, latter to be 
neither numerous nor important. .OQne improvement 
he has attempted, and it is the following. _ * In giv- 
ing the Malay words. in the dnabic chaxacter,” says 
he, “ we have followed. the excellent. example:, of 
RicwHarpson and Giucurisz, in their Persian and 
Hinioostance Dictionaries, and it is, in fact, the char 
racter used, by. the Jfalays themselves.” . But, had 
Dr. Hawtson been acquainted with the Afalay-ortho- 
graphy, he-would;have perceived that this barbarous 
mode of converting the English character) intothe 
Persie, could be‘of no possible, utility, either to an 
European, or an Asiatic. » The Malayu has an esta- 
blished. orthography,,.like the dradic, Persie, and 
Hindostani ; and this /established orthography: of 
Malay MSS. he has. violated, repeatedly, im-every 
page, not only. by spelling the dlalay words ini a 
mode never used\among: the Adalays themsélves, but 
by, omitting all theinpeculiar,characters, and by using 
some Persic characters, as pa and: ga, with» which 
the Malays are wnacquainted : altogether.‘ A short 
Vocabulary, Laghsh, and Malayo, with , grammar 
yules for the attainment.of the JZalayo language,” — 
was published at Calcutta in 1798.:'The rules, differ 
little from. those which appear in) Howison’s.Gram- 
mar, prefixed to bis Dictionary, and .the|vocabulary 
generally coincides, with it im.the explanation, of 
words, which are not very numerous, Besides these 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 187 


works which have been printed, many Vocabularies 
and Dictionaries existin MSS. in Dutch, English and 
Portuguese ; and of these several are inmy possession. 
Revanp, in ‘his “ Dissertatio de linguis Insularum 
Orientalium;? mentions a large ‘MS. Dictionary 
which he had consulted, composed by LeipEK«KeEr, 
a Dutch clergyman in Batavia, from which: he has 
selected a specimen of the language. Several smaller 
Vocabularies ot Malayu have been published, chiefly 
by voyagers and travellers, with various degrees of 
accuracy. Being generally constructed in a very 
hurried manner, by persons devoid of a radical know- 
ledge of the language, and often, as maybe pre- 
sumed, under the necessity of expressing their 
questions by a mixture of signs, they. generally 
abound in very ludicrous errors «and risible mistakes. 
Of this kind, many instances might easily be selected 
from’ Lasittarptiere’s Malay Vocabulary, nor is: 
that published by Professor TounBeEre, in his travels, 
entirely free from them. © Besides they are generally 
mixed with a variety of lingua franca, and other 
eastern words that..are never received in correct 
Malay. : wel ont 


The sacred scriptures, at an early period, began to 
be translated into the Malayu language. The gospels 
of Matriew and Marx were first published in the 
Malayu language and Arabic character at Enchusa, 
in 1629, in 4to.'according to the version of ALB. 
Corn. Ruy, and accompanied with the Dutch ver- 
sion. A second edition was published at Amsterdam 
in 1638. The gospels of Luxe and Joun were pub- 
lished at Amsterdam, in 1646, according to the ’ver-: 
sion of Joun Van Hasex and Just. Heury; in 1648, 
published ““ Psalmi guinquaginta priores, Mataicé et 
_Belgicé.” The four gospels were republished, more 


Iss. ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


correctly, with a version of the Acts of the Apostles, 
by Just. Heurn, at Amsterdam, in 4to. 1651. Ge- 
nesis was published in Afalay, at Amsterdam, im 1662, 
according: to the version of Dan. Brouwer, and the 
New Testament, by the same author, in 1668. A se- 
cond edition of Genesis was published in 1687. |The 
four Evangelists and the Acts of :the Apostles were: 
published *‘ in the Malayan tongue,” at Oxford, Ine 
1677, in 4to. and reprinted in 1704. Both editions 
are in the Roman character, and though Hreurn’s ver-. 
sion was followed, yet the first edition had. the ad- 
vantage of being superintended by the learned 
Hype, who has prefixed to it, a dissertation on the’ 
dialects of the Malay, and the method to be employed 
in studying the language. ‘The Psalms, or “ Psal- 
ferium lingua Malaca et Belgica,” was published by: 
Van Hasert and Heurn at Amsterdam in. 1689. 
The “:Psaltertum Malatce” was published at Amster-- 
dam in 1735, with musical notes. A complete. ver- 
sion of the Bible was published at Amsterdam, in Ro- 
man characters, in 1733, and this version was again 

blished in the Arabic character, with the addition 
of the A/alay peculiar letters, at Batavia, m 5 vols: 
8vo. 1758, under the direction of Jacop Mossr1, 
Governor General of ‘the Dutch possessions in the 
‘East Indies. 'The persons who superintended the: 
edition were Jonan. Maurttz Monr, and Herm. 
Prerrus Van DE WerrH. A Malay catechism was_ 
also composed by Gusravus Witti1am Baron Van 
Imuorr, and printed at Batavia in 1746. ‘This ver- 
sion of the Bible, is composed in the idiom of Batavia 
‘and Malacca, and I have heard it objected, that it is 
not very intelligible in Sumatra, and: other Malay 
countries ; but I regard it as quite impossible to form » 
a\Malayu version which would: be approved ‘in point: 
of style, in every Afa/ay country :at the same time, 


OF THE INDO-CHINESF NATIONS. 189 


for so great is the diversity in point of style be- 
tween the Javanese-Malayu and the Arabic- Malayu, 
that even in the same country, those who are pro- 
ficients in the one, are often scarcely able to under- 
stand the other. 


II. Jawa.—The Jawa, or Javanese lang guage, is 
admitted by the MJadays to be that of a more ancient 
nation than themselves, and at no very distant period 
seems to have been current through the whole ex- 
tent of Java. The island of Java was formerly sub- 
ject to a single sovereign, bearing the title of Ratu 
Acone or SusuHuNnANG, of the Susuptin race, who 
generally held his court at A7rripun or Suryakan ‘td. 
The nation was brave, enterprising and populous, and 
before the introduction of the A/ahummedan religion, 
about the year A. C. 1400, their power was supreme 
in the eastern seas, and they extended their conquests 
to Sumatra, Borneo, aud even as far as the Moluccas. 
Their voyages often rivalled the celebrated Argo- 
nautic expedition in the spirit of adventure. ‘They 
became known to Europeans only in the decline of 
their power; yet it was still so formidable as repeat- 
edly to shake the authority of the Portuguese in 
Malacca itself; and one of the dependent princes of 
Java was able to fit out a fleet of thirty large vessels, 
the admiral of which was so strongly built, as to be 
reckoned, at that period, cannon-proof. The Jawa 
language is subdivided into a great number of dia- 
lects, all of which may be respectively classed. under 
the heads of Basa-dalam and Basa-luar, the interior 
or high language, and the exterior or vulgar lan- 
guage of the coasts. Both of these differ consider- 
ably from the Malayu, which has adopted a multitude 
of terms from the Basa-léiar Jawa, or coast language 
of Jawa, compared even witli which the Malayu lan- 


190 ON. THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


guage appears to be a corrupt derivative. The lan- 
guage of the interior, however, or the Basa-dalam 
Jawa; has a close and intimate connection with San- 
scrit, and expresses the simplest objects and ideas by 
vocables which seem to differ no farther from the — 
Sanscrit than in the correct pronunciation necessarily 
produced by the use of a less perfect alphabet. The 
only Javanese that I have met, who could speak the 
Basa-dalam Jawa, was not able to write the charac- 
ter; yet I perceived, in forming a short radical 
vocabulary, that he used many Sanscrit words for 
common objects, which are not in any dialect of 
Malayu. | 
The alphabet of Jawa, is peculiar, and has no re- 
semblance in the order of position to the Deva nagari. 
The number of characters are twenty, and these are 
varied by four vowels, e, 1, u, 0, but the real num- 
ber of vocalic sounds is considerably greater. ‘The 
Javanese character is written from right to left. The 
alphabet has been exhibited with considerable accu- 
racy by Lx Brun, and also by RELaND; and it ap- 
pears to have attracted the attention of the learned 
Hype, as an “ Alphabetum Bantamense” was found 
amongst his Posthumous papers, which had been 
written for him by the Ambassador of the king of 


Bantam. 


Various ancient inscriptions and monuments are 
said to exist in the interior of Java, one of which was 
seen by Tuunsere, at Paditilis, near the blue moun- 
tains in the interior of the island, which consisted of. 
eight lines and a half, engraved ona stone pillar, 
about two feet in breadth. The characters seemed, 
to him, to be written from right to left, and no per- 


son had ‘been able to decypher them. 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 191 


The dialects of ‘Bugélenand Stindo, in Jaca, ‘are 
said to be very distinct from ‘the Javancse proper; 
and, from the first of them, the language of Siu is 
supposed to be derived. This point, however, I 
have not been able ‘to investigate in a-satisfactory 
maaner. Ga f ant 


The literature of the Javanese is similar to that of 
the AZalays, to whith it seems to have given origin. 
Their Kuggawins or Cheritras, contain their mytho- 
logy, and the adventures of their ancient heroes, and 
exhibit them ina style whtch has no inconsiderable 
resemblanee to that of the Hindu ‘Puranas. The 
Javanese laws ate ‘atranged in codes of considerable 


antiquity, and eclebratedl among all ‘the eastern 
islands. 


The Jawa or Javanese language does not appear to 
have been reguiarly cultivated by Europeans, though 
some of the outlines of their mythological stories‘have 
been published in the'transactions of the AsiaticSo- 
ciety in Batavia, as well as some vocabularies of the 
Jawa language. In the Dutch work, entitled “ Bevin 
en voortgang du Oostind Compan.” or the rise‘and pro- 
gress of the Hast India company,’a comparative view 
isrexhibited of the Javanese and Malayu languages. 
The AMahkummedans have translated the Koran into 
Javanese. 


. The Beli and Madura languages, spoken ‘by the 
“inhabitants of the isles of the same name, appear from 
the best information‘I could procure, to ‘be dia- 
lects of Javanese. The greater part of ‘the inhabi- 
tants profess the ancient religion of their ancestors, 
resemble ‘the Hindus in their appearance, wear the 
fTindu marks on their forehead, and the women burn 
themselves with their deceased husbands, .according 


192 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


to. the practice of the Hindus. _ Like the unconverted 
Javanese, they are peculiarly addicted to the worship 
of Inpra, Surya and Visunu; but being neither in 
possession of their original religious books, nor of 
the extracts from them which have been adduced in 
the Transactions of the Batavian Society, I forbear 
to dilate on this subject at present. 


III. Bu’cis.—The Bugis may be reckoned the ori- 
ginal language of the island Celebes, in the same 
manner as the Javanese is that of the island of Java. 
This ancient, brave, and martial nation, also, be- 
came known to the Europeans only in their decline, but 
there are a variety of circumstances, relative to them, 
which incline me to regard them as probably more 
ancient, in the eastern seas, than even the Javanese. 
—In courage, enterprize, fidelity, and even fair 
dealing in commerce, they are placed at the head of 
all the orang timor, or eastern men, even by the tes- 
timony of the J/alays and Javanese themselves, and 
to compare to them, either the Chinese, or the conti- 
nental Jndo-Chinese nations, were to compare an ass, 
caparisoned in stiff and gilded trappings, to a gene- 
rous courser. The nation, to which the Bigis exhi- 
bit the greatest resemblance, is the Japanese, but I 
have not been able to discover that the same si- 
milarity exists between their respective languages, 
which appears in their natural characters. 


Theisland of Celebes was formerly divided intoseven 
principalities, which were all united under an elective 
and limited sovereign. In this state, the island was 
the centie of eastern commerce, and extended its con- 
quests, on the one hand, as far the island of Bal, and 
gn the other, beyond the Moluccas. The Bugis language 
was assiduously cultivated. and their ancient my- 
thology, traditions, laws and history, preserved if 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 193 


books, the: greater part of which are still extant, 

especially in the interior, among the tribes who still’ 
adhere to their ancient religion. On. the sea coast, 

the AZahummedan religion prevails, and their books 

resemble more the later Cheritras of the Malays. In 

1603, the Mungkdsar Rajah, with the whole Mung- 

kasar nation, by one of the most singular revolutions 

on record, renounced their ancient religion, and not 

only adopted Islamism, but compelled a number of 
the inferior states to imitate their example. 


. The Bugis language, on the coasts, is much 
mixed with the eastern Aalayu, and is found pure 
only'in the ancient books, and in the interior of 
Celebes... It exhibits strong features of originality 
in.its vocables, but resembles the Adalayu and Tagdéla 
in. its construction. With Malayu, Javanese and 
Tagala it exhibits many. coincidences, but it contains, 
in its original state, almost no words of Sanscrit ori- 
gin. With the ancient Tarnata, or Molucca lan- 
guage, it also exhibits some coincidences, but as 
I have had no favourable opportunity of studying 
the Bugis, and none at all of examining the Tar- 
nata, with any degree of accuracy, I cannot pretend 
to determine the nature of this connection. Com- 
pared with the alayu or Javanese, it has certainly 
more the air of an original than of a derivative 
tongue. 


The Bigis alphabet consists of twenty-two letters, 
which are varied by the six -vocalic sounds a, u; i, e, 
o, ing. The form of the character is peculiar, 
though it appears to belong to the same class as the 
Batta. and Tagald. The power of -the characters 
coincides nearly with that of the Javanese letters, 
though they differ a little both in number and in, the 

' | O 


194 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


order of arrangement. The form of the Bugis cha- 
racter seems not only to ditfer considerably, - in dif- 
feret states, but the alphabet also varies in the num- 
ber and order of the letters. This proceeds from the 
adoption or rejection of the double consonants, 
which, though used in ancient and classical compo- 
sitions, are seldom or never employed in letter-wri- 
tine or common business; and hence, when a Bigis 
writes down his alphabet, it may vary, in the num- 
ber of the characters, from seventeen to twenty-two. 
The only Bégis alphabet, printed or engraved, with 
which I am acquainted, is that which is given by 
Forest, in a corner of one of the maps of his “ Voy- 
age to the Mergui Archipelago.” The letters are not 
formed according to the common round Bégis hand, 
but sharp angled, like the Rajang and Batta cha- 
racter ; but in other respects it is sufficiently correct. 
The Bégis character is also employed frequently im 
Writing Afalayu compositions. | 


The language of the ancient Bigis compositions 
displays little diversity of dialect, but considerable 
variety exists in the language of conversation, in the 
different Bigis states. The dialect of Mungkdsar or - 
Macassar, the bravest and most renowned of the 
Bigis tribes, differs considerably from the Bzgis 
proper; but the dialects of Zubu, Enrékang, Man- 
dar, and especially Té-Rajja, seem almost to be dif 
ferent languages. 


The Bigis larguage has never been regularly culti- 
vated by Huropeans, though the Dutch have formed 
abridgements of some of the historical relations in. 
which it abounds. I have.formed a short radical 
vocabulary of both the Bugis and Mungkasar, but 
cannot consider it as pure and unmixed, being ce= 


195 


tived from inhabitants of the coast, though some 
of them were very intelligent, and tincturéd with 
their peculiar learning. From the same source I 
obtained the following list of the most popular Ba- 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 


gis Compositions: 


_ 


1. Nama Sagimi, 28. Rotun-risosi, 

2. Batara Guru, 29. Laga-ligo, 

3. Guru De Sillang, 30. Tobala Onji, 

4. Tojorisimpa, 31. Radaéng Labeh, 
5. Lasini Léléh, 32. Lamada Romang, 
6. Batdra Latoh, 33. Palawago, 

7. Oputolaga, 34, Lawaju-Langi, 

8. Araulangi, 35. Lamapa-puli, 

9. Panori Tawgéb, 36. Datu-Mowunléh, 
10. Lajiri-hoi, 37. Lalimpang Méga, 
11. Jamuri China, 38. Lasawing-Langi, 
12. Laurupoysi, 39. Rotan di Papang, 
13. Rotun Nari-Tatta, Datu Nagima, 40. Aji Lédéh, 

14, Lamaputoda-Turipo, 41. Lamapang Aniro, 
15. Latum Mullurung, 42. Latan-nari-jivi, 
16. Lauhdun-Re6, 43. Bayapdagili, 

17. Lapa Bichara LariSindénaré, 44, Latupu Sallau, 

18. Gutupatalotopalaguna, 5. Latapagulla, 

19. Lappang Ngarisang, 46. Latan nari Pulang, 
20. Opu-Sangmuda, 47, Satya-bonga, 
21. Opula-Maru-Datu-na-Sopéng, 48. Lasating-pugé, 
22. Latu-gétana Paju Limpoy, 49. Laga-lego Tokolinghéng, 
23. Sawira Gading, 50. Latan narodgi, 
24. Adewata, 51. Datula-Kila, 

25. Rotun Diliwung, 52. Lapanadora, 

26. Data Pamiusu, 53. Rotan di timang toan lanit. 
27. Lanaga Ladung, ‘ 


The greater part of the compositions here enu- 
merated, celebrate the ceeds of their national heroes. 
But besides these, the “ Addat,” or codes of Bigis 
law are of considerable antiquity, particularly those 
of Gua, Waju, Boni and Mandar ; and of great re- 
pute, among the eastern tribes. Several of them 
are translated into Malayu and Javanese. The Koran 
is also translated into the Bugis language. 

: O Q- 


196 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


The Bugis songs and romances are famous among 
all the islands of the East; and, as far as I can judge, 
from a very limited knowledge of them, equally ex- 
cel, in force of thought and fluency ef versification. 
The use of rhyme is much less frequent than among 
the Malays. The melody of the verse depends on 
the rhythm, and the measure, in the historical peems, 
has often considerable similarity to some of the spe- 
cies of Sanscrit verse. The following lines are given 
as a Specimen from the ‘‘ /Vépalétei,” the only Bugis 
story in my possession. 


Narétélangi napapabaja natokunruna Wépalétet 

Lalo saliwang pasisi aji rito matindro sésimpangt 
Rittomapiddang sisulingi matduadua mua kakana 
Wemapamai natijinruna Jalu saliwang ratapanimpa 
Lakunatillum tirrimakudda Wullirijawa t6 Sopengt 
Jillokasawa kakapamai lampuna China tujuna Sabang 
Naranrukié Lajutenio sesumangutnah Passatingé 
_Mabaliada wemapamai richinaruna kuém mua 
Megama katu tudangpaliuna linna samanna tuributili ! 
Lolangungé turipasabi ujutanai tadillerlé 

Muarinili ailaiin patalutuna lolangungé. 


“ In the morning twilight, when the day began to 
dawn, awaked /V’épalétei, and went out of the pa- 
lace, stepping carefully over those who were sleeping 
in regular rows, and those who were reposing irregu- 
larly, where her elder brothers were sleeping two by 
two, and along with her went out Pamat, her nurse 
and attendant. WuLiirisawa of Sopéng, went forth, 
and having opened the beautifully, formed window, 
began to express her grief, “ O! my elder sister 
Pamar, point out to me the situation of China (a 
district in Celebes) and show me in what direction 
Sabang lies, where Passaiingé dwells, the brother of 
Lajit Tenib.” Pawar answered, “ see how beauti- 
fully, the floating clouds rest on the stately trees of. 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 197 


China, as if they had been arranged by art. How 
beautiful are the lawns, which seem as it the earth 
had of her own accord accommodated herself to the 
request of man. How graceful wave the trees, with 
their foliage to the view, and the golden bamboos 
which enclose the lawns.” 

The Bugis songs are very numerous. Some of 
them are short proverbial maxims versified, and dis- 
play considerable force of both thought and lan- 
guage, but I have not met with any which exhibit 
the peculiar character of the Malayw Pantun. ‘They 
however exhibit many traits of the peculiar manners 
of the Bugis tribes. In the following specimens, 
the first alludes to a very common mode of punish- 
ing cowardice in Celebes, the second to the practice 
of poisoning weapons, and the last is a brief dia- 
logue between a lover, going to battle, and his mis- 
tress, who presents him with her betel-box as a part- 
ing token. 

Tikkungi talaséi joa maliai 
Tapasilaséi andraguru maliai 
Corripe militem segnem, castra, 
Immo ducem timidum castrato. 
Tillu ritumati balubalu rilléléang 
Ria paserakané lanru tojizru 
Tamera ritirilébu dadi aju ta Sangala. 
There are three articles exposed to sale 
the temper of the lance———~ 
and the gum of the poison tree of Sungala. 


Tn the clash of combat 
The form of the bullet 
Fja ripalinrang ajamu marakka silla 
Rik6i biritta poli ridlapi sia 
Raja-Tampa rikapéku muinappa rinnawating+— 
Tilla returona salina lopalopaku 
Sapahna rikko otdko tindria pauwa 
Timmanrod paraparing tindria kampulajangang, 


O03 


198 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Eja! object of my secret affection, be not easily moved to grieve, 
Whatever news arrive from the battle, till you see 
My kris Raja Tumpa taken from my girdle, but then grieve for the dead— 


——There are three probibitions in my betel-box, with which you must 
conform : 


They are wrapt up in the folds of the betel leaf,—talk not in the time of 
action 


Loiter not idly within your tent—skulk not as you advance on the foe. 


The Mungkasar poetry is characterized by the 
same features as the Bugis, and their national wars 
with the Dutch is said to be a favourite topic among 
the poets of that race. The following specimen, 
which is a poetical challenge, alludes to the diver- 
sion of cock-fighting, the favourite amusement of 
the nation. 

_ Keérimi jangang riwaya bija jangang sundawa 

Niamiunné bangasa tinumbukkéya—— 

Bukki tonja kontasilla pana innukké nurdntu 

Tinumbukkéya bara éyapin nisillung. 
Where is that courageous cock, that true game-cock, trained to combat— 
For here is his match, full of youthful spirit, yet unconquered— 
Let him then enter the lists with me, if he would be conquered ; 
Hitherto invincible, if I am ever conquered, it will be now-—— 


IV. Brmaa.—The Bima language is used in the in- 
dependent state of Bima, which includes the eastern 
part of Sumbawa, and the western part of the island 
Lindé, which was childishly denominated Fieres, by 
the early Portugueze navigators; and, after them, by 
succeeding voyagers and geographers. If my infor- 
mation is correct, the Buma language extends over . 
the greater part of the island Endé. The Bima lan- 
guage is related in some respects to Bugis and Java- 
nese, and on the coast is mixed with Jalayu ; but 
nevertheless it has strong pretensions to originality in 
its pronouns, verbal auxiliaries, and simple names of 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 199 


objects. In those instances, in which it exhibits a 
relation to the Bugis, it seems to be more closely con- 
nected with the Mungkdsar than the Bigis proper, 

and yet, in sentences, the difference is striking, as in 
the following example. ‘‘ Where is the house of the 
Rajah?” Bikey kuassi rumata sangngaji. (Bima) Kéré 
tujyuna embana kérayéng. (Mungk.) Vhe sun, in Bima 
is termed JLata-liro; in Munghkasar, Matulo; in Bigis, 
Mataso. Aman, i Malay, orang, is, in Munghkdsar 
and Bugis, tai ; and in Bima, do. ‘The dialect of Sum- 
bawa, which prevails in the districts of the island of 
that name, which are not subject to the Sultan of : 
Bima, is of a more mixed character, and though it 
appears to contain many original vocables, yet the 
mass of the language seems derived from other 
sources, as Bima, Javanese and Bigis. Neither the 
Bima nor Sumbawa have any peculiar character, but 
use, indifferently, the Bugis or Malayu. 1 attempted 
to investigate the relations of both these languages, 

by forming comparati¥e vocabularies of radical \ words; : 
but not being able to procure any compositions in 
either of them, Ido not flatter myself with having 
been able to obtain the purest native terms in every 
instance. 


Specimen of the Bugis, Mungkasar, Bima and Sum- 
bawa languages. 


Bugis. Munghdsar. Bima. Sumbawa. 
ié inukké nahu- uk, kaji 
Odes y ‘ 
iyo _ iyo lamada déya 
we idi ikaté ita kita 
thou -mu ikau angomi mu 
you iko ikau-ngdsing gomi kau 
he ea nea yenjo sea iya 
they edmaning —yangasing do édé jija tatinan 
this iaé yeinne aké ta 
that yero, yetu = anjoreng édé ai te 


O4 


200 


who 
what 
where 
when 
which 
is 
will 
can 
sun 
moon 
star 
wind 
rain 
day 
night 
morning 
evening 
“year 
earth 
water 
sea 
Yiver 
waye 
sand 
mountain 
fire 
stone 
gold 
silver 
salt 
iron 
lead 
brass 
white 


Bugis. 
iga, niga 
aga 
pegi 
siana 
kéga 
unka 
mélo 
makuléh 
mataso 
ulang 
vitéing, 
anging 
bosi 
aso 
wunnl 
élé 
arawéng 
tating 
tana 
uwal 
tasi 
salok 
bomba 
kasi 
baluk 
api 
batt 
ulawung 
salaka 
pajé 
bissi 
tamera 
taumbaga 


. maputi 


Mungkasar. 


inal 
apa 
kemi 
ungapana 
kerayéng 
nia 
eroko 
kulégi 
matalo 
balun 
bintoéng 
angi 
bosi 
alo 
bung? 
beribasa 
karvéng 
taung 
butta 
jeéné 
tamparang 
binanga 
bombang 
kasi 
monchong 
pépé 
bata 
bulayeng 
salaka 
chéla 
basi, 
tambéra 
tambaga 
kébok 


Bima, 
choété 
au 
benchi 
bunééi 
mabé 
wara 
né 
vau 
mataliro 
wira 
tara 
angi 
ura 
liro 
aimangadi 
aimasidi 


aimumbiyang 


baa 

dana 

ol 

moti 
nanga 
balaumba 
sarel 
doro 

afi 

wati 
masanganga 
salaka 
siya 

besi 
tumbinga 
romba 
lanta 


ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Surwbawe. 


saz 


komépo 
mépo 
pidan 
sangmeépo |! 
adda 


matahart 
bulun 
bintang 
angin 
Ujin 

ano 
anopotang 
anosiop 
anoravi 
terd 
bumi 

aik 

let 
pungbijrang 
omak 
garsék 
olat 

api 

batt 
bulayéng 
salaka 
sira | 
bosi 
tima 
tomaga 
puti 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 901 


Bugis. Mnngkdsar.. Bima. Sumbawa. 
black malétong leling meé pisak 
red machillah eja kala » mera 
yellow mauni kuni moncha kuning 
green monchombulo ijow awa iow 
blue maga gau kolabu kolau 
fish balé juku londé ampa 
fowl manu jangang janga ayam 
bird manu-manu jangang-jan- nasi piye 

gang 
tiger machang machang machan machan 
serpent ula ulara sawa ula 
sheep bembé bembé beé badésa 


This specimen of a comparative vocabulary, will 
convey some idea of the actual state of these languages, 
and ot the actual variety which subsists in the lans 
guage of conversation, especially on the coasts and 
maritime districts. Many of the words which occur 
in one language, are also found in others, though ge- 
nerally with some difference of pronunciation, and 
sometimes in an oblique sense. Frequently too, besides 
the terms which | have selected, whichare only those 
of current use, several other words of the same signi- 
fication might be found within the compass of the lan- 
guage. ‘Thus, instead of anging, wind, in the high 
Bugis, salaring occurs in this signification; and in- 
stead of salaka, silver, bulémata occurs in the ‘high 
Mungkasar dialect. In the same manner, the personal 
pronouns in Bugis terminate their plurals in manung, 
and in Mungkasar in ngasing, both of which signify 
all, Thus, ( Bug.) idimanung, (Mung, ) ihuttengasing, 
we all. ( Bug.) ikomanung, ( Mung.) tkaiingdsing, you 
all. ( Bug.) edmanung, ( Mung.) yenjo yang-ngasing, 
they all. . It is worthy of observation, that the Udia 
language spoken in Orissa, forms the plural of its per- 
sonal pronouns by the addition of the particle mané, 


802 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


or manang, like the Bugis. Thus, in Udia, umbhémane, 
zumbhemani, sémané or émané, signify we, ye, they. 

V. Barra.—The Barta language, which I regard 
as the most ancient language of Swmatra, is used by 
the Batta tribes, who chiefly occupy the centre of that 
island. The singularity of their manners, and in par- 
ticular the horrid custom of anthropophagy, practised 
by a nation in other respects more civilized than the 


Malays by whom they are surrounded, has attracted 


the attention of Europeans from the time of the ear- 
liest voyagers to our own times, but no very satisfae- 
tory account has ever been given of them, as a nation. 
The best description of them is certainly given by 
Marsbey, in his history of Swmatra, but even that is 
very imperfect and superficial, and at variance, in 
some respects, with the information I received from 
individuals of the nation. Marspen confines their 
cannibalism to two cases ; that of persons condemned 
for crimes, and that of prisoners of war; but they 
themselves declare, that they frequently eat their own 
relations, when aged and infirm, and that, not so 
much to gratify their appetite, as to perform a pious 
ceremony. Thus, when a man becomes infirm and 
weary of the world, he is said to invite his own 
children to eat him, in the season when salt and limes 
are cheapest. He then ascends a tree, round which 
his friends aud offspring assemble, and as they shake 
the tree, join in a funeral dirge, the import of which 
is, ‘“‘ The season is come, the fruit is ripe, and it must 
descend.” The victim descends, and those that are 
nearest and dearest to him, deprive him of life, and 
devour his remains in a solemn banquet. This ac- 
count is certainly more likely to excite incredulity 
than the account of Marspen, but it is the account 
of some of the Battas themselves, as well as that of 
the Afalays in their vicinity. This inhuman custom is 
not, however, without a precedent in history, for Hr- 


~ ' 


: 


GF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 203 


nODOTUS positively asserts, that the. Paday or Padaioi, 
about 500 years before our era, were-not only addict- 
ed to the eating of raw flesh, but accustomed to kill 
and eat their relations when they grew old. Now it 
is curious that Batia or Batay, for the name is writ- 
ten both ways, seems to be the very word which, in 
Greek, is rendered Padaioi, the letter pbeing almost al- 
ways pronounced 6 among several of the Indo-Chinese 
nations, as in the word Pali, which is almost always 
pronounced Bak. The following is the account which 
Heropotus gives us of the Paday, or Padaici. “ Ano- 
ther Jndian nation, who dwell to the eastward of 
these, (the Indian Ichthyophagi) ave of nomadic. ha- 
bits, and eat raw flesh. They are called Paday, and 
are said to practise such customs as the following. 
Whoever of the community, be it man or woman, 
happens to fall sick, his most familiar friends, if it is 
aman, kill him: saying, that by his pining in sick- 
ness, his flesh will te spoiled for them ; and though 
he deny that he is sick, they do not attend to him, 
but put him to death, and feast on him. When a 
woman falls sick, she is treated m like manner by 
her most intimate female associates. ‘Yhey also sa- 
crifice and feast on him who arrives at old age, and 
this is the reason that so few of them ever attain it, 
for they kill every one who falls sick, before that 
period.” * This account of Hrronorus certainly cor- 
responds very minutely with the customs attributed 
to the Batta race, and renders it probable that this 
modern nation derive their origin trom the ancient 
Paday or Batay. Neither is it more incredible that 
the Battas should eat human flesh as a religious cere- 
mony, than that anthropophagy should be practised 
by the class of mendicants termed Agérah Punt’h, in 


* Herobot. Lib, III. s. 99. 


904 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Bengal, and other parts of India, which isa fact that 
cannot easily be called in question. It is surprizing 
that this singular custom has received so little inves- 
tigation. 


The names of the different Bafta tribes, of whom I 
have been able to hear, are the following — 


f 
Batta Toru, 
Batta Bila, - 
Batta Kurilang, 
Batta Sipagabu, 


1. Batta Sebaliingu, 
2. Batta Padembanin, 
3. Batta Kwalu, 

4. Batta Pannay, 


PND? ier 


In many of the Batta customs, considerable simi- 
larity to those of the Nairsof Malabar may be traced, 
as in the law of inheritance, according to which it is 
not the son, but the nephew, that succeeds. © HAL 


The Batta language has considerable claims to ori- 
ginality, though it is not only connected with the 
Matayu, but also with the Bégis and Bima languages. 
In point of construction it is equally simple as the 
Malayu, but it is with the Bugis that it seems to 
have the most intimate connection. Indeed, the 
manners of the aboriginal Bugis are supposed to have 
exhibited no small resemblance to the peculiar cus- 
toms of the Ba¢ta nation; for the Rajja or T. di-Raj ja 
tribe, in the central parts of the island Celebes, are 
said still to eat their prisoners of war. The Batta 
language is the chief source of that diversity of dia- 
lect which is discoverable in the languages of Swma- 
tra. The Rdjang or Rgjang dialect is formed by the 
mixture of the Batta and Matayu; the Lamping, by 
mixing Malay and Batta with a proportion of Java- 
nese. ‘lhe Karrows, who are subject to Achi or Achin,. 
use only a slight variation of the Batta language, 
while the language of Achi proper consists of a mix- 
ture of Malayu and Bafta, with all the jargons used 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 905 


by the Aoslems of the east, whether Hindostani, 
Arab-Tamul or Mapilla. The Achinese resemble the 
Mapillas of Malabar more than any other tribe of 
Malays: they have long been connected with them 
as a people, and use many J/dpilla terms currently in 
their language. The dialects of Néas and the Poggy 
islands, the inhabitants of the latter of which are 
termed Mantaway, by the Malays, have perhaps 
greater pretensions to originality than any of the 
dialects of Swmatra, but resemble the Batta more 
than any other dialect. Hence it may be suspected, 
that if we were acquainted with the books of the 
Battas, and knew the full extent of their language, 
in all its variety of expression, elliptic phrases, aud 
obsolete words, the comcidence would be still more 
striking. Thereis probably, too, some diversity of 
expression in these dialects, even in their present 
state, for in forming a short radical vocabulary of the 
Néas language, I found it differed considerably, in 
some instances, from the specimen published by: 
Marspen, in the sixth volume of the 4rchéologia. 

The Satta language has been cultivated by writ- 
ing, from the earliest times, and numerous books are 
said to exist in it. Ihave only been able, however, » 
- to procure the names of the following— 


1. Siva Marangaja, 3. Raja Isiri, 
2 Siva-Jarang-Mundopa, 4. Malamdeva. 


The Bata alphabet is peculiar, both in the form of 
its characters, and in the order of their arrangement. 
It consists of nineteen letters, each of which is va- 
riable by six’ vocalic sounds like the Bugis. In the 
power of the letters, it nearly corresponds with the 
Bugis and Javanese alphabets, the difference between 
all these being extremely trifling, consisting solely in 


#06 oN THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


one of them expressing two cognate sounds by oné 
character, or adding a new character, or the modifica- 
tion of a character, to express a double consonant of 
frequent recurrence. But the Batta character has 
another peculiarity ; 1€ is written neither from right 
to left, nor from left to right, nor from top to bot- 
tom, but, in a manner directly opposite to that of 
the Chinese, fron the bottom to the top of the line, 
as the Mexicans are said to have arranged their hiero- 
glyphics. The material for writing is a bamboo, or 
the branch of a tree, and the instrument for writing 


the point of a kris, consequently their native forests 


always furnish them with materials in abundance, 
and instead of our pages and volumes, they have 
their bamboos and literary faggots. Manrspen has 
given a tolerably correct Batta alphabet, in his his- 
tory of Sumatra, but instead of placing the charac- 
ters in a perpendicular line, he has arranged them 
horizontally, which conveys an erroneous idea of 
their natural form. The Battas, sometimes, read 
their bamboos horizontally instead of perpendicular- 
ly, as the Chinese and Japanese do their books, but 
the Chinese consider the correct mode of reading to 
be from the top to the bottom of the page, and the 
Battas from the bottom to the'top. The lines-at the 
top of a Chinese page are always regular, and if a line 
terminates in the middle of the page, the blank space 
is towards the bottom; now the Battas sometimes 
write on growing trees; and in this case, if a blank 
space occurs, it is towards the top of the division, a 
circumstance which determines what they consider 
as the natural position of their characters. The 
Batta characters, when arranged in their proper po- 
sition, have considerable analogy to the Biégis and 
Tagala. The Lamping and Rajang characters, coim- 
cide in power with those of the Batéa, though the ar- 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 207 


rangement is different, and so far from being consi- 
dered as original alphabets, they are only regarded, 
as far as I could learn, by the Bettas, as different 
forms of the same character. Indeed, the greater 
part of the differences they exhibit in form, may be 
fairly attributed to the different materials on which 
they write, and the different manner of writing; 
while the diversity in the number and arrangement 
of the letters may be referred tothe same causes which 
have produced a similar variety in the Bigis alphabet. 


eee” 

VI. Tacata.—The Tagala or rather Ta-Gadla or 
the Gala language is among the Phillipines, what 
the Afalayu is in the Malay islands or the Hindostani 
in Hindostan proper. A Spanish missionary, who pos- 
sessed a minute knowledge of this language, has de- 
celared, that ‘The 7égala possesses the combined ad- 
vantages of the four principal languages in the world. 
It is mysterious as the Hebrew; it has articles for 
nouns, both appellative and proper, like the Greek ; 
it is elegant and copious as the Latim; and equal to 
the Italian, as the language of compliment or busi- 
ness.” To examine rigorously the justness of this 
eulogium, is foreign to my purpose; it is necessary 
only to state, that it is considered by those who have 
studied it with most attention, as the radical lan- 
guage, from which the greater part, if not all, the 
dialects of the Philippines are derived. A mis- 
sionary, who had resided eighteen years. in these 
islands, and whose account of them has been trans- 
dated from the Spanish, and printed by THEVENor in 
the second part of his “ Relations de divers Voyages 
Curieuses. Paris 1664,” declares, that though every 
district has its particular dialect, yet that these have 
all some relation to each other, such as subsists 
among the Lombard, Sicilian, and Tuscan dialects. 
There-are six dialects of this kind,.in the island of 


208 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Manila, and two in Ofon. Some of these are cur~ 
rent in several islands, but the most general are the 
Tagala and Bisaya, the last.of which is very gross 
and barbarous; but the other more refined and po- 
lished. The opinion of this missionary is confirmed 
by Fra. Gaspar DE San Avcustin, who asserts, 
that all these particular tongues are dialects of one 
general language, in the same manner as the Aftic, 
Tonic, and Avolic, are all dialects of Greek, or as the 
Ttalian, Spanish, Portugueze, and French, are all de- 
rivatives from the Latin. 


The Zégdla language has been cultivated only by 
the Spanish missionaries. The Tagdala grammar of 
Fra. Gaspar DE SAN Aucustin, which has passed 
through two editions, was printed im 1703, and 
again in 1787. In his preface, he requests those 
who are desirous of more numerous examples in the 
language, to have recourse to other grammars, e3pe- 
cially to that of Fra. Francisco pE San Josupu; 
who is elsewhere called the DumostHENnes of thé 
Tigala language. A confessional, by the. same au- 
thor, in Spanish and Tagala,, was published in 1713; 
and republished with the. second edition of » his 
grammar. In 1627, Pra. Atpnonso d@ St. ANNA 
published his “ Hplicacion de la Doctrina Christiana 
en lingua Tégala,” and, besides these, many other re- 
ligious compositions, both in prose and verse, have 


5 : eaarere 
been published by the missionaries. 


The Tagdla alphabet consists of seventeen letters, 
three of which are vowels, and fourteen consonants, 
It is of the same class as the Bugis and Batta alpha- 
bets, and resembles them much in form; and, it 1s 
probably from some idea of this similarity, that 
Fra. Gaspar DE San AvucustTin asserts that the 
‘Tigdla characters were derived from the Malays. 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 209 


The Tagdla character is as difficult to read as it is 
éasy to write. It is written with an iron style on 
bamboos and palm leaves, and the Spanish missiona- 
ries assert, that the ancient mode of writing was 
from top to bottom, like the Chinese. From the cir- 
cumstance of their writing with an iron style on 
bamboos, and from the resemblance of the letters to 
the Batta character, I should rather imagine that the 
ancient 7agala mode of writing was from the bottom 
to the top.’ The Tagala characters are still used in 
Comintan, and in general among the 7é¢dlas who have 
hot embraced chiristianity; and-even by the Christian 
converts, they are still preferred in epistolary corres- 
pondence, though the contrary has been insinuated 
by some of the missionaries, who alledge that the 
roman alphabet was eagerly adopted, on account of 
its being more easily read. 


The Végdla language, with a considerable number 
of peculiar vocables, and great singularity of idiom, 
is nevertheless to be considered as a cognate language 
with Malayu, Bugis and Javanese. Few languages, 
on 2 cursory examination, present a greater appear- 
ance of originality than the Ta@gd/a. ‘Though a mul- 
titude of its térms agree precisely with those of the 
languages just enumerated, though the more simple 
idioms are precisely the same, and though the nouns 
have neither, properly speaking, genders, numbers 
nor cases, nor the verbs, moods, tenses or persons, 
yet the idioms are rendered so complex, and the sim- 
ple’'terms are so much metamorphosed, by a variety 
of the most simple artifices, that it becomes quite 
impossible for a person who understands all the ori- - 
ginal words in a sentence, either to recognize them 
individually, or comprehend the meaning of thé 
Whole. In illustrating, aro the mechanism of 


ra 


210 ON- THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


language, few languages aremore instructive than the 
Tagala. The. artifices which, it chiefly, employs, are 
the prefixing or, postfixing to simple vocables, cer- 
tain particles, which are again combined, and coalesce 
with others; and the complete or partial: repetition 
of terms, in this reduplication,.may ‘again be com- 
bined with other particles. is soba’ 
_ The Zagdla forms the plurals of nouns by the word 
manga, as the Malays by bany@k, both of which sig- 
nify many,.and seem to be the very same word; as 
the m and, are often pronounced. in such an indis- 
tinct manner, in the Jndo-Chinese languages, , that 
they seem neither to correspond exactly to our m nor 


our 4, but to an intermediate sound. ; To proper 


names, the 7dgdla prefixes the particle ‘s¢, and. ang 
to appellative nouns. The first. of these corresponds 
to the Malayu sa, and the latter to yang, both of 
which are frequently used in Adalayu in the same 
manner; but the Zdgdla combines both. these, with 
the particles nya and ka, the first of which signifies 
of z¢, and the latter fo ; and thus they form, sta, kana, 
nina, nang, which (except the last, which is only a diffe- 
rent mode of writing the Malayu nyang, of these, who,) 
scarcely occur in Malayu. ‘The plural of nouns,, in 
Malayu, is sometimes formed by the repetition,,o 

the singular, and sometimes this repetition is not coms 
plete, but consists only of the first syllable or 
syllables. This also occurs in the Ta@gdé/a, in which 
language banal, the Malayu banar, signifies just, true; 
and tavo signifies 4 man, corresponding with the 
Bigis tau. A just man, in Tagdla, is therefore, ang 


banal na taco, or by the addition of another particle, 


and altering the position of the words, ang tauong 
banal.. Now if we substitute the J/a/ayu word orang, 
for the Bugis and Tagdla term tau or tavo, we may 
render both these sentences thus; yang orang yang 


isjone, Jacuba, 


OF THE IND@CHINESE NATIONS. 911 


benar, and yang benarnya. orang. In the plural;,to 
signify, just men} the Tagdla gives, ang manga tauong 
babanal, to which the corresponding ; Aalayw phrase 
is, yang banydk orang, yang babenar ;; or again in 
Tagéla, ang babanalna.manga tavo, to which thecor- 
responding Malayu is, yang babenarnya banyak orang. 


The simple pronouns, which vary so much. in all 
the dialects of the eastern seas, are nearly the same 
in Tagdla,and Malayu, though it is not very easy to 
recognize |them .in, the former, language when com- 
bined with particles. Thus :in the Aust person ako, -ko, 
kita, kami are pure Malayu ; and in the second person, 
mu corresponds equally with mo, whilekao ane. iyo 
seem to, be only. trivial variations, of, the: Mulayu 
ung kau and, ayo. In the third person s/ya is ;only a 


wariety, of sa yea like sappa for, sa-appa;, who,,in Ma- 


layu ; - while niya, of him, his, is pure, Malayu, as are itu, 
that, and sun 'of this, while yan, this; and yan, | that, 
correspond to ini and anu. It is however chiefly i in 
the yerb that the peculiar character of the Tagd/a lan- 
guage displays itself... ‘The substantive verb is gene- 
zally omitted, altogether, and its meaning is denoted 
by.implication,, or r the position of the words in a sen- 
tence. Sometimes, however, it is expressed, by the 
article ay, the contraction of the Malayu adda, as Sino 
ang masipag ? Who.is diligent: 2 or rather, Who i is he 


who.is,.diligent?, dag musipag ay St. Jacuna, it \2s 


J AGULA that i is diligent, or literally, he who is diligent 


on 


eur 


The. Tigéla tone a ae only names of action’ or 


states of existence, they cannot properly be said to-be 


either active or passive, neither have they any per- 


sons, numbers, or moods: all these being expressed 


by: particles, prefixed or postfixed to the radical word. 
Pg 


412 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


The principal particles employed in modifying the 
Tigala verbs are also common to the Malayu language. 
The Tagala particles are na, nag, mag, pag, ungm, Y, 
an, in: those which correspond to them in Malayu are 
na, nyang, meng er _mé, Peng, yangmeng, yang, an, ahi. 
Their significations are radically the same, nor do they 
differ essentially in their simple application; but in 
the variety of modes according to which these parti- 
cles may be combined with the verb, in its simple 
form, in its reduplicate form, in its semi-reduplicate 
form, and the variety of transpositions of letters and 
the changes of one letter for another, ewphome gratia, 
which all these combinations give occasion to; in all 
these, the 7agala is infinitely superior to the Dfalayu, 
if there is any merit in a superiority which consists ia 
greater intricacy. The changes which oecur in Jfa- 
fuyu are few and obvious, in 7agdla they are digested 
into an extensive and complex system, m whiclr per- 
fect familiarity with every form that the word ean 
assume, not only by the addition of particles, but ‘by 
the interchange of letters, is necessary to enablea per- 
son to detect the radical, which is often more disguised 
than in the most complex drabic derivatives. ‘Fhus in 
Tagala the root, tolog signifies to sleep, natalogi ako 
slept, natotolog ako, 1 am sleeping, matalog, - sleep, 
matotolog ako, I will sleep, katolog, pagkatolog and 
paghukatolog, sleeping, natotelogpa ako, slept or was 
sleeping, ang natotolog the sleeper, ang matotolog, the 
person who is to sleep, nakatolog ako, Y had slept: 
natologan, the having been asleep, natotologan, the 
being asleep, katologan and katotologan, the bemg 
asleep, or act of sleeping, or the sleeping place: and 
for the plural nangatologan, nangatotologan, pangato- 
logan, pangatotologan, &c. the particles na, ma and pa, 
coming nanga, manga and panga, in the plural.— 
This is an instance in which the changes of the radical 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 918 


word are very obvious; in the following they are less 
80, buhat to lift; bungmuhat, bungmubuhat, bumuhat, 
bubuhat, pagbuhat, nakabuhat, nabuhat, binuhat, bi- 
nubuhat, buhatin, bubuhatin, nagpabuhat, nagpapabuhat, 
magpabuhat, magpapabuhat, pagpabuhat, pagpapabu- 
hat, pinabuhat, pinababuhat, muhat, namuhat, namu- 
mahat, mamuhat, mamumuhat, pinamuhat, pinamamu- 
hat, pamuhatin, pamumuhatin. The addition of a 
greater number of particles would still produce a con- 
siderable number of additional metamorphoses, in 
which it would be very difficult to recognize the ori- 
pinal radical buhat ; but these may suffice to shew the 
genius of the language; and they will also tend to 
shew the extreme danger thatany ety mologist or gram- 
marian incurs, who presumes to treat of one of the 
eastern languages without a radical knowledge of it, 
and even, in some degree, of its cognate dialects. 


The greatest defects of Fra. Gaspar DE S. Au- 
éusTin’s Tagdla grammar proceed from his not hay- > 
ing comprehended sutficiently the original simplicity 
of the dialect, nor even the simple artifice by which 
the greater part of these changes have been effected; 
and from having composed his grammar on European — 
principles, without attending uniformly to the pecu- 
liar character of the language. 


With respect to the original literature of. the 7a- 
galas, the accounts of the Spanish missionaries are ra- 
ther discordant. Sometimes they represent them as 
- totally devoid of histories, and books of science; and 
sometimes they represent them as in possession of 
many historical poems; not considering that almost 
the whole body of the eastern history must be gleaned 
from poetical tradition. It however appears, clearly 
‘enough, from their own waits: that the ansgient 

nt ae 


914 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


religious traditions of the Tagdla race, their genealo- 
gies, and the feats of their gods and heroes, are care- 
fully preserved in historical poems and songs, which, 
in their youth, they carefully commit to memory, 
and are accustomed to recite during labour and long 
voyages, but particularly at’ their festivals and so- 
lemn lamentations for the dead. ‘These original me- 
morials of the race, the missionaries have, with pious 
care, attempted to extirpate, and have employed 
themselves sedulously in composing religious tracts, 
both in prose and verse, in the 7dgala, with the 
hope of supplanting the remains of national and pagan 
antiquitv. Many psalms and hymns, and even some 
of the Greek dramas composed by Dionysius AREo- 
PAGITA, have in this manner been translated into 
the Tégala language. Among this brood of Tagala 
poets, the names of Fra. Antonio DE S, Gre- 
Gor1o, of Fra. Atonso bE S. Awa, and of 
Fra. Pasro Crain, the translator of Kempis, into 
Tagala, are celebrated, but the most illustrious of 
them all, says the reverend father Gaspar DE S. Au- 
GUSTIN, is Fra. PEpro pr Herrera, the very Ho- 
RACE of the 7agala language, as appears by his book 
of ‘‘ Postrimerias.” With the original Tagala poetry 
I am unacquainted, and I believe no specimen of it 
has been hitherto published. S. Aucustrn, in his 
grammar, treats, indeed, of Tagdla poetry, but he 
pilously confines his examples to the works of his 
ghostly brethren. He observes, that the Tagdld 
yerse, is regulated by the rhythm of the syllables, 
aud the similarity of the vowels in the close. This 


‘similarity of the terminating vowels does not amount 


to regular rhyme, for the consonants may be totally 
different, though the vowels are similar, as in the 
Spanish rhymes termed Asonantes. Thus laglag and 
taltal sut and cahuy, silip and bukkir, however imper- 
fect as rhymes, are all that is required in the termi- 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 215 


nations of Tagdla verse. The Tagdla metres, adds 
the same author, are rather lyric than heroic, atid he 
adduces specimens of several Latin and Castilian mea- 
sures, imitated in that language, besides a legitimate 
sonnet addressed to himself, on publishing his 7 agala 
grammar by Fra. Joseph pr ex Variz. The “fol- 
lowing specimen from the 7dgdla version of one of 
the dramas of Dionystus AREOPAGITA, is an imita- 
tion of the comic verse of TERENCE. 

Dito sa dakkilang kaharian nang Grecia 

Ay itong bayannang Athenas lalo, at mona 

Sa ibang manga bayang na sasakop baga 

Hangan saona, at magpangayon pa, 

BesrpEs the 7a@gdla nation, there are several other 
races, which inhabit these islands, who differ consi- 
derably from each other in features, language, and 
the various relations of the social state; but concern- 
ing them, it is more difficult to speak with any de- 
gree of certainty. Such are the Pampangos, who re- 
side to the north of Manilla; the Bisayas, who are 
generally diffused over the Philippines ; ,and the painted | 
race, termed, by the Spaniards, Pintados, who are, 
_ by some, reckoned a branch of the. Bisdya nation, 
and allied to the Tagadla and Bugis races; while, by 


others, they are supposed to be of the same origin as 
the Haraforas. 


Of the Bisdya language, I have seen some lists of 
words. It appears to be either mixed with Tdagala, 
or derived from the same source; but it is seldom 
possible to judge of any of the eastern languages from 
a few straggling specimens, formed in the hurried, 
inaccurate and incurious manner in which these are 
generally collected. For this reason, I shall offer no 
observations on the Pampango language, of which I 
have also seen specimens ; on ‘the Biaju, Tirin, or 


P4 


216 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Idén languages of Borneo ; nor on the Harafora, or 
the Papua languages of the eastern isles. The Sadi 
tongue is a very mixed dialect, but is derived chiefly 
from the Malayu, Javanese and Tagdla. Forxest, 
however, is inclined to refer its peculiarities to the 
Bisaya. The language of Adehndenow, or Magin- 
dano, which nearly coincides with the Land dialect, 
is also a compound of Malayu, Bugis and Tagdla, 
with a certain proportion of the ancient Tarnata or 
Molucca language, which seems to have been an ori- 
ginal tongue. The Braju language is reckoned ori-— 
ginal, but it has no written character. The Biajus 
are of two races; the one is settled on Borneo, and 


are a rude, but warlike and industrious nation, who 


reckon themselves the original possessors of the island 
of Borneo. ‘The other is a species of sea-gypsies, or 
itinerant fishermen, who live in small covered boats, 
and enjoy a perpetual summer on the eastern ocean, 
shifting to leeward, from island to island, with the 
variations of the monsoon. In some of their customs, 
this singular race resemble the natives of the AZaldive 
islands. The Maldivians annually launch a small 
bark, loaded with perfumes, gums, flowers and odo- 
riferous wood, and turn it adrift at the merey of the 
winds and waves, as an offering to the Spirit of the 
winds; and sometimes similar offerings are made to 
the spirit whom they term the King of the Sea. In 
like manner the Biajus perform their offering to the 
god of evil, launching a small bark, loaded with all 
the sins and misfortunes of the nation, which are 
imagined to fall on the unhappy crew that may be so 


‘unlucky as first to meet with it. 


The Tirim or Tedong tribes live chiefly on the 
north east coast of Borneo, and are reckoned 
% savage and piratical race, addicted to eating 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 2°17 


the flesh of their enemies. With their language I am 
totally unacquainted, but it is reckoned peculiar. It 
is very probable, however, that they are only a tribe 
of Idan, whom, again, I imagine to be only a race of 
Haraforas or Alfoérs, as they are termed by the 
Dutch, who seem to be the most original race of all 
the eastern islands, excepting perhaps, the Papuas. 
The Idan are sometimes termed Marit; they are 
certainly the original inhabitants of Borneo, and 
resemble the Haraforas equally in stature, agility, - 
colour,and manners. The Haraforas are indigenous 
in almost all the eastern isles, and are sometimes 
found on the same island with the Papuas or oriental 
negroes. They are often lighter in colour than the 
Muhammedan races, and generally excel them in 
strength and activity. They are universally rude and 
unlettered, and where they have not been reduced 
to the state of slaves of the soil, their manners have 
a general resemblance. In their manners, the most 
singular feature is, the necessity imposed on every 
person, of some time in his life, embruing his hands 
in human blood; and in general among all their. 
tribes, as well as the Jddn, no person is permitted to 
marry till he can shew the skull of a man whom he 
has slaughtered. They eat the flesh of their enemies, 
like the Battas, and drink out of their skulls; and 
the ornaments of their houses are human skulls and 
teeth, which are, consequently, in great request 
among them, as formerly in Sumatra, the ancient 
inhabitants of which are said to have originally had 
no other money than the skulls of their enemies. 
The Haraforas are found in all the Moluccas, in Ce- 
lebes, the Philippines, and Magindano, where they are 
termed Subano or Manubo; and the ferocious race 
mentioned by Marspen, who live inland from Sa- 
manka in Sumatra, and are accustomed ‘to atone ther 


218 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


own faults by offering the heads of strangers to the 
chiefs of their villages, are probably of the same 
description. , | 


The Papuas, termed by themselves Igoloté, but by 
the Spaniards of the Philippines, negritos del monté, 
from their colour and. woolly hair, are the second race 
of aborigines, in the eastern isles ; in several of which 
they are still to be found, and in all of which they 
seem to have originally existed. Some of their 
divisions have formed small savage states, and made 
some advances towards civilization; but the greater 
part of them, even with the example of more civil- 
ized races before their eyes, have betrayed no symp- 
toms, either of a taste or capacity for improvement, 
and continue in their primitive state of nakedness, 
sleeping on trees, devoid of houses or cloathing, and 
subsisting on the spontaneous products of the forest, 
-or the precarious success of their hunting and 
fishing. ‘The natives of the Andaman isles seem to 
be of this race, as also the black mountaineer tribes 
of the Malay peninsula, termed at Kiddeh, Samang ; 
at Perak, and in the Malay countries to the N. W. 
of Kiddeh, Bila; while to the southward of Perak, 
and through the straits of Malacca, to the eastward, 
they are termed Dayak. .The Papuas, or oriental 
negroes, seem to be all divided into very small states 
or rather societies, very little connected with each 
other. Hence their language is broken into a mul- 
\titude of dialects, which in process of time, by sepa- 
ration, accident, and oral corruption, have nearly lost 
ll resemblance. The Aadays of the peninsula, con- 
sider the language of the blacks of the hills as a mere 
jargon, which can only be compared to the chattering 
of large birds; and the Papua dialects, in many of the 
. eastern isles, are generally viewed in the same light, 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 219 


The Arabs, in their early voyages, appear to have 
frequently encountered the Papuas, whom they 
describe in the most frightful colours, and constantly 
represent as cannibals. ‘They are mentioned by the 
travellers Isny Wauas and Asvu Zeip, in the Si/silet- 
al-Tuarikh, translated by Renavunport, and nearly the 
same accounts seem to be repeated by Masvup1, 
Yaxorr, and Ign av Warpr. The following passage, 
which gives the name of one of the tribes, is adduced 
from the Persic treatise termed Sezr ul Aklim, the 
author ef which appears to have visited the eastern 
islands. After mentioning the great island of cam-- 
phor, probably Borneo, he adds, ‘‘ Beyond this are 
other islands of different sizes, among which there is 
one of considerable extent, inhabited by a race of 
blacks termed Kahdiut, who resemble brutes in form, 
and when they can seize on a person, they kill and 
eat him. Of this practice, I have had experience, 
having escaped only by throwing myself into the sea; 
as the saying is, ‘when you are going to be slain, 
throw yourself into the sea, and perhaps you may 
survive. Even so it happened to me, for getting on 
the trunk of a large tree, 1 kept my hold for three 
days, when I was thrown by the force of the winds 
and waves on a desert shore, and after enduring much 
hunger and thirst, reached at last an inhabited 
country.” 


The tribes of the. eastern islands exhibit a variety 
of singular and. interesting appearances, not only in 
the civil and political, but also in the natural and 
moral history of man. If some of them appear in a 
naked and primitive state of barbarism, in others the _ 
vestiges of ancient art and science indicate, that they 
have suffered a relapse from a prior state of civilization. 
This is particularly obvious among the Malay, Java- 


#90: ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


nese, Batta, and Bigts tribes, among whom the 
polished style, and elevated sentiments, of many of 
their compositions, and their dexterity in some of the 
arts, especially the compounding and working of 
metals form a singular contrast with the neglect of 
personal morality and the relaxation of all the bonds 
of society ; while ancient and wise regulations are in 
a great measure superseded by the most absurd and 
barbarous usages. Among the most barbarous of the 
Harafora and Papua races, there are some, who 
whether male or female, use no species of cloathing 
whatsoever, and consequently exhibit few trates of 
that modesty which is supposed to be innate in the 
human species. The same phenomenon, whether 
natural or produced by situation, is exhibited among _ 
the Biajus, the families of whom live constantly 

together, on the sea, in small boats. Vestiges of 
cannibalism appear to exist among the greater part 
of the rude tribes in the eastern isles, but the Battas 
of Sumatra, who are superior to the Malays in the 
knowledge of the arts and letters, have likewise pre- 
served it; as well as the Zabdénka tribe in Celebes. 
Of many of the most absurd, unnatural, and barba- 
rous of their usages, it is obviously impossible to form 
a just opinion in the present state of our knowledge, 
as we are totally ignorant of the spirit of them, and 
of the system of opinions with which they are con- 
nected. Some of them may find a parallel in India 
and China; and it may be observed, that both the 
Indian and the Indo-Chinese monuments contain mary 
allusions toa state of society and manners on the con- 
tinent, similar to that which subsists among the most 
babarous of the tribes of the eastern isles. Perhaps, 
too, we shall be disposed to regard, with some degree 
of complacency, the most absurd and the most illiberal 
portions of the religious systems:of Branma and 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 22 


Bunn’, if we consider the dreadful superstitions 
that they probably supplanted, and the brutal state 
of savage existence which they exchanged for civil 
polity and social order. The Vanaras of Huniiman 
are reckoned a tribe of mountaineers, even by many 
of the Hindis. The barbarous, but brave and active 
Idan of Borneo, are termed ALaruét, which is the San- 
serit name of the forty-nine regents of the winds, 
and companions of Inpra. The standard of the 
Battas is a horse’s head with a owing mane, which 
seems to indicate a connection with the Hayagrivas 
of Sanscrit history. In the present state of our know- 
ledge of these tribes, however, it 1s not conjecture; 
but rigid and accurate description that is required’; 
and in the present instance, it is not my object to 
consider their civil, political, or moral relations, unless 
as far as these affect the philological investigation of 
their languages and literature. As the chief utility 
that results from the examination of some of these _ 
ruder dialects, is to enable us to ascertain the limits 
of languages, more interesting and important, per- 
haps it may be thought that great minuteness would 
be misapplied on objects of such secondary impor- 
tance. It must, however, be recollected, that success 
in important researches, often depends on the accu- 
racy with which inferior investigations have. been 
conducted; that in commencing an investigation it 
is not always easy to predict what will ultimately 
prove of ‘superior, or inferior importance; and that, 
at all events, it is, safer to bestow too much attention, 
than too little, on what must be the basis of historical 
investigation. In all such inquiries, I therefore do 
not hesitate to adopt the sentiment of the learned 
Lz Lone, that. “Truth is so interesting and satisfac- 
tory, when perceived, that no pains should be spared 
to discover it, even in the smallest matters.” 


292 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


VIL. Ruxnene.—The Rukhéng is the first of that 
singular class of Jndo-Chinese languages, which may 
be properly termed monosyllabic, from the mass of 
their radical. words consisting of monosyllables, like 
the spoken dialects of China. These monosyllables 
are subjected to great variety of accent and imtona- 
tion, in almost every instance: and require an accu- 
racy of pronunciation and a delicacy of ear in speak~- 
ing and comprehending them, far beyond what is 
requisite in the languages of Europe, or even in the 
polysyllabic languages of Asia. The Indo-Chinese 
languages of the monosyllabic class, borrow a con- 
siderable variety of terms from the Pal or Bali, 
which exists among them, as the language of learning 
and.science; but. in adopting these polysyllables, 
they accommodate them to their peculiar enunciation, 
by. pronouncing every syllable as a distinct word. 
The Rukhéng is the language of the original inha- 
bitants of Arakan, who adhere to the. tenets, of 
Bupp’HA. Forming in ancient times a part of the 
empire of JAdagadha, from which they seem to have 
derived the name of Mug or Mauga, by which they 
are generally termed by the inhabitants of Bengal; 
and being from their situation, more immediately 
connected with Jndia ;, their language is by no means 
purely monosyllabic, but forms, as it were, the con- 
necting link between. the polysytlabie and mono; 
syllabic languages. "The Rukhéng race is admitted to 
be of the same radical stock as the Barmas or Bir- 
mans, and.is understood to have greatly preceded 
that nation in civilization. The Barmas, indeed, 
derive their own origin from the Rukhéng, whom they 
generally denominate Barmd kyi, or the great Bar- 
mas, and they consider the Rukhéng as the most 
ancient and original dialect of the Barma language. 
This idea is certainly correct, and it may be added, 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. © 993 


that the Rukhéng orthography and pronunciation are 
neither so defective, nor so much corrupted as the 
Barma, and that consequently, in tracing the history 
of the language, the Rukhéng is of much greater 
utility to the philologist. In another respect the 
languageimay be considered as purer; until their late 
conquest by the Barmas, the tribes of Rukhéng seem 
for along period to have retained their independence, 
while the! proper’ Barma tribes have suffered various 
revolutions. Hence the Rukhéng retains ‘more of 
its ancient form, and is less corrupted by foreign 
mixtures. ‘The modifications, therefore, which it has 
received, are chiefly ‘derived from the Pali or Bali, 
which was cultivated in the country as the learned 
language, and contained all: their sacred books. The 
Rukhéng has accordingly adopted: Bali: words and 
phrases more copiously than the Barma, and has also 
preserved them in a greater state’ of: orthographical 
purity. The pronunciation of the Rukhéng is perhaps 
broader and grosser, but more articulate than the 
Barma; in-particular it strongly affects the use’ of 
the letter *, which the Barmas generally convert into 
y,\in. their, pronunciation. Such, however; is the 
difference of pronunciation between the two nations, 
that even in sentences, where the words .are nearly 
the same, they are not easily intelligible to each 
other. : ; p bias Belk 


The Rukhéng alphabet coincides accurately with 
the Deva-nagari system of characters in its arrange- 
ment, and very nearly in the power of the particular 
letters. The only variation of importance is, the 
expression of both the acute and erave accent of 
the vowels, as well as their common sound, in certain 
cases. This provision, however, does not ‘extend to 


924 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


- all the vocalic sounds in the Rukhéng alphabet, but 
only to those sounds of this species, which are of 
most general use. A similar contrivance for the ex- 
pression of accent, occurs in all the alphabets of the 
monosyllabic languages, but varies, in extent, ac- 
cording to the exigencies of a particular language. 
Thus, in Rukhéng, after the simple aiphabet, follow 
the combinations of the simple letters, with wa, ya, 
ra, and of h preceding them. Then follow some 
triple combinations of the same letters, after which 
are exhibited the common forms of syllables which 
terminate in a consonant, as ak, ang, aich, at, ap, 
and others of a similar kind; and finally the varieties 
of accent, as acute and grave, are presented, in those 
vowels and nasals which are chiefly subject to be 
influenced by them. : 

The Rukhéng character has considerable similarity 
to the Barma, m the greater part of its letters. The 
following simple characters, however, g’ha, ja, pha, 
nya, ta, @ha, da, @ha, na, ‘Wha, ra, lla, as well as some 
of the more complex combinations, differ greatly 
from. the respective forms of these characters in the 
Barma alphabet, and exhibit considerable resemblance 
to some of tlie ancient Canara characters. The 
Rukhéng simple alphabet is exhibited with considera- 
ble correctness by Capt. J. Towzrs, in the fifth 
volume of the Asiatic Researches, though many of 
his particular observations, a8 well as general views, 
are far from being accurate; chiefly, it may be pre- 
sumed, from the novelty of the investigation. 


-. The Rukhéng language, in the simplicity of 
its structure and’ expression, has great analogy 
to the Malayu. It has properly no numbers, 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 925 


cases, nor flections, in its nouns; nor conjugations, 
moods, tenses, or persons, inits verbs. Many words have 
asubstantive, adjective, or verbal signification, accord- 
ing to their position in a sentence; but in general, 
the names of objects, qualities, and actions, are 
sufficiently distinct from each other. The plurals of 
nouns are formed by numerals, or words expressive 
of plurality, as dé, a man; li-sing-rawk, three men ; 
lu-ikiing, many men; lu aking-ling, all men ; mimma, 
a@ woman; mimma aking-su, many women. Compa- 
risons are made by particies expressive of number or 
quantity, such as mya, or mrét-té, much; akré and 
hlaré, very; prét, less, under ; aking, many. Cases 
are expressed by particles equivalent to the prepo- 
sitions or postpositions of other languages, or by 
juxta-position, which has often the force of the 
genitive in the Rukhéng language. Thus, @ man’s 
hand, may be expressed indifferently by Li-lak, li 
hma-lak, or lia-chwa-lak. 


The simple pronouns are nga, I, ko, or, méng, thou; 
and yang-su, he; the plurals of which are formed by 
the addition of ro, as nga-ro, we ; mong-ro, ye ; yang- 
su-ro, they. But in addition to these simple pronouns, 
there are various others, which indicate rank and 
situation, as in Malayu, Chinese, and the monosyllabic 
languages in general, which have all of them paid 
peculiar attention to the language of ceremony, in 
addressing superiors, inferiors, and equals. These 
ceremonial forms in Rukhéng are sometimes formed 
by particles added to the simple pronouns, and some- 
times they are significant terms, such as servant, 
iord, highness, majesty, used pronominally, or rather 
in an absolute sense, without any expressed _pro- 
nominal adjuncts ; as in addressing a superior, when 


296 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


the terms asydng, lord, sir; sak hang, highness ; khang- 
pard, majesty, are employed. 

The pronouns in common use in Rukhéng, according 
to this variety of ceremonial forms, may be thus 
exhibited. 


I, we; thou, ye, he, they, 
nga, ‘ko, dang, , 
nga-To, / mong, yang-su, 
nga-ro-hma, nang, yang-su-re, 
ky€wéng, awey, su-Tro. 
akyéwéng, mong-hma, 
akyéwéng-hma, mong-re, 
akyéwéng-ro, mong-ro-hma, 
akyéwéng-ro-hma, “nang-ro, 
akyéwéng-tza-ré, nang-hma, 
akyeweng tz’hang-ré-ro nang-ro-hma, 

z awey-ro, 

awey-hma, 


awey-ro-hma, 


To explain the particular instances in which each 
of these pronominal terms is used, is not consistent 
with my present object, which is only to present a 
general outline of the structure of the language. 

The moods and tenses of the verbs are in like 
manner expressed by means of particles, or significant 
words, like our auxiliary verbs. Such are si, hi, hi-ré 
and /e-bi, is; bri and lé ydkk, is, been; bri-ré and 
bri-kha-ré, was; miy, will; ra and ra-mé, may, can ; 
yaung, let, permit ; hi-sua, been. The position of 
these particles in a sentence, is often, however, a 
‘matter of considerable difficulty, and is-one of the 
circumstances in which the elegance of style chiefly 
consists. The style chiefly affected in Rukhéng 
composition, isa species of measured prose, regulated 
by accent and the parallelism of the members of a 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 297 


sentence. Rhyme, however, is not required, either 
in the terminating consonants or vowels, though it 
frequently occurs from the structure of the language. 
The general form of this measure seems to be four 
long syllables, each of which, however, is conversible 
into two short ones, or may have a short one inter- 
polated before or after it. Thus, the passage adduced 
by Captain Towers, from the JZanu Saingwan, as a 
specimen of his system of orthography in his “ Obdser- 
vations on the Alphabetical System of the Language of 
Awa and Rachain,” may be arranged. 


Maha s4mata, Tain-kha hnaik ch’haun, 
Man geri chak-krawal4, Khré so tachhé, 

San’khra prain brain, Shai’ch pa s6 T’h4m-ma-sit, 
Tain dain p? ta, Cha ga do go, &c. 


Sometimes, however, more complicated measures 
are employed in Rukhéng composition, in imitation 
of those which occur in Bali. Many interesting 
works are represented to exist in the Rukhéng lan- 
guage, but the greater part of them are translations 
from the Bali. The “ Yillawar Cherita,” is said to 
contain the historical traditions of the Rukhéng 
“nation: the “ Karzk,” composed by Ancuti-Mata, 
and the “ Z°hamma-sat or Dherma Sastra, contain 
their system of: religious observances, and code of 
laws. The following is a list of the most popular 
Rukhéng compositions : 


- Raja-bantza, 9. Sada-shyei’ch-chaung, 


] 

2. Raja-wongtza, 10.. Maho, 

3. Témi, 1]. Uni-nga-gyaing, 

4. Némi, 12. So’p-soung-gyéng, 
_ 45. Janaka, 13. Bhuridat-kapy4, 

6. Suwanna-asyang, _ 14. Bo-thi-hmain-déi, 

7. Bhuridat, 15. Wé-faing-dara, 

$. Tzaingdé-gangma 16. Saing-we-ra, 


#28 


17. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
vd oe 
22. 
23. 
24. 
25. 
26. 
aie 
28. 


29. Logasara, 61. 
30. Sa-bri-hla, 62. 
31. Taing-t,hati, 63. 
32. Radana-hrwé-khri, 64. 
33. Radana-paing-ging, 65. 
34. Rudana-paddaing, 66. 
35. Radana-kweing-khya, 67. 
36. Radana-powng-khyowk, 68. 
37. Ba-na’t-sa, y 69. 
88. Kraing-ma-tei’ch-p’hak-powng-wat’hu, 70. 
39. Nga-tzi-sada-pring-do, tee § 2 
40. Ga’p-p’ha-kyéng, 72. 
41. Lakhana-di-ba, . ; Tas 
42. Noma-kapya, 74. 
43. Nga-chaing-braing, 75. 
44. Rama-wut’hi-cha, 76. 
45. Bramasara, de 
46. Bud-dho-wa-da, - 78 
47. Péda-sow’t, 79. 
48. Mungala-sow’t, 


Krauk-ché, 49. 
Nara-cho, 50. 
Athi’k-bala, Sl; 
Abhi-dam-ma, 52. 
K’hunei’ch-kyéng, 53. 
Para-ma-saing-gou’k-kyéng, 54. 
Maha-Raga-t’ha-kyéng, 

Sapa-kyéng, 56, 
T’ham-ma-sat-kweing-khya, 57. 
T’ ham-ma-sat-kra’k-ru, 58. 
T’ham-ma-sat-Mant, 59. 
T’ham-ma-sat-krudaing, 


From this list, it is evident, that the subjects of 


ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Khunei’ch-ra’k, 
Khunei’ch-ra’k-parei’p, 
Patha-wi-jéya, 
Sa-gra-u-ch’ howng, 
Lé-keweng-u-ch’howng, 
Sit-ha-da-nd, 


55. Sat-powng, 


Sat-yéng, 
Sat-hnéwaing, 
Sa-hrwé-k’hé, . 
Moé-td-krang-cha, 


60. Gu-waing podimowng-cha 


Thi-to-padé-sa, 
Noma-ko-ga-tha, 
Tiché-hnei’ch-ra-si, 
Khowng-gri, 
Khowng-lap, 
Khowng-ngé, 
Ta-hnaung-gra, 
Mé-thaung-gra, 
Su-mé-t’ha, 
Rewatta-cha, 
Aswa-pida, 
Prowng-bra, 
Owng-pa-di-cha,_. 
Paing-pru-cha, 
Uga, 
Mowng-chwa-cha, 
Cho-ré, 
Ya’t-ré, a 
Ling-di-cha. 


some of these works are the adventures of characters 
well known in Sanscri¢ mythology, as the Rama Wut hu 
or history of Rama, the Budd’ho-wa-du or history 
of the Avatar Bupp’ua; others of them seem to be 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 229 


only Rukhéng versions of well known Sanscrit com- 
positions, as the T°hi-to-pa-désa, or Hitopadesa, the 
T’ham-ma-sut-Manu, or Dherma-sastra of MeENUv. 
The Suwanna-Asyang, is the popular story of Suvur- 
NA SpRINGI, or the golden cow, formed by the 
Brahmen Sumpuxara Misra, and presented to Raja 
Mouxounpa Deva Casapati. The Buurtpar is the 
history of Raja Buuriparra of Jagadha, mention- 
edinthe Maha Bharata, and the Bhuridat-kapya, or 
Bhuridutta-kavya, is a poem on the same subject. The 
Raja-buntza is the Rukhéng edition of the Raa- 
Vumsavah, the Raja-Wontgza is a different work on 
the same subject, and the Patha-wiyéya seems to be 
the Prit’thu-vijgeya. Of the modifications they have 
received in the process of translation, I have hitherto 
had little opportunity of judging, but as far as I have 
been able to investigate the subject, not only the 
style, but the incidents and progress of the Sansecrit 
narration is generally altered, to render them more 
illustrative of the ascetic doctrines of the Budd fist 
sect; such as the guilt of killing animals, even acci- 
dentally ; and the perfection acquired by, Aéshzs in 
solitary retirement, by means of sublime penance and 
meditation. dee tis | 


The Rukhéng language has never been cultivated 
by Europeans ; the observations on its alphabetical 
system by Captain Towers, and the short specimen 
of its vocablesin Dr. Fr. Bucuanan’s, “ Comparative 
Vocabulary of some of the Languages spoken in the 
Burma Empire,” both in the 5th vol. of the Asiatic 
Researches, being all that has been published con- 
cerning it in any European language. The specimen 
given by Dr. Fr. Buchanan, only varies from the ~ 
Barma in seven words out of fifty, and these are 
‘only varieties of pronunciation, excepting “ looshee,” 

3 


230 - ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


a child, which is also Barma, and mateinay, which 
seems to be an error, as it does not signify fo sit, 
either in Rukhéng or Barma, but literally “ does not 
stand,” the proper Rukhéng term being ra’t chowk. 
The words in the vocabulary certainly exist in Ruk- 
héng as well as in Barma; but in some instances 
different words are in more general use, in the former; 
as ahri, long, instead of shé, and po-mro-naing-grong, 
beast, instead of taraitzan. The Rukhéng pronun- 
Ciation, sometimes too, is modified by the Burma, 
and the letter 7 is almost always omitted in tlre spe- 
cimen, though it is a distinguishing characteristic of 
the Rukhéng pronunciation. Thus, the Rukhéng 
requires mri-gri, earth, instead of myegyee, in thé 
specimen; kri, great, instead of kyee ; kripamé, foot, 
instead of kigpamo; krow hk, six, instead of kiouk ; kri, 
a star, instead of kyay, and ni, the sun, instead of nay. 
These errors, however, are not to be attributed to 
Dr. Fr. Bucuanan, nor detract, in the least, from 
the merit of his exertions in commencing the inves- 
tigation ; they evidently proceed from the inaccuracy, 
hurry, and indistinct pronunciation of his Barma 
assistants, and in his situation were perhaps not to 
be avoided, unless by attending to the native ortho- 


graphy. 


Dr. F. Bucuanan has also exhibited comparative 
specimens of two mixed dialects, spoken in d7akan ; 
the first termed Ruinga, spoken by the Afoslems of 
the country, and consisting of a mixture of Arabic, 
Hindi, and Rukhéng ; the second, termed Rusdn, used 
by the Hindus of Arakan, who adhere to the system 
of Brauma, and formed by a large proportion of 
corrupted Sanscrit and Bengali, united to a compa- 
ratively small portion of Rukhéng. The dialect 
of the province of Yo, as it is pronounced by the. 
Barmas, and Ré as it is termed by the Rukhéng, is 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 231 


only a slight variation of the Rukhéng, which it ap- 
proaches much nearer than the Barma, ‘The range 
of mountains to the north and east of Rukhéng is 
inhabited by a'race termed Khéng, by the Ruk’héng 
and Barma tribes, or as it is written by Dr. Fr. 
Bucuanan, Kiayn; but who term themselves Koln, 
and whose language is peculiar, having little or no 
affinity to either Rukhéng or Barma. From the two 
names, Rd and Khéng, the name of Rukhéng is gene- 
rally derived ; but the national name of the Rukhéng 
race is Ma-rum-ma, which seems to be only a cor- 
ruption of Maha-Vurma; Vurma being an epithet 
generally assumed by the tribes of Ashatriya ex- 
traction. The inhabitants of the mountains between 
Rukhéng and Chatigan are termed Sa-mowng-syang 
by the Rukhéng tribes, and are asserted to speak a 
different language. ~They are probabiy only a division 
of the Khéng or Kolin. Whether these are the same 
with the Kukis, who inhabit the high ranges of hills 
to the N. E. of Chatigan, I have not been able to 
determine. In the able and curious description of © 
this singular race, given by J. Macrag, Esq. in the 

seventh volume of the Asiatic Researches, the lan- 
guages of the Kuki and Mug, or Rukhéng races, are 
said to be so intimately connected as to be mutually 
intelligible. That the two adjacent. tribes should 
be mutually able to understand each other, is very 
probable; but that their respective languages are 
counected, in this instance, I apprehend to be very 
dubious ;. for in-a specimen of above 500 radical terms 
of the Kuki, which I owe to that gentleman’s polite- 
ness, I find very few which are similar to the cor- 
responding Rukhéng, or that were understood by an 
intellgent native of drakan. The subject, however, 
requires further investigation, and there seems to be 
no person better qualified than Mr. Macnrar, for 

Q 4 


239 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


prosecuting the inquiry, both by his abilities, and 
his situation. 


VIII. ‘Barma.—tThe Barma language is used by 
the great and powerful nation of the Barmas. The 
name of this nation has been written differently, by 
almost as many authors as have mentioned it, while 
no person seems to have thought it worth his while 
to inquire how the Barmas wrote their own name. 
This they constantly write Barma, though from 
affecting an indistinct pronunciation, they often term 
themselves Byamma, Bomma, and Myamma, which 
are only vocal corruptions of the written name. 
Amavutius, however, in his preface to the ‘ Alpha- 
betum Barmanum seu Bomanum,” with equal igno- 
rance and confidence, denies flatly, that any nation, 
country, city, or language, exists, which by the 
natives themselves is denominated Barma. This 
name, he asserts to have been introduced solely by 
the ignorance and vicious pronunciation of Huropeans, 
since, says he, by the analogy of the language, the 
nation is denominated Bomah, the great nation, from 
bo, the head, a chief, and mah, aman. ‘This silly va- 
pouring etvmology is, however, entirely averse to the 
established orthography of the Barmas themselves, and 
only worthy of P. Pauxrnus, or a modern Frenchman. 


The Barma language, like the Rukhéng, m_ its 
original state appears to be purely monosyllabic, 
but it has borrowed freely from the alt, and in 
imitation apparently ef that language, it has some- 
times formed words of some length, by the coalescing 
of its original monosyllables. Bemg completely 
devoid of every species of flection, whether im nouns, 
pronouns, or verbs, its construction is extremely 
simple, and depends almost solely on the principle 
of juxta-position, like its cognate dialect, the 


\ 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 935 


Rukhéng, which it resembles in structure. Its pro- 
nouns and j particles are peculiar, its idioms few and 
simple, and its metaphors of the most obvious kind; 
but it is copious in terms expressive of rank or dig- 
nity, and the rank of the speaker is characterized by 
the language he uses. 


The Barma alphabet corresponds to the Bali, and 
is regulated by the same principles of accentua ion. 
In point of form, it has considerable resemblance to 
the Canara, Singala, and Telinga alphabets, but is 
rather more simple in the formation of the character. 
Carpanius, in his ‘ Alphabetum Barmanum seu 
-Bomanum,” is inclined to derive the Barma character 
immediately from the square Bal?, used in Ava, and 
both of them from the Hebrez, through the medium 
of the Persic. AMApDuTIUs, improving on this idea, 
or rather adopting that of BAYER, seems to be desir- 
ous of deducing both, as well as the Malabar or Ma- 
layalam, from “the Armenian, a character to which 
they have scarcely the remotest resemblance, and the 
orgin of which, is itself involved in great obscurity. 


The character of the Barma language has a very 
considerable effect on the style of the compositions 
it contains. Repetitions of the same turn and ex- 
pression, are rather affected, than shunned; and:a 
kind of naked strength and simplicity of phrase, 
with short sentences, pregnant with meaning, are 
the greatest beauties which the language admits of. 
“ The Bomans,” says Carpanius, “in their poetry, 
are more careful of preserving similar terminations, 
than an equal number of syllables, and use this sty le, 
particularly in treating of religious subjects.” The 
fact, however, is, that the similarity of termination 
is neither sought, nor shunned; but recurs from the 
- genius of the language, very frequently. The 


234 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


style of the principal Barma compositions is a species 
of measured prose, regulated almost solely by the ac- . 
cent, as in the Rukhéng, the diferent dialects of 
Chinese, and-the other monosyllabic languages. The 
tone of polished conversation requires an approxima- 
tion to this style of composition. The verb is gene- 
rally placed in the close of the sentence, and the de- 
fect of conjuctive particles, to connect the different 
members of a sentence, renders a considerable de- 
gree of repetition absolutely mecessary to prevent 
confusion. 


The Barma language has been highly cultivated in 
composition, and contains numerous works in reli- 
gion and science. Besides numerous books on astro- 
logy, mythology, medicine, and law, in the latter of 
which the most important 1s the Dam ma-Sat kyee, or 
great system of justice, with the Constitutions of the 
Barma princes. The Barmas are asserted, by Dr. 
Bucuanawn, to possess numerous historical works, re- 
lative to the different dynasties of their princes, the 
most celebrated of which is the Alaha-rajaJV ayngee. 
“* These people,” says he, “ have also translated his-. 
tories of the Chinese and Siamese, and of the king- 
doms of Kathee, Koshan-pyee, Pagoo, Saymmay and 
Laynzayn.” On the importance of such works, sup- 
posing them to be strictly of a historical nature, it 1s 
needless to dilate. It appears probable, however, 
that many of them may resemble the Hindu Cheritras. 
The Barmas possess numerous smaller poems and 
songs, and even naiakas, which may probably be de- 
rived from Sanscrit tradition, as the adventures of 
Rama in Lunka, are favourite topics m their dramas. 
The following are some of the most popular works in 
the Barma language, and several of them, 1 find, 
exist equally in Rukhéng, Siamese and Malayu, 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 235 


Some of them are purely mythological, but others 
are Cheritrds of the historical class. 


1. Jina~Mana, 21. Kinara-pyeu, or account of the 
2. Nunda-Jina, celestial Kinara, 
3. Nundaguma, 22. Malinméng Wut’hu, or history 
4. Chundaguma, of Rajah Malin, 
5. Narada, 43, Jinaka, or history or Rajzh Ji- 
6. Temi, naka, denominated in Siamese 
7. Nemi, Maha-Chinok, 
8. D’hammapada, 24, Yuwaji, termed in Ruk’héng 
‘9. Namagara, : Ruari, 
10, Logasara, 25. Swipri-wéng-khan, 
11. Longanit’hi, 26. To-twék-k’han, 
12, Maho-Sut’ha, 27. Munigungsala, 
13. Wesundura, or story of Rajah 28. Anusasana, 
Vesundara, 29. Suan-nashan, 
14, Paramik’han, 30. Withora, 
15. Chudongk’han, 31. Kagileinga, 
16. Bungk’han, 32. Sada-syi’ch-chaung, 
“17. Kado-k’han, 35. Anaga-atwéng, 
18. Chatu Damasara, 34, Ngare-khan or description ‘of 
19. Sangwara, termed in Siamese, Naraka, 
the Sut’hon, 23. Attagatt-léenga, 
20. Bhuridat, 36. Hmat-chew’ bon’g. 


The Barma language has some variety of pronun- 
ciation in the different provinces of that empire. 
The dialect of the Vé, situated on the east of ‘the 
Arakan mountains, has been already noticed. The 
Tanéngsari, or language of the inhabitants of the Ta- 
naserim district, denominated Tinnaw by the Siamese, 
also differs considerably from the common Barma. 
The Tanéngsari certainly have many peculiarities of 
expression, and many words in common use among 


236 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


them, are at present obsolete among the Barmas of 
Ava, but the majority of them are to be found in the 
Barma writings, and the Tanéngsadri are therefore . 
reckoned to use an obsolete dialect, rather than a pe- 
culiar language. I have already mentioned in what 
respects the Barma and Rukhéng are related to each 
other. The following comparative list of terms will 
show more particularly the extent of their difference 
in current use. ; 


Rukhéng. Barma. 

Month khanang piyat 
back nau-king nad 
Knee pa-chhei’ch-ta du 
bone aro ayo 
heart aling na-towng 
seeing mrang-ré sa myang-su-ha 
smell kaing-ré chan-jan 
touch pait-té seing-su-ha, thi 
trouble - ma-ré khék 
strength akri akyan 
marriage maya-ni-cha’p-té lék-t’hat-gya, 
life ahrang asyang 
circle apawk akwéng 
storm mukri moseik 
hail mu-gyowk mo-si 
morning ma-sowk-tha, nyi-ga ma-neik, 
evening nya-ja nya-né, né-€ 
sea mreik péng-le 
dust mré-moh among, myé-mong 
mud ta-mai suin 
fire ming mi 
length hré shi 
ditch mroung kewng 
gold hrui sué 
silver mué ngoé 
horse mroung miyin 

. fowl krak . kyiuk 
cock krak-p’ha kyiuk-t’hi 
hen Krak-ma kyiuk-ma 
snake mrui myewé 


sail rowak yewek 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 
* Rukhéng. 


bed 

~ taylor 
white 
hard 
vegetable 


first 
second 
I 


we 
thou 
you 

he 
they 
this 
that 
who 
what 
which 
if 
though 
about 
many 
perhaps 
yes 

no 

is 

was 

has been 
I ought to do it 


4 will do it 


saloéng 

ang-gi-dap 

apra 

kyang 

haung sei’ch ruakk 


ayenga akha 


hnei’ch-khu-chowng 
akyeweng-hma 
akyeweng-ro-hma 


_mong 


mong-ro 
yang-su 
yang-su-ro 
dé-ga 
tho-ga 

au 

jama 

asu 
Cho-shyang 
la-la’t-hléukk 
le’khi-gra’t-me 
aking, 
kaing-ra-bya 
how’t-payak 
ma-hi 


hi-yak 


akyeweng-louk-kowng- 


yak 
akyeweng-ro-hma louk- 
ra-ré 


237 


Barma. 


.  kadeng 


khyowk-sama 
pyu 

ma 

heing-ewék 
ayeng-su-ha 
ayeng-da-ha 
hnei’ch-khu-su-ha 
kyewen-now’p 
kyewen-do 

méng 

méng-do 

su 

su-do 

di-ha 

ho-ha 

béla 

baha 

bésii, béha 
hléang 
phye’ch-hleang 
pat 

apéng 

kan-hné 

hou’t-ké 

ma-si 

si . 
Py 

si-bi 
kewen-now’p-louk-gowng- 


kewen-nou’p louk-ya-dé 


The Barma affects a more delicate, but at the 
same time inarticulate pronunciation than the Rwk- 
héng, and less conformable to the actual orthography 


of the language. 


This is particularly obvious in the 


conversion of ra into ya in Barma; but the Rukhéng 
itself is not devoid of its peculiarities, among which 
may be mentioned the conversion of sha into ha. 


238 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Thus the word which is -written shvé, in both lan- 
guages, is in Barma pronounced syi, and in Rukhéng | 
hri. 


The specimens which Dr. Bucnawan has exhibited 
of the languages of the Kariéng or Karayn, as he 
writes it, and of the Kiayn (which seems to be the 
same word softened in the pronunciation,) the rude 
tribe which denominates itself Kolén, certainly show 
considerable analogy to exist between these dialects 
and the Barma proper. Some Barma words seem, 
likewise, to be discoverable, in the specimen he has 
given of the language of the JMoitay, or, inhabitants 
of Kassay, as mee, fire,nga, fish; and more copious and 
correct vocabularies, with a more exact orthography, 
would probably exhibit a more intimate connection ; 
but a certain degree of acquaintance with the gram- 
matical principles of every language, and with its al- 
phabet and orthography, if a written one, is abso- 
lutely necessary to give any philological value to a 
specimen of its words. The inhabitants of the Wiko- 
bar islands are sometimes represented by those who 
have visited them, as speaking a language which is 
radically Barma, while, by others, it is reckoned 
Malayu, Wf Fontana’s short vocabulary (Asiatick 
Researches, Vol. III.) can be depended on, the Nko- 
bar language seems to have very little connection 
with either the one or the other; as it does not ap- 
pear to contain above two or three words which can 
with certainty be referred to either of them, 


The Barma language has been little cultivated by 
Europeans, excepting the Catholic Missionaries. The 
“ Alphabetum Barmanum,” digested by CarPanivs, 
was published at Rome in 1776. Carpantus men- 
tions, in his preliminary dissertation, that, at that 


2 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 239 


period, a grammar and vocabulary of the Barma lan- 
guage had been prepared by P. Jon. Marta Per. 
coro, Bishop of J4éssola, which seems never to have 
been published. In the preface to the same work, 
AmADutTIvus mentions, that the gospel of Sr. Ma- 
THEW, and the epistles of St. Pau, had been ren- 
dered into the Barma language, together with the 
“ Koangelia dierum omnium Dominicalium,” “ Epistola 
Dogmatica, et Dialogus inter Missionarium et Talapoi- 
num.’ .T. PauLrnus, also mentions among the Bor- 
gian MSS. a dialogue between a savage Khien and an 
E£x-Talapoin, written in the Italian language by D. 
Casetanus Manrecatius, the object of which is 
to expose the doctrine of the Talapoins, as contained 
in the books of the Barmas. Khien seems to be the 
name of the rude tribe termed Khéng by Moslem 
writers, and Kzayn by Dr. Bucuanan; and the 
work itself, the translation of a composition circu- 
lated among the:converted Barmas by the catholic 
missionaries. - The 7alapoins seem, however, to have 
retaliated on the missionaries; and Dr. Fr. Bucna- 
waw has printed VincentTius SANGERMANO’  trans- 
lation of “ 4 view of the Religion of Gopama,” com- 
posed by Aruxi Zarapo, for the express purpose of 
converting the Christians, in which the English, 
Dutch, Armenians, and other nations are exhorted 
to adore Gopama, thetrue Gop; toadore,also, his law 
and his priests, to be solicitous in the giving of alms and 
in the observance of Si/a, and in performing Bavana.. 


IX. Mén.—The én language is still used by the 
original inhabitants of Pegu, who denominate them- 
selves M6n, though by the Barmas they are termed 
Taleing, and, by the Siamese, Jding-mén. This lan- 
guage has never been cultivated by Huropeans, and 
the only specimen of it, known to me, is that printed 
by Dr. Fr. Bucnanan, (Asiatic Researches, Vol. V.) 


~*~ 


G40 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


It seems to be quite original, and is said by the Bar- 

mas and Siamese to have no affinity with either of 
their languages. I have met no learned man of the 
race, nor have had any opportunity of cultivating 
the language, but I have been informed by a Tala- 
poin that they possess many ancient histories in this 
language; which is not impossible, as they seem to 
have attained civilization, at a more early period 
than the Barmas ; and, though now reduced, to have 
been formerly a great and potent nation. In the 
early Portuguese histories they are denominated the 
Pandalis of Mén; and they are supposed to have 
founded the ancient Kalaminham empire, at a very 
early period. The name Kalaminham, mentioned by 
the Portugueze, is probably connected with the 
Stamese name of the nation, Ming-mén. The Mén 
alphabet, if can depend on the specimens. of the 
character shown me by a Barman of some learning, 
is only a slight variety of the Barma-Bali, with which, 
it corresponds, in the power and arrangement, as 
well as the form of the characters. I have, however, 
had little opportunity of investigating this subject; 
and, expecting to have visited Pegu, did not avail my- 
self of that opportunity to the fullest extent. The 
examination of the AZén character and language, has 
no peculiar difficulty, and may be easily accomplished 
by the first literary inquirer who may visit Pegu; and 
I still indulge the hope that my future inquiries may 
be attended with success in investigating their rela- 
tions. 


X. Tuay.—The Thay language is that which 
is used by the Siamese, who, in their own 
tongue, assume this name as their national ap- 
ellation. By the Barmas, they are denomi- 
nated Syan, from whence the Portugueze seem to 
have borrowed their Siam and Staom, from whom 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 941 


the other nations of Zurope have adopted the term. 
La Lovsere, who visited Siam in 1687-4, as Envoy 
Extraordinary from the French monarch, has given 
incomparably the most accurate account, that -has 
ever been exhibited, of this nation, formerly reckoned 
the most polished of eastern India. He divides them 
into two races, the 7ai and the Tai Yai. The latter 
nation, he adds, are reckoned savages, though the 
most ancient. ‘Theirname signifies literally the great 
Tai, and in order to distinguish themselves from this 
nation, the ruling race, in modern Siam, assume the 
name of Tai-noé, the little Tai. Dr. Fr. Bucuanan, 
however, on the authority of the information he re- 
ceived in the Barma dominions, divides the Siamese 
race into many states; and gives a specimen of the 
vocables of three dialects. This brief vocabulary, 
with La Lousere'’s observations on the Siamese lan- 
guage, and “ The maxims of the Talapeins,” translated 
out of Siamese by the catholic missionaries, which he 
has published in his “ Avstorical Relation of the King- 
dom of Siam,” constitute all that has been published, 
respecting the language or literature of this nation, 
in any European tongue. The result of- my own in- 
quiries certainly coincides more directly with La 
Louzere’s information, than with that received, by 
Dr. Fr. Bucnanayn. All the intelligent Sramese, 
whom I have met, and among these, there were 
Talapoins, both of the Tai and the Tai-yai race, agree 
in asserting, that the Szamese nation, properly so cal- 
led, consists of two tribes, the 7”hay and the T’hdy- 
jhay, for so the names are properly written. Ofthese 
the most ancient are the Z°hay-j hay, formerly famous 
for their learning, and the power of their empire. 
It is added, that many monuments of this ancient 
race exist in the kimgdom of Siam; and I was in- 
formed, in particular, that in the vicinity of Ligér, 


942 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


about five days journey from Trang, there are various 
ancient inscriptions, on stone, among the ruins of a 
very ancient temple, which are attributed to the 
F°kayj hay, but which no person among the modern 
T’hay is able to decypher. The 7”hay language, or 
Siamese, as it is written by these two races, does not 
differ essentially ; but the spoken dialect among the 
T’hay phay, is much more strongly accented, than 
among the 7”hay proper, or the present ruling race 
of Siam. The T’hay phay inhabit the country be- 
tween the Me-nam and the Afe-kon, or river.of Cam- 
bodia ; but the T’hay, for the most part, inhabit on 
the west of the Me-nam, or between that river and 
the frontiers of the Tinnaw, Adén, and Barma nations. 
As to the Yai-loong, of whose vocabulary Dr. Bu- 
CHANAW has given a specimen, all the Svamese that 
T have met, though they admit that a district is de- 
nominated by this appellation, unanimously deny, 
that there is either a race of men, or a dialect of the 
Janeuage, which bears this name. ‘The words them- 
selves, which Dr. Fr. Bucnawaw adduces, as spe- 
eimens either of the Tai loong or the Tai-yay, are pure 
T’hay, whenever they are not auricular corruptions 
of pronunciation, or words of different meaning, in- 
troduced, apparently, by the interpreter’s misappre- 
hension of the seuse required to be expressed. Hay- 
ing myself been frequently exposed to similar misap- 
rehensions, and knowing, from experience, the dif- 
Beulty of avoiding it, especially in languages, in 
which not only the signification varies, with such de- 
licate shades of pronunciation, as are almost undis- 
tinguisnable to an European ear, but the train of 
ideas themselves, is regulated by such a subtile, and 
as it were hieoroglyphical set of principles, I am far 
from insinuating any carelessness in Dr. Fr. Bucna-_ 
NAN, whose comparative vocabulary is the first at-- 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 243 


tempt to classify these languages ; but I am attempt- 
ing to account for the mistakes, into which he seems 
to have been inevitably led, by the misapprehension 
of his interpreters. Thus, moo signifies the hand, in 
TPhay, and paw-moo, which he exhibits as the Tui- 
loong variation, is only Fa-mi%, the palm of the hand, 
in the proper language: Kén, which he writes kayn, 
signifies the arm, in Thay or Siamese proper, and in 
the same language, komovee, which he gives as the 
Lai-yay synonime, signifies the lower part of the arm, 
from the elbow to the wrist, and moo, the Tailoong 
synoume, signifies the hand ; Tin, signifies the leg, in 
Bidigere 3 but naung, which he gives as the 7% al-nay, 
signifies the skin ; and koteen, the Tui-yay synonime, 
‘the joints of the leg ; in the same manner langteen, 
which he gives as the Tai-nay, or common Siamese, 
for foot, signifies literally the upper part of the foot ; 
and Swateen, the Tai-nay synonime, appears to be a 
mispronunciation of Fatin, the under part of the foot. 
Satt signifies a beast, or animal, and nook, the Ti ai-yay 
synonime, is only a mispronunciation of ndk, a bird, 
as are noup and naut, the Tai-nay and Tai yay words, 
which are given to signify a bird; Pawk signifies the 
mouth, but tsop, given as the Tui-yay synonime, is a 
mispronunciation of ¢sot, to drink ; San signifies short, 
but lot, the Tai-yay synonime, signifies child, and un- 
fot, the Tatloong synonime, one child ; yoon signifies to 
stand, but loot-sook, the Tai-yay synonime mispro - 
nounced, signifies to rise up; and Peinung, the Tui- 
doong synonime, go sit ; seeza, the head, is not Stamese, 
but Bali, and the Tay-yay synonime ho and the Tai- 
loong, hoo, are only mispronunciations of the proper 
Thay term hud. It may be proper also to observe 
here, that Dr. Fr. Bocuawnaw has printed Tay-nay 
instead of the Tai-noé of La Lousrre, which signi- 
fies Litle Siamese; whereas Tay-nay cannot possibly 
9) 


~ 


S44 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


signify little Siamese, but only chief Siamese ; the true 
meaning of nay, being chief or head. It is a term of 
similar ‘import with nayen, nayer and nayenmar, used 
in Malabar, as the appellation of the military cast, or 
naya-ka, in Sanscrit. 


The T’hay or Stamese language appears to be in a 


great measure original ; and is more purely monosyl- 


labic, and more powerfully accented, than any of the 
Indo-Chinese languages, already mentioned. ‘Tt cer- 
tainly is connected, in some degree, with some of 
the Chinese dialects ; especially’ the Mandarin: or 
Court language, with which its numerals, as well as 
some other terms, coincide, but these are ‘not very 
numerous. It borrows words freely from the Baéi, 
but contracts and disguises more, the terms which if 
adopts, than either the Ruk'héng or the Barma. In 
its finely modulated intonations of sound, in its ex- 
pression of the rank of the speaker, by the simple 


pronouns, which he uses, in the copiousness of the 


language of civility, and the mode of expressing 
esteem and adulation, this language resembles the 


Chinese dialects, with which also, it coincides more 


18 consonant to the Malayu, thou 


nearly in construction than either "Barma or Rukhéng. 
Its construction is simple and inartificial, depending 
almost solely on the principle of juxta-position. Re- 
lative pronouns are not in the language; the nomi- 
native regularly precedes the verb, “and the verb pre- 


‘ cedes the case which it governs. When two sub- 


stantives come together, the last of them is for the 
most part supposed to be in the genitive. This idiom 
eh not to the Barma 
or Rukhéng, in which, as in English, the first sub- 
stantive ba a possessive signification, Thus, the 


phrase, ‘“ a man’s head,” is expressed 1 in Barma and 


Rul’héng, by liek’ haung 2, which is literally man- 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 245 


head; but, in Siamese, it it is kudé-khon, and in Ma- 
layu, kapala orang, both of which are literally head- 
man A similar difference occurs in the position of 
the accusative with an active verb, which case, in 
Barma and Malayu, generally precedes the verb, as 
tummaing cha, literally rice eat ; but in Stamese fol- 
lows it, as kén kaw, literally eat rice, which corre- 
sponds to the Malayu, makan-nasi. The adjective 
generally follows the substantive, and the adverb the 
word which it modifies, whether adjective or verb. 
Whenever the name of an animal, and in general, 
when that of a species or class, is mentioned, the ge- 
neric, or more general name of the genus to which 
it belongs, is repeated with it, as often happens in 
the other monosyllabic languages, as well as in A/Za- 
layu. -In the position of the adverbial particle, the 
Malayu, often differs from the Stamese; as Mana 
pargi, literally where go, but, in Seamese, pai hnéi, go 
where. ‘The Siamese composition is also, like that of 
the Barma, a species of measured prose, regulated 
solely by the accent, and the parallelism of the 
members of the sentence; but, in the recitative, the 
Siamese approaches more nearly to the Chinese mode 
of recitation, and becomes a kind of chaunt, which 
different Brahméns have assured me is very similar 
to the mode of chaunting the Samaveda. 


The T°hay coincides occasionally, even in simple 
terms; both withthe Barma and Malayu; but these 
terms bear so small a proportion to the mass of the 
language, that they seem rather the effect of acci- 
dent or mixture, than of original connection. The 
following are some of these coincidences which pre- 


‘sent themselves spontaneously. 


R$ 


046 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


T’hay Barma T’hay Malayu 
river klong, kyéng or if ku, aku, and 
krong, ku, 
elephant, chang, ch’heng, this, ni, ini, 
saw, ltei, lua, that, nunn, inun, 
finger, nyew, nyo, lock, . kache, kunchi, 
to, ka, ga, dagger, _krit, kris, 
self, éng, éng, open, buk, buka, 
to, ka, ka, 
come, ma, mari. 


The 7’hay or Siamese alphabet, differs consider- 
ably in the power of its characters from the Badli ; 
though it not only has a general resemblace to it, in 
point of form, but also in the arrangement of the 
character. The vowels, which are twenty in num- 
ber, are not represented by separate characters, but 
by the character corresponding to the short dkar, va- 
riously accented; excepting the vocalic rw and l, 
which are only variations of the r and / consonants. 
The consonants are thirty-seven in number, and are 
not arranged by the series of five, like the Deva-na- 
gari and Bali, but the first series ka, consists of seven 
letters; the second series, cha, of six; the third se- 
ries, ta or da, of six; the fourth series, ba or pa, of 
eight; the fifth series, ja, of four; and the last se- 
ries, sa, of six, including the vocalic dkar, though two 
of them are not in common use. Each of these let- 
ters is varied by sixteen simple accentuations, and 
by thirty-six complex ones. ‘The letters ka, nga, ta 
or da, na, ma, ba or pa, are also final consonants. 
Hence it is easy to perceive the near approximation 
of the Siamese to the delicacy of the Chinese accen- 
tuation ; while in other respects, the alphabet is con- 
siderably more perfect, than in the dAdandarin or 
Court language of the Chinese, which has neither the 
same variety of consonants, nor admits so many, in 
the close of a syllable. The Stamese pronunciation, 
even of consonants, corresponds very imperfectly to 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. G47 


the European mode: r and / are generally pro- 
nounced v, in the close of a syllable ; 4 is often pre- 
fixed to a consonant, but from the total suspension 
of voice, in pronouncing syllables which termmate 
in a consonant, no aspiration can be pronounced after 
them ; ma, and ba, tya, and chya, are often difficult 
to be distinguished in pronunciation, as are ya, and ja, 
kyé and chyé with other combinations. From this 
circumstance, many combinations of letters are pro- 
nounced in a manner somewhat different from that im 
which they are written. 


The first European who attempted the study of 
Stamese literature, was the learned Grervatsé, but his 
Jucubrations have never been published. The learned 
and indefatigable Hypr procured from the Siamese 
ambassador at London, an imperfect copy of the Sza- 
mese alphabet, which has been published by Gree. 
Suarpe, inthe ‘“ Syntagma Dissertationum,” 1767. 
It is inferior to La Lousere’s alphabet in accuracy, 
though it contains a ereater number of compound 
characters. La Lousere’s alphabet contains three 
forms of the sz, corresponding to the Nagar: ; but 
the sha and sivha bemg disused mr common pronun- 
ciation, are commonly omitted both im the alphabet 
and in modern MSS. 


The Siamese or T’hay language contains a great 
variety of compositions of every species. Their 
poems and songs are very numerous, as are their 
Cheritras, or historical and mythological fables. 
Many of the Siamese princes have been celebrated 
for their poetical powers, and several of their histo- 
rical and moral compositions, are still preserved. In 
all their compositions, they either affect a plain, 
simple narrative, or an uncontected and abrupt style 

R4 


&- 
948 - ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


of short, pithy sentences, of much meaning. Their 
books of medicine are reckoned of considerable an- 
tiquity. Both -in science and poetry, those who 
affect learning and elegance of composition, sprinkle 
their style copiously with Bali. The laws of Siam 
are celebrated all over the east, and La Lounere has 
mentioned three works of superior reputation, the 
Pra-Tam-non, rhe Pra-Tam-Ra, and the Pra-Raja- 
Kam-manot. Of these, the first is a collection of the 
institutions of the ancient kings of Scam ; the second 
_is the constitutional code of the kingdom, and con- 
tains the names, functions, and prerogatives ofall the 
officers; the third, which is about 150 years old, con- 
tains additional regulations. Of these, the first is 
the most celebrated and the most deserving the at- 
tention of uropeans. | 


‘The Siamese histories of the J’hay dynasty, detail 

with much minuteness, and great exaggeration, the 
events which have occurred in Sram, and the adja- 
cent states and countries, during the last 1000 years. 
Tt also details the events of 400 years, previous to 
that period, with less precision, from the building of 
the city Maha Nakhon. The records, however, of 
the T’hay J’hay dynasty are supposed still to exist ; 
and, perhaps, it may yet be possible to glean a few 
grains of pure historic gold from the sands which 
eater in the long vallies of the Jdé-nam and Meé- 
on. 


The Cheritrds, or romantic fictions of the Sramese, 
are very numerous, and the personages introduced, 
with the exception of Rama and the characters of 
the Ramayan, have seldom much similarity to those 
of the Brahméns. The following are some of the 
most popular among the Thay, several of which 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 249 


contain the same: stories and incidents as those 
which are current among the Rukhéng, Barma, and 


Malayu nations. 


. Rama-kién, 

Radin, 
Sum-mut-ta-k6-dém, 
. Wét-jasun-dén, 

. Worawoéng, 


D tr m WH > 


Un-nariut, 

. Mahé-sot, 

. Mélay, 

. Chatri, 

. Chalaw4n, 

. P-ham-hém, 

. Pra-thém, 

. Su-t?hon, 

. Pok’ha-wad-di, 
. Téng-6dn, 

. Lin-t’héng, 

. Nok-k’hum, 

. P*ha-non-son-paja, 
. Mak-kali-p’hon, 
20. Sam-p’han-sit, 


ee ee 
oaonwD> ore WoO eK Oo CF ON 


[Ss 
— 


. Stian-na-hong, 


. Woraniut, 
. Chitra-kan, 
. Nang-uthay, 

. Maha-Chinok, 
. Mlék-vhong. 


. Prang-thong, 

. Nang-sip-song, 
. Rama, 

. Chumpé-t’hong, 
. Luk-stia-ko, 


P’him-swan, 


. Paja-phali, 

. T’haw-kriing-séa, 
. Khun-p’hen, 

. Trei-w6ng, 

. Chin-narat, 

. PPhowit’hat, 

. Su-t’hin, 

. HOi-sang, 

. Sang-sin-chay, 


a 


In the general characteristics of style and manner, 
these Cheritras resemble those of the Rukhéng, Bar- 
ma, and AMalayu tribes, and exhibit the peculiar man- 
ners of the Indo-Chinese nations, as well as the peculiar 


features of their mythology. 


The Rama-kien seems 


‘to be a Siamese version of the Ramayan, and relates 
the adventures of Pra’w or Pra Ram, and his 
brother Pra-La’k or Laksumana, and their wars 
with Totsa-KaNn or DusHa-KantHa, (which is one 
of the names of Ravana,) who carried off Nance 


950 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Sr’pa or Srta. This narrative corresponds as far as 
} have been able to learn, with the Sanserit poem, 
and almost ali its incidents have been converted into 
Natakas for representation by the Samese, in. the 
same manner as the Barmas have employed the 
incidents of the Vama-méng or Barma-Ramayan. 
Rédin is the Siamese translation of a Javanese story. 
Sum-mut-ta-ko-dom is the history of SomonaKopom, 
abridged from the Bali. he MWet-jd-sun-d6n is the 
history of a Rajah who becomes an ascetic of the 
forest, being struck with a fit of devotion at the 
sight of a withered mango-tree, as he was walking 
in his garden. MWorawéng is the history of an unfor- 
tunate Rajah, who fell in love with a lady, and was 
slain by an enchanted spear which guarded her, one 
night as he was escalading the window of his mis- 
tress. This is also a subject ot dramatic represen- 
tation. Mahé-sd¢ contains the wars of Mana-sor 
with Cuor-ny, and is the same as the Barma Maho- 
Sut’ha. Un-narat, narrates the story of AN’RUD HA, 
the grand-son of Krisuna. A/aldy relates the be- 
nefits of Matay, the being whose office is to relieve 
the torments of Naraka. Chaldwdn contains the 
history of a destructive alligator, who falls in love 
with a princess, whom he carries off to his recess in 
the ocean, and the account of her rescue. P’hum- 
hém is the history of another princess of whom an 
elephant was enamoured, and her rescue. Prathom 
is a mythological account of the origi of the universe, 
according to the principles of the Budd hist sect. 
Nok-khim is the mythological account of the celebra- 
ted Hamsa. Pokha-wad-di is the history of Bua- 
cavatt. P’ha-nén-sén-paja, contains the instructions 
of the sagacious ape P’ha-non. ‘The Mak-hal-p hon, 
the adventures of the son of a chief, who possessed a 
wonderful cow, résembling the Sanserit Kamad henu. 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 251 


Stim-phan-sit, a book of moral instructions. Prang- 
hong relates the adventures of the persons who 
went to the land of the Rakshasas in search of the 
fruit Prang thong, for which a certain princess had 
longed when pregnant, the obtaining of the fruit on 
condition that the child of which the princess was 
pregnant should be presented to the Rakshasa, the 
earrying off of the child by the Rakshasa, and her 
return to her parents when grown up. The Lih- 
sud-ké relates the friendship between the tyger and 
the bull, and their being afterwards metamorphosed 
into men by a certain Rishi. Paa-phal relates the 

adventures of Vart, the brother of Sucriva’. The 
Hoi Sang relates the adventures of the prince who 
was born 3 im achank shell, and remained in it till he 
arrived at maturity. The Sang-sin-chay is the account. 
of a hero who was born with a chank and an arrow 
in his hand, with which, and mounted on a lion, he 
accomplished many adventures among the Rakshasas 
and Girgasis, Yakshas or Vik, as they are termed by 
the Siamese. The /Voranit relates the adv entures of 
the twin brothers Woranur and Worane't. Nang- 
uthay relates the adventures of a Naga princess, who 
was carried off by a Rajah. Some of these fictions 
exhibit a wild and singular style of fabling, with 
which we are little acquainted, but the oreater part 


are obviously derived from the Saxscrit, through the 
Bali. 


The T°hay exhibits considerable variety of mea- 
sures, In composition, and frequently introduces seve~ 
ral of them in the same work, in the same manner as 
is frequently done m Brij’h, Pun yabi, and Sik’h com- 
positions. ‘The most frequent measure, however, 
among the 7”fay, as among the Ruk’héng and Barma, 
seems to be that denominated rap, which consists of 


/ 


252 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


four long syllables, but admits occasionally of one or 
more intercalary short ones: the Ja-ni which consists 
of five syllables, the Ché-bang of six, the Pat’*hamang 
of seven, the Jésunta of eight, are also frequently 


employed. 


The following specimen of 7”hay, is taken from 
the beginning of the Maka Chinok, a work in whic 
the greater part of these are introduced. 


DESCRIPTION OF MAIT HILA. 


Jang mi miung ning Lok’ha-ma k’hai 

Jay kwang trabing Wanit thang 1ai 

Chu Mit thin 14 Chai ria pai ma 

Thaw p’hu suwoi rat Bo mi satru 

Krop krong para Bibiin pracha 

Song nam maha Prat’het nana 

Chinok p’homt Jom ma thuk mitng 
Som det p’homi Chin, Cham, Pram, Law 
Krong se narat Ming-mén, ‘Tin-naw 
Pin ch nan ma Map mai nong nuung 
Bo mi an arai P’harang phang-ka 

Ké rat pracha Ma khat’hak mating 
T’haw krong para Kkék mon nong niting 
Pin chaw p’hen din Ma mitiing ka kai 
K’haw mak pla-t’hok Kala P’hrang-sét 

Bomi p’hai rok Chin Cham Pram-T’het 
Bibiin p’ho min Chong sakk Nalay 
Pinstik ka priam pri _ Jipan Chinho 

Maung Pra Narin Aw sin ma k’hai 

T’haw krong p’hen din Ni nun Jaa lay 


Soka sém pra cha 


«¢ There was a certain country, powerful and’ of great extent, termed 
Mithinla (Maithila). In this country « certain Rajah exercised the 
sovereign authority, named Mana Cuinok, (JANAKA), overshadowing 
his people like the spreading banian tree. For a long series of years, 
he ruled this country, while none was able to injure it, or subject it to 
foreign authority. Rice was abundant, and of a cheap price: no disease 
prevailed, and no discontent against the sovereign, and the inhabitants 
enjoyed every pleasure, as in the region of Pra-Narayen. The 
sovereign of the country diffused joy over the face of the land, among 


eo 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 253 


the natives, wliue merchants resorted thither in fleets of ships, 
constantly going and coming; and asthere was no disturbance in the 
jand, the inhabitants of every country frequented it; the Chin, 
C arese ) the Cham, (the Chinese Tartars) the Pram, (Brahméns) 
the Ming-Mén, (Mons of Pegu) the Tinnaw, (Barmas of Tendserim) 
all of them in innumerable multitudes: also the Franks of Europe 
came thither to traffic; the Khék, (Malays) the Kula, (Chulzas) the 
Phrangset, (French) the Pram-?hét, (Kelings or Hindus of Kalinga) 
the Chong-sakk and Na-Lay, (Caffree tribes, with stained skins and 
tattoed faces), the Jipun, (Japanese) and the Chinho, (Tonkinese) 


resorted thither with goods, to buy and sell, constantly in great 
multitudes.” / 


The Mana Cuinox of the Stamese, seems to be a 
popular account of Raja Janaxa, of Jaithila, 
derived from the Ramayan; but it is evident, if the 
text can be considered as correct, that the work has 
been either interpolated or modernized, from the 
mention of the Franks and the French. 


The followmeg specimens of Ruk’heng and Barma, 
will indicate the similarity of style and measure 
which prevails in all the monosyllabic languages. 


The specimen of the Ruk’héng is taken from the 
Nega-chaing-braing : 


THE BIRTH OF GAUTAMA. 


O-lé lé sangkhyé hna O tzeng lé bri sd 
Kaing b’ha ta saing Dewa nat-tzei’ch 
“Two’k kying tsing bowng -  Ahnei’ch mroung kr& 
Pri bri syowng-hina Tzaing bri chwa hma 
Para tz gd Sei’ch-tza 1é ba 

Lo rui towng thi Taratzu si _ 

Aldng sG mré’p Pri kha-ni-wé 

Syang: Theik-d’hat ga Pri gri sa bla 

Né hmiat pro ra Ka pila hnei’ch 
-Dowk thi da hnei’ch Khrei’ch pha Thowk té 
Khyaing sa sukha Méd6 boing bi 


Tzaing lé sa dé Siri maba 


954 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Maya waing t’hé 
Ari thaing d’hé 
Tstiwé lé ti 

O thaing dé tstwé bri 
Mré gri kreit krak 
Aup thak akowng 
Lat lat towng ¢ 

O thaing dé tsuwé Pha 
Tsé la waing hneik 
Paik towng bri tho 
Piang é nan hmon 
Ahlueng tu pro 
Angarang to hneik 
Mi tso maya 

Uyein sa go 

Lé la tan di 


U yéng thé doang 
Ko wat krang rué 
Pra jang ron mra 

Ni ma hla ni 
Gotami hna 

Ma pri rat léat 

Lé krang shéat ruwé 


’ Prang thak hnan moang 


Ahlueng tu pro 
Angarang to hneik 

Mi tso maya 

Thaing kha ngewéh khak 
Kéing hléak lék tsuwé 
Amré rat né | 

Thowng lu chwa go 


Phwa hléang le i. 


O 1é lat briso 


When one hundred thousand revolutions of the world were completed, 
each occupying four Sankhyas, then the devout worshipper obtained 
the object of earnest desire ; and the sublime Turk D’Hart, (Srpp’HaAR- 


THA) who is acquainted with the secrets of futurity, obtained supreme 


felicity, tranquillity devoid of care, and self absorption. After the pure 
Deva Nat’Ha had passed numerous ages in the possession of supreme 
felicity, meditating on the four laws of truth, when the period of the 
divine favour was nearly completed; in the excellent and populous 
region of Kapila, Sux-16 (Stpp’HOvANA) became his beloved father, 
and Szrr Mana Maya, his venerable mother, became pregnant of a 
perfect conception. When this conception took place, the strong 
earth was agitated upwards and downwards, trembling and shaking. 
After ten months pregnancy, supporting her swelling womb with her 
hand, his mother Maya was walking for recreation in a deep forest of 
Angarang trees, diffusing around an exquisite odour. Walking up and 
“down in a pleasant garden, reciting the divine names on her rosary, 
and radiating in brilliant beauty, and accompanied by two younger 
sisters of the same complexion, unable any longer to support the burden 
of Gorama, (Gautama) she leaned on the shoulders of her two 
younger sisters. Within a deep forest, in a grove of Angarang trees, 
which diffused around an exquisite odour; his mother Maya, firmly 
grasping the branches with her hands, and standing erect on her feet, 
brought forth the deity Gorama. ; 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 255 


Taerk-Duar or Tuix-Duart, ts the Barma mode 
of pronouncing Stp'HaTa, ‘as it is written, which is 
the Bali corruption of Sipn HAR-T HA. According 
to this analogy, Bupp’Ha is pronounced Bu'apa, 
and Supp He, the contraction of Stan sopawna, 
SuK-To, and sometimes Suc-po. 


The following specimen of Barma verse is taken 
from the Chatu-Damasara, as it is termed in Pak, 


which is denominated the Ko-Khan in Barme. 


DESCRIPTION 


Baranasi 

Pyi gyi pyi hu 
Kyo-niy lu-bé 
We-niy kosi 

Nago k’haing-gaing 
Hwin hwan di 
Baranasi 

Chong jt pyo wa 
Tho pyi ma hneik 
Dana-ma-mé 
Chawng lé sadéng 
Meng i tang kntin 
Chain gyé han li 
Khyiuk suin pyo byo 
Hna myo mé hlyéang 
Hmya hné chéng éwé 
Wan diéng p’hyong tan 
Makouk ydin di 

Ta khéin ha ga 
Hnei’ch kwa maswé 
Myew chwé khyé’ch so 
Hloup shya maneyng 


/ 


OF VARANASI. 
Ti di song ewé 

Hné Iéng makyan 
Kyéng dan mwé nyek 
Myek sék niba 

Peng ga néng thek 
Hoi’ch chek muishih 
Khan khi si nyin® 
P’*hyeang bé pyothu 
La ahwon bné 
Machar kyéang hme 
Leik hléo pyew sa 
Ché khu hneik chap 
Raja han diiéng 

Ta éng makhyo 

Kyé ju do gyowng 
Sépo pyéng gyéwin 
Myet 1é thuin sé 
Ku-san hlé deik 
Pyiuk la sokha 

Ko gwé ya hiien 
Hman chua chéng chei’ct 


Phyeit pé so la 


Néng ngan sa.do 


256 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Kyan k’heng myé chéng 
Chéng yé hu-sa 

Yé€ tu khyan p’hyeng 
Tong lé khyéng hima 
Pyowk keng ché khyéng 


Myo baché ya 
Mito ketu 

Hmat takhu phyiéng 
Esukari 

Kyo hlueng nyi hliép 


Bowng mi kéng ewé 
Mwoi shéang lan-owng 
Sin myan chong si 
Swé tawng nan puéng 
Cho yan hlueng ga 
Meik myiang ko yo 
Sivé khyi ko sa- 


B’héng cheit ta hmu 
Khat sin lu-do 
Up’hyu u nék 
Sowng teik tweik si 
Hwan teik pyi byi 
Hlyéan hlyéan di 


Baranast (Benares) was a beautiful and extensive region, inhabited 
by a race superior to every other, whether far or near, living fortunate 
and happy. Baranast was, in every respect, an admirable country, 
possessing every thing desirable; for in that kingdom, prevailed the 
practice of charitable donation, and the performance of ascetic duties, 
So generous was the heart of the Rajah, that he gave, in charitable 
donations, the whole of his.revenue. Devoid of every selfish desire, 
’ his mind was onefold, like the point of an arrow. Free from evil 
inclination, onefold and not double in his speech. Affectionate to all 
his relations, and beloved of them, remaining firm as a massy roof-beam, 
no one could prevent or shake his purpose; never deviating from 
veracity, undivided in heart, excellent in his whole conduct, and his 
heart devoid of angry passion. Under his sway existed no violence, 
restraining the desire of his own eyes. Such was his universal 
character. 


Performing no wicked action, and rendering all his people happy, 
he neglected none of the ten commandments in the practice of general 
benevolence. Like a bank of sand, which rises up into an island far 
at sea, and when the passing ships are wrecked, affording a sure and safe 
refuge to the mariner. Thus it was that he aided his subjects, who were 
sinking overwhelmed in misfortune ; and thus those who were shivering 
under the chilling cold, (of distress) were revived by approaching the 
genial flame of authority. Like the motion of a serpent, cautious in his 
conduct. His palace was splendid as a mountain of gold: in his pre- 
sence no enemy durst present himself. Srvakara Kasa Mirra Ke’tu, 
with his mind fixed on one object, YesuKarr far celebrated; such was 
his regal state, that the whole human race, whether white or black, 
_ in ten thousand regions, lived in joy and happiness under his sway. 


It is difficult to determine, from the Barma 
text, the true name of this sovereign of Benares ; 
but several names, in some degree similar, as 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 257 


Mirre'ya and Kretumat, occur in a Pauranic list of 
the Rajas of Benares, descended from Divopasa, 
which was pointed out to me by Mr. CoLrsrooxer, 
of whose notices I have frequently had occasion to 
avail myself. | 


XI. K’n6ume'n.—The K’héhmén language is used 
by a nation of that name, who reside on the Mé-kén, 
or river of Kam-bi-chat or Camboja. It has never 
been cultivated by Luropeans, and I have had no 
Opportunity of examining it. The Stamese, from 
whom I received my information, assured me that it 
was entirely different from either the Z”hay or the 
Juan, or language of Cochin China. The K’héhmén 
are reckoned an ancient and learned people; and 
were formerly,subdued by the 7°hay-jhay, or ancient 
Stamese race. The modern T°hay, or Siamese, still 
denominate the Bak character, Nangsu Khém, or the 
IChéhmén letter, from this nation. They are not, 
however, supposed to have existed as a polished na- 
tion.so early as the Law, but are believed to derive 
their origin from the warlike race of mountaineers 
named. Ikhé, the Gueos of the early Portugueze 
historians, who are still represented as_ practising 
their ancient customs, of eating human flesh, and 
painting and tattooing their bodies. Dr Barros, 
however, seems to represent the language of the 
K’héhmén as different trom that of Camboja, though 
the Stamese do not distinguish them. ‘ There are 
two kingdoms,” says he, “ adjacent to each other, 
and both of them maritime, which have each a pecu- 
liar language; the first is termed Como, and the 
second Cambga.” ( Decad. iii. lib. 2. ¢. 5.) 


XII. Law.—The Law language is used by the 
inland nation of that name, who are generally termed, 


V 


#258 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


after the Portugueze writers, Ldo, and in the plural, 
Laos, from their consisting of different races. Their 
language, Dre Barros observes, is peculiar, and the 
Siamese assert that it is different from the Z°hay. It 
has never been cultivated by Europeans, very few of 
whom, besides ALEXANDER De Ruopes, have ever 
visited the country. According to Kamprrr, 
(History of Japan, p. 26,) the Law nation do not 
differ much from the Scamese, either in language or 
writing, except that they are unable to pronounce 
the letters 7 and r: and this opinion I am mucli 
inclined to adopt, though I have had no favourable 
opportunity of investigating the subject. If, how- 
ever, I may be allowed to judge from the specimens 
of the Zaw language, which I have been able to pro- 
cure from Siamese and Barmas, it appears to bear 
the same relation to the 7°hay or Siamese, that the 
Rikhéng does to the Barma. With the T°hayphay 
it accords more fully than with the Z”hay proper; 
and, in adopting Pal terms, it adheres more accu- 
rately to the Pali orthography than either of them. 
The following short list of words and phrases wilh. 
eonvey some idea of the difference which. subsists 
between the 7"hay and the Law. As the T’hay-hay 
approaches the Ldw more nearly than the 7”hay, 
when that dialect uses peculiar terms, I have pre- 
ferred adducing them, for the sake of comparison. 
Where the Zdw and the J’hay agree in the radical, 
an apparent diversity is often produced by the con- 
version of the / and r into h or d. } 


Liw. Thay. 
call, héng, riukk, 
talk, iy kc phet, 
warm, hén, ron, 


very warm, fon ala, Fon uk, 


7 


- OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 259 


not know, 
Do you see? 
many, 

sea, 

waye, 

river, 
number, 


, 
matchlock, 
far off, 
handsome, 
weary, 
hated, 
sing, 
grieve, 
give, 
approach, 
market, 
shut, 
flesh, 
blood, 
fight, 
craft, 
stand, 
lamp, 
how is it done? 
how many? 
moon, 
woman, 
nian, 
country, 
house, 
who, 
what, 
go there, 
come here, 
fort, 
elder brother, 


Léw. 


bo-hu, 
chaw han 
meng, 
mésamat, 


peng, jia, 
Pap, 
sénat, 
kai, 
lau, 
it, 
cha, 
SO, 
hai, 
hin, 
hét, 


ka, 


kat, C 


tat, 
chin, 
hiit, 
hop, 
khilai, 
hiin, 
kat’hip, 


peng jang hidé, 


taw dai, 


p’ha chan, 


mé jing, 
pho-chay, 


_ wiyung, 


hiin, 
phai, 
basandé, 
pai-pan, 
ma-phé, 
tapp, 
ay, 


54 


T’ hay. 


mai ru, 
nai hén ra, 
mak, 
thalé, 
klin, 
-kiéng, 
rap, 
thong-kham, théng, 
takfia, 
tharfi, jia, 
sabut, 
pun, 

kiai, 
ngdim, 


jun, 

ta-kiang, 

ham jang ara, 
taw rai, 
pra-chan, 


pu-jing, 


’ phu-chay, 


muang, Fh 
ruin, 

krai, or kai, 

arai, G 
pai-nin, 

ma-ni, 

k’hai, 

pi-pach-ay, 


260 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Law. ; T’hay. 
elder sister, tei, pi-pu-jing, 
mother, tmé, me, 

I, ku, k’ha, 
I (honorific) kha, di-chan, 
we, how, : rau. 


It is from this nation that both Siamese and Bar- 
mas allege that they derive their religion, laws, and 
institutions. ‘It is in the country of Law that all the 
celebrated founders of the religion of Bupp’Ha are 
represented to have left their most remarkable 
vestiges. Ceylon boasts the sacred‘ traces of the left 
foot of Bupp #4 on the top of the mountain Amala- 
Sri-padi, or Adams Peak. Stam exhibits the traces 
of the right foot, on the top of the golden mountain 
Swa-na-bapato. Other traces of the sacred steps are 
sparingly scattered over Pegu, Ava, and Arakan; 
but it is among the Laos, that all the vestiges of the 
founders of this religion seem to be concentered, and 
whither devotees repair to worship at the traces of 
the sacred steps of Pra-Ku-ku-sin, Pra-Kén-na-kén, 
Pra-Put-tha-Kat-sop and Pra-Sa-mit-ta-ko-dom. 
These Siamese names of the four Bupp’Has seem to 
correspond to the Barma Kauxasan, GonaGom, 
Kasyapa, and Gorama, the Singhala, Kaxusa‘NDA, 
Kowacam, Kasyarpa, and Gaurama. There can 
be no doubt, however, from the order of the names, 
but that they are the four last’ Bupp’us in the list 
given by He/Macuanpra Acua’rya in the Abhid‘ha- 
na Chintdmeni, under the following Sanscrit appel- 
lations, from which all these Stamese, Barma, and 
Sing’hala names, seem to be only Bali corruptions. 
_ The Sanscrit names are Krukruch’hunda, Kan‘chana, 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 261 


Kasyapa, and Sédkyasinha. The language of Law is 
represented as abounding in books, especially transla- 
tions from the Balt; and if the antiquity of the 
nation can be depended on, they must be extremely 
interesting, from the situation of the country be- 
tween China and the other IJndo-Chinese nations. 
The Zdw nation consists, like the Siamese, of two 
different races of people, denominated in Siamese, 
Chéng-mai and Lan-chang, which are said by Kamp- 
FER, to be the names of their chief cities. The first 
of these are termed, by the Barmas, Yin, and the 
second, ZLain-sain. De Barros adds a third tribe, 
which he denominates Chan-cray. In their general 
appearance the Law resemble the JJén. 


XIII. Anam.—The Anam language is that of 
Cochin-China and Tonkin. It is represented by the 
catholic missionaries to be likewise generally used in 
Champa and Kau-bang ; but their assertions must 
be taken with some limitation when they add, Law, 
Cambéja, and Siam. The Anam language, as well as 
the nation, is often denominated the Juan, by the 
Malays and Siamese. It has always been more cul- 
tivated by the catholic missionaries, than any other 
of the Jndo-Chinese languages, though these fathers 
may, with some degree of propriety, affect the title 
of “multiplicis idiomatis propagatores.” So early as 
1651, the Propaganda Society published at Rome, the 
“ Dictionarium Annamiticum Lusitanum et Latinum,” 
compiled by the jesuit ALEXANDER DE RnuaopEs, 
after twelve years residence in Cochin-China and 
Tonkin, where he had studied under P. Francisco 
pE Pra, the first who acquired skill and facility in 
that language. In composing his dictionary, he had- 
also the advantage of employing the materials col- 

8S 3 


262 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


lected by P. Gaspar pe AmaraLand P, Antonio 
Barsosa, the first of whom had made some progress 
in preparing an Anam and Portugueze dictionary, 
and the second in compiling one in Portugueze and 
Anam. ‘This dictionary is printed wholly in the _ 
Latin character, as the author considered the Anam 
character as too. difficult to be useful. It is accom- 
panied by a short grammatical sketch of the Anam 
language, entitled “ Lingue Annamitice seu Tunchi- 
nénsis brevis Declaratio.” ‘though I have never met 
with a learned Cochin-Chinese, 1 have seen several 
persons who could speak the vulgar language by 
rote, and have paid sufficient attention to it to per- 
ceive, that the dictionary of Dr Ruopes is a work 
of very great merit, though certainly susceptible both 
of additions and emendations. A new edition of it, 
would be a work of great utility, if our relations with 
Cochin-China should ever become more intimate or 
important: a circumstance by no means unlikely, 
from the formidable aspect which that kingdom has 
lately assumed among the more easterly naticns. 
‘Fhe principal defect of the work is, its representing, 
very imperfectly, the 4am pronunciation; a defect 
unfortunately very difficult to be remedied, as the 
Anam language contains many sounds which corres- 
pond very little to those of any European language, 
and respecting which a grammarian might be temp- 
ted to say, with the devout missionary Dipacus 
CoLtavo, when treating of the pronunciation of a 
Japanese \etter, “ guando in aliquo vocabulo fuerit, 
(quod est valde frequens) orare debet discipulus, Deum, 
ut ei venas pronuntiationis aperiat.’—( Prolog. in arte 
Grammat. Japonic. ling. p. 4.) De Ruopes also 
published at Rome, in 1652, a catechism, for the use 
of his Anam converts, in dram and Latin. 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 263 


From the vicinity of the Chinese to the Anam na- 
tion, and the intimate connection that has at different 
periods subsisted between their countries, the Chinese 
character, as well as literature, has been introduced 
into both Tonkin and Cochin-China. Chinese literature 
is greatly affected by all who pretend to distinction 
in learning, in these countries; and in the language 
of Anam, the Chinese characters are denominated 
Chiw. But besides this, another species of character 
is in general use, and commonly employed in matters 
of business and private affairs, which is constructed 
on a principie entirely different; and though its 
letters are numerous, they bear no proportion to the 
Chinese signs, and, according to Dre Ruopes, they 
are unfftelligible to the Chinese and those who are 
unacquainted with the Anam language. ‘These cha- 
racters, in the Anam language, are termed Ném. 
What relation they bear to the Bai characters I have 
‘not been able to determine accurately, though I sus- 
pect they will be found to be connected with that, 
or the T’hay alphabet. It is perfectly certain, how- 
- ever, that they have no connection with the proper 
Chinese character. I have been informed, by an 
intelligent Chinese, who had resided some time in 
both Stam and Cochin-China, that the proper Anam 
character greatly resembles that of the Scamese. The 
missionary Borri says, that the Cochin-Chinese, in 
harangues, letters, memorials, petitions, ‘and such 
things as do not belong to printed books, for these, 
of necessity, must be in Chinese characters,” generally 
employ about three theusand characters, which they 
find sufficient to express their meaning. If the 
compound characters, and contractions of the Siamese, 
be included in their alphabet, they would nearly 
amount to this number. . 

S 4 


264 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


The Chinese character forms, in reality, an abstract, 


philosophical language, such as has long been the 
theme of speculation in Europe, though it is generally 
regarded as an absurd and impossible reverie. It 1s 
not indicative of sounds, but of real objects and 
ideas; and consequently it is read and understood 
by at least twenty different nations, who would 
scarcely understand a word of one another’s oral 
language, and would all use different words to express 
the same meaning. The only Huropean characters, 
analogous to the Chinese symbolical written lan- 
guage, are our numeral, algebraical; astronomical, 
and chemical signs, which are constructed’ on the 
same abstract principles. ‘The Chinese, however, 
sometimes contrive to make these singular characters 
perform a double office, and express sounds, as well 
as ideas; as when they write down Lnglhsh names, 
which another person can pronounce with great ac- 
curacy. As. far as I have been able to learn, how- 
ever, this can only be accomplished by persons who 
use the same spoken language. : 


The Anam language is simple, original, and mono- 
syllabic. -What relations it may possibly bear to 
some of the spoken monosyllabic languages of China, 
to the JJan-chew Tartar, to the Korean, Formosan, 
Likyu, or rather Riu-kiu languages, I cannot possibly 
pretend to determine; but it certainly has- very 
little affinity to the AZandarin or court language of 
China, which is properly termed Khunn; to the 
Kéng-ting, or language of Canton ; to the copious 
polysyllabic and inflected Japanese; or to any of 
the other Indo-Chinese languages. 


It is certainly possible to find several Anam voca- 
bles which coincide both in sound and signification 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 265 


with words in the Khunn or Mandarin-Chinese, and 
also in the Kéng-téng, as well as others, which 
closely resemble T°hay or Siamese vocables-; but 
nevertheless, all the essential parts of the 4xam lan- 
guage are original and unconnected with any of the 
other monosyllabic languages, of which I have any 
knowledge. Barrow, an authority of some weight, 
in his “Voyage to Cochin-China,” seems to consider 
the Anam as a derivative from the Chinese, “ because 
it is constructed on the same principle.” (p. 301.) 
“The spoken language,” he observes, “ has under- 
gone a very considerable change, which is the less 
surprising, as the inhabitants of the northern and 
southern provinces of China, are unintelligible to 
each other; but though it has been altered, it does 
not appear to have received any improvement, neither 
from additions of their own, nor from the introduc- 
tion of foreign words.” (p. 322.) The precise 
meaning of this sentence, I confess I do not under- 
stand. The mass of the Anam language, whether 
nouns, verbs, or significant particles, is totally dif- 
ferent from that spoken Chinese language with which 
he has compared it; and he himself admits, ‘“ That 
is is so much changed from the original, as to be 
nearly, if not wholly, unintelligible to a Chinese.” 
The Anam nation employ several sounds and letters . 
which are incapable of being pronounced by a 
Chinese, such as 6, d, andr. ‘The particles which 
form the cement, or construction of the language, 
-are also different; and in addition to all these, the 
Anam language has a peculiar character of its own, 
which is not understood by the Chinese. It is diffi- 
cult, after this, to conceive what similarity exists 
between the Chinese and dnam, unless that they are 
both monosyllabic languages, and that the signifi- 
cation of terms is regulated, in a great measure, by 


©°66 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


their accentuation. But though the same mono- 
syllables occur, and though they are also accented 
frequently in a similar manner, yet even in this case, 
the signification of these monosyllables 1s, for the 
most part, totally different. In the syntax or con- 
struction of the two languages, there 1s also a very 
great difference, for in almost all the instances in 
which the Barma language differs in construction 
from the Malayu, Thay, and Anam, the Chinese 
aerees with the Barma, and differs from the three 
others. Thus, when two substantives follow each 
other, in Chinese and Barma, the first is in the gen- 
itive or oblique case; whereas, in Malayu, Thay, 
and Anam, the second is in the oblique case. Some- 
times, too, the Chinese order of arrangement differs 
equally from them all. Thus, in Chinese, the adjec- 
tive generally precedes the substantive, whereas it 
follows it in MJalayu, Barma, Thay, and Anam. It 
must be observed, however, that when the term 
Chinese is applied to the spoken languages of China, 
it is used in a very wide signification, unless some 
particular provinee be specified. The Chinese collo- 
quial languages appear to be more numerous than the 
dndo-Chinese tongues, and equally unconnected with 
each other. Barrow himself declares, that scarcely. 
two provinces in China have the same oral language. 
(Travels in China, p. 244.) While the nature of the _ 
Chinese character is still so imperfectly understood, 
it is not surprizing that the investigation of the 
spoken languages of China has been totally neglected. 
In the course of some.enquiries that I made among 
the Chinese of Penang, 1 tound that four or five lan- 
guages were current among them, which were totally 
distinct frem each other, and the names of several 
others were mentioned. I was informed that the 
principal Chinese languages were ten in number; but 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 267 


I have found that considerable variety occurred in 
the enumeration of their names, and suspect that 
they are considerably more numerous, in reality. 
The following is one of the lists I received of these 
ten languages; but I have since been informed that 
it relates only to those which are spoken in the 
southern and western provinces. 


1. Kéng, 6. Lui, 
2. Way, 7. Limm, 
3. Nam, 8. Khunn, 
4, Chéw, 9. Siw, 
5. Séw, ~ 10. Kunng. 


Of these, as has been stated, the first is represented 
as the language of Canton, and the eighth as the 
Mandarin \anguage, or that which prevails in Pekin. 
To this list may be added the following : 


11. Hyong-san, 14, Pan-ngi, 
12. Sun-tukk, 15. Tong-khin, 
13, Nam-hdi, 16. Fo-khin, 


The last of these is denominated Chin-chew by the 
Chinese of Macao; but the language speken in 
Macao itself, is the Hyong-San. "This enumeration, 
however, is extremely imperfect; nor have I been 
able to determine which of them are to be accounted 
original languages, and which dialects. Neither, 
without particular investigation, is it possible to 
ascertain, whether the 4nam language may not be 
included in this enumeration, though I am rather 
inclined to the contrary opinion. 


The Anam language has neither genders, numbers, 
nor cases ; moods, tenses, nor conjugations ; all these 
are supplied by the use of particles and the juxta- 
position of words, as in the other monosyliabic lan- 
guages. The same word has often the signification 


268 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


of both a noun and a verb, and its particular use, in 
such a case, is to be determined by the context, 


and the collocation of words in the sentence: The 


principles ‘of collocation in sentences. are’ equally 
simple as in the other monosyllabic languages. The 
adjective generally follows the substantive, as in 


Malayu, Barma, and T’hay ; but when two substan-: 


tives come together, the last of them is in the oblique 
case, as in Afdlayu and T’hay, but contrary to the 
Barma order of arrangement. Thus, the phrase 
“the master of the house,” is, in the Anam language 
chia nya; but nya chia signifies the house of the 
master. In Malayu, these two phrases are rendered 
by tuan ruma, and ruma tuan ; and in T’hay, by chan 
run, rin chan; but the Barma follows a different 
order, and renders them by in-sak’héng, sakhéng-in, 
where iz signifies house, and sak’héng, master. ‘The 
substantive verb is often omitted, as being reckoned 
inherent in adjectives, especially when preceded by 
the demonstrative pronouns. ‘Thus, ni nay kaw, 
this mountain high, i. e. is high, the assertion being 
implied. The nominative precedes the verb, the 
preposition the word which it presides over, the ad- 
verbadheres tothe word which it modifies, the relative 
is wanting altogether, copulative conjunctions are 
generally omitted, and the peculiar modes of ex- 
pression in the Anam idiom are chiefly such as result 
from the manners and habits of the people. The 
moods and tenses of verbs are formed by significant 
particles as in the other monosyllabic languages. 
As the Anam nation are equally formal and ceremo- 
nious as the Chinese, in their phrases of urbanity, 
and equally accurate in marking, with a minute and 
tedious precision, the degrees of respect and honour 
due. to every person, inthe several relations of 
stranger, acquaintance, neighbour, relation, parent, 
magistrate, and all the several degrees of magistracy 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 269 


and office ; a great deal of the idiom of the language 
consists in the different modes of expressing the 
respective relations subsisting between the speaker 
and the person addressed: hence originates the 
number of personal pronouns, expressive of these 
relations, as well as numerous circumlocutory forms 
ef expression; the genius of both the Anam and the 
Chinese language requiring, that as often as possible, 
appellative nouns, and names of office, dignity, 
relationship, or consanguinity, should be substituted 
instead of the simple personal pronouns. ‘Thus, a 
husband addressing ‘his wife, and using the pronoun 
I, instead of saying tamu, ta; or gua, any of which 
has the signification of the simple pronoun J, ought 
to say anh, which signifies elder brother ; and his wife, . 
on the other hand, ought either to denominate her- 
self t62, handmaid, or éng, younger sister ; a woman, 
in like manner, addressing herself kindly to another, 
who is either younger in years, or inferior in rank, 
ought always to denominate herself elder sister; a 
husband addressing his wife, in polite terms, ought 
always to. term her younger sister; and, im general, 
speaking to a young woman, she should use the 
same expression, but an old woman he ought to term 
bau or aunt. A lover, addressing his mistress, terms 
her younger sister, while she, in return, terms him 
elder brother. A son, addressing his father, ought 
not even to term him cha, futher ; but anh, father's 
elder brother ; chu, father’s younger brother, or cau, 
mother’s brother: in a similar manner, addressing his’ 
mother, he ought not to term her. mé,; mother; but 
either cé, father’s sister, or di, mother’s sister, It is 
easy to perceive that this minute accuracy of phra- 
seology must have occasioned great trouble to the 
catholic missionaries in rendering portions of” scrip- 
ture into the Azam language; accordingly we find, 

: iJ 


o70 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


that they were extremely distressed about the pro- 
ptiety of the terms to be used, whenever Gop the 
Faruer, Jesus Curist, Tue Hoty Guost, or the 
Vircin Mary, were to be introduced as interlo- 
cutors, and dismally puzzled whether the Virein 
ought to denominate herself, 62, handmaid, or mé, 
mother, 11 addressing her son Jesus Curisr; as a 
very trivial change of phraseology, in a language so 
delicate in its shades and distinctions, might have 
given origin to the most dangerous heresy. 


The accents in the Avam tongue, are of such in- 
_ dispensable utility, that they have been very properly 
termed the soul of the language, while the primary 
monosyllables, varied by accent, have been made to 
represent its body. Conversaticn is a species of 
chaunt, or recitative, as in the Cainese dialects, and 
the other monosyllabic languages, which has, at 
first, a very ludicrous effect to an ear unaccustomed 
to it. The intonation or accent of the Anam, struck 
me as entirely similar to Chinese, though Boxart, the 
catholic missionary, to whom it was familiar, pro- 
nounces it softer and sweeter, more harmonious and . 
copious in both its tones and accents. He adds, 
that every word expresses a variety of significations, 
according to the diversity of accents with which it 
‘ is pronounced ; so that, to converse in it correctly, a 
person ought to understand the grounds of music. 
That he ought to have an ear of the most delicate 
sensibility is imdisputable; and as this can never 
prevail very equally in a numerous nation, this variety 
of accent gives rise to such diversity of dialect, that 
through the whole Azam region, every considerable 
village or district has, as it were, a different language, 
and are often obliged to have recourse to the written 
character, for communication with the districts im 
their vicinity. 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. o7% 


Borni affirms, that the sacred books of the Anam 
mation, are termed Sék King, while those relative to 
civil subjects are denominated Sék Chuw. He adds, 
- that the first treat of the creation of the world, the 
nature of mind, the different classes of intelligent 
beings, moral and metaphysical theology; but both 
these classes of books seem rather to refer to Chinese 
literature, than to that which is pecatliarly Anam ; 
for Sék signifies oaly book, Chiiw is the name applied 
to the Chinese character, and King is the name of the 
books first put into the hands of the students of 
Chinese literature. Numerous Tru-yen or Cheritras, 
however, are known to exist in the Aram language, 
and form the subject of their dramatic representa- 
tions, in which the 4nam nation are not inferior to 
the Chinese. : 


The ancient code of Tonkin laws, possessed great 
celebrity, and was highly venerated previous to the 
late conquest of that country by the Cochin-Chinese. 
It is represented, by the ‘Missionary Le Roy, as 
composed in the most elevated style of Chinese, and 
full of uncommoh modes of expression. He also 
mentions, that it was printed with an Anam transla- 
tion, composed by an ancient Lunkin Mandarin, 


The Anam style is sometimes highly bold and-figa- 
Tative, and attains a degree of animation which is 
not very common among the Jndo-Chinese nations of 
the continent. If the French version can be de- 
pended on, we need only refer, in proof of this, to 
the manifesto issued by the usurper QUANG-TRUNG, 
in 1790, to quiet the minds of his subjects, alarmed 
at the reports of the prowess of the French auxiliaries, 
who aided the first efforts of the present monarch 
fer the recovery of his throne. “ Be not so credulous 


979 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


as to listen to what they say of the Europeans. 
What superior ability should that race be possessed 
of? They have all the eyes of green serpents, and 
we ought only to regard them as floating corpses, 
cast on our shores by the seas of the north.” (Nou- 
welles des missions Orientales—p. 144.) 


The religion of the Anam nation is a modification 
of the Buddhist system, nearly resembling that 
which prevails in China. Many local and peculiar 
superstitions, however, are blended with it; such as 
the worship of the dog and tyger, to the first of which 


human’excrement, and to the second, human flesh | 


is offered. Traces of this worship are found among 
the mountaineers on the borders of Jndia, as well as 
in the proper Jndo-Chinese countries. Thus the tyger 
is worshipped by the Hajia tribe, in the vicinity of 
the Garrows or Garudas. 


The Quan-té, an ancient race, as the name signifies, 
who inhabit Kaubang or the mountaimous range which 
divides the dnam countries from China, regard them- 
selves as the original inhabitants of Zonkin and 
Cochin-China ; and consider the Anam as a Chinese 
colony. The Quan-to have a peculiar language, and 
write with a style, on the leaves of a plant, termed 
in Anam, jiwa. The J4oi and Mudng are also 
mountaineer tribes, who speak languages different 
from the dram, but it is hitherto unknown whether 
they are original races, or only branches of the 


Quan-to. 


The following comparative vocabulary of the 
Barma, T’hay, and Anam languages, with the Kong 
dialect of the Chinesc, will convey some idea of their 
mutual relations and differences.. A few Rukhéng 


/ 


4 


2s 


_ OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 973 


vayiations are also exhibited in the Barma column with 
the initial R. prefixed. 


Barma. Lalli! Gg TO Anam. Kong-Chinese: 

God pra yieng pra-chaw chia sunn, ?hien-chi 
heaven nip-ban siwan Chién Vhien 

the earth kam-ba pi-p’hop ‘dia thien-ha 
earth ‘myé R.mré-— din ‘dat ti 

air lé 1om pha-jy6 hang 

water yé R. ré nam nak, nuwok, — sdi 

thuy 

fire mi R.meing fai Jawa, héa f{66 

sun ‘5 né tawan nyit, mat-bloei thai-yong, ngit 
moon 14 — duin nguyit, mat- ngfit 

blang 

star kyiR. kri | daw saw, tinh tin-sing 

sky m6 sa bloei, mun-Vhien 
sea . peng-lé t-lé bé, bién, hai = hoé 

river Whyong R. klong su ) hé 

kh’ron 

animal _ tareich-chan sat thu chhdék-l6i 
bird bngék nok ching chhéok-chay 
fish nga pla - ka ngu 

plant apéng ton thtw ch’haw 

tree , apéng gyi ton-m4i ss sang Q st, sat 

leaf ayéwék bai la hyep 
hill towng phu-khaw nui san 

plain lé-bieng hung ‘déw, nu phéng 

stone kyiowk hin ‘da sytik, lié 
gold _ Swé Vhong | wang kumm 
silver ngwé -ngtn bak ngtnn ‘ 
brass kyé “ vhong-k’ham ~~ thaw | vhéng 

iron san lék -thiet, sit = __thit 

tin khé ta koa _ thiek syak 

rice ch’han _ ké-siin gaw, lia, koem may 

ege a khai tlueng ch’hénn 

day ne | win ngay yat 

night nya k’hin _‘dém man 
evening nya-né ham ban-hom. _ya 

morning manék chaw sang-nyay chew 


nonth la din thang -yué, nguit 


274 
year 


man 
man 
woman 
father 
mother 
husband 
wife 
son 
daughter 
bro- 
ther 
elder a 


elder 
younger 
younger 4 ter 
friend 

enemy 

head 

face 

eye 


Barma. > 
neit 


ju 


yowk-kya , 
mim-ma 
p’haé 

maé 

léng 

maya « 

$a, 

sa-mi 

ako 

nyi 

umma 
nyi-ma 
sang-€-gyien 
yan-su 
gowng 
hmiek-na 
hmiek-chei’ch 


nakhaung 
na 
pajat 


' Swa 


sha 

lék 

khye 

wan 

kyo 

ayé, sayé. R. 
aré, Saré 

ayo. R. aro 

asa 

swé 

no-yé 

cha 

sok 


ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


T’hay. Anam. Kong-Chineses. 
pi nien, nam, tué, nin 
—tudi 
khon nguwoi yun 
pachay ~ nam nan-yun 
paning naw nyu-yun, 
p’hé cha hi, fu : 
mé mé mu 
phawa chaw, pha law k’hung 
miya vw6, the law-p’ho 
lok pachay kon-blai chi 
lok paning kon-gai ngué 
p’hi-paciiay anh ake a. - 
nong pachay éng ti 
pi pajing chi amu . 
nong-paning  €ng reoél , 
kla nghia pung-yow © 
satrfi nghéieh, thu tzow-yun 
hua tha ‘dau. thow 
na mat, may mat mién 
ta nyan, mok, % 
_ mat is oo, 
tamik mii pi 
hu tai ngi 
pak. khau, mieng, 
lémieng pa ‘ 
fan rang "nga . 
lin luwoi li 
mu tay sow 
tin chén khutok 
p’hing, thong dea, baw thu 
lang kat ‘pui-how 
nang déa phi 
_ kidak kot, shwang-kot ka a, 
no thit héwtik 
litit mau tiet hit 
nam-ndm =, suwa nin . 
kin an kid { 
kin-ndm - wdng yom 


stand 
sit 
sleep 
strike 
kill 
red 
green 
yellow 
white 
black 


* one 


two 
three 
four 
five 

six 
seven 
eight 
nine 

ten 
hundred 
thousand 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 


Barma. 
mat-tat 
thaing 
it 

yeik 
sat-pi’ch 
ani 
acheing 
awa 
aphyu 
an¢k 

tit 

hnit 
song 

lé 

nga 
khyowk 
khuhnich 
shyit 

k6 

ta ché 

ta ra 

ta Uhawng 
kyewin now’p 


khewin-now’p-do rau 


méng 


maung,meng-do su 


dén 
den-do 
bédu, bélu 
baha 
bédéng 


aliing 


apowhs 


275 
Kong- Chinese. 


Thay. . Anan. 

jan ‘duéng khi 

nang Ngai | cho 

non ngu mi 

ti ‘dain, ‘danh wat 

k’ha jiet, sat ; sat 

déng ‘do, tham hung 

k’héow shanh | jok 

luiang hoa ka, vang wéng 

khaw tlang, bak pak 

dam tham, ak hikk 

ning mot yutt 

song hui ni 

s4m teng sam 

si bon si 

ha Jang ung 

= hok lak lok 

chét bai chhat 

pét tang pat 

kaw chin kow 

sip tap sap 

roi klang pik 

p’han kin chin 

Wha toi, tau, ta, kwa ngo, nga 
ching-toi, moi- nga-té 

toi 

mung bai,mai,ngiiwoi ni 

chung-bai, moi- ni-té 
bai 

min ndé Whi, tha 

man arai — chiing-n6 | Whi-té,Vha-té 

kai ai nako — 

ardi nao- méya 

anei nao (placed af- nake 


_ tera word) 


Vhang-phé as 
thang-mot i ade 
mak . ded, nyet té 


T 2 


#76 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Barma. T’hay. Anam. Kong-Chinese. 
few cheich-cha-gulé hit, nit bé, dé, nyo tuk, shaw 
any, some takhyo kai kai ko-ai yow! 
above — athék b6n tlen shyang 
under awe! tai, lang chuéng ha 
in avhé nay, oei, tlaw li, in 
without pyieng nok vo, chang-ko, ngoii wai 

ngoai 

to ko, go ké cho ni, 
from ka, ga té | boei {zong 
this di-hu ni nay téko 
that ho-hu nun ey, no koko 
there ho hma tino bén-no nuné 
here di hma tini bén-nay koné 
before shyé pa tluwok sin 

behind. nawk thi lang fau how 


XIV. Pary.—The Pali language among the Indo- 
Chinese nations, occupies the same place which Sans- 
crit holds among the Hindis, or Arabic among the 
followers of Istam. ‘Throughout the greater part of 
the maritime countries which lie between Jada and 
China, it is the language of religion, law, litera- 
ture, and science, and has had an extensive in- 
fluence in modifying the vernacular languages of 
these regions, The name of this language, though 
commonly pronounced Bali, is 10re generally writ- 
ten Pali; but both forms are occasionally used. As 

-the origin of the word is still very obscure, it is dif- 
ficult to determine which is the more correct ortho- 
graphy. If, however, we could venture to identify 
the term with the Béhlika Whasha, which, in the 
Saurrya Dr’rpana of Viswandtha, is enumerated as 
one of the languages proper to be used by certain 
characters, in dramatic works, the latter ought to be 
considered as the more correct. La LouBERz, on 
the authority of D’Hrrgexor, has stated (Tom. I. p. 
422) that the ancient Persic language was termed 
Pahalevi, (Pahlavi) and that the Persians do not 


~ 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 277 


distinguish in writing. between Pahali and Bahali. 
This conjecture would be confirmed by the identity 
of the terms Bali awl Badlika bhasha, were it to be 
established; for no donbt can be entertained that 
in Sanscrit geography, the epithet Bahlika is applied 
to a north<em Jndo-Persic. region, probably corre- 
sponding to Balkh Bamiyan. Among the Indo-Chi- 
nese notions, the Bali is frequently denominated 
Larka-basa, or the language of Lanka, and Magata, 
-or,/as It is often pronounced Mungata, a term which 
xseems to correspond with the Sanscrit Magad hi, 
§which,'in many of the Vyakaranas, is enumerated as 
-. ne of the dialects proper to be used by certain cha- 
‘racters introduced’ in Natakas, or Hind& dramas. Ac- 
cording to Kamprerr, the Bali in the Khom language, 
vand by the inhabitants of Peeu, was termed “ Mac- 
cata-pasa,” or Magadhi Whasha, as we may safely 
“venture to render it. P. Pautinus however applies 
- this: term: inaccurately to the square Bali character, - 
instead of the language (Mus. Borg. p. 1). 

This language, notwithstanding its extensive use 
among so many nations, and the degree of cultivation 
which it has received from the different tribes by 
whom it is employed, has hitherto attracted little at- 

- tention among Europeans. The indefatigable Kamp- 
- FER, in his Amenitates Evotice,” has very imperfectly 
exhibited the Bait alphabet. La Louvre had previ- ' 
ously published it more correctly, according to theform 
employed among the Siamese; his Balt alphabet is re- 
- peated in the French Encyclopedia, and CarPranivs, 
in his “ Alphabetum Barmanum,” has exhibited the sim- - 
ple letters, according to the square form, employed by 
the Bérmas. La Louperr, in his “ Historical Rela- 
tion of Siam,” has published “ The Life of Tueve- 
TAT, said to be translated from the Balf, with a 
fragment termed “ dn revs th of the Patimouc, 
3 


| 


278. ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


sia 
or Text of the Vinac.” P. Pauitinus aS. Bartuoto- 
MAEO, in his “ Museum Borgium,” has, in his usual 
petulant, inaccurate, and. desultoi-y manner,’ exhi- 
bited some. confused notices concering the Bidagat, 
the Padi-mauka, the Kammuzta, and a « Compendium 
of the Barma Laws,” composed in the Paté language. 
Dr. F. Bucuanan, inhis “ Essay on the Religion and 
Literature of the Barmas,” (Asiat. Research.) ok yi.) 
has published a translation of the “ Kammua,”:e:<e- 
cuted from the Lai version of VincEnTIo SANGER. 
m.ANO, Which differs considerably from the notices con- 
cerning that work published by P. Paviinus, accoird- 
ing to whom, in 1776, an Jtalan translation of it was 
made in Pegu, at the instance of cardinal Borera. 
Whether any of these versions have been made directly 
from the Pali, or only through the medium ofa Barma 
or Siamese version, is, at least, very dubious ; put the 
enumeration may sutfice to show how far the atten- 
tion of Kuropeans has been turned tothis language. 
It would appear, that the learned La Crozx, in his 
epistolary correspondence, has also treated con¢ern- 
ing the relations and affinities of the Pali, but Ihave 
had no opportunity of consulting the collection of 
his letters. P. Pauxrnus, in his coarse, acrimoni- 
ous, and offensive way has also obtruded on the pub- 
lic, some conjectures concerning it, but the publica- 
tion of his ‘“ Vyacarana, seu locupletissima Sam- 
scrdamicae linguae Institutio,’ Romae 1804, has, 
given a death-blow to his vaunted pretensions ‘to 
profound oriental learning; and shown, as was pre- 
viously suspected, that he was incapable of accu- 
_ rately distinguishing Sanscri¢tfrom the vernacular lan- 
guages of India.”* 


* The philological merits or demerits of P. Pautinus form no part of 
the proper subject of this essay; he is only mentioned here for tbe pur- 
pose of disclaiming his critical authority, when placed, as it has frequently 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 279 


The Bali alphabet seems, in its origin, to be a de= 
rivative from the Deva-nagari, though it has not 
only acquired considerable difference -of form, but 
has also been modified to a certain degree, in the 
power of the letters, by the monosyllabic pronun- 
ciation of the Jndo-Chinese nations. It has dropped, in 


, 


been, by) European writers, in competition with such authorities in 
Hindi literature, as Sir W. Jones, or Mr. Coresrooxer. In his 
Museum Borgianum he has mistaken a specimen of Alalayu for Ben- 
galt; but this is nothing to what occurs in his Sanscrit Grammar. The 
same blunder had been made before him, by the Editors of the polyglott 
** Oratis Dominica ;” but the following are his own, A’ numerous class 
of Sanscrit nouns form the fifth casein ar; in Tamil and Malaydlam, 
however, a case of similar import terminates in an; and,this case, which 
belongs to these vernacular languages, but neverto Sanscrit, has P. Pav- 
LINUS uniformly substituted, in his Samscrit Grammar, in the place of 
the regular Sanscrit flection in ar. ‘This substitution of the letter J for ¢ 
is not confined to those instances only, in which the analogous flections 
of a vernacular language may be supposed to have led to the error; it 
occurs in numerous instances, in which the Sanscrit and popular dia- 
Jects coincide in using the letter ¢, and which must therefore be consi- 
dered as the blunders of absolute ignorance. ‘Thus, in the nameg/ef the 
tenses of the Sanscrit verb, he gives lal for lat, lol for lot, lil for id, and 
dul for lad. A blunder similar to that which occurs in the fifth case ‘of 
nouns, runs through a variety of the flections of the Sanscrit verb. 
Thus, he gives abhaval for ab’havat, bhavadal for Bhavatat, bhavel for 
Whavut, bhuyal for Whuyat, abhul for ab’hut, abhaviszyal for ab’havi- 
shyat : but the whole work swarms with similar errors. What should we 
think of a Latin grammarian who should falsify the ablative case in nouns, 
and misrepresent the third person singular in verbs? Yet this is nothing 
more than what has been done by the redoubted P. Pautinus, whom 
the learned SytvestRE DE Sacy terms ‘‘ un des ecrivains les plus 
tranchans et les plus dedaigneux ;” and he has not only erred in the par- 
ticular instances which he has adduced in his Grammar, but he has also 
Jaid down rules to justify his errors, as, in his rules for the permutation 
of the letter / into ¢, d, dh, &c. All ‘his, other works, that have fallen 
into my hands, equally abound if error, arrogance and ignorance, 
Equally superficial, inaccurate, and virulent in his invective, a critic 
of his own stamp would be tempted to retort on him his own quotation 
from Ennivs. oan £0Y; 
Simia’quam similis turpissima bestia. yobis. 


T4 


Vs 


280 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


common use, some letters entirely, and accented others 
in a manner similar to the Udhata, Anudhata, and 
Swarita tones, in the system of accentuation used in 
chaunting Mantras, and in reciting the Vedas them- 
selves, Thus, it has dropped both the palatal and 
the celebral: sh of the Deva-nagari, as well as the 
double consonant ksh, though the two first are still 
retained in the more correct alphabets. Instead of 
pronouncing the first series of letters ka kha, ga 
gha, nga, it recites them ka kha ka gdha,nga pro- 
nouncing ka thrice; first, in ifs natural tone; se- 
_condly, softly accented in treble, as if with the tone 
ud hata; and thirdly, in a deep base tone, like the 
anidhata of the Samaveda Brahméns ; gdha or ga is 
only recited once and that slightly accented, while 
nga suffers no alteration. A similar alteration occurs 
in the second series, cha, and the fifth series, pa. 
The vowels are generally presented. in the same or- 
der as the Deva-nagari, but by a similar mode of 
accentuation, eighteen are sometimes employed. 
The peculiarities of this pronunciation are, however, 
more closely adhered to by the T’hay or Siamese, 
than by the Barma and Rukhéng nations, whose lan- 
guages are neither so powerfully accented, nor. so 
monosyllabic as the Z”hay. 


The form of the Balt character varies essentially 
among the different nations by whom it is used. 
The square Bali character, employed by the Barmas, 
differs much from that which is used among the Sva- 
mese. and approaches nearer the form of the Barma 
character. The Siamese Bali character is termed, by 
the Sianiese, Nangsu Khom, the Khém, or Khohmén 
character, having, according to their own tradition, 
derived it from that nation. ‘The square Barma cha- 
racter seems to coincide with the Bali character of 


OF THE. INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 981 


Lanka or Ceylon; though in that island, Bal? com- 
positions, are frequently written in the proper Sing’- 
hala. character, Of the character used in Zdw, 
Champa, and dnam, Lhave had no opportunity of 
judging. Carpanivs, in his “ Alphabetum Barma- 
num,” p..37, asserts, that La Louserr, in his “ His 
torical Relation of Siam,” has mistaken-the Barma 
and Léw characters for the Balt; and Sir W. Jones, 
in his 8th anniversary discourse, if I understand 
him, affirms the same thing, on the authority of a 
native of Arakan. The fact, however, is, that La 
Louzere’s alphabet, though imperfect, as the vowels 
are omitted, and the powers of several. letters in- 
accurately expressed, is the real Bali alphabet of 
the Siamese, and that which I have found in ‘use 
among the TYalapoins, both of the T’hay and the 
T’hay-jhay race, however it may differ from the 
Bali, in use among the Barma and Rukhéng nations. 
This character, however, when correctly written, is 
not round like the proper Barma character, but 
formed by a number of minute strokes, placed in an 
angular position, like the Sing’hala Pushpakshara, or 
flower-character. Indeed, on comparing the two 
characters, the square Barma-Bali character will be 
found to approach nearer the proper Barma character, 
than the Bali of Siam, 


The Bali is an ancient dialect of Sanscrit, which 
sometimes approaches very near the original. When 
allowance is made for the regular interchange of cef- 
tain letters, the elision of harsh consonants, and the 
contraction of similar syllables, all the vocables which 
occur in its ancient books, seem to be purely Sans- 
crit. In Cheritds and latter compositions, however, 
‘some words of the popular languages of the country 
sometimes insinuate themselves, in the same manner » 


680 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


as Jamul, Telinga, and Canara vocables occasionally 
occur, in the later Sanscrit compositions of the Dek- 
hin. The Bali, while it retains almost the whole ex- 
tent of Sanscrit flections, both in nouns and verbs, 
nevertheless employs this variety rather sparingly in 
composition, and affects the frequent introduction of 
the preterite participle, and the use of impersonal 
verbs. _ It also uses the cases of nouns in a more in- 
determinate manner than the Sanscrit, and often 
confounds the active, neuter, aud passive tenses of 
verbs. Like other derivative dialects, it occasionally 
uses Sanscrit nouns and particles in an oblique sense ; 
but notwithstanding all these circumstances, it ap- 

roaches much nearer the pure Sanscrif, than any 
other dialect, and exhibits a close affinity to the Pra- 
krit, and the Zend. ai 


These three dialects, the Prakrit, the Bali, and 
the Zend, are probably the most ancient derivatives 
from the Sanscrit.. The great mass of vocables in 
all the three, and even the forms of flection, both in 
verbs and nouns, are derived from the Sanscrit, ac= 
cording to regular laws of elision, contraction, and 

ermutation of letters. Sometimes, in pursuing these 
analogies, they nearly coincide, sometimes they dif- 
fer considerably, sometimes one, and sometimes ano- 
ther of them approaches nearest to the original Sans- 
crit. Their connection with this parent language was 

erceived, and pointed out by Sir W. Jones, and has 
also been been alluded to by P. Pauiinus, who de- 
tives his information, .concerning the Bali, from 
Carraxius and Manrecatius. The fate of these 
three languages is also, in some degree, similar. The 
Prakrit is the language which contains the greater 
part of the sacred books of the’ Jainas ; the Bait is 
equally revered among the followers of Bupp’Ha; 


@F THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, _ 883 


while the Zend, or sacred language of ancient Jran, 
has long enjoy ed a similat rank among the Parsis or 
worshippers of fire, and been the depository. of the 
sacred books of Zoroaster. It is perhaps, however, 
more accurate to consider all the three, rather as 
different dialects of the same derivative language, 
than as different languages; aud conformably to this 
idea, the Bali itself may be reckoned a dialect of 
Prékrit.. Theterm Prékrit, both in books, and in 
common use among the Biaihviéns, is employ ed with 
some degree of latitude. Soittétimes the term is con- 
fined to a particular dialect, employ ed by the Jainas, 
as the language of religion and science, and appro- 
priated to females, and hig as table characters of an 
inferior class, in. dramas. © Sometimes it includes 
all the’ Healeots derived immediately from the Sans- 
crit; whether denominated Prékrit, Magad’hi, Siu- 
rasént, Pais achi,.or Apabhrarsa ; and sometimes ‘it 
is even extended to the Désa-b’hdshas,‘or popular 
toneues of India, as Mahrasht or Mahratta, Canara, 
Telinga, Udia and Bengali. According to the ex- 
tended use of the term. Prakrit, it may certainly in- 
clude both Balz and Zend ; andl if more extensive 
research should justify the idea derived from an im- 
perfect investigation, I apprehend that the Bali may 
be identified w vith the Magadhi, and the Zend with 
the Stiraséni, of Sanscrit authors. 


These three dialects, the Prakrit, Bali, and Zend, 
have been regularly. cuhivated and fixed by compo- 
sition. The same laws of derivation are applicable 
to the formation of all the three; but yet there is 
often considerable diversity in the forms which par- 
ticular words assume, as appears from the follow- 
ing’ comparative specimen. 


284 ON 


man 
woman 
daughter 


wife 
father 


mother 


wind 
fire ~ 


horse 


hog 


tree 


village 
thé lingum 
. Mountain 


world 
forest 
he enters 


THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


Sanscrit. 
purushah 
stri 

putri , 


D’harya 


pita 


_ mata 


vayuh 
agnih 


as’wah 


stikarah 


sw, s’‘wanum suniu 


mahishah 
hastah 


suryah y 


ravih 


vyagrah 
vrukshah 


gramam 
lingam 
parvatah 
prithivi 
aranyam 


pravishati 


Prakrit. Balt. 
puriso , burutsa 
tri ithi 
pui butri 
bharia By. 
bhaja i phiriya 
pia 
pikré ‘ pita 
maa ; 
a i matta 
bau vayo 
aggih ak hi 
556 atsa t 
acha 
suar6 sukaro 
* sunak’ha 
mahis6 mahingsa 
hatté -hasti 
suré suriya 
rai } ravé 
bag’hé phayagho 
sie i rukha 
vuch’hah 
cad yy i khaman 
gait 
linkam lankan 
pabbau 
paiita bapate 
pahavi pattwé 
rannam aranja 
pavishai pawisi 


Zend. 
pedorosche 
strée 
pothré 


ho peéré 
perena } 


fedré 


maté 


vato 

atéré 
aspo' 
aspahé 
soubaré 
sunish. > © 
sepa t 
mesha 
zesté 
houeré 


reeoué - 


azra An 
vuzra } 
orothé 


gueoué 
henghAmé 
burezoeté 


peété 
heramn 
freescheté 


& 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS, 285 


Sanscrit. Prakrit. Bali. Zend. 
they will come S2amishwanti Agamihii akamisunti  aoont#ao 
he makes karoti karoi karoti kereté 

atth 
he is asti achi t hathi asté 
asai 
seven saptah satto sapta hapté 
heaven swargah saggu saged spérézé 


ln this specimen, the Prékrit words are selected 
from the Alanérama, Vritti of Buamana, and the 
Prakritalankeswarah of Virva’ Vin6v'HA; the Balt 
are taken at random from the Kumdra-Bap, Chitam- 
nan, and Wautamnén; and the Zend, from the voca- 
bularies of ANqueTin pu Perron, whose orthogra- 
phy, since { have uot been able to procure the ori- 
ginal Zend, has been preserved, however inaccurate, 
in preference to conjectural emendation; though I 
- am convinced that an orthography, more contorm- 


able to the origimal, would render the connection of 


Zend, with its cognate dialects, more apparent. 


Specimen of Bali from the Hatamnan. 

Sagee’ Lamécharupé giri-s‘ik’hara-gaté chantalikWhe vimdané dipé 
rat’hé-cha gamé taruvanagahané géhavat’hamhi k’héitté. | 

Bhumma ¢ hdyantu deva: jala-Vhala-visamé yakha-gandabba-naga 
tit’ hantam- -antikéy 4m munivara-vachanam sadavo mé sunantu. 

D’hammassa-vanakalé-ayum bhaddanta namétassa- B’hagavaté Arhatt6, 
s‘amima sambuddassa. | 

Y ¢santa-santachitta-tisarano-sarand4 éta-lokantaréva bhumm4-bhummé4- 
cha-déva guna- gana-guhana Phdyatd sabbakalam été 4yantu déva varakana~ 
kamaé mér u-rajé vasanto. 

Sanidsahétam munivaravachanam sétam maggam shana sabbési 
chakka-valési yakha déva-cha bramhano. 


Which may be thus restored into Sanscrit, without the 


radical change of a single word. 
Swarge’ kamécharipé giris‘ikharagaté chantarikshé vimnané dipé rashtré 
gTamé fay uvanagahané grihavatihi kshétré, 
Bhamau chéy antu déva jalast’hala-vishamé yaksha-gandharva-nigés 
ti’ hantam antiképam munivarachanam sad@’hayv® mé s‘rinantu. 
Dhermas‘ravanakal6yum b’hanyantam: namastasyaB’hagavaté Arhate- 
samyak sambudd’hasia, 


286 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE — 


Yésantah s‘nta-chitta trisarana s‘aran& ihalokottaréva b’humau ab’hu- 
maucha, déya gunaganagrahana d’hayantah servakalam : €té ayantu déva 
varakanakamaé mérurajé vasantah. 

Santéshahétum munivaravachanam s‘ré6tum agré samagram servéshu 
chakravaléshu yaksha dévscha bramhanah. ; 

The Devas frequent Swurga, Kamarupa, the mountain tops, and at- 
mosphere, in their cars, and on earth, they visit the Dwipas, the fields, 
cities, recesses of forests, habitations, and sacred places. In imaccessi- 
ble places, by land or water, the Yakshas, Gand-hervas and Nagas re- 
side, in the vincity of waters. T.isten to me, ye devotees, while I recite 
the words of the Munivaras : this is the time for hearing sacred things— 
(the devotees reply) Say on. (the speaker proceeds) Reverence to, BHA- 
GAVATA ARuHATA, the all-comprehending, Those who hear, shall he- 
come pure of mind, and Trisara’ shall protect them both in this and 
other worlds: the Devas, earthly and unearthly, possessed of various 
qualities, constantly present themselves to their thoughts, and the, Devas 
who reside on AMeru, the chief of mountains, of pure gold, frequent 
them. In the full and perfect hearing of the words of the Munivaras, 
the Yakshas, Devas, and Bramhanas delight above all else. 


This. specimen may serve, in some degree, to ilus- 
trate the relation which the Bali bears to its parent 
Sanscrit. ‘Yhe passage is chosen at random, but con- 
siderable portions of Bal? have been subjected to the 
same process with a similar result; and I am satis- 
fied that it applies equally to Prakrit and Zend, 
though words of an origin foreign to Sanserit, may 
occasionally be expected to occur in all the three 
dialects. 


After having thus briefly stated the origin of both 
the Bali language and written character, I should, 
in conformity to the plan which has been followed 
in this rapid sketch, proceed to the illustration of its 
characteristic structure and grammatical peculiarities, 
with the relations which it bears to Prdakrit and 
Zend; but these, with a view of Ba/i literature, and 
its influence, as a learned language, on the vernacu- 

Jar Indo-Chinese tongues, I reserve for the subject of 
‘another essay. The politeness and literary zeal of 
Mr. Cotreprooxe, have furnished me with ample fa- 
cilities of investigating the Prdkvit, in all its variety 


ts os ee Se) ee eel ter i 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 987 


of dialects; but the paucity of my original materials, 
in Bali, and the total want of Mss. in Zend, have 
hitherto prevented me from giving the subject so full 
an investigation as its importance requires; but if 
the necessary materials can be procured, I hope to 
be soon able to submit to the Asiatic Society the re- 
sult of my enquiries. Of the Bali language, diffe- 
rent Késhas and Vydkaranas are known to exist ; and 
several of them are to be procured in Ceylon, as the 
Bali ‘Subdamala, Balavatara, Nigandu and Nigandu 
Sana. Of the Zend, various alphabets and vocabu- 
laries, as well as original compositions, are extant; 
but no set of grammatical forms, with which we are 
acquainted. The learned TycuseEw, in his disserta- 
tion “ De Cuneatis Inscriptionibus Persepolitanis,” 
1798, recommends, earnestly, to the Asiatic Society, 
to form grammars and lexicons of the Zend and Pah- 
lavi; and this must ‘undoubtedly be performed if 
ever the subject be accurately investigated ; for as 
yet we are imperfectly acquainted even with the true 
arrangement of the Zend alphabet, though it is pro- 
bably the origin of the ancient Kw/ic character, if 
not the actual Himyaric character itself. I have at 
present little doubt that the character of the ancient 
Zend, or as it is termed, according to ANQUETIL DU 
Perron’s orthography, Azieanté, is derived from the 
Déva-nagari; for that author himself admits that the 
vowels coincide with the Guzeratti, and hints that in 
some alphabets the consonants also have a similar 
arrangement. Numerous circumstances likewise lead 
us to conjecture, that if ever the Persepolitan inscrip- 
tions in the Arrow character are decyphered, it will 
be on the principles of this alphabet. Nuizsuvr has 
stated, from actual observation, that the characters 
of these inscriptions are certainly written from left to 
right, like the Deva-nagari, and the alphabets de- 
tived from it. If this authority can be depended on, 
it completely sets aside every attempt to explain 


258 ON THE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE 


them by any alphabet written from the right hand to 
the left. A subject, however, like the Arrow cha- 
racter, concerning which there are almost’as many 
Opinions, as authors who have engaged in the dis- 
cussion, can never be illustrated by mere conjec- 
tures, however ingenious or plausible.* 


* In revising the sheets of this essay, I perceive that several omissions 
have occurred from the number and nature of the various materials em- 
ployed, and the difficulty of classing them in the proper order-of ar- 
rangement. ‘The following additions are therefore subjoined. 


Te o the notices concerning }/alay compositions, the following may bé - 


added. 
1. Asal agama Islam, or the 
principles of the Zslam faith. 


29. Cheritra Raja Dewa Ahmud. > 
3 
2. Idlal agéma Islam, explana- 3 
3 
3 


0. Cheritra Kobat Leila Indara. 
1, Humsah penchuri. 

2. Hikaiat segala Sésuhiinan. 

3. Hikaiat Misa Tamon panji 


tion of the Ismalic worship. 
$. Idlakel fikeh, explanation of 


dng law of Islam. Wila Kastima. 
4. Makota segala Raja. 34. Hikaiat Misa Gomitar. 
5. Pasiru’l Koran. 35. Hikaiat Jarau Kolina. 
-6. Hafid Imam, ul Mumenin. cag Hikaiat Chahaju Langarel. 
7. Hikaiat Miaraj Nabi Ma- . Silsility?) Salatin, or, Penurv- 
hummed. nan segala Raja. F 
$. Hikaiat Nabi Mahummed. 38. Hikaiat Ambon. 
9. Hikaiat Nabi Musa. 39. Hikaiat Achi. 
10. Hikaiat Nabi Yusuf. 40. Hikaiat Bayan. 
¥1. Hikaiat deripada kajadiaiin 4\, Hikaiat Baktiyan, 
Mahummed. 42. Hikaiat Tana Hitum. 
12. Hakam Islam. 43. Hikaiat Jowhar Manikam. 
13. Hiikam Khaj. 44, Hikaiat Datu perjanga. ¢ 
14. Hakam Kanun. 45. Hikaiat Dewa Raja. 
~ 15. Elmu Fikeh. 46. Hikaiat Raja Bosman daz 
16. Elmu Falak. Lokman. 
17. Kitabu’l Faraid. 47, Hikaiat Raja Tambik baja. 
18. Kitab ul Allah. ~~ 48. Hikaiat Raja Suliman. 
19. Sijihu’l Huseinu’l Kashefi. 49. Hikaiat Rajah ul Ajam o 
20. Samar adainu’] Islam. Azbah. 
, 21, Mirat al Muiminin. 50. Hikaiat Raja Kirripun. 
22. Mirifat ul Islam, or Punga- = 51. Hikaiat Raja Kambdyu. 
nal.agama Islam. : 52. Hikaiat Raja Nila Date 
. 93. Perméta marifat Allah, Kawaja. 
24, Reazu’| lehafi. ~ 53. Hikaiat Runga Rati. 
25. Ruein parungan. 54. Hikaiat Isma Jatim. 
26. Nur Mahummed. 55. Hikaiat Abdullah ibn ul 
27. Cheritra deripada Suliman, - Omar. 


28. Cheritra derinada al Omar. 


OF THE INDO-CHINESE NATIONS. 289 


‘En addition to the list of Barma compositions, the follewing names 
of twelve popular works may be mentioned : 


1. Wi bado, , 5. Nyawa, 9. Namosara Lénga, 
2, Wi béng, 6. Séng-gyé, 10. Yadana sui-gyaing, 
3. Padi muk, 7. Wi-miy, 11. Tong-fiché, 

4. Néwa, 8. Siho namakara, 12. Yédana Rasi. 


The following additional notices and corrections of names refer to 
the list of Barma compositions given under the article BARMA, ac- 
cording to the respective numbers. 

1. Jainda Mana Bikhu, an account of the female ascetic JAINDA 
MANA. 

2. Nunda Jaina, the history of a Deva, also named ANUNDA. 

6. Témi, the religious institutes of TEMTI. 

7. Némi, Another of the ten great religious books of the Budd’hists, 
which are recited in the following order: 1. Témi; 2. Némi; 

' 3. Janaka; : Sawan Nasyan; 5. Bhuridat ; 6. Maho sot’ha; 

7. Samata; 8. Wit’hora; 9. Chanda Gingma; 10. Wesundara. 
Besides tsps the two following works are of great authority. 
The Paréik-gyi, which is the Barma Hatamndan. 
Pat’ham, which is the book of their mythology, revealed by Mya 
CHEWA-PARA. 
8. Dherma pat’ha, a book on Justice. 
9. Namagara, a ritual of prayers. 
10. Logasara and Loganithi, Moral treatises. 
14. Paramikhan, account of Samataand T’hik D’hat. 
16. Bongkhan, the adventures of NEMI. 
iz Kado-khan, a réligious work on the expiation of crimes. 
26. To-twek-khan, the same work as the Rukhéng Nga-chang bréng. 
28. Anusasana, a small book for children, like the Tamul Atisudi 
and other compositions of Avyédr. 
30. Attagat-Lénga, the Bidagat. ' 
36. Hmat-chew-Bong, A System of morality. 


IV. 


An Account of the TRIGONOMETRICAL OPERATIONS 
in crossing the Pentnsuca of Inpra, and connecting 
Fort Sr. GEorGE with MANGALORE. 


BY CAPT. WILLIAM LAMBTON. 


Communicated by THE HonoraBLe WILLIAM PETRIE, 
Esq. Governor of Fort St. GrorGE. 


8 ee 
GENERAL ACCOUNT. 


IN the year 1801 I had the honor of communicat- 
ing to the Asiatic Society my intention of extending 
a geographical survey across the peninsula of India, 
with a view to ascertain certain positions on the Coro- 
mandel and Malabar coasts, and to fix the» latitudes 
and longitudes of all the principal places, in the in- 
terior country, within the extent of the operations 
for connecting the two seas. My labours commenced 
in the Carnatic, in 1803, in measuring a small are on 
the meridian and on its perpendicular, an account of 
which has been published in the 8th Vol. of the 
Asiatic Researches, The triangles, from which those 
arcs were deduced, constitute a part of the general 
survey under my superintendance, now extended from 
sea to sea, taking in upwards of two degrees of lati- 
tude. A series of principal triangles has also been 
carried down in a meridional direction, from which 
has been deduced an arc of three degrees and upwards 
in amplitude, giving the length of the degree, on the 


meridian, in lat. 11° 59’ 55", equal 60494 fathoms, | 


and that from a great number of observations of dif- 
ferent fixed stars. As I expect that the detailed par- 


- 


I me —_ re 


TRIGONOMETRICAL OPERATIONS, &c. 291 


ticulars of that are will appear before the public in 
anether place, it will be sufficient barely to mention 
it here, as being the scale from which the latitudes 
of places are computed.* 


A full account of this survey being intended for a 
separate publication at some future period, when 
more materials will be collected, I have chosen for 
the subject of the present paper, that part of it which 
I think will be the most interesting; viz. the trian- 
gular operations in connecting the two seas, and the 
method by. which the difference of longitude has 
been determined in my progress from east to west: 
and that it may be better adapted to the general 
reader, who, perhaps, may have ae time nor 1n- 
clination to enter into minute detail, I shall previ- 
ously state, ma concise form, the manner in which 
these extensive operations have been carried over the 
great mountains, forming the eastern and western 


* Tt may not be amiss to mention here, that some little irregularity 
had occurred at some of the stations of cbservation, occasioned no 
doubt by the plumb-line’s being drawn out of its vertical position ; but 
itis impossible to say at which of the stations this has happened, as at 
the three where the zenith distances were deemed the most unexcepti- 
onable, there is nothing, to appearance, which can be considered com- 
petent to produce the effect in question. One of these three is m the 
ceded districts, in latitude 14° and upwards. Another one is on the 
table land, near Bangalore, in lat. 18°, and the most southerly one is 
in the Coimbetoor country, in lat. 11°. The are, comprised between 
the stations in 11° and 13°, gives the measure of the degree 605350 
fathoms; and that, comprehended between 11° and.14°, gives only 
60461 fathoms ; so that there evidently has existed some cause, for 
deflecting the plumb- line, at one or both of these northern stations. 
I have, for the present, taken the mean result of the two cases, re- 
ducing them to the game latitude, 11° 59’ 55”, which is 60494 fa- 
thoms. This measure, used with all the recent measurements made in 
England, France, and at the polar circle, will give the mean ellipticity 
of the earth sh nearly, and therefore the polar, to the equatorial dia- 
meter, will be in the ratio of i to 1.003125 ney: 


U 2 


\¢ 


202 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


ghauts, and through the whole extent from Fort S¢. 
George to Mangalore, being a distance of three hun- 
dred and sixty two miles and upwards, on the parallel 
of the meau latitude between these two places. 


In the triangles of 1803, a great distance was deter- 
mined between Carangooly and Carnatighur, at which 
stations pole-star observations were made for deter- 
mining the difference of longitude of those two places, 
and it was then thought probable that others might 
be found in succession, nearly west from Carnatighur, 
so as to afford great distances for connecting the me- 
ridian lines; but it was afterwards discovered that 
Kylasghur was preferable, and it was accordingly 
chosen for continuing those distances to the west- 


ward, that between Carangooly and Carnatighur, as’ 


already determined in 1803, remaining the first. 


Kylasghur was laid down from the side Carnati- 
ghur and Hanandamulla, being given in the 39th tri- 
angle, and the side Hanandamulla and Poonauk of 
the 21st triangle, was the base for finding the dis- 
tance of Poonauk from Pilloor hill. From this last, 
and from the side Kylasghur and Hanandamulla, 
each as a base, the side Kylasghur and Pilloor hill has 
been obtained as a mean of the two results. From 
this, as a base, the series has been carried on to Yer- 
racondah and Kylasghur, depending on the measured 
line near St. Thomas's Mount; the particulars of 
which have already been given in the 8th Vol. of the 
Researches. 


The base near Bangalore (an account of which is 
given in Art. 2) is then had recourse to, for bringing 
out the same distance, and it will appear, in the ar- 
rangement of the triangles depending on that base, 


Tt ee RY on 


OPERATIONS IN ‘THE° PENINSULA. 293 


that all the errors are intended to be combined in 
the distance between Rymandroog and Yerracondah. 
From that the triangles are carried eastward, and the 
‘side Yerracondah- and Kylasghur again brought out, 
differing from the former two feet, which will show, 
by proportioning the said side to the length of the 
new base, that had the triangles been carried on, and 
that base computed therefrom, it would have ditfered 
from the measurement 3-5 inches. The distance, 
therefore, between Kylasghur and Yerracondah, is the 
second great distance for connecting the meridian 
lines. 


The third of these distances is that between Yer 
racondah and Savendroog, which is had from the base 
Savendroog and Nundydroog to the northward, and 
Savendroog Deorabetta to the southward, differing 11 
feet, the mean of which is made use of. 


The same two sides are used as bases to proceed to 
the westward: the stations to the northward are 
Devaroydroog, Bomanelly; and Mullaprnmabetia ; those 
to the southward are Bundhullydroog, Mysoor hill, 
and Mullapunnabetta ; and, from the mean of these, 
(the difference being 5 feet) the fourth great distance 
is had between Savendroog and Mullapunnabetta. 


Finding the three stations, comprehending the two 
last distances, fall very favourably with respect to 
each other, the positions of their meridians have been 
fixed, with more than ordinary care, in moving to the 
westward. But, as this will be more particularly 
treated of in giving an account of the perpendicu- 
lar arcs deduced therefrom, I shall proceed to state. 
the manner in which the triangles have been con- 
tinued across the great mountains that form the 
western ghauts. 


‘ Ws 


. 


294 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


After the observations were completed at Mulla- 
punnabetta i in Noy. 1804, the western monsoon being 
then over, and the fav quale season on the Malabar 
coast approaching, it became necessary that some 
previous knowledge ot the country should be had, 
as I found that my “intended direction would take me 


ghauts forming a curve convex to the eastward, and, 
in consequence, 1s at too great a distance to discover 
any object on the sea coast; for I had all along en- 
tertained a hope of finding two or three stations, on 
the tops of these high mountains, from which to 
intersect the.flag staves at Cannanore, Tellicherry, and 
Mangalore. For the purpose of selecting stations I 
had detached Lieut. Karer, one of my assistants, 
who after encountering many difficulties, succeeded 
in the choice of two, one on the top of Balr oyndroog, 
in the Bednore province, and the other on Koondhully, 
a mountain in the Koor g. The distance between 
them has been derived from the base, A/ullapunna- 
betta and Daesauneegooda ; as is also ‘the fifth great 
distance connecting the meridians of Mullapunnabetta 
and Balroyndroog.. These stations, however, being 
too remote from the sea, I decided on descending the 
ghauts, and on the distance between them as a base, 
a series of triangles was carried through to Mangalore, 


and thence down the coast to Mount Delli and 
Cannanore. 


It will no doubt be noticed, that the great extent 
from Bangalore to the sea coast required ‘that another 
base should have been measured to verify the truth 
of the triangular operations, and it was my intention 
that it should have been done, but circumstances and 
various avocations prevented it, till the season became 
so far advanced that ev ery other object would have 
been lost. I had to fix the meridian at Balroyndroog, 


“across the Bullum district, which is a part of the~ 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA, 295 


and to observe zenith distances at Paughur, the 
intended northern extremity of my meridian arc; 
and, by the time I arrived at the latter place, it was 
the end of April, and very shortly after that the mon- 
soon set in. 1 had, however, laid the foundation for 
a southern series of triangles, to be carried through 
the Koorg to Mount Delli, which was rendered prac- 
ticable by the assistance afforded me by the Koorg 

Rajah, to whose liberal aid I am indebted for the 
successful means I had in carrying the triangles over 
these stupendous mountains. Several beacons had 
been erected on commanding situations pointed out 
by me, previous to my descending the ghauts, some 
of which were distinctly seen from every part of the 
coast, and one of them (Taddiandamole) being visited 
as a Station, the season following, I was enabled 
thereby to intersect the flag staves at Cannanore and 
Lellicherry, and also a signal flag on my former sta- 
tion on Mount Delli. This branch of triangles was 
carried on in the beginning of 1806, and commenced 
from Mullapunnabetta and Mysoor hill, and thence to 
Bettatipoor,Soobramanee hill, Taddiandamole, Kundudda- 
kamuully, Mount Delli, and Baekul, From the distance 
between Zaddiandamole and Mount Delli, Cannanore, 
and Tellicherry, have been laiddown; and upon the dis- 
tance between Baehkul and Kunduddakamully, a branch 
of triangles has been carried up for finding the distance 
from Bullamully to Kunnoor hill, which was also deter- 
mined by the northern: series,and there is a difference 
of 3% feet. I have been more particular in giving 
an account of this southern series, because the ‘object 

was to do away any doubt that might exist, as to the 
accuracy of the northern one, from the want of a base 
on the Malabar coast; and I think,-So far as regards 
nautical purposes, no error, of any importance, can 
exist. It will, howev er, be necessary that a base 


U4 


296 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


line be measured near AMangolore, from which al} 
these distances, near the sea, should be derived anew, 
when a more minute survey of the coast is made. 


As the situation of the places on the Malabar 
coast, and their relative positions, with respect to the 
observatory at Madras, and other places on the’ coast 
of Coromandel, constitute a most important part of 
this survey, I have left nothing undone, in that re- 
spect, to give full and entire satisfaction. But the 
great accuracy required, in these low latitudes, in as- 
certaining the length of a degree of longitude, has 
called forth more than ordinary attention; and I 
have reason to hope, from the many favourable and 
concurring circumstances, that my endeavours have 
been rewarded with success. The three stations best 
situated for determining the length of an arc, per- 
pendicular to the meridian, are Yerracondah, Saven- 
droog, and Mullapunnabetta ; their respective distances 
from each other being nearly 67 miles; and lying in 
a direction very nearly east and west, the spheriodical 
corrections for the angles are trifling. All the other 
great stations have therefore been used for connecting 
the meridian lines, their latitudes and longitudes be- 
ing computed spherically by using the oblique ares, 
as obtained on the elliptical hypothesis, the perpen- 
dicular degrees having been found equal to 60748 
fathoms, and the meridional degree 60498 fathoms, 
in latitude 12° 55’ 10’, which is the latitude of Saven- 
droog, as had by referring to the latitude of Deda- 
goontah, the great station of observation, (Art. 8) for 
fixing the point of departure. 


The scale of 60748 fathoms, for the length of the 
degree perpendicular to the meridian, in lat. 12° 55 10%, 
is considerably different from what was formerly 
obtained from the observations made at Carangooly 


» OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSUBA. 297 


and Carnatighur, and reduced to the same latitude; 
but this is not to be wondered at, considering under 
what great disadvantages they were made, and the 
extreme accuracy required i in making them: and it 
may be further remarked, that Carnatighur is by no 
means an eligible station, on account of the great 
mass of mountains on the west, and the low sandy 
plain to the east, which comes to the foot of the 
mountain. Such an inequality of matter must donbt- 
less produce a great lateral attraction, and sensibly 
affect the instrument. The station on Balroyndroog, 
on the top of the western ghauts, has been laid aside 
on a similar account. 


The relative positions of Savendroog, Mullapunnabete 
ta, and Yerracondah, having been fixed with great accu- 
racy, the connection with the observator yat Y Madras is 
effected, by working back to Carangooly, by means of 
the oblique ares, (4 Art, 15) and then using the northing 
and easting, and computing spherically, ‘by converting 
the easting into an arcat right angles to the meridian of 
Carangooly, and passing through ‘the observatory ; and 
also using the co-latitude of the point of intersection of 
the said arc and meridian. From this computation, the 
latitude of the stone pedestal in the centre of the ob- 
seryatory is had equal 13° 48'7". ‘The position of the 
flag-statt at Mangalore, is deduced from the meridian 
of Balroyndroog, “by using the southing and westing, 
in a similar manner as at Car angooly, W with respect to 
the observatory. It is thence. found to be im lat. 

12° 51’ 38” N. and 24’ 50° W. from the meridian of 
Bale on wear By summing up the respective difie- 
rencés of longitude, we shall have 5° 23’ 23” for. the 
longitude of Mangalor e west from the Asser alah vy; to 
which add 2’ 29 , the easting of the chur¢h ste eple i in 


298 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


Fort St. George, we get 5° 27 45° for the difference 
of longitude sien “the steeple in ort St. George 
and the flag-staff at Mangalore. 


The meridians of Carangooly and Balroyndroog are 
also used for fixing the latitudes and longitudes of 
other places on the two coasts, as will be seen in the 
detaiied account (Art. 15); so that by having the 
positions of a few places accurately laid, the general 
form of the peninsula may be determined, and a foun- 
dation laid for carrymg on more minute surveys, both 
along the coasts, and in the interior. I have given 
here the mode of computing the positions of the most 
remarkable places on the coasts, and of the great 
stations connecting the meridian lines. But from 
these different meridians, the latitudes and longi- 
tudes of other places are fixed by using the eastings 
and westings, and the northing and southing from the 
great stations, and computing spherically; so that 
the whole together amount to near six hundred. I 
have subjoined to this paper an alphabetical list, 
which includes the most remarkable places within the 
extent of the survey; and I have also added a table, 
giving the perpendicular height of all the great sta- 
tions above the level of tlhe sea, and the ultimate 
comparisons, of the height of a station on the beach, 
near Mangalore, as hac by computing from this coast, 
and by measuring from the low water mark on the 
other, where there appears an error only of 8,5, feet. 
This table also contaius the terrestrial refractions. 


It will be unnecessary to say more here, there be- 
ing sufficient, by referring to the plan of the triangles, 
io convey a general idea, and the adjoiming detail 
wili furnish “all the stelle for a more critical eX~ 


GENERAL PLAN 


Or 


THE 


TRIANCLES. 


Hom 1-10-41, 8 


Madras 


1 


1°10 ~30", 7 


ValX Plate 4. 
o* 21} 27", 8 Observatory wi 


GURRUDDAN D¢ 


URREA BAHADER GHUR 
i 
‘> KARKUL 
A BALROYN | 


Daesauneegooda 5. 
pe 


WT eenlnad 


Bornanelly 


Va 


Rungaswany H & BP 


MANGALORE. 


KOOMLAR\ 


° 
reniacbtael 


\ $ 
\ 
BAEKUL 


© Veer Rajenderpet H. 


© Poodacherrum H. 


Mla great Statue 
HNAGMUNGALUM 
By 


o MaILcoTTaH H 


> 
4 
y 
iS 


SERIS APATAM P. 
\ peaLray ILLY 


oor H&S" 


m™ 
q 
: 
a 
£ 


| Meridian 
Meridian 


COIM BET O 


Kimbletarine A... 9 


SATTIMUNGALUM.....1- 
| Woorachnulla 


| Et ERODE 


NuUNDY D¢ 


a, Re 
é / \ 


Bodeenudla JS 


Patticondat—O—f2—— 
ac : _ 
(qq VENKETT XGHERRY 


NAGGERRY 


Pilloor Id & S* 


Nose 


QPaudre 5”! aes 


|p Allicoor, H & S? 


aS 


CARAMUNGLE 


© Ponnapferulla 


Meridian 


wt 


on 
VANTAN seal 


TRINOMALLY H. 
Comenelloor 


li HURROOR 


fd HS 
! 


| 
o/ ALLAMPARVA 


jo] CAVERYPOORUM 


Panianula 


° 
Oo R 


mete} OSANKERRY DE 
O BHAVANY P. 


ony ICHERRY 


i 
! 
5 
‘| 
i 


the 


RIE Us 


Meridian. 


fol LES 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 299 


amination of the subject. The work is now grown 
toa magnitude far exceeding what was first proposed, 
and will, I hope, be adopted, as a foundation fora 
more finished superstructure, in times to come. The 
task has been an interesting one, and by no means 
arduons. reed from restriction of every kind, and 
permitted to act under the most liberal conditions, I 
have been enabled to obviate every difficulty ; which 
otherwise must have embarrassed my exertions, and 
defeated the ultimate objects of my labours. 


“SECTION. I. 


Series of triangles taken up at Hanandamulla aud Pilloor Hill, and 
carried to the base near Bangalore. 


I. ANGLES. 


At Hanandamulla. 


Between ' And 
Kylasghur +-+--+-+-++Pilloor Hill «..++-98? 15’ 34.6 
"¢ 31.6 > $3”.6 
34.5 “ 
At Pilloor Hill. 
Kylasghur  +.-..+--.Hanandamulla -+-+42 59 9.25 
5.8 8 
8.95 
Patlicondah «-2+++50 13 25.7 96.32 
20.95: Gr aren 
Bodeemulla --++++50-36 20.75) .. ~ 
21.4 t 21.07 


SSE 


At Kylasghur, 


Referring flag, »».+.+-Patticondah, »--«-..53 2 34 } 


33.62 33.81 
Yerracoudali -- +--+ §9 17 57-10 | 

56. f 57.61 

59.66 


‘ 


300 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


At Kylasghur, continued. 


Between And 
Referring flag, «+++ »~Bodeemulla «--+++2° 15 44” 

44.25 
44 43”.9 
A2.25% ~ 
40 

Pilloor Hill +++++:33 9 56.5 
54 
53.25 
53.12 
aaa 0 
54.25 

Patticondah«-+++++53 2 33.81 

Yerracondah:++++-89 17 57.61 


54.15 


Patticondah -+---+++-Yerracondah --+++-36 15 23.80 


Referring flag -+++-+Paiticondah ++++--53 2 33.81 
Bodeemulla «+-+++ 2 15 42.9 


Patticondah ----+--+-+Bodeemulla -+++++50 46 50.91 


Referring flag --+----Bodeemulla «+++++ 2 15 42.9 
Pilloor Hill -++++-33 9 54.15 


Bodeemulla --+-+++-+-Pilloor Hill -+++++35 25 37.05 


Referring flag -++++-Pilloor Hill -+++++33 9 54.15 
Patticondah --+-+-- SP 2 33.60 


Pilloor Hill .-++.+-++Patticondah ----+-86 12 27.96 


Referring Lamp: - Pole-star’s W. elongation, 3 28 57 
: 52.4 
55-25 
53.5 


At Bodeemulla. 


Kylasghur -+-++++++Patticondah, --++++85 23 a : 40.2 
Pilloor Hill ---+--93 58 8.3 
5 spy BS 
7-15 > 6.45 
7.4 
4,25 


| At Patticondah. 


-Rymandroog ---+-- Yerracondah++++++56 22 19.75 t 20.37 
, Q. 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA, 301 


At Patticondah, continued. 


Between And 
Yerracondah-+++++++Kylasghur,++++++101°21' 487.45 _ 
49 .1 
Kylasghur++++++++++Bodeemulla +++» 43 49 34.8 


48".77 


34 .95 > 36.2 


———— 


At Yerracondah. 


Referring flag -+++++Rymandroog ++++ 35 51 24.85 


: 24.85 > 26.57 


Tirtapully Hill «+ 73 22 43 .25) 


Rymandroog «+++-+-+Patticondah +--+ 78 25 51.85 


- 


52.905 > 51.06 


Referring flag «+++«+Kylasghur> +++++»84 57 10. 


Re Patticondah -#++ 42 34 24.5 


= QA 4 


Savendroog ++++++++Nundydroog «+++ 37 46 58 .22 


$02 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


At Yerracondah, contimued. 


Between And 
Ry mandroog:+++++++Deorabetta ++++++ 52° 19' 15 
1 


ov 


care 


5: 
16. 
Referring flag -++--++Savendroog ++++--94 16 15. 


Ankissgherry «+++145 13 21. 
23 .5 
18 .5 
20. 
23 a 

Rymandroog ++++35 51 26.57 

Tirtapully Hill----73 22 45 .90 


Rymandroog ++-++-+Tirtapully Hill----37 S1 19.33 


Referring flag -+++-+Palticondah ------ 42 34 23.51 
Kylasghur ++++++34 57 12.48 


Patticondah »+++++++Kylasghur +++-++42 22 48 .OF 


Referring flag --++-+Tirtapully «+++-+ 73 22 45 .90 
Ankissgherry -+++143 13 21.35 


Tirtapully.-++++++++Ankissgherry -+++ 69 50 35 .45 


Rymandroog «++-+-+-Deorabetta -----+82 19 15.21 
Tirtapully Hill---+37 31 19.33 


—— 


Deorabetta -+++-++++Tirtapully Hill----44 47 55.88 


Referring flag ---++-Rymandroog +++-35 51 26.57 
Savendroog -+++++24 16 14.97 

Rymandroog +«-+---Savendroog «+++++ +58 24 48 .4 
Deorabetta +--+++--S82 19 15.25 


Savendroog -+-++-++-Deorabetta ++++++23 54 26.81 
Referring flag: + - -Pole-star’s W. elongation, 9 3 6.5 
3.85 
- 
3 


14.97 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 303 


At Yerraconduh, continued. 
Between And 


Referring flag - +++ Pole-star’s W. elongation: + 9° 3’ 5”.5 
We 
A. 
Bi: 
4,25 

At Rymandroog. 
Between And 
Yerracondah -++-+-+-Patticondah «-+.+-45°11' 59.15 


51 at ata 


Tixtapully Hill --++49 22 56.85 
30.05 


Nundydroog +-++121 27 28 


Yerracondah ---+-++Tirtapully Hill -- 49 2 
Nundydroog --+-121 2 


GW CO & 


Tirtapully Hill----+-Nundydroog +++» 72 4 35.47 


————E ee 


At Tir tapully Hill. 
Nundydroog- seeeee+Rymandroog «+++51 31 46.65 


44.03 


Deorabetta .-.+++++Yerracondah +++ *97 51 18.75 


Yerracondah --+++¢Ankissgherry «+++ 38 16 9.9 9.25 


Rymandroog --++-+-Yerracondah +++-93 5 56. 


Nundydroog-+-+++-+Donnairgottah ++++95 53 43. 46.94 
Mantapum Station - Sonata eeee3l 25 15.032 i615. 
17 .27 
Muntapum Centre - -Bonnairgottah + eoeeSl 25 7. #4 8.95 
9.95 


\ 


7 


804 | ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


At Tirtapully Hill, continued. 


Between And ' 
Savendroog ++++++++Allasoor Hill ++++36°33 e 7 t 30’.37 
Deorabetta -++++++> Savendroog +++++- 46 42 26.25 94.5 
Ianto < 
Deorabetta «+-+ee+. Yerracondah:+-+.-- 97 51 18.04 
Ankissgherry ++++++ Yerracondah -+--38 16 9.25 


Ankissgherry _++++++Deorabetta ++++++59 35 8.79 


—— 
At Nundydroog. 


Rymandroog +++++-Tirtapully Hill----56 23 42.75 
43 .75 


Savendroog -++++++ -Yerracondah ++-++89 55 29.25 


Savendroog +--+ +++ +Tirtapully Hill ---»71 26 37 if 


Savendroog ++++++++Devaroydroog ++++49 53 51 .42 
53.46 


| er 
At Bonnairgottah. 


S. end of the Base -»Muntapum Station .38 46 30.02) 5, 
32.285 3b15 


Muntapum Station --Tirtapully Hill--++51 7 53.25 f 
53.6 54.62 
Tirtapully Hill. ++++ »Muntapum Centre.51 5 56.65 


Muntapum Centre --Savendroog -+-+++70 52 25.06 i 93.91 
Savendroog »+++++++Allasoor Hill ++++75 50 27 a 


= _- 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 305 


At Bonnairgottah, continued. 
Between And 


Dodagoontah Station Savendroog +++ 83°20 14.75 


Wise 

16 

Savendroog -++++-+. Tirtapully Hill --121 58 22 
21. 


ee RG 


At the Muntapum Centre. 


Bonnairgottah ++++-- Tirtapully Hill,-- 97 28 55. 
54 
55 
90’. 
Savendroog «+++ 69 50 45 .¢ 
47 
Tirtapully Hill --++--Savendroog -++-167 19 40 


43. 


ae 


At the Muntapum Station. 


N. end of the Base, --S.end of the Base 56 56 40 .62 


S$. end of the Base, --Bonnairgottah ++. 35 3 50. 


Bonnairgottah ---+-+--Tirtapully Hill -- 97 26 51 


At the S. End of the Base. 


N. end of the Base --Muntapum Station 33 43 60. 
58. 

61. 

60. 

Dodagoontah Station 17 38 47. 

AS. 


AS .7 


47. 
Muntapum Station --Bonnairgottah +-106 9-36. 
39°. 

36. 


38. 


X 


“I ho Lon 


= 


; 16”.17 


' 22.17 


47.04 


306 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


At the N. End of the Base. 


Between And 
S. end of the Base--++Muntapum Station 89° 19’ 21”.5 


20.75 
Dodagoontah Station 67 41 24.5 


22.58 


+ 


At Deorabetta. 


Savendroog ++++++++ Tirtapully Hill -- 79 40 54 


52.9 


Bonnairgottah «+++ ++ Ankissgherry++-+ 98 54 18 
5 
5 
Savendroog -++++++: Bonnairgottah ++ 32 56 38 .25 
22 


Savendroog os i -Bonnairgottah + 32 56 37.17 
Tirtapully Hill -- 79 40 52.9 


i 


Bonnairgottah ------ Tirtapully Hill -- 46 44 15 .73 
Aukissgherry --+-+ 98 54 20 


Tirtapully Hill --.-++Ankissgherry -++- 52°10 04.27 


Tl. MeEAsuREMENT of the Base Line near Ban- 
galore. 


This base was executed by Lieut. Warren, of 
H. M: 33d Regt. then one of my assistants ; ‘and 
was intended as a datum for extendmg the triangles 
to the Malabar coast: and also as a base of verifica- 
tion to the triangular measurement brought from the 
base near Madras; and it appeared that, by continuing 
the computations the whole distance, and making 
this base one of the sides of the last triangle, the com- 
putation exceeded the measurement only 335 inches. 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 307 


No further account need therefore be given of the 
manner of performing this very important and deli- 
cate part of the work, than that in addition to the 
apparatus used in the former measurement near St. 
Thomas's Mount, there was a transit telescope, in all 
respects similar to that mentioned in the account of 
the trigonometrical survey of ngland for fixing 
objects in the alignement, and taking the elevations 
and depressions at the same time. The manner of 
using it was as follows : 


When the instrument was placed at a sufficient 
distance behind the commencement of an hypo- 
thenuse, so as to see distinctly the mark placed on: ~ 
the head of the drawing post, and the elevation or 
depression of the hypothenuse finally determined, 
the instrument being covered from the sun by a small 
cloth pandal, remained in that position, til four or 
sometimes five chains were measured. Previous to 
removing it, a small hooped picket was placed, by 
signal from the person at the transit, at a proper dis- 
tance behind the termination of the last chain. ~ In 
fixing the spot for this little picket, a common rod, 
with a sharp point was used, and the telescope of the 
transit depressed to the place on the ground intended 
to be marked. After the spot was fixed on, and the 
picket driven down, the instrument was removed, 
and placed in the alignement, with the plummet 
hanging over the centre of the little picket, and then. 
anew hypothenuse was laid out, or the former:one 
continued. 


When the hypothenuse was terminated, a register 
picket was driven into the ground, opposite to the 
arrow of the chain, and in such a manner, that when 
the brass head was fixed thereon, the slide might 
Moe 


“ 
{ 


308 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


be parallel to the chain, and very near it. A piece of 
wood was contrived to be placed upon the brass head, 
and fixed by a screw, which pressed against the end 
of the slider, so that when that slider was moved by 
its own screw, the wood, thus attached, moved with 
it, in the direction of the alignement, as nearly as the 
eye could judge. On the top of this wood was placed 
a T, having also a motion in the same direction with 
the brass slider, to expedite the operation; and on 
‘the top of this T, a brass ruler, in length about six 
inches, was placed, having a sliding motion at right 
angles to the other; and in the middle of the pro- 
jecting end, was a mark from which the plummet 
was suspended, and by the two motions, at right 
angles to each other, the plumb line was easily brought 
to coincide with the arrow terminating the hypothe- 
neuse. A like operation was gone through with the 
commencement of the next hypothenuse, and the 
arrow brought to coincide with the same plumb line. 
Here the distance of each arrow above or below the 
brass rule was noticed as in the former measurement. 


If, after the removal of the transit, the same hypo- 
thenuse was continued, the register picket, at the end 
of the chain, was lett standing; and when the instru- 
ment was brought into the alignement with the 
plummet over the mark, nothing was required but to 
place the telescope at the former elevation or depres- 

sion, and move the cross vane which is applied to 
the heads of the pickets and stands, till the appro- 
priate mark coincided with the horizontal wire in 
the focus of the eye glass. 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 209 


ExPERIMENTS, made for comparing the CHAINS, previous to 
the MEASUREMENT. 


Month. Thermometers. 
Comparisons. 


Jean of 5 


Thermome- 


ters. 


1804. 


1 


| 


Divisions. 
§ The old chain exceed- 


May a 72.6 2 ed the new one by 17.5 
A. M. At eT © aie oie eich ea atins 16.00 
73.8 Joreees bcec cece secces 15.75. 
73.6 [een eeecccenccscesveee 16.00 
73.0 |e eres © Ge veveye eels exe ehaye 15.5 
78D | ole vmigst iia tara qos means 14.75° 
75 |< 002 0ne ge sls ome we “09 14:75 
75.6 SS eceeceresiveee 15.00 
77-2 |erees aiv'g8 te chat oho key Spel abee 14.00 
Mean | 74.3 | cece teen ee neces Mean 15.47 


Experiments, made for comparing the Cuains,; after the 
conclusion of the MEASUREMENT.» 


A 
« any o 
Month. Thermometers. “% & Hm +4 
= 3 
-~= Comparions. 
ey So¢ ee O07 
1804. ] 2 3: 4 9 IS 2 Zacy 


: 
| 


Cavs ‘i Divisions. 
« i <ceed- 
July 12.]78 |78.5)79 |78 | 80 | 73.7 1 ae hie 18.25 
A.M. 80. 180,.1 70%.) 80° 180 1.79.8 | sakes cies s sater she 15.00 
S1 180 180 177 | 80. | 79.6 Je seseescsersceeqceee 17.5 
SO 179 180 180 |78 | 79.4 Jeeee cece eee eeccveeee 18.00 
SI 80° {80 |SO |79 80 cecscccseccescacseee 18.00 
S81 |S81 |79.5]81 | 80.5} SO.6 [rece ee ee ceeeveeeeees 18.25 
81.5] 81.5] 80. {SL [S82 | SLD fesereeeeeeceeseeeees 18.00 
S2 P81 180 [81.5] 81.5] S12 Joe ee cence ce cccescce ne 175 
§2 |8l {79.5} 82 | 82 SLB fee e cece cece eee ee ee ee 97.95 
82 181 180 [82 TS1. | Sid [veencececccvseee 2 opie eR OF 


310 


ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


Tuble, containing the Particulars of the Measurement. 


0, of the Hy 


pothenise. 


| N 


OH OAD OS 09 tO  * 


Length of eaetr 
in feet. 


0 
0 
0 
1 
0 
0 
0 
1 
0 
0 57 
1 
0 
0 
0 
1 
1 
l 
0 
0 
0 
] 


Angles of 


re| 

i=] 
Qn 
y 


dg he 
st¢ 
56 
5S S155 
V5 
43.5 
16.5 
15 
15 
98.5 
15 
3 42 
$0 
81.5 
1.15 
2 30 
6 34.5 
49.5 
35 
10 


3 
— 


Commenced the 26th May, 1804. 


A eae Commence- Fa 
25°! Perpendicular. ment from |. © 
3 S & the last. a : 
z = Above} Below gE 
Pe =| Ascents. |Descents.| jycies | inches “= 
feet feet feet 
-00648 2.7954 |26. 6 94.8 
-00012 |} 0.3985 52°C 6; 
1.0092 2.6684: 5. 9 |84.9 
-03636 4.6707 7. 5 |82.1 
'-09080 8.5224 3. 5 \83.4 
-00354 1.4595 5. 8 |96.6 
09675 3.4754 6. 9 |81.9 
-05208 9.1337 | 6. 9 81.8 
-07188 6.5663 4. 7180.2 
|-02682 4.1428 3. 4188.5 
-11096 13.3220 6. 9 |82 
05151 5.5585 6. 4 |86.7 
-01990 2.8215 8. 9 |74 
00402 | 2.1860 19. 5 |83.4 
02132 5.0658 6. 9 |88.1 
11564 12.7257 15. 0 |82.7 
-19026 15.1086 | 6. 4 99.8 
21819 17.4740 5. 2195.8 
01758 2.6518 )|: he 2 79.7 
01450 3.8057 | ' 25. 2 184.4 
“00522 | 1.4471 4. 7 90.9 
-04228 4.1119} 3. 4 79.1 
eles eeel| wevees eee ee | 36.5 77.2 
00288 1.8631 |46 82.9 
-15840 |18.6697 15 80.5 
-05680 | 6.7425 6. 9 |87.8 
04549 | 6.7387 22. 1 79.2 
-00756 | 3.2630 2..9 79.7 
-01027 3.2033 5 80.7 
-11940 9.7729 10 80.2 
22320 14.9385 4 77.1 
sence e| woes celeb efi 4.’ GQ] sieed (7 FI 
-00070 0.8266 |43. 6 33.6 
-02208 | 5.94.57 Tone 85.2 
.00610 | 3.4979 10. 4 |75.6 
04200 | 7.6662 8.75 86.1 
10404 |13.6828 9 81.1 
-06130 } 7.8282 16. 1 78.2 
-08424 |14.2183 8.25 |81.4 
eooee | 4,9 74.3 
02312 3. 0416 1 87.1 
-07080 | 6.5168 3. 3 |80 
-33065 {18.1801 16 83.3 
-08313 | 7.0614 | 9. 9 |89.1 
02008] 2.8331 93.6 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. $11 


Table, containing the Particulars of the Measurement, 


continued. 

ee ed >. ‘ominence- a ee 

m g 3 af Angles of ax & Perpendicular. ciel Gow nD) 2 

eaic¥ Ses the last. ose| & 

Ss/ee eis a ess 
Dies L S Above 

£ & g E° § D® as =| Ascents. | Descents. oe oe = 2 = 

_ feet feet ! 
300] 0° 9 27” |.00114 6.75 |71.6 
200} 1 10 46.5 |.04239 8.5 |81 
500; 2 00 15 |.30587 : 8.8 |88.6 
400} 0 42 30 |.03056 4.94.50 |15. 2 89.9 
300} 0 11 47 |.00177 1.0283 |11. 9 82.1 
200; 0 16 30 |.00230| .9599 13. 9 80.8 
300} 2 8 27 |.20940 11.2067 1k. 7 89.1 
500; 1 1331.5 |.11437 |10.6929 10. 4.|90.8 
400! 0 51 43.5 |.05428| 6.0182 5. 74 
200, 0 32 31.5 |.00896 17. |88.9 
400} 1 38 9 1.16300 8. 3194.2 
300) 2 33 58.5 |.30087 0. 3 91.2 
200) 0 54 94 |.02504 5. 5 82.2 
200| 0 32 3. |.00868} 1.8645 23. & 71.8 
600] 1 58 15 |.354:90 120.6344. 12. 8 84.7 
600} 1 51 25.5 |.31514 {19.4439 | 8 6/9321 
700| 1-26 27 |.22134|17.6012 4, 5 /91.97 
500] O 38 16.5}|.03100| 5.5667 14 (89.8) <= 
$00} 0 6 14 |.00128 9. 2\79.6| = 
400! 0 27 27° |.01276 7G TP MRS 
500,113 4.5 11300 |. | 6. 2 73 E 
400} 1 42 4.5|.17630] *~’ 12 86.7] 2 
500) 2 26 30 |.45395{ © 21.3011| 8. 6 79.5| = 
Z200| 0 14 3  |.00167 0.8174 |13 7S 
200! 0 36 16.5}.01113} 2.1103 3. 8 oh ; 
300! 2 16 36 |.21381 |11.9174 25 94. 
200} 1 47 22 |.09752| 6.2453 2. 3 |84.3 
400} 1 11 43.5|.18208! 8.3450 ~|21. 2 72.4 
900} 0 41 11 1.06453 110.7815 4, 9 87.6 
300| 0 35 13 |.01573 11° |76.8 
200! 1 1 43 |.03222 0. 5 170.8 
300! 0 6 24 |.00053} 0.5585 2.75 77.6 
200| 2 23 45 |.17483| 8.3606 7. 5 |87 
400) 1 3 28.5|.06820] 7.3852 96. 5 87.8 
800} 0 32 13 |.03312 . 122, 1 |80.2 
700} 0 22 59 |.01568| 4.6799 14.37 70.7 
600] 0 47 22 |.05697} 8.2668 ll 74.6 
400} 0 59 35 |.06005 | 6.9325 11.55 33 
400] 1 3 20 |.06788| 7.3687 ws 79 
300} 0 10 00 [.00126) 0.8727 3. 6 {16.7 
Descent from the termination of the) _ , 
base to the ground wees ssee abe, it aed 
39800| | 6.63475| 307.7304 | 278.4189|514.32!389.2)83.1 


North above the South extremity of the base = 39.74 feet. 


$18: ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


At. the commencement the old chain ex- 
ceeded the new one 15.47 divisions of the 
micrometer — 0.00619 feet. Therefore 
398 x 100.00619 feet will be the mea- 


sure In terms of the new-chain - - 


At the conclusion the old chain exceeded 
the new one 17.9 divisions, and had-there- 
fore increased 2.43 divisions = 000097 
feet. Hence 3y8 x **? — 0.1930 
feet, is the correction for the wear, winch 
add» - : - - 4 \ L 

The sum of the deductions from col. 4th is 
6.63475 feet, which being increased in 
the ratio of 100 to 100 00619 will be 
6.6351 teet, which subtract - - - 


Hence the apparent horizontal distance will 
be - - te = - = 

The correction for the expansion and re- 
duced to the standard temperature of 62° 
will be 

(83°.1—50) x0 0074— (62°—50°) X0 01237 Z 


0215 feet, which add ° - 4 & 


Hence the corrected measure 4. the base 
for the temperature of 62° will be - 

To which add the correction for reducing 
all the hypothenuses to the level of the 
south end of the base - - - 


' Which being reduced to the level of the 
sea, will be - 2 . 4 


Feet. 
39802.4636 


+ 0.1930 


— 6.6351 


39796.0215 


+ 3.1996 


— — —_____.. 


- 39799.2211 


4 0.0893 


39799.3104 


et 


39793.7 . 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 315 


Ill. TRIANGLES. 


Hanandamulla from Pilloor Hill 110381.9 


id op oe 
OP ere 
uate A oe) TES = Angles for | Distance 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. e 23 a Gatenidtion: safeet: 
Hanandamulla ...... 98° 13’ 33’.6 |—1".8 98° 13’ 31.5 
Pilloor Hill.......c00s 42 59 08 |—0.7 42 69 7 
Kylasghur ae.) 58 47 22.4 |—0.6 38 47 21.5 
45 ——_—_—_——_——_ et SEER 
180 00 04 | 3’.1 }4-0’.9 [180 00 00 
Hanandamulla {120135 
Kylasghur from 
WalOor HU ' cccscecudesucoass cesaceecevsd|l THOGTES 
] _ Hanandamulla from Kylasghur 120128 
_ |Hanandamulla ...... 98 13 33.6 |—0.8 98 13 31.5 
Kylasghur .....0.0..| 38 47 22.4 |—0.6 38 47 21.5 
Pilloor Hill,......0..| 42 59 8 | |—0O.7 42 59 7 
AG Here 2 aes ee ME ERR SUE 
180 00 04 3.1} +0.9 {180 00 00 


Hanandamutla sigh sssduaped sconce 1 10375.6 


Pilloor Hill fo | 


Kylasahiur’ 6c. .s00ss0e0nses0e ececeseee ft (AO GRO 


. Kylasghur from Pilloor Hill 174382.3 


- |Kylasghur ....... wweee| 86 12 27 .96|—3.7 | 86 12 24.95 

_ }Pilloor Hill............ 50 13 26 .32/—-2.14 50 13 24.25, 

_ {Patticondah ........ Fp ke 43 34 11.5 
r | pa Daaeae  oi SA adi BEIT 2 
f {180 00 00 


Kylasghur .s.sseserssessesseseneevees| 1 9444:7.4 


~ Patticondah tom 
Pilloor Hill Se eet esscorensestaseagee 252452.9 


Sl& ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TRIANGLES—conTINuEp. 


Kylasghur from Pilloor Hill 174382.3 


o sg 
o S w 
5 & & a 
24 Reh ae Be S Angles for Distance 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles, £ 2g & Calculation. in feet. 
2 NM 
Kylasghur ......-c000 35° 25’ 37°.05|—0".8 35° 25 $5.5 
Pilloor Hill.....:...... 50 36 21.07|—0O .7 50 36 20.5 
Bodeemulla............, 93 58 6.45|—1 .7 93 58 4 
8 isa Balser, IR pa ee ee PRY, 
180 00 4.57 3.2 14+1°37|i180 00 00 
Kylasghur .....scscssrssssescensereeeeee| 1 35085-8 
Bodeemulla from 
Pilloot Hill v..ccccccesenchoss attessdel OME aan 


Kylasghur from Bodeemulla 135085.8 


~ 


Kylasghur see ee DO) 46, 50-91 {=P 3 50.46 48 .75 
Bodeemulla............| 85 23 40.3 |—2 .2 85 23: 37 .25 
Patticondah ........ | 43 49 36.2 j—1.3 43 49 $4 
49 — 
180 00 7.41 4.8 1+2.611180 00 00 
f Kylasghur ....0.00+cessrecsservesseresee| | 94447.6 
Patticondah from 
Bodeemullla ciscccccecoscscespecacceoss| LO) Lonbeee 
Kylasghur from Patticondah 19444°7.5 
Kylasghur .......| 36 15 24.6 |—1.5 36 15 25 
Patticondah ...... we(LOlL 21 48 .77/—4.8 101 21 45.75 
Yerracondah .........) 42 22 48 .97|—1 .4 42 22 49 .25 
50 {| —$________——— _—|—_—— ————— 
180 00 2.34 7 .7\—5 .36/180 00 00 


Kylasghur .....100+ce0scecseseeaseeresee| 2B 202200 


Yerracondah from } 
I Pattioondah .......0...<<cccsecdiueceso| dL POQOem 


« 


~ 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 315 


TRIANGLES, taken up at the Basr, and continued back to PERRACONDAH and 
KyYLASGHUR.. 


N. end of the Base from the S. end of the Base 39793.7 : 


S ice 
- > Te eyes Angles for Distance 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. 2 PE ES "Rare ‘nt foat, 
St 
N. end of the Base} 89°19’ 20°.75|—0'.12 89° 19° 20” 
S. end of the Base | 33 44 0.06/—0.06 83 48 59.3 
Muntapum Station | 56 56 41 .42)—0 .06 56 56 40.7 
51 ——_—_ “|__| —[- ec ; 
180 00. 02 .23 0’.24)+ 1".99]180 00 00 
N. end of the Base ...... 126365.95 
Muntapum Station from | 
S. end of the Base Se 
S. end of the base from Muntapum Station 47475.03 
S. end of the Base |106 9 37 .72|—0.33 106 9 
Muntapum Station} 35 3 56 .05|—0.08 35 3 
Bonnairgottah ......| 38 °46 31 .15|—O 07 38 46 


52 
| 180 00 04 .92 


ae 4+4.451180 00 00 


S. end of the Base .......0.s00000(43551.7 


Bonnairgottah from } 
Muntapum Station..........00/72811.7 


Muntapum Siation from Bonnairgottah 72811.7 


Muntapum Station | 97 26 53 .39|—1 .07 97 26 53.9 
Bonnairgottah ......} 51 7 54.62|—0.37 51. 7 54.2 
31:25 11.9 


Tirtapully Hill ......| $1 25 16 .15|—0.41 


1.85) +2 .31/180 00 00 


53 
180 00 4.16/_ 


Muntapum Station Livk bi cool ONE. 
Tirtapully Hull fom 
Bonnairgottah Se ae 


3 16 ACCOUNT: OF ‘TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TRIANGLES—conrTinvueEp. 
a eee eae 
Bonnairgotiah from Tirtapully Hill 138492.9 


: 7 CV ECL SERS To ; TeWve gy + pylt nh oP See OLE ee ee 


o a 
= Fz ies 
+ z P : S. = fss = Angles for Distance 
No.| TRIANGLES, | ‘Obsd. Angles. / 5 |] 2 | ¢\nslesfor | Distane 
A ja 
Bonnairgottah ...... 51 e 56”91|—0'4 51° °5' 56".5 
Tirtapully Hill ...... 31 25. 8.96|—0.4 31 25 9 
Muntapum Centre | 97 28 55 .27;,—1.1 97 28 54.5 


54 -_ BMRA Lat ed 
1”.9|—0.76/180 00 00 


180 00 01.14 


—————_— 


Bonnairgottah .......sccsssssevereee| 728156 


Muntapum Centre rom | 
Tirtapully Hill .........s0ceeseeseesee| 10870501 


TLL. kk ok no) DO — eS eee 


Muntapum Centre from Bonnairgottah 72815.6 


Muntapum Centre | 69 50 46.5 |—0.6 69 50 46 
Bonnairgottah ...... 70 52 23 .91}\—0.6 70 52 23.5 
39 16 50.5 


Savendroog Station} 39 16 50.8S|—0.5 


180 00 O1 .29 1 .7;—0 .41|180 00 00 


Munpatum Centre ......sese00se0e00|108661.6 


Savendroog from | 
Bonnairgottah .......sss00eeseeeeereee4 O7968.7 


With the sides Muntapum centre from Tirtapully hill 108705.1 
feet, and Muntapum centre from Savendroog = 108661.6 feet, and 
the included angle at Muntapum — 167° 19 29’.3 the side Saven- 
droog from Tirtapully hill is found’ — 216038.9 teet. 


Again with the sides Bonnairgottah from Tirtapully hill 138492.9' 
feet, and Bonnairgottah from Sevendroog — 107968.7 feet, and the 
included angle at Bonnairgottah = 1210 58’ 19” the side Savendroog 
from: Tertapully hill is found — 216038.8 feet differing from the 
above 7; of a foot, and of which the mean is 216038.85 feet. 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 


ao | 
— 
N 


TRIANGLES—contTINvUED. 


Savendroog from Tirtapully Hill 216038.85. 


Angles for Distance in 


No.| TRIANGLES. | Obsd. Angles. Cateviatian: hcé 


Difference. 
Spherical 
Excess 


| 


Savendroog +--+ -- 53° 36’ 47”.5 | 53°36! 45”.5 
Tirtapully Hill----| 46 42 24.5 46 42 22.5 
Deorabetta «++--> 79 40 52.9 : 79 40 52 
56 ony 00 04.9 6’ .6| -—1".7|180 00 00 
eacnunpeiae Sa eee ars 159828.8 
Deorabetla from 
d Tirtapully Hill ------- reeeee+l176775.8 
Savendroog ++---- 37 4h 43.15 +}—1.9 37 44 41.25 
Tirtapully Hill ----| 70 48 41.9 |—2.4 70 48 42.5 
Nundydroog-+++-+-!| 71 26 38.55| 2.4 71 26 36.25 
57 180 00 036 6.7 | —3.1 |i180 00 00 
Savendroog +++-++- se eee eee 0 1215296.5 
r- : _ Nundydroog from 
Tirtapully Hill--+--+eeeeeeees 1394998 
* 


Tirtapully Efill from Nundydrooe 139499.8, 


51 31 44.03 | —1.0 51 31°43 


i Grid S baie | 56° 23)-44/ PVE 1.6 56 23 42.5 
f 72 4 35.47|—1.2 72 4 345 
\ Didi 5s 6a SEG, Ge 

58 180 00 3.5 3.15|'+.35 }180 6O 00 


/ 


Tirtapuliy Hill «+++. eeeee-|122112.3 


Rymandroog from <_ 
Nundydroog «+++++e+++ee++/114788.1 


$13 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TRIANGLES—cONTINUED. 
a a 
Tirtapully Hill from Rymandroog 122112.3. 


—— ——- —: meneame — | 


o ) 

+) =} . ; 

5 Se S Angles for Distance. 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. Bo og 5 Calculation. feet. 

~ ay . 

A. |e 


—_ | 


Tirtapully Hill----| 93° 5° 51°93 1—2.13 93° 5 49" 


Rymandroog esee!| 40 22 54.58}—1 .04 49 22 53 
Yerracondah +«++-} 37 31 19.33}—1 .03 37 . Sells 


39 180 00 5 21 


4’.21-- 1.011180 00 00 


Tirtapully Hill «+--+. coos (15218521 
Yerracondah from 
Rymandroog -+--- creeeee ee (2001 90.11 


Tirtapully Hill from Deorahetta 176775.8. 


Tirtapully Hill-«---! 97 $1 i aiieaaag | 97 51 14.4 
Deorabelta sees. | of 20 Sia 


° . e | 
Vetracondah-...-. 44 47 55/83 |—1.28 | 44,47 54.5 
| 1180 00 00 


60 ; eli 


Yerracondah fom) 


Tirtapully Hill ++++++e+s0e 152197. 


Deorabetta seeoed es ceeeee Cae *, 2417529.8 


Tirtapully Hill «+++! 59 35 8.79 |—1.76 


Deorabetia »+++++| 62 10 4.27 |—1.67. 
Aukissgherry +++] . 2. 


61 | ei 


| (Tirtapully Hill +++ - +++. -/150822.9] 
Ankissgherry from- a 


) OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 319 


TRIANGLES—coNTINURD. 


Tirtapully Hill from Ankissgherry 150322.7. 


g ies 
’ 5 Ze = Angles for {Distance in 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. Z $2 E Calculation. feet. 
A lee} * 
= a aes ————— ane et Gaeta: 
Tirtapully Hill ----| 38°16* 9°.25| 07.9. 38° 16’ 8.25 | 
Aukissgherry eae 71.53 17.5 
Yerracondah +--+! 69 50 35.4 {—1.2| 69 50 34.25 
62 | 180 00 00 
| | 
Tirtapully Hill --+---+-++-+- i oakaes 
Yerracondah from t 
Ankissgherry aldtahe eat sie oa teiatete | 99177.5. 
3 
Tirtapully Hill from Yerracondah 152196.9. 
| 
Tirtapully Hill ----| 93 5 513 |-2.13| 93 5 49 
Yerracondah:---- *| 37 31 19.39 |—1.03 | 37 31 18 
vmandroog eres) 49 22 54.58 —1.04 | 49 22 53 
63 (180 00 05.26 haa 


+1.06 180 00 00 


; 


| 
| | 


Tirtapully Hill -++-+-+-++++-/122191.9 
Rymandroog from-< 


Yerracondah +++eee-++-> «+» *|200214.3 


The side from Tirtapully hill to Yerracondah is the mean distance 
found in the triangles Tirtapully hill, Deorabetta, and Yerracondah 
and Tirtapully hill, Ankissgherry and Yerracondah. - 


ad 


Yerracondah from Rymandroog 200214.3. 


F Yerracondah ----| 78 25 51.06|—3 .3 78 25 47.75 
Rymandroog -++-+| 45 11 51.7 |—2 4 45.11 52 

Patticondah --++-+| 56 22 20.37 |—2 .4 56 22 20.25 P 

|'64 1180 00 3.13 7-9 |—4.77 |180 00 00 


eee eee i eee" 


-( Yerracondah....+.+.+e++++-+/170605.9 
Patticondah from 


Rymandroog eeseeceseseere sess 235558.9 


220 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TRIANGLES—conTINueED. 


Yerracondah from Patticondah 170605.9. 


© k 
; 5 3 Z 5 Angles for Distance 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. = z¢ = Calculation. feet. 
Yerracondah ........ 42° QF 4.8°.97| —1".4 42 29' 49.25 
Patticondah  .....000. 101 21 48.77 8 101 21 45.75 
Kylasghur ssssseseeer 36 15 24.6 |—1.5 36 15 25 
65 ——_—<————<—$ || | | ee 
180 00 2.34 7’.7|—5'.36|180 00 00 
Yerracondah ereeeeere tthe 282890.8 7! 
Kylasghur from 


Patticondali  <.....:scssss<ssusaassapeuean 194445, | 


SECTION II. 


Series of triangles direct from the Base near Bangalore, to Mar 
galore on the Alalabar coast. 


IV. ANGLES. 


At Dodagoontah Station. 


Between “And 
Bonnairgottah esrveseces ssscsesevereeee AVENALOOE . PrIvTivitiritiiiiiiiitil) | 61°34! 54° 


Referring ie Savendroog SUC CR See eee eee eee ERD es 104 4. 29.68 
Pole-star’s W. elongation .... 1 31 53 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 321 


3 At Savendroog. 
Between And 


Deorabetta.......00.0+-.bundhully Hill ...44°41 41.25 


Devaroydroogeesssreee NUNGCYArOO srrer0e50 14 


Cheetkul Hill.,..........Devaroydroog «...- 6 56 


Devaroydroog............Bomanelly Hill......51 25 
Bomanelly Hill ......... Mullapunnabetta ...28 47 


Bundhully Hill ......... Mysoor Hill ......... 47 6 
Mysoor Hill ....ssseeee Mullapunnabetta ...46 23 


Referring Lamp ......Mullapunnabetta...90 39 


40 5 

40 .75 

41.5 40°.93 
- 40 .25 

41.75 

40 .5 


322 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 
At Savendroog, continued. 
Between And di 
Referring Lamp.s...ss Yetracondahiyssveeas92° 4 a +25) 
4 5 
47.75 
49.5 | 
49 .5 t 49°45 
48 .55 { 
48 .5 
50 .62 
50.5 | 
- 48.875 
Pole-star’s greatest W. elongation 2 28 56.75 
. 57 25 
54 
53 5 
57.75 
56 
58 .75 
58 .75 
58 .25 
61.12 
= 
At Devaroydroog. 
Cheetkul Hill...........Rungaswamy Hill 82 48 17 si 17.62 
18 . —_ 
Bomanelly wrescesseeeeees Savendroog.eeveeee89 33 42 t 44.8 
47 6 ia 
Savendroog seecseesesseees Nundydroog wwewe’9 52 7.75 
8 .75 
8 8.45 
8 .25 
9.5 
Rungaswamy ............bomanelly Hill... 44 59 30.35 
Cheetkul Hill............Rungaswamy «4. 82 48 17.62 
Bomanelly Hill ......... Cheetkul Hill......127 47 47 .97 
Savendro0g ....ecseeereee Cheetkul Hill...... 38 14 4.75 
Bomanelly Hill ......... Savendroog .....06 89 33 43 .22 
Bomanelly Hill ......... Savendroog ......0. 89 33 44.8 
Bomanelly Hill.......... Savendroog .......0. 89 33 44.01 
At Bomanelly Hill. 
i 


Hytalloo Flag onveebene «eMullapunnabetta 175 40 e et 
| 0.75 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 


323 


At Bomanelly Hill, continued, 


Between And - 
Hytalloo Flag... seeverere Savendroog... ereeee ys 9 19.7 
; 19 .75 , 
19 19.9% 
21.5 
Referring Flag .......Mullapunnabetta 86 15 22.7 
26 .5 24.34 
24 ‘ 
24 12 
Daesauneegooda 131 4 38.12 
39.75 - 
Sj Wai 
40 
Hytalloo Flag.......0..+ Mullapunnabetta 175 40 1 
Savendroog .....+00 70 9 19.94 
Mullapunnabetta ...... Savendroog .....000 105 30 41 .06 
Referring Flag....,...... Mullapunnabetta 86 15 24.34 
Daesauneegooda 131 4 38.78 
Daesauneegooda ...... Mullapunnabetta 44 49 14.44 
Daesauneegooda ..,....Mullapunnabetta 44 49 15.8 
12.5 14.90 
14 .88 "sf 
16. 37 
: Ditto Sas enbiecd ans dbo IS by Referring ee 14 44 
Mean... 14.67 
At Mullapunnabetta. 
Referring Flag ,,,......Bomanelly Hill ......143 22 60.5 
59.5 | 
60 .75 
63 60.25 
58 
61 
59 


524. 


Between 


Referring Flag ..)....Savendroog . 


~~ 


OG. f! 


Referring Flag .........Koondhully Hill... 55 38 


> 


Koondhully Hill ......Hannabetta wese45 31 


And 


Mysoor Hill .s0.037 59 


Daesauneegooda 150 36 


Koondoor Hill ......71 37 


ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


At Mullapunnabetta, continued. 


ssivene97 AL’ 34".25 7 


36 .38 
36 .62 
34. 
35 .4 
35 .25 
32.5 
$2.5 * 
a 
34.5 
35 .25 
83 
36 .5 
33 .8 | 
¥, 


33 
33 .87 
12 
10.7 
AD 
12.2 
am 
t 
id 


10.5 
12 

12.25 
14 
13 .2 
14.5 
12.7 


i 
} 
32 
32 .75 
25 .25 
35 .5 
32 5 


24: 25 
24.75 
29 75 
20 


43 

44.75 
43 

43 275 
45 .25 
46 .25 
46 .75 


12.58 


33.6 


22.94 


60.65 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA, $235 


At Mullapunnabetta, continued. 


Between And 
Referring flag --+++ Bolroyndroog ++++96° 36 48” > ~ 
46.25 
44 
49.25 
Ae ¢ 46'S 
45.25 
47°5 
4.5.75 
44.25 
Referring Flag--+++++Bomanelly Hill --143 23 00.25 
Savendroog:---+- « 97 41 34.36 
Bomanelly Hill ---++Savendroog--+-++- 45 41 25.89 
Referring Flag-+-+++.Mysoor Hill +--+ 37 59 12.58 
Savendroog -+---- 97 41 34.36 
Savendroog :+-++-+- Mysoor Hill +--+ 59 42 21.78 


Referring Flag-++-++ Bomanelly Hill --143 23 00.25 
Daesauneegooda 150 36 33.6 


Bomanelly Hill --+-Daesauneegooda 66 00 26.15 


Referring Flag- +++ - - Daesauneegooda- -150 36 $3.6 
Koondoor Hil} ++ 71 57 22.94 


Daesauneegooda +--+ Koondoor Hill -+ 78 59 10.66 


Referring Flag++-++++ Daesauneegooda: +150 36 33.6 
Koondhully Hill-. 55 38 44.68 


Daesauneegooda «+++ Koondhully Hill-- 94 57 48.92 


Hannabetta -+-++-+-- Koondhully Hill-- 45 $2 00.65 
Hannabetta -+++++-- Daesauneegooda- . 49 25 48,27 
Referring Flag-:+:-++Koondoor Hill 71 37 22.94 

Koondhully Hill-- 55 38 44.68 
Koondoor Hill--++--+Koondhully Hill-- 15 58 38.26 
Hannabetta +++++++- Koondhully Hill-- 45 32 00.65 
Hannabetta --+++++- Koondoor Hill +--+ 29 33 22.39 


Referring Flag--+--++ Koondhully Hill-- 55 38 44.68 
¥ Balroyndroog++++ 96 36 46.3 


Koondhuily Hill .:. -Balroyndroog +--+ 40 58 1.62 
iia? Y3 


396 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 
At Mullapunnabetta, continued. 


Between And 


___ § Pole-star’s great- Tet wee 
Referring Lamp ». 4 Festa Seen 170°48' 15".25 


170 43 49 


At Bundhully. 


Savendroog cereoees Deorabetta eeeoee 37 30 Aig 30’ 12 
31.75 x 
Mysoor Hill +--+. 80 2 42.44 

ern 44.19 


=e 


At Cheetkul Hill. 


Savendroog «+++++++Devaroydroog-+-+134 49 45.13 
44.25 
44,25 
A7 


45.16 


— a 
At Mysoor Hill. 


Referring flag--+»-+Bundhully Hill .. 55 26 46 
. 45.75 i 45.22 
43.9 
Savendroog «+++ 108 17 44 
’ 43.75 
46 45.19 


AT 


a 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 
At Muysoor Hill, continued. 


Between And 
Referring Flag++++++ Mullapunnabetta 177 47’ 26” 


‘ 25.43 J 
Referring Flag-+++++Bundhully Hill -- 55 26 45.22 
Savendroog:-++++108 17 45.19 


Bundhully Hill-++-++Savendroog:+++-- 52 50 59.97 
Referring Flag-+++-- Savendroog+++++- 108 17 45.19 


Mullapunnabetta 177 47 26.5 


Savendroog ++++---++Mullapunnabetta 73 54 48,31 


i 
At Daesauneegooda. 
Mullapunnabetta+-++Bomanelly Hill -- 69 10 25. 
26 
Hannabetta---++- 89 54 5. 
5 
7 
6 


Koondoor Hill -- 47 3 2 
Hannabetta «+++ +++» Koondoor Mill ++ 42 50 41.62 


=e 


At Koondoorbetta. 


Mullapunnabetta ----Daesauneegooda-- 53 57 29 i , 


32.75 
31.75 
Hannabetta-..--- 119 34 16.25 
Balroyndroog ---+141 10 47.5 
47 
Koondhully Hill --- -Balroyndroog ---+75 12 19 
, 15.75 
Mullapunnabetta - -- - Balroyndroog -++-141 10 47.25 
Hannabetta teres 119 34 16.25 


Balroyndroog reeeese Hannabettas++++- 21 36 31 
Y 4 


39; 


328 


ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


At Koondoorbetta, continued. 


Between 


Mullapunnabetta - - - - Daesauneegooda 


Daesauneegooda « - - - 


'Mullapunnabetta - - - -Balroyndroog: +++ 
Koondhully Hill - +--+ Balroyndroog:- - - 


Mullapunnabetta - - - + Koondhully Hill 


Koondoorbetta-+-+++ Bettatipoor Hill+; 78 18 11.5 


And 
Hannabetta 


Hannabetta - 


58° 57’ 31".17 
o++e119 34 16 .25 


__—— 


«++ 65 36 45 .08 


141 10 47 .25 
TO LZ ile ae 


143 36 55 .38 


aa 


At Koondhully Hill. 


Mullapunnabetta-..--Bettatipoor Hill -. 57 53 


Koondoorbetta 
Mullapunnabetta - - 


Mullapunnabetta - . 


Daesauneegooda - - 


Koondoorbetta> eeeen 


Balroyndroog «++ 


- 99 19 


Bettatipoor Hill-- 78 18 


--Bettatipoor Hill-- 57 53 


-«Koondoorbetta -- 20 24 


Stine: ~ ‘cee 


At Hannabetta. 


Koondoorbetta 


Balroyndroog ee 


i. 4132 
--136 19 


At Balroyndroog. 
Referring flag-+..++ Bullamully Hill .-169 57 


Koondhully Hill.. 


88 44 


10.75 
14 


i 1208 


4.41 


2.37 
51 


as f 5275 


OPERAT 


Between 


IONS IN THE PENINSULA. 


At Balroyndroog, continued. 
And 


ReferringLamp, Pole-star’s W. elongation 56° 46°43".5 


Referring Flag+- ++ 


Koondhully Hill ----Bullamully Hill-- 81 12 11 -66 


Koondhully Hill ---- 


Balroyndreog «+++ 


Bullanandgooda --- 
(soompay Hill eeewe 


Meejar Hill eeevvegeoe 


Balroyndroog ++--+-- 


Kunnoor Hill ----.. 
Bullanaudgooda «.- 


Kunnoor Hill -«-+-- 
Goompay Hill+++-- 
Kunnoor Hill «+... 


Balroyndroog ++++.++ 
Bullanaudgogda «++. 


43 .75 
43 .25 
43 

4A 5 
44.25 
43 .44 


.»Koondhully Hill 88 44 52.75 


Bullamully Hill - - 169 57 4.41 


a 


Loomemnadl 


—— 
At Bullamully. 
Balroyndroog +--+ 57 46 30 

; 29.25 
27.25 
$1.5 
31.75 
32.75 


-Kunnoor Hill ----118 21 13.5 


Bullanaudgooda «- 80 53 15.75 


43.12 
44.37 


-Goompay Hill--+- 79 17 39 i 
AS 


-Kuddapoonabetta. 89 14 44.177 


41.13 

39.38 

Kuddapoonahetta 34 37 35.25 
30.5 

Mangalore «++++- 123 IE 27.75 
25.5 
24.5 

Balroyndroog ----118 21 13.5 


. Balroyndroog se++ 80 53 19.19 


-_-_—_oo 


Bullanaudgooda «-160 45 27.31 
Goompay Hill---- 79 17 49.17 


-Kunnoor Hill ---. 81 97 45.14 


Kuddapoonabetta 89 14 45.56 


__ 


-Kuddapoonabetta’ 7 46 56.42 


OO 


Bullanaudgooda -» 80 53 19.19 
Goompay Hille+«++ 79 17 42.17 


SE ee ee 


41.56 


32.87 


25.92 


330 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


At Bullamully, continued. 


Between And 
Balroyndroog -+++++Goompay Hill--++160° 11’ 1”.36 
Mangalore -+++-+- 123 11 25.92 
Goompay Hill-.----Mangalore --++-- 76 37 32.72 
Balroyndroog -++-+>- Kunnoor Hill -++-118 21 13.5 
Kunnoor Hill --+--+ Kuddapoonabetta 7 46 56.42 


-++110 34 17.08 
34 37 32.87 


——— 


- 75 56 44.21 


Kuddapoonabetta -+Balroyndroog + 
Meejar Hill «+++ - «+ Kuddapoonabetta 


Balroyndroog :-- 


es ~ 


I, 5 
At Ungargooda. 


5 9.25 
59.5 


Balroyndroog «+++++Bullamully Hill -- 91 20 a 


Bullamully Hill -+++Meejar Hill -++-126 U1 27.5 


- 28 59 12.7 
13 
9 
6.25 


Meejar Hill ---+++++- Booggargooda 


. en Ee 
At Booggargooda. 
Bullamully Hill 


Bullamully Hill .-.-Meejar Hill--+---113 


Ungargooda +--+ 21 
Meejar Hill+++++.«++Ungargooda 


4 


++++Meejar Hill---+++113 5 40.75 
43.25 
44. 
45.75 


Ungargooda -+-+ 21 3 58 
55 


.o e094 9 38.58. 


60".75 
27.88 


10.25 


43.08 


55,8 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 331 


At Meejar Hill. 


Between And 
Bullamully Hill ++: Booggargooda «- +++ 54°37 20'.62 
7 88 18’.67 
7.5 


Kuddapoonabetta 49 7 52 
52 a 53.67 
56.75 
Kuddapoonabetta ++Kooliebogooda -+37 55 18.5 
19.75 
20 25 19.94 
2) .25 
Soeemecs aac 
At Kuddapoonabetta. 
Bullamully Hill ----Meejar Hill ------ 96 14 31.5 31.37 
$1. 25 
Kunnoor Hill +-+-48 38 44.25 ABS 
46 .75 a 
Kooliebogooda:+-:-- Meejar Hill--++++58 24 55.25 
57.75 56.62 
55 ; 
58 .5 
Eedgah Station --86 11 35.5 
30 t 32,08 
30.75 
At Kunnoor Hill. 
Bullamully Hill---- Kuddapoonabetta 123 34 21 te 91.12 
: : 21 tas 
Vv. TRIANGLES. 
a ees a A ee ak, 
Bonnairgottah from Savendroog 107968.7 
SBE obo SIAR aR si Ls SS 0S a Hla kL a 
a OD 
5 138 5 Angles for {Distance in 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. 2g og 3 Calculation. feet. 
aA la : 
Bonnairgottah ...... 83° 20’ 16’.17|—0’.79 83° 20' 15".4 
Savendroog.ecescerere 1 85. 4 53.8 
|Dodagoontah Stat*. 61 34 51 29|—-0 .52 61 34 50.8 


ee ee | | ee | ee 


‘180 00 00 


Be) 21 or eee eee eee eee ee aaa 


. Bonnairgottah ......++++| 70556.7 


Dodagoontah Station from 
Savendroog wees ssesseaee 121933.2 


San. |. ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TRIANGLES—conTINUED. 


Savendreog: from Deorabeita 159828.8. 


© 
eS ase . 
B |ee S Angles for | Distance in 
No.| TRIANGLES. | Obsd. Angles. | 3 |S} = | Calculation. fet. 
: A la 
Savendroag ++++++| 44°41 40.93] — 44? 42! 30°.5- 
Deorabetta «e+e*+] O97 47 57.75 OF 47 ea2 
Bundlitily ++++++1 37 30 30.12 37 30.285 
67 i80 00 08.8 6”.9} +1°.91180 00 '00 
Savendroog @ 4 0.6.e.0 6.0 6.8 6 ols Seles 260072 


Bundhully from 
Deorabetta «++ cece ceccvceee ei 1 $4620.51 


Savendroog from Nundydroog 215226.3. 


Savendroog «+++++| 50 14 6.37] —1.9 50 14 4.3 

Nundydroog-+++++} 49 53 53.48] —1.9 49 53 51.6 

Devaroydroog -+++] 79 52 8.45} —2.8 79 562 Sa 
68 180 00 8.3 §.54|/+1.76}180 00 00 


¢ Savendroog cece cece enee es |(167238.7 


Devaroydroog from- 
i Nundydroog ++ ++++e+++++++/168058.8 


Sa a a 
Savendroog from Deorabetta 159828.8. . 

a 
78 57, Aided, 

47 20 37 


Savendroog ++++++! 78 57 47.5 
Deorabelta «+++! 47 20 38.73 
Allasoor Hills +++] 53 41 39.59 


2.26 
1,55 
—~1.69 
abe 


69 180 00 8-8 | 5.4 {40.42 peg 00 00 


Savendroog «+ ++++ eeeeer cece 1458591 
Allasoor Hill from 2". | | | 
Deorabetta os ie 2 eee ereesoe “|teaees } 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. : $33 


TRIANGLES—conrinucp. 


Savendroog from Allasoor Hill 145859.1 


o isa 
= ox 
‘ : = 58 S$ Angles for Distance 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. iS Ze Fs Calculation. in feet. 
QO Ri 
Savendroog sssswee| 55° 41/ 34".99 1.3 55) 41’ 39'.8 
Allasoor Hill.......i) 62 10 43 .71{/—1 4 62 10 41.5 
be Cheetkul Hill .....{ 62 7 47 87|\—i1.4 627/457 
7 
180 00 06.5 4.2 |42°.3 1180 00 00 
SAVENATOOg sesscoesecseacecreceecreeee| L4G ZES 


Cheetkul Hill from } 


FL LLASOOY cob cinives nccmestesweewaspabeeavans 


Savendroog from Cheetkul Hill 1459248 


Savendroog sec 6 56 13 .43)+0.04 6 56 12.5 
Cheetkul Hill.........,134 49 15 .16|—2 134 49 42.5 
Devaroydroog ......| 38 14 4.75|+4+1 .26 38.14 5 
71 (ere aba SEAN Sa ie aaliete CN ie niaane Maoe se es Liege 
180 00 3.34 0.7 |4+2.64)180 00 00 


' 


Savendro0g ..ssccccoscocesceesenece vee LOT 2248 


Devaroydroog from } 
Cheetkul Hill ......ccscsesesscecenore| 284770 


9 eae aaa Noda cab beh sacs Neots! eacnrnlairerh ae we mateo AAP ear Ss 
Savendroog from Devaroydroog 167229.25 


Savendreog......00e) 51 25 2.12)—2.1 51 25 00.) 
Devaroydroog ..... 89 33 44.01) —4.1 89 33 40 
Bomanelly Hil...) . 0. . 39 1 20 

72\ - ——|—__—— - 
| 180 00 00 


Savendro0d .iscoecsoscoccecsecveees ove] LOD IG4D 
Bomanelly Hill tom 


Devar0y droog srecvesseseseeseseeeseee| 2076221 


334 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TRIANGLES—contTINvueEp. 


Savendroog from Bomanelly Hill 265594.9 


rs) =, 
2 |22| 2 
. 4 g 56 S Angles for | Distance 
No. TRIANGLES, Obsd. Angles. & 2h Ss Calcalatio.. in feet. | 
5 D 
Savendroog  .sssve 28° 48' 2” .35|—2" 28°.48' O “4 
Bomanelly Hill...... 105 30 41 .06|— 7.5 105 30 33.6 
Mullapunnabetta ...! 45 41 25 .89\—1 .3 45 41 26 
73 | eee 
180 60 9 .3 10’.8\—1”.5 |180 00 00 


fis CNALOOE wsscseeee reser eseere 99 1046.2 
Mullapunnabetta from 


ae Hill... .secveseoscs|1 18G09e 7 


Savendroog from Bundhully Hull 260072 


Savendroog  secsse 47 6 33 .68|—4.1 47 6 29.5 
Bundhully ............} 80 2 44.19/—6.2 80 2 38 

Mysoor Hill ......... 52 50 59 .97|—4.2 |! 52 50 52.5 

74 | "| | eq 
180 00 17 .84 14 .5| + 3.341180 00 00 


} 


Savendro0g ....scesscessesvsersoee| S21 S004 
Mysoor Hill from 


Bundhully .......scccscecenees seseee | 239000 


Savendroog from Mysoor Hill 3213854 


Savendroog. ......6 46 23 6.26\—5.7 46 23. 00.5 
Mysoor Hill .,.......| 73 54 48 .31|-—7 .7 73 54 44 
Mullapunnabetta ...) 59 42 21 .78/—6 .3 59 42 15.5 . 


os 


75 


180 00 16.35 19 .7,—3 .35|180 00 00 


i Savendroog SOC eee eee eee eeeeeeeee 357641.2 
Mullapunnabetta from 


Piyeoor TAH... <2. ccpspemesans 269475.6 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 335 


TRIANGLES—contTINUED. 


Savendroog from Mullapunnabetta 357641 .2 


2 ig 
Ss {22] & Angles for {Distance i 
No.| TRIANGLES. | Obsd. Angles. | 5 |ES| = Cateuintion! fae 
oe ‘ek om 
al RN 
CS ~ a gy | ee | cee 
Savendroog Station | 28°48’ 2’.35| —2”. 28° 48’ 00.4 
Mullapunnabetta --| 45 41 25 .37|—1 .3 45 41 26 
Bomanelly Hill-++-|105 30 41 .06/—7 .5 105 30 33 6 


76 180 00 8.78 10”8}—2”.02|180 00 00 


Savendroog ne as ate WN rrr 19G5592.8 


Bomanelly Hill om) 


Mullapunnabetla  +++++--eeeee 178807.7 


Savendroog from Muliapunnabetta 357641.2 


Savendroog Station | 46 23 6.26|!—5.7 46 23 0.5 
Mullapumnabetta --] 59 42 21.78|—6.3 59 42 15.5 
Mysoor Hill---+--- 73 54 48.31 | —7.7 73 54 44 


77 4180 00 16.35 4 3.351180 00 00 


Savendroog Station -++++--+-- 321387.6 


Mysoor Hill from 
Mullapunnabetta -+++++ +++ ++-{269477.5 


Mullapunnabetia from Bomanelly 178807.7 


Mullapunnabetta --} 66 00 26.15} —1.8 66 0 23.8 

Bomanelly Hill--+-] 44 49 14.67 | —1.5 44 49 12.7 

Daesauneegooda --{ 69 10 25.04] —1.9 69 10 23.5 
| 180 00 06.76 5.2 | +1.56]180 00 00 


8 


Mullapunnabetta--++-++++++++- 


Daesauneegooda from 
Bomanelly Hill «.-+-+++--++-- 


356 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TRIANGLES—cONTINUED. 
NC a aa a 
Mullapunnabetta from Daesauneegooda 134849 9 


Sg a 
o 
oe or } ; 
© & 2 5 Angles for | Distance in 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. A Pe z Calculation. feet, 
~ om) = ~ . 
Q ND : 
= see ae eee 
Mullapuunabetta --| 49° 25° 48".27 ==1".25 49° 25' 47” 
Daesauneegooda ++} 89 54 6 .00}—2 .37 89 54 3.6 
Hannabetta «-sees] 2. 2 40 40 90.4 
79 180 00 00 


Mullapunnabetta+++-++++++ee. 206922.5 


Hannabetta from F . 
Daesauneegooda seeeeee s+*+-/i57180.4 


Mullapunnabettd from Hannabeita 206922.5 


Mullapunnabetta «-| 29 33 22.39 |—0.02 29:33) 29.4 
Hannabetta --+-+-] . . . -30 52 24,2 
Koondoor Hill++++)119 34 16.25 |—2.89 119 34 13.4 
| Saas eed es CT 
80 | 180 00 00 - 


Mullaponnabetta+---.-- +ee++/122081.6 — 
Koondoor Hili from 7 
Hannabetta ++ +e+eee e+e 0001173557 _ 


oo 
Mullapunnabetta from Daesauneegocda 134849.9 


\Mullapunnabetta --| 78 59 10.66|—1 .6 78 59°91 
Daesauneegooda --} 47 3 24.93 /—1 .1 47. 93/2283 
‘{Koondoor Hill--++| 53 57 31.17]—1 .1 58 57 28.6 


_——— | J 


81 180 O° 6.76 3”.8|4+2".96|180 00 00 


Mullapunnabetta ----+++++«-- 122081.2. 
Koondoor Hill from t 9 
Daesauneegooda -++++++++++-|163790.6 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 337 
TRIANGLES—conrTiNUeED. 


Daesauneegooda from Hannabetta 157180.4 


o 
= =) > . 
F o {22 5 Angles for {Dance in 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. Z ag = Calculation. eet, 
| a |e4| * 
Daesauneegooda ++} 42°50’ 40.37] —1’".2 42° 50’ 40”.4 
Hannabetta -+---+/ 71 32 34.00} —1 .5 71 32 34.7 
Koondoor Hill-+--| 65 36 45.08} —1 .4 65 36 44.9 


4”.1]—3".65}180 00 00 


— 


82 180 00 045 


Daesauneegooda +++++reeees + ++/1G01.8 


Koondoor Hill fom) 
Hannabetta ++++++++eeseee sees /11/55.7 


Hannabetta from Koondoorbetta 117355.7 


Hannabetta -++-++/136 19 17.37} —3.96 136 19 13.4 
Koondoorbetta +--+} 21 36 31 +0.85 21 36 31.9 
Balroyndroog «--- 22. 4 14.7 


—————— | | | ee 


83 180 00 00 
- Hannabetta seeeseseeeeees 1146 
Balroyndroog from . 
Koondeorbetta - +++ ++ ¢++«++/219§ 
Mullapunnabetia from Koondoorbetta 122081.4 
Mullapunnabetta --} 15 58 38.26|+1.07 15 58 39 
Koondoorbetta ++ |143 36 55.38 |—4,22 | 148 36 50 | 
Koondhully Hill --! 20 24 30.64)+1.50 20 24 31 
$4 [ (11.65 14-2, 63 180 00 00 


Mullapunabetta +++. ++-+++++ 2072. 8 


Koondhully ond 
. / «© (€ Koondoorbetta Same 


The side Mullapunnabetta from Koondoorbetta is the mean distce 


had from the 80th and 8 Ist triangle. 
Z 


356 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TRIANGLES—coNTINUED. . 
anne dean aaa ren iiit | 


Mullapunnabetta from Daesauneegooda 1348490 9 


oS = / 
a So 
y = 9 = Angles for [Distance ii 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. & as = Calealation. febes f 
5 ea] = = . 
n 1 
ee EEE EEE eee —— — —— i 
Mullapuunabetta --| 49° 25‘ 48".27] 1.25 49° 25' 47” 
Daesauneegooda ++} 89 54 6 .00|—2 .37 89 54 3.6 
Hannabetta «-+eee] 2... 40 40 90.4 
79 180 00 00 
Mullapunnabetta-+-+++-++-. - 1206922. 
Hannabetta from e | 
Daesauneegooda a 8'0,6 e1ea@ eis sie i57180.4 


Mullapunnabettd from Hannabeita 206922.5 


4 
Mullapumnabetta --} 29 33 22.39 |\—0.02 29 33 29.4 
Hannabetta -++++-) 2... 30 52 94.2 
Koondoor Hill +--+ 119 34 16.25 |—2.89 119 34 13.4 

80 | 180 00 00 [ 

{ 
7 Mullapunnabetta+--+.-- see+=/122081.6_ 
Koondoor Hili from 
: Hannabetta -- «cesces se eeeees 117355.7 


Mullapunnabetta from Daesauneegooda 134849.9 


|Mullapunnabeita --| 78 59 10.66 |—1 .6 78 59:°.91- 7 
|Daesauneegooda --} 47 3 24.93|—1 .1 47 $3 22.3 i 
Koondoor Hill---+] 53 57 31.17{/—1 .1 58 57.28.6 
81 180 0° 6.76 3”.8|+2”.96)180 00 00 


Mullapunnabetta ----+++++4-- 122081.2 
Koondoor Hill from 


Daesauneegooda +++++++eee0. 163790.6 ; 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. By i 
TRIANGLES—conrinvueED. 
Sl a eR Le el SP Se eae eanlee 
; Daesauneegooda from Hannabetta 157180.4 


o 
eo Se - 
: 5 ge 5 Angles for _|Dance.in 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. a | 2 Calculation. eet. 
: a lea] * 


| 


ee 


42° 50° 40°.4 
(1 32 34.7 
65.36 44.9 


4.1 |—3".65/180 00 00 


Daesauneegooda ++} 42°50’ 40'.37] —1’ 
Hannabetta -+-+-+/ 71 32 34.00}/—1. 
Koondoor Hill-+-+| 65 36 45.08} —1 .4 


Or to 


180 00 0.45 


Daesauneegooda -+++++eee6 + ++{1601.8 
Koondoor Hill from 

Hannabetta «+++ +eeeceecee sees {1155.7 
LET RD ae: eS SF ee eee! mS 
Hannabetta from Koondoorbetta 117355.7 


136 19 13.4 
21 36 31.9 
22. 4 V4.7 


180 00 00 


Hannabetta -+++++/136 19 17.37 |:—3.96 
Koondoorbetta +--+} 21 36 31 +0.85 
Balroyndroog «+-- 


83 


Hannabetta eerersreseevereee 1146 


Balroyndroog from 
Koondcorbetta «+++ ++ ¢++e++|2198 


Mullapunnabetia from Koondoorbetta 122081.4 / 


Mullapunnabetta --} 15 58 38.26 |+1.07 15 58 39 
Koondoorbetta ‘++ |143 36 55.38 |—4,22 (143 36 50 © 
20 24 31 


Koondhully Hill -+| 20 24 30.64)+ 1.50 


1.65 |+2.63 |180 00 00 


al 180 00 04.28 | 


Mullapunabetta ++++++++++ + +/2072. 8 
Koondhuily from < 
© « (€Koondoorbetta ++ +seeeesers 


963 .2 


The side Mullapunnabetta from Koondoorbettais the mean distce 
had from the 80th and 8 Ist triangle. 
Z 


S9 
©9 
io 8) 


ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TRIANGLES—contTINvuep. 


Koondoorbetta from Koondhully Hill 96366.3 


F 2 | 5s Angles fi Distance 
No Obed. Angles. = | 25 Calculation. in feet. 
| a | 
i eee Sie 
oe sccoewel 79 12 17°.37|— 75°12’ 15°.67 
ondhully Hill...) - + - 78 48 9.73 
Balroyndroog.seseree 25 59 34.6 
180 00 00 


Koondoorbetta ssessescoseesseesesee| 215698 
Balroyndroog from 
Koondhully Hill ........0ss0seesseeee|21 2592.8 


Koondoorbetta from Mullapunnabetta 122081.4 


ondoorbetta ...... 141 10 47 .25|\—9 aa 141 10 37.8 
ullapunnabetta...} . . - 24 59 21.75 
alroyndroog | 13 50 00.45 

36 en PEE as AS 
| 180 00 00 00 
Koondoorbetta.s.....secsessese00e|21 5698 
Balroyndroog from 
Mullapunnabetta sesso veee| 3200945 
Mudlapunnatetta from Koondhully Hill 207682.8 

ullapunnabetta ... 40 57 59.5- 
oondhully ......66 99 12 16.2 
jalroyndroog......+. 39 49 44.3 

37 — 


180 00 00. 


M 


ullapunnabetta ...scecsesseseeere 320075 
Balroyndroog from 


Koondhully Hill ateeetsteere a8 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 339 


TRIANGLES—conrinvep. 


Koondhully Hill from Balroyndroog 212588.5 


oe 
| oO FZ oa 
P z is en Bes = Angles for Distanee 
No. TRIANGLES, Obsd. Angles. fe a Z & Célculatinte in feet. 
O in 
Koondhully Hill...) . 2. 41° Ol’ 23".8 
Balroyndroog........| 81°12’ 11".66|— 3.5 8112 82 
Bullamully ....,..+00+ 57 46 30 .4.2|—2 .4 57 46 28 
88 —- ——— | ———_|_—__—_____ 
180 00 00 
Koondhully Hill ....s.cs0seeceseveee| 248343.2 
Bullamully from 
Balroyndroog  ...ssesseseeeseoseeseeee| 649446 


The side Koondhully hill from Balroyndroog is the mean distance 
found in the 85th and 87th triangle. 


Balroyndroog from Bullamully 1649446 


Balroyndroog.......} + + | 28 44 41.5 
Bullamully ........060 50 54 19 .37|—0 .6 | 59 54 19.2 
Ungargooda ........| 91 21 00.75|—O0 .4 91 20 59.3 
89 ————_—— |__—-—_———_———_—__——_ 
180 00 00 
s Balroyndroog sssssosssssesseseneee veel 149749.3 
Ungargooda from 
' Bullamully COP oeR SEH Seo HOP SeveeDeeDecreee 79345.5 


The supplemental chord angle at Bullamully, between Megar 
hill and Ungargooda, corrected, is subtracted from the observed 
angle between Balroyndroog and Megjar hill, to get the angle at 
Bullamully, between Balroyndroog and Ungargooda, as an observed 
one. 


Z 2 


$40 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


Bullamully from Ungargooda 79345.5 


: ; 2 Angles for . 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. Calculation. 


Excess, 
Error. 


Spherical 


Differen: ¢. 


——— = 


Bullamully +++++s | 16° 02’ 24.8 


Ungargooda «+ ++«+ 126°11' 27'.88} —0".7 126 11 27 2 
Meejar Station--+-| 37 46 8.19) +012 37 46 08 


a } 


180 00 00 


Bullamully «++ +++ ++eeeeeeee © +}104550.2 
Meejar Station from 


Ungargooda «+++sersseeeeees) 35795.8 


At Meejar hill, the supplemental chord angle between Booggar- 
gooda and Ungargooda, corrected as an observed one, and subtracted 
from the observed angle between Booggargooda and Bullamully, 
gives the angle between Budlamully and Ungargooda as an observed 
angle. ; 


eo 


Bullamully from Meejar Station 104550.2 


Bullamully -+++++] 34 27 32.87 | —0.26 34 37 33.75 

Meejar Siation ««+-| 40 07 53.67 | —0.27 49 07 54.5 

Kudapoonabetta +-| 96 14 31.37} —0.58 96 14 31.75 
91 179 59 57.91 1.11|—3 .2]/180 00 00 


Bullamully A010. 6 O g.0 6B O.0 B's ¢) 5 Se 79536 


Kudapoonabetta om} 


Meejar Station«+++++++++++++|59763 


Bullamully from Kudapoonabetta 79536 


7 46 55.5. 
48 38 44.7 
123 34 19.8 


7 46 56.42|—0.02 
48 38 45.5 |+0.17 
123 34 21.12] —0.33 


180 00 03.04 0.18} +2.86}180 00 00 


! Bullamully +--+... 
udapoonabetta -- 
Kunnoor Station -- 


92 


Bullamullys eeeeeeneseeeeenes 71655.7 
Kunnoor Station from 


Kudapoonabetta «+++ ++++++++/12995,8 


OPERATIONS IN. THE PENINSULA. 341 


SECTION, III, 


Southern series of triangles, commencing from 
Mullapunnabetta and Mysoor hill, and continued to 
the Malabar coast, terminating ‘with the distance 
from Bullamully to Kunnoor station, which is also 
brought out by the northern series. 


VI. ANGLES. 


At Mysoor Hill. 
Between And 
Referring Flag -+-+>- Mullapunnabetta 177°77' 26" 
25.45 
27.89 | 
5 28.5 
27, > -26".50 
27.5 
25.25 
‘ 23:5 
ae tee | 
Bettatipoor Hill --136 06 58.65 
; 57.42 
56.25 
Sao 
Referring flag, -+++++Mullapunnabetta 177 47 26.50 


57.01 


Bettatipoor Hill -+136 06 57.01 


Mullapunnabetta ----Bettatipoor Hill -- 41 40 29.49 
ee 2g 
At Mullapunnabetta. 
Referring flag --++-++++Mysoor Hill -- 37 59 12 
10.75 
1275 
12.25 
14 


Bettatipoor Hill «+ 12 26 40.75 


Z3 39.25 


349 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 
At Mullapunnabetta, continued. 


Between And 
Referring flag ++++++Soobramanee «+ ++59° 05’ 03”.25 
07.5 
Ray As ” 
6.75 06 . 
4.75 
8 
Referring flag ----++Mysoor Hill +--+ 37 59 12.58 
Bettatipoor Hill -- 12 26 39.97 
Mysoor Hill ---++--++Bettatipoor Hill -- 50 25 52.55 
Referring flag «+++-+-Soobramanee +--+ 59 5 06 
Bettatipoor Hill -- 12 26 39.97 
Bettatipoor Hill -+++Soobramanee ---- 46 38 26.03 
ae 
At Bettatipoor Hill. 
Mallapunnabetta +«---Mysoor Hill +--+ 87 53 46 
50.75 + 48.67 
49,25 
Soobramanee +++- 83 35 12.75 
11-5 
9 11.26 
11.55 
1D 
Seobramanee «++++»Taddiandamole -- 51 37 49.75 
52.25 
54.75 > 5% 
49.5 
53.75 
see 
At Taddiandamole. 
Betlabpoor Hill ++++Soobramanee -+-- 54 50 32.95 
30.5 
32.75 
32.5 31.14 
29.75 
32 
. 28.25 
Scobramanee -+++-+Mount Dilli -+++194 57 23 
23.5 
19.25 > 22.1 
22.5 
21.75 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 


At Mount Dill. 


’ Between 


Kunduddakamully ->Taddiandamole --60° 21" 24.75 i 


Munjuimpuddy 


--19 17 


At Kunduddakamutly. 


Goompay Hill ---+-++Annantapoor Hill--15 56 


Baekul --+++++++++»Annantapoor Hill --37 41 


Goompay Hill------ Ballanandgooda 


Munjuimpuddy 


Goompay Hill++++-++Annantapoor ---- 
Taddiandamole +++ -+Goompay Hill 


Annantapoor -++++-Taddiandamole «- 
> 37 41 43 .25 


Baekul oes. eeeccee 


Annantapoor --++-+-Baekul --- 
Goompay Hill+-++++Annantapoor ---- 


Baekul] «e+. -eves 


Taddiandamole 


Taddiandamole - - 


~-20 14 


st es 


2°25 442 


31 
23 


8 ° 
9. 
10. 


2D 


25 | 
sf 10.69 
“3 t 43.25 
25 
25 
25 
39.335 
als. 
: a7 
25 
29,75 


Taddiandamole - - 


15 §6 10.69 


eehoh 2587 


re 


166 58 37 .69 


—— 


155 19 39.06 


Oe ee 


- 37 41 43 .25 


.15 56 10 .69 


53 37 53 .94 


ed 


155.19 39 .06 
Baekul --+-+++++++-Munjuimpuddy - 


25 44 29.75 


-. RAR 


Munjuimpuddy -+++-Taddiandamole --129 85 9.31 


re ee ee 


ey Ge 


At Munjuimpuddy Hull. 


Kunduddakatully --Mount Dili - 


»+-100 26 09 
10: 
9 
8. 
ga 


At Annantapoor Fill. 


Goompay Hill---- 


seer 


Ballanandgooda 


Ballanandgooda -«-- 


Bullamully SS Ser 


-»Kunnoor Station °57.. 57,33. 


544 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 
At Baekul, 
Between i And 

Munjuimpuddy +«+++Mount Dilli -+--32° 37° 56”.75 
5.73 
5Susd 
Kunduddakamully 32 31 59.75 

63 

Goompay Hill ------ Annantapoor -++-11 45 56 
. ; 60.75 

62 
Goompay Hill +-+--- Kunduddakamully 92 36 56 .25 
; 55 25 
55,25 
55.29 
Munjuimpuddy -++-+Mount Dilli------ a2 3 5104 
Kunduddakamully 32 32 01 .37 
Mount Dill --+-++--- Kunduddakamully 65 09 59 .04 


5 


eect 


Kunduddakamully 107 11 12.5 
16 .28 
17.29 
At Goompay Hill. 
Bullamully-+-+++* 35 09 13.5 
. 16 .25 
14 
16 
Annantapoor +++.140 37. 3.74 
A .75 
6.5 
24.5 
Kunnoor Station 93 6 48.5 
3 : 50 
AG .25 
*Ballamully +--+. 35 9 14.04 
Kunnoor Station 93 6 48 .25 
3l 


i 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 345 


At Bullamiutly. 
Between And 


Balldnandgooda ++++Goompay Hill +» 79°17’ 59") 
43.13 > 4017 
i ; 44 .37 \ . 
Balroyndroog:+++ 80 53 15.75 ) 
bs « n - ore) 
92 : 
1.75 19.19 
397.25 
Balroyndroog ++-++++Kunnoor Station 118 2! 15.5 
Balroyndroog -+---+-Ballanandgooda-+ 80 53 19 19 
Ballanandgooda -++++Kunnoor Station 100 45 27 .31 * 


Ballauandgooda +-+++Goompay Hill ++ 79 17 42 .i7 


———_ 


Goowpay Hill -----+Kunnoor Station 81 27 45 .14 


ee Le Oe 


Vil. 'FRIANGLES. 


Mullapunnabetta from Mysoor Hill 209477.5 
a ee |  ?. CO PC Oe ee eee 
Angles for |Distance in 
Calculation. feet. 


20. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles, 


Difference 

Spherical 
Excess 
Error 


a eee 


——— | ——_— --—____—_ 


Mullapunnabeita --| 50° 25! 52”.55|--2".3 50° 25' 49".6 
~ JMysoor Hill------ 41 40 29 .49|\—2.3 41 40 20.6 
Bettatipoor Hill ++} 57 53 48 .07)—4.2 $7 53 43.8 
93 | 180 00 10.71 8.8 |+1’.91/180 00 00 
2, Mullapunnabetta +++ ++-+++e+-/179204.4 
4 . . § 
Bettatipoor Hill from 
3 Mysoor Hill eeoereesreereeneue 207867.4 


Mullapunnabetta from Bettatipoor Hill 1792944 


46 38 24 
83 35 8 
49 46 28 


Mullapunnabetta --| 46 38 26.03 |—1.98 
Bettatipoor Hill --| 83 35 11.26 |—3.23 
Soobramanee -+++}; . . 


> 


180 00 00 


Mullapunnabetta --+-.+++-++-/233359.7 © 


Soobramanee fom} 
. Bettatipoor Hill --+++ee+ ++++/170734 


346 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


Bettatipoor Hill from Soobramanee 170734 


Angles for 


No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. P iGaledlation, 


Difference, 
Spherica! 


ec meen 


Bettatipoor Hill...... SCS 5D ame sesete 
Soobramanee ......... 
Taddiandamole ...... 54 50 31.14|—1 .96 


| 2 * 62" . 5V° 37’ 50".1 
ert ie Bore 73 31 40.7 
° F 54 5029.2 

180 00 00 00 


Bettatipoor Hill... Soest 


95 


Taddiandamole from | 
Soobramanee Hill......cc000 


Soobramanee Hull from Taddiandamole 163730.4 


ee a ae 1 anae | 49 11 


36 .6 

Taddiandamole...... 74 37 12 .54|— 2.21 74 37 10.3 

Kunduddakamully | 56 11 14.75|— 1.71 56.11 131 
180 00 00 


Soobramance Hill cssecseee 190004.3 
Kunduddakamully from 


Taddiandamole  scersecsscssacesss 149160.2 
The supplemental chord angle at Tuddiansdnieie between Kua 

duddakamully and Mount Dilli, “yeduced as an observed one, 1s sub- 

tracted from the angle Soobramance hill and Mount Dilh, as ob- 

served at Taddiandamole, to give the angle Kunddudakamully and 

- Seobramanee hill. The station at Kunduddakamully could not be 
seen when the angles were taken at 7addiandamole. 


Laddiandamole from Kunduddakamully 149160.2 By 


SS LD 


Taddiandamole...... 50 20 8.26] « 

Kunduddakamully 69 18 26 Ay | Hy 61 69 18 25.10 
Mount Dilli ......... 60 21 28 .08|—~1 .441 - 60 21 26.64 | 

97 De | eirene s A8 

180 00 00 
Taddiandamole .sccscereerers 160548.9 * 
Mount Dilli tom} 

: Fiat, (ean Kunduddakamully eve seeeesose 132113 et 


a 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 347 


The supplemental chord angle at Kunduddakanully, between 
Mount Ditli and Munjuimpuddy, made as an observed angle by ap- 
plying the correction, and subtracted from the observed angle be- 
tween Muijwimpuddy and Taddiandamole, gives the angle AZount 
Dili and Taddiandamole as an observed angle. 


TRIANGLES—conrTinuep. 


Kunduddakamully from Mount Dilli 132113 


= Lv % ro 
= 5. © Angles for Distance 
No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. 2 2 E 5 Papi Nd ome 
oe lee 
Kunduddakamully | 86°01’ 12°.35|—1” 86° O01 11.35 
LU ea a 98 48 50.21 
Baekul ereecc eee oeesenecD 65 09 59 -04|—0O 6 65 09 58 4:4: 
98 sel the be SCAR" Hee 
180 00 00 OO 
7 Kunduddakamully,...scssssseessesesere 70162 
Baekul from 
Mount Dilli SPHERE R OCR EOR GES eEe See eeBeee 


145223.2 


In this triangle the same supplemental chord angle between J/ount 
Dili and Munjwimpuddy, corrected, is added to the.observed angle 
at Kunduddakamully, between Baekul and Moyuimpuddy, to get the 
observed angle between Mount Dill and Baekul. 


Kunduddakamully from Baekul 70102 


| {Kunduddakamully | 53 37 53.941—O .4 53 37 53.54 
| {Baekul «-+-++++-+! 92 36 55.58|—O .9] | 2 36 54.68 
|  |Goompay Hill----| . . . 33 45 11.78 
99 ! ) 180 00 00.00 


Kunduddakamully --++++----/126145.9 


Goompay Hill com) 


Baekul Sees eoevereseeeeseree 101681.2 


oS ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TRIANGLES—convTinvuep. 
Kunduddakamully Jrom Goompay Hill 126145.9 


| 


j 


a ~~ 
o Sw 
| 5 E¢ is 1D; a 
No | TRIANGLES. Obsd: Angles. | | | Bf. E Angles for Distance’ 
= ao S| Caiculation, in feet. 
‘ ja) nN 
Kunduddakamully | 26° 14’ 39°.35|—0".6 : 26° 14’ 387.75 
Goompay Hill ...... 83 44 30.21;—0O .7 83 44 29.5 
\Gallanandgooda ... fin Ya 70 00 51.75 


Ne ee eee 


180 00 00 


Kunduddakamully. .,...0sseseeeee os 
Ballanandgooda from } 
Goompaye Bibl: ..: cassssspresnnssncnde 


Goompay. Hill ......} 35 09 14 .94)--0.12 35 09 14.8 
Ballanandgooda ...) . .  . 65 33 62.7 
Bullamully ....000-) 79 17 42.71|—0.18 79 17 42.5 
101 PARIS Wee 
Goompay Hill Si tele ea 54990.2 
Bullamully from Air "a 
Ballanandgooda siescccsrseseersseer( S478) 
Goompay Hill from Bullamully 54990.2 
Goompay Hill ...... 57 57 33 31|—0 .28 51 57 33 
Bullamully .........00 81 27 45 .14,—0 .39 81 27 44.75 
Kunnoor Station... aa Oe ‘ | 40 34 42.25 


102 _ ee 


180 00 00.00 


Goompay Hill ......ssesseseeseeeerere|S3600.1 | | 
Kunnoor Station tom | al 
Bullamully SOR AOT AER OR EOO TOR aCe EER SEE ESF 71659.4, 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. “SAQ 
_ The same side Bulldmully from Kunnoor bill brought out down 

from the northern series is 71655.7 feet: therefore the mean will be 
71657.55 feet. Hence, as the side Bullamully from Kunnoor hill, 
brought down from the. northern series, is the mean, so is the side 
Meejar hill and Kuddapoonabetta, brought down from the northern 
seri€s, to 59764-6 feet, as derived from the mcan of both series. 


-_ 


TRIANGLES—continuep. 


; Meejar Hill Jrom Kudapoonabetta-59764.6 


@ 

cS @= 0 

= e5. 2 f 

3 22 S Angles for {Dist i 
No.| TRIANGLES. | Obsd. Angles. | 3 [52] = | Calculation. | feet 

A ae 


cae 


| 
| 


—_—————$—$—— |] 


——|Meejar Hill.......:.:..] 37° 55° 19".94|—0".12 
Kudapoonabetta ...| 58 24 56 .62/—0.17 
Kooliebogooda ...... fijen | 

103 | |) + | 


: § Meejar Hill-....secssesee[5 1224.7 
Kooliebogooda from 
N Kudapoonabetta.,........36956.5 


> 


350 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


SECONDARY TRIANGLES, 


Kudapoonabetta from Kooliebogooda 36956.5 


No. TRIANGLES. Obsd. Angles. | Distances from the intersected Objects in Feet. 
Kudapoonabetta «+ | 86°11’ 32 Si 17110.2 
Kooliebogooda 25 28 59 t Eedgah Station +++ { 39680.7 
Eedgah Station -- 68 19 19 

Eedgah Station from Koolebogooda 39680.7 
Eedgah Station »+ | 66 09 43 : -§ | 10073 
Kooliebogooda 14 30 24 t Station en eee | | 36782.3 
| Stationonthe Beach 99°19) 53". | | 
Bullamully from Goompay Hill 54990.2 
( Bulauinlighwe-*. | 76.3733) 9 an eas j 91763.7 
Geacapag Elna ve | 069) 16859 | ee 95446.7 
Mangalore +----- | 34 05 28 
Bullamully from Kunnoor Station '71659.4 
| Bullamully «--+-- 4 50 12 yi again { 91761.4 
Kunnoor Station+- | 158 37 57 Biel 21234.9 
ical caeee . 1G ST) oe hn | 


Mount Dilli from Kunduddakamully 132113 


| Mount Dillie«---- | 132 10 39 | arises, 87563.4 
Kunduddakamully 18 46 24 Semeners 201632.7 
29 02 57 | 


Cannanore «++s++- 


Taddiandamole from Mount Dill 160548.9 


Taddiandamole 31 59 09 ; 157072 
Mount Dilli..--.. |, 71°49 11  Cannanore a { 87574.2 
Cannanore «+++. 76 11 40 ; 


Taddiandamole from Cannanore 157072 
Taddiandamole -- i 16 51.05 t Gee ign in Raa { | 171686.4 


Cannanore -++++-. | 98 16 45 50294.4 
Station in Redoubt | 64 52 10 


Taddiandamole from Station in Redoubt 171686.4 
Taddiandamole 


29 26 : 
Station in Redoubt | 132 52 33 | } Tellicherry ++++sees { 


Tellicherry --+++ 46 38 O] 


175846.6 
. 6143.1 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 351 


SECTION IV. 


Latitude of Dodagoontah Station, with the position of its 
Meridian. 


 Dodagoontah station is selected as the point of depar- 
ture in preference to the observatory at Madras, as it-is 
nearly in the middle of the tials and its meridian ts 
intended to be carried down to Cape Comorin. It has al- 
ready been extended below the latitude of 11’, and the 
series of triangles from which it is deduced, being to form 
the foundation of all the branches which may hereafter be 
carried to each coast, I have considered it as the properest 
meridian to which ‘all latitudes and relative longitudes 

should be referred. 


8. Zenith distances of stars observed at Dodagoontah, 
with their corrections for precession, nutation, aberration, 
and the semi-annual solar equation, back to the beginning 
of the year 1805, for determining the latitude of that 
station. 


OBSERVATIONS AT DODAGOONT AH. 


a SERPENTIS. 
NEAREST POINT ON THE LIMB 5° 55’ S. 


1205. 


Obsd. Zenith Correct Zenith | Thermometers. 


Y Dv 
E Distances. 8 S Distances: isaac aa 
Month. oO; Upper. | Lower. 
July 10.) E. | 5°57’ 04’.49 | 7’.14 | 5°56’ 57°35 | 70° | 70° 
12.) W. | 5 56, 59.38 |'6.93 | 5 56 Ae 73 73 
15.) E. | 5 57 07.74 | 6.64 | 5 57 01.10 | 79.5 | 79 
18..W..1°5 56 54.73 16.36) 3:56 48 .37.1) 78 78 
19.) Bo] 5.57.9 64:16 .26 15,57 3.38) 76 76 
24.)W. | 5 56 59.24 | 5.82] 5 56 53.43 |-79.5 | 79 
26.| E. | 5 57 05.74} 5.66] 5 57 00.08 | 75.5 | 75 
27.|W. | 5-56 52.13 | 5.58 | 5 56 46.55 | 79 79 
29. E. | 5 56 59.41 | 5.43) 5 56 53.98 | 72 72 
| 31.) W..| 5 56 52.73 | 5.28 | 5 56 47.45 | 75.5 | 76 
- 1806, June 19.) E. | 5 56 16.76 {19.08 |, 5 56 57.68 | 73 73 
) 20.. W. | 5 56 10.88 118.95 | 5°56 51.93°| 72 72 
22.|W. | 5 56 07.38 \18.70 | 5 56 48.68 | 76 76 
23.) E. | 5 56 13.21 |18.57 | 5 56 54.64 | 73 73 


|e ee 


Mean: Sree: | 75cl 


SE eS 


352 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


e HERCULIS. 


NEAREST POINT ON THE-LIMB.1° 35’ N, 
" . 


i 


1805. 


¢ oo __.. | Thermometers. 
g Obsd. Zenith == | Correct Zenith 2 ‘ 
Month am Distance. 5* Distance, Upper. | Lower. 
7 , T a a 
July 12. | E. | 1°37’ 19.83. |.0’.39 | 1°37’ 20°.22 | 68° 69° \ 


37 20.26 | 72.5 | 73 


16. PHS 20253) | Oner hk 
19. |W. | 1.37 37.14 | 0.73.1 1 37 36.44.| 75 76 | 
28. |W. | 1 37 35.88 | 2.03 | 1 37 33.85 | 74 4. 
99. |} E. | 1 37 922.55 | 2.16 1.1 3720.39 | 76: | 7% 
Sty ios | 1.37; 23.16.) 2.42 | 1 37° 20-54, a8 68 .5 
August 2.) W. | 1 37 35°26 | 2.66 | 1 37 32.60 | 77-5 | 77.5 
7.(| E. |.1 37 24.76 | 3.26 | 1 37 21 504 Fh. 
8. |. W. | 1 37 36.89 | 3.37) 1.37 33.521 71 Soe 
9. | E. | 1 37 25.56 | 3:48 1 1-37 22.08.| 71 «/771 
102.) W..,\.1.37, 36..79)1.3..58 37.33.2121 73 73 
12. | E. | 1:37 24.76'| 3.78 | 1 37 20.98 | 74 74: 
14. |W. 1 1 37 37.87 | 3.987 1 37 33.89 | 74 74: 
16. | E. j-1 37 27.06 | 4.17 | 1 37 22.89.) 71.5 | 71 


Mean -+++) 73 73.5 
—a 
<a Te 
« OPHIUCHI. 


NEAREST POINT ON THE LiMB 0° 15’ S, 


+ 
July 12. E. | 0 17 14.491 0.29 | 0.17 14.78 | 69 70 
13. \W. | 0 17-03-10 | 0.46 | 0 17 03.36 | 71 72, 
15.1 E.| 0.27.19 54 70:77 | 0 114.31 4 ae 
19. } E. | 0 17 11 60 |1.43 | 0 17.13.03 | 75 - “75 } 
22. |W. | 0 16 59.10 | 1.89 | 0 17 00.99 | 74 The re) 
28. | E. |'0°17 10.74 |:2.76 | 0 17 13.50. |. 74 Tae 
29. |W. | 0 16 57.63 | 2.89 | 0 17 00.52 | 76.5 | 76 
30.) E./1'Q 17,09 24 1°S .02 10.17 19 26 7s ee 
31. | W. | O 16 58.93 | 3.15 | 0 17 02.08 | 69.5 | 69 
August 7. | E. | 0 17 08.51 | 4.02 | 0 17 12.53 | 72 72 
8. |W. | 0 16 57.24 | 4.14 ] 0 17 01.38 | 71 71 
9.) EF. [O17 09.08 14 2510-17 12 Se ae | 
10.) W. | 0.16 57.76 | 4.36.)°:0'°17 02.12.) TS.) as 
12.) -E. |'O 17-07 54 4.58/10 17-12 12 Teo ee 
14.) W. | 0 16 55.13. | 4.78 | 0 16.59.91 | 74 | Ta 9. 
17-\:E.]'0-17 8.74 }°5.07 7 0 17 13.81} 72.5 | 72.5 © 


§ 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 353 
' » AQUILA. 


NEAREST POINT ON THE LIMB 2° 50’ S. 
«ssid tients alas ntllapeclaaati tgs ea A EC A 


Thermometer. 


aie: S Observed Zenith 28 Correct ‘Zenith }| ost he 
Month. im Distance. 8 be Distance. Upper. | Lower. 
a 
Jiily 12. | E. | 2°50’ 55".13 | 7”.96 | 2°51' 03.09 | 67°.5 | 68° 
13, | W, | 2 50.42.80 | 8.17 | 2 50 50.97 | 70 70 
15. | E. | 2 50 51.50 | 8.57 | 2 51 0.07 | 69 70 
16. | W. | 2 50 42.50 | 8.77 | 2 50 51.27} 79 =| 71 
19. | E. | 2 50 55.50 | 9.36 | 2 51 4.86 | 74 73 
22. | W.:| 2 50 37.40 | 9.94 | 2 50 47.34 | 73 72.5 
31. | E. | 2 50 50.40 J11.58 | 2 51 1.98 | 69 69 
August 7. | W. | 2 50 39.40 112.76 | 2 50 52.16 | 70 70 
8. | E. | 2 50 46.13 {12.92 | 2 50 59.05 | 69.5 | 70 
9. | W. | 2 50 40.75 }13.08 | 2 50 53.83 | 70 70 
10. | E. | 2 50 49.50 |13 .24 |.2 51. 2.74 | 70 70 
12. |W. | 2 50 38-33 |13.55 | 2 50 51.88 | 73 72 
13. | E./] 2 50: 48.63 {13.70 | 2 51 2.33 | 70 70 
17: |W. | 2 50 38.30 |14.27 | 2 50 52.57 | 72 72 
20. | E. | 2 50 49.00 [14.70 | 2 51 38.70 | 70 70 
: 30. | W. | 2 50 38.20 15.91 | 2 50 54.11 | 72 | 72 
Mean--++| 70.6 | 70.6 
1G. 2 EO See 
ae 
ATAIR. 


NEAREST POINT ON THE LIMB 4 35 S, 


+ 

July 12.) E. | 4 37 55.62 | 8.49 | 4 38 O04. 

13. | W. | 4 37 42.39 | 8.68 | 4 37 51. 

15. | E. | 4 37 56.47 | 9.07 | 4 38 05. 

10. | W. | 4 37 43.39 | 9.26 | 4 37 52. 

19, | E. | 4 37 56.14 | 9.83 | 4 38 5. 

22, | W. | 4 37 42.01 [10.41 | 4 37 52. 

29. | E.| 4 37 53.89 111.65 | 438 5. 

30. | W. | 4 37 40.39 |11.82 | 4 37 52. 

31. | E. | 4 37 51.84 |11.99 |] 438 3. 

August 7. | W. | 4 37 40.96 |13.13 | 4 37 54. 

| 8. | E. |'4 37 48.37°113 .28 | 4 38 O1. 

9. | W. | 4 37 41.89 113.44 | 4 37 55. 

10. | E. | 4 37 48.34 |13.59 | 4 38 1. 

12. | W. |"4 37 39.76 13.89 | 4 37 53. 

13. | E. | 4 57 48.17 [14.04] 4 38 Q. 
17. | W. | 4 37 41.86 |14.60 | 4 37 56.45 
20. | E. | 4 37 49.37 |14.99 | 4 38 4.36 
30. |W. 1 4 37 37 89 116.10 | 4 37 54.05 
: Mean-++- 

Aa 


354 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


&£ AQUIL. 
NEAREST POINT ON THE LIMB 7° 5’ S. 


1806. Thermometer, 


Observed Zenith 


5 Correct Zenith 
Distance. = 


Distance. 


Face. 


Upper. | Lower. 


Month. 


er a ff | 


uy 
° 03’ 38".62 |26".27 


August 25. | E. | 7°0 7° 4° 4°89 | 76° | 76° 
26. | W. | 7 03 29.87 |26.37 | 7 3 56.24} 72 73 
27. | E. | 7 03 40.87 |26.47|-7. 4 7.341% 71 71 
Mean--+--| 73 73.3 
ao 
ARCTURUS. 
NEAREST POINT ON THE LIMB 7 10 N. 
1805. = 
July 11. W. 17.12.1943 1.7 50.07 12 19.95 
18.3 E: 4 7.11. 58..13 |.7 36 | 712 65.48 
16. | W. | 7 12 11.36 | 7.16 | 7 12 18.52 
99.; E. | 7 11 59.98 |} 6.85 1:7 12 6.838 
96. | W. 1.427 13'.26.1 660007. 22 VS) Sa 
Mean+ee- 


MARK AB. 
NEAREST POINT ON THE LIMB 1 10 N. 


August 13. | E.| 1 9 50.40 loo 1 9 98.28|68 | 68 
14.|W. | 110 5.30 |22.32|1 9 42.98 | 69 | 70 
17. | E.| 1 9 55.00 |22.93| 1 9 32.07] 69 } 70 
21. | W.| 110 5.30 23.72} 1 9 41.58] 68 | 69 
23. | W. | 1 10 06.00 |24.09 | 1 9 41.91] 72. | 72 
28.|W.| 110 4.40 |24.98; 1 9 39.42] 68 | 69 
29.| E.| 1 10 00.00 (25.18 | 1 9 34.82] 72 | 72 
30. | W.}] 110 6.50 (25.35 | 1 15} 71. | 71 
69.6 | 70.1 
——— 
» PEGASI. 
NEAREST POINT ON THE LIMB 15 N 
August 22. | E.| 1 6 21.26 |24.04} 1 5 57.22/68 | 69 
23.|W.|1 6 31.63 |24.42} 1 607.21| 70 | 71 
27. 1 6 23.50 24.98] 1 5 58.56] 68 | 69_ 
30. 1° 6 35.13 |25.44| 1 6 09.69] 68 | 70 


a, Mean:-+-! 68.5 | 69.8 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 355 


Means of the Zenith Distances taken on the right and 
left Arcs, corrected for refraction, equation of the 
sectorial tube, and the mean runs of the Micrometer. 


Previous to this arrangement of the zenith dis- 
tances it may be proper to say a few words on the 
different corrections here mentioned. 


The refraction is had from the tables of mean re- 
fraction, and no notice taken of the barometer or 
thermometer, or of the heights of the stations above 
the level of the sea, considering it doubtful what cor- 
rections to apply until observations are made, and 
tables of refraction constructed, for this climate, and 
for different elevations, 


The corrections for the micrometer were deter- 
mined by taking the runs between every dot on the 
arc when the mean temperature was 74°, it having 
been discovered upon more minute attention, that 
one degree on the limb was more than 3600 divisions 
marked seconds on the micrometer ; and the average 
of all the results gave 3604. Therefore one minute 
counted by that scale required a deduction of 0’.066 
to give its true measure from the nearest‘dot. In all 
these observations two thermometers were used, one 
opposite the upper axis, the other opposite the arc, 
and the experiments for ascertaining the runs were 
made when the thermometers stood at the same 
~ degree. 


This error in the scale of the micrometer has doubt- 
less arisen in a great measure from the unequal expan- 
sion of the sectorial tube and the frame which carries 
it, whereby the point of the screw does not coincide 
with the centre of the steel plate against which it 
_ presses, and in consequence causes a greater equation 
than what would arise simply from the expansion of 


Aa 2 


356, 
the arc while the point rested on the centre of the 
plate. Exclusive of the above correction, I have en- 


deavoured to make some allowance for the variation 
of temperature from 74°, but I have found it too 


ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


trifling to be noticed. 


The correction for the sectorial tube, is a small 
equation which arises when the temperature above is 
different from that below ; on which account the ex- 
pansion and contraction of the tube are not in the 
same ratio with those of the arc. ‘This irregularity, 
like the last, is in general very inconsiderabie, though 
the correction for i it is taken into account. 


ZENITH DISTANCES at Dodagoontah, arranged 
and finally corrected. 


a SERPENTIS. 


1805. 1805. 
; Left Are. Right Are. Mean. 
Month. Month. 
July 10. | 5°56’ 57’.35 | July 12. | 5°56’ 52’.45 [Mean +++++++-5° 56! 53’.82 
ied oot LO 18. | 5 56 48 .37 |Refraction, &c.-- .4+ 5.82 
19. | 5 57 3.38 24.) 5 56 53 42 
26. | 5 57 0.08 nt 5 56 46 .55 |Zenith Distances 5 56 59.64 
29. | 5 56 53.98 5 56 47 45 
1806. 1806. 
a es 19. | 5 57 57 68 ate 20.| 5 56 51.93 
5 56 54.64 2.| 5 56 48 .68 
Minis: »eeel 5 56 57.67 | Mean--+-| 5 56 49 .97 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. $37 


. 


« HERCULIS. 


EEE EE aE STINE USSSA REREERSenne 


1805 1805. 
Left Arc. __- Left Arc. Mean. 
Moath Month. 
July 19. | 1°37 36’.41 | July 12.) 1°37’ 20.22 |Mean--++---. 1°37’ 27".52 
28. | 1 37 33.85 16. | 1 37 20.26 |Refraction, &c. + 1.47 
August 2. | 1 37 32.60 99. | 1 37 20.39 
S.1el 37 35..52 31. | 1 37 20.74 |Zenith Distance ] 37 28 .99 
| 10. | 1 37 33.21 |August 7. } 1 37 21.50 — 
14. | 1 37 33.89 9.) 1 3 222 .08 
1204), Loy. 20.95 
16.) 1 37 °22..89 


———— 


Mean----| 1 37 33.91 | Mean----| 1 37 21.13 


ee 


~ « OPHIUCHI. 


re 


1) O3u56 (Mean ssl'ss0eO 17 hch0 


July 12. | 0 17 14.78 July 13. | 0 
-45. 10 17 14.31 29.1017 0.99 Refraction, Brows |e oe hen 
19. | 0 17 13.03 99.1017. 0.52 | 
98.'| 0 17 13.5 31. |017 2.08 |Zenith Distance Q 17 7-71 
« 30.}] 0 17 12.26 |August 8 | 017 1.38 
Ree tO, 1250 sl 10. bo 1% 2.012 
9. | 0 17 13.33 14. | 0 16 59.91 
12. | 0 17 12.12 
17. | 0 17 13.81 
“Mean +*+}-0 17°13730 | Mean-+--| 0.17 1.51 


iS) | » AQUILE. 


July 12.| 251 3.09} July 13.°} 2 50 50.97 |Mean «+++++++2 50 57.0 
$e 251 O07 16. | 2 50 51.27 | Refraction, &c. + 2.78 
9, 2 G1. 4.86]. 2 BE aO Sr ee — 

31. | 2 51 1.98 |August 7. | 2 50 52.16 |Zenith Distance 2 50 59.78 

i. 8. | 2 50 59.05 9. | 2.50 53.83 : 
£0.) 22. 51) 2 74 12. | 2 50 51.88 

. 13.-}-2 51-2 93 17. | 2 50 52.57 

4 20.'| 2 51 3.70 30. | 2 50 54.11. 


—_ — A _—_ 


ewon| 2 GO ST 277 


358 ACCOUNT OF RIGONOMETRICAL 
ATAIR. 
1805. ? 1805. 
a oS CA im Left Arc, [=——--——-_|_ Right Arc. Mean, 
Month. Month. 
July 12. | 4°38 4°11 |) July 13. | 4°37 51'.07 |Mean’ -+'+++-+.4° 37 58.73) 
15.| 4 38 5.54 16. | 4 37 52.65 | Refraction, &c. + 4.61% 
19. | 4 38 5.97 22. | 4 37 52.42 — a 
29.| 4 38 5.54 30. | 4 37 52.21 |Zenith Distance 4 38 sinks | 
31.| 498 $8.83 |August 7. | 4 37 54.09 |— 
August 8.| 4 38 1.66 4 37 55.33 
LO..¢ 4 38°" tae 12. | 4 37 53.65 
13.] 4 38 2.2) 17. | 4 37 56.45 
20.| 4 38 4.36 30. | 4 37 54.05 
Mean-++-| 4 38 3.91 | Mean++++| 4 37 53 9 
i 
ee . 
6 AQUILA. 
1806. 1806. : 
. August 25..| 7 4 4.89 |August 26. | 7 3 56.24 |Mean ----++--7.4 1.18 
QT 4. 77.84 Refraction, &c.-+ + 7.18 
Mean-++-| 7 4 6.11 | Mean----| 7 3 56.24 | Zenith Distance 7 4 8.36) 
| 
MARK AB, 
1805. 
August 14. ] 1 9 42.98 |August 13. | 1 9 28.28 |Mean -+++e+++) 9 36.57 
21.)}1 9 41.58 17. | 1 9 32.07 | Refraction, &c. + 1.19 
23.1; 1 9 41 91 29.} 1-9 34.82 eat aie 
28.11 9 39.42 Zenith Distance 1 9 37.76 
$0. | 1° 9 41.15 


Mean:+--| 1 9 41.41 | Mean--+-| 1 9 81.73 


ee 


- : » PEGASI. 


-21 {August 22. | 1 5 57.22|Mean «+-++00-) 6 3.17 


August Sail 6 7 5 
30.1 1:6 9.69 27.11 5 58.56 | Refraction, &c. + 1. 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 259 


ARCTURUS. 
1805. 
July Abd 7?.19'-19*.98 July 13. | 7°12° 5.49 |Mean ++eeeeee 7°12’ 12”.81 
feel 7.12.18 .52 22./ 7 12 6.83 |Refraction, &c.-- + 7 .03 


20. |.7 12 19.95 te See 
Zenith Distance--7 12 19 .84 


Mean---+-+| 7 12 19.47 | Mean-e--!| 7 12 6.16 


ee — > ee 


The Latitude of Dodagoontah Pe ote deduced from the foregoing 
tars. 


From the beginning of 1805. 


STARS. Mat aL SSI TT Go le on ae Latitude. 
Mean Declination. | Correct Z. Distance. 


‘ 


—— a 


=. 


« Arcturus-+ssessseeee| 20°12 19.23 N. 7°12 19”.84 N.| 12? 59/ 59”.39 N. 


aw Serpentis-+-++++++++-| 7 3 0.3 5 56 59 .64°S. 59 .97 
a Herculis «+--+. ++++++| 14 37 30.96 1 37.28 .99 N. 61 .97 
« Ophiuchi -+-+++++++| 12 42 50.91 0:17. 17.718. 58 .62 
yp Aquila -+-+e+-+eee+-] 10 8 58.34 2 50 59.78 S 58 .12 

Alair ssceeceeeeeeee! § 21 53.53 438 3.34 8. 56 .87 
B Aquilee -+eeeeeseeee| 5 55 52.71 i nh oS 73'S: 61 .44 

Markab --++++++--++) 14 9 40.09 de” OUST 76nN: G2:.55 
v Pegasicesseeseeeeees| 14 6 4.7 64 4523: Ne 60 .47 


_—_ 


Means: 35 12 59 59 .O1 


This is one of the stations alluded to in the note p. 291, where 
the plummet is supposed to have been drawn to the northward; in 
which case the latitude here deduced must be something in defect. 

9. Pole-star observations at Dodagoontah Station, reduced for de- 
termining the position of the Meridian. 


1805. Angle between | Angle between 
quparent Bt em Latitude. Azimuths, the Pole-star and| the N. Pole and 
Month. ; Lamp. Lamp. 


1°46’ 42".16}) 1°31’ 53".00] 0° 14’ 49".16 


July 19. | 1°43’ 58”.20/) ( 
22.| 1 43 57.57 || 1 46 41.70} 1 31 56.25] O 14 45.45 
August 8. | 1 43 54.07 | re | 1 46 38.10] 1.31 51.25] O 14 46.85 
12 1 43 53.05} | ° 1 46 37.06} _1 31 48.50] O 14 48.56 
17. | 1 43 51.70 ‘ S }] 1 46 35.67] 1 31 46.25} 0 14 49.42 
‘48. | 143 51.441 o& }| 1 4635.40] 1 31 47.50] 0 14 47.90 
19. 143 51.16/| “& J|}-1 46 35.10] 1 31 45.50; 0 14 49.60 
> 23.} 1 43 50.04)| 2 | 1 46 $3.97) 1 31 45.50} 0 14 48.47 
26. 1 43 49 .09} | 1 46 32.99] 1 31 43.50] O 14 49.49 
27. | 1.43 48.82] ) \{ 1 46 32.73} 1 31 44.50) 0 14 48.28 
Angle between the N. Pole and Referring Lamp N. easterly-+---++---- 0 14 48.31 
Angle between the Referring Flag and Savendroog ++++++se++-++++-|104 4 29.68 


Ancle between the N. Pole and Savendroog Station -+++++++++e+e++2+|103 490 41 37 
A LLL LDA EDL LDL LLL L ALL LALA AAA ALLIELALD 


360 — we ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 
SECTION V. 


Length of the Perpendicular Degree, and the Latitudes and relative 
Longitudes. of all the great Stations of Observation, and other 
places on the two Coasts. 


10. The measurement of an are perpendicular to the meridian, 
and the length of a degree in latitude 12’ 55° 10”. 


For determining the latitude of Savendroog, we have at Doda- 
goontah station, the bearing of Savendreog station with the meridian 
76° 10’ 18’.63 S. Wand the distance between these two stations 
= 121933.2 feet. These will give the westing of Savendroog = 
118399.2 feet, and the southing of the point on the meridian of 
Dodagoontah, where the perpendicular let fall from Savendroog, will 
cut the said meridian — 29143.3 feet, which is equal to an arc of 
4’ 48”.88, and this deducted from the latitude of Dodagoontah gives 
12° 55’ 11".03. The westing will give an arc perpendicular to the 
meridian 19’ 29’.04, with which, and the co-latitude of the above 
point, the latitude of Savendroog will be had 12° 55° 10”@4. 


— 


Nore. The meridional degree is taken at 60498 fathoms, being the 
computed degree for Latitude 12°55 10°, as deduced from the mea- 
sured degrees for latitude 11° 59° 55" and latitude 52° 02 30’. 


@PERATIONS IN THE 


PENINSULA. 


$61 


Pole-Star Observations at Savendroog Station, reduced for determin- 
ing the position of the Meridian. 


1804 


———- +. 


Month. 
March 6. 


Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp ---++++«-+++- 


Distance. 


te 
1 
1 
14 
1 / 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 


59 .62 
59 .91 
00.19 
00 .49 
00 .96 


Apparent Polar Latiind 


VS",OL GS ot 


Angle between |Angle between the N, 


Azimuths. the Poie-star and} Pole and Referring 
Referring Lamp. Lawp. 

1°46. 39".72| 2° 28’ 56”.75} - 0°42’ 17.03 
1 46 40 2.28 57 .25|") O 42 17.25 
1 46 40'.3 1 2 28°54 O 42 13.7 
1 46 40 571 2 28 53.5 0 42 12.93 
1 46 40.86] 2 28 57.75} 0 42 16.89 
1 46 41.73]. 2 28 56 O 42 14.27 
1 46 42.03] 2 28 58.75}. 0:42 16.72 
1 46.42.31) 2 28 58.75) | 0 42 16.44 
1 46 42.62} 2 28 58.25] 0 42 15.63 
1 46 45.11] 2 29 01.12) 0 42 


Angle between the Referring Lamp and Mullapunvabetta 


Angle between the North Pole and Mullapunnabetta + +++ --++-- 


Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp +«+ 
Angle between the Referring Lamp and Yeiracondah - 


Augle between the North Poleand Yerracondah -.--. 


92 


O+ 49 .45 


‘| 92 47 05.34 E. 


18.02: 


0 42 15.89 E 
90 40 01.16 


—_——= 


89 57 45.27 We> 


0 42 15.89 E, 


—EEE 


Pole-Star Observations at Mullapunnabetta Station, reduced for de- 
termining the position of the Meridian. 


Nov. 7. 

8. 
10. 
12 
13: 
14, 
15. 
16, 
es 
19. 
12% 


13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
20. 
24, 
25. 


1805 
Dec. 


fe re ee ee la 


43 
43 
43 
43 
4D 
43 
43 
43 
43 
43 


43 


43 
43 


42 .37| 
4.2 .03 
41 36 
40.71 
40 .39 
40 07 
39.75 
39 .42 
39.11 
38 .49 


13 .24 


13 .04 
12.85 
12 .67 


12.49) 


11 .84 
11 .29 
11.16 


Ae ee nn ll ll ool el 


46 


46 


24° {170 
293 .65|170 
22. .90|170 
22 .29)170 
21 .90}170 
91 64/170 
21 .81\170 
stor AW 
20 .651170 
29 .02/170 


54..11,)170 


53 .9 |170 
53 .71|170 
53 .52|170 
53 34,170 
52 .67|170 
52 6111170 
51 .99/170 


43 
43 
43 


| 
15 .25|172 
18. -..J172 
18 .37|172 
19 .13]172 
19 .38|172 
20 {172 
19 .62|172 
20 {172 
19 .25|172 
19 .25|172 


49 172 


4§ .251172 
A§ 121172 
AZ 5751172 
49 .25|172- 
AS .2 1172 
AS .5 \172 
50 35/172 


29 39.25 
29 41.65 
29 41.33 
29 41.42 
29 41,34 
29 41 04 
29 40.93 
29 40.97 
29 39.9 

29 39 .27 


29 45.11 


29 42.15 
29 41.83 
29 41.27 
29 42 .59 
29 40 .S7 
29 40.61 
29 42.34 


> 


a 


Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp ---+++++++++{172 29 41.25 W. 
Angle between the Referring Lamp and Savendroog -+++++++++| 97 41 34.36 


Angle between the North Pole and Savendroog -+-+++++eeeees| 89 48 44.39 E. 


en 


‘ 


$62 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL as 


Pole-Star Observations at Yerracondah Station, reduced for determin- 
3 ing the position of the Meridian. 


1804 Angle between |Angle betweén the N. 
( ApHasepe Polpe Latitude} Azimuths. the Polelatak and Pole and Referring 
Month. Rrietance. Referring Lamp. Lamp. 
ere mere | eeemeeeemnenioenoeeneseneaewms | Seema ees | ane | 

Jan. 15. | 1° 43° 49".81 1°46" 30".42| 9° 3’ 6.5 |> 7°16 36°.08 
16. )S 1 43 49.82} 1 46 30.43} 9 3 3.851 7 16 38.42 
19. 1 43 49.9 %, 146° S051] «9. Gis? 7 16 31.49 
20. | 143 49.92) ao 1 46:°30.53|- 9 3. 3.5.1.7). 167aa..07 
21.| 1 43 49.95) ‘S 1 46 30.56 9 3 5.5 | 7 16 34.94 
22.) 1 43 50.02} & 1 46 30.63} 9 3 3.75] 7 16 33.12 
23. | 1 43 50.07] és 1 46 30.68} 9 3 4 7 16 33.32 
26.1" 1 43 50.26). ° 1 46 30.871 9 3 5 7 16 34.12 
O76 Ne PAS 5Oa35 1 46 30.96, 9 3 4.25) 7: 16.33.38 


Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp}----+++++++- 16 33 .64 E. 
Angle between the Referring Lamp and Savendroog ++++++++++| 94.16 14.97 


“NI 


Angle between the North Pole and Savendroog sovccecceccces| 86 59 41.33 W. 


As the latitudes were necessary for computing the azimuths, they 
were first had spherically for the two stations at MJ/ullapunnabetta 
and Verracondah, by taking the westing and easting from the me- 
ridian of Savendroog, and converting them into parts of great circles. 
These came so near the truth, that on recomputing the azimuths 
by the latitudes finally brought out, there was no sensible dif- 

erence. 


It may be remarked here, that no double azimuths have been 
taken. ‘The pole-star being so low, and the vapour in the atmo- 
sphere so great in general, that I have never, except in two in- 
stances, been able to discern it while the sun was above the horizon. 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 363 


The Arc comprehended by the Meridians of Savendroog 
and Mullapunnabetta. 


Let S and M be tthe stations at Suvendroog and 
Mullapunnabetta, and 
P the pole, and SR Pp 
be a great circle per- 
pendicular to the meri- 
dian SP at S, and also 
Ss a parallel of latitude 
at'the same point S. 
Then we have given the 
observed angles PSM 
and PMS, the distance 
SM, and the latitude of 
S, to find the latitude 
of M. 


In the spheriodical triangle MSR, the angle MSR 
= 90° — 2: PSM = 0° 2’ 14”.73, and the angle SMR 
= 180: — 2 PMS = g0° 11 15”.61, and these being 
Corrected for the Chords, we shall have the angle 
MSR = 0 2’ 14’.73, and the angle RMS = 90° 11 
15°.58 for the chord angles. Whence the angle SRM 
= 180° — sums of the above angles, or 89" 46' 29.69, 
and with these and the side or chord MS, the dis- 
tance given by the triangles, we shall find the chord 
of the perpendicular arc SR = 357644.6 and the side 
MR = 233.64 feet, and this last may be taken either 
as a chord or arc indifferently. 


Now the spherical excess of the triangle SMR is 
0”.02, and the sum of the corrections for the angles 
MSR and SMR being — 0’.03, the difference between 
this sum and the said spherical excess is + 0'.01 the 
correction for the angle MSR, which applied to the 
chord angle, we get the angle MRS or PRS as an 
observed angle, equal 89> 46’ 29".68. 


Continue the meridian PS to t, and draw Rt pa- 
rallel to Ss. Then, since the small angle SRt, or its 
equal RSs, is half the difference between the angles 


364 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETSRICAL” 


PRS and PSR, that is half the difference between 
90° and the angle PRS as an observed one, we have 
ia i ES = 297-68) — 5 45°.16, the angle RSs. Hence 
in triangle RSs considered as a plane one, there — 
are given the angles at R and S$ and the side SR, as 
formerly found, from which will be had Ss and-Rs 
equal 357642.6 feet and 702.51 feet respectively ; as 
also Ms (= RS — RM) equal 468.87 feet, which 
measures the distance between the parallels of $ and ) 
M. But 468.87 feet as an arc on the meridian is 
4°.65, which substracted from the latitude of 8 gives 
- 19° 55 05".59 for the latitude of M, the station at 
ALullapunna betta. 


Hence in the triangle SPM_ there are given the 
sides SP and MP (the co-latitudes of S and M) and. 
the angles PSM, PMS, the observed angles at S and 
M. Then, as the tangent 77 4 52" 085: tangent 
Oo 0’ 2'.325 :: tangent 89° 53 14.83: tangent "O° 4 
31’.26; which last applied to the half sum of the 
observed angles, we get 89° 5 314.83 + 431" 96 = 
89° 57° 46 09 and 89: 59 14" $3 — 4' 31°.96 = 89° 
48 43".57 for the angles at Savendroog and Alulla- 
punnabetta such as they would have been observed 
ona sphere. Then. proceeding by spherical compu- 
_ tation with the sides PS, PM, and the angles PSM 
and PMS given, the angle SPM, or difference of 
longitude of S and M will be had equal 1° 00! 247.44, 
from which and the side SP in the right angled 
spherical triangle PSR the side SR or arc SRq per= | 
pendicular to the meridian PS at the point S will be 
had equal 0° 58’ 52.71. 


Now the chord of the are SR is had = 357644. 6 feet, 
half of which will be as the sine of half the arc SR, 
and from which is got the radius of the same are, 
and thence the length of the are SR is found to be 
3$57650.8 feet. Then as 58’ 59"°.71 : 357650.8 :: 60 
> 364463.3 fect, or 60743.8 fathoms, for the measure 
of the degree at tight angles to thé meridian of, 
wWavendroog. . hip 


° 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 365 


The Arc comprehended by the Meridians of Savendroog 
and Yerracondah. 


Let S and Y be the stations at Savendroog and Yer- 
racondah respectively, 
and let the latitude of 
Y be deduced from 
that of S, the angles 
PSY and PY S having 
been observed. Let 
SR be a great circle 
perpendicular to the 
meridian SP at S, and 
St’ a parallel of lati- 
tude at the same point 
5... Here the angle 
Rave: PSYs-.90":=— 

2 47 5’.34, and the angle RYS being the sites ed 
angle at Y = 86° 59’ 41’ 33: These: angles being 
corrected for the chords, the supplement to ) their sum 
will be the chord angle at R in the spheriodical tri- 
angle SRY. Let the chords of SR and YR be com- 
puted with the corrected angles, then if the angle at 
R be augmented by the difference between the sum 
of the corrections for the other two angles and the 
spherical excess, it will become 90° 13 14 74, or such 
as would have heen observed at R. Hence 180° — 
z SRY = 89°46 45”.26 the angle (RS, and by con- 


sidering the triangle StR asa plane one, the small 
angle tSR is equal ee O° 6 37'.37. With 
this angle, and the angle tRS, and the distance SR, 
as frail ‘above, the nal oie tR is had = 675. 86 
feet, which sodad to RY = 17067.72. gives tY = 
17743.58 feet, the distance between the parallels of 
Sand Y. But 17743.58 feet is equal to an arc on 
the meridian of 2’ 55.98, and this deducted trom the 
latitude of Savendroog, gives 12° 5% 14.26 for the la- 


titude of Yerracondah. 


. Hence, with the co-latitudes of Savendroog and 


366 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


Yerracondah, and the observed angles PSY and PYS, 
we have, the tangent of half the sum of the first, to 
the tangent of half their difference, as the tangent of 
half the sum of the second, to tangent of 2° 54’ 25”.92, 
their half difference: from which we get the greater 
angle at S = 92° 47’ 49".25, and the less angle at Y 
= 66° 58° 57’.41 thus corrected for computing sphe- 
tically: and with these and co-latitudes, proceeding 
us before, the angle SPY will be had = 0° 59’ 14.83, 
and the perpendicular arc = 0° 57’ 44”.86. But the 
chord subtended by this arc is 350824 feet, and there- 
tore the arc itself 350827.7 feet. Then, as 57.’74767 
: 350827.7 feet :: 60’ : 364510.8 feet, or 60751.8 fa- 
thoms, for the length of the degree at right angles to 
the meridian of Savendroog, as deduced from the dis- 
tance between Savendroog and Yerracondah ; and the 
leneth of the perpendicular degree deduced from the 
distance between Savendroog and Mullapunnabetta 
being 60743.8 fathoms, the mean of these two, or 
60747.8 fathoms, may be considered as nearly the 
true measure for latitude 12° 55’ 10”. 


‘If the ratio of the earth’s diameters be taken as 1 
: 1.003125, and the meridional degree in latitude 
11° 59’ 55” be 60494 fathoms; then, by using these 
data, the computed meridional degree on the ellipsoid 
in latitude 12°55’ 10” will be 60498 fathoms; with 
which and the above ratio, the computed degree at 

tight angles to the meridian in the same latitude will 
be had 60858 fathoms, which exceeds the measured 
one by 110 fathoms nearly; so that we may infer 
from this, either that the earth is not an ellipsoid, or 
that this measurement is incorrect. 


The more we investigate this interesting subject, 
and the more ample means we employ to ascertain 
the exact figure of the earth, the more seems to be 
wanting to satisfy our research; and if we feel re- 
luctant in giving up the elliptic hypothesis, because 
it is consonant to that harmony and order with 
which we are familiar, the discord which these re- 
sults indicate, afford by no means sufficient evidence 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 367 


to induce us to abandon that theory. The great 
nicety in making the pole-star observations is well 
understood, and it will be made more manifest in 
the case before us by increasing or diminishing the 
half sum of the angles with the meridians, recipro- 
cally taken at Mullapunnabetta and Savendroog, by 
one second only, when it will appear that a difference 
of nearly one hundred and fifty fathoms, in the perpen- 
dicular degree, will be occasioned thereby. 


I am fully aware of the delicacy necessary in taking 
these angles, and I am also aware that some eminent 
mathematicians consider the method of determining 
the difference of longitude by the convergency of 
meridians as insufficient in these low latitudes; yet I 
am of opinion that by repeating these observations 
whenever stations can be found, either in the same, 
or in different latitudes, the truth may ultimately be 
very nearly attained. I at one time had determined 
on increasing the number of observations at AZulla- 
punnabetta, Sacvendroog and Yerracondah, on my re- 
- turn to the eastward; but when I was at A/ullapun- 
nabetta a second time, and had increased the number 
of pole-star observations there to eighteen. and had 
also taken several other angles between Savendroog 
and the referring lamp, and after all finding that the 
angle between the meridian and Savendroog was al- 
tered only 4, part of a second, I did not think it ne- 
cessary to go to the other stations, particularly as 
the observations there had been made under the most 
favorable circumstances. It is, notwithstanding, 
desirable that many more measurements of the kind 
should be made, and that other methods should be 
tried for getting the length of a degree of longitude, - 
particularly that of carrying a good time-keeper be- 
tween two meridians at a known distance, a method 
which has been strongly represented to me by the 
Astronomer Royal, and which I mean to put in prac- 
tice in the course of my future operations. I had 
also devised another method by the instantaneous 
extinction of large blue lights fired at Savendroog, the 
times of which were to be noticed by observers at 


368 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


Mullapunnabetta and Yerracondah, the distance of 
whose meridians on a parallel of latitude: passing 
through Sevendroog being nearly 135 miles. The 
experiments were attempted, but the weather was so 
dull that the lights could scarcely be distinguished. 
There is bestdes a difficulty in fixing the precise mo- 
ment of extinction; and even in the most favorable 
state of the atmosphere, when the lights may be 
distinctly seen with the naked eye at near seventy 
miles distance, to come within half a second of the 
truth, would be as near as the eye is capable of, 
which is equal to 7’4 in an angle at the pole: but 
the mean of a great number of successful results 
might come very near the truth. 


Since the triangles in this survey have been carried 
direct from the observatory at Madras to Mangalore, 
by which easy means are offered to determine the 
length of a parallel of latitude subtended by two me- 
ridians nearly five degrees and a halt distant from 
each other, it may be further suggested, whether a 
long course of corresponding observations made at 
Madras observatory and at another place on the 
Malabar coast, by the eclipses of the satellites, oc- 
cultations of stars by the moon, &c. might not afford 
another eligible method for determining the length 
of a degree of longitude. 


In short, the, difficulty of obtaining this desidera- 
tum, and the important advantages to geography and 
physical science which must accrue therefrom, are 
such powerful incitements to a zealous prosecution of 
the inquiry, that I may venture an assurance of leay- 
ing nothing undone, which may come within the 
compass of my abilities, to give every possible satis- 
faction on the subject; and if my endeavours to 
throw some light on the path to future discovery be 
successful, I shall close the period of my labours 
with the grateful reflection, that, while employed in 
conducting a work of national utility, [ shall have 
added my humble mite to the stock of general 
science. 3 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 369 


11. Latitude and longitude of Kylasghur. 


Let Y be Yerracondah, K Kylasghur, and P the 
pole. Then in the spherical triangle PYK there are 
given YP = 77° 7 45’.74, the co-latitude of Yerra- 
condah, YK = 46 33.51, , 
the oblique arc as com- 
puted on the spheroid ; 
and the angle PYK = 
92° 13.46'.11, as observed 
at Yerracondah, to find 
PK, the co-latitude of 
Kylasghur which by 
spherical computation 
will be had equal 77° 
9 38.7, and therefore 
the latitude equal 12° K. 
50 21.3, with which 
latitude the azimuths being reduced, the pole star 

. observations at Kylasghur will stand as follow: 


1805. Angle between | Angle between the 


_——- 


Month. eyepanre: Referring Lamp. Referring Lamp. 
Dec. 3. | 1°43’ 54".74 |} °2 (| 1°46735".41 | 3°28" 57" 1°49 21", 
7. | 1 43 53 82 Ss 1 46 34.51 | 3 28 52.4 1 42 17. 
12. | 1 43 52 .84 iS 1 ‘40439-5613 28 55°25 1 42°21. 
13. |°1: 43 52.5 : 1 46 33.46 | 3 28..53..5 1 42 20. 
Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp----- codeooet 1 42 20. 
Angle between the Referring Lamp and Yerracondah +++-++++++} 89 17 57. 


Apparent Polar Latitude} Azimuths. the Pole-star and North Pole and 


~_—_* 


59 

89 

69 

04 

30 E, 
607 


Angle between ihe North Pole and Yerracondah -++++++++++e+++| 87 35 37.307 W. 


If the same angle be brought out by using the 
co-latitudes of Yerracondah and Kylasghur, and the 
observed angle at Yerracondah, between the N. pole 
and Kylasghur, it will be 87° 35 37°, very nearly the 
same as was observed. , } 


__ Then again, as the sine of either of the co-latitudes, 

is to the sine of the opposite angle, so is the sine of 

the oblique arc_KY, to sine of the angle KPY, equal 
Bb 


$70 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


47’ 49’.98, the difference of longitude ; to which add 
the difference of longitude between Yerracondah and 
Savendroog, equal 59’ 14”.83, we have 1° 46° 57’.81 
for the longitude of Kylasghur, east from the meri- 
dian of Savendroog’. 


12. Latitude and Longitude of Karnatighur, and 
the position of its meridian, deduced from that of 
Kylasghur. 


The southing of Karnatighur from Kylasghur is 
95144 feet, equal to an arc of 15’ 43’.61 on the meri- 
dian of Kylasghur; and the easting is 1093.83 feet, 
equal to 10’.8 of a great circle at mght angles to the 
said meridian, and passing through Karnatighur. 
From the nearness of the meridians of these two 
stations, the former arc may be considered as the 
difference of latitude, and therefore being subtracted 
from the latitude of Kylasghur, we have 12° 34 
37’.69 for the latitude of Karnatighur. Hence, by 
using the co-latitude 77° 25’ 22.31, and‘ the small 
perpendicular arc 10’.8, we shall have the difference 
of longitude 11.06, and the convergency of the me- 
ridian of Karnatighur. towards that of Kylasghur 
2’.46 nearly. The former of which being applied to 
the longitude of Kylasghur, will give 1° 47’ 8’.87 for 
the longitude of Karnatighur from the meridian of 
Savendroog, E. 


Now the observed angle at Kylasghur, between 
the north pole and Karnatighur, was 179° 20° 28".83, 
whose supplement is 0° 39’ 31°.17, which will there- 
fore be the angle at Karnatighur, between the north 
pole and the parallel to the meridian of Kylasghur ; 
+ from which subtract the convergency, we get 0° 39’ 

28.71 for the angle between the north pole and 
Kylasghur, westerly ; and this subtracted from 93* 
98 42’.22, the angle formerly taken at Karnatighur, 
between Kylasghur and Carangooly, gives 92°49: 13'°.51 
for the angle between the north pole and Carangooly. 


The same angle taken at Karnatighur, in 1803, 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 8371 


was 92° 49’ 15'.93, but as there is reason to doubt the 
accuracy of that angle, from reasons already given, 
to which may perhaps be added the want of experi- 
ence, I shall reject it and adopt the one now brought 
out for determining 


13. The latitude and longitude of Carangooly Hill. 


The length of the arc comprehended by the sta- 
tions at Karnatighur and Carangooly, as determined 
by the triangles in 1803, was 291196.9 feet, which, 
as an oblique arc, according to the present scales, 
will be equal 47° 56".21. 


Let P be the pole, K P 

Karnatighur, and C Ca- 

rangooly ; and therefore 

KC the oblique arc = 

47 56".21.: “Then if * 

the observed angle at 

Carangooly, be made use 

of, (which must be ac- 

curate enough for this 

purpose) we have sine 4 

PR: sine 2 PCK’ 3: & 

sine KC: sine angle C 
K’PC equal 49’ 2’.9. the 

difference of longitude. Hence 1° 47’ 8.87 + 49° 
2”.9 = 2° 36 11.77, the longitude of Carangooly from 
the meridian of Savendroog. 


And as sine angle PCK’: sine K’P :: sine © PK’C 
> PC = 77 27 42".2, the co-latitude of Carangooly, 
whose complement 12° 32’ 11’.8 is therefore the la- 
titude. 


14. Latitude and longitude of Balroyndroog, with 
the position of its meridian. | 


As the atmosphere was so extremely dull when 
* As determined in 1803, equal 87° 00’ 07.54. 
Bb.gZ * 


372 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


the pole-star observations were made at Balroyndroog, 
the angle between its meridian and the station at 
Mullapunnabetta, could not be taken, we must there- 
fore depend altogether on computations made with 
the oblique arc, the latitude of Mullapunnabetta, and 
the angle at that station with the N. pole, and the 
station at Balroyndroog. 


Let M and B be the r 
stations at Mullapunna- vii 
betta and Balroyndroog vd ” 
respectively, and let P 
be the pole, then hav- 
ing given PM equal 77° 
4’ 54.41, BM.-the: ob- 
lique arc equal 52'4.2".12, 
and the observed angle 
PMBequal75°52'54.95, B 
we shall 6btain by sphe- 
tical computation the 
side BP = 76° 59’ 08.4 the co-latitude, and the an- 
gle BPM. 52°°28”.94 the difference of longitude, 
which add to the longitude of Savendroog from Ca- 
rangooly hill, and Alullapunnabetta from Savendroog, 
there will be 4° 29’ 05.15, the longitude of Balroyn- 
droog from ‘Carangooly hill. 


Taking the latitude thus found for computing the 
azimuths, the pole-star observations at Balroyndroog 
will stand as foilow : j 


ayn Angle between |Angle between the N. 
sibel el Latitude} Azimuths. — jthe Pelecton and Pole and Referring 
Month. it Referring Lamp. Lamp. 
Feb. 20. | 1° 43' 34.15 1° 46’ 21".05| 56° 46’ 43".50| 55°00 22°.45 
” 25h 43 34.89) or 1 46 21.73} 56 46 43.75| 55 00 22.02 
24.) 1 43 35.06) 5 1 46 21.98} 56 46 43.25} 55 00 21.27 
2on ried 43; 35.35) “I 1 46 22.25) 56 46 43 55 00 20.75 
26.) 143 35.57) & 1 46 22.50) 56 46 44.5 | 55 00 22 
27.) 1.43 35.80) = 1 46 22.74) 56 40 44.25] 55 00 21.51 
% 28. ] 1 43) 36 .03 1 46 22.97| 56 46 43 .44] 55 00 20.44 


a rn RR A AE 
Angle between the North Pole and Referring Lamp -+++++++++++] 55 00-21 .49 N. 


Bs 


378 


| places on the two coasts in lat 


principa 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA, 


citude. 


15. Reduction of some 
re) 


tude and lon 


"S 56°63) M 9Z90F PEOFS [A'S FO SS OLfeese++ atopeppngl-+  wusodopugay, 
*S 6POL8T)'M O68E9 .1SE8 e9eZ8 |M'S 16 Sh All-+ tunrodapueanu) 

'S LOPOIZIM OFIOS |S CcEggis| L00E3 | 'S CF SE Lt|+eeee+ Alraqoipuog] + uoNnvig URIOOT © 
"S SE8SEOsrM 9662E QOFLS | SSEES TT ‘S SS OS BI}: -uONLIG UePeIOOTA| +++ + [IF] floowunesg 
"N OZES6I!A GOVOLZSTIN FIGST |: FIGST | “N Sl OO O |{1oyeasasqG sespeyy]- - asnofpy s, Korqaopy 
"N OSPLLI"H SOOLTIN 1966S 13036 |'A "N $1 OL FO]+-asnoy sAarquoyq 

"N GOOZ61)'A SOOIFITN LOFGS 6EZStla "N 2G 23 8Gl-+ aBx00y “1G WOAl+ + «> [EET apodeynyy 
*S QOPSSIM TLISS 1S QOFSSTMTLISS lOPSFSI AAS OF FI Poles ++ +++ -ploortusag 


"N GOSLEIA SOLPH TN SOSZEI] A SOTPP |SOPPFIA (N10 2b oLl[++++*+ oapodeyjnyy|>- igs soesurieg 
"aay "4295 *jaaJ "Joay "aay 
‘UeIpMoT, | *oipuedsag | ‘ueipey | ‘oipuediag *Apoosuerey 
‘SISIq] | Jo UvIpLey ayy 07 | ‘*pojndaiod soor[d LV SNOTLYLG 
paliojat ssulvog 


— ES | er 


ay} uo 
Ajoosuviey woz saoueysig 


ay} WO saeuLysIq 


unjnaipuaduad spr wmosf puy ‘unpruioapy joy7 wosf 870) JopULUoIOD ay? uo svan)d UIP} 
-199 fo sagunysyp ay}? pun ‘sjajynavd spr pun Kjoosurirg fo unrpriapy ay) YRM ‘sasup ayy Summjywoy “SF AIAVY, 


"S LETZOSIM 66FSS |'S TIGOLI|M SLZEF [ZFSOLIV AAS TS GS Pifeee ees Ansayopay 

‘S OSOE9T| M TILEL |S FOOTSIIA OSGES |ZZOLZEI" MAS GS GH GElesse+* GlouRUURD]-- afowlEpuVippey, 

"S QBSISEl| T2569 |'§ S35EO "A TOISEIOOTOHI\A “S OL CG FO}++ sjowepurippRy) — 

‘S O5800FM 18642 1S OSZIEII"M ZOTOT ISLIZEllM ‘S SO SBF leoese Uflq wNoy| Aypnueyeppnpunysy 

"S €O989TI'A\ 63899 |§ SOLZOTl"A OSOFL [OFIOSI!'A “S OF LE Ge} Aymueyeppnpuny 

"§ LOISOZ"A G686EE1|S HOOTOTIA OB6E |TSOTOI|A “GS GE BL G |ereessse++ yaeg)++++++++ KudwoopH 

"S OS99TM 6O66EI\'S OSZOF |M SOSES [066FS |W 'S 6B 8O Gelr+++ INET Aedmooy = 

"N 80086 1M OSS903/'N FIZET |'M PES68 IZOZIO [MIN 89 ST Sziereers osopesueR soe A ee 

"S SSLOLTVM OFSOLT/S SSLOLTTM OFSOLIISPOFOT) AN 'S 9 ,2¢ PE oseees Aynmeyng)+++- sooipudoajyeg 
“Joos “joaj ‘Joop *joaj *jaay 

‘ueIpLiayy | ‘ompuediog | suerpuayy | ‘oipuodiog *Sooapusoyeg 


‘sysiq, | Jo uvIplayy oy} 0} | ‘poyndaroo sooxyq LV SNOILVLG 
aqj} HO 5001p : Aaja SSULwO 
-~uso.neg wiry s90ur}st gy i ae tod | a s 
ee Se 
upjnaipuadsad sjr moist pun “unipriayyy yoy} wo.tf 78P09 Ieqe|PIN, ay} UO saonjd UID}.L29 
0 sa9uD}sip ayy pup ‘sjajyvand sp pup Soospusosjeg fo umprsayy ay) ypia sapcup ay) Summzuoy “1 ATAVL 
1p ay} P 192] a4 pusos|eg "pt 


374 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


By table the first, AZangalore flag-staff is west from 
the meridian of Balroyndroog 206380 feet, and south 
98008 feet from the station; and these converted 
into arcs according to the above scales, will give 33’ 
58” and 16’ 12” respectively, and the latter arc added 
to the co-latitude of Balroyndroog (equal 76° 52’ 8”.4) 
gives 77° 08 20" for the co-latitude of the point 
where a-perpendicular from JZangalore will cut the 
meridian of Balroyndroog at right angles. Then as 
Rad. : Cos. 77° 8 20" :: Cos. 33’ 58” (the perpendi- 
cular) : 77° 08' 22”, the co-latitude of Mangalore. 


And again, as Tan. 33’ 58”: Sin. 77° 08' 20" :; Rad. 
> Cot. 34 50’, the difference of longitude between 
Balroyndroog and the flag-staff at Mangalore, 


By proceeding in the same manner with the other 
places on that coast, we shall have their latitudes, and 
their longitudes from the meridian of Balroyndroog 
as follow: 


Longitudes from 
Latitudes. | Balroyndroog. 


Names of Places. 


Mangalore Flag-staff ++---+++| 12°51’ 38" 0°34’ 50" W. 
Baekul Fort S. E. Cavalier ----} 12 23 32 0 22 55 W. 
Mount Dilli Station «+--+. --e+-: 12 O1 41 0 12 47 W. 
Cannanore Flag-statf ---+-+-- 1 ap Lie | 0 02 38 W. 
Tellicherry Flag-staff +++--++- 11 44 52 0 0417 E. 


By table 2d, the observatory at Jdfadras is 127009 
feet east, and 193370 feet north from the station at 
Carangooly, which converted into arcs give 90 54.45 
and 31' 57’.78 respectively ; which being applied to » 
the meridian and its perpendicular, passing through 
the observatory, and computing spherically, as in the 
last case, we shall obtain 13° 04 8”.7 for the latitude 
of the observatory, and 21° 27°.81 for its longitude 
east from the meridian of Carangooly. And by pur- 
suing the same method of calculation, we shall have 
certain places on the Coromandel coast referred to 
the meridian of Carangooly as follow : 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 375 


Longitudes from 


Names of Places. Latitudes. 


Carangooly. 
Madras Observatory +++++++- 13° 04' 08".7 0°21' 27".81 E. 


O 23 44 E, 
0 03 20 W. 
0 06 48 W. 


Fort St. George Church Steeple} 13 04 45 
Pondicherry Flag-staff --+++-+++| 11 55 56 
Cuddalore Flag-staff-«..++++++ 11 43 23 


The difference of longitude between the meridians of Carangooly 
and Balroyndroog, by Art. 14, is 4° 29° 15.15, to which add the 
longitudes of the different places from the respective meridians, as 
heretofore deduced, we shall have the difference of longitude of 
those places which lie nearly in the same parallels of latitude as 
follows : 


Difference of longitude between the observatory and 


Mangalore, - - : - = - - - 5095 W3 
Church in Fort St. George and ditto, 5 27 45 
Pondicherry and Cannanore, - - 4 28 13 
Cuddalore and Tellicherry - <- 4& 18 


Here it may be proper to notice that in the requisite tables, the 
difference of longitude between Fort St. George and Mangalore is 
5° 27 25", within 20" of what is here given; but the difference of 
longitude between Cuddalore and Tellicherry is 4° 8 42, differing 
no Jess than 9’ 18" from the triangular measurement, ' 


376 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRIGAL 


APPENDIX. 


TABLE of LATITUDES and LONGITUDES of somé of the 


principal Places, as deduced from the Operations in general. 


Nott. In the abbreviations H signifies hill; P pagoda; and Dg. droog. In all 
pagodas the tower is meant, unless otherwise specified; or, if they are stations, 
the platform is generally the place where the instrument stood, and is mostly 
marked by a small mill-stone. All places having the asterisk (*) annexed to them 
are the stations of the large theodolite, and are distinguished either by platforms 
with large stones in the middle, having small circles inserted thereon; or if on a 
rock, the circle is inserted on the rock: and in’ both cases the centre of the | 


circle denotes the point over which the plummet was suspended. 


Names of Places. 


ALLAMBADDY Fort«: sie csc. ASP? 
PAAMIANGOY Ele @ ap'eice oS ole we dU Acide 
UIC El os « 3:45 alnemidia hidsisite sige 
ALLUMPARVA Fort <ccsceccecce oe 
AMARATOOR Fort P. «ees eerccccces 
AMBOIGE Dg. isla che, s\ as aichalicte's SSA sit 
Ampoor Dg. a Gineadacdss ak: «alte, ok ahS 
ANCHITTY Dg. AITO ONCIOCY Pa re 
* ANKISGHERRY Dg, eee eeeeeeee 
FAWUREC UAE ONE Pb avere-o 5 slale amen be 


ARNEE (Monument in the Fort) - 

Atcherawauk H. and P. ........- eee 
AUVULCONDAH «++eevreses au wilevae eis 
SIAR ELOTT | + 1.0 0 2,0 ele oe 6 vec tials 


* Bailippee H.- +++ sees ee ceeeeeeees 
BATEOOREROIEILS 2 «cats c'e ste so 0 cles 
B. BALLAproor Eedgah -++++++.---- 
* BALROYN Dg. «ewe ee cee eee eeenes 
BANGALORE Palace --+++e+esee. 
BARCELORE Peak ----ccscccces nares 
Bellagola (Great statue ) wherein ee ealt 
BEELOOR, PORT? «bbs os wise cee 
BENKIPOOR 0) 


Latitude. 


12 8’ 35’N, 
13 9 42 
13 16 18 
12 16 12 
12 55 23 
13 23 37 
12 49 12 
12 35 23 
12 40 27 
12 42 33 
12 54 14 
12 40 19 
12 24 14 
18 7 40 
12 23 32 
13 39 7 
138 9 47 
13 18 2% 
13-7 51.6 
12: 57 34 
13 51 23 
12 51 15 
12 58 58 
13 50 42 


Longitude from 


Madras Obser. 


Greenwich. 


2° 30’ 25” W.| 77°46 5” Es 


238 0 
O 31 34 
014 5 
3.18 55 
2 14 48 
1 32°58 
2 21 45 
210 3 
233 34 
O 54 57 
0 57 58 
0 26 23 
1 be 
5 13 28 
2 58 28 
423 42 
243 13 
4 50 33 
2 40 45 
5 23 28 
3 46 13 
3 31 26 
4 33 26 


77 $8 30 
79 44 56 
80 225 
76 57 35 
78 1 42 
78 44 99 
77 54 15 
78 5 27 
77 42 59 
79 21 33 
79 18 32. 
79 50 7 


ee ee, ey 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENINSULA. 377 
TABLE—conrTiInuep. 
Longitude from 
Names of Places. Latitude. ak eer ea aes 

Madras Observ.| Greenwich. 
* Bettatipoor H. and P. ++++.++-+-++> 12°27 14°.) 4° 8°23” W. | 76° 8 7” EB. 
BHAVANY P. --++- sees see e eens 11 25 45 2 34 19 77 42 11 
* Bodeemulla -------++- sete eens 3.12 41 1 10 55 79 5 35 
BoDEELIMRAUZ De. ++e- eee rece 12 26 17 Be BS 78. DAT 
BoLconDAH Dg.-+ esse cree ee eecees 12 37 15 2 -8 14 78 8 16 
* Bomanelly H. and P. -+---+-++-+- 13 16 18 ree Ae 76 39-2 
* Bonnairgottah «+++ -++-+s-++eeeeeees| 12 48 45 2 40\4 77 35 49 
* Booggargooda ++++ esse eeeeeeeeee 138 3 4 515-16 75 114 
* Bullamully --++ +--+ -eeeeeeeeeee 12 48 33 5 10 14 156: 1G 
* Bullanaugooda -+++++++ +--+ veeeee! 12 45 12 5 (5°28 Th Bs} 2 
* BuNDHULLY Dg.----- cece ce eeee 12 12 16 2755 42 | 77 21 28 
Busmuney Dg. ----- bane eeeeeee 3 44 DA 3:12. 57 | PRABNBS 
ByRAN Dg. ee ecce ee cece ee eect eeee 13. 5 41 3 4 47 77 11:43 
CANANORE FORT, Flag Staff ----| 11 51 11 453 1 | 75 23 29 
* Carangooly H. +--+ +e++ceeee reece 12 3212 | 0 21 98 | 79 55 2 
CAVERYPOORUM FORT ++++++e+ee- 11 54 43 2 29 36 | 77 46 54 
CAUVERYPAUK FORT ++ +eeeee seeees 12 54 15 0 47 18 | 79 29 12 
CuHaLaAmcoTran Large Tree ------ | 13-26 50° | 2. 7-36 | 78 3805 
CHARGUL Dg.---+ eee eee e eee ee eens 12 53.18. |-1-36°19 | 78 40 11 
CHAYLOOR FORT — eeseeceeeeeeees 48,96 37 3°2y +I 76 55 29 
* Cheetkul H. +--+ +-+e sees eeeeeeee 13519 16...) 2:56) 890 th Thess 
Chendragherry Fort --------- eseee| 12 27 53 5°85) ¥S eyeeape tae 
* Chencaud +--+-+ cee ce cece ceenee 11 66°56 +O 39e4e | 79 36 45 
CHENROYN Dg. e+e eee eee cee cence 3 35 49 3: 2-43 77 13 45 
CuInGLEPET Fort Flag Staff-.+--.-- 12 41 59 0 16 12 80 0 18 
CHINI Dg. eee eee ee cee rece ee meee 12 42 18 1 42 19 78 34 11 
CHINEROYPUTTUN ++ +eeee ee eerees 12 54-9 3 51-53 76 28 37 
Chittepet H. -+--+- sees rere eeeees 12 27 58 0 51 37 79 24 53 
Chittepet Mosque +++++++-+-+++-.-- 12 27 55 0-53:58 077922732 
CHITTLE Dg. Flag Staff---.-+---. 1413 4 3 51 34 76 24 56 
CHITTOOR Fort .-2-+--+--eeeees 13 13-5 19°27 1200R. <3 
CHOREEGHERRY Dg. --++-+ ee eeeeee Ete od fp 3-356 TUT 32 
CHUNGAMAH -eeereeeeeeeeereceee 12 18, 4 1 97 24 78 49. 6 
Coxar Fort P. ----- tte e eee eee +-1 13 8 20 2 649 78.49 41° 
ConJEVARAM Great Pagoda --+----- 12 50 47 0 32 52 79 43 38 
* Coonawaucum H, «+--+ -+eeeeeeee 12 50 56 018 51 79 57/3 
* Coonum H. «+--+ eee eee er eee eees 12° 5°20 O 34 12 79 42 18 
Covetone Church -++-++++++++eee- 12 47 36 0 0:5 E. |-80 16 35 
CUDDALORE Flag Staff----- ‘eeees! 11 43 23 0 28 16 W.| 79 48 14 
CuRPAH Fort -+++ sere seecee neces 13 14 39 3 24 11 76 52 19 
* Daesauneegooda -----++--- ceeeee) 13 15 46 A 6 34 716: 9 66°’ 
Darampory Fort --++++-see+e ees «-| 12 3 48 / RA eB 78 11 25 
DENKANICOTTAH Fort +++++++++ ---| 12 81 53 22T 53 77 48 37. 
DEONELLY Fort «+--+ ++-++++++ee+e5| 13 14 59 | 2 32 38 77 43 52 
~* Deorabetta +--+ cere reer eeeees ‘12 37.82 2 37 36 77 38 54 
* Devaroy Dg.:--- LE Bile Ocho (0 ve ceeeel 13 22 25 2 9.298 71714 2 
* Dodagoontah --++++++++-+++++0+| 12 59 59.9 | 2 37 40 77 38 50 
Durrea Bahader Ghur++++++++++++-+] 13 20 13 5 34 14 74 42 


378 ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 
TABLE—conTINUED. , 
Longitude from 
Names of Places. Latitude. 

Madras Obser. Greenwich. 
ENNORE Tree ----... Bhd < uile! «she! ala) ate 13°14 59’ N.| ©? 4/ 42” FE.) 80°21’ 12” E. 
ERope Fort S. E. Cavalier--+- + eoeee] 1} 20 27 2 31 26W.| 77 45 4 
French Rock’s Pillar ...---+.-+e. »e21 12 30°31 3.33 24 7643 6 
GINGEE Dg. +. see e eee cece ewes 12 15 18 0 51 19 79 25 11 
GoPAUL Dg. seee cece eee eeeeeeaee 12 29 52 2 57 31 77 18 59 
GOODEEBUNDAH Dg.eeeeeeeseeeeee 13 40 34 233 3 77 43 27 
* Goompay H. cece ceeceweeeceees 12 40 19 5 14 10 75 220 
GoonicuL Fort «+++. peceee foesifa) wens 13 1 33 3 13 34 77. 2 56 
Gooriattum P..---...e0.- al hres etait ce 12 55 52 1 24 42 78 51 48 
GUNGANGHERRY Dg.steeeeeeeeeeee 12 25 54 1 57 47 78 18 43 
GURRADAN Dg, eere snes ecccceoene 13 28 54 4 0 47 76 15 43 
* Hallagamulla PB. s-++e- sere va. 1 O62 248 54 77 27 36 
* Hanandamulla -.+seeseees ie eibhin/ pie 12 55 57 0 51 14 79 15 16 
PV Arcetainnieia tetsvate isle ele lets Saipis eater cuenetens L370: Als 4 9 42 76 6 48 
Hooty Dg IR Stat atin stig eho talioll vie Sip tel eleitete ere 12 49 13 2.13055 77 3 25 
* Hunnabetta +--+ see eesees veces LS Giryd Ap SAND 75 45 18 
THUNNAMUN Deg.eeeeee sere ce ceeeee| 13 55 41 419 38 75 56 52 
HHURROOR FORT «ee cesccceuce eee 12¢ 5.2) .50 146 1 78 30 29 
AV DEUR GET RV iois ise ple slsarecelstelens,s eralete| OS AZ iG 5:15. 27 7) whe S 
JAINKUL Dg. ++ seee ees StBhiahs phere) Aenea 13 54 35 3 59 50 76 16 40 
JEMALABAD Flag Staff -----.++--.. 13.1 34 4 57 46 75 18 44 
KARKUL FORT ceoecoccnecesceces 13 12 34 5 15 36 75 O 54 
* KARNATIGHUR ccoceseceses eoeee! 12 34 38 1 10 31 79 5 59 
Kasragooda Fort------ Shoes eceeees 12 29 36 5:16,,.3 75 0 27 
Kaumun Dg. -..----. the Gils) oebaleccns 14 14 59 2 58 44 77 17 46 
Kaup Battery «+++ +++ eeeeeeeeeeee| 13 13 Dt 5 S14 7445 9 
KISTNAGHERRY ¢+essecesecsececee| 12 329.15 Bi Bi iG 78 14 21 
Koapiconpau Dg, -++++-- seeveee! 13 49 49 228 24 77 48 6 
KONGOONDY Dg. eee eeeeeeeeceee 12 46 3 149 0 78 27 30 
HIOOMIDAT. PORT) © eties celeeise ses celts] LP) S36). .5 519 6 74 57 Qh 
KOONDAPOOR Fort+«++seeceeseeees! 13 38 10 5 34 11 74 42 19 
* Koondhully H. -«+++++-+eeeeeeee-] 12 39 33 429 21 7547 9 
* Koondoorbetta>++-++se.ee. eeeeees! 12 51 16 418 19 75 58 11 
Kopa Dg. --ecesene cones ; eMeeekiees 32 3 456 5 75 20 25 
Kow ae Dg. OS SERIO ve ele wien wisiGieveles io eaio vio Di Se QE 75 8 .3 
* Kuddapoonabetta  -++++.+++. sees] 12 55 37 5 22 29 74 54 1 
Kur Dg. +++: ose slain siete eecceesees!| 13 38 47 4 20 56 718 55; 32 
* Kulkolah -2-e-- sseccccvcece eeee! 13 25 14 239 9 77 37 21 
* Kumbetarenemulla -->........00+ 11 35 31 2 58 57 77 FHSS 
* Kunduddakamully -++--...++.- »-| 12 23 28 § 139 77 14 $1 
* Kunnoor H.---»---+..s.eee0e ve2e] 12 51 55 1 259 79 A3 39 
* KYLASGHUR ees ceeocesseees --1'12 50 21.3 1 10 42 79 5 48 
Mack Ly Dg. sere cere eee eeeeee --| 13 25 58 245 4 77 31 26 
MADRANTICUM Py ees eee eee eeceens 12 30 36 0 43 12 79 33 18 
Manras (Observatory) +++++++++++- 13 4 8.7} 0 00 00 80 16 30 
* MAILLACHERRY Dg. ++++++++++++| 12 16 6 0 52 32 79 23 58 
Maricotrau H. and P. +--+ +eee- -| 12 39.57 3 36 9 76 40 21 
MAHARAIH Dgseecveersceeeseceed 12 53 St 419 40 75 56 50 


OPERATIONS IN 


TABLE—contTINUED. 


THE PENINSULA. 


379 


a ks ST Ea cn 


Names of Places. 


Latitude. 
* Mullapode Fcc ces eocnse — os twee 12°. 54! 56” N. 
MAtvavit_y Fort (S. W. Cavalier) | 12 23 0 
MANGALORE Fort (Flag Staff)-- | 12 51 38 
* Mannoor let cle.clprele wiad!'s a0 lo, « ¢\60s6's 13 O 39 
Marakerra (Tree) -+++++++++++ re+-| 12 26 20 
* Maumdoor H. alae > 18,6 pie u.ele o.cgis os 12 44. 4:4, 
Mepacasuie Dg. Mosque ----+--- 13 49 54 
* Meejar Hill eoceee Cenpevesceescne 18° "3°2) 
MIncHICUL Dg ab cis wisio sie 'eseis ‘ola soos! 13 Q7 AT 
MoopaBIDDERRY P, +++ sewer eeees 13 4 24 
Moopuwappie Dg. «------ seeseeee| 12 40 57 
WIGGEICY Orie s + spaces ncccovcesses| 19 § 19 
MONJERABADs cos cece ccesccces acc to 55 cz: 
% Moratan Gisle’e.s.< pis o'§ es 5 Pon age ees il 58 30 
* Mount Dili’. +o 2-02 dec ccsepe oe Oe Ad 
Mount St. Thomas’ (Flag Staff) «- 13% 0 ZO 
MuppuKSERAH Dg, -++++++++++--- 13 56 41 
IMUDGEHERRY Di. ee ccc ccc ester cece Tos O01 7 
Muglee H. (Stone) +--+-+-+--++-++-- | 13 9 59 
MMULcLANAIG P, -+ cece ec cvcce secs! 12 44 43 
* Mullapunnabetta 2 ROME ROR Cee OE ee Boer | 12 55 6 
Mutwacc.e Dg. ++++++---+s- +e+-| 13 10 14 
* Mungot erect als blots. + 91s' as 9\ oo evae 3 | 31-081 
Muntapum N. of Bangalore -------- 13 0 45 
* Mylum H. a nicie iaieliaiolaialipte tole, atevelaete 12 7 54 
MYSOOR FORT (High Cavalier) --} 12 18 21 
* Mysoor H. eee essere cere ee cces 12 16 40. 
Naggerry Nose ce ns, oes edie ele d siaisl ss 13 22 50 
NAGMUNGATUM Fort+++-+-++-- ese] 12 49 11 
NARRAIN Deg. op wie wind 0 dic s'0 eee es 12 42 45 
NARRICUT Dg. eee eee e rr ccc cer ece 13 7 54 
* Naudkaunee----:- eelced ve ccece oe NOL55S 5 
-Neppicut Dg. (Muntapum) ------ 14 9 81 
Necicut Dg. (Pillar) --+---- 13 14 50 
NUGGUR (BEDNORE) Flag Stall 13 49 10 
_* Nunpy Dg ele .o' piaie' a) wie piece. s.essieval ste 13 22 12. 
NUNJENGODE P.-++-++-++s sete reese Be Fg 
OvEA Dg. «-se sees rece ceeeee cess] 12 36 55 
OosscoTTa (Eedgah) ++++++++++++| 13 4 21 
Oossoor H. and P. «esses eeeecees 12 43 33. 
‘OOTRAMALLOOR Fort «+-+++ee-eees 12 36 55 
OoTUR Dg. +eeeee cere ceees o wrovelsiond 12 57 40 
OyMUNGGUL Fort -+++++-++--+> coeel 14 5 44 
PATTICONDAH P, eeoeeerereeees eel 12 54 45 
* Patticondah +--++e+se++se+-- erees! 138 10 25 
* Paudree <ccccvseccvsccssceesee| 13 19 Al. 
* PAUGHUR cecseeeecesces sseeer| 14 6 19 
* Paulamulla «cecvvarveesecerevrre| G1 4] 39 


Longitude from 


Madras Obser. 


eee ec. Se 


os 
~ 


DOOOKK HO HOON ND NON GUwdmrwsoaoawwonor Ome C 


il 
25 
18 
30 


34 5 


3 
19 


Bae ES AV 


54 
23 
51 


GS Oi 


Greenwich. 


es 


80° 2 29" En 


4 36 
i) tile ha 8 
57 39 
45 156. 
41 31 
12 56 
aD 
13 14 
O 52 
27 52 
48 17 
46 39 
48 48 
13 10 
13 12 


3380 ACCOUNT OF TRIG 


“ABLE—coNTINUED 


* Thittamulla ome e reese essesesssases ll 920 49 
TIAGAR ViG\e a COS Mew Oe 10 10 0, 2 Bias 69 11 44 14 


A 


Names of Places. Latitude. 
PEDNAIG Deg. ai aeiclewn Waid <ere. <b af 6 ial pe ston LT eS ONS 
PERCONDAH Tree «sees reece ecees 14 413 
PENNAGRA Fort «002 e«csces 6 ota age 12 7 45 
* PERMACOIL H. «eee reece ssecces LZ +t) (58 
* Perambaulke H. «.< « oe +0 20) 6 @wie os 12-53. -7 
* Pilloor Relies die sis ‘ayer o/ e\ens alls wis 10) leaps obs 13 V3 59 
PONDICHERRY Flag Staff-.-.-.-. 1l 55 56 
* Ponnassmulla ---.-.-.e. a3 pie) 's pl aie) as 12 8 47 
Se Pi iarsle- bits si0ege)=\skere Abe o oie c etejn ove $3 10%. <2 
PoonAMALLEE Flag Staff --+-+.----| 13 2 37 
Puricate Flag Staff «++. ++ sees 13 25 9 
RAMGHERRY Dg. ane edie) Susic bic (odaako ake 13 56 53 
RAVALNELLORE Dg. veeeeecceeeeee i158... 0 
RIOJEES CHOULTRY +++ereeecacees 12 52 25 
* Runganelly H. and P.++++++see-e- 13 39 55 
* Rungaswamy H. and P? «-+++.---- $34 2S 
RunGyan Dg nats iatote kates SI i a ee 13 55 21 
RuNGYAN Dg Eioten oiwiaials lick mings ileliet allertel ete 13 54 14 
Ryacotrau Flag Staff «+--+. -..0-- 12 31 16 
* RyMAN De iS Ta evga sialejwiaverele. 6 aieimlede (CRO Tea ler 
SADRAS Flag Staff «+--+. +-+eeee. 12 31 34 
Sr. GEORGE (Fr.) Church steeple--{ 13 4 45 
Sankerry Dg. Bungaloe on the top | 11 28 49° 
SATTIAGUL Fort sYaeraasie aie pols 6 ssawes | tf L438 
SATTIMUNGALUM Fort Bungaloe ----] 11 30 17 
Saureuur Building on the top teeeee 12 57 49 
* Saven Dg. Sta®. near the Muntapum} 12 55 10.24 
Serau Forr Flag Staff ..-.-.---. 13 44 39 
SERINGAPATAM Pre wcccecenees 12:25 29 
SEVEN Ps. P. on the rock ..---+--.:. 12 36 56 
Sha Dg. ---++++-+-5-- rtttecesees! 14 9 46 
SHEEMOGA Fort -++++++ee. eceeeeee! 13 55 33 
a aLMCTATNTEVAGT PL Af o\a\.0).0; aia (oi ahe\siiale'b oa arsretexe deh Op r7 
SHEevacunca G. P. -.-...... s+ee+/ 13 10 9 
SHEVERAM H. Choultry .---.. tees 12 46 17 
“SHOLANGHUR G. P. .--..--0000. 13 5.20 
SooprAMANEE H.old P.(G. Moved) 12 39 44 
SooLaAGHERRY Dg.--+---+-. seeseee| 1240 8 
SooLooPGHERRY Dg.++++-0+. see oo| 12 4 34 
“STREE PERMATOOR P. scieccce cove! 12 58 7 
* Taddiandamole .--......... eeoee!/ 129 13 83 
* Tandray Dinalah seen cas.cesee ereee] 19 8 5 
TarracutTToo Dg. +++++++++.-. 12 94 5 
TOLLACHERRY Fort (Flag Staff) 11 44 52 
Se helloor Ei aes nie © ole ole ce wise os 12 31 51 
TENGRICOTTA Fort ++++++eeeee---| 12 0 44 


BOM OP EOE OM NW POSH W EW OW WDE WODOCONNEROWOHBROOCONODROONLYN 


ONOMETRICAL 


Longitude from 


Madras Obser. 


1°38’ 4” W. 


40 
20 5 


30 4 


53.50 
24 48 
36 27 
33 pus 


Greenwich. . 


78°38 26’E, 


77 36 28 
77, 55, 32 
79 45 45. , 
80 13 21 
79 22 40 
79 51 42 


7740 3 


79. 37 22 


78 25 16 
771 22 41 
79 6 2 


OPERATIONS IN THE 


PENINSULA. 


TABLE—contTINUED: 


Names of Places. 


en ne fe. 


12 


TMIBAROOR DS... casessaies acoceseasosv ssn toneas 
Sravciankoue fl, and P. *..0c.. dc sesececcvace 
‘TIREKEARA Get SEU TST ee es 
Terikitchcoonum H. and P. ciscescesseees 
Be eC EE Jah cea ccaces qactoncosisoc csseneans 
‘TRINOMALLEE Pid 

-: 


Trippasoor Fort N. TT eae ae 
Bi, PME OC OUF UIA. .otcc cen cbs cccdeneqoues eas eovecs 
TRIVILLOoR P. & eah Bb MA ee SRY a 


Undar Ghaut (Peak) pe a i Meare Os 
DI NGANWAMULDA) Dee ii0.5.0. hoc dsdecd ene ese one 
Be IMRPEIOOE che. ctcrctecvbanndesakoces ais oasevs 
Be Merten a Crit EDs haps ecpiedeedcdeed cbs oobens 
OF ENE MIE ais yauice dos cchcecdesssusce von echevs 
‘VANDIWASH Hi. fad P. pW, AAS A Ga 
NS EE TENE 155 as Sd ee 
VANIAMBADDY oe. Ae Tea fo a Be 
‘Veer Rajenderpett H. eae PV ee 
BDLORE Died seh. scaieeesssh chs esecete socasababdis 2 
PELVORE PORT Gi Pi. dekiccsiscscctets 
SMTP CAD, i) isda aha oelatosdddcas css 
VENKETTYGHERRY FOrt occcsecsoccecseccsess 
BEMe BUD “D0 Gs\sasnas badcbetsssndoheotedecer sos 
MMMM RTE TE eh 4s cdark uet Leckeb chocsdesecaheee 
WALLaAsABAD Commandé. Officer’s ho. 
WALLASAPETT MOSque ccsccssscesssecesees 
WHOLY HONOOR FORT siccseccocseccesee ers 
PE OUOOT EE oir csc Sh ae kab cdvasecsescseee 
* ee Pea ee 
Bey RAB LY EUs 20h, cc acescp odapaeigti coseon sancee 
VOD TIS.. <0 cihs sistieveces SuREh declan decen 
Siegecicondah i. stand Fhe Died tei sup odhien 
RN GLNES 5 o5s lis peanacalidar sbobooGlt scab de cup dee 
AIREY BNL o1 52, Coscia sib etedendedvontasoeentatn 


Pe PEN TIE | Dy) jasivicsdececabecacponegece Bea ges 
Yamagherry H. and Sih Ae Re 1s 
YEGGOONDAH Dg. csscesseveee sbiiveedipnerinen 

Yerracondah (Mysoor) .s..sssssssccsssseessnes 


Yerracondah (Ceded Districts) .« ifbdathease 


381 


Latitude. 


i] 


QA 


22 
42 
36 

2 
14 


i ee 


8 
44: 


14° N, 
29 


14 .26 


13 54 59 


DH PHO COD WD UMONWOFOSCONH ORR BR OOH OMHEAOCORHKY NOS 


pe 
2 


Longitude from 


Madras Obser. 


2’ 24W, 


20 59 


Greenwich. 


79°14 8" E, 


U1 55'S! 
75 50 10 
80.5 13 
77 54 35 
79 4 58 
79 5 44 
79 54 8 
79 44 20 
(956 14 
75° 5 45 
78 17 41 
75 2 48 
79 SA oT 
78 51  6- 
79 37 41 
fhe Mesy Ome: 3 
IS ak oe 
75 49 43 
19 10° 45 © 
19 Oe 
to Otte 


77 46 18 
76 49 14 
cif Wale We, 0 Bae 
77 16 44" 
78 18 05 
77 40 25 


582 ACCGUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


Exvevations and Depressions, contained Arcs, terrestrial Refrac- 
tions, together with the heights above the level of sea, of all the 
principal Stations. 


. Stations lying in the nearest direction between the two seas, 
commencing with the S. end of the base near St. Thomas's Mount, 
whose perpendicular height above the low water mark is 18.7 fee 


| 


STATIONS AT Stations Observed. 


Elevations above the Sea. 
A pparent 


E2& Dp? 


| Retract. 


Stations. Heights. 


—_ ——_ |} ——_—_ -—— 


S. end of the Base|Perambauk Hill |T° 46’ 25” 
Perwnbauk ..../S.end of the Basejl 47 25 
Perumbauk ----|Mullapode ----|0 06 18 
Mullapode ----|Perumbauk ----+|0 15 40 
Mullapode ----|Carangooly Hill |O 11 34 
Carangooly -+++|Mullapode ---+|0 09/20 
Carangooly --+-|Wooritty Hill --|0 02 17 
Wooritty Hill « -|Carangooly Hill : 10 25 
Wooritty Hill --!Permacoil Hill--|O O8 36 
Permacoil Hill--|Wooritty Hill - lo 01 38 
Permacoil Hill: - eee ree) © +10 07 27 
Maillacherry --|Permacoil -10 26 47 
Maillacherry --|Karnatighur----|0 34 42 
Karnatighur- - --|Maillacherry ‘10 57 03 
Karnatighur- - - -|Kylasghur -|0 23 02 
K ylasghur -++-{Karnatighur----|0 O08 36 

-|0 

-/0 

“10 

“10 

O 

“10 


a 
| 


t 1 21" |A,|Perumbauk +++ 272.9 
i 10 41 |4,{Mullapode +--+] 481.2 
i 23 51 |;!;|Carangooly -+++| 434.3 
\ 15 39 |,i,|Wooritty +-+++«} 6527 
i 11 14 |,;|Permacoil +++ | 484.5 


fs|Maillacherry --{1140.8 


—— 
© 
| eel 
69 
lop) 


j;|Karnatighur---- 3204.0) 


ea 
LNs) 
Or 
© 
~I 


_— 
nr 
aa 
Lo 


3|Kylasghur +--+ -|2766.2 


Kylasghur --+--!Yerracondah 12 53 
Yerracondah --|Kylasghur 28 13 
Yerracondah --|Savendroog -+ 17 55 
Savendroog --- - |Yerracondah 29 50 
Savendroog «--- “ullapunnabett 31 10 
Mullapunnabetta|Savendroog - - 19 41 
Mullapunnabetta Koondhully Hill 0 00 51 
Koondhully Hill |Mullapunnabetta\O 30 3 

Koondhully Hill |Bullamully ----|1 17 40 
Bullamully ----|Koondhully ---- 0 31 46 
Bullamully --+-|Kudapoonabetta |0 25 08 
Raeanenevetta Bullamully --+-|0 14 15 
Kudapoonabetta |Eedgah Station |0 35 37 . 
Eedgah Station Suds honalsbttes 0 33 29 ai 2 49.17 Ree oe ee 
Eedgah Station |Stat.onthe Beach|0 58 53 D 

Stat. onthe Beach Eedgah Station |0 56 36 E. it vas 


nS 
ie>) 
oO 
1S) 


-|Yerracondah - -|3396.9 


50 |,1,|)Savendroog «+ -|4004.9 


oat nn 
ies) ~I 
nr S 
bo 


|. | Mullapunnabetta |3406. 


7;|Koondhully « « + - /4366.3, 
53 |.{Bullamully +--+} 774.5) | 


nN 
o>) 


— 
iS) 


6 |1,|Kudapoonabetta 318.7} 


SEP RDU PUEDE OSE RUD RO MSCS USooneE 


oo ¢ 
= 
_— 
ne 


Stat.ontheBeach| 22.6, 


The station on the beach above the low-water mark by measurement+++++++- 


Difference or error++++ess+} 


tticondali « «+ -|Yerracondah 
atticondah --+-!Bodeemulla ---- 
odeemulla ---++|Patticoudah --.. 
Yerracondah. --|Rymandrocg 
Rymandroog --|Yerracondah 
Rymandroog. --|Nundydroog 
Nundydroog -|Rymandroog - 
Nandydroog - Devaroydroog -- 
Devaroydroog --|Nundydroog-+-- 
Yerracondah --|Tirtapully +--+. 
Tirtapully Hill. -/Yerracondah 
Tirtapally Hill --|Bonnairgottah .- 
Bonnairgottah . efPistapuly Hill - 
Bonnairgoitah --!S. end of the Base 
S, end of the Ba Ase Raticaippottals-- 
Savendroog ---. Bandhullvdrone: 
Bundhbully ----|Savendroog -«-. 
orabetta --+-|Ponnassmulla -- 
Ponnassmulla --|Deorabetla ---. 
onnassmulla --!Paulamulla --.- 
Paulamulla -- --|Poonassmulla 
Paulamulla ----{Woorachmulla - - 
Woorachmulla --|Panlamulla ---. 
ee - --|Deorabetta ++. 
rabetta ----|Bonnairgoltah - 
oorachmulla - -|Shennimulla- - 
Shenninnlla ease Woorkehmalla- 
Shenninmlia---.|N.W. end of Base 0 
N.W.end of theB !Shennimulla - 0 
Shennimulla---- Puckopalliint? -+/0 
uchapolliam --|Shennimulia -- - -|0 
N.W. end ofthe B |S. E. end of a 0 
E.endof the B. |N. W. eud of Base)0 
Bonnairgottah --|Dodagoontah .-. 0 
irtapully Hill. - Allasoor Hill - 0 
llasoor Hill --|Tirtapully--.... 0 
lasoor Hill --|Kulkotah --..../0 
ulkotah -++-+.+-|Allasoor Hill ../0 
ulkotah ----+.|Yerracondah - -|0 
rracondah_ --|Kulkotah --..-.|0 
erracondah --+|Bomasundrum - -|0 
omasundrum -+|Yerracondah --/0 
erracondah --|Paughur ---+++|0 
‘aughur -+-+++/Yerracondah --|0 
endroog sees Cheetkul eeeeesiO 


See biretes bss se sess seesess 
om A 


ee el 

“I jo 

Or . 
IRMAS Oo) = 


i 
Ce 
a 
Gr Go 


as 

wore ow 
me AS 
o@>) 


DOS ROUPOSSoororomsyeD 


PODOS ROU mEOUUUE Ue moo mbyY 


er a 


re ye er ere Gee Ne ee ee te etm a Ne rt a rte Nap rae i ae rd lyme NaN ad ee 


OPERATIONS IN THE PENIN 


(pe) — oo 12 
wm Co — 


Nj 


i) 
Or 


_ bed re) ~~ to 
= ie) “I ive) to “J 


=" no 
m— or © © fea) 


ce \ 
™ 


— 
Or 


wo- 
Ns 


——_— 
a : Apparent. 4 x 
_ STATIONS AT Stations Observed. yea D2 Se E ‘s 
es i Ss cx Ps ae is 
erracondah --)Patticondah --../0°21° 29 an 


TSULA. 383 


8. Stations not lying in the nearest direction between the two 
seas, and commencing trom Kylasghur. 


Elevation above the Sea. 


Stations. Heights. 


6° });|Patticondah - «+ «|2942.7 


lv 


wis 
19 {4 


v 


35 


20;* 


1} 


53 }/5|Bodeemulla ----|1646.6 


Rymandroog ++ /4226.3 


zo|Nundydroog  --+|4856.8 
q'7|Devaroydroog + -13940.2 
z3|Tirtapully+ ees. 3182. 

3|Bonnairgottah --|3305.1 
A5|S. end of Base - -|3023.6 
7 7|Bendhullydroog 4254.5 


1J}Ponuassmulla + -/4928.3 


Paulamulla «-++|4958.3 


sts, Woorachmulla « -/2472 


';\,| Deorabetta ----|3408 


1) Shennimulla - +++ |i788.0 


51; N. W. end of Base| 1060.3. 


Puchapolliam --|1010.4 


S. E. end of Base} 925.5 


;!,|Dodagoontah --|3037.9 


All !asoor Hill --{3380.6 


#;|Kulkotah ++++++}3406.6 
‘|Yerracondah ++|2848 
,},|Bomasundrum - «|2037.7 


j,|Paughur ++-++- 3052.6 
.|Cheetkul «+--+ /3329.3 


ACCOUNT OF TRIGONOMETRICAL 


TABLE—CONTINUED. 


SO 3s $ Elevations above the Sea.) 

STATIONS AT Stations Observed. a fin = 3 $ PS: * 
Cheetkul Hill --|Bailippee «+++ 0° 25 si 50" | padinnee aaa 
Bailippee «-+++- Cheetkul ++++-- 0 656 E|g '9 >? 3 oe 
Bundhully -|Kombetarene --j}0 3 26 E t ier ul 
Kumbetarenemulla |Bundhully -{0 36 23 D. 36°56 | /3|Kuethetanne 
Bundhully -|Mysoor Hill----{0 29 27 D. sg 
Mysoor Hill----|Bundhully ++--|0 6 13 D. 
Mysoor Hill----|Bettatipoor ----}0 © 11 D. t 34 
Bettatipoor ----|Mysoor Hill----|9 30 4 D. A 
Mullapunnabetta |Bettatipoor Hill |O 5 6 E. i 29 
Bettatipoor Hill |Mullapunnabetta |0 50 58 D.| 
Mullapunnabetta | Bomanelly -10 18 52 D. 29 
Bomanpelly ---+-|Mullapuanabetta 0 8 42 D.j/§ ~~ ° 
Bomanelly +---|Daesauneegooda }0 O 6 E. i 98 
‘Daesauneegooda {Bomanelly -]0 25 55 D| x 
Daesauneegooda |Hannabetta «++-/0 13 30 D.|] 25 
Hannabeita ----|Daesauneegooda |0 9 27 D.|f ~ 
Mullapunnabetta |Balroyndroog --|/0 7 3 D. 52 
Balroyndroog --|Mullapunnabetta jO 41 16 D. 
Bettatipoor ----|Taddiandamole |O 8 15 E. 32 5 
Taddiandamole |Bettatipoor ----|0 37 30 D. ‘1 ; 
Taddiandamole |Mount Dilli----|1 56 5 D.| 26 27 |;4/Mount Dilli--+« 
Kunduddakamully|Taddiandamole {1 17.19 E.} 24 34 =i-|Kunduddakamully 
Kunduddakamully|Baekul «+--+... 1 31°47 D. ; f 
Baekul «------- Kunduddakamully|1.21 40 E. 11 33_j7s|Baekul a 
Bullamully -+++|Kunnoor Hill --|0 29 53 D. , BS it 
Kunnoor -+--.- Bullamully 019 35 E. t 11 16 Kunnoor + us 
Koondhully --+-|Soobramanee --|2 22 57 E. 4 32 },4|Soobramanee 
Koondhully «--+|Koondoor Hill--|Q 25 49 D. ay A 
Koondoor Hill--/Koondhully ----|0 11 25 E. t 15 54 |s5 Koondons aang 
Meejar [Hill --++|Kudapoonabeita |O 23 31 D. 9 52 |+-|Meejar Hill +++} ¢ 
Meejar Hill ---- Boogeargooda 0 > LE 16Vp tay oie 
Booggargooda - - Meejar Hill----|0 2 23 D. i 3 59 |1;|Booggargooda +--+} 
Stat.on the Beech|Kooliebogooda |0 14 39 E. py ae 
Kooliebogooda- -|Stat. on the Beach|O 17 55 D. t 6 5\% Kooliebogooda 


> | 
| 


» a 


VAX Mate 5. 


ys 


dn Account of the Mater Prant, which furnishes 


the Medicine generally called CoLumMBo, or COLOMBA 
Root. 


BY DOCTOR ANDREW BERRY, 


Member of the Medical Board of Fort St. George. 


Kauumes of the Africans. 


CotomsBa, or Cotumgo of the Shops. 


]. is spelt Kalumbo by the Portuguese, in whose lan- 
guage the o is mute, and from this the name origi- 
“nated, by which this valuable root 1s known in Europe. 
It is a staple export of the Portuguese from Mozxam- 
bique, and from the. quantity exported, it is remarka- 
ble that the place of its growth, should have been so 
long unknown or doubtful to the rest of Europe. 


Ir is never cultivated, but grows naturally, and in 
abundance, in the thick forests, that are said to cover 
the coast about Ozbo, and i/oxambique, and inland 
about 15 or 20 miles. ‘The roots are dug up in the 
month of March, the dry season; or when the natives 
are not employed in agriculture; not the original root, 
which is perennial, but offsets from its base, and that 
of sufficient size, yet not so old as to be full of fibres, 
which render it unfit for commerce. 


Turs root is in high estimation among all the 4/r:- 
cans, even far removed from Mozambique, for the cure 
of dysentery, which is frequent among them ; for ve- 
nereals; for all complaints of Jong standing ; in pow- 
der for the cure of ulcers, and as a remedy for almost 
every disorder. 

Vou.X, Ce 


386 ACCOUNT OF THE MALE PLANT 


Soon after it is dug up, the root is cut into slices, 
strung on cords, and hung up to dry in the shade. It 
is deemed merchantable, when, on exposure to the 
sun, it breaks short; and of a bad quality when it is 
soft, or black. 


‘ 


I am indebted for the above account of the columbo 
root, to Mons. Forrin; who, when at Mozambique, 
purchasing it as an article of trade, procured an entire 
offset from the main root, of a larger size than usual ; 
which he brought with him to Madras, in September 
1805; and presented it to Doctor James ANDERSON, 
the Physician General ; who considered it a valuable 
present to himself, and a great acquisition to Jndia. 


Tuts root was cylindrical, somewhat flattened on the 
opposite sides; about 15 inches in Jength, a part being 
broken off; and between 3 and 4 inches in diameter ; 
outwardly the common colour of columbo, but on 
breaking the surface, which is covered bya thin, ten- 
der, brownish pellicle, of a fine yellow. 


Tue root being succulent, and heavy, I planted it 
horizontally ina large box, filled with garden mould, 
where, in about a fortnight, it shot out two stems from 
the end that had been broken off from the parent root, 
but from not being vigorous, no flowers were then pro- 
duced ; and in about six months, from the time it had 
been planted, the stems withered down tothe ground. 


~ 


Txe root was then carefully taken up, which was not 
altered in size, or appearance, but from the end oppo- 
‘site to where the stems had shot out several fusiform 
roots, or sessile tubers, had grown, as represented in 
the accompanying drawing, (fig. 2) These had evi- 
dently suffered from confinement in the box; none of. 

: ; 


“~ 
. 


= 


es 


alate ee ee 
7 Oe 


-Rapix perennis, ramosa; rami fusiformes. 
_Cavutis annuus, post sex, aut septem menses marcescens, volubilis, 


CALLED COLUMRO OR COLOMBA, 387 


the roots were then separated, and the whole was depo- 
sited in acool room, and covered with a moist sand ; 
where in about two months, the old root began again 


to throw out several buds from the same end as before. 


It was now planted in the ground, when one more vi- 
gorous shoot, which grew rapidly, soon destroyed the 
others; and in a month this shoot produced male 
flowers only, nor after the strictest search, could any 
other be found on the plant, so that the genus is as yet 
uncertain. 

Tus stem, like the former, withered insix months, 
when the roots were dug up, and found considerably 
larger, but not much altered in shape, nor had any of 
them attained a size to be compared with the original. 
There was only the addition of one new Jateral root or 
branch, from this second year’s growth. As it was 
supposed that these roots would now vegetate, they were 
detached ; which has been unfortunate, as several 
months have now elapsed, and no buds have formed : 
they are however still very fresh, and may yet orow. 
From this it appears that only large roots are fit for 
planting out. 


‘From the male fiowers, and habit of the plant, the 


columbo seems to-belong to the natural order of Sar- 


mentacee Linn, or Menisperma of Jussieu. The follow- 
ing description may help to decide. 


Pianta Herbacea. 


simplex, teres, pilosus, crassitudine penne. 


Fora alterna, petiolata, semipedalia et majora, quingueloba, quin- 


quenervia ; lobis integerrimis, acuminatis. 
Perioxt teretes, pilcsi, “basi reflexi, folio paulo breviores. 


Cc2 


388 ACCOUNT OF THE MALE PLANT, &c. 


Mascuttr Flores. 


Racemy axillares, solitarii, compositi, pilosi, folio breviores. Pe- 
dunculi partiales alterni, floribus sessilibus. 

Bractes lanceolate, ciliata, decidue. 

Caxyx Perianthium hexaphyllvm ; foliolis equalibus, tribus exteri- 
oribus, tribus interioribus ; oblongis, obtusis, glabris. 

Cororta hexapetala, minuta, Petala cuneato-oblonga, concava, 
carnosa, obtusa, stamina ambientia. 

Sramina, Fi/amenta sex, corolla paulo longiora. . Anthere qua- 
drifobe, quadriloculares. 

PistiitLu™M nullum. 


EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURES. 


Fig. \. Tue extremity of the shoot that flowered in 
1807, rather smaller than the natural size. 

2. The whole root, about one-third of the natural 
size only. 

4 One of the bractez. 

. The underside of one of the flowers. 

e The upperside of the same. These three are 
magnified. 

6. One of the petals more magnified than the last 
three. 

7- The underside of one of the stamina, in the en- 


larged apex of which the four polliniferous pits are 


seen. 


0 i et ee 


Vi 


Ox Sanscrit and Pra’crit Porrry. 
BY HENRY THOMAS COLEBROOKE, ESQ. 


fe design of the present essay is not an enumeration 
of the poetical compositions current among the Hindus, 
nor an examination, of their poetry by maxims of cri- 
ticism recognized in Europe; or by rules of composi- 
tion taught in their own treatises of rhetorick; but to 
exhibit the laws of versification, together with brief 
notices of the most celebrated poems in which’ these 
have been exemplified. 


Aw inquiry into the prosody of the ancient and 
learned Janguage of India will not be deemed an unne- 
cessary introduction to the extracts from /ndian poems, 
which may be occasionally inserted in the supplementary 
volumes of Asiatick Researches: and our transactions 
record more than one instance of the aid which was de- 
rived from a knowledge of Sanscrit prosody, in decy- 
phering passages rendered obscure by the obsoleteness 
of the character, or by the inaccuracy of the tran- 
scripts *. It will be found similarly useful by every 
person who aunt that language; since manuscripts 
are in genere! grossly incorrect; and a familiarity with 
the metre will frequently assist the reader in restoring 
the text where it has been corrupted, Even’ to those, 

who are unacquainted with the language, a concise ex- 
planation of the Jndian system of prosody may be cu- 
rious, since the artifice of its construction is peculiar, 


= 
A pee 


a rr 


* Vol. I. p. we Vol. IL. i 389. 
c 3 


3g0 ON SANSCRIT AND 


and not devoid of ingenuity: and the prosody of San- 
scrit will be found to be richer than that of any other 
known language, in variations of metre, regulated ei- 
ther by quantity or by nuinber of syllables, both with 
and without rhyme, and subject to laws imposing in 
some instances rigid restrictions, in others allowing 
ample latitude. I am prompted by these considera- 
tions to undertake the explanation of that system, pre- 
mising a few remarks on the original works in which it 
is taught, and adding notices ot the poems from which 
examples are selected. 


Tue rules of prosody are contained in Sé/ras or brief 
aphorisms, the reputed author of which is Pinea- 
LANA GA, a fabulous being, represented by mytholo- 
gists in the shape of a serpent; and the same, who, un- 
der the title of Paransatt, is the supposed author o 
the Mahabhdshya, or great commentary on grammar, 
and also of the text of the Yoga s’dstra * ; and to whom 
likewise the text or the commentary of the /yétish an- 

nexed to the Védas +, appears to be attributed. The 
aphorisms of PinGaLa’cua’kyA, as he is sometimes 
called, on the prosody of i ae: (exclusive of the 
rules in Précrit likewise ascribed to him), are collected 
“4nto eight books, the first of which allots names, or ra- 
ther literal marks, to feet consisting of one, two or 
three syllables. ‘Lhe second book teaches the manner, 
in which passages of the.Védas are measured. The 
third explains the variations in the subdivision of the 
couplet and stanza. The fourth treats of profane poe- 
try, and especially of verses, in which the number of 
syllables, .or their quantity, is not uniform. The 


ee oe ee 


* Or Sénc’ hye system of philosophy ; distinguished from that of 
Cariza. 

+ In thesubscription to the only copy of this commentary, which © 
I have seen, it is ascribed to SesHanaGA; but, inthe body of the 
“work, the commentator calls himself SOMACARA. 


PRA CRIT POETRY, 391 


fifth, sixth and seventh exhibit metres. of that sort 
which has been called monoschemastic, or uniform, 
because the same feet recur invariably in the same 
places. The eighth and last book serves as an appen- 
dix to the whole, and contains rules for computing all 
the possible combinations of long and short syllables in 
verses of any length. 


Turs author cites earlier writers on prosody, whose 
works appear to have been lost: such as SaiTava, 
Crausutica, Ta’npin, and other ancient sages, 
Ya’sca, Ca’s’yapa, &c. 


Pincata’s text has been interpreted by various 
commentators; and, among others, by HeLa’yup’HA 
BHATT A, author of an excellent gloss entitled Mrita 
sanjivini *. Itis the work on which I have chiefly re- 
lied. A more modern commentary, or rather a para- 
phrase in verse, by Na’Rra’yYAN’A BMAT'T'A TARA’, 
under the title of Vrislécti ratna, presents the singu- 
larity of being interpreted throughout in a double 


sense, by the author himself, in a further gloss entitled 
Parieshé. 


Tue Agnipurdn’a is quoted fora complete system of 
prosody -~, founded apparently on Pineawa’s apho- 
risms; but which serves to correct or to supply the 
text in many places; and which is accordingly used for 
that purpose by commentators. Original treatises like- 
wise have been composed by various authors t : and 
among others by the celebrated poet Ca’tipa’sa. In 


* I possess three copies of it ; two of which are apparently an- 
cient: but they have no dates. 

4 itis stated by the authors, who quote it, (NARAYANA BHATTA 
and others,) to be an extract from the Agni purana: but I haye not 
been able to yerify its place in that Purdna. 

~ Such are the Vinbhishana, Vritta-derpana, Vritta-caumudi, and 
Fiitta-reinacara, with the Chhandi-manjari, Ch’ handi-mértanda, 
Cl handi-mala. Ch’ handi-niviti, Cr’ handé-gevinda, and several tracts 
under the title of Vritta-muetdvali, besides treatises included in 


Cea 


s 


392 ON SANSCRIT AND 


a short treatise entitled S’ruta bé@ha, this poet teaches 
the laws of versification in the very metre to which they 
relate: and has thus united the example with the pre- 
cept. ‘The same mode has been also practised by many 
other writers on prosody; and, in particular, by Prn- 
GALA’s commentator Na’ra’yan’A BHAT T’A; and by 
the -authors of the Vritra Retnécara and Vritta der- 
pan'a. 


Ca’tipa’sa’s S‘ruta bif'ha exhibits only the most 
common sorts of metre, and is founded on PINGALA’S 
Précrit rales of prosody ; as has been remarked by one 
of the commentators * onthe /ritia Re/ndecara. 


| Tue rules, generally cited under the title of Prderit 
Pingala, have been explained in a metrical paraphrase, 
teaching the construction of each species of metre ina 
stanza of the same measure, and subjoining select ex= 
amples. This Prdcrit paraphrase, entitled Pigala 
vritti, is quoted under the name of Hammira +?, who 
is celebrated in more than one passage given as exam-_ 
ples of metre: and who probably patronised the au- 
thor. It has been imitated in a modern Sanscrié trea- 
tise on Prédérit prosody entitled Vritta muctavali+ ; 
and has been copiously explained in a Sanscri# com- 
mentary named Pingala pracasa §. 


—, 


en ee ee 


works on other subjects. For example Var AHAMIHIRA’s system of 
asiro ogy, which containsa chaster oo prosody. 

Thie Vritta-retndcara CEDARA BHATTA, with its commentaries by 
DivacaRA BHATTA, NARAYANA BHATTA and Hari-BMASCARA, 
bas been the most consulted for the present treatise. The Vritta- 
derpona, which relates chiefly to Prac/it prosody, has been also 
much einployed. | 

* DivacaRa BHATTA. 

f In the commentary on the Writtocti ratna, 

t The author Durcapatra was patronised by the Hind*pati 
princes of Bunitlc hand. The examples, which like the text are 
Sanscrit in Pricrit measure, are in praise of these chieftains. 

§ Ly ViswaratTua. 


(4% ¥ B ost se ‘J pue & 


2° Sug 


PER I ebay bie usw Oie bw Repke Bly t 

| POS wBaReye RRQ bey eue tte 

XR U Ape bwu Py pinta jets GbE eeyb 
1 RE} eR t bpp) ep Bibte neers 

ILA ft se Rube frig we eyPrb} 2 tbh & ens 
Ih Sent 2b |S BERS eer bseee Le 

HR WryRess ed ieresuintys Ube LPB 
| REP US eR Bese dni urizin 2m E2e} 

WDE Wee ewE Rey ye ch: Pew yL27b 
| bier Bhuj eeOB: Rey PB Eee eyes 


‘'g WL 


Wek GPa. ibs kein Eh 


Be biw epiewe ewe eer te 2S 


tim Oo “Jo =f* eyo —]° 4) -O} -o-j2° oc! -a 


yur 


WR Peek cewees ae BEB Bi? 

eR VERE BED ee Ueete 

Wot Whielee eine binant rieive eee 
fileB eIbD Bayt PL2e YE eiPIPP Rika eB 

1 QS Hue AMR ep Lb Re es he Bitey ey nie Bak 
(PE HY IE Bie olebiv elie dyin rice 

WSL wypice PM WEIR Yuli Ze te 
PEbIP ie 2b el ejabie bite Phe e 


‘E°Phd 


WEBER RES EE ete Eo Ae 


t— -j--lo-ol- gO f= -[==-; —-jao- 


Pei thei Brite lek eee 


bot -f0 Soy -—i--j--i-—-eoe — 


'e 8ey 


i tbe? Bezee Berme 
ot nigh Zeb e REEL 
Neen :er GS weye te reipin 
eoibie hw: Habe: ereeite 


‘£90 00d TLE Ta vata 


big. 6. 


R fa 


Awa 


ZAG Maviz wea: | 


~ 


~\ 


wafeafain 
atnarfafara Hata A MarANg ANT TATA 


~ 


~ 


€ 


Fig. 8 


Aifgans any wialaaafaara | 


Ada? a ARAaTA | 


naVAana 


_ 


waqrA 


_ ae 

= = Vy 

- ww & sw FF 

wT Ho pe me 

Rewer & F 

& © > ee Ge oo 

ce eee 

eR ae mh 

eid othe! f B & a ya 

a on € y & 5 RY 

= hy ff b= x 

ee = 0 mM « sS = 

ie x ie fo 

Ww = fe 

be me 1e 

© e Wow Mm. ge 

wr Er r &, 3 e 

p> - ws a 

w % 6 ae & 

By ye & 

Cn Dew 
jerdibict PILE by 


ga 


N eBibleviclie BH PREY | BOE tee 


Fig. 7. 


Taanyafuanrarfaamafafmaaraag: | aransa 


aafyaniz Vw TATA 


{fafanaa y Yen watafaaifa 


~ 


c 


ARE Quan 


‘EC 


aafza 
a 
2 aA GA 


~ 


Aca mMargggaafanegaca ang 


oy 
qn 


ya 


zyfant: sez 


Re safya-fqans: 1 WOE 


“oe as o 7 
io 

cf ow. 

Ez oe = 

Ce & re ° 

\o/ wy x at re 
oy & ‘= a 
a ro we C= 

eEwees 
Pe ee ee 
wie Bw eS 
Sy fee Ge BY 

ao Fp @ ¢ 

‘tao eB 

€ = fe. ) = 
RY ee Se 

Gx ko Be ene 

rt a a oY 
ae €< rE 

Bey be i 
f= Agee 

a ft tt 

Es ee pr UE, 
pe © Bae 3 
S = Se-42 =7, 

Se . Fe 

pugoM a. 

ete == =e 

ne & Lh 
is r ay 

ec op -AerS 


— 


PRA CRIT POETRY. 393 


'Tuouen relative to Prdcrit prosody, the rules are 
applicable, for the moft part, to Sauscri¢ prosody alfo : 
since the laws of ‘versification in both languages are 
nearly the same. 


Tue Précrit, here meant, is the language ufually 
employed, under this name by dramatick writers; and 
not in a more general fenfe of the term, any regular 
provincial dialect corrupted from Saascrit. He’ma- 
CHANDRA, in his grammar of Pricrit, declares it tobe 
so called because it is derived from Sanserit*. 


Accorpinexy his and other¢grammars of the lan- 
guage consift of rules for the transformation of Sanscrit 
words into the derivative tongue: and the specimens 
of it in the Ivdian dramas, as well as in the books of 
the Juins, exhibit few words which may not be traced 
toaSanserit origin. This is equally true of the several 
dialects of Précrit : viz. S‘auraséni or language of S’u- 
raséna,t and Mégad'hi or dialect of Magadha;¥ which 
according to grammarians, who give rules for dedu- 
cing the first from Sanscrit, and the second from the 
first,§ or both from Sanseri/,|| are dialects nearly allied 
to Précrit, and regularly formed by permutations, for 
which the rules are stated by them. The same may be 


ay 


a EE ES 


*Sre PrareA. Fig. a. 
+ Curtuca BHATTa (on Menv 2. 19.) says, that Suraséna is the 


country of Mat’hura. 


+ Cleataor Bihar. But it does not appear, that either this, or 
the preceding dialect, is now spoken in the country, from which it 
takes itsmame. Specimens of both are frequent in the Jndian dra- 
mas. 

§ Vararucnt, and his commentator BHAMAHA. 

|| HemacHaAnpRa, who, affer ftating the fpecial permutations of 
these dialects as derived from Sanscrit, obferves in both places, that 
the reft of the permutations are the same with thofe ot Praerit, | 


394 ON SANSCRIT AND 


said of the Pais’dchi, as a language, (and distinguished 
from the jargonor gibberish which either dramatick wri- 
ters, or actors exhibiting their-dramas, sometimes put. 
into the mouths of demons); for the grammarians of 
Précrit teach the manner of forming the Pais’achi* 
from the dialect called S’auraséni.~ Vhat remark may 
be also extended to Apabhrans‘a as a fixed language 
partaking of Pracri¢ and S‘auraséni, but deducing ma- 
ny terms immediately from the Sanscrit under rules 
of permutation peeuliar to itself. { 


Tue affinity of these dialects of Pracrit to the San- 
serit and to each other is so great, that they recipro- 
cally borrow, notwithstanding their own particular 
rules, terms permuted in the manner of other dialects, 
and even admit, without alteration, words inflected ac- 
cording to the Sauzserit grammar. § They may be, 
therefore, considered as dialects of a single language, 
the Prdcrit or derivative tongue ; so termed with re- 
ference to Sanserit, from which it is derived. 


Besipks these cognate dialects, the dramatjck writers 
introduced other languages as spoken by different per- 
sons of the drama. Such, according to the enumeration 
in the Séhitya derpan‘a, || are the Dacshin’atya, ¥ or lan- 
guage used in the south of India; the Dravi'di or 


_-_—_—- 


* Or language of the Pistéchas, [See PrateA. Fig. b.) Boama- 
ga on VARARUCHI. ? 

+ Vararvucat and Hemacwanpra. Thelast mentioned author 
notices a variation of this dialect under the name of Chulicapadisachi ; 
which differs very little trom the proper Paisdcht. 
\- J It is taught under this name by HemacHAaNDRA, among other 
dialects of Pracrit, But the name usually signifies ungrammatical 
language. 

§ Hemacuanpra ad finem. 

Pon? s. 

{] Some with Vaidarbhi, according to the commentator of the — 
Sthitya derpana. The country of Viderbha is said to be the modern _ 
Berar proper, 


PRA CRIT POETRY. 305 


dialect of the southetn extremity of the peninsula; the 
Avanticéd (probably the language of Md/ava) ;* the 
Ard ha magad hi, distinguished from M/agad hi proper- 
ly so called ; the Béhlictbhashd, perhaps the language 
of Balk in the Transoxana) ; ~ the Mehardshtri or di- 
alect of the Marhattas; the Prachyé or language em+ 
ployed in the east of India; ¥ the Absiri and Chindah, 
which from their names, seem to be dialects used by 
herdsmen and by persons of the lowest tribes; the 
Sénearé and Sdabar?, concerning which nothing satis- 
factory can be at present suggested ; ; and generally 
any provincial dialect, 


_, Ir is not to be supposed, that the Préerit rules of 
prosody, as taught by Pineata, are suited to all these 
languages: but it is probable, that they were framed 
for the same dialect of Prderit, in which they are 
composed; and they are applicable to those cognate 
dialects, which differ much less from each other (be- 
ing very easily confounded), than they all do trom San- 
serit, their acknowledged common parent, Generally 
those rules may be considered applicable to all the lan- 
guages comprehended under the designation of Pré- 
crit, \ as derivative from Sanscri/; and certainly so to the 
vernacular tongues of the ten nations of Hindus now in- 
habiting India, Awniter on Sanserit prosody|| pronounces 


ES SE 


* Avanti is another name of Ujayani. 

+ Bahlica ot Behlica (for the word is spelt variously (is a country 

famous for the breed of horses. Amena.2. 8.45. It appears to be 
s'tuated north of India ; being peationcd 1 in enumerations of coun- 
tries, with Turushca, C’hasa, Casmira, &c.(ABMACHANDRA. 4.25. 
Tricanda s ésha.2. 1. Q.) 
_ $ The commentator on the Satitva derpana (Rama CHakan ka); 
tea pacts Prachya, by Gaudiya; meaning, no doubt, the language 
of Bengal. He was himself a natiye of this proyince ; and his woik 
is modern, being dated Saca 1022 (A. D. 1700.) - 

§ As. Res. Vii. p. 219. 

| Nagayana pearta ina commentary: on the Vritta retnacara 
written in Sambat 1602 (A. D. 1546.) 


396 ON SANSCRIT AND 


the various kind of metre to be admissible in the pro- 
vincia]l languages, and has quoted examples in those of 
Mihdarasht’ra’, Gurjara and Canyacubja. The last 
mentioned, which is the same with the old Mindi, as 1s 
demonstrated by this specimen of it, might furnish very 
numerous instances; especially the Aimaz poetry of 
Cr’sava pa’sa,* who has studiously eniployed a great 
variety of metre. Some examples will accordingly be 
quoted from the inost distineuished Hindi poets. The 
sacred books of the Sikhs, composed ir a Perabi dia- 
lect, which is undoubtedly derived from the ancient 
Séreswata,t abound in specimens of such metre. The 
language of Mishild, and its kindred tongue, which 
prevails in Bengal, also supply proof of the aptitude of 
Sanscrit prosody; and the saine is probably true of the 
other four national languages, ¢ 


Pincaua’s rules of Sanscrit prosody are expressed 
with singular brevity. ‘The artifice, by which this has 
been effected, is the use of single letters to denote the 
feet of the syllables. Thus L. the initial of a word 
signifying short (/ag’/a), indicates a short syllable. G. 
for a similar reason,{ intends a long one. The combi- 
nations of these two Ictters denote the several dissylla- 
bles: Ig signifying an iambic; gl a trocheus or cho- 
reus; gg a spondee; lI a pyrrichius. ‘The letters, 
M.Y.R.S.T.J.Bh. and N, mark all the trisyllabical feet, 
~ from three long syllables to as many shorts A Sgn- 


* Contemporary with Jewancrr and $Hau JeHan. 

+ The remaining Saresqwata Bra/manas inhabit chiefly the Penjab. 

I Those of Dravida, Carnataca, Telinga, and Odra or Udiya. 1 
omit Gaura, The Brahmana:, bearing this national designation, are 
fettled in the distriets around De/hi: but, aniess theirs be the lane 
guage of Mathura, it is not eaty to assign to them a parucylar na- » 
tional tongue, 

§ Being the initial of gurz, long. 


FRA‘CRIT POETRY. 307 


serit verse is generally scaued by these last mentioned 
feet; with the addition cf cithera dissyllable or a mono- 
syllable at the close of the verse, if necessary. This 
may be rendered plain by an example taken from the 
Greek and Latin prosody. 


SCANNED in the Jndian manner, a phaleucian verse, 
instead of a spondee, a dactyl and three trochees, would 
be measured by a molossus, an anapzest, an amphibra- 
chys and a trochec; expressed thus, m.s. j.g.l. A 
sapphic verse would be similarly measured by a cretic, 
an antibacchius, an amphibrachys and a trochee; 
written r. t. j. gol. 


To avoid the two frequent use of uncommon terms, 
I shall, in describing the different sorts of Sanscrit 
metre, occasionally adopt a mode of stating the mea- 
sure more consonant to the Greek and Latin prosody, 
in which the iambic, trochee, and spondee, dactyl, ana- 
peest, and tribrachys are the only feet of two or three 
syllables which are commonly employed. 


In Précrit prosody the variety of feet is much greater: 
verses being scanned by feet of different lengths from 
two mdtrds, (two short syllables or one long) to three, 
four, five and even six mésrds or instants. ‘These vari- 
ous descriptions of feet have been classed, and denomi- 
nated, by the writers on this branch of prosody. 


Tue verse, according to the Sanscrit system of pro- 
sody, is the component part of a couplet, stanza or 
strophe, commonly named a S’/éca, although this term 
be sometimes restricted to one sort of metre, as will be 
subsequently shown on the authority of Ca’zipasa. 


gy ‘ 
r 


398 ON SANSCRIT AND 


The stanza or strophe consists usually of four verses de- 
nominated pada; or. considered as a couplet, it com- 
prises two verses subdivided into padas or measures. 
Whether it be deemed a stanza or a couplet, its half, 
called ard’has’ loca, contains usually two padas; and in 
general the pauses of the sense correspond with the 
principal pauses of the metre, which are accordingly in- 
dicated by lines of separation at the close of the sJéca 
and of its hemistich. When the sense is suspended to 
the close of a second S‘/éca, the double stanza is deno- 
minated Yugma; while one, coniprising agreater num- 
ber of measure, is termed Cu/acz. In common with 
others, I have sometimes translated s‘/éca by ‘* verse,” 
or by “couplet; but, in prosody, it can only be con- 
sidered as astanza, though the pauses are not always 
very perfectly marked until the close of the first half: 

and in conformity to the Indian system, it is generally 
treated as a tetrastich, though some kinds of regular 
metre have uniform pauses which might permit a divi- 
sion of the stanza into eight, twelve, and even sixteen 
verses. 


In Précrit prosody, a greater variety is admitted in 
the length of the stanza; some species of metre being 
restricted to a true couplet, and others extended to 
stanzas of six and even sixteen verses: independently 
of pauses, which, being usually marked by rhyme, 
would justify the farther subdivision of the stanza, in- 
to as many verses asthere are pauses. Even in San- 
scrit prosody, instances occur of stanzas, -avowedly 
comprising a greater or a less number of verses than 
four: as three, five, six, &c. But these are “merely 
exceptions to the general rule. } 


/ 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. 399 


ConcerNninG the length of the vowels in Sanscrit 
verse, since none are ambiguous, it is only necessary 
to remark, that the comparative length of syllables is 
determined by the allotment of one instant or md/ré to 
a short syllable, and two to a long one; that a natural- 
ly short vowel becomes long in prosody when it is 
followed by a double or conjunct consonant ;* and that 
the last syllable of a verse is either long or short, ac- 
cording to the exigence of the metre,t whatever may 
be its natural length. 


Sanserit prosody admits two sorts of metre. One 
eoverned by the number of syllables; and which is 
mostly uniform or monoschematic in profane poetry, 
but altogether arbitrary in various metrical passages of 
the Védas. The other 1s in fact measured by feet like 
the hexameters of Greek and Latin: but only one sort 
of this metre, which is denominated A’ryd, is acknow- 
ledged to be so regulated ; while another sort is govern- 
ed by the number of syllabic instants or mdérdés. 


mm rrr pe es ST EE 


* Or by the nasal termed Azuswara, or the aspirate Vitarga. By 
poetical license, a vowel may be short before certain conjuncts (viz. 
as in Prate A. Fig. c.) This license has been borrowed from 
Pracrit prosody, by the rules of which a vowel is allowed to be 
sometimes short before any conjunct, as before the nasal: but in- 
stances of this license occur in classical poems with only four con- 
juncts as above mentioned; and, even there, emendations of the 
text have been proposed by criticks to render the verse conformable 
to the general laws of prosody, (Seeremarksin the Durghat'a vritt; 
Cumara.) ; 

+ This rule of prosody is applicable to any verse of the tetrastichs : 
but it is considered by writers on rhetorick inelegant to use the pri- 
vilege in the uneven verses; and they thus restrict the rule to the 
close of the stanza and of its half, especially in the more rigid spe- 
cies of regular metre. 


400 ON SANSCRIT AND 


1. Gan'ach' handas or metre regulated byfeet (mdird- 


ganda.) 


A’nrya’ or Ga’ r’Ha’. 


Tue metre, named A’ry4, or in Précrit, Gaha, from 
the Sanscrit Git hd, is measured by feet denonnated 
an’a, or matragan‘a, which are equivalent to two long 
syllables or to four short: it is described as a couplet, 
in which the first verse contains seven and halt feet; 
and the sixth foot must consist of a long syllable be- 
tween two short. or else of four short; while the odd 
feet (ist, 3d, 5th, and 7th) must never be amphibra- 
chys.* In the second verse of the couplet, the sixth 
foot (for here too it retains that name) consists of a 
single short syllable. Consequently the proportion of 
syllabick instants in the long and short verses is thirty 
to twenty-seven.- The same metre has, with some 
ropriety, been described asa stanza of four verses a 
ae it is subdivided by its pauses into four padas, which 
have the usual privilege of going to the last syllable, 
whether naturally long or short, the length required by 
the metre. ‘The cause is commonly restricted to the 
close of the third foot; and the measure is in this case 
denominated Paffydé: but, if the pause be placed 
otherwise in either verse, or in both of them, the metre 


1s named Vipulé. 


A PARTICULAR sort of this measure, deduced from 
either species above described, is called Chapalé ; and 
the laws of its construction require, that the second and 
fourth feet should be amphibrachys; and that the first 
foot should be either a spondee or an anapest; and 


i 


_* ; apreite > ; 
* If the rule be violated, the metre is named Gurvini; bnt this ts. 


reprobated by writers on prosody. 
+ As Res. Vol. Il. p. 390. 
} Vritta mustavali. 


PRA CRIT POETRY. AOi 


the fifth, a dactyl or aspondee. ‘The first verse of the 
couplet, the second or both, may be constructed ac- 
cording to these rigid rules: hence three varieties of 
this sort of metre. 


Tue regular 4’ryé consists of alternate long and 
short verses: but, if the short verse precede the long 
one, the metre iscalled Udgiti. If the couplet consist 
of two long verses, it is named Gi/z; or of two short 
verses, Upagiti. Another sort of this metre is named 
Arya giti: itis sopatncted ne completing the eighth 
foot of the regular dry 


Tuis measure admits nee of eighty principal 
variations ; deducible from the nine sorts abovemen- 
tioned: for the pause may be Placed at the close of 
the third foot in either verse of each couplet, in both, 
or in neither; and either verse, both, or bat Ped 
may be constructed according to the strict rules of 
the Chapala measure; and the verse may consist of 
seven and a half, or of eight feet; and may be ar- 
ranged in couplets consisting of verses alternately long 
and short, or alternately te and long, or else uni- 
formly long, or uniformly short. 


Tar A’ryé metre is very frequently employed by 
Indian poets; but works of great length in this: mea- 
sure are not common: it is oftener intermixed with 
verses of other kinds, though instances do eccur of its 
exclusive use : thus the first and fourth cantos, and most 
part of the 2d and 3d, in the poem entitled’ Nalodaya, 
and the entire work of Go’veRD HANA ‘+, are in the. 
A ryé metre. And so is the brief. text of the Sane hya 


ee eS 


* It may be varied by alternating a Jong and a short verse, or a 
short and a long one, or by making both verses long. , 

¢ Consisting of seven hundred (or with the introduction 755) 
stanzas of ‘misce}laneous poetry; and entitled from the number of 
stanzas Sapte sai. 


Vou. ps Dd . 


AO2 ON SANSCRIT AND 


philosophy of Caria, as taught by Is’wakacrisu- 
w’s.*; and the copious treatise of astronomy by Brau- 
MEGUPTA. . 


Tue Nelodaya abovementioned, which is ascribed to 
the celebrated poet Ca’Ltpa’sa, isa poem in four can- 
tos, comprising 220 couplets or stanzas {; on the ad- 
ventures of Nana and DaMayanri: a story which is 
already known to the English reader §. In this singu- 
lar poem, rhyme and alliteration are combined in the 
termination of the verses: for the three or four last syl- 
lables of each hemistich within the stanza are the same 
in sound though different in sense. It is a series of 
puns on a pathetick subject. 


Ir is supposed to have been written in emulation of 
a short poem (of 22 stanzas). similarly constructed but 
with less repetition of each rhyme; and entitled from 


the words of the challenge with which it concludes, 
Ghata carpara. 


[See Prater A. Fig. 1.] 


.* Turrsty and touching water to be sipped from the hol- 
low palms of my hands, I swear by the loves of sprightly 
damsels, that I will carry water in a broken pitcher for any 
poet by whom I am surpassed in rhymes.’ 


' 


ee 


* Author of the Carica or metrical maxims of this philosophy. 
Sutras, or aphorisms in piose, which are ascribed to Carica bim- 
self, are extant: but the work of Iswara Crisuna is studied as the 
textot the Sanc’hya (As. Res. Vol. VIII. p. 466.) 

t Entitled Brahmesphuta sidd’hanta: other treatises, bearing the 
same or « similar title, are works of different authors. 

1 Chiefly Arya, with a few anapestic stanzas (Totaca), and 2 
still sma! ler numberof iambics and trochaics (Pramani and Samani.) 


§ -Translated by Mr, Kinwersiey of Madras, from a tale in the 
provincial languace, eae 3 


PRA’ CRIT POETRY. A403 


However, the epick poem of Ma’e’Ha, which 
will be mentioned more particularly under the next 
head, contains a specimnea of similar alliteration and 
rhyme ; the last fourteen sianzas of the sixth canto, 
(descriptive of the seasons,) being constructed with like 
terminations to each half of the stanza. Instances will 
also be cited from Bu a’ra vi’s poem hereafter noticed. 


Tue following example of a species of the 4’ryé me- 
tre is taken from the preface of the Nalsdaya. 


A'ryaé giti (8 feet). 
[See Prare A. Fig. 2. | 


“* Tue king celebrated under the name of RaMa *, exists, 
who is conversant with the supreme ways of moral conduct ; 
in whose family, exempt from calamity and enriched with the 
gems of the earth, dependants flourish.” 1. 5. 


Tue next is taken from DAMAYANTI’s lamentation 
on finding herself deserted by her husband Nara. It 
is in the same species of metre. 


26. Tatra, padé vyalinam, 
at’la vibhran:am vané cha devya, “Lindam, 
tanu-vrindé vyalinam 
tatin dad’hané, taya ’spadé vyalinam. 
. 27. Véga-bala’ pasitaya, 
Venya, Bhaimi yuta lalapa ” sitaya. 
z Nripa! sa-calapa ’ sitaya 
hatwa ’rin, bandhavan cila ’ pasi taya. 
-28. Sa cat’ham mana-vandnam, 
Nyayavid! acharasi sévyamana- vananam, 
D’hrita-sima navyanam, - 
Déranam tyagam, anupama! *navananam. 


re se 


* Rama Rasa, by whose command the poem was composed. So 
the commentators remark : but it remains uncertain who he was, or 
where he reigned. - 

Dd.2 


AOA QN SANSCRIT AND 


28. Para-critam état twénah [tu énah} 
Samarami, tan na smrito si mé tattwéna, 
Dosha-samétatwéna 
pradushayé na’tra sambhiamé tat twéna! (twa, ina!]” 


[See Plate A. Fig. 3.] 


‘Tren the princess wandered in the forest, an abode of 
serpents, crowded with trees which resound with the sweet 
buzz of bees, the resort of flocks of birds. With her dark hair 
dishevelled through her haste, Brarmi thus lamented:’ 
“ King! thou slayest foes, but defendest thy kindred, with 
thy quiver and thy sword. Unrivalled in excellence and con- 
versant with morality, how hast thou practised the desertion 
of a wife proud but left helpless in a forest; thus rendering 
thyself the limit of praise? but I consider this evil to be the 
act of another; and do not charge thee with it: I do not 
blame thee, my husband, as in fault for this terror.’ 3. 
26—29. X 


In the passage here cited, some variations in the 
reading, and greater differences in the interpretation, 
occur: with which it is, however, unnecessary to de- 
tain the reader. After consulting several scholia, the 
interpretation, which appeared preferable, has been 
selected. The same mode will be followed in subse- 
quent quotations from other poems. 


I. Métraéch handas or metre regulated by quantity. 
/1.° Varra’nr’ya. 


Awornen sort of metre, regulated by the propor- 
tion of méfras or syllabick instants, is measured by the 
time of the sy!lables exclusively ; without noticing, as 
in the Ganach handas, the number of feet. It is there- 
fore, denominated Maé/réich’ handas, and the chief me- 
tre of this kind is named /aitdliya. At is a tetrastich oF 
strophe of four verses, the first and third containing the 
time of fourteen short syllables; and the second and 


“a 


PRACRIT POETRY. AO5 


fourth, sixteen. The laws of its construction impose 
that bath verse shall end in acretic and iambic; or 
else in a dactyl and spondee *; or, by bacchius-. In 
regard to the remaining moments, which are six in the 
odd verses, and eight in the even verses of the strophe, 
it must be observed as a general rule, that neither the 
second and third, nor the fourth and fifth moments 
should be combined in the same long syllable ; nor, in 
the second and fourth verses, should the sixth métré 
be combined with the seventh. ‘That general rule 
however admits of exceptions: and the name of the 
metre varies accordingly f. 


Antuoves the Vaitdiya regularly consist of alter- 
-nate short and long verses, it may be varied by making 
the stanza consist either of four short or four long 
verses; admitting at the same time the exception just 
now hinted §. 


Tue following is an example of a stanza composed 
in a species of this metre: | 


* This variety of the-metre is named A paralica, 


+ Thus augmented, the measure is called Aupach’handasica: the 
whole of the last canto of Macua’s epick poem hereafter men- 
tioned is in this metre: and so is the first half of the 13th canto ina 
Buaravi’s Ciratarjuniye. 


t In the even verses of the strophe, if the 4th and Sth moments 
be combined in one long syllable, contrary to the general rule 
abovementioned, the metre is named Prashya vritti or, in the odd 
verses, if the 2d and 3d moments be so combined, the metre is de- 
nominated Udichya vrit#i: or the rule may be violated in both in- 
stances, at the same time; and the measure then takes ahe name of 
Pravrittaca. 


-§ Atetrastich, consisting of four short verses of the sort called 
Pravrittaca, is named Charuhasini: and one comprisio g four long 
verses of that description is termed Aparantiea. 


Did. guia 


A406 ON SANSCRIT AND 


Vaitd lya (Pravrittaca). 


Idam, Bharata-vansa-bhtibhritam, 
sruyatam, srutt-manérasayanam, 

pavitram, ad’hicam, subhédayam, 
Vyasa-vactra-cat’hitam, PRavVRITTACAM. 


[See PLate A. Fig.4.| 


« Listen to this pure, auspicious and pleasing history of the 
kings of the race of BHARATA as uttered from the mouth of 
Vyasa.” 


‘Here, as in most of the examples given by the 
cominentator Ffena’yup’Ha, and by other writers on 
prosody, the name of the metre occurs, but with a 
different acceptation. Where the stanza has the ap- 
pearance of being a quotation (as in the present in- 
stance), it might be conjectured, that the denomina- 
tion of the measure was originally assumed from the 
example; and this conjecture would appear probable, 
wherever the name (as is frequently the case,) has no 
radical meaning connected with the subject of metre. ' 
But, in many instances, the radical interpretation of 
the word is pertinent and has obviously suggested its 
application as a term of prosody; and the stanza, 
which is given as an example, must therefore have been 
purposely constructed to exhibit the metre by words in 
which its denomination is included. This is confirmed 
by the circumstance of some of the words being incom- 
patible with the measure which they designate: and in 

‘such cases the author apologizes on that ground for 
not exhibiting the name in the example. 


Tue Vaitdliya metre has been employed by some 
of the most eminent poets; for instance, in the 
epick poem of Ma’e’Ha, the 16th canto of which is 
chiefly in this measure, as the 20th and last canto 


PRA CRIT POETRY. | 407 


is in that species of it which is called Aupach hand- 
asica. 


Tue work here mentioned is an epick poem, the 
subject of which is the death of S’1s’upa‘xa slain in war 
by Crisun’a: it is entitled S’7s‘updala-badha, but is 
usually cited under the name of its author, whose de- 
signation, with praises of his family, appears in the 
concluding stanzas of the poem. Yet, if tradition may 
be trusted, Ma’e’na, though expressly named as the 
author, was the patron, not ‘the poet. Asthe subject 
is heroick, and even the unity of action well preserved, 
and the style of the composition elevated, this poem is 
entitled to the name of epick. But. the Zudézan taste for 
descriptive poetry, and particularly for licentious de- 
scription, has disfigured even this work. which 1s other- 
wise not undeserving of its high reputation. The two 
first cantos and the last eight are suitable to the design 
of the poem. But the intermediate ten, describing the 
journey of Crisun’a with a train of amorous damsels, 
from Dwdaracd to. Indraprast ha, is misplaced, and in 
more than one respect exceptionable. 


Tue argument of the poem is as follows. In the 
first eanto, Na‘repa, commissioned by Inpra, visits 
Crisan’s and incites him to war with his cousin, but 
mortal enemy, S’1s’upa’na king of the Chédis. In the 
second, Crisun’a consults with his uncle and brother, 
whether war should be immediately commenced, or he 
should first assist Yup’ HISHT’HIRA in completing a_ 
solemn sacrifice which had been appointed by him: 
the result of the consultation is in favour of the latter 
measure: and accordingly, in the 3d canto, CRIsHN’A 
departs for Yup’ HIsH®?’HIRA’S Capital. In the thir- 
teenth he arrives and is welcomed by the Pa’n’pavas. 
In the following canto, the sacrifice is begun; and, in 
the next, S’‘1s’upa’La impatient of the divine honours 
paidto CrisHn’a_ relate Oh his partisans from the 

dA 


AO8 ' ON SANSCRIT AND 


place of sacrifice. A negociation ensues; which is 
however ineffectual, and both armies prepare for action. 
This occupies two cantos. In the eighteenth both ar- 
mies issue to the field of battle, and the conflict com- 
mences. ‘The battle continues in the next canto, 
which describes the discomfiture and slaughter of 
S’1s’‘upa’La’s army. In the last canto, the king, 
grown desperate, dares Crisun’a tothe combat. They 
engage, and in the Jvdian manner fight with superna- 
tural weapons. S‘is’upa‘LA assails his enemy with ser- 
pents, which the other destroys by means of gigantic 
cranes.. The king has recourse to igneous arms, 
which Crisun’a extinguishes by a neptunian weapon. 
The combat 1s prolonged with other miraculous arms, 
and finally CrisHwn’a slays S’1s’tpa’La with an arrow. 

Tue following example is from a speech of S/1s’v- 
-pa’LA’s embassador, in reply to a discourse-of S’ary act 
brother of CrisHn’ nm at an interview immediately pre- 
ceding the battle. 


[See Puare A. Fig. 5. ] 


<A low man, poor in idbilcclalatseie. does not perceive his 
own, advantage: that he should not ” comprehend it when 
shown by others, is surprising. The wife, of themselves, 
know the approach of danger, or they put trust in others: but 
a foolish man does not believe information without personal 
experience. The proposal, which 1 made to thee, CRISHNA, 
was truly for thy benefit: the generous are ready to advise 
even their enemies bent on their destruction. Peace and war 
have been offered at the same time by me; judging their re- 
spective advantages, thou wilt choose between them, Yet 
good advice addressed to those whose understanding is astray, 
becomes vain, like the beams of the cold moon directed to- 
wards lakes eager for the warm rays of the sun.” 16. 39—43. 


ANOTHER passage of the same poem is here sub- 
joined as a specimen of a different species of this me- 
tre. It is the opening of the last canto; where S’1s- 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. AOQ 


UPA’LA, impatient of the discomfiture of his troops 
and of .those of his allies, dares Crisun’A to single 
combat. 


Aupach handusica, 
[Sez PrareA. Fig. 6.] 


Muc’ham ullasita-tri-rec’ham uchchair bhidura-bhra-yuga- 
bhishan’an dad’hanah, 


Samitay iti vicraman amrishyan, gatabhir, aliwata Chédirat 
Murarim. 


‘ Raising his head, and with a countenance terrible by its 
forked brow and wrinkled forehead, the king of the Chédis, 
impatient of the prowess thus displayed in battle, banished 
fear, and challenged the foe of Alura to the fight.’ 20. 1. 


A further example of the same metre is the second 
stanza of the following extract from the Cira‘ta’juntya* 
of Bua’ravi. The remaining stanzas exlnbit va- 


riety of measure, with two instances of singular 
alliteration. 


Tue subject of that celebrated poem is Arsuna’s 
obtaining celestial arms from S’tva, Inpra and the 
rest of the gods, to be employed against Duryo’p’- 
HANA. It is by arigid observance of severe austeri- 
ties in the first instance, and afterwards by his prowess 
in aconflict with S‘iva (in the disguise of a moun- 
taineer), that Arsuna preyails. hiss the whole 
subject of the poem; which is ranked with the Cumdrg 
and Raghu of Ca’tipa’sa, the Naishad hiya of Sri- 
HARSHA, and Ma’cua’s epick poem, among the six: 
excellent compositions in Suzserit. The sixth is the 
Méghadita also ascribed to Ca’trp’Asa; and, on ac. 


ee ny Se A a ES Se 


* Arsuna and the mountaineer. Crrata is the name of a tribe 
of mountaineers considered as barbarians. 


i 


AlO ON SANSCRIT AND 


count of its excellence, admitted among the great po- 
- ems (Maha’cavya), notwithstanding its brevity. 


[Sez Puare A. Fig. 7.] 


Tue stanzas, which contain alliteration, are here co- 
pied in Roman characters. 
- i 


18.° Tha durad’higamaih 
Cinchid évagamaih 
Satatam asutaram 
_ Varn ayantyantaram. 
19. Amum ativipinam 
Véda digyydpinam 
Purusham iva param z 
Padmayoénih param. | 
20. Sulabhaib sada nayavata ’yavata 
Nid’hi-guhyacad’hipa-ramaih paramaih 
Amuna d’hanaih cshitibhrita ’tibhrita 
Samatitya bhati jagati jagati. 


*Tnen Ansuna, admiring the mountain in silent aste- 
nishment, was respectfully addressed by his conductor, Cu- 
VE RA’s attendant: fur even loquacity is becoming in its 
season.’ 


‘THs mountain with its snowy peaks rending the cloudy 
sky in a thousand places, is, when viewed, able to remove at 
once the sins of man. An imperceptible something within it, 
the wise ever demonstrate to exist by. proofs difficultly appre- 
hended. But Brana’ alone thoroughly knows this vast and 
inaccessible mountain, as he alone knows the supreme soul, 
With its lakes overspread by the bloom of lotus, and oversha- 
dowed by arbours of creeping plants whose foliage and_blos- 
soms are enchanting, the pleasing scenery subdues the hearts 
of women who maintained their steadiness of mind even in the 
company of a lover. By this happy and well governed moun- 
tain, the earth, filled with gems of easy acquisition and great 
excellence delightful to the god of riches, seems to surpass 
both rival worlds*.” 5. 16—20. 


—_— 


* The first and fourth stanzas, in this quotation, are in the 
Drutavilambita metre, and the fifth in the Pramita csbara ; which 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. All 


2. Ma’rra’-saMAca, 


Tue metre denominated Mdtra’samaca consists of 
four verses, each of which contains the quantity of six- 
teen short syllables ; and in which the last syllable must 
be a long one ; and the ninth sylJabick moment must 
be in general detached from the eighth and tenth, and 
be exhibited of course by a short syllable; if the 
twelfth be so likewise, the metre is distinguished by 
another name; or if the fifth and eighth remain short, ~ 
the denomination is again changed. The last sort of 
metre is varied by deviating from the rule respecting 
the ninth moment; and another variety exhibits the 
fifth, eighth, and twelfth moments by short syllables *. 
These five varieties of the metre called Mé/rdsamaca 
may be variously combined in the same stanza; and in 
that case the measure is denominated Padaculaca: a 
name, which is applied with greater latitude in Pracrit 
prosody, to denote a tetrastich wherein each verse con- 
tains sixteen moments, without any other restriction as 


to the number and place of the long and short sylla- 
bles. 


A pormM inserted in the first volume of Asiatic Re- 
searches -~ is a specimen of the variety, which this sort 
of metre admits. In a collection of tales entitled 
Vétala panchavins‘ati, the author S’1v ap a’sa has quoted 
several stanzas of that poem intermixed with others, in 


eee 


will be both noticed under a subsequent head. The third is in an 
uncommon measure named Chandrica’ or Cshama’, 

* The naines of these four varieties are, Ist, Vana vasica, which 
exhibits the 9th and 12th moments by shorts syllables, and 15th and 
10th by along one: the rest being optional. 2dly, Chitra exhibit- 
ing the 5th, 8th, and gth, by short syllables, the 15th and 16th by 
along one, 3dly Upachitrd, the 5th, Sth short ; Oth and Joth long ; ~ 
also 15thand 16th Jong. 4thly, V7is‘loca; 5th, 8th, and 12th short ; 
15th and 16th long; and the rest indeterminate, 

Page 35. 


41:2 ON SANSCRIT AND 


which the measure is still more varied: and I may here 
remark, that the introduction of rhyme into Sanserit 
verse is not peculiar to this anapa’stick metre: Jaya- 
Dr’va has adepted it with success in several other sorts 
of lyrick measure ; and it 1s frequentin Sauserit poetry 
composed in any species of Pracrit metre. 


3. Gitya’RYA’. 


AwoTuer species of metre regulated by quantity is 
named Gilyéryé. Like the preceding, itis a tetrastich © 
in which each verse consists of sixteen matras or mo- 
ments; but all expressed by short syllables. In other 
words the stanza contains sixty-four syllables distri- 
buted into four verses. From the mixture of verses of 
this description, with others consisting exclusively of 
long syllables, arises another metre distinguished into 
two sorts according as the first couplet in the stanza 
consists of short syllables and the second of long; or, 
conversely, the first long, and the second short *. The 
Gityérya may be further varied by making the last syl- 
lable of each couplet long, and all the rest short; at 
the same time reducing both couplets to twenty-nine | 
moments, or the first only to that measure ; and the se- 
cond to thirty-one: or the first couplet to thirty, while 
the second contains thirty-two-f. 


4. Pracrit measures. 


Tue foregoing are all comprehended under the ge- 
neral designation of Jat: and besides these, which are 


——— 


* The mixed metre, in which one couplet of the stanza contains 
short syllables, and the other long, is termed Sicha or Chu da: if 
the first couplet contain the short syllables, it is denominated Jyotish ; 
but is called Seumya, or Anangancrid a, whien the first couplet con- 
sists of long syllables. : ; 

+ This metre, concerning which authorities disagree, is called 
Chu'dica or Chih.a; or according to the Vritta Ratnacara, Atitu- 


chira. 


PRACRIT POETRY. ALS 


noticed in treatises on Sanscrit prosody, other kinds, 
belonging to the class of metre regulated by quantity, 
are specified by writers on Pracrit prosody. They 
enumerate no less than forty-two kinds, sorne of which 
comprehend many species and varieties. ‘The most re- 
markable, including some of those already described as 
belonging to Sanscrit prosody, are the following, of 
which instances are frequent in Pracrit#, and which are 
also sometimes employed in Sanserit poetry. 


A stanza of four verses. containing alternately thir- 
teen and eleven moments (and scanned 6+4+3 and 
and 6+411) isnamed either Dohé*. (S. Dwipat ha) . 
er Sorat’tha (S. Sauurashi'ra), according as the long 
verse precedes the short one, or the contrary. This 
metre, of which no less than twenty three species bear 
distinct names, (from 48 syllables to 23 long and two 
short,) is very commonly used in Hindi poetry. As 
an instance of it, the work of Bina’rina’e may be 
mentioned, which consists of seven hundred couplets 
(sat saz) all in this measure.” It is a collection of de- 
scriptive poetry; of which Cxrisun’a, sporting with 
Ra’p’na’ and the Gopis, is the hero. The following 
example is from that celebrated author. 


Macaracrita Gépala cé 
Cun dala jhalacata cana. 
D‘hasyo mané hiya gad’ha samara: 
D’ yod’hi lasata nisana. : : 


[Sze Prats A. Fig. 8.] 


‘THE dolphin-shaped ting, which glitters in Coretiis 
ear, may be taken for the symbol of Cupid suspended at the 
gaie, while the god is lodged in his heart.’ 


To understand this stanza, it must be remarked, that 
the symbol of the Jzdianz Cupid is tke aquatick animal 


—_——- 


a 


—~- 


* Corruptly Dohra. 


4lA ON SANSCRIT AND 


natned Macara: (which has in the Hindu Zodiack the 
place of Capricorn). It is here translated dolphin, 
without however supposing either the deliverer of 
ARION, or any species of dolphin (as the term is ap- 
propriated in systems of natural history), to be meant. 


Tue Gatha or Guha has been already noticed as a 
name of the 4’rya measure in Pracrit prosody. In- 
cluding under this as a general designation the seven 
species of it, with all their numerous varieties, it is no 
uncommon metre in Pracrit poetry. A collection of 
amatory verses ascrived to the famous monarch S’a’LI- 
VA‘HANA, comprising seven hundred stanzas * and 
purporting to be a selection from many thousands by 
the same author, is exclusively 1 in metre of this kind. 
The introductory verse intimates, that 


«Seven hundred couplets (eabds) are here selected out of 
ten millions of elegant couplets composed by the poet Ha’La’.” 


Ha’va is a known title of Sa’trva’Hana, and is so 
explained both here and in a subsequent passage by the 
scholiast GANGA’D HARA BHA?’Ta. It is not, how- 
ever, probable, that he really composed those verses ; 
and it would be perhaps too much to conjecture, that 
the true author of them was patronised by that. mo- 
narch whose existence as an Jdian sovereign has been 
brought in doubt. 


Tue metre called Méharashtra in Pracrit, Mara- 
hat’f/a) is a tetrastich, of which each verse contains 29 
matras, scauned by one foot of 6 and five of 4; with 
a terminating trochee. It has pauses at the isth and 
29th matras. This measure is evidently denominated 
from the country, which gives name to the Marahatta 
nation ; as another species, bef6rementioned, takes its 


—_—_—— 


eee 


eae * From their number, entitled Sat saz. 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. 41S 
4 


designation from Saurashtra ot Soratvha*. ‘Vhe cir- 
cumstance is remarkable. 


ANOTHER tetrastich, which it is requisite to notice, 
_ is denominated Ro/z. Each verse contains 24 matras : 
and this species of metre admits twelve varieties, from 


94 short syllables to 11 long and two short, bearing 
distinct names. 


Tue Shat'padica (Pr. Cl’ happia) is a stanza of six 
verses : arranged in a tetrastich and couplet ; the first 
termed Cavya, and the second Ulia/a. ‘In the tetra- 
stich, each verse contains 24 moments (scanned 2-7 five 
times 4+2, or else 6+ four times4+2) with a pause at 
the 11th moment; and each verse of the couplet con- 
tains 25 moments, with a pause at the 15th. The va- 
rieties are extremely numerous, according to the num- 
ber and the places of the long and short syllables. No 
fewer than forty-five variations of the tetrastich, and 
seventy-one uf the whole stanza, have separate names. 
They are distinguished by the number of short and long 
syllables (from 152 short to 70 long and 12 short in 
the whole stanza, or from g6 short to 44 long and 8 
short in the tetrastich). The following example is ex- 
tracted from the Pingala-vritt. 


Ch’ happaa or Shat'padica. 


Pind’ hau did’ha san‘n’dha ;_ baba uppara pac’he’ hara dai, 
Band’hu samadi, ran‘a d’halau. Sami Hammi baina lal, 
Udun na‘ha; paha bhamiu; c’haga riu sisa hi jhalau. 
Pac’he’hara pac’hchara, ‘t’hélli pélli, pabbad apparau. 

* Hammira cajja Jajjalla bhan’a, cOhdd ala maku maha jalau. 
Sulatana sisa-carabdla dai, téjji calévara, dia chalau. 


ee 


* The peninsula, between the gulfs of Cambay and Cutch. ‘The 
name remains, but the boundaries of the province are more restricted 
than in ancient times. {[t still; however, includes the remains of 
Caisina’s city of Dwa'rca’; the celebrated temple of Somana't’ha 
so frequently plundered by the Muhamedans ; and the mountain of 


Girana’ra held sacred by the Jainas no less than by the followers of 
the Veda. 


416 ON SANSCRIT AND 


[See Prare A. Fig. 9.] 


JAIJALA, general of [ammira’s forces, taking the 
field against the Muhaminedan CBE OR: says vaun- 


tingly 


*©T put on strong armour, placing barbs on my horse, and 
taking leave of kinstnen, I hasten to the war. Having received 
the commands of my master Hammira, I fly through the 


sky; I pursue the road ; I fleurish my scimitar on the head of | 


the foe. Amid the bustle of horse and foot I scale mountains. 
In Hamnira’s cause, JAsJALA declares, The fire of wrath 
burns within me; laying my sword on the head of the Sultan, 
and abandoning this corporeal frame, 1 ascend to heaven.” 


Tue emperor, whose death was thus vainly promised 
to HAmmira, by his braggart general, must have been 
Sutra’n Munammep Kuv’si, with whom heis stated 
to have been contemporary; and who reigned from 
A. D. 1325 to i351 *. Ham™ira was sovereign of 
Sdcambhari, which, with unfeigned deference for the 
opinion of Captain Witrorp on a geographical ques- 
tion, I still think to be Sambher +: and for this sim- 
ple reason ; that the culinary salt, brought froin the 
lakes of Sa’ mbher, is named in rile it, Sa ‘cambhariya 
lavana, answering to the Hindi Sa’mbher liun. It is, 
however, proper to remark, that maps exhibit a place 
of the name of Sambhere between Ujjayani and Inder. 


Tue Ujicach ha’ is a stanza of six verses, each com- 
prising eleven moments (scanned 4+ 4+ 3). It ad- 
mits eight species from 60 short syllables to 28 long 
and 10 short. 


* As. Res. Vol. IX. 192. 
t As. Res, Vol. VII. p. 511. 


NN ee 


SAU bE bh RPP HL Be 2p Que Brie Leib PE desLYA Ly 
| IRib Mbit HRS PRBS KE 2d Hy) Buribeyre Anyel 
Pe i klub >rey eR bIdYA 2epib VERY etal inte pJEyhtite 

| :CmbprGtbGt bey Bel beens) Naoke & 

WAR WWelb SINS ber: PRI2e SESE RBYJ hI PeId oe} 

| PRIMES gt? nehB ue ERLE tjeb metas 


4 
WEA WWE De Dipkbey thy ebry De See Mm ny 
a oe 
| Bb} wey 2d: 2S weeiBewetiee: bh ie : 
WOAH reece REED Rye Bi BeyReek Bu je B r . 
“ > AK 
Vee yeyb une BYR 2B Be eee Rhee ibd ey s B w 
\ i : = ft 
WL At Hwee e Bribe neh ate eeasibehe th S 3 A 
| SERRE we PREPER-BELB 2p yeikjeypss Re E 
oR WsberA ie Boobies th hhse Benn byl 2u wy 4 
i ibe Se 2einh Beye Sper uaethevienta 2 B 
n oh y 
WEN Min BpbArbje Duc yriehe pug tele Zak} & oo 
m ay 
Ve LUCE: bye PEs beweayib 2 igre hee Ek A 
HOE We Tidy eye Beads PR ao? TRE ?A Pe 
1B SeupwyS-pe tueyerizeee Ba hyth 
UW GAS if (DRubHROB webeyee Boh Phi Pe ube te eByey 
{DERE E Der Qe pybyerywebiwe Pe Beitr S 
‘9 OL 
or 
: & 
yy 
Nejmbje ether elke hyteere jure byte iSeiae & 
ViRerere Pree het Br BeviE be pyh 
9 uy 
wi 
& 
mS 


W Be peu Be ee ey relryen 2 Bipeure 
| am te thayi Din beepk te icp PigiebiBe} 


Ul FAM maqafa Hara My 1! 
sfas ye ygrsnr Agios Gg 


OIA fy sofa n enfan 


‘peg 


WIESE wy) [Ep Kwpie Ltpreje) Sipribic}3 is 
ytumb er EB unlBieihe wuR2G Be: Mes -2ye 


“g Su 
‘Lit bod -Yf AIF TA 


fafaadautes aafqn:ataisfragaar | 


~ 


TaRer Ba ware 14 II 


cad 


Tt AD UANYAYS AT BE 


= 


Fans sor stay arfet KH TELE RE Il 


ATM MARHEAT | 
fa yQaMyles a Zora I! 


a 


fz 3H WOVE STM YZ 


3 
! 


qfagy 


4 


PRA CRIT POETRY. A417 


Tux Cundaliciis composed of one stanza of the 
metre named Dohé, foliowed by another in the measure 
called Rold. Theentire stanza consequently comprises 
eight verses. In this species of metre, rhyme and al- 


: 


~ Jiteration are so appropriate ornaments, that it admits 


= 


the repetition of a complete hemistich or even an entire 


werse: asin the following example extracted from the 


Pingala vritla. 
Cun'd'alica or Cun'd' alii. 


Dhélla maria D’hilli maha, much’hia Méch’ha sarira, 
Pura Jajjalla mala bara, chalia bira Hammira. 
Chalia bira Hammira, pai bhara m€ini cam pai. 
_ Diga maga nahaand’héra d’bili sGraha raha j'hampai. 
Digamaga naha and’hara anu. -C’hurasanaca 6ila 
Davali, damafi vipache’ha:maru D’billi maha d "holla. 


[See Prare B, Fig. ie 


‘Havinc made the barbarians faint at the sound of the 
drum beaten in the midst of D’di//i, and prececed by JagsaLa - 
eminent above arhlets, the hero Ham™ina advances; and as 
the hero HamMiRna syanees: the earth trembles under his feet. 
The cloud of dust, raised by the march of his multitudes, ob- 
sscures the chariot of. the sun. Darkness spreads with the 
march of his muititudes, The hosiages of the Kborasanian 
are slain; th» foe is slaughtered ; and the drum 1 is beatin the 
mudst of D’hiliz.’ 


A sTANZA of nine verses, composed of one of five 
with atetasirich of the metre called Dohd subjoined to 


it, is deno. inated Rud’d’hé. Here the stanza of five 
contains three verses of 15 moments each, with two.of 


12 and 11 interposed. The distribution of the feet, 
together with a restriction as to the ierminating one, 
varies in each verse: and a difference in the regula- 


tion of the feet gives rise to six varieties which have — 


distinct appellations. 
Vou. X. Ee 


AIS ON SANSCRIT AND 


Tue Chatushpadica (Pr. Chaupaia or Chaupdi) isa 
stanza of sixteen verses distributed into four tetrastichs, 
in which each verse contains 30 moments (scanned se- 
ven times 4-2), and terminated by a long syllable. 
This measure is of very frequent use in the poetry of 
the modern languages. The Rdémdyan'a of TuLast 
DA’SA, in seven Cantos, a poem held in great estima- 
tion by Findus of the middle tribes, is composed chiefly 
in a similar metre under the same name (Chaupdi) and 
containing the same number of verses (16) in the stanza. 
It altersates with the Dosd; and very rarely gives place 
in that poem to any other metre. 


In this metre the stanza contains the greatest num- 
ber of verses of any admitted into Pra‘crit prosody. 
The other measures regulated by quantity are tetra- 
stichs, except the Ghaf/‘a and certain other couplets, 
noticed ar the foot of the page*; some of which might 
have been ranked with more Bron under the next 
head of uniform metre. 


Owe other measure which is-placed in this class, but 
which belongs rather to another, remains to be noticed. 
It is an wregular stanza of four verses containing alter- 
nately 17 and 18 syllables with no regulation of their 
length or of the quantity of the verse or stanza. It is 
te med Gand ha, or in Pracrit Gand hana. 


Tue rest of the Précrit metres may be sought’ in the 
svynoptical tables subjoined to this essay. 


ne ee ES, ET QS 


* The Ghattdé and Ghattdnanda, consisting of two verses 3 OF 31 
m tras each. In the frst species the pauses are after the 10th and 
18th mdtrar; in the other a‘ter the 1ith and 18th. There is also 
astight diftcrencein the distributioa of the feet (7 times 4 + 3 short; 
and O13 times 3-5 He Kaan short. ) The Dwipadica has 
iM cach verse 28 ma'‘tra’s (6-1 five times 4-+ 1 long.) The Sic’ha 
coatumag the like number, the Chana’ with 41 ma tra’s to the verse, 


; d a Laid with 45, are conplstes but the feet are sage regu 
ate 


a 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. Alg 


THE present may be a proper place for noticing aclass 
of poetry, which have been even more cultivated 3 in the 
Précrit and provincial languages than in Sanscrit. Lal- 
lude to the erotick poetry “of the Hindus. 


general character, I shall briefly observe, that 
it is free from the grievous defects of the Hindi poems 
composed in the stile.and metre of Pers:an verse; but 
it wants elevation of sentiment and simplicxy of diction. 
The passion, which it pictures, is sensual, but the lan- 
guage refined; with some tenderness in the expression 
and in the thoughts. Among the most celebrated po- 
ems in tiis elie may be mentioned. the Chaura pancha- 
sicé comprising fifty. stanzas by Cuaura. and Amaru 
s‘ataca containing twice that number by Amaru. The 
first is supposed to be uttered by the poet CHAuRA, 
who, being detected in an intrigue with a king’s dangh- 
ter, and condemned to death, triamphs in the recol- 
lection of his successful love. The other, which isa 
collection of unconnected stanzas on amatory topicks, 
is reputed to be the work of the great SANCARA- 
A’cH ARYA, Composed. by him in his youth before he 
devoted himself to the study of theology. 


On its 9 


Some of the commentators on this poem have at- 
tempted to explain it ina devout and mysica) sense, 
on the same principle upon which Jayape’va’s lyrick 
poems are interpreted as bearing a religious meaning. 
The interpretation, however, is too strained to be admit- 
ted; and though Javape’va’s intention may have 
been devout, aad his meaning ‘auieaal: AMARU, OF 
whoever was the true author of the.work bearing this 
name, is clearly the love of an earthly mistress. 


Tue most singular compositions in this class of poe* 
try, and for which chiefly a notice of it has been here 
introduced, are those in w hich the subject is treated 

bree 


420 | ON SANSCRIT AND 


with the studied arrangement and formal precision of 
the schools. I shall instance the Rasamanjari of Bua’- 
NUDA?TA Mis‘RA in Sanscrit, and the works of Ma- 
‘TIRAMA and SuNDARA in Aiind:. Were various des- 
criptions of lovers and mistresses distinguished by tem- 
per, age and circumstances, are systematically classed 
and logically defined, with the seriousness and elabo- 
tate precision of scholastick writers. As ridicule was 
not mntendea these poems are not humorous but tri- 
fling: and I should not have dwelt on the subject, if 
their number and the recurrence 6f them in different 
languages of Jvdta, were not evidence that the national 
faste is consulted in such compositions. 


Ill. Vara'a vritta; metre régulated by the number - 
of syllables. 

Tue next sort of metre is that, which is measured by 
the number of sy lables : it is denominated Acsharack - 
handas ot Varu‘a vritia in contradistinction to the pre- 
ceding kinds which are regulated by quantity; and it 
may be subdiv ded into three sorts, according as the 
verses, composing the stanza, are all similar, or the al- 
ternate alike, or all dissimilar. ) 

Tuts also is a stanza of four verses (padas), each 
containing an equal nuinber of syllables, the length of 
which is regulated by special rules. "The number of 
_ syllables vartes from twenty-four, toa hundred and four, 
in each strophe: this is, from six to twenty-six in each 
verse. ‘There are indeed names in Précrit prosody for 
verses from one to five syllables, and instances of San- 
stated, viz. from twenty-seven, to one less cia a thou- 

sand. But these constitute distinct classes- of metre. 
Between the limits first mentioned, twenty-one kinds 
receive different appellations appropriated ( to the : num- 
of syllables contained in the stanza. 


PRA'CRIT POETRY. 421 


Eacu kind comprehends a great variety of possible 
metres according to the different modes in which long 
and. short syllables, as well as pauses, may be distri- 
buted: and since the four quarters of each stanza may 
be either all alike, or only the alternate similar, or all 
different, the variety of possible metres is almost infi- 
nite. Pinegaxa, however, gives difections for compu- 
ting the number of species, and for finding their places, 
or that of any single one, in a regular enumeration of 
them; or conversely the metre of any species of which 
the place is assigned: and rules have been piven even 
for calculating the space which would be requisite for 
~ writing down all the various species. 


In the first class, or kind, wherein the verse consists 
of six syllables, 64 combinations are computed on the 
syllables of each verse ;. 4096* on those of the half 
stanza; and 10,777,216 -— on the 24 syllables which 
constitute the complete stanza of this class. In the 
last of tie twenty-one kinds, 67,108,864 combinations 
are computed on 26 syllables within each verse; nearly 
4,503,621,000,000,000, on 52 syllables; and more 
than 20,282,388,000,000,000,000,000.000,600.600, 
ona hundred and four syllables which form the stanza. 


Tue different sorts, which have been used-by poets, 
are few in comparison with the vaft multitude of possible 
metres, Still they are too numerous to be all described 


oe 


* Viz. 64 uniform and 4032 half equal, 

+ Viz. 64 uniform; 4032 half equal: and 16,773,120 unequal 
or dissimilar. 

t A mode of calculating the possible varieties of metre is also 
taught in the L:/e’vati, a treatise of arithmetick and geometry by 
Bua‘scaka. ‘This truly learned astronomer was also a poet; and 
. his mathematical works are composed in highly polished metre. : If 
“the reader figure to bimfelf Evcrrip in’alcaick meafure, Dioruan- 

TUS in anapest, or the Almagest versified with all the variety of 
- Aoratian wietre, he will form on adequate notion of this incongruity. 


hes 


4 


A22, ON SANSCRIT AND ‘ 


at full leneth. I shall therefore select, as specimens, 
those sorts of metre, which are most frequently em- 
ployed, or which require particular notice ; referring 
for the rest to the subjoined tablesis which the various 
kinds are succinctly exhibited by single letters descrip-. 
tive of feet scanned in the Jndian and in the Latin 
mode. 


In the best Sanscrit poems, as those of Ca’L1pa’sA, 
Bua’ravi’, S’rHarsHa, Ma’eua, &c. the poet 
usually adheres to the same, or at least to similar metre, 
throughout the whole of the canto;* excepting towards 
the close of it, where the metre is usually changed in_ 
the lait two or three stanzas, apparently with the in- 
tention of rendering the conclusion more impressive. 
Sometimes indeed, the metre is more irregular, being 
changed seyeral times within the same canto, or even 
altering with every stanza, 


Tue Raghava pindaviya, by CaviRa’sa,} is an in- 
stance of a complete poem, every canto of which ex- 
hibits variety of metre. This extraordinary poem is 
composed with studied ambiguity ; so that it may, at the 
option of the reader, be interpreted as relating the 
history of Ra’ma and other descendants of Das‘ar- 
AT HA, or that of Yup’ HIsHT’HIRA and other sons of 
Pa’xpu. The example of this singular style of com- 
position had been set by Supannp’uu in the story of 
Vasavadatia and Ba’NABHATTA in his unfinished 
work entitled Cadambari; as is hinted by Caviaa’sa. 
Both these works, which like the Das’acumdéra of 
Danni, are prose compositions in poetical language, 


* Writers on rhet: rick (as the author of the Sihitya darpan'a and 
others) luy it down as a maxim, tbat the metre and style shouldin 
general be un form in each canto: but they admit occasional deyia~ 
tions ‘n regard to the metre. 

¢ So the author has called himself. 


- 


PRA CRIT POETRY. AZ3, 


and therefore reckoned among poems, do indeed ex- 
hibit continual inftances of terms and phrases employed 
ina double sense : but not, like the Réghava péndaviya, 
two distinct stories told in the same words. 


Tue following passage will sufficiently explain the 
manner in which the poem is composed. ‘The first 
stanza isof the mixed sort of metre named Upajaii, 
which will be immediately described ; the second 1s in 
one of the measures composing it, termed Upéndravojra. 


{Sez Pirate B. Fig. 2.] 


56 Matuh s‘riyan sandad’had Indumatyah 
Slaghyah s‘aratcala invé’du panctch, 
Asau, prajapalanadacsha bhavad, 

Ajasya chacré manasah pramodam. 

51. Vichitraviryasya divan gatasya 

Pituh sa rajyam patipadya balye, 

Purim Ayddbhyam, Dbritréshtra bhadram, 
Sa Hastisopham sue’ham ad’byuyasa. 


“ Havine the beauty of his mother InpumMaAmT\, and 
admirable like the dewy season when it enjoys the beauty of 
the stars, he (Das’aAra’rHa) made glad the mind of Aya* 
by his skill in the protection of the people. Succeeding in 
youth to the kingdom of his variously valiant father, who de- 
parted for heaven, he dwelt happily inthe city of Aydd’bya’, 
which was adorned with elephants and upheld the prosperity 
of his realm.” 


OrHERWISsE interpreted the same passage signifies - 


** Havine the beauty of his mother, and admirable like 
the dewy season, when it enjoys the beauty of the stars and 
of the moon, he (Pa’NbDv) made glad the heart of the unborn 
god, by his skill in the protection of creatures. Succeeding 
in youth to the kingdom of his father VicniTRavirya* 


* lgthks Gabe gaara 
* Asa was father, and Inpumari mother, of Da’sazar HA. 


Ee4 


ADA ON SANSCRIT AND 


who departed from heaven, he dwelt happily in the peaceful 
city of /’aslinapura auspiciously inhabited by DuriTaRa’- 
sHT mas’ 1460. and\51. 


To proceed with the subject. In general the dif- 
ferént sorts of verse, which are contained in_ the sub- 
joined synoptical table of uniform metre, ate used 
singly, and the stanza is consequently regular: but 
some of the species, differing little from each other, 
are invermixed. ‘Lhus the- Indravojra, measured by a 
dactyl between two epitrites (Sd and 2d), and the 
Upéndravajra, which begins with a diiambus, may be 
mixed in the same stanza. ‘This sort of mixt metre (an 
example of which has been just now exhibited) is de- 
nominated Upajati : it of course admits fourteen vari- 
ations ;* or, with the regular stanzas, sixteen. The 
relief which it affords from the rigorous laws of the 
uniform stanza, render it a favourite metre with the best 
poets. It has been much employed by Ca‘ripa’sa, 
in whose poem on the birth and marriage of Pa’rvartY, 
three cut of the seven cantos, which compose it, are in 
this metre ; as are eight out of nineteen in his heroick 
poem on the glory of the race of Racuv. 

Tue last mentioned work, which is entitled Raghu-, 
vans‘a,and is among the most admired compositions 
in the Sauscrit tongue, contains the history of Ra’ma 
and of his predecessors and successors from Dini’Pa 
father of Racuu, to AGNivern’a a_slothtul prince 
who was succeeded by his widow and posthumous son. 
The first eight cantos relate chiefly to RAGHU, with 
whose history that of his father Drui’pa and of his 
son Asa, if nearly connected. The next eight concern 
Ra’ma, whose story is in like manner intimately con- 


* VicuiTravirya was husband of Pa’npu’s mother. 
+ Tb-y have distinct names, which are enumerated in the 
Ch’ handimértan'da, cited by the commentator on the Vrita Retndcara: 
as Maniprabha Cintinati, &c. : 


* 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. 495 


nécted with that of his father Das’aratua and of his 
sons Cus’a and Lava. The three concluding cantos 
regard the descendants of Cus’a, from Arit’Hi to 


‘Aentvenn’a, both of whom are noticed at consider- 


able length ; each being the subject of a single canto, 
in which their characters are strongly contrasted ;_ while 
the intermediate princes, to the number of twenty, are 
crowded into the intervening canto, which is little else 
thanadry genealogy. . 


Tue adventures of Ra’ma are too well known to re- 
quire any detailed notice in this place. The poet has 
selected the chief circumstances of ‘his story, and nar- 
rates them nearly as they are told in the mythological 
poems and theogonies; but with far greater poetical 
embellishments. Indeed the general style of the poems 
esteemed sacred (not excepting from this censure the 
Ramayana of Va‘tmi'c1,) is fiat, diffuse, and no less 
deficient tn ornament than abundant in repetitions; 
and it is for this reason,.that examples have been se- 
lected, for the present essay, exclusively from the cele- 
brated prophane poems. Ka’ma’s achievements have 
been sung by the prophane as frequently as by the sa-- 
cred poets. His story occupies a~considerable place 
in many of the Pura’s’as, and is the sole object of Va’i- 
mics poem, and of another entitled Ad hya’ima Ra’- 
ma yaa, which is ascribed to V¥a’sa. A fragment of 
a Ra'ma'yan'a attributed to Baup’HA’yANA is current 
in the southern part of the Indian peninsula ; and the 
great philosophical poem, usually cited under. the title 


of Yo'ga vasisht ha, is a part of a Ra’ma’yan’a, come 


prising the education of the devout hero. Among 
prophane poems on the same subject, the Raghuvans’a 
and Bhal'ticdvya, with the Rig hava pa'ndavtya before 
mentioned, are the moft efteemed in Sznserit, as the 
Ria'ma’yai’a of Tuvas‘ipa’sa and. Ra’machandrica’ of 
Ce’savapa’sa are in Hindi.. The minor ‘poets, who 
have employed themselves ‘on the same topick, ‘both 


= 


A260 ON SANSCRIT AND 


in Sanserit and in the Pra’crit and provincial dialects, 
are by far too numerous to be here specified. 


Tue other poem of Caitrpa’sa abovementioned, 
though entitled Cuméra sumbhava or origin of CuMA’RA 
who is son of Pa’rvati), closes wih Pa’rvari’s 
wedding. It has the appearance of being incomplete : 
and a tradition runs, that it originally consisted of 
twenty-two books. However, it relates the birth of the 
goddess as daughter of mount Hima’Laya; and ce- 
lebrates the religious austerities by which she gained 
S’ina for her husband; after Canparua, or Cupid, 
had failed in inspiring S’1va with a passion for her, and 
had perished (for the time) by the fiery wrath of the 
god. The personages, not excepting her father, the 
snowy mountain, are described with human manners 
and the human form, and with an exact observance of 


Indian costume. — 


Tue following stanza from a poem in mixed lan- 
guage, upon the same subject (the birth of Cuma’ra), 
is selected asa further example of Upaja’t: metre, and 
as a specimen of the manner in which Sanscri# and 
Pra’crit are sometimes intermixed. It is quoted for 
that purpose in the Pingala-vritzt. 


[Sue Prare B. Fig. 3.] 


Balah Cumarah ; sa ch’ha-mun‘da-d’hari. Upad-hina 
hamu écca- nari. 

Ahar-nisam c’hai visham bhic’hari, Gatir bhavitri. 
hamari. 


De’vr’, grieving over her infant son CuMmA’RA or 
SCANDA, says, 


«¢ The child is an infant, but he has six mouths [to be fed] : 
I ama helpless, solitary female; night and day my mendicant 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. AL 


husband swallows poison: what resource is there, alas, for 
9? 


me ¢ 


An instance of the same measure used in the Mara- 
hat't’a (Maha'ra’shtra) language is quoted by the com- 
mentator on the Vritta-re/na’cara. It appears, how- 
ever, from the rhymes, that the verse is there subdi- 
vided by a pause after the dth syllable. 


Tue variety of the Upaja’ti metre is increased by 
the further mixture of two sorts of iambic measure ‘ 
nated Vans’as ha and Indravans’a’. The first is com- 
posed of a choriainbus between two diiambi; in the 
second, the first dissyllable is a spondee instead of an 
iambic. Instances of this mixt metre occur in Va‘L- 
mMicir’$ Ra’m'yan'a,* in the Srt-bhi’gavata Purana + 
and in a metapuysical and theological drama entitled 
Prabo'd ka Chundr’odaya ft. 


Tue following example from the drama now men- 
tioned, exhibits the combination of those four sorts of 
metre in a single stanza. 


Vidya-prabédhdédaya-janma-bhimir, Varanosi mucti 
puri niratyaya 

Atah culéchch’heda-vid’him yid’hitsur nivastum atréch’- 
hati nityam éva sah. 


[Sez Prare B. Fig. 4.] 


‘* Varan'asi, the indestructible city of eternal salvation, is 
the native land of science and intellect: hence, one desirous 
of observing the precepts by which a continuance of family is 
cut off, fand final beatitude obtained], is solicitous to dwell 
there continually.” 


* In a passase of the Sundara Canda. 

+ Book 10th. 

~ Among the perfons of this drama are the paffions and vices 
(pride, anger, avarice, &c.) with the virtues, (as pity and patience ;) 
and other abstract notions ; some of which constitute very strange 
perfonifications, Theauthorwas Crismn’a PANpira, 


ee eee 


A28 ON SANSCRIT AND 


Tus same term (Upcja'ti), 28 descriptive of mixt 
metre, has been also applied to the intermrxture of two 
spondaic measures named Vu'to’rm? and Sa‘hni: which 
are very similar, the first having an anapzest, the other 
acretic, between a dispondens and 2d epitritus, with a 
pause at the fourth syllable. Analogous to the first of 
these are the Rar’ hoddhata’, and Swa'gata’ measured by 
an anapzest preceded by two trochees, and followed in 
‘the one by two tambics ; and in the other by an ionie. 
These andthe preceding are 1 etres in very coii:mon 
use with the best poets: and instances of them, will 
occur in subsequent extracts chosen -for the sake of 
other measures with which they are joined. 


THE several sorts. of metre above described are, like 
the two last, also emploved separately : for insiance the 
first cantos of the Naishad’ hiva of S’ni'sarnsHa, and 
Cira'ta’rjunwa of Bua’ravi, as well as that of theepick 
poem of Ma’cua, are in the iambic measure alles 
Vans astha ; which recurs again in other parts of the 
same poems: especially inthe Cira’ta, of which four 
books out of eighteen are inthis measure. 


Tue first of the works just now mentioned is a poem 
in twenty-two cantoson the marriage of Naua king of 
Nishad@ha and DAMayYanti daughter of Buima king 
of Viderbha. Itisa favourite poem ona favourite sub- 
ject : and though confessedly not free from faults, is by 
many esteemed the most beautiful composition in the 


Sanscrit language, The marriage of Nata and Da- 


MAYAN TI, his loss of his kingdom by gaming, through 
the fraudulent devices of Cal; disguised i in the human, 
form, his desertion of his wife anal his transformation, 
her distresses, her discovery of bis wite and his trans- 
formation, her distresses, her discovery of him, and his 
restorat.on to his proper form and to his throne, are re- 
lated in another poem already noticed under the title of 
+ Nalédaya : their acyeht ites likewise constitute an 


, ’ 


¢ 


PRA‘CRIT POETRY. 429 


episode of the A/zha’bha'rata,* and are the subject of a 
novel in prose and verse, by Trivcrama bhatt a, en- 
titled WNalachampi + or Damayanti catha'. Sri uar- 
sHa’s poom, though containing much beautiful poetry 
according to the Indian taste, is very barren of incident. 
It brings the story no further than the marriage of 
Nara and Damaynari, and the description of their 
mutual affection and happiness which continues not- 
withstanding the machinations of Cai. The romantick 
and interesting adventures subsequent to the marriage, 
as told inthe Nalodaya, are here wholly omitteds 
while the poet, with a degree of licentiousness, which 
is but too well accommodated to the taste of hiscountry- 
men, indulges in glowing descriptions of sensual love. 


Twe following example of Vans‘ast’ha metre is from 
the introduction of the Naishad’ hiya’ Vo render the 
author’s meaning intelligible, it may be necessary to 
premise, that the mere celebrating of Naxa end Da- 
| MAYANTi 1s reckoned sufficient to remove the taint of 

a sinful age; and is so declared in a passage of the 
Maha'bha'rata. 


Vans’ast ha metre. 


‘Pavitram atratanuté jagad yugé, smrita, rasa-cshalan- 
ayéva yat, cat’ha; ; 

Cat’ham na si mad giram, avilam api, swasévinim ‘éva, 
pavitrayishyati. 


[Sez Prare B. Vig. 5.] 


“ How should a story, which, being remembered, purifies 
the world in the present age, as it were by an-actual ablution, 


See 


Ne De ers 


* From the 53d to the 79th chapters of the Yanaparva. 
t A composition, in“which prose and’ verse are iitermixed, is 
‘walled Champi. 1 AEE aK 


> 


A30 ON SANSCRIT AND 


fail of purifying my voice, however faulty, when employed on 
this narration.” 4. 3. 


In the following passage from Bua’ravi{’s Cirdétir- 
juniya, the last stanza is an example of the Wélini 
wetre; and the preceding one, of the Pushpitagra; 
which will be noticed further on : all the rest are in the 
Fans‘ast'ha measure. It is the close of a reproachful 
speech of Dravpani to her eldest husband Yup’- 
HISHT’HIRA, inciting him to break the Compact with 
Duryoép’nana, by which the Pa’ypavas had engaged 
to remain twelve years in exile. 


[See Prats B. Fig. 6.] 


“ T do not comprehend this thy prudence ; for opinions are 
indeed various : but anguish forces itself on my mind, when 
considering thy extreme distress. Thou, who didst formerly 
repose on a costly couch, and wert wakened with auspicious 
praise and song, now sleepest on the ground strewed with 
pungent grass, and art roused from thy slumbers by the dis- 
mal howlings of shakals. Thy feet, which, resting on a foot- 
stool adorned with precious stones, were tinged by the dust 
of the blossoms in the chaplets worn by prosirate monarchs, 
now tread the wilderness where the tips of sharp grass are 
cropped by the teeth of stags. Thy person, O king, which 
formerly gained beauty by feeding on the blessed remnant of 
the feast given to holy men, now wastes with thy glory, while 
thou feedest on the fruits of the forest. ‘That thou art reduced 
to this condition by the act of thy enemies, harrows up my 
soul. To the valiant, whose courage is unsubdued by the 
foe, misfortune is a triumph. Relinguishing peace, O king, 
be active and rouse thy energy, for the slaughter of thy foes. 
Placid saints, not kings, attain perfection, disarming their 
enemies by patience. If persons- such as. thee, whose ho- 
nour is their wealth, who are leaders of the brave, submit 
to such insupportable disgrac:, then is magnanimity destroyed 
without resource. If divested of courage, thou deem sub- 
mission the means of lasting ease, then quit thy bow, the 
symbol of a sovereign, and becoming a hermit, feed here with 
oblations the purifying flame. Adherence to the compact is 
not good for thee, valiant prince, while thy foes compass thy 


PRA‘CRIT POETRY. A3l 


disgrace : for kings, ambitious of victory, scruple not the 

‘use of stratagem in treating with enemies. ‘Thee, who by 
force of fate and time art not sunk ii the deep ocean of cala- 
miiy, dull with diminished splendour, and slow to enterprise, 
may fortune again attend, as thou risest like the sun with the 
new born day, dispelling hostile gloom.” 1, 37,46. 


To return to the enumeration of analogous sorts of 
metre. A true spondaic metre, named Vidyunmala, 
consisting of four spondees, with a pause in the middle 
of the verse which virtually divides the tetrastich into 
a stanza of eight, is often mixed, as before observed, 
with the metre termed Gityarya, containing the same 
quantity in a greater number of syllables. 


OrueRr measures also containing the same quantity, 
but in a greater number of syllables, occur among the 
species of uniform metre. The subjoined note* ex- 
hibits several species, in whichgthe verse is divided by 
the position of the pauses into two parts equal in quan- 
tity, and some of them equal in number of syllables. 
Farther instances are also stated in the notes, of metre 
containing the same quantity similarly reducible to 
equal feet +. Someof the species of metre, which con- 
tain a greater number of syllables, are reducible, in 
conformity to the position of their pauses, to this class}. 


-—— 


*Rucmavati or Champacamdl4 compofed of alternate dactyls and 
spondees; Mattd measured by three spondees with four short syl- 
tables before the.last; Pan’ eve containing a spondee and dactyl, and 
an anapeest and spondce ; BAramaravila:itd measured by two spon- 
dees, four short syllables and an anapewst ; Jalodd hatagatd composed 
of alternate amphibrachys and. anapzest, und several other species ; 
as Cusuma vichitra, Manigun'a nicara, Cudmala danti, Laland, &c. 

‘+ Dod’haca compoted of three dactyls and a spondee; Totaca con- 
taining four anapzests; Pramitéeshara, measured by three anapests 
with an amphibrachys for the second foot; Mddd, a species of Chan- 
dravarii, and some others. we 

— _ t£ Thus Mattgcridé combines two simple kinds, the Vidyinmdla and 
Chandravarté.: So Craunchapadé, is composed of two species before- 
‘Mentioned, the Champacamdlé and Manigun’a. ; 


43% ON SANSCRIT AND 


Aux these varicties of tretre have a great analogy to 
the Métrasumaca and other species before described, 
which s milarly contain the quantity of 16 short, sylla- 
bles or 8 Jong ; reducible to four equal feet. , 


Amone the kinds of metre described at the foot of- 
the preceding paragraphs, the Dédhaca, Totaca and 
Pramitacshara are the most common. A stanza in the 
anapzestic measure named Pramitacshara, in which each 
verse exhibits alliteration at its close, has been already 
quoted from the fifth canto of the Crra:ajuma of Bua’. 
RAvVi. The specimen of anapzestic measure Yotaca, 
which will be here cited from the close of the Na/odaya, 
is a further instance of alliteration introduced into eve- 
ry stanza of this singular poem. 


TotTACa. 


Ari-sanhatir asya vanéshu s‘uchim padam apadam Apad 
ama’ padama. 

Sie’hadan cha yat’haivé janaya Harim yatam ayatamaya 
tama yata Ma, 


(See Prats B. Fig. g.) 


«The luckless and despondent croud of his foes found in 
the forests a calamitous place of sorrow ; and prosperity was 
constant to him, who gave happiness to a sincerely affection- 
~ ate people, as she clings to Hari, who blesses the guileless.” 
4.46, ; 


‘ 


Ir has ‘been. before said, that, in several sorts of 
metre, the pauses would justify the division of .the 
stanza into a greater number of verses than four.and in- 
stances have been shown, where either the number of 
syllables, or the quantity, would be the same in each 
verse of a stanza of eight, twelve, or even sixteen short 
verses. In the following species of metre, the verses 
of the stanza, subdivided according tu the pauses, are 


- 


> 


= 
¥ 
‘Se Si 


Z 
i. 


~ 
=f 


a 


ee 
oe 


= f° Se a, ™ ae oe ~ ipa 
bs wees a A Si iy 


tere Se ree 
- 
j ; 
peti 
yawast 
ae 


a. 


ae 


” ie eal’ 
4 oy PoP ty ‘ 


Ry oN QaAdx * 


WSR 1 iY Dik Ue IKUe kU pM SDE PBR be 
{ ub 2hik Phite? hier Phib GB eps 2A hpre 


6 Seg 


3k Wedd DS 
BES SbjistuhibsisG 1 YR Myre ybiy Sp uBidib tl WR i some ese ee Ribbeye eid 
HI we sebisune > prSi2 pith: bu bs WRK Ueber Shweeek bbe bh | suayipele 2 ube: AR 
berber tru Ne Ue Rave mibesia dy Baepeetaupse| | fteresbh mee lb ieiDh biote nie eR Ut HED 
Ut} SULPEBEREPIBYK | Ldibspksdeawabeniteys Ri US:detebtpibe | sumees | 


vy 2 


HERS BIZicblberee Sie} | oR | Bb abe mPEiehIhS rhiBs | BBnediewelee Seyi e 
Ue WDE W eby2e Mer rela wee | eae rhey hoe vlikbye |) o® 1 REpt ets 2s 
BerWekSe L21wPS hoe TPR UBReOw OE | ibuelaReb se dshie obvebs 1 unheh 
UsEMEDBuee Shes tt SE} nowewe Sa Bebe epee | Me iwefibs WBE E ds eum bie 


H (bucuib Sy 3 chu) dujicta|dee Re bh BP ele 2|k Ue 
| PUB bins bl Be wehwiPOBBPSivek hh? wv 


‘9° SU 


WW RUbReb PIR! JER (PEGI brie bJAyebI Re: kobe 
| WIRePLy he Yu de vibe DBEIPUEL Zerbhe z 


SLT 


1 PEE a) & 2b wis: be th: AReey ae kee 


y 8uy 


WSR HP ete ee 2B pe Hwee ryt REDS Pie Ibe 2 lb wee 
| Sari -wie Ribble hhhyeme eee Se bE Punky 2yEbjn 
‘¢ SU 


NG. I Ae 3 Bune YB b BPP eOye BP wiloder Bile WP twee Biko war 
I Repeat’ YHERPSe B2a-wwhl nme woh Bayh eB elbee 
“SM MRR Rik Loirribe Leuk Le in swufee ) BI eRyeLOLe bia jee 
I cbigtb Yeats pYhy SB  Lsky le ieee ehpoh BYyeLe ek BELLE 
2 he 
Who WHPITPRCCE PEERS IZSE eee pe SS Gye hej beJHuAE Bb 
1 Oper eyes 12 bylk PB : bhe eye ER Areb emmy sod basiwew Meyue 
‘ger evd') ALIA ‘7 Sug . 


lig. 8. 


faa AAA 


~ 


TIAMAISATS 


faaaa RUA 


analy) Sudtaazafaifearaa mf qa Yeoyu faye framartataatasishy) Rag ag 


x 


aRnaaTyfa a AAR WHAT: | AEA AL YTOAT A 


o 


BAAATA 


i BfeAigamms 


yatfa pfaft a 


+ 


\ 


ayaagatfafa | GaeT2 


yaw: sar 


agi | Man 7 gy ale faat antes 


a Sf. 


I YOM AFARS 


AND 8 ZS ifaRaranr: 


* 


IAT Il i 


e3 


< 


lo waAANIA aA aAfA 


WAR 


% 


aa Ves Ul aeMMRATgfig aa gATIAA | Ag 


> 


Zfaaan 1 ana ram arafqg 3 


8 


ARALR 
alfgan 


¥ 


yranmaa | RAMS foRTIUATAala aT A TY 


% 


AAA LYM BAARINS GA Val 


NE 


x 


~ 


:M-gain ala 


nyen 


PRACRIT POETRY. A33 


Tue Saérdilavicridita, a very common metre, of which 
examples occur in the former volumes of Asiatick Re- 
searches*, is a tetrastich in which the verse-consists of 
nineteen syllables divided by the pause into portions of 
twelve and seven syllables respectively. ‘The following 
instance of this metre is from the close of the first book 
of Ma’cHa’s epick poem; where Na’rrpa, having de- 
livered a message from InpRa, inciting CrisHn’a to 
war with Sts’ura’La, king of the Chéd/is, departs, leay- 
ing the hero highly incensed against his kinsman and 
enemy. 


[See Puare C. Fig. 1.] 


O'm ityuctavoto’t’ha sa’rngin’a, iti 
Vyo hritoa va'chan, nabhas 

Tasminn utpatiré purah sura-muna v 
Indoh s‘riyan vibhrou, 

S‘atru’n’a m anis‘am vinasa pis unah, 
Crudd’hosya Chaidyam prati, 


Vyo'mni va, bhruceti ch’haléna, vadané 
Cétus chaca'r'a’padam. 


‘Watts the divine sige, having delivered this discourse, 
ascended the sky, bearing on his front the radiance of the 
moon; the hero, armed with a bow, uttered an expression of 
assent ; and the frown, which found place on his brow wreak- 
ful against the prince of the Cdédis, was as a portent in the 
heavens, foretokening destruction of his foes.’ 1. 75. 


THe Manda'cra‘nta’, which is the metre in which 
the Még’hadtita is compesed, has pauses suddividing 
each verse of seventeen syllables into three portions, 
containing four, six, and seven syllables respectively : 
viz. two spondees ; twe pyrrichii and an iambic; a cre- 
tic, trachee, and spondee. The Harin'i differs from 
the preceding in transposing | the first and second 
portions of the verse, and making the third consist of 
an anapest between two iambics. An instance of it 
will be-fubsequently exhibited. . 


oe 


* Vol. [. p.27 
Vou. X. F £ 


NE NE ET ST 


9. 


A34 ON SANSCRIF AND 


Tue example of the firft mentioned metre, here in- 
serted, is from the Megha-dita. This elegant little 
poem, attributed as before observed to Ca’Lipa’sa, 
and comprising no more than 116 stanzas, supposes a 
Yacsha or attendant of Cuve’ra to have been separated 
from a beloved wife by an imprecation of the god 
€uve’ra, who was irritated by the negligence of the 
attendant in suffering the celeftial garden to be trodden 
down by Invra’s elephant. The distracted demigod, 
banished from heaven to the earth, where he takes his 
abode on a hill on which Ra’Ma once sojourned, * 
entreats a passing cloud to convey an affectionate mes- 
sage to his wife. 


Mandacrata metre. 


[See Piars C. Fig. 2.] 


6. Jatamy vanss'’é, bhuvana-vidité, pushcaravartacanam, 
Ja’na'mi twa'm, pracriti-purusan, ca maripam, Maghonah. 
Téna’ rt’hitwan, twayi, vid’hi-sasad daraband’hur, gato- 

ham, 
Ya‘ehna midgha’ varam ad’ higtiné, nac’hame labd’haca'ma. 

7. Santapta’na‘n twam asi s’aran’an ; tat, payd, priya ya’h 
Sandés‘am mé hara, d’hanapati-créd’ha-vis léshitasya, 
Gantavya’ té vasatir Alaca’ nama yacshés wara’n’am, 

a hyédya‘na- st’hita- hara-s’iras’ - chandrica -d’hcuta- 
harmya. 


“I KNEW thee sprung from the celebrated race of diluviag 
clouds, a minister of Inpra, who dost assume any form at 
pleasure: to thee I become an humble suitor, being se- 
parated by the power of fate from my beloved spouse: a 
request preferred in vain to the noble is better than success- 
ful solicitation to the vile. Thou art the refage of the in- 
flamed: therefore do thou, O cloud, convey to my beloved a 
message from me who ain banished by the wrath of the god of 
riches. Thou must repair to Alaca the abode of the lord of 
Yacsbas, a palace of which the whitened by the moonbeam 


Semel ot ee 


* Called Rémagiri. 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. A35 


from the crescent on the head of S’'rva, who seems fixed in 
the grove without.” 6 and 7. 


Tue Sicharin’i, also a common metre, distributes 
seventeen syllables into portions of six and eleven ; 
an iambic and two spondees in the one, anda tribra- 
chys, anapeest, dacty], and iambic in the other. This 
is the metre of the Ananda lahaai, a hymn of which 
SANCARA’CHA’RYA is the reputed author, and which 
is addressed to Siva’, the Sacti or energy ‘of Siva or 
Mana’pe’va. It comprises a hundred stanzas of or- 
thodox poetry held in great estimation by the devout 
followers of Sancara: the devotional poetry of the 
Hindus does not atnay employ metre of so high an 
order. 


ExAMPLES of this measure will be shown in a sub- 
sequent extract from a work of a very different kind: 
a drama, by Boavarnu’rientitled Mélati Mad have. 


Tue Maélini’, consisting of fifteen syllables, places 
two tribrachys and a spondee in the one subdivided 
portion of the verse, and a cretic, trochee, and spondee 
in the other. An instance of it occurs in a former ex- 
tract from the Cira’ta’rjuniya. ‘The following example 
of this metre is from the drama abovementioned. ‘The 
passage is descriptive of a love-sick maid. 


Moa’ ling metre. 
[See Phare C. Fig. 3°j 


Parimridita-mrin‘ali-mlanam angam ; prarittih 
Cat’ham api parivara-prart *hanabhih Criyasu. 
Calayati cha him4ns’6r nishcalancasya lacshmim 
Abhinava-cari-danta-chch’héda-cantah capélah. ° 


* Her person is weary like bruised threads of a lotos ; scarcely 
can the earnest intreaties of her attendants incite her to any 
exertion; her cheek, pale as new wrought ivory, emulates 
the beauty of a spotless moon. 1, 22. 


Pf 2 


A36 ON SANSCRIT AND 


Tue Praharshini, containing thirty syllables, sepa- 
rates a molossus, from two pyrrichii, as many trochees 
and aspondee. An example of it will be shown ina 
subsequent extract from BHAVABHU TI's drama. 


Tre Ruchira’, with the same number of syllables, 
disjoins two iambics, from two pyrrichil, a trochee and 
cretic. The opening stanza of the Bhattica’vya may 
serve as an instance of this metre. The poem bearing 
that title, is on the subject of the adventures of Ra’Ma? 
it 1s comprised in 22 cantos. Being composed pur- 
posely for the practical illustration of grammar, it ex- 
hibits a studied variety of diction in which words ano- 
malously inflected are most frequent. The style, how- 
ever, is neither obscure nor inelegant : and the poem 
is reckoned arnong the classical compositions in the 
Sanscritlanguage. The author was BHARTRIHARL: not, 
as might be supposed from the name, the celebrated 
brother of VicRaAMa’pITYA: but a grammarian and 
poet, who was son of S’gi’D’HARA SWA’M{, aS we are 
informed by onc of his scholiasts Vinya’ vINODE. 


Ruchira’ metre. 


[See Prater C. Fig. 4.] 


AbbGn nrip6, vibud’ ha-sac ‘hah, parantapah, srutanwit 6,Das | 


arat’é’ha ityndahritah, 
Ganair varam, bhuvana hita-chch’haléna, yam Sanatanah 
pitaram up gamat swayain. j 


* He, whom the eternal chose for a father, that he might 
benefit the wor'd [in a human form, ] was a king, a friend of 
the gods, a discomfiter of foes, and versed in “acience): his 


name was Das aratT ga. He wasa prince eminent for his 
virtues,’ 1. 1. 


THe Suvadand’ distributes twenty, syllables in three 
portions of the verse: one containing two spondees 


and a bacchius; the second four short syllables and an - 


anapzest ; 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. A437 


anapeeest ; the third a spondee, pyrrichius, and iam- 
bic. The Srag@hara’ a very common metre, differs 
from it, only in the third portion of the verse, which 
contains a trochee, spondee, and bacchius: but here the 
number of syllables in every subdivision is equal: viz. 
seven. In all the other instances above described, the 
subdivisions of the regular verses were unequal. 


Tue following sorts of metre, which are usually em- 
ployed, have no pauses but at the close of the verse. 
The Drata vilambité contains in each verse two ana- 
pzests. preceded by three short syllables and a long one, 
and followed by a trochee. Instances of this measure 
have been already cited in an extract from the Cirdtar- 
juniya. The Sragvini is measured by a trochee, spon- 
dee, and iambic repeated ; asthe Bhujangaprayata is by 
a similar repetition of an 1ambic, trochee, and spondee. 
Both sorts of metre are of frequent occurrence in clas- 
sick poems. 


Tue Vasantatilaca. which consists of a spondee, iam- 
bic, tribrachys, dactyl, crochee, and spondee, is one of 
the metres in most general use. It commonly occurs 
asa change from other metre. But the whole 5th canto 
of Ma’cua’s poem isin this measure. The Chaura 
panchasica, a short poem before described, is in the 
same metre, and so isa pathetick elegy on the death of 
a beloved wife which occurs in the Bhamani vilasa a 
collection of miscellaneous poetry by JAGANNA‘T’HA 
Pandita raja. It begins thus: 


Vasantatilaca. 


[See Pate C., Fig. 5.] 


‘ Since fate, alas ! is become adverse, and the gem of kindred 
is departed towards heaven; to whom, O my soul, wilt thou 
tell thy grief? and who will appease thy anguish with refresh- 
ing words?’ 

Ff 3 


438 ON SANSCRIT AND 


Tux following passage from some Hindi poem, is 
quoted in Na’RAYAN’A BHAT’T’A’s Commentary on the 
Vritta Retnacara as a specimen of this metre in the 
Canyacubja dialect. 


[See Prare C. Fig. 6.] 


Candarpa-ripa jaba tén tumha linha, Crishn’a! Locépacca- 
ma hama hin, baéu-pira, ch’hd:4, 

Jau bhét'icain viraha-pira nasdii méri. Yain bhénu dati 
path ‘ai, cahi bata, Gépi.* 


“ CRISHNA, since thou didft assume the form of Cupid, f 
have neglected worldly affairs, suffer:ng much anxiety. Re- 
lieve by thy presence the pain of separation which [ endure. 


Such was the message, with which the Gop dispatched her 
embassadress.”’ 


V. Sloca or Vactra. 


THE most common Sanscrit metre is the stanza of 
four verses containing eight syllables each: and deno- 
minated from the name of the class, Anushtubh. Se- 
veral species of it have been described. Two very sim- 
ple kinds of it occur, consisting of iambic, or trochaic 
feet exclusively. The rest are included in one gene- 
ral designationt. But several analogous species are 
comprehended under the denomination of Vactra. 
Here the laws of the metre, leaving only the first and 
eighth syllables indeterminate, require either a bacchiu 


— 


* Short vowels, when final, are so faintly sounded, that they are 
ufaally omitted in writing the provincial languages of Jndia in Ro- 
man character, But they have been here preserved at the close of 
words ; being necessary, as in Sanscrit, for exhibiting the metre. 

jeThe first termed Pramdni, the other Samdni. “Considered as a - 
species of uniform metre, the first is also named Nagaswarupini or 
_ Matallied; and the second is denominated Mallicd. There js alsoa 

regular measure which alternates trochees and iambics, and is deno- 
minated Manavacdcrida : and another, named Chitrapada, consisting 
of two dictyls anda spondee.  — 

t Vitana. 


m * 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. A39 


or anamphibrachys * before the eighth syllable, and 
forbid an anapaest or tribrachys after the first; as also 
in the 2d and 4th verses of the stanza, an amphimacer. 
A variety of this metre introduces a tribrachys before 
the 8th syllable in the Jst and 3rd verses, and a bacchius 
in the 2dand 4thf. And another sortt, which admits 
five varieties, requires the penultimate syllable to be 
short in the 2d and 4th verses ; and introduces before 
the 8th syllable of the 1st and third verses, a dactyl, 
anapeest, tribrachys, amphimacer, or molossus. 


Tue metre, which is most in use, is one of the spe- 
cies now described, in which the number of syllables is 
determinate (viz. 8); but the quantity variable. Ca’- 
LIDA‘SA appropriates to this metre the term S’/ca (ab- 
breviated from Anushtubh s’loca); and directs, that the 
fifth syllable of each verse be short; the sixth, long ; 
and the seyenth alternately long and short. The mytho- 
logical poems under the title of Pura’n’a, and the me- 
trical treatises on law and other sciences, are almost en- 
tirely composed in this easy verse: with a sparing inter- 
mixture of other analogous sorts, and with the still rarer 
introduction of other kinds of metre. The varieties of 
the Anushiubh S'loca, which most frequently occur, 
make the 5th, 6th, and 7th syllables of the ist and 3d 
verses all long or all short; or else the 5th long with 6th 
and 7th short. ‘Thus varied, it is much used by the 
best poets. Ca’tipa’sa has employed it in the 2d and 
Oth cantos of his poem entitled Cumara sambhava; and 
in the Ist, 4th, and several others of the Raghuvan'a. 
The 2d and :gth cantos of Ma’c’Ha’s poems are in 
this metre, and so is the 11th of the Cira/arjuniya. 


Tue examples, here subjoined, are from Ma’e’Ha’s 
poem. One passage is part of a speech of Ratara’mMa 


eo 


* The metre is named Pathya when an amphibrachys is introduced 
in the 2d and 4th yerses ; some say in the ist and 3d, 

+ Chapalu, : 

ot Vipula. F f 4. ° - 


AAO ON SANSCRIT AND 


to Crisun’A, urging him to the immediate commence- 
ment of hostilities against Sisurana: the other is ex- 
tracted from Upp’nava’s reply, dissuading CaisHna 
from instant war, and-advising his previous Compliance 
with YuD HISHT HIRBA’S invitation to assist ata solemn 
sacrifice which the king was on the point of celebrating 
at Lndraprast ha. 


[See Prats C, Fig. 7.] 


BaxLara’MA speaks, ‘A proved enemy, and a tried friend, 
are most to be regarded ; for they are known by their actions: 
others, presumed to be so, from temper or affinity, may be 
found in the end to be friend or foe. Peace may be maintained 
with a natural enemy, who confers benefits; not with a pre- 
sumptive friend, who commits outrages; kindness, or injury, 
is the proper test of both. ‘Tke king of the Chédis was offend- 
ed, O Hakt, by thy seizure of RucHMINI: for woman is the 
chief cause, that the tree of discord takes root. Whilst thou 
wert engaged in subduing the offspring of the earth, he be- 
sieged this city, as darkness encirc'es the skirts of Méru, while 
the sun is remote. To hint, that be ravished:the wife of 
Varuev is enough: the narration of crimes is too disgust - 
ful. Thus agerieved by thee, and having much injured us, 
the son of S RurAs RAV AS 15 an enemy demonstrated by deeds, 
The man, who is negligent, while an enraged foe meditates 
aggressions, sleeps in the wind with fire under hisarm. What 
forbearing man, who would cheerfully dissemble a slight and 
single injury, can patiendly endure repeated wrongs. At other 
times, patience becomes a man; and pudency, a woman; but 
valour befits the insulted warrior ; as modesty should be laid 
aside by a woman in the nuptial bed. Whoever dives, (may 
none so live !) tortured by the pain of insults from his enemy ; 
would that he had never been born, vainly giving his mother 
anguish. Dust, which, kicked by the foot of the tfaveller, 
rises and setties on his head, is less contemptible than the das” 
tard, who is contented under wrongs.’ 2. 36—46. 


Upp’Hava in reply addressed to Ca1suna. ‘ 


[See Puare C. Fig. 8.] 


PRA’CRIT POETRY AAI 


“The just King, and his kiasmen, relying on thee for an 
associate capable of sustaining the heaviest burden, are willing 
to undertake the task of a solemn sacrifice. Even to enemies 
who court them, the magnanimous show kindness; as rivers 
convey to the ocean the rival torenis from the mountains, 
Violence, used against foes by the strong, 1s at length success- 
ful; but friends, once offended, are not easily reconciled even 
by compliances. Thou thinkest, that the slaughter of the 
foe will most gratify the inhabitants of heaven: bat far betier 
is it to present offerings, which are desired by the deities, 
who devour oblations. What the virtuous offer, under the 
name of ambrosia, in flames, whose tongues are holy prayers, 
was the splendid ornaiment of the ocean churned by the moun- 
tain Mandara. The promise made by thee to thy father’s 
venerable sister, to forgive her son a hundred offences, should 
be strictly observed. Let the intellect of a good man be 
sharp without wounding; let his actions be vigorous, but 
conciliatory ; let his mind be warm without inflaming: and 
let his word, when he speaks, he rigidly maintained. Before 
the appointed hour, even thou art not able to destroy the ty- 
rant, on whom thyself conferred that boon ; no more than the 
sun can prematnrely close the day, which he himself enlights , 
ens. 2. 105—110. 


‘V. Compound metre, 


Insranczs of compound metre have been already 
exhibited under the designation of Upajati, consisting 
of two kinds of siraple metre variously combined: 
two of these combinations are repeated under the head 
of half equal metre with The contrasted names of 4e’h- 
yanaci and Viparitac hyanaci. Other species of metre, 
belonging to this clas3, are in use among eminent poets : 
particularly the Pushpitagrz, and Aparavactra. Inthe 
first, both verses are terminated by two troehees anda 
spondee, and begin with four short syllables, one verse 
interposing a pyrrichius, andtke other a dactyl. In the 
next species, both verses are terminated by three 1ambics, 
and begin hke the preceding with four short syllables; 
but one verse interposes a single short syllable, and 
the other a trochee. | 


~ 


44% ON SANSCRIT AND 


Exampxes of the first of these mixed measures are 
very common. One instance has been already exhibited 
in a quotation from the Ist canto of Bua’Ra’vr’s 
poem of Arsuna and the mountaineer. The whole 
tenth canto of the same poem, and the seventh of 
Ma’eua’s death of S’ts’upa’La are in this mixt metre. 
The second is less common: but an instance occurs in 
the 18th canto of the Cira’ta’rjuniya. 


Tue close of the gth canto of Ca’iipa’sa’s Raghu- 
vans’a, exhibiting a variety of metre, in which two of 
the species now mentioned are included, is here cited 
for the sake of these and of other species which have 
been before described. The subject is Das’paT’HA’s 
hunt, in which he slew the hermit’s son: a story well 
known to the readers of the Rhdmdyan’a. . 


[See Prare D. Fig. 1.] 


€ Thus did the chase, like an artful mistress, allure the 
king forgetful of all other business, and leaving to his ministers 
the burden of the state, while his passion grew by indul- 
gence. 

‘ The king, without his retinue, passed the night in some 
sequestered spot, reposing on a bed of leaves and blossoms, 
and enlightened by the flame of wild herbs. At dawn, being 
awakened by the flapping of his elephant’s ears in place of the 
royal drums, he delighted in listening to the sweet and auspi- 
cious tones of chirping birds. 

‘ One day, pursuing an antelope, and outstriping his atten- 
dants, he arrived, with his horse foaming with fatigue, on the 
bank of Tamasd a stream frequented by the devout. In its 
waters a deep sound caused by the filling of a vase, was 
mistaken by the king for the grumbling of an elephaht; 
and he directed an arrow towards the spot whence the sqund 
proceeded. By this forbidden act, * Das’RAT’HA transgressed: 
for even the wise, when blinded by passion, deviate into the 

athless waste. ‘ Ah father!” was the piteous cry which 
issued; and the king, anxious, sought its cause among the 


ee eed 


* The royal and military tribe is prohibited from killing elephants ' 
less in battle. ‘ 


| veduthiea nin: 2Oe ee Aen Birdenwe oe Bein “Zum 
el RY ; 


s 


WEIR Siie “A wysunyal 
a of 


(BLEWantiovio hime PRR RE SEL EU ERY - 2ucyseoypnty 


Hot qi BESREM DIE BEaAr 


? 


Jeb eee He eipinbeR Reet SP hh | bbe Ree eibpIeeteimlOd > Bw > 
‘CUb Ol “CO ALF Id EB. 


WV Ne Pees De 2ye wey Hee Id ey EIRIRD Yh 
le hepBe Bes PSD ApH te Cente Esher 


| ce Rw ss ppwy: BWR Rete 2b t Ph bs Ww BIRD) 
OUT 


WX hte Dey be Bp Lue KER) & fe DRebere ee ey Bi! origi Gee eek pee Mesa 


+ 
1 PB wR IB LB: pee USN Sn Pisin Lies Bye alee te Sih se yeh eB Le Ite DEP LA VINPS. + 
ISL 


HAL HW WEEDS BEERS EL SGV OyPrER erp bye ryiiebyinin Yeu SP w Bye wire 


bK:e 2 eas eeciatel 1 Pe Gidib Mee Yee eipbpey Be Bear MPA MINS 
‘2 std” 


> 
ween Aye reipeey wo} Le Di IPL B Phe ie robe wee Bale 


1 stenia > & Peery Aum iL te emmh2 tne Snipe yy Murer fp 
ELST 


wre PE Sp IDby DIP: init Re ke Be ND-e thin Pye bats PAR ELS 


) veduthieapia: 2 ee epe2) eK Bie beynsi eee Bisdintt 2 uA I 
‘ayy 


UY Hehe ek a HAZY RIBERYe IR SMine 8 A eyryy y 
en ur 


1 see: atbeye town Pew wpe Sige) PUA SKY + LUaYSLDYVAT & 


et Og 


Not N BERR EM NTe eb Abe BRBuE eB oiwhie Se leeiwe yk Re 
. ? ? 
(Pe uclvire tripe PEMRUP ES 2ubib Pls la sh aed epalk } Ye eI be “DEP LIUAs DINpIO LS | 
OL SUT 


wD. n: eeRaup DB ir bibkey best ide 2jere Be 
tf & Bebieb Lelie Ley B LOS! oD edhe We BmieBhe SubyK | wurst we Rye Su ee Sicaueusd or 
Satarna sii lode ova pee Uikikine B12 Pee Skye edse een PRiteu yen sh pri 2 
Hibrbpes me ce iS riots 2 uype BEjbes? jbunmpRAmES kite pte > irc eh BaL SSB 1 py Gu 
bb BkyKuRE A Ziste we Be Bie th See ie 1 wit ieette > Bey Se BEJHIGIIER bi pees veh 


Cate 
x 
Hos Wwe 


pri ibyinip boebipep 2 Shbikn eviews | BE PRUIR PANS aT WED Sik eesbib- 


Bure i SS theupR > bile PrP ke 
Ripe Dip 


we iby NS Bipg | PDBESIPE REM PAID E web 
iGeu: ‘ptFel bleu ep keer ® nik uiejpes iy > mAb ew 1B | :VBRIBJR Beye Ub 


TB the Be se a> Ree SUP heirllBis i 3a is diba: dekh ® Phe Ap iekiGa: poe BwS bina ib 


BRUR EPUB pet IR PIE REPEL; AO Ae we ariae 3 "hot Bye Me sb p> BE je sb Bike Pee Re yy] 
Pepbe2 digs | Pikedibejw ee ieiR GEIR euRTE Bekele a2 B inuk W Ro URE bieAB we 
Bs ge cane bib hee wire | BEYER bp bie 2wPUEE bh Bib Baie ADL Wes 
PE Pe My tube REY bye Shue Bibb} b rSanviag 1k bie M3 > bu ipre ps TBR: wk b 
b1S bien Biv Wes ae: RIL EBEE BPRIRE Dep be BICIBB IRL vei a cea 
B HEN ep ke S uve BEE Wo 1 BheurR & Ph bk eae Sie Py: *PGeynelve Bye ft 
222 bith Pepe hur ewni neue BDWEIEL oS Dine, Ey wip 3g es 2 ipwe ne te 
SeR2b ike 1 BER K2TeveEREyD B WB epPY Sake De PIRIeLS 11 NE ni BE bit Y bl Sie 
but Bwe jon Sb ents ! vomeeyet Sin eiee Sey eb Bee: fehe u — uw We eelewevlin 2 p 
Eee Sy Wipe n | UA YB Se ky bie tet ehpHiobhe se 1 aon ib S Leibe big wie 
WRIDMEEE Em | ‘Mie DR b>} Eetbteh eye viding Timaru So nee Se dye peyery Ser 
EbirfoiMlUB IRb Lis be | DEMIR Iyer 3 2 b2h: Rib LOS abe rage e 1 NG a tS Bo 
tibva Pele elem Zuber burp Pes | WME Bie LPRIb v2 nee APES SEEPS MRO Il 


debe e cee MEH inieiubeR rect Sin 1 whRpre RY eye biel etwstluM? & meweeie) > 
“OUY Md “Ol ALF Td Tr: Sag _ 


Fig. 18. 


Avery uncommon metre named Avitat‘ha or Hareut aca. 


t 
frafataaa Zaat 


fafgaanauza: 
xo 


4G ZU 


Fig. 20. 
TASBUatIa 


featifaatanyrorat 
faqag : 14 faafafgatargtan wafeiimaeufe aay afafaza ni QQ il 


any 


* Sic'harini 


quifag aed auiigezefana 


Sana: 


Al WMA wag we 


-_ 
a 


aufaagian aaag @ryfeda:aa 


faat7ata ans 


> 


Ey) 


“é 


afanial tig atcatatytaag vara BATT AM | 37 
area afaamfaa:catUfaa aa YEH 


Fig.6. 
fi 


mr try 


- 


az wages 


+ Mandacranta 


~ 


Fs Fig.19. 
Ofaureg F ugay ama-faaacifariataz -auita | 


ar 
BS 
Wen fawnfas aaya Zz 


% Vasanta tilaca. 


Pia 


ak 


28 


fhasafag [atag antine ga 


= 


WEL INs: WQS Il 


- = 


sera afmarag 


\ 


s 


paafaaRr AT IaGee Anta TAMIIATY wa 


Svat aga ata WI 


AUT U 


farfan 


= 


Fig:5. 
HEWN DA BET] HI 
1 TA AYUKA TG 


- 


j 
AGA 


| 


¢ 
r 


t Sardula vicridita . 
t araassiturat aa 


=> 


We: 


ATARI Wlarwaana | 


. 


Fig: 17. 
fi afaas afayadfaqaia 


mA a x BAfERUTAaafeA: 1 RE II 


WNIT 
tA Aaaafannonn aA 


* Sicharin' . 


awa 


Pig. 4. 


« 
nT 


ginafadt aaa masAauANaAg Mew 


Cy 


Fi 
4. 
fafa tata sfanaA a ataazaferanautaazafgaata a muag xf 


ig. o 
{an 


ata gaifamarfa 


Baa Gates ye 4 


Angiran 


CS 


aaferat faxta 


* Anushiubh. 3TT SYA AATIATE 


Sa:tifea VS 


i Sardula vicri ‘dila. 


it a bhjwh 342 th: yb 2yeee Rabel 
| :b2yRey Byby dy 2Oev ee Stinevpee 


mraAnfagtara gteq nu 


+ 


Fig.7. 
Jat HAURafa: | faaaaa 


#Q aldaaraq 


T Vactra. 


PRAC’RIT POETRY. AA3 


reeds. He found the vase; and, near it, a hermit’s son 
pierced by his arrow; and he stood amazed as if internally 
wounded. ‘he king, of glorious lineage, who had already, 
alighted from his horse, eagerly inquired the parentage of the 
youth; who, resting on the vase, with feeble accents said 
*© he was the son of a hermit, but no priest.” Instructed by 
him, the king conveyed the wounded youth to his blind pa- 
rents: and to them as they approached their only son, he 
related his mistaken deed. The unhappy pair, lamenting, 
conjured the king to draw the arrow from the breast of their 
wounded son. ‘Vhe youth was dead. The aged hermit rati- 
fying his curse with tears instead of water for a libation, pro- 
nounced this imprecation on the king, ‘ In thy extreme 
age thou shalt reach thy fated time, with grief like mine for a 
beloved son.” While he spoke, as it were a serpent assailing 
first and then discharging fatal venom ; Caus ALya’slord, 
conscious of the first offence, addressed him thus: ‘ Thy 
curse has fallen like a boon on me, who have not seen the 
beauteous countenance of offspring; as fire, fed with fuel, 
fertilises the soil which it burns.”’ The king then said, “* For 
me, who merciless deserves death at thy hands, whatare thy 
commands >?” The holy hermit asked fuel for the funeral pile ; 
he and his wife resolving to follow their son in death. The 
king, whose attendants were now arrived, promptly fulfilled his 
command, and remained dejected, bearing with him the her- 
mit’s curse, a cause of his future destruction, as the ocean 
embraces the devouring fire. Again the king addressed him. 
«* Wise hermit! what shall this shameless criminal, who de- 
serves death from thee, now perform.”’ He desired the funeral 
flame to be duly lighted: and the king presented the fire for 
him and his wife and son. 

‘ The chief of the race of RaGcuu, attended by his army, 
now returned to his palace, dejected, bearing in his mind 
the heavy imprecation of the saint, as the ocean holds within 
itself the fire of destruction.’ 9. 74.—89. 


‘Tuts extract exhibits, besides two stanzas of Pus 
pitagra* and as many of Sundari metre, ~~ both 
belonging to the present head, and one, of which an 
example was promised in this place, ¢ several others 


- 


— ae re ee 


* 75 and 76. 
{ 77 and 79, most properly the last. ; 
t Swdgatd 78. 


AAA ON SANCKIT AND 


which have been before exemplified, * and twe which 
are less common. - 


A SINGULAR species of variable metre is menuioned 
by writers on prosody, who describe it as a stanza in 
which the verses increase in arithmetical progression. 
In the instance exlibited by them the four verses of 
the stanza increase regularly from 8 to 20 syllables. 
Varieties of it are noticed in which the progression is 
not regular: the short verse exchanging places with 
the second, third, or fourth. The quantity of the 
syllables is in general indeterminate: but varieties are 
stated in which tle verse consists of short syllables, 
either ending, or beginning with a spondee, or both 
ending and beginning with spondees. 


A cxuass of metre, which admits an inordinate 
length of the verse, 1s known under the general designa- 
tion of Dan‘daca. The verse may consist of any num- 
ber of syllables from 27 to 999; and the specifick 
name varies accoidingly. * ‘The construction of the 
metre requires that the fix first syllables be short, and 
the remainder of the verse be composed of cretick 
feet; or, instead of’ the cretick foot, the bacchius. 
These two kinds of metre are distinguished by diffe- 
rent names. A verse consisting of any number of 
anapeests within- the Jimitation abovementioned, 1s 
also comprebended under this general designation; as 
are verses of similar length consisting exclusively of 
iambick or trochaick feet. ‘hey have their peculiar 
‘denominations. 


— + 


—— — - 


* Vasania tilaca81—87 and Upéndravajra $8. Ruchird 90. 


+ Manjubhdshini 74 (P.T.D. 31.) and Maitamayira 80 (2S - 


T.1.D.S.) : 
t For example. Arza, which comprises 10 feet ; Aanava 11; 
Vy'ala12; Jimu'ta13; &e. ~ 


- 


— 


PRA‘’CRIT POETRY. 4A5 


Examp es of these extravagantly long verses are 
to be found in the works of the poet Va’na. It ts 
unnecessary to insert any specimen of them in this 
place ; as an example will occur in a subequent quota- 
tion from BHavaBHuTi’s drama. 


Tuat class of metre which is termed half equal, be- 
cause the alternate verses are alike, comprises various 
sorts, which appear to be compounded of two simple 


kinds with an appropriate number of syllables of a de- 
terminate quantity. 


ANOTHER class, in which every verse of the stanza. 


is different, appear more complex. But, here also, the 
quantity as well as the number of syllables being regu- 


lated, the stanza is in fact composed of four kinds of 
uniform metre. 


THE most common metre of this class is that called 
Udgatd. ere the number of syllables in each verse, 
as well as their quantity differs; the first verse com- 
prising an anapeest, iambick, tnbrachys, and trochee; 
the second a tribrachys and anapest with two iambics ; 
the third, a trochee, tribrachys, and two anapeests*; 


and the fourth, an anapeest, iambick, and pyrrichius, 
with three iambicks. 


Tue 12th canto of the Cira’ta’rjuniya is in this me- 
tre; and so is the 15th cantoof Ma’cua’s epick poem. 
It begins thus: 


[Sze Puate D. Fig. 2.] 


* But the king of the Chédis was impatient of the honoars, 
which the son of Pandu commanded to be shown in thit as- 


——— 


* Or the third yerse may consist of a trochee and dactyl, with two 
anapests ; or of two trochees, with two anapeests : and the metre is 


denominated, in the first instaace Sanrabhaca ; 3 im the second, La- 
lita. 


i? 


446 ON SANSCRIT AND 


sembly to the foe of Mad’hu: forthe mind of the proud is 
envious of the prosperity of others.” 


Oruer kinds of metre, in which every verse of the 
stanza differs in the number and quantity of syllables, 
are comprehended under the general name of Gd'ha ; 
under which also some writers on prosody* include any. 
sort of metre not described by PiNGALA, or not distin- 
guished by a specific appellation. The same denomi- 
nation is applicable also to stanzas consisting of any 
number of verses other than four ~~. An instance of 
a stanza of six verses has been remarked in the Mahab- 
kérata ; andanother example occurs at the beginning of 


Ma’cua’s poem. 
, [Sze Puate D. Fig. 3.] 


Dwidha critatma, cim ayam divacar6é ? 
Vid’htima rochih, cim ayam hutas‘anah ? 
Gatan tiraschinam antru sarat’ héh. 
Prasidd’ham trddhajwalanam havirbhujah. 
Patatyad’ ho dhama-visari sarvatah. 

Cim étad ? ityaculam icshitam janaih. 


Na’rEDA descending from the heavens to visit CRISHNA, 
is thus described: 


_ Ts this the sun self parted into two orbs ? Et is fire shining 

with light divested of smoke. The motion of the luminary, 
whose charioteer has no legs, is distinguished by its curvature. 
The assent of flame is a known property of fire. Then what 
is this. which descends diffusing light around?” Thus was 
the sight contemplated with wonder by the people.’ Mag’ha 


1. 2. 
———_— € 


* Heva’yup’uaand Na’Rayan‘a Tara’. 

+ Diva’cara on the Vritta Retnaara. 

t It is cited by Diva’cara BHATTA as an instance of a stanza of 
six. Yet the scholiasts of the poem omit the two first verses, and 
read the stanza as a tetrastich: one commentator, however, dues 
remark, that copies of the poem exhibit the additional verses ; and 
another commentator has joined them with two more verses ina s« 
parate stanza. 


PRA‘CRIT POETRY. 447 


VI. Prose; and Verse mixed with Prose. 


I roLtow the example of Sunscrit writers on proso- 
dy, in proceeding to notice the different species of 
prose. ‘They discriminate three and even four sorts, 
under distinct names. 1st. Simple prose, admitting no 
compound terms. It is denominated Muclaca. This 
is little used in polished compositions: unless in the 
familiar dialogue of dramas. It must undoubtedly have 
been the colloquial style, at the period when Sznscrit 
was a spoken language. 2d, Prose, in which compound 
terms are sparingly admitted. It is called Culzca, 
This and the preceding sort are by some considered as 
varieties of a single species named Chirr/icd. It is of 
course a common stile of composition: and, when po- 
lished, is the most elegant as it is the chastest. But it 
does not command the admiration of Afindu readers. 
3d, Prose abounding in compound words. It bears the 
appellation of Uscalica praya, Examples of it exhibit 
compounds of the most inordinate length: and a sin- 
gle word exceeding a hundred syllables is not unprece- 
dented. This extravagant stile of composition, being 
suitable to the taste of the Indian learned, is common in 
the most elaborate works of their favourite authors. Ath, 
Prose modulated so as frequently to exhibit portions of 
verse. It is named Vrittagand’hi. It will occur with- 
out study, and even against design, in elevated compo- 


sitions; and may be expected in the works of the best 
writers. 


Some of the most elegant and highly wrought works 
in proseare reckoned among poems, as already intimated, 
in like manner as the “Telemache” of Fengtoy and 
“Tod Abels” of Gessner. The most celebrated are 
the Vasavadatta of Suzanp’nv, the Dasa Cumdra ef 
Dan’pi, and the Cadambari of Va'wa. 


448 ON SANSCRIT AND 


Tue first of these is a short romance of which the 
story is simply this. .Canparp PACE ‘Tu, a young and 
valiant prince, son of Cuinra’wan’t king of Cusuma- 
pura*, saw in a dream a beautiful maiden of whom he 
became desperately enamoured. Impressed with the 
belief, that a person, such as seen by him in his dream, 
had a real éxistence. he resolves to travel in search of 
her, and <leparts, attended only by his confidant Maca- 
RANDA. While reposing under a tree in a forest at the 
foot of the Vind hya mountains, where they halted, 
MacaranpDa overhears two birds conversing, and from 
their discourse, he learns, that the princess Va’sava- 
patra’, having rejected all the suitors who had been 
assembled by the king her father for her to make choice 
of a husband, had seen CaAnDARPACE’TU in a dream, 
in which she had even dreamt his name. Her confi- 
dant, Tama’xica, sent by her in search of the prince, 
was arrived in the same forest, and is discovered there 
by Macaranpba. She delivers.to the prince a letter 
from the princess, and conducts him to the king’s pa- 
lace. He obtains from the princess the avowal of her 
love ; and her confidant, Cacati reveals to the prince 
the violence of her passion. 


Tue lovers depart together : but, passing. through 
the forest, he loses her in the night. After long and 
unsuccessful search, in the course of which he reaches 
the shore of the sea, the prince, grown desperate 
through grief, resolves on death. But at the moment 
when he was about to cast himself into the sea, he hears 
a voice from heaven which promises to him the reco- 
very of his mistress and indicates the means. After 
some time, CANDARPACk’ Tu finds a marble statute the 
precise resemblance of Va’ SAVADATTA.. It proves to 
be her; and she quits her marble form and regains ani. 


. 
—_—_- 


a eC - 
4 


* Same with Pat‘ali pura or Pat'ali putra; the ancient Palibothra, 
now Paina. As. Res, Vol. 1V. g. 11. 


~ 


PRA‘CRIT POETRY. AAG 


mation. She recounts the citcumstances under which 
she was transformed into stone. 


Havine thus fortunately recovered |iis beloved 
princess, the prince proceeds to his city, where they 
pass many years in uninterrupted happiness. 


Turs story, told in elegant language and intermixed 
with many flowery descriptions in a poetical style, is 
the Va’savaparra’ of SuBAND’ nu. ‘Lhere is an al- 
lusion, however, in BuavasHu’rts drama *, to ano- 
ther tale of Va’savaparra’s having been promised 
by her father to the king Sanjaya and giving herself 
in marriage to Upayana, Iam unable to reconcile 
this contradiction otherwise than by admitting an iden- 
tity of name and difference of story. But no other 
traces has been yet found of the story to which Bua- 
VABHU TI has alluded. 


Ty the work above described, as in various compo-: 
sitions of the same kind, the occasional introduction of 

a stanza, or even several, either in the preface, or in the 
baky of the work, does not take them out of the class 
of prose. But other works exist, in which more fre- 
quent introduction of verse makes of these a class apart, 
It bears the name of Champ: and of this kind is the 
Nala Champu of TrivickaMa before mentioned. This 
style of composition 1s not without example in European 
literature. The ‘* Voyage de BacnAumonr et de ua 
CHAPELE, * which is the most known, if not the first 
instance of it, in French, has found imitators in that 
and in other languages. The Sascrit inventor of it 
has been equally fortunate: and a numerous list may be 
collected of br en ex pressly entitled Chanpit +. 


a a ee ee 


_ * Malati madha? va. Act.2d. 

t As the Wrisinha Champu, Ganga Champu, Frindavanna Chame 
pu, &c. 

Vou. X. Ge 


450 ON SANSCRIT AND 


THe Indian dramas are also instances of the mixture 
of prose and verse ; and as already mentioned, they like~ 
wise intermixed a variety of dialects. Our own lan- 
guage exhibits too many instances of the first to ren- 
der it necessary to cite any example in explanation of 
the transition from verse to prose. In regard to mix- 
ture of languages the /te/an theatre presents instances 
quite parallel in the comedies of ANGELO BEoLco 
surnamed Ruzanri:* with this difference, however, 
that the dramas of Ruzanrr and his imitators are 
rustic farces; while the /vdian dramatists intermingle 
various dialects in their serious compositions. © 


+1 


Notwitustanpine this defect, which may in- 
deed be easily removed by reading the Précrit speeches 
in a Sanscrit version, the theatre of the Hindus is the 
most pleasing part of their polite literature and the 
best suited to the European taste. The reason proba- 
bly is, that authors are restrained more within the 
bounds of poetic probability, when composing for ex- 
hibition before an audience, than in writing for private 
perusal or even for public recital. 


Tue Sacuntahi by Ca’tipa’sa, which certainly i 
no unfavorable specimen of. the Jndian theatre, wi 
sufficiently justify what has been here asserted. I sh 
conclude this essay with a short extract from BHA A- 
BHU‘ T{’s unrivalled. drama, entitled Milalinanberts 


prefixing a concise argument of the play, the fable 
which is of pure inyention. aacan ) 
se abil 
‘ Buou’riv ASU, minister of the king oF, Palnéviaie 
and Devara’ra inthe service of the king of Viderbha, 
had agreed, when their children were yet infants, to 


cement a long subsisting friendship, by the intermarni- 


« 
Se 


~~ -——— 


— Se — 


* Warkra's poem on Italian tragedy. 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. 451 


age of Ma’ari daughter of the first with Ma’p’nava 
son of the latter. ‘The king having indicated an in- 
tention to propose a mateh, between Buu’xivasu’s 
daughter, and his own favourite NAnpANA, who was 
both old and ugly, the minister is apprehensive of 
giving offence to the king by refusing the match ; and 
the two friends concerta plan with an old priestess, who 
has their confidence, to throw the young people in 
each other’s way, and to connive at a stolen marriage. 
In pursuance of this scheme, Ma’p’Hava is sent to 
finish his studies at the city of the Padmévaty under the 
care of the old priestess Camanpaci, By her con- 
trivance, and with the aid of Ma’xari’s foster sister 
Lavaneica, the young people meet and become 
mutually enamoured. It is at this period ot the story, 
immediately after their first interview, that the play 
opens, The first scene, which is between the old 
priestess and her female pupil AvaLécita, ina very 
natural manner introduces an intimation of the pre- 
vious events, and prepares the appearance of other 
characters, and particularly a former pupil of the same 
priestess named Saupa’Mini, who has now arrived at 
supernatural power by religious austeritics; a circum- 
stance which her successor Avaxnéciz’a has learnt 
from Cara LAcuN DALA’ the female pupil of a tremen- 
dous magician. AGHORAGHAN’T A who frequents the 
temple of the dreadful goddess near the cemetery ot 
the city. 


‘ Tue business of the play commences; and Ma’- 
p'HAVA, his companion Macaranpba, and servant 
CALAHANSA appear upon the scene. Ma’p’ava te- 
lates the circumstances of the interview with Ma’.Lati, 
and acknowledges himself deeply smitten. | His atten- 
dant produces a picture which Ma’ta‘vj had drawn of 
Ma‘p’Hava, and which had come into his hands from 
one of her female attendants. In return Ma’p’HAVA 
delineates the likeness of EYE on the same tablet 

g 2 


452 ON SANSCRIi AND 


and writes under it an impassioned stanza, It 1s re- 

stored; and being in the sequel brought back to 
Manari, their mutual passion, encouraged’ by their 
respective confidants, 1s naturally increased. ‘This in- 
cident furnishes matter for several scenes. Mean time, 
the king had made the long expected demand ; and the 
minister has returned an answer that ‘ the king may 
dispose of his daughter as he pleases.” The intelli- 
gence reaching the lovers throws them into despait. 
arn interview in a public garden takes place by 
the contrivance of Ca'Manpaci. At this moment, a 
cry of terror announces that a tremendous tiger has 
issued from the the temple of S’iva: an instant’ after, 
Nawpana’s youthful sister Mapayantica’ is re- 
ported to be in imminent danger. Then M’ap’nava’s 
companion, Macaranpa, is seen rushing to her 
rescue. He has killed the tiger. He is himself 
wounded. This passes behind the scenes. MapayAn- 
rica, saved by the valourof Macaranba, appears on 
thestage. The gallant youth is brought in insensible. 
By the care of the women he revives: and’ MADAYAN- 
rica’ of course falls in love with’her deliverer. The 
preparations for M auari’s wedding with NANDANA 
are anounced. The women are called away. MaA~ 
p'HAVA in despair resolves to sell bis living flesh for 
food to the ghosts and malignant spirits as his onl 

resource to purchase the accomplishment of his wish. 

He accordingly goes at night to the cementery. Pre- 
vious to his appearance there, Capa’Lacun’D’aLa’, 
in a sbort soliloquy, has hinted the magician’s design 
of offering a human sacrifice at the shrine of the 
dreadful goddess, » and selecting a beautiful’ woman for 
the victim. _Ma‘p'wava appears as a vender of hu- 
man flesh; offermg, but in vain, to the’ ghosts and 
demons the flesh off bis: limbs as the purchase of the 
accomplishment of his wish. He hears a ery of 
distress and thinks be recognises the voice of Ma‘Lari. 

The scene opens, and she is discovered dressed as a 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. | 453 


victim, and the magician and sorceress preparing for the 
sacrifice. They proceed in their dreadful preparatives. 
Ma’p'nava rushes-forward to her rescue: she flies to 
his arms. Voices are heard as of persons in search of 
Ma’rati. \Ma’p nava, placing her im safety. en-~ 
counters the magician. They quit the stage fighting. 
The event -of the combat is announced: by the sor- 
céress, who vows vengeance against Ma‘p'Hava for 
slaying the magician her preceptor.’ 


Tus fable of the play would have been perhaps 
more judiciously arranged if this very theatrical situa- 
tion had been introduced nearer to the close of the 
drama. Buavaspuu’rs has placed it so early as the 
fifth act. ‘The remaining five (for the play is in ten 
acts) have less interest. 


© Ma‘rati who had been stolen by the magician 
while asleep, being now restored to her friends, the 
preparations for her wedding with Nawpana are 
continued. By contrivance of the old priestess, who 
advised that she should put on her wedding dress at a 
particular temple, MAcakanpa assumes that dress 
and is carried in procession, in place of Ma’La1i, to 
the house of Nanpawa. Diseusted with the mascu- 
line appearance of the pretended bride, and offended 
by the rude reception given to him, Nanpana 
to have no further communication with his bride, 
vows and consigns her to his sister’s care. This 
of course produces an interview between the lovers, 
in which. Macaranpa. discovers himself to his mis- 
tress: and she consents to accompany him to the 
place of Ma‘zati’s concealment. The friends ac- 
cordingly assemble at the garden of the temple: but 
the “sorceress, Capa LACUNDALA’, watches an op- 
portunity, when Ma’rari is unprotected, and ¢arries 
her off in a flying car. ‘The distress of her lover and 
friends is well depicted: and, when reduced to despair, 

Ge 3 


ABA ON SANSCRIT AND 


being hopeless of recovering her, they are happily 
relieved by the arrival of Saupa’mini, the former 
pupil of the priestess. She has rescued MaA‘Lati 
from the hands of the sorceress, and now restores her 
to her despairing lover. The play concludes with a 
double wedding.’ 


From this sketch of the story it will be really 
perceived, that the subject is not ill suited to the stage: 
and making allowance for the belief of the Hindus in 
magick and supernatural powers, attainable by worship 
of evil, beings as well as of beneficent deities, the 
story would not even carry the appearance of impro- 
bability to an Indian audience. Setting aside this 
consideration, it is certainly conducted with art; and, 
notwithstanding some defects in the fable, the intereft 
upon the whole is not ill preserved. The incidents are 
striking. ‘The intrigue well managed. As to the 
style, it is of the highest order of Sanscrit composition : 
and the poetry, according to the /ndiantaste,1s beautiful. 


I sHaxi now close this essay with the promised 
exttact fromthe play here described. It contains an 
example, among other kinds of metre, of the Dar\daca 
ot long stanza: and is selected more on this account 
than as a fair specimen of the drama. This disad- 

vafitage attends all the quotations of the present essay, 
To which another may be added: that of a prose 
translation, which never conveys a just notion of the 
original yerse. 


A 


Extract from Mélati’ Mad hava. Act 5. , 
M’v’HAVA continues to wander in tite temetehy. 
_ “ Human flesh to be sold: unwounded real ‘flesh from the 


members of aman, Take it. Take it. *” | } 
* Anushtubh. . (Sce Puarz D. Fig. 4.] 


PRACRIT POETRY. A55 


‘ How rapidly the Pais dcbas flee, quitting their terrifick 
forms. Alas! the weakness of these beings.’ 


He walks about. 


* The road, of this cemetery is involved in darkness. Here 
is before me ** the river that bounds it; and tremendous is 
the roaring of the stream, breaking away the bank, while its 
waters are “em barr assed among the fragments of skulls, and its 
shores resound horribly with the howling of shakals and the 
cry of owls screeching amidst the contiguous woods. *”” 


Behind the scenes. 


‘Ah! unpitying father, the person, whom thou wouldest 
make the instrument of conciliating the king’s mind, now 
perishes.’ 


Ma’p'H. listening with anxiety.] “1 heard a sound pierc- 
ing as the eagle’s cry ; and penetrating my soul asa voice but 
tivg well hiben, My heart feels rent within me; 3 omy liunbs 
fail; I can scarcely stand. What means this ¢ °’ 


‘ That pitious sound issued from the temple of Ca’ra’La’. 


Is it not the resort of the wicked? a place for such deeds}? 
Be it what it may; I will look.’ 


He walks round. 


The scene opens; and discovers Car ’LACUN’D’ALA’ and 
AGHORAGHANTO, engaged in worshipping the idol: 
and Ma’tati boctda'a as # Victim. 


Ma‘t.] ‘Ah unpitying father! ‘the person, whom thou 
wouldest make the instrument of concilliating the king’s 


a a er ee SERED OE 


* Sardula vicridita, (Seve Pirate D, Fig. 5.) 

+ Mandacranta, (Ser Pirate D. Fig. 6. ] 

{ The Pracrit original of this pas age, though prose, is tea beau- 
tiful to be omitted. 

H4 iadada nicarun‘a! es6 dan’i n'arenda-chittarahobaaran’anj aon 
bibajjai. Ha amba sinéhamaahiaé! tum api had4si debba dubbila- 
sidéna. Ha Maladimaa-jivide, inaina callanasahanécea-suha-sa- 
ala-bbabaré, bhaavad) ! chirassa janabidasi duce’ham sinéhéna. H4 
pia sabi Layangié ! siyina-4vasara-mécta dansan& aham dé sambutta,’ 

G g 4 


450 ON SANSCRIT AND 


mind, now perishes. Ah fond mother! thow teo art-slain by 
the evil sport of fate. Ab venerable priestess; who lived but 
for Ma yLarir; whose every effort was for my prosperity ; 
thou hast been taught by thy fondness, a lasting sorrow. Ah 


gentle Lavancica ! I have been shown to thee but as in a 
dream ”.’ : 


Ma‘p’u.] ‘Surely itis she. Then I find her living.’ 


Capa’ LACUN'DALA’ worshipping the idol CaRna'ta’.] 61 
bow to thee, divine CHa’MUN DA’.’ 


“‘T revere thy sport, which delights the happy court of 
Siva, while the giobe of the earth, sinking under the weight 
of thy stamping foot, depresses the shell of the tortoise and 
shakes oné portion of the universe, whence the ocean retires 
within a deep absys that rivals hell ¢.” 


“« May thy vehement dance contribute to our success and 
satisfaction ; amidst the praise of attendant spirits astonished 
by the loud laugh issuing from thy necklace of heads which 
ate animated by the immortalizing liquid that drops from the 
moon in thy crest fractured by the nails of the elephant’s hide 
round thy waist, swinging te the violence of thy gestures ; 
while mountains are overthrown by the jerk of thy arm, ter- 
rible for the flashes of empoisoned tlame which issue from the 
expanded heads of hissing serpents closely entwined. The 
region of space inean time are contracted, as within a circle 
marked by a flaming brand, by the rolling of thy head terri- 
fick for the wide fame of thy eye red as raging fire. The 
stars are scattered by the flag that waves at the extremity of 
the vast skeleton which thou bearest. And the three-eyed 
god exults in the close embrace of Gaunt frightened by the 
cries of gbosts and spirits triumphant $.” 


£ 


Lhey both bow before the idol. 


er ~ 


meee 


Gann wear, os) WO Ee ee and 
« Vactra, (Sex Puate D. Fig. 7.) 
+ Sordula vieridila. (Sse Plate D. Fig. 8.] ~ Pi 
: The original stanz. is in Dandaca metre ; of the species deno- 
inated Prachita ind Sinhavicranta, Th se Céhtaine TH baer b 
minated Praciita und oimnavicranta, ‘The verse contains 18 feet ( 
Tra. 16 C ) or 54 syllables, and the stanza comprises 216 syllables, 
{Sez Prater D. Fig. 9.) ' eS eee 
ble ded 


— a i 


aie 


. 


PRACRIT POETRY. A57 
Ma’v’H.] ‘ Ah! what neglect. 


«The timid maid, clad as a victim in clothes and garlands 
stained: with a sanguine die, and exposed to the view of these 
wicked and accursed magicians, like a fawn before wolves, 
is in the jaws of death; unhappy daughter of the happy Buvu’- 


Rivasu. Alas! that such should be the relentless course 
of fate *.”’ 


Capa’L.] ‘ Now, pretty maid, think on him who was thy 
beloved. Cruel death hastens towards thee ft.’ 


Ma‘Lati.] ‘Beloved Mab’ HAVA! remember me when 


Lam gone. That person is not dead, who is cherished in the 
memory of a lover.’ 


Capa't.} ‘Ah! enamoured of Ma’p’HAva she will be- 


come a faithful dove. However that be, no time should be 
lost.’ 


Acuora, lifting up the sword.) “ Divine Coa’mun’pa! 
accept this victim vowed in prayer and now offered to thee ¢.” 


Ma’p’H. rushing forward raises Ma’Lart in bis arms.) 
‘ Wicked magician! thou art slain.’ 


Capa‘t.] ‘Avaunt villain. Art thou not so.’ 
Ma‘t] ‘Save me, prince!’ She embraces Ma'D’HAVA. 


_ Ma’‘p’u.] ¢ Fear nothing. “ Thy friend is before thee, who 
banishing terror in the moment of death has proved his affec- 

tion by the efforts of despair. Cease thy trembling. This 
wicked wretch shal! soon feel the retribution of his crime on 
his own head ||.” 


Acuora.] ‘Ah! who is he that dares to interrupt us?" 


Capa‘L.] ‘ Venerable Sir! he is her lover ; he is Ma‘p’- 
HAVA, son of CaA’MANDAC1’s friend, and a vender of human 


flesh.’ 


Ma’‘p’H. in tears.] ‘ How is this? auspicious maid!” . 


— So a ee 


* Sardula vicridita. (See Prare D.'Fig. 10.) 
+ Praharshini. [Ser Prarie D. big. 11,] 

t Praharshini {See Pirate D. Fig 12.) | 
| Harim. (Sexe Prate D. Fig. 13.] bie Ph 


Re re rt eg 8 ee 


A58& ON SANSCRIT AND 


M.'t. sighing.] ‘1 know not; Prince! I was sleeping 
on the terrace. I awoke here. But how come you in this 
place ? ; 


Ma’d’n. blushing.) ‘* Urged by the eager wish that I 
thay be blessed with thy hand, I came to this abode of 
death to sell myself to the ghosts. Iheard thy weeping. I 
caine hither.” * 


Ma‘t.] ‘ Alas! for my sake wert thou wandering regardless 
of thyself!’ 


Ma‘p’H.] * Indeed, it is an opportune chance. 


“© Having happily saved my beloved from the sword of this 
murderer, like the moon’s orb from the mouth of devouring 


Rabu, how is my mind distracted with doubt, melted with | 


pity, agitated with wonder, inflamed with anger, and bursting 
with joy. t 


Acuor.} ‘Ah! thou Brabmen boy! “ Like a stag drawn 
by pity for his doe whom a tiger has seized, thou seized thy 
own destruction, approaching me engaged in the worship of 
this place of human sacritice. Wretch! I will first gratify 
the great mother of beings with thy blood flowing from a 
headless trunk.” | 


Ma’p’xn.] ‘ Thou worst of sinful wretches! ‘* How 
couldst thou attempt to deprive the triple world of its rarest 
gem, and the universe of its greatest excellence, to bereave 
the people of light, to drive the kindred to desperation, to 
humble love, to make vision vain, and render the world a mi- 
serable waste |” ** 


‘ ah 


eee 


x 
* Vasanta tilaca. (See Priare D. Fig. 14.] 
+ Sa'rdila vicridiia.. [See Puate D. Fig. 15.) 
t Sa'du'la vicridita. [See Puate D. Fig. 16.] 
§ Sacharini. [See Pirate. Vig. D. 17.) : 
** A very uncommon metre named Avitat’ha or Nareut'aca. 
[See Puate D. Fig. 18.} . 


PRA’CRIT POETRY. 459 


© Ah wicked wretch! “ Hast thou dared to lift a weapon 
against that tender form, which even shrunk from the blow of 
light blossoms thrown in merry mood by playful damsels. 
7 arm shall light on thy head like the sudden club of 
aaa. * 


Acuor.] ‘ Strike, villain! Art thou not such?’ © 


Mat. to Ma'p’n.] ‘ Be pacified, dear Ma’b’ Hava! The 
eruel man is desperate. Abstain from this needless ha- 
zard.” 


Capa’t, to AGHOrR.} ‘ Venerable sir, be on your guard, 
Kill the wretch,’ 


Ma’p’H and Acuor, addressing the women.] “ Take 
courage. The wretch is slain. Was it ever seen that the 
lion, whose sharp fangs are fitted to lacerate the front of the 
elephant, was foiled in fight with deer.” f 


A noise behind the scenes. They listen. 


‘Ho! ye guards who seek Ma’tati. The venerable and 
unerring Ca MANHACi encourages BuorRIvasu and in- 
tructs you to beset the temple of Cara‘La’. She says this 
strange and horrid deed can proceed from none but AcH6- 
RAGHANT’A ; nor can aught else, buta sacrifice to CARa’LaA, 
be conjectured.’ 


Acuor.] ‘ Now is the moment which calls for coue 
rage.’ 


Ma’t.] ‘Qh father! Oh venerable mother |’ 


Ma’‘p’u.j *’Tis resolved. I will place Ma’tati in safety 
with her friends, and slay this wicked sorcerer. 


Capar’.] ‘ We are surrounded.’ 


a ee 8 ren, een 


* Vasanta tilaca, (See D Prats. Fig. 19,) 


460 ON SANSCRIT AND 


Ma’p’H conducts Ma’ratti to the other side, anda 1= 
turns towards AGHORAGHANT’A. 


Acu6r.] ‘Ah wretch! “ My sword shall even now cut 
thee to pieces, ringing against the joints of thy bones, passing 
instantaneous rapidity thy tough muscles, and phyings unre- 
sisted in thy flesh like moist clay. ee 


They fight. The scene closes. 


* Sic harini. (See Prare D. Fig. 20.) 


—— ee — 


ON PRACRIT POETRY, 


461 


SYNOPTICAL TABLES 
ih OF 


INDIAN PROSODY. 


——_—. 
S meeeiineiie cae 


Feet used in Sanscrit Prosody. 


TrIsYLLABIC.. 


M. — —— Mo tossus., M. 


Y. 5 —— Baccnuius. B. 
R.— , —Crericus/. Am- 
PHIMACER. C, 


“S. 5 9» ~AwNapastus. A. 


T.—— , ANTIBACCHIUS 
Jf. PaLIMBACCHIUS V. 
Hyrogacenius. H. 

J.c—o AMPH BRACHYS f. 
Scotius. Sc. 

BA....; Daessziys.. D. 

N. 5 © » TRIBRACHYS 


R. 
MonosyLbaBic. 
Sam BREVIS. Br = OGA= Loncus. L.. 


: Feet ufed in Pra'’crit Prosody. 


1. c. One Cala. or Maira 
Sara: Brevis o Br. 
2.c. Two Matras or Calas. 
Hira. Loncus— , 
Supriya: PyRRHICHIUS s. 
PERIAMBUS, © o P. 
3.c. Three Maras or Calis. 
Tala: Vrocuaus — o T, 

Dwaja:lamBus o —1. 
Tan dava: VRIBRACHYS 
jo, 9. OF Tr. - 

Haya: Matras or Calas. 
Carn'a: SPONDRUS ——S. 

Payod bara: 3CcoLivs omoSts 


Hasta: ANAPETUS »o o— 
A. Tt 


‘Charan'a DactTyLus—oeo 


D. 

Vipra: PRocEUSMATI- 
CUS. oo 9,9 Pa, 

Indrasana: 5,c. Five Mitras 
or Calds. 

Creticus C. Baccnius 
B. Pzon Pa, &e. 

Svroja: 6. c. Six Mdtras or 
Calas. 

Motossus M, &e. 


462 ON SANSCRIT AND 


Metre of the Vidas; regulated by the number of syllables, 


Seven classes subdivided into erght oraers. 


CLASSES. 
Gayatri. Ushnih. Anu: shtubh. Vrihati. Pancti. Trishtubh. Jagati 
A’rsha, 24 28 32 36 e 18) AL 48 
_ Daivi, 1 2 3 4 5 6 q 
 A’suri,1 ot 14 13 12 11 10 9 
fa Prajapaty’, 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 
= Yajush, 6 4 8 9 10 11 12 
ro) & Saman, 12 14 16 4 8 20 22 24 
Rich, 18 21 24 a7 30 33 30 
. Brahmi, 30 42 48 54 60 66 72 
EE 


Distribution of the Syllables in Triplets, Tetrastichs, &e, 


I. Ga’rarTrr. 


IV. VRIHATI. | 


1. Tripad, - - 8 % 324 1, Chatushpad, - - 9x%4% =36 
4 Chatushpad, -O% 4=>24 2. 5 - ~ 8X2410K2=96 
3. Padanivrit; “-"7 x 37} Nii “Ss -- = 835-12. #86 
A, Atipadanivrit, 0 +8 +7 => 2bebe Pathyd, - 84841248=36 
5. Nagi, - - 9 +9+0= 24 2. Nyancusarim (Scand hogriva or 
6, Varahi, - -0 +64+9>= 24 Urovrihati,) 841248+48=36 


7- Bardhmana, - 6 +7+8=> 21 
8, Pratisht’ha, - 8 +7+0= 21 
9. Dwipadyiraj, svl258> 21 


3. lng th edt he /8X3412 
= 30 

Ai Fe Sate eae 12-4 8 x “i 

2 


10. Tripadviraj, - 11%3= 22 3. Mahavrihati, KSagrtietals 
| x 3=36 
If. Usuntrn. ry 
V. Pane. 


1, Tripad, (12 +3 4-2) 
1. Cacubh, - “="8 +12 +8= 28 
2. Pura Ushnih, 12) 8 }4= 28 
3. Paroshnih, - 84-8 +12=— 28 
2. Chatushpad, - + 7%4= 28 


Il. Anusur‘’usa. 


1, Chatushp4d, - - Sx4= 32 

2, Tripad, (8-+ 12% 2), viz. 12-4 

8+ 12.+4-or 1241248. 124. 
1282. 


1. Satah.p,.. - - 12: 
8=40 or 841248 ot 
2. Astara-p 8+ +1 

3. Prastara-p 1: $1248be= 
40 


1. Chatushp: d, rays 
i 40. 


4. Vistara-p ich Cec. a 
40. ny 

45. Sanstara-f. 12484 8+ ioe 
i 


PRA CRIT POETRY. 


2. 1. Aesharapaneti, 5% 4=20 
2. Alpasahpancti, 5 <2=10 
3. Padapancti, - 5£5=25 
4. - - 44645%*3=25 
3. Pat’hyd, - 8x 5—40 
4. Jagali, - - -. - 8x6=48 


A463 


VI. Trisnrugit. 


1 Jyotishmati, 1148%4=43 
2, Jagati, - - 1248x4=>44 
Purastddjyotishmati, 11 (12) 
+8X3 . 
Mad hyd, 84+-8+412 (12) +8-+8 
Uparishtad, 84+-8+4+848+1) (12) 


Deficient and exuberant Metre. 


1. Sancumati, —5-+ax 3 ex. (Gayatri) 5+ 6x 3=23. 


2. Cacudmati, —6+ax3 
3. Pipilica mad’bya, = 


(Tripad) = many+few+ many ex, 84448. 


4. Yavamad’hya, =(Tripad) —few-+ many-t few ex, 8+10+8, 
5. Nivrit, =a—1 ex. (Gayatri) 24—1=23. 

6. Bburij, =a+ Lex. (Gayatri) 244+1—25. 

7. Viraj =a—2 ex. (Gayatri) 848 +6=22. 

8. Swaraj, =a+2 ex. (Gayatri,) 8$+8+410=26 *. 


ee | 


1 Gan'avritta of Panscrit Prosody, and Ma'travritta of 
Pra‘crit Prosody ; regulated by quantity. 


1. A’rya’ or Gav’hd Pr, Gahd, 

390+ 27 ==57_¢. 

Odd verse: 30 c, =73ft. (6th= 

Sc. or Pr.) 

Eyen yerse: 27 c.=732 ft. (6th= 

Br). 

Each verse ends in L. 

Pause in Ist verse before 7th 
ft. if Pr. But if 6th tt. be Pr. 
then pause alter Ist syllable. 
Pause in 2d verse before 5thft. 
if Pr. 

16 Species: Pat'hyd: Pause 
after 3d. ft. (3-+43=71 ft. & 12 


+18412415=57c.). Vipulas 
Pause placed otherwise, Hence 
A divipula, Antyavipula, and Ub- 
hayavipula, wiih Ist yerse, 2d, 
or both, irregularly divided by 
the pause. Chapala 1st f. S. or 
A. 2d Sc. 3d S. 4th Se. or D. 
Oth Se. or. (in the short verse, 
Br). 7th 8. D. A. or Pr. “Hence 
Muc’hachapali, Jag’ hanya chapu- 
lt and Mahachapala, with 1st, 
2d or both yerses so constructed, 
Therefore A’rya+3 Chapalasy 
Pathyd +3 Vipulés=16 species. 


* If there be room to doubt whether the metre be reduced from 
the next above, or raised from the next below, the first verse deter- 
mines the question ; for it is referred to the class to which the first 


verse or pda belongs. 


If this do not suffice, the metre is referred 


to that class, we is sacred to the deity, to whom the prayer is ad- 
h 


dressed. _ Shou 


this also be insufficient, other rules of selection 


have been provided. Sometimes the metre is eked out by substitu- 


ting iya or uva for correspondent vowels, 
pears to be practised in the Samaveda 


This in particular, ap- 


ABA 

Variations: A’ryd, Ist verse 
10800. 2d yerse 6400. Chapala 
Ist verse 32, 2d verse 16. 

In Pr4crit prosody, 27 species: 
from 27 L. +3 Br.=30 syll. to 
VL. and 55 Br.=56 syll. ‘ 

Speeifick varieties. — Culina 
containing 1 Sc. Culatha,2 Sc. 
Vesyd, many Sc. Ran'dé, no Sc. 
Gurvin'i, Sc. Ist, 3d, Sth or 7th 
ft. But this is against rule: 
which excludes ampbibrachys 
from the odd feet. 

2. Upertior Vigérha Pr. Vi- 
g@ha’. 27+80=57c. viz, t2+4 
154+ 124-18. 

3. Upacitr Pr. Ga'hu. 27 + 
2754 c. viz. 124+ 154 124-15. 

4. Gitt or Udga' tha’ Pr. Uz- 
gatha’. 304-3000 c. viz. 124 
18+12418. 

5. A’rya cit! or C’hand haea 
Pr. Scand’ha. 32+32=64 c. 

8 ft. complete. (3-++5° =8f. and 
12+ 204 12-+4+20—64 c). 
Species 16 (Pathya' &c.), varia- 
tions of each verse 10800. 

In Pracrit pros dy, 28 species 
from 28 L. & 8 Br. to! L. and 
G2 Br. 


6. Chandrisa’, Sangiti or Gdt hi- 


ON SANSCRIT AND 


ni Pr. Gihni 30432=62 c. viz. 
12418412420, ~ 
7. Sugiti, ov Parigiti Pr. Sinhini 
324 30—62 c. viz. 12420412 
+18. 
Also 6. Sengiti, 32 + 29=61 c. 
A’ryt (7% ft.) + L. in. both 
verses. 
7. Sugit?, 324 27=—59 c. 
- L. in first verse only. 
8. Pragiti, 30+29=59 ¢. 
+ L. in second verse only. 
9. Anugit?, 274+32=59 c. 
Reverse of Sugiti. 
10. Manjugiti, 294+30=59 c. 
Reverse of Pragiti. 
11. Vigiti, 294+ =58 c. 
Upagiti + L. in both verses, 


12. Charugits, 294 32=61 c, 


Reverse of Sangiti. 
13. Fallart, 324+30=—62 ec. 
A’ryagiti—L, in last verse, 
14. Lahktd, 3043262 e. 
—L. in first verse. 
16, Pramada, 294+27=56 c. 
Upagiti + L, in first verse. 
16. Cuandrica, 274+ 22=56'¢. 
-+ L. in last verse. ~ 
All these kinds admit 16 spe- 
cies as above: viz. Pathyd, &e 


mex gra . 


Vl. Ma’tra’ vritta or Matra’ ch’ handas, of Sanscrit Pro- 
sody. 


1. Varra’tiya, 56 to 68 ¢. 
1, Vaitaliya, 1441060414 ¢ 
16-60 c. 
End in C. + 1. 
Shortsyllables by pairs {even 
verses not to begin with 
2TR). 
2. Apitalica, End in D. & S. 
3. Aupachhandasica, 10418 
+16+418=68 c. End inC, 
& B. 


Each kind admits 8 varieties 
of the short verse & 13 
of the long; from 3 long 


syll. to 6 short begin- 


ning the one, and from 4 
long syll. to1 long & 6 
sbort in the other. 


Also the following species 


undereach kind. 


~wy 


1. Dacshinantied, begin 


ra 


“with Ys) 


PRACRIT POETRY. 


Comprising 2 varieties 
of the odd verses. 
I. 1. (or Tr.); and 
4 of the even verses. 
I. B (or Pa. 2d or 
Ath or 5 Br.) 
2. Udichya vritta, odd verses 
begin with I. 
3. Prachua vritta, even verses 
C. or Pz. 4. 
4. Pravrittaca, the 2 preceding 
combined. 
5. Aparantica, 16 K4 —O6A Cc. 
(Prich), 
6. Chéruhasini, 14 KX 4 —50c, 


(Udich). 
2. Ma‘rra’ samaca, 16 (4¥ 4) 
%4—64c. EndS. ord, 


Begin S.A. D. or Pr. 

1, Miird samaca, 24. ft. S. A. 
or D. 3d. ft. A. 

2. Vis'loca, 24 Sc. or Pr. 3d. S. 
or D. 

3. Vanavisacd, 2d S.A. or D. 
3d Sc. or Pr. 

4. Chitra, 2d Sc. or Pr. 3d A. 
Sc. or Pr. 

5. Upachitrg, 2d S, A. or D. 34 
S. or D. 


465 


6. Piddculaca, the above inter- 
mixed. 
The lst species admits 24 va- 
rieties; the 2d, 32; & the 
3 next, 48 each. The va- 
riations of the last species 
are very numerous. 
3. Gitrya RYA’ or Achalzd hriti, 
16 + 4 All short syllabies. 
4, DwicHanpaca; or Cou- 


let. 
1. Sicha or Chudi,32 Br, 
+ 16L. 


2 species: Jyotish Ist verse 
52 Br. 2d 16 L. 
Saumyd or Arangacrida ist 
verse 16 L. 2d 32 Br. 
Also 1 Sic’ha 30 4+ 32 = 
62 c. 
Ist Verse 28 Br. +L. 
2d 30 Br. L. + 
. Charja, 32 +30 =62 ¢. 
ist 30 Br. + L, 2d 28 Br. 
4+ L. 
3. Chulicaor Atiruchira 294-29 
=5Sc. 27 Be. + L. 
Also 3 Chulica 29 +31=60 c. 
Ist \erse 27 Br. + L. 2d 
‘29 Br. -+ L. 


iS) 


; — Eee 


I. Matra vritta of Pracrit prosody continued from 
Table I. 


8. Doha 8S. Dwipat’ha, 134 
114134 1!1=4S e. 
3 ft. viz. odd verses 64443. 
‘even verse 6 +441, 
23 species from 23 L+2 57. to 
48 Br. 
9. Utcach’ha Pr. Uccach’ha, 
11x 6—66 c. 
6 verses, 3 it. each 44443. 
8 species from 66 Br. tu 28 L 
+10 Br. 
10: Rola or Lola, 24% 4=96c. 
Pause ii-+13, Usually end in L. 
Vou. X. 


12 species from 12 L to 24 Br. 

11. Gandha Pr. Gandiana, 17 
4+18417+18=70 Syll. 

12. Chatushpada or Chatush- 
padica Pr. Chaupaia Chaupaa, 
30% 4% 4—480c. 

16 verses; 74 ft. 4%74+L. 

13. Ghatta & Ghattananda, 3k 
% 262 c. 1048413 =4%7+ 
3 Br. or 1347 4132643 X3 
4544434242 Br 

14. Shat’pada or Shat‘padica 
Pr, Cr'hapaa, 964 56=152 

oh 


A660 


Cavya 24 (11413=644x4 
\-2 Br}.+4=906, Ullala 28 (15 
+ 13) *% 2256. Varieties of 
the Tetrastich 45 from go Br. 
to 44L 4+ 8 Br. Varieties of 
the whole stanza 71 from 7OL 
+12 Br.to 152 Br. 

15. Prajjatica Pr, Pajjalia, 16 
* A= 64c) 4)ft' Bndid Se, 

16. Atiliha At’hilla Pr. Adi- 
1a16%4=64¢c. No Sc. End in P, 

17. Padaculaca Pr. Culapaa, 
16% 4=64¢, 64-4242 L. 

18. Raddg stanza of nine= 
116 c¢. 

Wid. dst eC. 4ft) ‘viz. 34-4 
=4+4. End in Sc. or Pr. 

2d=12 ¢.=4 le. End in Pr. 

3d=15 c. End in D. 

4th=11 ce. =3 ft. End in Tr. 

5th=15 c. End in D. 

Oth to 9th= Doha as before, 

5 species. 

19. Padmavati Pr. Pauma, 
32%4=128 c. 8 ft. no Sc. 

20. Cundalicea Pr. Candalia, 
stanza of eight=142 c. 

Doha + Rola or ie a 

21. Gagan‘aneana, 25 ~4 = 
100 c. 20 syll. viz. 5 L & 15 Br. 
ee aig be 

2. Dwipadi or Dwi ‘pada, 28 
a4 c. 63 ft. »viz. 6444-5 
+L. 

23. Chanja, 41x 2=82 c. 
10st, viz. ti Pr 4-3.G, 

24. Sicha, 28 x2=—56c. 
7 tt. vigs Pas + Sc. See San- 
/scrit metre. 

25. Mala, 45x 2=900 c. 
11 ft. viz.4x%9+¢.45S. 
Also 25. Mala 45+27=72c. 
ist verse as above, 2d verse 4’rya. 

26. Chudicala Pr. Chuliala, 29 

eae ce. Half the Doha-+ 5. 


. Saurashtra Pr. Sorati'ha, 


a 13-b11413—48 ron 
Reverse of the Doha. 
e28. Hacali, 14%4=-56.¢. 


’ 


nerally Pr. 


ON SANSCRIT AND 


35 ft. viz. 4 X34-L,1 syll. 11 
or 10). ft. D. 

Pr. or A. sometimes S. Not 
end in P.S., : 

29. Mad’hubhava, 8 x 4= 
oD ee 
2. ft. End in Se. 

30. Abhira, J1 X4=44c. 

7 + Se.or D. +1 +4 Sc. or-Se. 
4+- Tr. +Sc. 

31, Dan‘dacala, 32 %4=—128c. 
4%4+ 0424-8 or 104-84 14. 
Endin L. 

32. Dipaca, 10OX4=40. ce 
4+5+4Br. usually end in Se.\ 

33. Sinha’valoca Pr. Sinhalao 
16% 4—64c. 

4 it. A. or Pr. but end in A. 

34. Plavangama Pr. Paranga- 
ma, 21 XA=—SB4 c. 

6% 3+ 1. Begin with L. 

35. Lila’yati, 24orless X 4—= 
96 or less. 6 ft. or less: not end 
in A. : 

36, Harigita, 28 %4=113c. 
SHOTS %34 L. Should begin 
with Pr. and endin S. 

37. Tribhangi, 32 K4=128 c. 
8.ft. No Sc. Endi in L. 

38, Durmila’ or Durmilica ’, 
32% 4-128 c. 1048414. ft. 8. 


39. Hira or tliraca, 23 x 4= 


Q2. Cc. 
4 {t. viz. 6%3-45. ft. 6 Br. ord 
L. with 4 Br. End in L. 

40. Jaiad’hava or Jalaharana’, 
32 Xx 4=128 c. 

Pauses 10+-84648. ft..S Ge- 
End in A. 

41. Madanagriha or Madana- 
hara’, 40X4=160 c. 
10-{-8+4+ 144+8=—40. 

42, Maha‘ra'sht'ra Pr. Mara-. 
hat't'a, 29% A=116 c. 
101-8+11+ or64 4 x5 +L. 
4) Bt. 

Also the following hinds ; 

43. Ruchira’, 30x 4=120 c. 

75 ft. end in L, 


PRACRIT POETRY. 


44, Calica’, 14x 4=56c¢, 
Pauses 846, 

45. Va‘san'a, 20Xx4=80 c. 

4 ft. End in C. Pause before the 
last. 

46, Chaurola, 16 + 14 + 16 
+14=060 c. ft. A. or Pr. 

47. Jhallana’, 37% 4= 148 ¢. 
72 ft 5x 7+ L. Pauses 10+ 10 
+ 10-F7; 

48. Ashad’ha, 12474-1247 
25a) Gs 


AG 


49. Ma‘lavi, 16 + 124 164 
12=56 c. 
Long verses 4 ft. short verse end 
in! 1 

50. Matta’, 20 x 4 = 80c. 
5 ft. no Sc. 

51. Rasamala, 24 %4 — Q6c. 
6 ft’ hha 

52. Avalambaca, 13 x 4 = 
02 Cc. 


3 ft. 4 x 2+°6. End in L. 


SS 


AV. Metre regulated by number of Syllables. 


Vactra, 8X4=32 syll. 
2 ft. between 2 syll. The 
species vary in the 2d ft. or 
3d place. 

1. Simple Vactra. — 
L. or Br. + M. &c. (except 
Tr. & A.and, in the even 
verse, C). +B.-+ L. or Br. 
Therefore Ist 4th & 8th 
syll. either long or short. 
Sth short. 6th & 7th long. 
Either 2d or 3d long. 

Variations of the Ist verse 24; 
of the 2d20. 

2. Pathyd. 
Ist verse as aboye; 2d with 
Sc. for 2d tt. Hence 7th 
syll. short. ' 

3. Viparita pat hya. 
The preceding transposed. 


4. Chapala. 
Ist verse with Tr. for 2d dt. 
Therefore 6th & 7th syll. 
short. 

5. Vipula. 
2d verse (some say Ist, 
others all) with 7th syll. 
short. Therefore 2d ft; D. Sc. 
Fivor lr. 
5 or 7 species: Bha-vipula. 
Ist verse (some say either) 
with D, for 2d ft. Ra-vipu- 
Ja, with C. for 2d ft. Navi- 
pula, 2d ft. Tr. Ta-vipula, 
2d ft. H. Ma-vipula, 2d ft. 
M. Ya-vipula, 8d ft. B. Ja- . 
vipila, 2d ft. Se. 

No instance occurs with an 
anapast for the 2d ft. of 3d 
place. 


Hh 2 


AO8 


ON SANSCRIT AND 


V. Acshara ch’ handas or Varna vritta. ‘Metre regu- 
lated by number and quantity. 


Regular or uniform metre; the stanza being composed of 


equal and similar verses. 


From one. to five syllables in 


the verse, or from fonr to twenty in the stanza. 


I Uecra’ orUcr’ua. 1 
xX4A—A, 
1.Sri, g- —L, 2Mahi, [pao ote 


II. Arvucta’.2,x4=8. 
1. (Str, or Cama, 2 ¢. = S,2. 
Rati, or Mahi, d. g.=1. 3 Ssru, 
g./, = T. 4. Madhu, Pr. Mahu, 
CN A oad tC 


Til. Mapuya’.3%4=12: 
1. Nari, or Tali, m. = M. 2 
Sas 1, Pf: Sas, 7. b., oF riga; 
Pr. Pics, of Mrigi, 7.2 °C.4, 
Raman‘, or Ramana, s. =A. 5. 
Panchala, ‘or Panchala, ¢. = H. 
6. Mrigendra, Pr. Maida, 7. = 
Sc. 7. Mandara, bh. =D. 8. 
Camali, o1 Camala,». = Tr. 


IV. Pratisui’HA’ 4 x 
A = 16. 

1. Canya, or Tirna, Pr. Tin- 
na, m. g.—28. 2. Ghari, or 


'Harica, 7. 4. 2T. 3. Naga- 


lica; Lagalica, Nagani, or Naga- 
nica, Pr. Magania, or Nagani,j. 
g. 21. A. Sati, ag. =P. I. 

V. SupRATISHT’ HA’ 5 
% 4520, 

1 Pancti, Acsharapancti, or 
Hansa, bh. 2. geo & ua. 
Sammoha, m.2 ¢. = M.S. 3. 
Haritabandha, or Hari, 2 ¢. 7. 
2g.ort.2g.—8.B. 4. Priya, 


hire Aw Les 6 eee, Sr, 


Jamaca,n. 21, =P, 7Tr. 


eR é 


From six lo twenty-six syllables in the Verse. 


1. Ga’yarrRi. 6%4—24. 


1, Tanumad’hya, ty.=SPS., 
2. Vidyullec’ha, ot Sesha, Pr. 
Sesa,2m.— 38. 38.Sasivadana, 
or Chauransa, 7 y=2P8. 4. 
Wasumati,¢s —S PI, 5. Va- 


nita, or Tilaca, Pr. Dilla, 25— | 


2A. 6. Yodba, or Dwiyod’hi, 
Pr. Vijoha,2r. TSI. 7. Cha- 
taransa, Pr, Chauvansa, nu = 2 
PS. 8, Mant’hana, or Cama- 
vatara, (half of the Saranga), 2 
& = §1T. 9g, Sanc’ kanari. or 


Somaraji, (half of the Bhujang- 
eprayata), 2y=\|TS. 10. Ma- 
lati, Sumalati, Vasanta, or Ca- 
minicanta,27= IPT. 11. Da- 
manaca, 22 =3 P. } 


JI. Usunin 7x 4= 28. 

1, Cumaralatita, (24+ 5)j sg 
=]. +r. S. 2. \Madateehia, 
msg —=SDS. 3. Hansamala, 
srg= ATS. 4, Mad’humati, 
Bin p '2' Pa 
rgl=2TC. 6. Suvasa, x7 / 
=2PD. 7. Carahancha, 4s / 


; 


5. Sumanicas © 


PRACRIT POETRY. 


=2PSc._ 8. Sirsha, Pr. Ses, 
2mg—2SM. 


II. ANuSHTUBH 8 x 4 
= 32, 

1, Chitrapada, 2 54, 2g = 2 
DS. 2, Vidyunmala, Pr, B7/- 
jumala,{4 + 4t)2m2¢—=2 
S+ 2S. 3. Manavyaca, or Ma- 
navacrida, (4 + 4+) bh.tl g= 
TI+ TI. 4. Hansaruta, wn 
2g¢=— SDB. 5. Pramanica, 
Nagaswarupini, or Matallica, 7 7 
lg —41. 6. Samaniea, or Mal- 
liea,r jgl=4T. | 7. Vitana, 
xe22 —21TS., 8: Tunga, 2 
a22=3PS. 9. Camala, 2/ 
ar, = 2P2I. 10. Hansapadi, 
2gms=—2STI. 11. Matan- 
ote 26 Bo St les.) (12, 
Rambha, algm—=2P2S. 


IV. Varwarr19x4=36. 

1. Halamuc’hi, (346), 77s 
=C+2PI. 2. Bhujagasi- 
susrita, (7 + 2),227m—=—2P 
A + 8. 3. Bhadrica,r2r— 2 
TAI. 4. Mahalacshmi, 3 7 = 
TS BI. 5. Sarangi, or Sarngi. 
nys == 2PSA. 6. Pavitra, Pr. 
Payitta,mbh.s. =2SPA, 7. 
Catia, 1 2°ueeess’ PA, sg. 
Bimba,.2.s 7 = P,Tr. TS. . 9. 
Towmara, 27, = ATPT. jo. 
Rupamali, rm =—3SM, 11. 
Manimad’bya or Maniband’ha, 
ores, > D240 E12. Bh 
jangasangata,sg7r= ASI. © 

V. Pancrti 10x4 = 40. 

1. Sudd’hayiraj,m 5 je =S 
T3I1. 2. Panava, (5 -+ 5), mn 
yg=SD+AS. ormnjg= 
SD +4ALI. 3, Mayurasarini, + 
jrg=4TS8. 4. Matta, (4 4 
6),mbh.sg=28+42PS. 5, 
Upasv’hita, (24+8)227¢=8+4 
2 Al. 6. Rucmavati or Champa- 
camala (5+5§). bh.msg¢ DS+ 
DS. 7. Manorsama, a 7 j g.=P 


469 


41. 8. Ssnyneta, P.Sonjunta, s2 
Jg=P2T7 21. g.Saravati;3 dh. 
g =2DTI... io. Sushama,t y 
bh.g=SASA. 11. Amyrita- 
mati. or Amritagati, 7 jung =P 


APA. 12. Hansi, (4 -+ 6), m 
bhimg=2STr.S8. 13. Cha- 
rumuc’hi, ny bh. g =P ASA. 


14, Chandramuchi, ¢ n dh. ¢= 
SP2A. 


VI. TrisHTusyH 11 x 
pe’ Y: 

1, Indravajra, 2¢72¢—5S1 
DTS. 2. Upendravajra, jt 7 2 
g¢=2 IDTS. 3. Upajati, or 
Ac’hyanaci, (14 species.) The 
two foregoing intermixed. 4. Dod’ 
haca, Band’hu or Nilaswarupa, 
36h, 2¢ =.3 DS. 5. Salini, 
(4471), m2i2e=228+ C 
TS. 6, Vatormi, (4 +7), 
bhet 2g =28 +AT S47. 
Bhramaravilasita, (4 + 7 +), m 
Td 2S4+2PA 8, 
It’hoed'dhata,, rarlg =2T 
A211. Q. Swagata,r 2 bh. 2e 
—2 TAPS." 10. Vrntavor 
Vritta, (4+ 7+),2252¢e=8 
PAS. 11. Syenica, or Srenica, 
rjrig=4ATC. 12. Sumuchi, 
(5 46t),22 7/7 = PA+2A, 
13. Bhadrica, 2arl/g —2PA2 
1, 14, Maucticamala, Sri, Anu- 
cala or Cudmaladanti, (5 + 6), 
bh.in2g=DS+42PS5.. 15. 
Upas’hita,7s#2¢ = 1TrSTS. 
16. Upachitra or Viseshica, 3 s/ 
g —3Al. 17. Cupurushajani-, 
ta, 27 2e— 2 PA bs ons. 
Anavasita, 2 y bh.2g=2PS 
DS. 1g. Mot'anaca, t+27 1 & 
—S3 A. ’ 20. Malatimala, 3 m 
2g 245M. 21. Damanaca, 
ralg=4P A, 22, Madand’ha, 
msg2g=5 2TS. 

VIT. JaGaTII2~%A=AB. 

1, Vansas’tha or Vans‘ast’ha-~ 
yila,gezr=Z1T3I. 2.tn- 

Hh 3 


470 


dravans‘a, 2¢7r—SI1T3I. 3. 
Upajati, the two foregoing inter- 
mixed. A. Tot'aca,4s=4A. 
5. Drutavilambita, » 2 dh r= 
PI2ATJ. 6. S'triputa or Puta, 
(8+ 4,22my=3PS8S4T 
S. 7. Jalodd’hatagati, (6 + 6), 
geese iP PP Pr. ae te 
ta or Lalita, 2inmr=3P2S 
I. 9, Cusumavichitra, (6 + 6), 
nyny=2PS+4+2PS5. 10. 
Chanchala‘cshica,Pramudvitava- 
dana, Mandacini, Gauri or Pra- 
bha, (7 + 5),2"27=2PA+ 

BI. 11. Bhujangaprayata, 4 
=ITSITS. 12. Sragvini or 
Lacshmi@hara,47—TSIiITS 

T. 13. Pramitacshara, s7 2s — 
ASc.2 A. 14. Cantotpada or 
Jaladharamala, (4 4+ 8), m bh. s 
m=28+2P2Sorsbh. msm 
=—DSD2S.3 15. Vais’ wadevi, 
{54 7),2@m247=MS+ TS 
B. 16. Navamalini, (8 + 4), 
#9 bhe y= BP SBT 4 PS... 17. 
Chandravartma, (4 + 8%), 7 1 
Be SOT Pa AS US: Pri= 
yambada, w4.7r= P IPSI, 
19. Man‘imala, (6+ O),t vty 
SE SFO Pic) De alae z 
bh. jr—SiP3i. 21; Uyjwalt, 
| Saran, t+) 273 2 ho eg tives 
lati or Varatanu, (5 + 7),2 27 
7—PA+A2.1. 23. Tamarasa 
or Lalitapada, x 27 y=2P2D 
S. 24, Lalana, (547) bhim2s 
=P'S + :D'T 1 or bh. 7t'2s— D 
§8+2PA. 25. Drutapada, 2 
bh.ny=PI3PS. 26. Vidy- 
ad’hara, (4+ 8),4m=25+44 
S. 27.Saranga,4i —SITSI 
T. 28. Maucticadama, 47 = I 
PTT PT. 30." Modaca, +2. 
=4D. 30. Taralanayani, 4 
cial. ie 

VIL. Arisacarti, 13 x 

Aa92- ; 
* 3. Praharshin:, (3 + 10) m m7 


ON SANSCRIT AND 


rg=M+2P2TS. 2. Ru- 
chira, or Atiruchira, (449) 7 dh. 
sjg=214+2PTC. 3. Mat- 
tamayura, or Maya, (4 + 9) m 
tysg=25+TIDS. 4. Gauri, 
2n2rg—3P TSB. 5. Man- 
jubhashin’i, Prabod’hita, Sunan- 
dini, or Canacaprabha s 7 57 g= 
Al + P'3'T.. 6, Ch ndriea, 
Cshama, Utpalini, or Cut ilagati, 
(7+. 6)2n2¢9 =PATS 
I. 7. Calahansa, Chitravati, or 
Sinhanada, 5 72s¢— P2T P 
DS. 8, Chancharicavali, y m2. 
rg S125 CTS) Seeman 

dralec’ha, (64+ 7)asryg=2 

PI4+2TM.° 10. Vidyut, (6 
+7) as2 tg Bok De ot 
C. 11. Mrigendramuc’ha, 227° 
te = PA P21 Sige dene 
ca, 453 = "SA Poo. pen eae 
canda, or Canda4y/= BIT 
SII. 14, Pancajavali, or Pan- 

cayali, dh. u 272 ='D2P 2D. 

15. Cdandi,272s¢ =4PDS. 

10, Prabhavati, (4 + 9) ¢ dh. 57 
goS1+42PTC. 


IX. Saccars, 14. x 4 
—506. : 

1. Asambad’ha, (5 + 9) mtn 
s2g= MS+4+2PA S-@. 
Aparajita, (7 + 7) 227rslg = 
2PA4+1Alorsurslg = 
PT AIAI. 3. Praharanacalita, ° 
or Calica, (7 + 7) 22 bh.nlg= 
2PA+2PA. 4. Vasantati- 
Jaca, Sinhonnata, Udd’harshin41, 
Mad’humad’havi. or Sobhavyati, 
tbh.2j2¢g=SIPIPTS. 5. 
Lola, or Alola, (7 + 7) m sm bh. 
2¢=SDS+SDS. 6. Indu- 
vadana, or Varasundari, 64. 7 5 n 
2¢2TPTPT PS? 7 Nae, 
(7+ P\2n poe aS 
D.TS. 8. Lacshmi, ms # bh, 
2g=SDSTDS. 9. Supavitra, 
(8+ 6)4n2¢>4P+4 2 Ps. 
10. Madhyacshama, (4 4+ 10) or 


PRACRIT POETRY 


Cut’ila, (4-++ 6 + 4) m bh. ny 
§ =28+3P+25. 11. Praimia- 
da, #jbh.jig —2P2TPTI. 
12. Manjari, (5 + O)sisyle= 
P2TPYT SI. 13. Cumani, (Ss 
+ 6) nj bh. j2g 2? REP 
rok * 34. Sucesara, 7 nrnrlg= 
P2IP3I. 15. Vasanti, oct aie 
2g—2SDA2S. i6. Nandi- 
muc’hi, (7 + 7) 222:2¢=3 
PSITS. 17. Chacra, or Cha- 
crapata, 4.3n/g—T5PI. 18. 
Lilopavati, (4 4+ 10;)4m2¢— 
25 + 5S. 19. Nat’agati, 4 72 
£=6 P+S. 20. Copavati, bf. m 
sti s= DS DSTI. 


X. ATISACCARI, 15 x 
A= 60. 

1. Chandrayarta,(7 4+ 8t}42s= 
3PTr.4+PTr.A. 2. Mala, or Sraj, 
(6+ 9) 4 xs=2 Tr.4 2Tr. 
A. 3. Manigun/anicara, (8 + 
4) Ans=AP+2P A. 4. 
Malini, or Nan’dimuc’hi, (8 
+ 7j2nm2y=—3PS 4 CT 
S. 5. Chandralec’ha, (7 + 8) 
mrm2y=2SB4+SITS. 
6. Camacri’da, Lilach’hela, or 
cons and Sarangaca, 5 me 
6SM. 7. Pr: abhadraca, or Sub- 
~ hadraca th Sucesara, (7 + 8) 
ajba.jr=2PO+P3I1. 8. 
Ela. (5 + 10)s ;2n y= AI 
+41T. 9. Upamilini, (S + 
7) 2 nt bh. 1—3PT.4+SAL 
10. Vipinatilaca,zsx2r = 2 
PItTr. TSIJ.- 11. Chitra, 3 m 
2 os BS MATT St. 12. ‘Funi- 
aca, or Chamara, (8 L 7 Br. 
23c.)=6TC. 13. Bhramara- 
vali, 5s=5A. 14. Manahansa, 
$37 bh. 7A LP 221,15. 
S’arabha, or S’as icala, 4z 4+ 5s = 
6@P A. 16. Nisipala, bh. js 7 
=e PLP 2i.. 17sUtsarazrn 
2bh.r=2T3 AI. 18. Hansa, 
(8+7)n2jry=2PD3TS. 


ATi 
XI. Asutr, 10,464. 


1,,Rish rabhagajavilasi ra, or Gas 
sc ethedigs vilasita, {7 4+9) d4.7r32 
¢=D2T +3 PA. 2. Van= 
ini,2j bh. jr g=2P2TP2TS. 
3. Chitra, Chitrasanga, Atisun- 
dara or Chanchala, (dont le Sa- 
manica) rjrjri=8T.. 4. Pan- 
chachamara, Naracha or Nara- 
cha, (double Praménica), j r jr 
Jg=—8T. 5.Dhiralalita, d4. rn 
r ng=D TP 2 TAS @r@ka- 
gati, Nila, Lila or Aswagati, 5 
bh. g—4 DOE I, ae Chacita (S 
48 i) bh. sming—=DAS+SD 
A. 8. Mada wnalalita, (4-+60+46) 
m bh.nmng—2S+2PI4+SPI, 
9. Pravar alalita, mAsST g =—h2 § 
2PITS. 10. Garudaruta, 77 4h. 
jute 2 PS TOT ST Ge. ae 
las’tie’ha, (16 or 546+45) bh, 


12 o0h.g—D2T3 AorDT+ t 
PT +- TA, 12. Varayuyati, bf. 
T7pine — D2 S2 Pia As. 


Brahmerupaca, (double Vidyun- 


mala,)5mg—8S. 14 Achalad- 
hrita, or Gityarya,inl=8 P. 
15. Pinanilamba, {44+5+7) m t 
ymsg=2S8+DS+4+S DS. 16. 
Yauvanamatta, (5+11) b4.3 ms 
g=D538+35 Ds 

XI. ATYASHITI,A7 x 
A—O8. 

1. Sic’harin’?, (6411) ymns 
bhidg=12S5S+2PIDI. 2. 
Privhwi, (6+9)/sjsylg=t 
P2i+47Tr.TSI. 3. Vans‘apa- 
trapatita, or Vansapatra, (10 + 

7) bh. rn bh. nlg=D2TA+42 
PA, 4, Harin’i, (6 +44 7or 
t7)asmrslg =2PI14258 
-LTAI. 5. Mandacranta, (4+ 6 
+7) mbhn2t2e¢=258+42 Pl 
1 C.-T. 8S. OF Wadcutmea,, or 
Nardat’aca (7 -+ 10}, or Avitat’ha 
a t), a bh, .2 j 1g=Tr. 2h + 
7. Cocilaca, (74+6 


{ 


A72 


4+4t¢or84+5 44 4)=Tr.2] + 
PIP+TI. 8. Hari, (64+4+47) 
Qnmrslg=—3P42S5+4I1AL. 
g. Canta, or Cranta, (4+6+47) y 
bhinrsig =1S+ 2PI+1 AI. 
10. Chitralec’ha, or Atisayani, 
(104+7)2s7 bh.g2eg—2A2I 
4+Tr.TS. 11. Malad’hara, or 
Vanamalad’hara, 2 sys y/g = 2 
P21Tr.TSI. 12. Harini, (4 
+647) mbh.nmylg=2842 
PI+SBI. 


XII. Duriri, t8x4= 
72. 


1. Cusumitglata vellita, (5+6 
+7) mtn3y—=MS+2P I+C 
TS. 2. Mahamalica, Naracha, 
Lata, Vanamala, (104+ 87t)2 
4r—3 PTS+HIT SI. 3. Sud’- 
ha, (64646) ymusts= 125 
4+2PI4SPI. 4. Harinaplota, 
(81545) ms 27 bh. r=ST 21 
4+ AI+AI. 5. Aswagati,5 bh. 
s—5 DA. °6. Chitralec’ba, (4+ 
4 4.7)m2n2im—ST+P Fr. 
S+1ITM. 7. Bhramarapada, 
bh.r3nm—D2TsPA S.° 8. 
Sardulalalita. (12 + 6) msjsts 
oye tT AS Pel 6. Sir 
dula, (1246) msjsrm=SD2 
T AST BS. ATO. WCesara, (24-7 
47) mbh.ny%r=2Sf¢uPa 
4+ SIC. 11. Nandana, (11 + 
7) nj bh. J 27=2PTDI421 
©, 12. Chitrasala, Chitralec’ha, 
(4474-7) m bh.n 3 yr=25+ 2 
PAtCT SS: 13. Chala(423 
+7) mbh.nj bh. r=25F2PA 
+A 14. Vivudhapr-ya, (8-- 
10%) 7 62j bho r= 2T zi + 
P2T25. 15. Manjira, 2m bh, 
msm—3SDSD2S. 16. Crid- 
achandra, 6 y= IT PITPITP. 
47. Charchari, rs27 5%. ¥=T.D 
C1): 2F 29. 


XIV: Aripuriti, 19x 


4-70. 


1. Sardulavicridita, or Sardula, 


/PA+HSI 


ON SANSCRIT AND 


(1247) msjs2tg=SD2T 
A+SIC. 2. Meg’havisp’hur- 
jita, or Vismitra, (64+64-7.) ym 
ns2rg—J)28S42P14+CTS. 
3. Panchachamara, 2 » = alter- 
nate g/—Tr.P7 I. 4, Pushpa- 
dama, (54+747) mins2rgo= 
Ms+2PA+CTS.,. 5. Bimba, 
(5+7+7) mins2t g—=MS+42 
6. Ch’haya, (646 
+7 or 12+-7) ymns bh.t g=I 
28+2Pi1+ DSI. 7.Maca- 
randica, (61647) ymus2 jg 
—-12S +2PI1-+1A by 8S. Sa- 
mudratata, (8S +447) 757 5 tbh. 
cxIP2iL PLESIA. 9.Su- 
rasa, (7+7+5)mrbh.nyng 
—=MTS }3PAL PT 10. 
Manimanjari, ybh.ny2jg=l 
S2PA2T21. 11 Chandra- 
mala, er Chandra, (10 + 9) 327 
2n1=5P4+D3P, 12. Dha- 
valanca, or Dhavala, 6x g = 8 P 
A. 13. Sambbu, (74046) s¢# 
y bh. 2meg=ASASS3S. 


XV. Criri, 20x4=80° 

1. Suvadana, (7+-7+ 6) m rbh- 
ny bh. la=2SB+2PA+S PL: 
2. Vritto, or Gandaca, r jr j rj 
gIl=lOT. 3.Sobha, (6+ 7 + 
7\ ym 2n2Zt2@e=lZS4+2PA 
4+ TSB, A. Gitica, or Gita, s 
oj bhrslg=AIP2T2TAl. 


XVI. Pracriri, 21 x 
A-— 84. 


1. Sragdhara, (7 + 7+ 7) ™ 
rthn3y=2SB42PA4 
TS B.. 2. Salilanid’hi, Sarasi, 
Sidd’haca, Sasivadana or Dhri- 
tasri, 2) 64.3 7r=2PTDI142 
A2I. 3. Narendra, dh.r2n 
2j)y—D2T 3 P2D5. 

XVII. A’crit1, 22 x4 
FEL 

1 Bhacraca, (10 +.12) dA, rn 
rarng—=D2TAtITr.2TA. 
2, Madira, or Lalita, 7 24. g=6 


PRACRIT POETRY. 


DTI. 3. Hansi, (8414) 2m2 
g4n2g—45S+6PS. 

XVIII. Vicritr, 23x%4 
02. 

1. As'walalita, or Adritanaya, 
(11412) 27 64.7 bh. j bho dl g= 
Se eDi+t0Te. TDL. 2. 
Mattacrida,, or Vajivahana, (8+ 
15)2mt4nlg—4S+PA. 3. 
Sundari, (7 + 6+ 10) 25d/.s¢ 
2j=APS42PS42D. 4. 
Ma lati, or Madamatta, 7 54. 2¢ 
=7 DS. 5. Chitrapada, 7 bh. 1 
g=7D I, Mallica, 7,7 4g—I1P 
LP TIP:T I A, 


XIX. SancriTi, 24 x4 
— 96. 


1. Tanwi, (64+7412+4 12)d/. 
ins 2 bh.ny=DS+2P A+ 2 


A473 


D2Ps. 2.Durmila,8s=—8 A. 
3.Cirita, 844.=8D. 4. Jana- 
a,6rf2TSITSIT Ss ag 
5. Madha’vica’,77y=I1PTIPT 
IPTIPS. 


XX. ATICRITI,25 x4 
= 100. 

1, Craunchpada, (54+5+4+8-+4 
7) b4.ms bh. Ang=DS4+DS8 
+4P+42PA. 2, S’ambhu, 8 
mg—11SM. 


XXI.Urcriti26y% 4— 
104. 


1. Rhujangavijrimbhita, (8 + 
ll +7) 2Qmi3ursig=4S+4 
4APA+TJATI. 2.Apavaha, (9 
464645) mOns2¢g—=SD2 
P+3P+3P+AS.. 3. Gauri, 
8 m2g—13 8, 


eae 


Erom 27 to 9909 syllables in the verse. 


Dawn’paca, 27 X 4= 108 to 9909 
Xx 4= 3906. 
1. Chan’darishtiprayata, 2 2 7 
r=z2 Tr. 6C. 
2. Prachita, 22 8 &c. r. 
325 species from 9 to 333 feet 
viz. 2d Arna,2”8r. 3d Arn- 
ava, 22Qr.. 4th Vyala, 210 
7. Sth Jimuta, 2” ill r &c. 
Or 3. Prachita,@n 7 &c. y = 2 
Tr. 7 &c. Be 


4, Mattamatangalilacara, 9 &c,7 
= 0-&c. ©. 

5. Sinhavicranta, 2 2 10 &c, r. 

6. Cusumastavaca, 9 &c.s = Q 
&c. A. 

7- Anangasec’hara, 1g 1g &c. = 
15 &c. I. 

8. Asocamanjari, r j &c. = 15 
&c. hes 

Alfo S.tura,2g¢8"s —§ 12 


=== 


VI. Half equal Metre ;.the stanza being composed of equal 


and similar couplets; but the couplets, of dissimilar 


VETSeS. 


1. Upachitra, (Upajati 4- Ta- 


marasa). \st 3 verse3silg —3 
Al. 243 64.2g=3DS. 

2. Drutamad’hya, (Dod haca+ 
Tamaraic), ist 3 bh.2¢,=3D 
S. 2da22 y=3P2D5. 


3. Vegavati, (Upachitra—pe- 
nult Br, in Ist verse). Ist3s ¢ 
=ZAPS. 24364.9g—2D58. 

4. Bhadraviraj (species of Av- 
pach’handasica), [sit jrg=3P 
2TS. 2dmsj2g—SD2Tu 


474 


5. Cetumati. Istsz7 sg — Al 

Tr.S. 20° 64,r22¢ =T.21 
Tr76) 4% 
6. Ac*byanaci (Upajati viz. 
alternate Indravajra and Upen- 
dravajra; some say, one verse 
Indravajra three Upendravajra.) 
Ist (and 3d) 2 ¢7 Fe—Sl DTS. 
2d (and 4th some sav 3d) jt 7 ¢ 
Ie=21D TS. 

7. Viparitac;hyanaci (the con- 
werse of the preceding.) Ist 7 t 7 2 
g-2I DTS. 2d2¢j2g=—SI 
DTS. 

8. Harin’apluta (Drutavilam- 
bita — one syllable) Ist 357g¢= 
3AI. 2dx2bhr=PI2Al. 

Q. Aparayaotra (species of 
Vaitaliya: ot Bhadrica4+- Malati). 
tet 2arlg =2PAZTI. 2d 
n2jr=P2A2i. 


ON SANSCRIT AND PRACRIT POETRY. 


10. Pushpitagra (species of 
Anpach’handanca). Ast2n ry 
=3P2T8.- 2Wda2yjreg= 
2B 3 TS: 

11. Yavamati. Istrjrj = 
GIRS" 3d)y'r5'7 g = Se 

12, Sicha. 1st 287 ¢ = 7 
Tr. Pe 

13. Chanja.. 1st 307 = 7 
Tr, P;) 94:28) w= 9 Se 
BY Ss 7 Vr. 

14, Lalita. IstrsJ gg = 2T 
27; 2d s ajo A Tre ae 

15. Caumudi (Bhadrica + 
Chanchalacshic3). Ist 2 nrlg 
— Tr. P31. 2272 ae 
Sil 

16, Manjusaurabha (Malati 
+ Manjubhashin'), stn 2yr 
=S2P TSI. WdsYsPee a 
P-3 I. : 


en AS ee 


VII. Unequal Metre ; 


the stanza 


hein 14 composed of 


dissimilar verses. a) 


1. Udgata, 1st verses 757 = 
AITr. T/28 187 ¢°= Tr. A 2 
TY. 3d bh.nglg= Tir 2 A. 
Athsjsjg =AIP3I. 

2 varieties: viz. Savrabhaca, 3d 
verser 2 bh.g =TD2A. La- 
lita, 3d verse2725—=2Tr.2A. 

2. Upast’hitaprachupita, Ist 
verse sj bh.2g—=SD2TDS. 
Qdsnjrg=A2PTS.3d2ns 
=—PA.4thanj7y—=5PDS. 
2, varieties: viz. Bard'hman'a, 
gdverse2us2ns=3PA. 3 
P A Sudd’havira lrishabha, 3d 


versetzvr=SA@kh 
3. PADACHATURUED HA, iIn- 
creasing in arithmetical progres> 


. 


sion from § to 20 syll. viz. Ist “a 


verse 8, 2d 12; 3d 10, 4th 205) 


6 species: viz. Apida, End in S 
Rest Br. Pratydpida, Begin with 
S orbegin and end with S, Man- 


jari or Colicd, 1st and- 2d verses 


transposed 12 + 8-4 10 ++-, 20. 
Laval, \stand 3d transposed 16 
4+ 12+ 8+ 20. Amritad hard, 
Ist and 4th transposed 204 12 
+1048. 


’ — 


VIII. Supplement, under the denomination of Ga’ THA’. 


1. Stanzas comprising four un 
equal verses, constituting ametre 
not described by writers on pro- 


sody & 
2. Stanzas Comprising more or 


fewer verses than four; viz. 


three, five, six, &c. 

3. Any metre not specified by 
PINGALA. 

4. Metre not specified by any 
writer on prosody. Prats 


= . —— 


Peis A Us 


Remarks upon the Aurnonities of MosurmMan 
Law*. 


BY J.H. HARINGTON, ESQ. 


",, + 

g HE basis of Mohummudan law, religious, civil, 
and criminal, is the Kordn; believed to be of divine 
origin, and to have been revealed by an angel to Mo- 
uuMMuD ; who Caused it to be written and published, 
from time to time, as occasion required, for the refuta- 
tion of his opponents, or the instruction and guidance 
of his followers: though the hundred and fourteen So0- 
wur, or chapters, which compose the Koraz, were not 
digested, in their present form, until after the death of 
Mouummup: whenthey were collected by his imme- 
diate successor Azoo Buxr; and were afterwards, in 
the 30th year of the Hijrah, transcribed, collated, and 
promulgated, by order of the Khuleefuh Oruma’n-f. 


Tue Kordn being thus considered the writjen word 
of God, its texts, when clear and applicable, and not 
abrogated by other texts of subsequent revelation, are 
unquestionable anddecisive. But, (as remarked by an 
eminent historian ¢,) ‘‘ In all religions the life of the 
founder supplies the silence of written revelation: the 
sayings of Manom™ert were so many lessons of truth ; 


a eee eee ee ee eS 


* These remarks are intended to form part an Analysis of the 
Laws and Regulations, for the civil government of the British ter- 
ritories, under the Presidency of Bengal. This work is designed 
for the use of the students in the coliege oi Fert Wiliam; and the 
second part, which relates to Criminal Jastice, is introduced'by a 
summary of the Mobummudan law of crimes and punishments, for 
the purpofe of rendering more intelligible the amendments of it 
enacted by the Regulations of the Governor General in Council. 

+ V. Sare’s Preliminary Discoarse, Section III. ¢ 

{In chap.L. of the Decline and Full of the Roman Empire, relative 
to Arabia. 


. 


476 REMARKS UEON THE 


his actions so many examples of virtue; and the public 
and private memorials were preserved by his wives and 
companions.” In fact, the ordinances of the Kordn, in 
civil affairs are few and imperfect; and must have 
proved altogether inadequate to provide for the various 
objects of legislation, in a large and civilized commu- 
nity, without the aid of the Soonnut, or rule of conduct, 
deduced from the oral precepts, actions, and decisions, 
of the prophet. ‘These were not committed to writing 
by Mouummup; but were collected after his death, 
by tradition, from his companions, (the Sahdbah ;) 
their contemporaries, (Tubiieen, literally, followers ;) 
and successors (Tubd-i-tabiieen;) and the authentic 
traditions, which have been preserved in numerous 
compilations of fhddees, (dicta, factaque; precepts 
and transactions;) Soonun, (instituta vile/, exempla; 
rules of practice and examples ;) or Riwdyat, (relationes, 
reports;) constitute a second authority of Mosulman 
Jaw; conclusive (if the authenticity and application of 
the traditions be admitted) in all cases not expressly 
determined by the words of the Kordn *. 


-_——— — ,— - 


* The collections of traditions held in the most general estimation, 


as genuine and authoritative, by the Soonces, or orthodox traditi- - 


onists, are the following; denominated SiAdA-7-sitla ; or the six au- 
thentics. 

1. Sahech-i-Bokhdree. Compiled by Asoo Aspootran, Mo- 
HuMMuD, of Bokhard. He was born A. H. 194; and died in the 
year 250; in the suburbs of Sumurkund. His compilation is said 
to contain above seven thousand traditions ; selected from 500,000. 

2. Saheeh-i-Mooslim. By Azoo’s Hose x, Moosuim, of Ny'sha- 
poor. He died A. H.261; and is also said to have compiled bis 
work from 300,000 traditions. This and the preceding coiléction, 
when cited together, are called Sahcehy'n, or the tevo authentics. 

3. Soonwn-1-l5n-i Majah. By MouwuMMUD-RIN-I YUZEED, BIN-I 
Masan: of Kuzeen. (Erroneously named Ben MounumMup, in 
D'Herseror. Title Senan Ebn Magiah.) He died at Kuzveen, in 
Irak, A, H.273. 

4, Soonun-i Aboo Diood. By Asoo Da‘oop, Sory’ma’n, of S¢jis- 
tan. He was born A..H. 202; and died at Busrah, in the year 275. 
His work is stated to consist of 4,800 traditioss selected from 
500,000. ; ; 


—_—. ~— 


’ 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A77 


Tue schisms and dissentions, however, which took 
place among the Mohummudans, after the demise of 
their legislator and fuunder, especially the contest of the 
succession to the Khilafut, or pontificate, which gave 
rise to the Shiya, or sectariesof ALEE, have occafioned 
various differences and disagreements, both in reading 
and interpreting the words of the Koran, and in ad- 
mitting or rejecting the traditions, which compose the 
oral law. ‘There appear to be an error, or verbal inae- 


a 


5. Jima-i Tirmizee. By Asoo Jgzsa Monummun, of Tirmiz, in 
Toorkistan. He is alsosurnamed Zyreer or Duuresr, from his 
blindness. His birth was A. H. 209; and his death in 279. His 
compilatien is noticed by D'Hersetor, under the title of Gzame al 
Kebir; and is erroneously cited (apparently from D’Hersecor,) in 
Ham:1Ton’s Preliminary Discourse, page 36, as quoted in the Hida- 
yah: instead of the Jéma-i-Kubeer, on fik-h, or jurisprudence, by 
Imam MouumMup. 

6. Jama-i Nisdee; called also Soonun-i Nisdee. By Anoo-1 app- 
oo Rauman AumupD, of Visa,a city of Khorasan. He was born 
A. H. 215; and died in the year 303., This collection is selected 
from a former compilation, by ibe same author, called the Soonun-i- 
koobra; and mentioned by D’Hexsgexot, under the title of Sonex 
Al Kebir. 

The four works last mentioned, when cited collectively, have the 
designation of Soonun-i-urba, or the four collects of traditions. The 
fhort notices, which) have been gigen, of their compilers, and of the 
authors of the Saheehyn, ave taken chicfly trom the Mirat-oolpaalum, 
an esteemed general history composed by Buxutiyar Kuan, in 
the reign of Avrunezes. They are confirmed, with many other 


’ particulars, in the Mishfat, a work of autiority on the traditions 


- 


admitied by the Soonees; and used, as a class book, in Mosulman 
Colleges, with the Saheeh-i Bukharee, aud Saheeh-i Mooslim. The 
author, Saygsu WarrezoopeEeN, Asoo ABvooLLAH, Maumoop, 
who finished his undertaking (to verify and illustrate the traditions 
conthined in a foriner compilation, called the Musabeeho’ soonnut, 
by Hosen Bin-i Musoo-oop, Furars) A. H. 737, states that the 
Mowutta of Matix pin Ans, (the founder of the second orthodox 
sect, who died A. H. 179} ts, by some reckoned one of the sixth au- 
thentic coilections, instead of the Soonwn-i Ibni Majah. He adds 
that others are of opinion, the Darumee, compiled by Asoo Mouum- 
MUD ABDOOLLAH of Sumurkund, surnamed DaruMeE, who was 
born A. H. 181, and died in 255, sbould be classed as the sixth au- 
thentic. But he iias himself given this place to the compilation of 
Moxvummup, the grandson of Masau; and it is commonly placed 
third in the series, with reference to the supposed order of publica- 
tion. 


478 REMARKS UPON THE 


curacy, in the observation of the learned, and in gene 
ral accurate, translator of the Koran, that “the Son- 
nites receive the Sonna, or book of traditions of their 
prophet, as of canonical authority ; whereas the 
Shiites reject it as apocryphal, and unworthy of 
credit *.” From this remark it might be inferred, 
that the Siiyd reject the traditions altogether ; whereas 
they admit many which are not deemed authentic, and 
are consequently rejected, by the Sdonees. They have 
also their collections of hddees, and Sdonun, which 
they deem genuine and authoritative ¢. The difference 
between them, and the h/-i-Sconnui, or othodox tra- 


ditionists, who, as remarked by Mr. Hamitton, ap- | 


pear to have assumed this title of distinction, ** in op- 
position to the innovations of the sectaries X,”’ lies, as 
far as respects the traditions, in the different autho- 


ee ee 


* Sare’s Preminary Discourse, Section VIII. : 

+ Movuraver S1kxAj 00’DEEN Atre (one of the law officers of 
the courts of Sudr Deewareeand Nixamut Adalut, as wellas of the 
Supreme Court,and employed by the late Sir W. Jonzs, to compile 
the Sheeah part of a Digest of Mosu!man Law, upon contracts and 
inheritance) states the Kovioob-i urba, or four books of traditions, 
held autiieniic by the Shiya, 10 be the following : 

1. Tahzeecb. 2. dstibsar. Both compiled by Asoo Jarur Mo- 
HuUMMUN, of Teos in Khorasan. 

3. Jama-i Kafee. By Mounummup sin-1 Yaxoor. Of Ry in 
Persian Irak. 

4. Mun la Yahzoorb ool-fukeeh.. By Monummup-s1n ALeg, of 
Komm, also in lrak-i Ajum. 

The third of these collections, which quotes the compiler of the 
two first, is said to have been presented to Imam Manpes, who was 
born A. H. 255. The author of the fourth compilation is stated 
in the Mujalis ool~Momuneen, to have been contemporary with, and 
protected by, the Persian King Roxn-oo’pou.an, whodied, A, H. 
360. 

{ Preliminary Discourse to his translation of the Hidayah, page 
22. Hisobseryation, at length, is ‘‘ the Mussulmans, who assume 
to themselves the distinction of orthodox, are such as maintain the 
most obyious interpretation of the Koran, and the obligatory force 
of the traditions, in opposition to the innovation of the sectaries ; 
whence they are termed Soonis, or traditionists.” This, however, 
is partly open to' the same objection, as has been stated to the re- 
mark of Mr, Saxe. ; 


: 
OE 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A79 


rities, which are admitted by the two sects for the 
Ahaadees, received by them respectively. The Stonees 
allow traditionary credit to the Sahabak, or companions 
of their Prophet; especially to the most eminent 
amongst them, or those who had the longest and most 
familiar intercourse with Monummup; and to the 
Khoolfa-i rashideen, or the four Khuleefahs, who were 
the immediate successors of the Prophet ; and in- 
structed-by him in the principles, and tenets of his 
religion. Also to several intelligent and learned men, 
who were contemporary with the companions and first 
Khuleefahs, and who are included in the general de- 
scription of Tabijeen already mentioned ; as well’ as to 
others, who succeeded these; (the Yiuha-i-tabi-icen ;) 
and have veritied their reports of traditions, by citing 
the names of the persons, through whom they were 
successively traced to their genuire source, the inspired 
Apostle of God*. 


Tue Shiyé, on the contrary, gaye no authority, of 
credit, to the three first A‘hulecfahs, Aznoo Buxr, 
Omer and Oruma’n : nor to any other companions 
of MonummMupD, excepting such as were partisans of 
Axreg. They extend their faith and obedience, how- 
ever, to the admission of all traditions of their Pro- 


ee ee 


a ee 


* The nature of this treatise does not admit ofa fuller account of 
the Soonee tradititions ; which are distinguished by some authors as 
Saheek (authenticated ;) Husun (approved :) Zazeef-o-ghureeh (weak 
and poor ;) Meonkur-o-mouzooa (denied and imposed:) by others, as 
Moosnud (vouched or certified ;) and Moorsu?, or Moonkuta (detached 
or divided.) The Moosnud are also subdivided as Murfooa (ascend- 
ing to the Prophet ;) Moukoof (resting with the Sahabch;) and 


-Muktooa (severed or cut short among the TzAzieen 3) or by any other 


classification as Mootawatur (repeated, successive ;) Mush,hoor 
public, notorious; and /ahid (single, particular.) The Mzshkai, ' 
referred toin a former note, has however been translated by an of- 
ficer of the Bengal establishment, and if it receive sufficient en- 
courage ment te repay the heavy-expence of printing in India, it will 
be speedily published, 


A80O REMARKS UPON THE 


phet’s sayings and actions, which they believe to have 
been verified by any one of the twelve Imdmeeyah ; a6 
well as to the precepts and examples of those Jmams 
themselves ; the whole of whom they venerate, as being 
the lineal descendants (through Fa’riman), and ac- 
cording to their tenets, the rightful successors, of 


Mouvummop ; and the last of whom they believe to - 


be still living, though invisible; it having been pre- 
dicted of him, that he will return to judge and rule the 
world ; to punish sinners, and those who have de- 
parted from the true faith; and to restore and con- 
firm the genuine truths of religion, with piety, justice, 
and every other virtue *. 


WueEwn neither the written nor oral law prescribes a 
tule of decision, the concurrence of the companions 
of Monummup (Jjmé,4 i Sahabah) is received by the 
Sconees, asa third source of legal authority: and if 


*’Phe names of the twelve Jmams are given by D'HeRgetor, 
under the head of Imam. He has also given a brief statement of 
the tenets of the Shiva, under the titles of Schiah, Ali, and other 
titles of his valuable, though (as might be expected in so volumi- 
nous ard miscellaneous a work) sometimes erroneous and often im- 
perfect compilation. A fuller account of the doctrines, and practice 
of the Shiya is contained in the 2d vol. of Cuarpin. (Description 
dela Religion des Persans, in the Amsterdam Edition of his Vayage en 
Perse published in M.DCC.XI.) But the most authentic informa- 


tion upon the jurisprudence of the Imdmeeyah sect, (which, not » 


having been established, for the administration of justice, in any 
part ot the Company’s territories, needs not to be further noticed in 
this tract,) will be furnished by the completion of a work, the first 
yolume of which is already printed,) and entitled— A Digest of 
Mohummudan Law, according to the tenets of the Twelve Imams ; 
*‘ compiled under the superintendence of the late Sir Witt1am 
“« Jongs: extended, so as to comprise the whole of the Jmameea code 
‘© of jurisprudence, in temporal matters; and translated, from the 
« original Arabze, by order of the Supreme Government of Bengal ; 
«* with Notes, illustrative of the decisions of other sects of Mohum~- 
‘¢ mudan lawyers, on many leading and important questions. By 
** Captain Joun Baruyig, Profeflor of the Arabic and Persien Lan- 
“ suages, and of Mohummudgn Law, in. the College of Fort 
« William.” 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A81l 


this also fail, they allow the validity of reason, restricted 

by analogy, (hiyas) in applying, by inference, the ge- 
neral principles of law and justice, to the various trans- 
actions and circumstances of the changeful scene of 
human life; which, as they could not be all foreseen, 
itwas impossible they should be ‘completely and ex- 
pressly provided for. This is so clearly stated, with 
the origin of the principal Sdonee sects, who agree in 
matters of faith, (ekweed,) but differ on points of prac- 
tical jurisprudence, ( fik,A,) in a section of the Mokhtusur 
60 dowul (compendium of dynasties) of Grecortus 
Asoo'L Furvs, translated (into Latin) by Pocock, 
in his Specimen Ehstorie Arabum; that the following 
Englhsh version will not, it is persumed, be unaccept- 
able ; especially as both the Arabic orignal and Latin 
translation, are little known in India *, 


“Or the sects (Muzéhib) which differ upon the 
branches, or derivative parts of the law, concerning 
rules of jurisprudence, and cases of disquisizion, four 
are the most celebrated : viz. those of M’aALIK BIN-I 
Ans ; of Monummup BIn-1 IpREEs, 00° SH’AFIAEE; 
of AnMup Btn 1 Hungut; and of Agoo He sane 
Naoma’n Bin-t TuHa’sit. The fundamental yrounds 
of disquisition ({jtzhad} are also four; the scripture 


* Azoo'’L Furus wasa Christian, born at Malathia in Aladulia, 
ot Armenia minor, A.C, 1226. Buthe wrote in Aradic, and appears 
to have been weil versed in the religion and law, as we -Il as in the 
history, of Aradia. V.Pocock’s S becimen Historie Arabnm, coin= 
prising an extract from the dynasties of Azoo’L Furus, which, 
GIBBON obseives, “* form a classic and origina! work on the Ay dian 
antiquities.” Published at Oxford, in 1050. Alsv the complete 
Latin version of the original work, by Pococs, published in 
1663. Greson has added, upon this, however, that * it. is more 
useful for the literary than the civil history ef the East.” Cap. 
Lils v.13. . 


Ei 


482 REMARKS UFON THE 


(Aitab.;) the traditionary law (Sdonnut ;) the concur- 
rence of the prophet’s companions (/jmad ;) and ana- 
logy, or analogical reasoning (kiyas). For, when any 
legal question arose, respecting what was lawful or un- 
lawful, a regular investigation took place, in the follow- 
ing manner. First, they searched the book of 
Almighty God (the Koran ;) and if any clear text were 
found in it, such was adhered to. But, if not, they 
sought for a precept, or example, of the Prophet; and 
abided by it, if applicable, as decisive. If none such 
were discovered, they inquired for a concurrent opi- 
nion of the zahabah; who, being directed in the 
right way, are not open to suspicion of misleading ; 
and therefore, if their sentiments could be ascertained, 
on the point in question, they were deemed conclu- 
sive. If not, an ‘ultimate resort was had to analogy 
and reason ; the yariety of contingent events being in- 
finite ; whereas the texts of the laware finite. It thus 
appears certain that the exercise of reason may be pro- 
per and necessary in legal disquisition. Ima’m Da‘oop 
of Isfahan, howeyer, entirely rejected the exercise of 
reason ; whilst, on the contrary, Asoo HungrErau 
was so much inclined to it, that he frequently preferred 
it, in manifest cases, to traditions of single authority. 
But Ma‘’urx, Suarijfes, and Ipn-1 Hunsut, had 
seldom recourse to analogical argument, whether mani- 
fest or recondite, when they could apply either a posi- 
tive rule, or a tradition. This gave rise to their dif- 
ferent opinions and judgment ; which are recorded in 
books that treat of their disputations ; yet neither infi- 
delity, or error, is to be charged against them on this 
account.” 


Tue four principal jurists, and founders of sects, 
among the sdonces, who are noticed by Anoo’L Furvs, 
have been particularly mentioned in the notes of 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A483 


Pocock’s Specimen, already referred to; in the 
Bibliotheque of D’Hexperor ; and in the preliminary 
discourse of SALE and Hamriron *. The doctrines 
of Ma’trk, and Inn-1 Hungun, are not known to 
prevail in any part of India. Those of Swa’Fiigx 
have a limited prevalence on the sea coast of the penin- 
sula; and are understood to obtain among the Mulays, 
and other Mosulman inhabitants of the Eastern 
Islands. But the authority of Asoo HunErEFAnH, and 
his two disciples, ABoo Yoosu# and Im’am Mouum- 
MUD, is paramount, and exclusively governs judicial 


* Their names, at length, are—1. Asoo Hunerran Nadma’n 
BIn-I THABIT: or, as pronounced in India, SagitT. 2. Asoo 
AsBpvooLLtAH MALIK BIN-I-aNs, or, as otherwise read, Anus, 3 
Asoo ABDOOLLAH MonuMMUD IBN-I-IDREFS OO’SHAFIIEE, or 2 
descendant from SHarFii. 4, ABoo ABnooLLAH AHMUD IBN-1 
Hunsut. The first is commonly called Asoo Huneeran, 

eaning the father of Hunegrau, and therefore is impro- 
petly cited, in the translation of the Hidayah, by the name of 
Huneerau only; which, moreover is a ieminine appellation, and 
was the name of the second wife of Atez. (Vide Tit. Haniran,- 
in the Bib. of D’Hersetor,) He was born at Koofah, about A. H. 
80; (some say ten, and others twenty-one, years earlier ;) was in- 
structed in the traditions, by Imam Jarur-r Sapik, the sixth Imam ; 
who, as an authority for the precepts and actions of Monummup, is 
esteemed by the Soonces, as wel! as by the Shiya ; (not the Sheeah 
Doctor, Asoo Jarur, mentioned in a former note; as erroneously 
stated in Hamitton’s Preliminary Difcourse, p. xxiii. Vid. Tit. 
Giafar inthe Bib. Or.) and. died in prifon, at Bughddd, in the 
Khildfut of Munsoor, A. H. 150. The founder of the second 
sect is known by his proper name Matix. He was born at Mu- 
deenah, between the vears 9O and 95 of the Hyrah ; and died, at the 
same place, in a state - of religions retirement, during the reign of 
Haroon oo’iitusuzep, A. H. 179. The patronymic, Shafiiee, 
usually distinguishes the third leader: who was born at Gzza or 
Ascalon, in Palestine ; in the hundred and fiftieth year of the Aijrah ; 
and died at Cairo, (where the famous SaLAd 00 DEEN, some cen- 
turies afterwards, founded a College, in honour of his memory and 
doctrines,) A. H. 204. The last chief, AHMUD,is more generally 
called, from his father, Jgn-1 Hunput. He was born at Bughdad, 
or according to some at Murv, or Muroo, in Khorasan, A. H. 164, 
and died at Bughdad, where he attended the lecture ot Su avitie, 
A.H, 241, 


Tia 


AB4 ' REMARKS UPON THE 


decisions, in Bengal and Hindoostan, as well as ‘at Con 
stantinople, and other seats of Mohummudan dominio 
in Turkey and Tartary. It will therefore be sufficient 
to state the system of Asoo Hunzrran, ‘with the il- 
lustrations, and amendments of Asoo Yoosur and 
Im’am Mouummup *.; noticing, after the manner of 
the Hidayah, any. particular opinions of the other 
orthodox sects, upon points of importance, which may 
appear to require it. 


! 
Ir has been remarked by Sir W. Jones, in his pre- 
face to the Sirajeeyah +, ‘that although Azoo 


—S 


eee 


* Azoo Yoosur Yaxoor pind IBRAAEEM OoL Koores, was 
born at Keofah, A. H.113 ; and after finishing his studies under 
AxsooHuneeran, was appo'nted Kazee of Bughdad by the Khalleefah, 
Hanes. He was aiterwatds, in the reign of Haroon 00" 
Rusueep, made Kazce oo! Koozat, or chief Judge; and retained 
that-high station, (which is said to have been first instituted for 
him) until bis death, A. HW, 18°22}Aseo AppooLtran MouumMmup 
Bin-1 Husuw oo" Suyeanze (of the tribe of Shyban) who is usually 
called Imam Mouowmup, was born at Wasit in Arabian Irak, A, H, 
132., He was a fellow pup'l with Asoo Yoosur, under Asoo 
Huwnreran, and on the death of the latter, continued his studies. 
uncer the former. He is also said to have received instruction 
from) Matix. He was appointed by Haroon 0o’RusHgep to 
administer jostice in Irak-i Ajum or Persian Irak, and died at Ry, 
the former capital of that province, A.H. 179: or, according tO; 
the Rowzt oc'rivahern, an esteemed history from the comimence-_ 
ment to the 75yth-year of the Hijrah, by’ Yarirer, A.H. 189. 
(See further particulars respecting Apoo Yoosur and Imam Mo- 
HUMMUD, in Hamrtton’s Preliminary Discourse). Zoorur BINn-1 
Hoozer, and Husun pin-1 Ziv Av, (the former of whom held the. 
appointinent of chief magistrate at Busrak, where he died A. H,. 
158) were also two distinguished contemporaries, and schiolars, of 
Axzoo Hunerran ; and are sometimes quoted as authorities for his 
doctrines ; especially when the’two principal difciples are silent. 

tT A work of authority upon the Mohummudan law of inheri-- 
tance, transtated’ and published, witha commentary, by Sir W. 
Jones, in the year 1792. This is the only part’ of the Mosulman - 
Digest, undertaken by'the venerable judge in 1788, which his various _ 
avocations and studies allowed’ him to complete.. He deemed it _ 
worthy of being exhibited entire, as cOntaining the « Institute of 
Arabian law om the important title mentioned by the Brisish legis- 
Jature (in the Statute 21 Groreg IN. Chapter LXX) of inheritance 


- 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 489° 


Huyrrran be the acknowledged head of the prevail- 
ing sect, and has given his name to it, yet so great 
veneration is shown to ABoo Yoosur, and the lawyer 
Monuvummoup, that, when they both dissent from their 
master, the Moosulman judge is at liberty to adopt 
either of the two decisions, which may seem to him 
the more consonant to reason and founded on the better 
authority.” This remark corresponds with the re- 
ceived opinion of present lawyers; and is sanctioned, 
for the most part, by a passage to the following effect 
in the Hummadeeyah*. ‘+ Futwas (law decisions, or 
Opinions) are given primarily, according to the 
doctrine of ABoo YoosurF ; next according to Im’am 


and succession to lands, rents, and goods.’’ And it is of particular 
value to the jurisprudence of British India, as the Hidayah, trans- 
lated by Mr. Hamitton, does not include the law of inheritance. 
it has not been ascertained when the author of the original treatise 
lived. But the Kushf 00 Zunoen,.(or dhunoon, as pronounced in 
Arabia) the bibliographical work of Hasee Kuuiran, which fur- 
nished materials for a considerable part of the Bibliotheque Orientale, 
(Vid. Gavann’s preface, p. xiv. Ed. M.DCC.LXXVI.) mentions 
it, under the title of Purayid 00’ Sujawundee in the following terms; 
together with the date of the commentary of Syrup SHuREEF; the 
substance of which is given by Sir W. Jones, with that of a recent 
Persian comment, by Moutaves. Mozummup Kasim, who was 
employed by Mr. Hasrines to translate, from the Ara/ic into 
Persian, both the Sirajeeyah and the Shuree feeyah. ‘* Vhe 
Furayid-co’ Sujawundee, composed by Imam S1RAJ 00’DEEN, 
Maumoop sin-1 Asp oo’ RusHerv, of Swawund, is commonly 
called the Fura,cezi Sirajseyah. It is held in high estimation and ia 
general use. Many’of the learned have written commentaries upon 
it, to the number of forty ; the best of which is the comment of 
Syyup oo’Suurrer ALEE B1N-1 Monummup, of Joorjan; finished, 
Sumurkund, in tbe year (of the Hijrah) 104. This commentary is 
of the first authority, and universal'y received. Several Scholiasts, 
of erudition, haye civen annotations upon it. 

* A- collection of legal expositions, by Asoo’. ruTHa, Roxn oo 
DEEN 1BN-1 Hosam, Mooftee of Nagor, in the Dwkyun ; and de- 
dica.ed to his teacher, Humap oo’ peren, AumupD, chief Kazece, of 
Nuhr walah. The rime when this work was compiled is not.ex- 
act'y known ; bat, thought of modern date, it is held in consider- 
able estimation. The court of Nizamut Ada/ut possess a compiete 
 cooy, obtained for them, with some other Jaw byoks, by Lord 
Teignmouta, from the Vuwab V izeer, in the year 1797. ' 

hs li3- 


A480 REMARKS UPON THE 


MontumMMupD next according to Zoorur; and then 
according to Husuw pin-r Ziy’ao. It is said, that 
if Asoo Hunerran be of one opinion, and his two 
disciples of another, the Mooftee is at liberty tochuse 
either; but the preceeding rule must be observed, 
when the Moofee is not a scientific jurist ; (and there- 
fore not competent to judge of the opposite opinions.) 
This is copied from the koonyah *, In judicial de- 
creees however a preference is given to the doctrine of 
Asoo YoosuF (who was an eminent judge) ; for Imam 
Surukhsee +, has declared it safe to rely upon ABoo 
Yoosur in judicial matters ; and that the learned have 
followed him in such cases; though if there be a dif- 
ference between the two disciples, which ever agrees 
with Agoo Hunegerau must be preferred. The joint 
opinion of the disciples may also be adopted, though 
different from that of Asoo Hunesran, if the dif- 
ference appear to proceed from a change of human 
affairs ; (/it.a change of men, and alteration of*times ;) 
and modern lawyers are agreed, that the doctrine of 
the two disciples may be taken for adjudication in all 
matters of civil justice.” 

Ir appears, however, that the ancient jurists held 
the authority of Azgoo Hunerrau to be absolute, 
although both his disciples might differ from him, 
This is stated, without reservation, in a chapter, ‘‘ on 
the order of authorities to be observed in_ practise,” 


* A law tract often quoted inthe Futawa-i Aalumgeeree, not 
known to be at present extant; and by whom composed, has not 
. been ascertained. 
ft Spums oot Aimman, Asoo Buxr Mosummup, native of 
Surukhs.in Khorasan. The Moheet composed by him will be men- 
tioned in a subsequent note. He also wrote acommentary on the 
Jama-i Sughecr of IMam MouummMupn ; and a comment upon thie 
Kefee ool Hakim, (statedin the Kush/-o0'xunoon to have been com- 
posed by Haxim-1 SHaugED, Monummup; but no longer extant,) 
which is called Mubsoot-i Sarukhsee, and often quoted in the 
Hidaych. He died, at the place-of his nativity, A. H. 483. 


Led 


? 
AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A87 


forming part of the book entitled dddéb ool kaxee, or 
duties of the kdzee, in the Futawd-i Adlumgeeree, of 
collection of law cases, compiled by order of the Em- 
peror AA’LuMGEER. ‘The same chapter contains other 
useful information upon the rules and discretion, under 
which the Mosulman magistrate is empowered to ad- 
minister justice ; and as it is not long, a literal trans- 
lation of it is here introduced ; omitting only a quota- 
tion from the Mubsoot, which being nearly a repetition 
of that given from the Budayia, the insertion of both 
appeared superfluous. 


“ Tr is incumbent upon a ézee (or judge) to give 
judgment according to the book of God; to know 
what parts of the divine book are in force, and what 
have been abrogated ; to be able to distinguish be- 
tween the texts which are clear and positive ; and such 
as are of doubtful meaning, having obtained a different 
interpretation from the learned. If-no rule be found_ 
in the book of God, the sdzee is to decide according 
to the traditions from the Prophet. He must there- 
fore be competent to discriminate those in force from 
such as have been superseded ; and the spurious and 
invalid, from such as are genuine and authoritative. 
He must be acquainted with those which have obtained 
successive, notorious, or single, verification; and with 
the character and credit of the reporters of them. 
Because some are celebrated for their knowledge of 
jurisprudence (jik-h 6 adalut;) as the four first khulee- 
fahs, and the three ABDooLLans, (viz. ABDOOLLAH 
1BN-1 Omur, ABDLOOLAH IBN-I ABBa’s, and AB- 
DOOLLAH IBN-1 Musdéoop, three of the more 
learned of the companions ;) whilst others are esteemed 
on account of their long and familiar intercourse with 
the Propbet, and their perfect recollection of the tra- 
ditions ; and they are preferred accordingly ; the for- 
mer as the best yom a on the general principles 

1A 


488 - REMARKS UPON THE 


of legal science ; the latter for the authenticity of par- 
ticular traditions. If a case arise to which none of the 
traditions, derived from the Prophet, may be applicable, 
let the kuzee determine it. according to the concurrent 
opinion of the Sahabah (companions), for their con- 
currence affords a just and obligatory rule of conduct. 
If there be a difference of opinion a mong the compa- 
nions, let the azee compare their respe ective arguments, 
and follow those which. on investigation, may appear 
to him preferable; supposing him “qualified to enter 
into such adisqnisition. He is not authorized to reject 
the whole of these opinions, and adopt a judgment of 
his own, altogether novel. For the companions have 
agreed upon this point, that although they may differ 
‘sts n each other, it is not lawful to institute new doc- 
trines, at variance with the whole of them. Kuusur * 
holds the contrary opinion. that when the companions 
differ, the kazee may adopt a judgment altogether 
distinct, as their dissention affords eround for disqui- 
sition : but what Is aboye stated has the best. founda- 
tion. When the companions have agreed upon a 
point, in which one of their followers (/abiieen) has 
dissented from them; if the dissenter was not their 
contemporary, his opposition has no weight ; and a 
judgment given conformably thereto, against the .con- 
current opinion of the companions, would be invalid : 
but if-he were contemporary with them, and then 
expounded the law in) opposition to their) opinions, 


* Taram Asoo Buxr, AuMupD, pIN-1 Omur, surnamed) Kuusar,. 
or the farrier... He composed the most celebrated of the works 
known under the title oi Adah ool Kazee, or duties of the Kazee ; 
‘and is slated, in the Kushf'co Zunoon, to have died A. H. 261. A 
high encomium is, added upon his composition 5 which is said to 
consist of 120 Chapters, replete with usetul information. Several 
learned men have written.commentaries upon it, of which the 
most esteemed is that of Imam Omnrk Brw-1- ABD-OOL-AREEZ, 
eeety called Hoosam, the inattyt; A. H. 526. i Ths 


AUTHORITJES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A8Q 


and they eave sanction to his disquisitions, as in the in- 
stances of SHoRY’A and SHABEE*, the concurrence 
of the companions docs not bar the opposite exposition, 
so admitted. With respect, however, to expositions 
which have no other authority than part of the Tadi- 
ween, there are two reports of the sentiments of Azoo 
Hunexran. One, that he did not consider such to 
be authoritative : and this appears to be the true doc- 
trine. ‘Lhe other, contained in the Nuwadir --, states, 
that if some of the followers of the companions have 
given Fufwis in their time, and have received from the 
latter a sanction to their disquisitions; as SHory’A, 
Husun {, and Musxook gin-1 Aspa||, their decisi-« 
ons should be observed. It is thus written in the Mo- 


heet §. 


ane ee 


— 


* The first was Kazee, the second Mooftee, of Koofah, in the first 
century of the Hijrah; and they were esteemed two of the most 
learned men of their age. The former, whose name at length, is 
Asoo OmyYAH SHORYA BIN Oot Hiras oot Kinperg, held the sta- 
tion of Kazee, at Koofah, for seventy-five years, and died A. H. 78 
or 80; after resigning his office the year before his death. The en- 
tire name of the latier is ABoo Omur AAMIR BIN-I SHURAHEE 00 
SHasee, deriving his surname from the town of Shad, in Arabia. 
He died A- H. 104, 


, 

+ Ten different works of this name, (meaning, literally, rare, 
scarce) are specified in the Kush/ os Zunoon; of which one was 
composed by Imam Monummup, the disciple of ABoo Huneeran 3 
and it is probably that bere referred to. It is considered to be of less 
authority than his five other works, the Jama-1 sugheer, Jama-i ku- 
beer, Mubsoot, Zeeadat, and Siyur, which are well known, and fre- 


quently quoted, under the general designation of Zahir oo Ruwayat, 
the consp'cuous reports. 


{ Vid. Bib. Or. Tit. Hassan al Baszi. 


» || A learned native of Hamadan, who became a convert to Istam, 
during the life of MonumMup ; and died at Koofah, A. H. 62. 


§ There are three works of this title; all of which are quoted in 
the Futawa-i Aalumgceree ; but the two others are distinguished by 
* the addition of Surukshee or Bocrhance. The two latter will be men- 
tioned in a subsequent note. The Moheet, here referred to, is sup- 
posed to have been written by Mourana Rugee 09g DEEN of Nyshe- 


’ 


4AQU REMARKS UPON THE 


“Tr the concurrent opinion of the companions bé 
not found in any case, which their followers may have 
agreed upon, the Kdzee must be guided by the latter, 
Should there be a difference in opinion between the 
followers, let the Kdaézce compare their arguments and 
adopt the judgment he deems preferable. If, however, 
none of the authorities referred to be forthcoming, and 
the Kazee bea qualified jurist; (hil ool- Ttihad, \i- 
terally a person capable of disquisition ;) he may con- 
sider in his own mind what is consonant to the princi- 
ples of nght and justice; and applying the result, with 
a pure intention, to the facts and circumstances of the 
case, let him pass judgment accordingly. But if he 
be not a qualified person, let him take a legal opinion 
from others who are versed in the law, and decide in 
conformity thereto. He should, in no case, give judg- 
ment without knowledge of the law ; and should never 
be ashamed to ask questions for information and advice. 
[tis further requisite that the Kazee attended to two 
rules: first, that when the three Jmdms (Asoo Hun- 
EEFAH, Agoo Yoosur, and Ima’m MonumMup) all 
agree, he is not at liberty to deviate from their joint 
opinion, upon hisown judgment. Secondly, when the 
Imams differ, ABnpooLian BIn-1 Mopa’ruk * says, 
the Kdzee’s sentence is to be given according to the 


—- > es 


poor, who, in the notes prefixed by Syrup Aumup-1 Humavesg to 
an old copy of the Hidayah, purchased at Mukhah, is said to have - 
compiled the opinions of the followers of Anoo Hunerran, in a 
regular serics; whereas other compilers had blended them. This | 
Moheet, howeyer, is not extant in India, and is only known by quo- 
tations from it. 


* One of the pupils of Azoo Hunzgran, surnamed Muroozer 
from Muroo, the place of his natiyity. He was held in high vene- 
ration for his piety, and his tomb is said-to be visited, at Hvt, in 
Arabian Erak, (Vid. Bib. Or. Tit. Abdalla). He died at the age of 


63, A. Li, 180, (Mirat o0/-adlum). 


4 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAw. AQl 


opinion of Asoo Huneeran, because he was one of 
the immediate followers, and contemporaries, of the 
companions, and opposed them in the futwas. So it 
is in the Aloheet of SURUKHSEE*. 


‘“‘ Tr no precedent be found from Asoo HunEEFAR 
and his disciples, and the case have been determined 
by subsequent lawyers, the Kazee is to abide by the 
judgment of the latter; unless there be a difference in 
their decisions, in which event the preference 1s left to 
his discretion. If not even a modern precedent be 
forthcoming, the Kézee may exercise his own reason and 
judgment; provided he be conversant with jurispru- 
dence, and have consulted with sages of the law. In 
the commentary of Tana’vEE +; it is stated, that if 
the Kaézee pass sentence on his own judgment, in op- 
position to the manifest letter of the law (Nuss), such 
sentence is not valid. But if the sentence be not con- 
trary to the clear letter of the law, and the Kazee, after 
passing it, should change his opinion, his former judg- 
ment is, nevertheless, valid: though his future adjudi- 


— 


a re 


* The author of this work, which is extant, and he'd in high es- 
timation, is stated, in the Kushf 00 Zunoon, to be SHUMS oCL AIM- 
mau, Agoo BukR Monummup, of Swukhs, menti- ned in a former 
note. The Moheet-i Boorhanee, composed by BooRHAN 00” DEEN- 
Maumoop B1n-1 AuMup, is also noticed in the Ku:hf oo Zunoon ; 
but without any other particulais of the autior. He is mentioned 
by D’Hersevort, under the title of Szrakhsi, as having been born 
at Surukhs; and having gone from hence into Syria, where he su- 
perintended a Collegeat /eppo; and died at Damascus, A. H. 571, 
His Moheet is known in India ; aud an incomplete copy is possessed 
by the court of Nizamut Addlut; but it is less esteemed than that of 
SHuMs oot AIMMAH. 

+ Ima’m Asoo Jarur Amup 5B1IN-1 MoHuMMubD, of Taba (a town 
in Upper Egypt) is one among te nuinerous commentators of the Ja- 
wa-i Sugheer of Imam Monummup. He also wrote an abridgement 
of the doctrine of Asoo Hunereran, and his two disciples, intitled 
Mobhtusur-i Tahavee. Both works are often quoted, as authorities, 
but are not known to be now extant. He ts statedin the Kushf vo 
Zunoon, to haye died A, H. 371. 


AQ2 REMARKS. UPON THE 


cations must be regulated by his recent opinion. This 
is the doctrine of the two elders (Suy’xuy’N, viz. 
Asoo Hunzrran and Asoo Yoosur,) and Ima‘ 
Monummoup agrees with them, provided the second: 
opinion of the kazee, in such cases be deemed by others 
preferable to the first. It is further stated iby Tana’- 
VEE), that) if the ancient jurists have formed different 
opinions upon any point, and their successors have 
agreed upon the opinion to be preferred; according 
to the two elders, this agreement does not remove the 
effect of the former difference ; ; but Ima’m Mouum- 
MuD thinks it 1s removed thereby. Suy’kKH oot Is- 
LAM SHUMS OOL AiMMAH SuRUKHSEE, reports, howe- 
ver, that all the disciples of Asoo Hungeran agreein 
opinion upon this point, and that a few of the learned 
only hold the continuance of the original dissent, not- 
withstanding tie subsequent agreement. ‘ If the lawy ers 
-of one age concur in any particular doctrine, and a 
kazee, in after times, differing in opinion from them, 
with an upright intention, pass an opposite judgment ; 
some hold his so doing to be legal, provided there were 
an original difference among the learned upon the doc- 
trine in question; whilst others deem it illegal, not- 
withstanding such eriginal difference 5 but all agree 
upon the illevality of the opposite judgment, supposing 
no difference of opinion to have been at any time en- 
tertained upon the subject. In the Futawa-i Itabiyah* 
it is stated. that if a kazee take an exposition of the law 
from a Mooftee, and differ in opinion from the latter, 
he is to pass sentence in the case according to his own 
judgment; provided he be a person of. understanding 
and knowledge; and that if the sentence be passed 


-— 


_ * The author of this work, Asoo Nusr Anmup 81N-1-Mounum- 
MUD OoL iTaAsee, of Bokharz, is mentioned in the Kushf co Zunoon 
ag haying also writteo a commentary. on the Jamasi sinh of Im- 
am Mogunmup. He died A. H. 585, 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. AQ3 


against his own opinion, in deference to that of the 
Mooftee, it is according to the two, disciples (Sa’ur- 
By N, viz.. Asoo Yoosur and, Ima’m’\Mouummup) 
invalid : in like manner. as in matters.of religious pre- 
ference on presumption, it is forbidden to act upon the 
judgment of others: but Asoo Huneeran holds the 
sentence to be valid in such cases, as it isthe result of 
legal disquisition. Supposing the sazee not to have 
exercised his own reason on the case, at the time of his 
giving judgment according to the opinion of the Moof- 
tee; and that he subsequently. forms an opinion, at va- 
riance with that of the Mooftee; Im’am Monummup 
says, his sentence is liable to abrogation; but Asoo 
Yoosur affirms, it is not affected thereby ; in the same 
manner as it would not be affected if the kazee had 
passed sentence on his own opinion, and had afterwards 
changed that. opinion. The foregoing is copied from 
the Tatarkhaneeyah *.” 


“* Wuen there is neither written law, or concurrence 
of opinions, for the guidance of the Aazee, if he be 
capable of legal disquisition, and have formed_a deci- 
sive judgment on the case, he should carry such judg- 
ment into effect by his sentence, although other scien- 
tific lawyers may differ in opinion from him ; and should 
not be governed by their sentiments, in opposition to 
his own ; for that which, upon deliberate investigation, 
appears to be right and just, is accepted as such in the 
sight of God.. If however the persons, who declare an 
opinion different from that of the sazce be superior to. 
him in science, and he consequently adopt their judg~ 


‘ 


' 4 l 


ee, AE ee ee 


* Vid. B’}. Or. Tatarkhan. An imperfect copy of the work refer- 
red to, entitled Futawa-1 Tatarkhaneeyait, is in the passession of the 
court of Nisemut Adalut. 


2 


AQA REMARKS UPON THE 


ment, questioning the grounds of it, from respect to 
their superior knowledge, ABoo HuneEran admits 
the legality of his proceeding. Asoo Yoosur and 
Im’am Mouummup, on the contrary, do not allow it 
to be legal, unless he ultimately adopt their opinion as 
the result of his own judgment. This, at least, is one 
report: but another says, that the master and his two 
disciples held, respectively, the reverse of what has 
been mentioned. If in any case, the kazee be perplex- 
ed by epposite proofs, let him reflect upon the case, 
and determine as he should judge right: or, for the 
greater certainty, let him consult other able lawyers; 
and if they differ, after weighing their arguments, let 
him decide, as appears just. Should they agree with 
each other, but differ from his own opinion on the case, 
he is to adhere. to the latter until he be convinced it is 
ill founded. and may give judgment accordingly ; but 
not precipitately, or unt:l he has duly weighed and ex- 
amined the whole of the circumstances and evidence. 
Let him not fear or hesitate to act upon the result of 
his own judgment, after a full and deliberate examina- 
tion: but let him beware of a doubtful and conjectural 
decision, without complete investigation, as such will 
not be approved in the account of his actions to God ; 
though, from want of certain information to the con- 
trary, it may pass as a valid sentence among men. 
What has been here said supposes the kdzee to be a 
Moojtahid, or scientific yurist, competent, from his ta- 
lents and learning, to undertake legal disquisition. If 
he be not a person so qualified, but possesses a know- 
ledge and full recollection of the points and cases de- 
termined by the eminent lawyers of his persuasion, let 
hin give judgment according to the tenets of those in 
whom he confides; and whom he believes it right to 
follow. Should he not have a perfect recollection of 
decided Jaw-points, let him act upon expositions of 


the law, by Mvoftees of the orthodox doctrine ; or if — 


. 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 405 


there be only one such Mooftee on the spot, his single 
exposition may be acted upon, without fear of imputed 
deficiency. Itis thus written in the Buddyid *,” 


“ Tue legal meaning of Jjtihéd is the diligent exer- 
cise of the mental faculties in search of the thine de- 
sired ; and the requisite qualification of a Moojtahid, is 
a discriminative knowledge of what is contained in the 
book of God, and in the traditions from the Prophet, 
Telative to legal rules and ordinances (ahkam.) It is 
not essential that he should also know the moral pre- 
cepts and admonitions included therein. It has been 
likewise declared that a person, whose general rectitude 
exceeds his deviations from right, may lawfully prac- 
tise Ijtzhad, or disquisition. But the definition above 
given is accurate: as stated in the Fosool ool Imadee- 
yah-. The most correct account given of a Moojta- 
hid is, that he have a comprehensive knowledge of the 
divine book, with the different interpretations thereof ; 
a full acquaintance with the traditions, their gradations, 
texts, and comments; aright understanding, or power 


. 
. 


SS SS A AT SS 5 NS me nS 


— eee 


* A commentary on the Tohfut ool Fokaha, of SuyKH OLA OODEEN 
Mouvummup, ot Sumurkund, by his pupi!, Asoo Buxr, prn-1 Mu- 
soood, of Kashan, in Persian Irak. The auihor of the Kushf oo” 
Zunoon states the death of the latter to have been A. H. 587; and 
adds tlie master was so well pleased with the comment of his scho- 
lar, that he gave in marriage to the latter his daughter Farrmaun, 
who was also learned in the science of jurisprudence. The entire 
name of the commentary is Budayia oo Sunayia fee turteeh 00 Shu» 
rayia. Both the text and comment are quoted us authorities; but 
neither is known to be now extant in India. 


+ By Azoor ruts Moxummup ptin-1 Anoo Burr, of Murghceo 
nan. He is stated, in the Kushf 00 Zunoon, to have composed tire 
work quoted, A, H. 651, at the Colleze founded by Imap ooze 
Moork, in the suburbs of Sumurkund. It contains torty sections, on 
civil transactions (Moamu/lat) ouly ; and being left incomplete at his. 
death, was finished by his son, JuMAr 00’ DEEN. A copy is among 
the books of the Nizamut Ada/ut, and it is considered a work of ay« 
thority. ; 


Ag6 REMARKS UPON THE 


of just reasoning ; and experience in human affairs and: 
usages. This is quoted from the Kafee *.” 


Havine thus stated the authorities for the Mobum- 
mudan law, and the preference to be observed, or dis- 
cretion allowed, when they difter; it may be proper to 
add a short notice-of the books of jurisprudence which 
are esteemed by the Huneefeeyah sect of Suonee lawyers, 
for practical exposition of the tempordl law ; especially 
such as are extant and govern judicialdecisionsin India. 


Asoo Huneerau himself does not apppear to have’ 
left any work upon jurisprudence +. His legal doc- 
trines were recorded and illustrated by his disciples : 
particularly by Ina’ MonumMup ; whose most cele- 
brated. Jaw-tracts, entitled the Jama 1-sugheer, Jami-i 
kubeer, Mubsoot, Zecadat. and Siyur, levis been already 
noticed, as collectively quoted by the title of Zahir oo” 
ruwayat ¢. ‘These works are described in the kushf oo’ 


—————  - ——ttCi 


—— — —_— — 


* A commentary on the Wafee, and written by the same author 
Imam Apoon Burxat, ABDooLLA BIN-1 AHMOD, common ly cailed 
Hariz oo’ DEEN, of Nuswf, who diced A. H. 710. He als» wrote 
the Kunz oo Dukayik, a work of hich authority, and extant in India ; 
but eclipsed by its. comment the Bufr-i-Ravik, composed in the 
tenth century of the Hijrah by Zyn oor AazIDEEN IgN-1 Nuseem, 
of Egypt. Vid. Tit. Nagim of D’Hersexot, who appears however 
to have stated the year “of “bis death A. H. 670, instead of 970 
which is mentioned more than once in the a“ 00” Zunoon. 


¢ Mr. Hamittron mentions three trea ises, on rhecheatiad subjects, 
as written by Asoo Huneeran: viz. the Mained, Filk-al-elm, and 
Moallim. Of these the Moosnud is described in the Kush ea Zia. 
us a book of traditions. The work apparently intended as the se- 
cond, but misnamed Fi/k-al. elm, instead of Fil kulam ‘on theology,). 


is well known in India, by the name PkA-i-Akbur. The third is ~ e 


unknown. D'Herse.ct, who scems to have been Mr. Haminton’ 
principal authority, mentions the three woiks, under the utie ¢ 


Abou-Hanifah. Shafi 
¢ Mr. Hamirtow (in bis peciiiiaey? pice p- 36.) has aa 


called also the Jama-i-sahech, YeEsoo Monummup e1n YE 


‘ 


vertently stated the Jama-i-kubeer tc be a collection of tradi a 


. 
Baers 
t ; 
in te ; 
5 \ : 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. A407 


Zunoon as being of the first authority for the opi- 
nions of Asoo Hungerau and Apoo Yoosur’*, as 
well asof Ima’m MouummMup. Various commentaries 
are also stated to have been written upon them during 
the early age of the Mohummudan era; and several 
are quoted inthe Putéwa-t Adlumgeeree, compiled in 
thereign of Au’runezez-f, But neither the texts, or 


~_———- 


Termazr. The apparent origin of this mistake has been pointed 
out in a former note. He further remarks that the author of the 
Jama-i-sugheer is uncertain. But independently of numerous other 
authorities, Iuam Mouumuun is expressly cited in the Hidayah as 
the author of both works, and of the Mubsoot, (See Vol. I. of the 
translation, p.153.). Mr, Hamittrom has been led into another er- 
» ror, by supposing the AZubsoot, quoted in the Hidaya, to have been 
written by Fuxx-oo1 Jstam Buzpuvee; whereas, of the two Mub- 
soots cited by the author of the Hidayah, one is the composition of 
Imam MonummuD, above noticed; and the other was composed by 
_ SHums oot AIMMAH SURUKUHSEE, as observed in a preceding note. 
* The only work known to have been composed by Asoo Yoosur 
is an Adub ool Kazee; and the reputation of this has been superceded 
‘ bythe celebrity of Kuusar's tract of the same title, already menti- 
oned. He is said, however, to have furnished his pupil, laram Mo- 
HUMMUD, with notes (ama/ee) for a considerable part of his compo- 
sitions ; particularly for the Jama-i-sugheer. ’ 
> + The priacipal commentators of the “ Jama-i-sugheer’’ are 
‘Shums ool Aimmah Surukhsee ; Aboo Bukr Ahmud Razee, commonly - 
€alled Jussas, (the plasterer ;) Aboo Jafur Ahmud Tahavee ; Fukr 
ool Islam Alee Bazduvee; Aboo Nusur Ahmud aol Itabee of Bo- 
khatra; Aboo'l Lys Nusur, of Sumurkund; Aboo Nusur Ahmud, 
Isbeejabee ; Husun bia-i-Mansoor, of Ouzjund, better kaown by 
the appellation of Kazee Khan; Taj-oo’ deen Abd ool Ghufur 
_ Kurduree ; Zaheer 00 deen Ahmud Tumurtashee; and Kazee Mu- 
saood, of Yuzd; and Aboo aced Mootuhur, of the same city; 
whose commentary is quoted by the title of “* Tuhaeeb.” The Se- 
ven persons first mentioned have, also written comments on the * Ja- 
_ Ma-i-kubeer;” besides Kazee Aboo Zyd Abdoollah, of Duboos: 
he Boorhan’oo’ deen Mahmood, author of the “ Moheet-i-Boorhanee ae 
_ Boorhan oo’ deen Alee, author of the “ Hidayah ;’? Shums ool Aim- 
a Mobummud, called Hulwaee (the confectioner ;) Ibn-i ubduk 
_ Yoorjapee ; and Jumal oo’ deen Mahmud, of Bokhara, whose com- 
mon designation is Liuseeree (the imat-maker ;) and whose second 
commentary is often quoted by the name of “ Tukreer.” The 
*Tukreer’’ and ‘* Doorar’’ are also known comments on the 
work in question; the former by Abool Abbas Ahmud; the latter 
by Nasiroo’ deen Mohtummud, of Damascus. 
‘VoL. X.- Kk 


9 


¢ 


498 REMARKS UPON THE © | 


comments, are now known to be in India, except an 
imperfect copy of the commencement of Ka‘zer Kuan, 


on the Jéméi-sugheer, which was obtained from the | 


library of the Nuwab of Oudh ; and is in the possession 
of the Nizamut Adalut. Nov is there a treatise on the 
Mosulman law, written during the four first centuries 
of the Hirah, at present, in the possession. of any per- 
son, from whom enquiry could be made upon the sub- 
ject at Calcutta *. 


Tux oldest work on jurisprudence in the possession 
of the law officers of the Nizémut Adalat, and other 
learned Mosuluian lawyers, in Calcutta, is the Mokhtu- 
sar ool Kudooree, a compendium, or general law-tract, 
composed by Ima’m Axsoot Hose’n Aumup, of Ku- 
door, a quarter of Bughdad, who died A.H. 428. It is 
often referred to in the Hidéyah, and described in the 
Kushfoo Zunoon as a book of authority in general use, 
and held in the highest estimation. It is said to con- 
tain twelve thousand cases ; and has been illustrated in 


* Tt does not appear that any work on jurisprudence was pub- 
lished during the first century of the Hijrah : or that any was writ- 
ten on the dectrines of Aboo Huneefah, during the second ¢entury, 
except the treatises, which have been noticed, of his two disciples 
Aboo Yoosuf, and Imam Mohummud. In the third and fourth 
centuries, besides commentaries on the works of the latter, (which 
as fundamental authorities, are denominated Osool or Original) the 
following law-tracts are stated to haye been composed; and are 
briefly described in the ‘* Kushi oo’ Zunoon.’’ ‘An’** Adub oel Ka- 
zee” and ‘ Nuwadir,” by Mohummud bin-i-Sumaah; who died A. 
H.233. Another treatise, of the former title, by Abeo Hazim Abd 
oo! Humeed, who diedin' 292. Several treaiises of the latter title, 
by Ibn-i-Roostum, Hishain, and others, Also books of both titles, 
and a compendium of the law, entitled ‘* Mokhtusur-i Tahavee,’” 


or Ss ee 4 sk 


by boo Jafur. Ahmud of Taba in Egypt who died A. H. 871; . 
and who seems to be the author erroneously cited by the name of” 


Aboo Faka, in Mr. Hamilton's Pre]. Dis, p.38, Another compen- 
dium, entiied ** Mokhtusur-i Kurkhee,” by Aboo’l Hosen Abdool- 
Jah of Kurkh (a ward in the city of Bughdad) who died A. H. 340. 


Anda “ Nuwadir,’’ with two ,other books, entitled ** Ouzoon” »: 


and * Nuwazil”, by Aboo’l Lys Nusur, of Sumurkund, 


vey 
,° 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. AQQ 


numerous commentaries ; among which several are quo- 
ted inthe Fwutéwd-i Adlumgeeree; but are not now 
known to be extant in Hindostan *, 


Tue other books in actual use for expounding the 
Mohummudan law are of two descriptions, The first 
consists of texts and comments, which, in a scientific 
method, state the elements and principles of the law; 
establish them by proofs and reasoning ; and illustrate 
the applieation of them by select cases, real or sup- 
posed; suchas the Hidayah, Kunz 00 dukdyah, Vikdyah, 
Nikayah, and Ashbah o' Nuzxdyir, with their respective 
commentaries. ‘Lhe second description is commonly, 
but not always, distinguished by the title of Pusdwé ; 
and is, for the most part, a collection of law cases, ar- 
ranged under proper heads, with a short recital of facts 
and circumstances, without arguments, and with autho- 
rities only -for the cases as quoted; being intended 
chiefly for practical purposes ; whereas the elementary 


* The titles and authors of the principal commentaries are as fol- 
lows. The ‘Siraj-i Wuhbaj,” and ‘* Jouburah-i-nyyirah” (the 
latter abridged from the former) by Aboo Bukr bin-i-Alee, com- 
monly called Hudadee (the blacksmith). Ahmud bin-i-Mohummud 
also made an abridgement of the ‘¢ Siraj-i-Wuhhaj,” which is quoted 
by the title of “ Bu vur-i-Zakhir.””?’ The “ Mooltumus ool ikhwan” 
by Aboo'l Mazlee, of Ghuzpa. The “ Kifayah,” by Shums ool 
aimmah [smaee!, of Byhuk. ‘The ‘‘ Biyan,” by Mohummud bin-i-« 
rusool of Toukat. ‘J he “‘ Lobab’’ by Julal aboo Saeed Mootuhur, 
of Buzdah. The ‘‘ Yunabee” by Budr oo’ deen Mohummud, of 
Ushbeeleeah. The ‘* Kholasut 00’ dulaeel,’’ by Hosam oo’ deen 
Alee, of Mukkah, The last mentioned commentary is highly 
praised, for its utility, in the <* Kushf 00’ Zunoon,” and is stated-to 
have been further improved by the annotations of Ibn-i Subeeh oo’ 
deen Osman, awatiye of Tartary, Mr. Hamitton, (in his Prel. 
Disc. p. 36, 37,) has erroneously mentioned the commentary ‘of 
- Kudcoree, as quoted in the, “ Hidayah,” instead of his Mokbtusur.” . 
_ He appears to have made a further mistake in stating the commen- 
tary ot Kadooree to be about the “* Adub ool Kazee” of Aboo Yoo- 
‘suf, whereas 00 comment of that work is noticed in the “ Kushf co’ 
Zuneoon ;” but Kudooree is specitied as one of the commentators of 
the ‘* Adub ov] Kazee’’ of Khusat, mpnOR as in a.preceding note 


500 REMARKS UPON THE 


works first mentioned are more calculated for study and 
instruction. The Futawa i Kazee Khan by Fukr oo” 
DEEN Husun, of Ovvajund in Furghdnd, who was con 
temporary with the author of the Aiddyah, and whose 
collection is esteemed of equal authority with that ce- 
jebrated work, must, in some measure, be excepted 
from the above remark ; as it illustrates many cases by 


the proofs and reasoning upon which the decision of 
them is founded *. 


Tae other Futéwa extant in India, besides those al- 
ready mentioned in the preceding pages and notes, are 
the Khusénul ool Mooftieen, Futéwa-i- Buzdzivah, Futé- 
wa-i-Nukshbundivah, Mun’ hool ghufar, and Mokhtar ool 
Futéwa by unknown authors ; the Foosvol-i- Isturooshee, 
by Monummup Bin-1 Maumoop, who compiled it 
in the 625th year of the Aijrah-+; the Futdwé-i Ibra- 
heemshéhiyah, by Sia’HaB oo’ DEEN AHMUD, a native 
of Hindosostan, who composed it for SoonTa’n IrnpRa’- 
HEEM SHA4‘H, at Jounpoor, in the gth century of the 


——— ee 


* A complete and accurate copy of the ‘‘ Futawa-i Kazee Khan,” 
sunposed ta have formerly belonged to the royal library, is among 
the books of the Wixzmué Adalut, obtained from Lukinow. The 
author of the “Kushf oo’ Zunoon”’ and the present Kazee ool 
Koozai, concur ta extolling this work, as replete with cases of com- 
mon eccurience, and consequent'y ef particular utility for practical 
reference. A.digest (“ Moruttub’) of the cases recited in it is al- 
go mentioned in the ** Kushf oo’ Zunoon,” as made in the seyenth 
century of the Hijrah, by a learned Syrian, named Mohummud bin- 
i- Moostufaafunder, and entitled ‘* Wubhajoo’ Shureeut.” 

+ The court of Nizamut Adalut haye a complete copy of this com- 
pilation, presented to them, with six other law books purchased at 
Lukhnow, by the Kazce ov! Koozxat, Mohummud Nujm oo’ deen. 
It consists of thirty sections, upon ** Moamalat” only: like the 
** Foosool col Imadeeyah,” beforementioned. The contents of 
_ both were arranged and incorporated in a collection, entitled ‘* Ja- 
~ m-0o! Fossoolyn,’”” by Budr oo’ deea Mahmood; better kuown by 

the name of [bni-Kazgee-i-Sumawunah, who died A. H.823, The 

author of the ‘* Kushf oo’ Zunoon’’ states this work t> be in gre: t 
estimation with the learned, as a civil digest; but though often 
quoted as an authority, it is not Knowa to be at present in India. 


- 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 501 


Aiijrah*; and the Fiitawé-i Adlumgeeree, compiled at 
Dehh, by order of the Emperor Aa’numcGeEER) in the 
!1th year of his reign, corresponding with A. H. 1067. 


Tue Aidayah is so well known, from the English 
version of it, made by Mr. Cuartes Hamitton, and 
publishedin the year 1791, that it will be unnecessary 
to. say much of it. The 4dzee ool koozdt, im his cata- 
logue of books already adverted to, describes it in the 
following terms. “The Aidayak is a commentary 
upon the Bidayut ool Mcobtudee, and both the text and 
comments were composed by Say’xu Boorna’n 00’ 
DEEN AEEE, son of Anoo Buxr, of Murgheenan, who 
lived to the -age of sixty-two; and, after employing 


thirteen years in the composition of the latter work, - 


departed from this world A. H. 598. The general 
arrangement, and division of it, are adopted from the 


Jama-i-Susheer of Ima’mM Moxwummup. It is cele- 
fo) 


brated amongst the learned for its selection of law cases, 
and connection of them with the proofs and arguments 
by which they have been determined. Wherefore ineye- 
ry age it has been esteemed by lawyers ; many of whom 
have written comments and annotations upon it.” It 
is spoken of in nearly the same language, by the author 


of the Kushf 00 Zuncon who adds, “ it is a rule observed 
by the composer of this work to state first the opinions 


and arguments of the two disciples (Azoo Yoosur and 
Ima’m ‘Mouummoup) ; afterwards the doctrine of the 


~ 


@Jbraheem Shah reigned at Jounpeor (curing the confus'eu of 
the Empire of Dehly, consequent to the invaston of TLymoaor} for 


© forty years, and died A. H. 844. The court of Nizatmut Adalus 


possess an entire copy of the work-tecierred to: but it is a mixcd 
collection, aad not deemed authoritative. : a 


iy, See 


502 REMARKS UPON THE 


great Ima’m (Asoo Hunerran); and then to expa- 
tiate on the proofs adduced by'the latter, in such 
manner as to refute any opposite reasoning on the part 
of the disciples. Whenever he deviates from this rule 
it may be inferred that he*inclines to the opinion of 
Avzoo Yoosur and Ima’m Monummop. It 1s also his 
practice to illustrate the cases specified in the Jama-z- 
Sugheer, and by Kupooree: intending the latter, 
whenever he uses the expression he has suid in the book. 
In praise of the, Hidayah, it has been declared, hike the 
koran, to have superseded all previous books on the 
law; that all persons should remember the rules 
prescribed in it; and that it should be followed as a 
guide through he * This eulogium on the Hidayah 
is confirmed in a paper wntten by Mou*Lavez Mo- 
HUMMUD Ra’snrp, one'of the Mooftees of the Supreme 
Court of yids and Courts of Sudr: Deewanee and 
Nigamut Adilut, as well as one of the most learned 
Mosulmans in Jzdia; who remarks on the text, and 
some of the principal comments, to the following effect. 
‘““ No text or comme ntary, now extant, can be com- 
pared with the Afddyah as a digest of approved law 
cases ‘Videheeed by the proofs sell arguinents which es— 
para them. It istherefore, with its comments, fit to 
be the standard of legal aeGbn in the present times. 
Many commentaries have been written upon it: but 
four only, the Néhivah, Indéyah, Kifayah and Futh ool 
kudeer, are forthcoming in Bengal. The Nthayah was 
first composed: and has superior credit as being. the 
original from which the others have borrowed. But 
the author of the Inayah has merited esteem by his 
studious analysis; and interpretation of the letter and 
meaning of Hideyah. - The kifayah also deserves 


coinmendation, from its concise statement of the sub- 


stance of Oak commentaries, as well as from some 
additions to them. And the Futh ool kudeer is pre- 
ferable to the whole, as an n ample collection of CASES, 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 503 


(rendering it equal in-this respect to a Futawa) 
expressed with suitable brevity of language *,” 


Ture Kunz oo dukayik has been already mentioned, 
as composed by Ha’riz 00 DHEN, author of the Kafec 
and Wajve. it is a short gereral treatise of law, used 


oO 


— 


* The “ Nihayali” was composed by Hosam oo’deen Hosen Ib- 
ni Alee, said to have been a pupil of Boorban oo ‘deen, author of 
the “ Hidayah.” ‘The latter having, from some unknown cause, 
omitted the law of inheritance, it has been added by the commen- 
tator. But this part of the “ Nihayah’’ does not appear to have 
obtained equal celebrity with the “ Fura, €cZ-i-sirajee-yah” men- 
tioned in a former note. The “ Kusbt 00’ Zunoon’”’ notices two 
commentaries of the title of ‘‘Inayah ;’’ the first of which was 
commenced by Abool Abas Ahmud, a Kazee in Egypt, who died 
A. H. 710; and was completed in the succeeding century of the 
Hijrah by Kazee Saeed oo deen, of Dubur. The second, which is 
that referred to as extant in India, was composed by Shykh Akmul 
oo’ deen Mohummud, who died A. H.786; [mam oo’ deen Ameer 
Katib Bin-i Ameer Omur, who had previously written anather com- 
mentary entitled ‘‘ Ghayutool biyan’’ after employing himself for 
twenty-seven years at Cairo, and other places, to render his second 
work more complete, finished the ‘‘ Kifayah,”’ at Damascus, in the 
747th year of the Hijrah. The “ Futh ool Kudeer” is stated to 
have been commenced by its author Kumal 09’ deen Mohummuad 
of Seewas, commonly called lbn-i-Homam, in the 29th year of the 
Hijrah ; and to have occupicd a considerable part of the remaining 
‘period of his life, which was terminated in 861. Other commen-~ 
taries upon the “‘ Hidayah’’ are mentioned in the ‘* Kushf 00’ Zn- 
noon 3” but as they are not procurable in Judia, it will be sudicient 
to notice the “Fuwaeed,’? by Humeed oo deen Alee, of Bokhara, 
who died AJH. 667 ; and is supposed hy some ‘to have been the 
first commentator; but his tract, being extremely brief, his been 
superseded by the subsequent comments: the “ Miarai oo dirayut,” 
by Kuwam oo’ deen Mohummud, also of Bokhara, who died A H. 
747. and whose commentary is quoted in the “ Aalumgeeree :”” 
and the “Odah’? by Kumal oc’ deen Mohummud, also qu ted; 
though it is described as ratner en abstract, than a commen:; b:- 
~ ing a methodical collection of the law. cases contained in the ** H:- 
dayah,”’ without the arguments stated in proof of them. The Ni- 
hayab oo! Kifayah,’’ by Tajoo’ Shureeyut Omur, is aisO Men’ o ved 
in the “ Kusbf oo’ Zunoon”’ as a comnentary oy the “* Hdavsn;”’ 
but the Kazee ool Koozgt, in describing an im serfect copy of «t, be- 
longing to the Nizamut Adalut, terins it a ‘* Hasheeah,” or m:rgi- 
nal note book. An incomplete copy of the ‘ Kifayah”’ is clso among 
the law books of that court. 

Kk4 


504 REMARKS UPON THE 


in Mosulman colleges, as an elementary book of 
instruction ; but superseded, as a book of reference for 
legal exposition, by its commentaries; of which the - 
following are extant in Jndiad. The Tubieen ool hukayik, 
by Buxr oo’ DEENABoo MonumMup Asman of Zyl, 
who died A. H. 743. His comment is valued by the 
followers of Asoo Fiunrgran, as containing a com- 
plete refutation of the opposite doctrine of SHAFIIEE. 
The Buhr oo’ rayth, by the learned Zy’n ooL AABIDEEN- 
Ipn-1 Nusesm of Egypt, left incomplete, at his death, 
A. Hi. 970; and -unequally finished by his brother 
SIRAJ 00’ DEEN Omur, who also wrote a commentary 
entitled the Nuhrifayiz, but of inferior merit to that of 
Zy'n oot AA’BIDEEN; which is held in the utmost** \. 
estimation : and 18 spoken of tn the kushf 00° Zunoon — 
as equalled only by the Puth ool Kudeer; 1pn-1 Ho-= 
MA’m’s commentary onthe Hidayah. The Mutliii 


_ fayik or, as more generally called A zee by RupR oo’ 


DEEN Monum™MuD Ay NEE, of Dubur in Aradia. -This 
commentary is also esteemed, as containing an ample 
collection of law cases: and though surpassed, in this - 
respect, by the Brhr-irayik, it has the advantage of 
having been brought to a conclusion by the author; 
whose erudition obtained him the title of U/amah, in 
common with Zy’n oot AA’BIDEEN*, , 


es 


* Ansther commentary on the ‘‘ Kunz co dukayik,” entitled 


“‘Maadun,” is known in [ndia. But ihe name of the author hag. 
net been ascertained. The “Fezah’? by Shykh Yahya, and | ir’ 
« Rumz ool Hukayik” by Kazee Budr oo dcen Mahmeod, are alsof e 
noticed, with the names of some other: commentators, in th ‘3 


“Kushifoeo’ Zuroon ;’’ but they are not celebrated, or quoted 
as authorities. The court of Maomut Adalut possess anincomplete 
copy of the ‘ Buhroo’ rayik ;’” en which the Kazee ool Koozat re= Be 
marks (in his catalogue) that ‘it comprises a compilation of cases Sa 
general and particular; with the useful result of tke author's : 

searches upon a variety of legal questions; and is received a 
hentic by ibe followers of Abeo Huneeiah in every city of Isl 


- 


| 


i] 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 508 


Tue text of the Vikdyah, composed in the 7th cen- 
tury of the Hyrah by Boorwa’N 00” SHUREEUT 
Maumoop, son of the first Sudr 00 Shucett like that 
of the Kunz oo’ Dukayik, hasecbeen superseded, for legal 
consultation, by its more extensive commentaries ; 
especially by that of the second Sudr oo’ Shureett, 
Osy’p OOLLAH BIN-1-Musaoop, who died A, H. 
750; distinguished by the title of Shurh-i-Vikayah ; 
and combining, with the original treatise, an ample 
comment in illufiration of it. But both are used in 
Mosulman Colleges, for instruction in the science of 
law, preparatory to the study of the Aidédyah ; upon 
which the Vikdaygh is founded ; being, as its title at 
Jenoth imports, (Vikdayut 00° riwayah, fee Musaeel i 
Fiidéyah ;\ the Custos, guardian, or preserver, of the 
reports of cases in the Hiddyah, Other commentaries 
are mentioned in the Kushf oo’ Zunoon; but they are 
not known to. be extant in India; or quoted as 
authorities. * 


* Numerous Ruwashee, or books of annotations, have also been 
written on the text and commentaries; of which the most cele- 
brated is the Hasheeah of Yoosur Bin-1 JonybD, commonly called 

. AKKeEE Cuyuuree. This work, entitled Zukheerut oof Okba is in 
the possession of the court of Nizemut Adalut, who have alsoa 
correct and complete copy of the Shurh-i-Vikeyas. It may be 
useful to add that a Persian translation of the latter has been made 

. a person named Agp cot Hux Susawat, of Surhind; who in 
_~his preface, states it to have been completed A. H. 1076; during 

_ , the reignofAurunezes. A copy of this yersion isin my possession. 

_ The language is not elegant; but it bears the character of accuracy ; 

_ and with a careful revision, it may deserve publication. In bulk it 

does not much exceed a fouith of the Persian version of the 
| Hiddyah; made by the former chief Kazee, Guotam Yuuya Kuan, 

_ and his learned associates, employed for that purpose under the pa- 
tronageof Mr. Hasrines; a reviséd edition of which, under the 

uperintendence of Mou’javee Mohumimud Rashid, is now printing, 
at my suggestion, by order of Government ; and besides facilitating 
the study of the drabic text, will tend to explain and correct the 
English translation; which, though on the whole deserving of 
praise, has been found in some parts inaccurate, and in many less 
intelligible than the Persian version. Jt may be proper to add in this 


506 REMARKS UPON THE | i 


Tue Vikayah was abridged from the Vikdyah by the 
second Supr oo SuvureEvr, already mentioned as the 
principal commentator on the Vikévah. Vt is also 
called Mokhtusur 2 Vikayah, and used as a book of 
instruction, the rules and cases contained in it being 
committed to memory by the-studeat. But its utility, 
for legal reference, 1s superseded by its commentaries ; 
of which there are extant, composed by AxBoo’L 
Movxa’r1m BIN-t Aspoottan, A. H. 907; by 
AxspooLt ALEE,Bin-1-Mouummup BrrsinpDEkg, inthe 
year 937; and by SuuMms 00’ DEEN MoxnumMup, of 
Khoristan, in 941. The wholeof these comments are 
held in esteem; but the latter, entitled Jama oo’ 
rumooz, is the most copious. * | 4 


Tue Ashbch 6 Nuzayir is an elementary treatises 
composed in the tenth century of the Hijrah, by 
Zys OoL AA’BIDEEN, already mentioned as the 
author cf the Buhr-i-dyik. It is stated inthe Kushf 00 
Zunoon. to consist of seven sections, (denominated 
fun); the two first of which relate»to the general 
principles and rules of law; and the kdzee ool koozat. 
in describing a copy of it, which belongs to the 
Nizdmut Adélut, observes, that ‘* although a short tract, 
it contains legal principia, from which numerous cases 
may be deduced ; wherefore to able lawyers it is of the 
utmost advantage.” Thirteen commentaries upon it 
are noticed in the Kushf oo’ Zunoon, but none of 


them are known to be in India. + 


. place, that in noticing, for obvious reasons, what has appeared 
upon inquiry to be erroneous or deficient in tie late Mr. Hamilton's 
translation of the ‘* Hidayah,’’ no intention whatever is entertained 
of impeaching the personal merits or reputation of that gentleman ; 

who laboured under a material disadvantage in not haying completed 
his arduous and laudable undertaking in /idia. a 

* Complete copies of the three commentaries are among the 
books procured from Lukhnow, fordhe court of Madmut Adalut.” 

+ Mou‘lavee Mobumud Rashid possesses two commentaries on 
the Ashba o Nuza’,yir, one of which, called the“ Ghumzool Oyoon, 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 507 


BesiveEs the texts and commentaries above described, 
as in actual use for legal expositions, the Mujmdé oo 
buhryn, a text book composed by Mozurrer oo’ 
DEEN Aumup, of Bughdad, A. H. 690, 1s also in the 
possession of a learned Mosulman in Calcutta, * 
together with one of its commentaries, written by 
App oo’ Lurrerr Brn-1-Agp oan AZzEEz; but as 
no other copy of either the text or comment is known 
to be forthcoming; they cannot be in general use.'t 


' 
. 


ee 


Was written by Sy,yid ahmud bin-i-Mohuminud Humayee. The 
author of the other is unknown. 

* Moitlavee Kureem oo deen, by whom (in concert with Moi- 
layee Mohummud Ra’shid) I have been materially assisted in 
preparing the short account given of books on the Mohummudan 
Jaw ; and who bas made for me a complete Peisian translation 
from the Arabic original of the “ Kushf 09 Zuncon.” He received 
the ‘* Majma-ool bubry’n,’’ and its commentary, from Shura‘iut 
Mohummud Khan, MeerMoonshee to the Nuwab Mozaffar Jung ; 
‘who supported a Mudrusah at Moorshidabad, in which Kureem 
eo deen was Modurrir or Lecturer, 

T In addition to the books on jurisprudence, which have been 
noticed ; the following are described in the “ Kusbf 00 Zunoon ;” 
but none of them are known to be at present in Hindostan. The 
«© Ajnas’ and ‘* Akkam,” by Abodl Abas Ahmud Natiffe, who 
died A. H. 446; the ‘* Tujnees 0 Muzeed”’ by the auther of the 
“© Hidayah;” the ‘* Ha’vee ool Huseeree” by Mohummud-bin-i- 
Ibraheem, of Huseer, who died A. H. 565. The ‘‘ Futawa-i-koo- 
bra,” by Shaheed Hisam oo deen Omur, who suffered martyrdom in 
the 536th year of the Hijrah. ‘The ‘* Kholasut ool futawa,” by 
Tahir bin-i-Ahmud, of #okhara, who died A. H. 542, The 
Mooltukut,” by Nasiroo’ deen, Abool Kasim, of Sumurkund; 
finished A. H. 549. The “ Havee ool Koodsee,” by Kazee Jumal 
oo deen Ahmud ot Ghuzna, who lived in the latter part of the 6th 
century Oftbe Hijrah, A. ‘* Tulkhees” (abridgment) of the Jama- 
i-kubeer,” by Kumal 00’ deen Mohuinmud, of Khilat, who died A. 
H. 652. The “ Mokhtar,” and its commentary, the ‘* Ikhtiyar,’’ 
by Mujd oo’ deen Abdoollah of Muosul, supposed to have flou- 
rished in the 7th century of the Hijrah. The ‘ Ghoorur oo! Ah- 
kam,” and its comnyent, the * Doorur od] hookham,’’ by Mohum- 
mud bin-i Furamoorz, commonly calied Moolla Khoosre, who died 
A. H. 687; and the ‘* Mooltuca om} Abhoor,” by Ibraheem bin i- 
Mohummud Chulpee (a Syrian) finished A. H. 923. Of these 
’ works the three last mentioned only ar: text books. The remain- 
der (excepting the abridgments of Imam Mobhummud’s great 


ee 


ee —— oe 


508 ERMARKS UPON THE 


Or the books of Fuséwa which have been mentioned, 
none appear to. require further notice, except the 
Futdwas-i Aélumgeeree. Mr, Hamitron, by an ex- 
traordinary mistake, has stated_this work to have been 
© composed in the Persian language *, by the autho- 
rity -and under the inspection of the Emperor 
Av’RuNGzE'B;”’ whereas it is well known to-have been 
written in Arabic, the usual language of Mohummudan 
Jaw and science; and to have been translated info 
Persian, by order of the Etnperor’s daughter, the 
Princess ZEB 00’ Nisa’. Several coptes of the Arabic 
original arein Calcutta; and some imperfect copies of 
the Persian version ;. or rather of parts of it-’. In the 


se 


*s Jama,”’) are collections of cases, of the nature of “ Futawa.” 
A fur:her collection, entitled ‘* Kinuzanut ool futawa,’’ by Ahbmud 
bin-i-Mohummud, is among the books of the Nizamut Adalut, and 
supposed by the ‘‘Kazee ool Koozai” to have’been compiled to- 
wards the end of the 8th century of the Hijrah. Also a Persian 
- compilation, named ‘* Futawa-i-Kurakhanee,” the cases included in 
which were collected by Moolla Sudr oo’ deen bin-1 Yakood, and 


arranged, some years afier his death, by Kura Khan, in the reigy - 


of Sooltan ula oo’deen, The Kazee ool Koozat has likewise pre 
sented tothe Nizamut Adalut a sinatl Persian book, entitled Mokht: 

ool Ikhtiyar, written A. H, 271, by Ikhtiyar son of Ghyas ac 
een Husun ; containing, besides the duties of a kdzce and moltee, 
legal forms of various descriptions for practical use. 

* Preliminary Discourse, p. 44, 

+ Mr. H. Colebrooke possesses a folio yolume, containing about 
half of the entire translation, from the commencement to the book 
vpon evidence. Ihave also a volume which contains from the 
book on marriage, to that upon endowments, or religious and cha- 
ritable appropriations. And, at my suggestion, the Goyernor Ge- 
neral in Council has been pleased to instruct the Resident at Dehly 

“to endeavour to procure two or more complete copies of the Persian 
version made by order of Zeboo Nisa, with a view to prepare a col- 
lated transcript, which may be hereafter printed and published, 1 
have likewise a correct Persian translation of the book on “ Jinayat,” 
or offences against the petson, made for me, a few years since, 


hy Moulayee Saeed co deen, (now law officer of the Burely court of - 


circuit) under the-superintendence of bis father, the Kazee ool 


* Koozat, who has added notes of explanation where they appeared — 


requisite. This version will probably be printed and publisied, as 
it well deserycs to be: 2 


AUTHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 509 


catalogue of books appertaining tothe Nisamut Adalut 
(among which is an incomplete copy of the Arabic 
Putavia-i Aalumgeeree) the kasee ool kooxat describes 
this work in’ the following terms :—‘* It was com- 
menced A. H. 1007, corresponding with the tith 
year of Aa’LuMG#ER’s reign, Credible persons have 
related, that when Merrza’ Ka’zim, author of the 
Adlumeeernamah, had finished, and presented to his 
Majesty, the history of the first ten years of the reign, 
it occurred to the King that there were many books 
of history inthe world, and that from the inclination 

which mankind have to read such books, they are 
composed without orders: from Kings and Nobles; 
that the foundation of good government is justice ; 
and that this depends upon a knowledge of the 


ordinances ‘of the law; that although the tearted a 


every age had compiled expositions of the law, 
yet. in some instances the examples were so dis- 
persed that they ‘could not readily be found, when 
required ; and in others, the cases of less weight were 
“not distinguished from those adjudged to be authorita~ 


tive ; whilst some decisions also had been unnecessarily | 


‘repeated ; and’ others, though requisite, had been 
‘Omitted ; wherefore it was proper that, in the present 
reign,'a new Futawa should be compiled, to be ar- 
ranged in the most approved manner ; and °t “contain 
the niost authoritative decisions of law, including every 
useful casey which had been adjudged, without t repeti— 
tion or omission. As soon as the King had formed 
this design, he ordered Merrza’ Kazi to discontinue 
‘writing the Aalumgeernamah ; and not to'take in furtife 
the sum allotted for it from the royal treasury. “He 
“then assembled a'number of eminent lawyers froin the 
“Punjau, the-environs of Skahjahan abad, Akbur-abud. 
Vah-abad, and the Dukhun; and employed them in 
compiling ce us a which was aiterwards called the” 


510 RAMARKS UPON THE 


Futawa-i Aalumgeeree. In truth no other Futawa is 
equal to it in excellence. It has become celebrated 
in every city, as well in Arabia as in other countries; 
and is termed at Mecca the Futawa-i Hind, or Indian 
expositions. It is.esteemed by the learned of every 
country, and is received as an authority for law deci- 
sions in this empire.”’ It is added, that lacks of rupees 
are said to have been disbursed instipendsto the learned — 
compilers, the purchase of books, and other expences 
attending the execution of the work. 


Tse Futewa-i Aalumgeeree being four times the 
size of the Hiddéyah, and containing little more than a 
recital of Jaw cases, without the arguments and proofs, 
which are diffusively stated in the Aidayah it must pos- 
sess an advantage over that work, for practical use, in 
its greater number of cases and examples. On the 
other hand, the full illustration of the law, its principles, 
and the different doctrines promnlgated by some of 
the most eminent expounders of it, which distinguish 
the fidayah, as an original composition by a celebra~ 
ted jurist, who, from his superior knowledge and qua- 
lifications, was esteemed a Mojtahid, is also above that 
of the Futawa-t-Aalumgeeree ; which, howevervaluable, 
as the latest and most comprehensive collection of 
cases, is held in less comparative estimation, from its 
being a modern compilation, made by several persons, 
of different judgment, and unequal ability. Without 
contrasting their respective merits, however, the one 
is universally admitted to be a most useful supplement 
to the other ; and a conversance in both, or an easy 
means of reference to them in cases of judicial occur- 
rence, must be of essential use towards the due admi- 
nistration of the Mohummudan law, as far as that law is 


a 


ATHORITIES OF MOSULMAN LAW. 511 


declared to be the established rule and standard of 
decision *. 


* Mr. Hamitton’s translations of the ‘ Hidayah’’ renders it 
unnecessary to state the general contents of that work. The 
«« Futawa-i-Aalumaceree,” consists of 61 books (kitab) in the fol- 
lowing order :—1,'Taharut, purification. 2, Sulat, prayer. 3, Zukat, 
alms, 4, Som, fasting. 5, Hujj, pilgrimage. 6, Nikah, marriage. 
7, Ruzaa, fosterage. 8, Tulak, divorce. 9, Utak, manumission. 
10, Ayman, vows. 11, Hoodood, fixed penalties. 12, Surikah, 
larceny. 13, Seyur, institutes or regulations concerning infidels, 
apostates, apostates, and rebels. 14, Lukeet, foundlings. 15, 
Looktah,troves. 16, Ibak, absconding of slayes. 17, Mufkood, 
missing persons. 18, Shirkut, partnership. 19, Waukf, endow- 
ment; or religious and charitable appropriation. 20, Bya, sale. 
21, Surf, exchange of coin or bullion. 22, Kufalut, bail. 23, 
Huwalut, transfer of debts» 24, Adub ool Kazee, the duty a 
Kazee. 25, Shahadut,eyidence. 26, Roojcoa un Shahadut, re- 
traction of evidence. 27, Vukalut,avency. 28, Dawa, claim. 29, 
Ikrar, acknowlegdment. 30, Sool, composition. 31, Mozarubut, 
copartnership in stock and labour, 32. Wudee, ut, deposit. 33, 
Adeeyut, lending without return. 34, Hibah, gift. 35, Harah, 
hire and fgrm. 36, Mokatub, covenanted slave. 37, Wala, con- 
nection of emancipator and freedman ; or of patron and client. 38, 
ikrab, compulsion. 39, Hujr, inhibition and disqualification, 
40, Mazoon, licensed slave,and ward, 41, Ghusb, usurpation. 42, 
Shoofah, right of vicinity. 43, Kismut, partition. 44. Mozaraut, 
compact of cultivation. 45, Moa,amulut or Mosakat, compact of 
gardening. 46, Zubayith, animals slain by Zubh, or incision of the 
throat. 47, Oazheeyah, sacrifice. -48, Kurahiyut, abomination, 
disapprobation, or censure. 49, Tuhurre, presumptive preference. 
50, Ibya ool muwat, cuitivation of waste land. 51, Shirb, right 
to water. §2, Ushrihab, intoxicating liquors. 53, Syd, game. 
54, Ribn, pledge. 55, Jinayat, offences against the person. 56, 
Wosaya, testamentary bequests. 57, Mukazir o Sijillat, judicial 
proceedings and decrees. 58, Shooroot, legal forms, 50, Hiyu,} 
legal devices. 60, Khoonsa, hermaprodite, 61, Fura,eez, rules 
of inheritance. 

Of the sixty-one books enumerated, fifty-five correspond ~with 


similar titles in the Hidayah. Two other books in the latter work, - 


entitled ‘« Diyut,” (the fine of blood), and ** Mu,aakil” (exaction of 
the fine of blood), are included in the “ F.Aalumgeeree,” as chapters 
of the beok of Jinayat. The book of ‘“ Shirb,’’? in the <P, 
_Aalumgeeree,” forms asection of the book entitled ‘* Ihyaool mv- 
wat” in the “Hidayah.” The remaining five books ofthe «* Futawa-i- 
Aalumgeeree,” viz, those entitled -** Tuhurree,” © Mahazr e 


‘ 


512 REMARKS, &c:; 


Sijillat,’” ** Shooroot,” ‘* Hiyul,’’ and “ Fura,eez,” are not included 
in the “* Hidayah.” 

The general division and arrangement of both the ‘* Hidayah,” 
and “ Aslumgeerce,’’ appear to have been adopted from the 
«© Jama-i-Sucheer,’ of Imam Mohummud. The same order is 


also observed in most other works written by the followers of Aboo 


Huneefah ; and the author of the “ Buhr-oo-rayik,” has endeavoured 
to shew to that it is founded on a princip!e of successive connection. 
But his reasoning does not appear satisfactory. It may be useful to 
add, however, that the Mosulman law, in the most extensive sense 
of the term (S4ura, or Deen-i-islam) comprehends the ordinances of 
religion, and the duties of men towards his Creator, as well as his 
rights and obligations towards his fellow creatures. It is therefore 
stated in the “ Bukr-i-rayik,” to comprise five principal heads ; 
namely, 1, Jatikadat, articles of faith. 2, Ibadat, acts of worship 
and piety. 3, Moaamulat, affairs of life, or civil transactions. 4, 
Muzajir, punishments for the prevention of crimes. 5, Adah, 
manner, or rules of behaviour. In books of jurisprudence (fik-h) 
the first and Jast heads are ornitted. The other three are included ; 
‘andthe head of ‘* Ibadat,”’ always precedes the “ Moaamulat,” 
and “ Muzajir,” as of superior importance. 


VIll. 


An Account of AstronomicaAL OsserRvATIONS 
taken at the HonovuRABLE ComMpPANY’s OBsSERVA- 
Tory, near Fort St. George in the East Indies, in the 
Years 1806 and 1807. To which are added some 
Remarks on the Decxuination of certain Stars 
and of the Sun, when near the Zenit of that Place. 


BY CAPTAIN JOHN WARREN, 


OF H. M. 33d REGIMENT OF FOOT. 


A. Maso Lampton having sent his zenith sector to 
the Madras Observatory in September 1806, I began 
early in the ensuing month the observations which 
form the subject of the present paper. As an account 
of this instrument has already been given to the public, 
‘ina paper written by that gentleman, and published 
in the 8th volume of the Asiatic Researches, I shall 
only observe here that it came to me in high order, 
and that I observed constantly with it from October 
1806 to June 1807, without perceiving any material 
change in its powers or mode of performing. 


2. Iw undertaking a series of observations of zenith 
distances, I had in view to establish permanently the — 
latitude of the Madras Observatory, on which there 
seemed still to be a doubt of several seconds, and also 
to verify the declination of several stars near the zenith, 
when used for obtaining the latitudes of places, disa- 
greed in their results. 


3. Turis laborious and dry enquiry, I am aware can 
afford but little entertainment to the generality of read- 
Vou. X. L1 


514 ACCOUNT OF ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS 


ers. ‘The present paper, therefore, can only claim the 
advantage of recording good observations, taken in. 
great numbers, and computed with scrupulous atten- 
tion: and perhaps of affording some data to astronomers 
in other climates, for further investigation into the ef- 
fects of refraction. 


A. AuTHouGH the method for correcting zenith 
distances at any given time, for abbreviation, nutation, 
and solar equation, is well known to astronomers, yet 
I do not omit giving a general statement of the man- 
ner in which I have applied these various correction$ 
to my observations. Such as belong to Regulus are 
given in Table I, and may serve as an example for the 
rest. For the detail of each respective rule I must re- 
fer the reader to books of astronomy, for I have no- 
thing new to offer on the principles upon which they 
are grounded. . 


5. I nAvE however to observe, that refractions being 
one of the subjects under consideration, I have coma 
puted it separately for every star, according to Dr, 
BraADLeyY’s theory, in which the state of the atmos- 
phere at the time of observation is considered, and 
without any reference to the tables. The rule may be 
found demonstrated in Vincx’s Complete System of 
Astronomy, Chap. VIII. page 82, and following. [ 
Nave reduced it, for a more convenient arrangement, 
in .othe following form : » 


7 
Corrected Refraction R=Tanct. Z—3r xP xT ¥ 400. 
A + 850° 


The following example will shew the notation. 


Example. 


The mean observed zenith distance of Regulus by ob- 
servation is 0° 9’ 14”.326 — Z. ) lev. 


aah SEE Oa sine -- - 


. aM: 
Nel a il valent 


Late hl 0,0) 
que. Of i ue ae id 
i 
} 


need. ORF 
aE. Pe Oi, 2b) 
4O% ae Sd indie i 
R08, SEY FOS. St BOS. 2 OL 1 4" 
Pe} 800. O | -188.) Oy 
Pe om es 
BY GEG. Lh) 68 
Oey Re 
$k 
toy eee 
ou eet 
vo ‘a 
Cee fog 
pit Ob 14Q 
‘hi 2b | 860, 1.0: 
Te Te een te 


BED OF 


4a sae ‘ eae 4! ve 


3 EE at a a 


TABLE I. 


Shewing the Process of deducing the Latitude from the observed Zenith Distances of Regulus. 


Months P Apparent Time| jy. Total Equation for |\S<3| Observed Corrected 
and | Star’s A. R. iid P ees Star’s Declin. i of Preces- | Nutati. Abberrat. Pie e i 38 Zenith Zenith 
Days. Uae Transit. sae qUaHwon-| Declin. |Z. Dist. =| Distance. Distance. 
Nov. 26, | 4229°31’ 2”| 8° 4° 7/35”| 8° 19° 46’ | 12° 54’ 26”.198 | 174 49"395.1 | 327.732 | 6” .494 | 0” .966 | 0” .015 | 40”.207 | 40.207 | E. | 0° 9/56".5 | 0° 9 16".293 

28.| 4 29 31 2}8 6 8 49] 8 19 40 | 12 54 26.1041 17 49 0.2] 32 .826| 6 .500 | 1 .213 | O .049 | 40.588 | 40.588 | W.| O 9 51.8 } O 9 10.212 
30.]} 4 29 31 3}8 8 10 8 | 8 19 34 } 12 54 26 .010] 17 32 25 .6 | 32 .920| 6 .506 | 1 .449 | 0 .084 | 40.959 | 40.959 | BE. | 0 9 58.0 | © 9 17 .041 
Dec. 1.| 4 29 31 3|8 9 10 51 | 8 19 30 | 12 54 26.963 | 17 28 7.2| 32 .967| 6 .510| 2 .562 | 0 .101 | 41.140 | 41.140 | W.| 0 9 51.5 | 0 9 10.360 
4.} 4.29 31 3 18:12 13 51 8 19 21°) 12 54 25.8929) 17 15 9.5} 33.108] 6 .519 | 1 .9201 0 .154| 41.701 | 41.701 | W.| 0 9 51.25 )09 9 .549 
10.| 429 31 3}818 18 8|8 19 1 | 12 54 25.539 | 16 48 56.9} 33 .301| 6 .539 | 2 .613.| 0 .264 | 42.807 | 42.807 | W.| 0 9 51.5 {09 8 .693 
11.] 4 29 31 4181919 1] 8 18 58 | 12 54 25 492} 16 44 33.5 | 33.438] 6 .543 | 2 .721 | O .281 | 42.983 | 42.983 | E. | 010 2.0 | 0 9 19.017 
12.| 4 29 31 4] 8 2019 55| 8 18 55 | 12 54 25.445] 16 40 9.7| 33 .485| 6 .546 | 2 .832 | 0 .209 | 43 .122 | 43.122 | W.| 0 9 53.79 | 0 9 10.668 
17.} 429 31 5] 8 25 24 34] 8 18 39 | 12 54 25.209] 16 18 5.8] 33 .721| 6 .562 | 3 1377 | 0 .389 | 44.049 | 44.049 | E. | 010 2.0 | 0 9 17.91 
18. |} 4 29 31 5 | 8 26 25 28 | § 18 36 | 12 54 25 162] 16 13 39.6} 33 .768| 6 .565 | 3 .480 | 0 .406 | 44.219 | 44.219 | W.| 0 9 52.5 | 09 8.281 
19.| 4 29 31 5 | 8 27 26 27'| 8 18 32 | 12 54 25.116] 16 9.14.3] 33 .814} 6 .56813 .583 | 0 .424 | 44.389 | 44.389 | E. | 010 3,5 | 0 9 19.111 
21.| 4 29 31 5 | 8 29 28 20] 8 18 27 | 12 54 25 .021| 16 0 22.3 | 33 .909| 6 .573 | 3 .788 | 0 .457 | 44.727 | 44.727 | W.] 0 9 54.0 | 09 9.273 
22.| 429 31 519 0 2917 | 8 18 23 | 12 54 24.974] 15 55 56.8 | 33 -956| 6 .578 | 3 .894| 0 .474 | 44.902 | 44.902 | E. | 010 3.0 | 0 9 18 .098 
23.| 42931 6|5 1 30 13] 8 18 20 | 12 54 24.930] 15 51 31.4 | 34 .100| 6 .581 | 3 .994] 0 .489 | 45.164 | 45.164 | E. | 010 4.0 | 0 9 18.836 
27.| 429 31 619 524 5/8 18 6 | 12 54 24.7391 15 33 48.9 | 34 .191| 6 .595 | 4 .358 | 0 .547 | 45 691 | 45.691 | W.| 0 9 56.0 | 0 9 10.309 
07Jan.2.{ 429 31 7/911 40 0|8 17 49 | 12 54 24.456| 15 7 20.1 | 34 .474| 6 .611 | 4 .981 | 0 .629 | 46.695 | 46 695 | W.} 0 9 56.0 109 9.305 
3.) 429 31 7191241 218 17 45 | 12 54 24.4091 15 2 56.2 | 34.521] 6 .615 | 5 .000| 0 .641 | 46.777 | 46.777 | E. | 010 5.0 | 0 9 18.228 
10. | 4 29 31 8] 9 19 48 04] 8 17.38 | 12 54 24.079 | 14 32 21.8 | 34 .851| 6 .623 | 5 .549 | 0 .705 | 47 .728 | 47.728 | E. | 0 10 4.38] 09 10 652 


1806-7 |. Left Arc. | 1806-7 | Right Arc. 


16.293 : .212 | Mean,+----- 0° 9/ 14” .326 
17 O41 . a .360 | * Refraction, + © .131 
19 .017 é .549 | Micrometer, + 0.051 

— oO. 


17.951 ; 693 004 


18 .098 . 281 O 9 14 .504 
18 .836 5 .273 | Declination,«- 12 54 58 .930 


18 .223 , 309 = 
16 .652 | Jan. 2. .305 | Latitude,-+++ 13 4 13 .434 


0° 9 
09 
09 
09 
OPO 19.001 : 668 — 
09 
09 
09 
09 


eon Serle se 


Mean, 0 9 19 .023 


* For Refraction see paragraph 5, 
O 9 14.32 | in paper. 


NEAR FORT ST. GEORGE. SIS 


The refraction due to 45° altitude, as established by 
experiments, and very near the level of the sea is 
50” — R’.* 

The mean altitude of barometer at the time of observing 
was 30.035 inches = «. 

The general medium height of Mercury is 29.6 = A. 

The mean altitude of thermometer at the time of ob- 
seryation was 71° —A4. 

Rule. 
Tangt.Z — 0° 9’ 14”.326 log. 74293310 
3r= 0.402 R’—50' log. 1.6089700 


ee 


g.1283010 N.N.0.134 


3 


Sr = 0.402 
Tangt. Z—3r = 0° 9’ 13”.924 log. 7.4290229) 
| FR’ = 50’ log. 1.6989700 
<==} log. 0.0062636 
A00 log. 2.6088284 J 


—_ 


1.7A3084Q 
h+4350= 421 log. 2.6232821 


aX | 


Corrected Refract. R = 0.131 N.N. 9.1 185028 | 
« — 30.035 log. 1.4775553 
A — 29.6 log. 1.4712917 


log Of —-0.0062636 
h7Zie 
350 


A +30 =421 


ecceiattiemie ete 


* The quantity R’, which represents the refraction due to 450 a}- 
titude (where Rad.= 1) is givea in Brapiey’s Tables — 57”. But 
fur obvious reasons I have preferred Le Gentr1’s quantity, as his 
experiments at Pondicherry ee me unexceptionable.. 

2. 


. 


$16 ACCOUNT OF ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS 


which quantity 0”.131 is entered on the IX. column of 
Table II. and so of the rest. 


6. I was at first doubtful respecting the best mode 
of obtaining a very accurate mean latitude for the Ob- 
servatory, and hesitated-between making a selection of 
a certain set of stars whose declination was determined 
at Greenwich after the same method, and with the same 
instruments ; or taking the whole mass of my observa- 
tions without adverting to the catalogues either English, . 


French, or German, from which I had taken the decli- 
nations. 


7. Hap the whole of the stars given in Table III. - 
been computed when I began writing this paper, I 
might 'have been induced to think the separate cata- 
logue in Table II, unnecessary. since the two means 
only differ by 0.36). However, I was, at the time, 
determined by an opinion that the results of a few very 
accurate operations were always preferable to the mean 
of a great number of indifferent ones, and chose there- 
fore twelve principal stars (six on each side of the ze- 
nith) the declinations of which are given in Dr. MAs- 
KELYNE’s Catalogue for January 1802. With these 
I constructed Table II. to which I particularly wish to 
cal the attention of the reader, as every thing that I 


shall say hereafter is grounded on the mean latitude 
which is derived from it. 


8. In this catalogue, the maximum of deviation in 
the respective latitudes is only 4”.551, and their gra- 
eiual decrease as the stars become more southerly indi- 
cates that this difference is not solely to be attributed 
to inaccuracy in the observation ; for it is to be ob- 
served that the regularity of this decrement (which is 
scarcely interrupted) cannot altogether be ascribed to — 


n 12 Principal Stars. 


I. XI. 
Names an 
Charactere- 
of Stars.rs. Latitudes. 


Arcturus, yg 13° 4/ 
Aldebarai) . 

@ Leonis,: +}. 

« Herculis, {. 


a Pegasi,-+ 4 


y Pegasi,--: { 
Regulus, ty be 

a Ophiuchi, , P 
Altair, «+ D5 

« Orionis, Tis 

e Serpentis, Ws 


Procyon, 


eee. 
a 


15”.736 
13 .829 
15 077 
14.933 
14 .836 
13 .915 


13 .434 
13 .565 
13 .225 
11 .051 
12 435 
11 .812 


XII XII. 
Mean by 
Northern and | Mean Lati- 
Southern Stars. tude. 


13° 4’ 14.721 


13° 4’ 13” .654 


13.4 12.587 


TABLE IL. 


Shewing the Latitude for the Madras Observatory such as derived from 12 Principal Stars. 


IL. IL. | UL. IV. V. VI. VU. |VIMJ Ix. x. XI. XI XIII. 


Observed Zen. | "> go 
Names and & Mean Declina- | 4stances cor- 28 ! 
" ~ y o ‘ 
Characters | & | | Interval durin tion from rected for Ab-,|)& 5 S| 5 = | Corrected Ze- ae : 
ae - ber, Nut.and} 2% 3S} 8} = Latitudes. | Northern and | Mean Lati- 
of Stars mm] 8 when observed Greenw. Cat. j ; Ss 5] 8 3S | nith distances yd oo 
J S| 5 ; , Solar Equae |\& 5S 5) = = i Southern Stars tude. 
= ia for 1805. q = 5.8 Ss s * 
tion. Qo] NS me 
Inches. 
Arcturus, ++ | 1 | 20 |Feb. 6. Mar. 20. ° 19! 14” 426 17° 7 59” 6 o} 6” 0 mM! Rel 0 Al LRM 
20° 12’ 14” 426 | 7° 7 52” .639 | 29.975 | 75°) 6.051 | 7° 7 58”.690 | 13° 4’ 15”.736 
: Aldebaran, | 1 16 | Oct. 30. Dec. 9.] 16 6 23 .830|3 2 7 .548] 29.983 | 77 2.55713 2 9.905 13 .829 
@ Leonis,--+- | 2 | 20} Jan. 2. Feb. 24.1 15 39 48 .544|2 35 51 .288| 30.019 | 74 | 2.197 | 2 35 33 .485 15 277 
« Herculis, ++) 3 | 16 | Mar. 27. Apr. 24.| 14 37 27 .091 |1 33 10 .870} 29.942 | 81 | 1.988 | 1 33 12.158 14 .933 
a Pegasi-+++ | 2 | 16 | Oct. 25. Nov. 14.| 14 9 38 .050/1 5 22 .312| 29.966 | 831 0.902 |1 5 23.214 14 .836 
y Pegasi,---» | 2 | 12 | Oct. 25, Nov. 14.}:14 6 1 .906|1 1 47 .185| 29.966 | 81 | 0.856 |1 1 47.991 13 .915 | 13°4/ 14”.721 
13° 4’ 13" .654 
Regulus, «+ | 1 | 18 | Nov. 28. Jan. 12.] 12 54 58 .930}0 9 14 .326| 30.035} 71 | 0.131 |0 9 14.504] 13 4 13.494 
# Ophiuchi,--] 2 | 10 | Mar. 15. Apr. 22.| 12 42 50.910} 0 21 22 .3621 29.993 | 84 | 0.293 | 0 21 22 .655 13 .565 
Altair, +--+ | 2 | 16 | Apr. 28. Jan. 9.| 8 21 53 .530|4 42 15 .821| 29.862 | 85 | 3.874 | 4 42 19 .695 13 .225 
w Orionis, «+ | 1 | 90 | Nov. rh Jan. 15.| 7 21 36 .670|5 42 29 .526| 30.035 | 74 | 4.855 | 5 42 34.381. 11 .051 
# Serpentis,-- | 23/12 |Mar. 9. Apr. 9.| 7 259 .39016 1 8 .002| 29.993 | so | 5.043 |6 113.045| © 19.435 
Procyon, -- | 1.2) 16 | Nov. 8 Jan. 23. 5 43 0010/7 21 5 .522| 30.035 | 73 | 6.280 |7 21 11 .802 11 .812| 13.4 12.587 


i een | 


Se ee ee ee een Seen lain em ye TS } 


TABLE III. 


Shewing the Latitudes for the Madras Observatory such as deduced from 52 Stars near the Zenith by 500 Observations. 


i. Meta p ? AVE me VI. VIL. | VIII. [5:8 K, 
ct) i 5 . 
Names and charac E Period during which Mean Declinations Siar ae Aine S Corrected Zenith Tatitudes Corrected Declina- 
ters of Stars. & observed, Jamiary 1805. Retrac. & Distances, : tions for Jan. 1805. 
Ss 

€ Gemiborum | 3 | Feb. 19. March 30. | 20° 50’ 43” 7° 40" 18".373 | 6.536 7° 46’ 24.909 | 13° 4/ 18".091.| 20°50! $8".343 
y Leonis +.s}.3 Dee. | 21. Jan. 12. | 20 49 26 745 4.151 | 6.540 7 45 10.091 15 .309 | 20 49 24.125 | ° 1875 
Arcturus «+{) 1 Feb. 6. March 20. | 20 12 14.42 7 7 52 .639:| 6.051 7 7 58.690 15 .736 |.20 12 12:.124 | —2 .296 
OBootis .-%2h\-3° May 10. and 27.|19 55 6 6 50 42.566 | 5.731 6 50 48 .297 17.703 | 19 55 0.731 | —5.269 
6 Arietis «---| 3 GOcti'®. 28. Nov. . 13: | 29 Sy *2Q 6 46 42.181 5 679 6 40 47 .800 14.140 | 19 51 1.294} —0.706 
n Bootis --++| 3 Jan.-\. 24. Feb. 11. | £9 22 58 6 18 30.041 | 5.332 6 18 35.373 22 .627 | 19 22 48 .907'| —9.093 
d Arietis’ «+. +) 4 Oct. 28. Nov. 14. | 18 58 50.95 5 §4 32.869 ‘5.010 5 54 37 879 13.071 | 18 58 51.313 | -+-0.363 
& Gancri ----| 4 Nov. 30. April. 10.) 18 51 47 5 47 26.641 1 4.913 5 47 81.454 15.5460 | 18 51 44.888 | +2.112 
5 -a@ Sagittee .-+-| 4 April «28. May 5. | 17 34 34 4 80 11.1644 3.720 | 4 30 14.884 19.116 | 17 34 28.318 | —5 .682 
x Bootis +++-| 3.4 March -5. and 20,1] 17 15 46 4 11 25.58! | 3.506 4 11 29 .087 16.913 | 17 15 42.521 | —3.479 
yy Geminorum | 2.3 Dec. 2. Feb. 12. |.16 33 18 3 28 59.806} 3.216 37.29) 93,.029 14.978 | 16:33 16.456 | —1.544 
9 Leonis «--+| 3 Dec. 10. Jan. 2. | 16 29 40 3 25 26.001 | 2.994 3 25 28 .995 11.005 | 16 29 42.429 | +2.429 
y Serpentis «-| 3 March 12. April 5. | 16 18 35 31411 83 | 2.705 3 14 14.188 20.612 | 16 18 27.702 | —7 .298 
Aldebaran + «| 1 Oct. 30. Dec. 9. | 16 6 93 3 2°7.348 | 2.557 3 2 9.905 13.829 | 16 06 23.339 | +0.339 
BLeonis --+-{) 2 an. 2. Feb. 24.) 15 30 45 .28 2 35 31.228 | 2.197 2 35 33 485 15.077 | 15 39 46.919 | +1.639 
y Tauris. 4-61 3 Oct. — 28. Nov. (18. 4-15 '8 49 2 4 34.103 | 1.748 2 4 35.851 13.149 | 15 8 49.285 | -+-0.285 
# Hercules) ++) 3 March 27. April 24. | 14 37 27 .09 1 33 10.870} 1 .228 1 33°42 158 14.933 | 14 87 25.592 | —1.498 
w Pegasi- «-\44)).2 Oct... 25. Nov. 13.') 14 -9 38.05 1 5 22.3121 0.902 1 5) 93.214 14.836 | 14 9 30.648 | —1 .402 
y Pegast ~-+-)).2 Oct. 25. Nov. 14. 14 “6 1.906: (1 1 47.135} 1.857 1 M74) O11 13.915 116 6 1.425 | —9.475 
BiDelphini =) 3 Oct. 24. Nov. 6.1}:93 55 36 0 51 21.905 | 0.709 O 51 22.614 13.386 | 13 55 36.048 | +0.048 
® Orionis +-++))4.51'-6 | Juv 14, Feb. 7. | 13 54 54 0 50 44.213 } 0.713 0 50 44 .926 9.076 | 13 54.58.300 | +4 .360 
@ Aquile --+-/ 34 \ April 28..May 2:1 13 35 «68 0 30 49.051 | 0.423 0 30 49.474 18.526 {13-35 2.905 | —5.095 
02 Orionis “+)-4/5]° 4 Feb, 19. and 26. | 13 11. 48 0. 7 33.171 | 0.104 | 0 7 33.975 14.325 | 13 11 46.709 | —1.291 


ell 


aoe Mean Latitude from the\whole, 13 4 18.293 Mean of Star's N. of Zen. 13 4 15.482 
Mc neta 


—— 


Names of Stars. |Mag, Bibsat Period during which obs. | Mea. Dec. 1805. Cor. Z. Hise ietine, Refraction. Cor, Z. dist. Latitudes. Cor. Declin. Difference. 
| : 
ee —— ——————_—_—_|——_ | a | —_—— — — 
Regulus --| 1 | 18 | Nov. 28. Jan. 12. 12° 54/ 58”.93 0? 9° 14.326 | 0°.131 OY 9 1M .504 | 13° 4 13".434 | 12°54 £8°.930 | — 0".000 
« Ophiuchi | 2 | 12 | March 15. April 22. | 12 42 50 gl 0 21 22.362 | 0.293 | 0.21 22.655 | 13.565 | 12 42 50.779 | — 0.131 
« 2 Cancri--| 4 | 16 | Nov. 10. Jan. 10. | 12 36 18.0 0 27 55.057} 0.39 0 27 55.452 | 13.452 | 12 36 17.982 | — 0.018 
a@ 1 Cancri-+| 4 6 | April 15. and 29. | 12 21 48 0 O 42 21.166 | 0.579 O 42 2b.745) 9.745 | 12 21 51.689 | + 3.689 
5 &-Leonis-+++| 4 4,}>April 15. May 5. | 12 9 28.0 0 54 46 -352 | 0.791 O 54 47 143 15.143) 17 124 (9) 26.291.) — 4.709 
e Virginis «| 3. | 18 | Jan. 12. March 4.) 12 0 40 1 3 31.500] 0.887 1 «3 32.387.) 12 387 | 12. 0 41.047 | + 1.047 
Ah Herculis »+| 4 8 | March 26. April 7. | 11 55 5 1 9 8-678.) 0.958 1 ~G- 9 .636 14.636 | 11 55. 3.798.) — 1.202 
+ Leonis++++| 4 6 | May .12. and 30. | 11 36 12 1 27 57 806 | 1 .203 1.27 59.009 | 11.009 |,11 36 14.425.| + 2.425 
x Cancri+ +++} 4 6 | April 10. May 1. {| J1 26 45 1 37 23.593 | 1 .333 s7 24, .926 9 926 | 11 26 48.508 | + 3.508 
& Serpentis | 3 8 | March 11. April 6.| 11 12 4 1 52,9203 | 1.50194 52 40.7645) 14.764 ()11.12 2.670} — 1.330 
o Leonis++++} 4 8 | Dec. 1. Jan. 8. | 10 46 25 217 435 .940 | 1.961 | 2 17 45 .901 10.901 | 10,46 27 .533 + 2.533 
¢ Delphini--| 4 6 | May 2. June 11. ] 10 39 6 2 Qh Si 22B| 91.984 | 2 24 53-212 | 3 58.212 | 10 39 20.222 | 415.222 
25 e Opbiuchi | 2. | 18 | Mareh 11. April 15..| 10 29 54 2 34 18.886 | 2.147 | ~2 34 21.033) 4 15.033 | 10 29 52.401 | — 1.599 
p Leonis:-++| 4 8 | Dec. 10. Jan. 8 10 18 28 2 45 42 .358 2 335 29 45 40 .053;) 8 .053 |. 10.18 33.381 | +, 5.581 
15... Unicorn ++| 4 6 | Feb. 19. Mareh 20. | 10 3 57 3 0 10.875 | 2.510 | oS oO 3.385 | 10.385 | 10. 4 09 .049-| + 3.049 
@ Caucri ++} 3.4} 12 | Nov, 19. Dec. 21.] 9 46 29 3.17 27 977 | 2.800 3 17 80.777 | 3 69.777 | 10 46 42.657} +13 .657 
 Grionis ++) 4 8 | Feb. 19. March 4..| 9 38 10 3 26. .0:693.| 2.870 | «3 26 13.563) oH 14.563. |) 9 38 9.871}. —.0.129 
pe Cet — 4 | 10-| Jan. 12. and 28.) 917 6 3.46 59.187 | 3.209 | 3 47 2.390 “ 8.396 | 9 17 11.038} + 5.038 
« Pegasi----| 2 | 14 | Oct. 28, Nov. 14. | 8 59 18 4 449.456 | 3.392 | 4 4 52.848 | 10.848 | 8 59 20.586 | +.2.586 
mw Orionis ++) 4 | 12 | Nov, 8. Dec. 4.) 8 S307 4.30 44-501 | 3.791 4 30 48 .292 5.292 | 8 33 25.142 | + 8.142 
x Leonis 4 6 | Dec. 21. June §2.} 8§ 23 20 4 40 48.397 | 4.018 4 40 52.415 12.415 |. 8 23 21.019 | — 1.019 
« Aquile 1 | 16 | April 28. Jan. 9. | 8 2! 53 4 42 18.821 | 3.874 | 4 42 19.695 | 13 .225.| 82 : ‘ 
vy Virginis ++) 4 4| May 12. and 25.| 7 37 26 5 26 45.945 | 4.467 | 5 26 50.412 | 16.412 | 7 
« Orionis ++| 1 | 20 | Nov, 7. Jan. 15 7 21 37 5 42 29-526 | 4.855 5 42 34.381 1k .O515IL. 7 
« Leonis — 4.5 12-| Dec. 19. Jan. 21.] 7 5 48 5 58 15.794 | 5.089 | 5 58 20.883 8 .883.|- 7 
aw Serpentis | 2.3)12 } March 9. April 9.) 7 2 59 39 6 1 8.002} 5.043 6 1.13 .045.) / 12.435-15 7 
& Aquilze 4 |.12 | May 1. June ° 5. | 6 58 38. 6 5 32.359 | 5.024 | 6 5 37.383 | 15.383 |. 6 
y Orionis --| 2 | 14 | Jan. 10. Feb. 18.| 6 9 43 6 54 22.193 | 5.865 | 6 54 28.158 11.158 | 6 
Procyon ++} 1.2} 14 | Nov.» 8, Jan. 23. | 5 43 0.01 | 7-21 5-552 | 6.266 | 7 21-11 -.802 11.812 | 5 


nl 


. : Mean of Stars South of Zenithe- 13 4 11.113 


TABLE IV. 


Shewing the Latitudes given by Stars, as observed North or South of the Zenith. 


Name of Places where 


Names and Number of Stars observed by. 
observed, 


Coringa, in the Nor- 
thern Cirears. 


By 15 Stars North of Zenith, with Sextant 
AO Stars South of Zenith. Mr, TOPPING +++--+eee- 


e Bootis, } Leonis, 6 Leonis «+-.+. eeeesceccesecons 


Paughur, in the My- 


—— -——— 


sore. e Virginis, Regulus, 0 Leonis. Major LAMBTON +++ 
Paudree, in the Car- AT AT AMA!svcletels tolels rt tevs,/0.0 e¥aicls\ > bisis, sie bo fe tetehale aelaioierais 
natic. z Orionis, Regulus. Major LAMBTON +++++e+eeeoe es 


TABLE II. 
Arcturus, Aldebaran, 6 Leonis, « Herculis, « Pegasi, ++ 
y Pegasi, Regulus, « Ophiuchi, Atiair, « Orionis, 
a Serpentis, Procyon, 


TABLE III. 


By 23 Stars N. of Zenith, with the Zenith Sector-++++++- 
29 Stars 8. of Zenith-.-- 


Seo ee er ere ess eee eee teeeee 


TABLE V. 


By 11 Observations of O N, of Zenith «++.+++seeeeeees 
9 Observations of © S. of Zenith «-+-.++eeeveecees 


Observatory, near 
Fort St, George. 


Observations by Mr. GoupincuaM and Mr. TopPine. 


Arcturus, } Arietis, Aldebaran, Markab, 6 Delphini -- 
Regulus, « Ophiuchi, Attair, « Olrionis, « Serpentis, Z. S. 
25 Stars, very near the Zenith N.+-seeeee ceevee cos 
25 Stars South, and very near the Zenith, Circular Inst. 
By 30 Observations of © N. of Zenith 
26 Observations of © §. of Zenith. Zen. Sector «+--+ 
25 Stars N. of Zenith «+--+. +). cee 
25 Stars S. of Zenith, with Sextant »--.++ cesses cere 


By 


By ape 


Arcturus, « Herculis, Markab, »y Pegasi+-+-+-++++++++ 
Ophiuchi, y Aquile, Attair, «/ ' -rpentis, B Aquile, -- 
y Herculis, « Sagittz, y Serpt. & 3 ootis, and 

8 Delphini (second set by Major , MBTON) «+--+ eee 
¢ Virginis, 3 Serpentis 


Dodagoonta, near 
Bangalore, inthe | « 
Mysore. 


were et eee see eee tee eee ee eeeer 


Aldebaran, Regulus «+++++e+ tee ceececceeeeeeeece 
a Orionis +--+... 


Trivandaporam, in 
the Carnatic. 


ee ee 


Latitudes by Stars 
North of the 
Zenith. 


16° 48/49". 5 


14 6 20.312 


eee eesesenes 


13 19 49.018 


138 4 14.721 


eeeesereeens 


12. 4 15 482 


13 4 4.449 


134. 1162 
13.4 6:10 
134 6. 45 
13412. 47 


er 


1. 04 


13 O 


12 59 54. 89 


11 44 60. 55 


eoeseese reece 


Latitudes by Stars 
South of the Zenith. 


14 6 17 .919 


13 19 40.370 


13. 4 12.587 


sere sees eeee 


13 4 11.113 


13.4 2.207 


19 4 F6R 65 


eoee vere sees 


13\ 4 40 


eoeorere 


13 4 4. 87 


13 4 6. 30 


eeee eoeesese 


12 59 59. 0 


12 59 47. 26 


— 


severe eoerene 


11 44 41. 45 


| ee 


ee ee em 


j 
j 


i 9. 50] 11 44 47. 78 


Excess by 
North of 
Zenith, 


(Cen ot) 


8 .648 


2.134 


4 . 369 


2.242 


Mean Latitudes. 


16° 48’ 39” 


25393 14 6 19.165 


13 19 44. 69 


13 4 13.654 


es 


12 59 55. 49 


—— 


eee er ee ee ee ee 


TABLE V. 


Zenith Distances and Latitudes by the Sun, April and May, 


1807. 


Days on 
which 
obseryed. 


April 15. 
16. 
18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
23. 
24, 
25. 


Zenith dist. of ©’s 


centre, 


3° 36 49” . 849 
3 15 19 .065 
2 32 35 .999 
211 52 .124 
151 0.725 
1, 30 26 .776 
0 49 45 . 564 
0 29 41 .305 
0 9 56 .739 
© North. 
9 39 .001 
29 2 .604 
48 11 .508 
25 53 .806 
20 39 .055 
54 . 866 
46 40 .172 
3 5.912 
35 0 .418 


50 35 .340 
5 48°.551 


KP PRR OWDWNMWRKOCO 
on 
Gr 


Mean of Lat. by 
Northern and 
Southern Z. dis- 
tances. 


Corresponding 


Fs at ¢ 
Latitudes, wer 


A”, 949 
. 265 
. 619 
. 324 
. 525 
. 276 
. 564 
. 004 
- 339 


wookob 
On Gr 
wwor tc CON OO 


13° 4’ 3” .328 
. 389 u 
. 406 
. 692 
. 389 
«345 


134 
« 228 
- 588 
- 652 
3 .560 
6 .449 


Ob Or An © % & MH Oo Go 


13 4 4.449 * 


Diff. 2 .242 


= 


VoLX. Plate 6. 


NEAR FORT ST. GEORGE. 517 


chance; and it was this consideration which led me to 
examine whether I could. not discover some law by 
which it was governed. 


Q. For this purpose I gathered all the observations 
which I could collect, and from as many different places 
inthe Peninsula as I could, provided they were obtained 
in sufficient numbers at each place. These being 
arranged in the order of the declinations, and the mean 
results of northern and southern zenith distances being 
taken separately, I noticed invariably (though in une- 
qual degrees) a small excess in the northern, and defect 
in the southern sets. 


10. An abstract of these deviations is given in Table 
IV. and the reader will do well to refer to it in order to 
judge of the consistency of the preceding remark, and 
of the solidity of what I have further to say on the sub- 
ject. | 


~- 


11. Tuts exposition being sufficient to shew the 
tendency of observations taken north of the zenith to 
give /oo great a latitude, and the contrary of the south~ 
ern ones, I shall now endeavour to account for this cir- 
cumstance as follows. 


& 
ie ' 


‘ . 

12. Ler Z (Plate V1. Fig. 1) be the true zenith of 
any place. & D, and EF d, the declinations of any two 
stars, one north, the other south, and nearly at equal 
distances from the said zenith. By the present experi- 
ments, if we use the declination of D, the latitude will 
fall somewhere in L: but if we use the declination of 
d, then it will fall on the opposite side, somewhere in ~ 
}. Therefore the sum of the zenith distances D L4/ 4, 

L13 


Se eee - 


518 ACCOUNT OF ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS 


will fall short of the differences of declinations E D, 
and £ d bythe small are LJ. 


13. Let now the zenith be altered into ¢ (Fig 2) so 
that d be now north of it, and let 3 be the place of a 
third star, south of the zenith ¢. Then if we use the 
declination of d (which before gave us too low a lati- 
tude) it will now give it in a; and if we use that of dit 
will fallin 4 south of the true zenith: so that instead 
of having E D—E )—sum of the four zenith distances, 
we have it (Fig.2) — DL 4+L14ld4 dazany yaa 
That is, the four observed distances + the small arcs 
L142. Therefore, if we suppose the declination E 
D to have been well determined, that of dis too low by 
the arc Z/, and that of ¢, by L/ +a Ae 


14. Por example ; let the true place of Aldebaran 
be at #, and its apparent place (affected by the error in 
the declination) be at D, Regulus at d and « Orionis at 


d; then at the observations at Paudree and Thivanda- 
poran: we have 


DL 2046’ 33” .682 N-) 
fd 0 24 43 .040 S. >of the respective zeniths, 
da 110 9g .920 N.{ } 

AY aes PET 3 


a 


Sum, 8 44 31 .452 
Now the mean declination of A/debaran being 
Equal . . . 16° 6’ 23” .73 
And « Orionis = 7 21 36 .61 


Wehave E D—E 48 4A AZ .12 
. 8 AA 831 ADB 


Diff L144 aya - . 15.55 


NEAR FORT ST. GEORGE. 519 


and in order to have separately the values of these quan- 
tities, we have at Paudree 


Latitude E £ by Aldebaran 130 19’ 49” .018 
E‘l by Regulus... «++> Al .3A40 


Difference Z7.....-.+. 7 -.678 

At Trivandapo ram, 
Latitude Ea by Regulus . 110 44° AQ” .329 
E aby a Orioms .....- Al .07 


eee Wee ee nee Sf eg! YO 
Hence L/ +2 , = 7.678 + 7-879 = 15.557 as before. 


15. It is therefore evident that, taking the decli- 
nation of A/debaran to be cotrected, and the observa- 
tion good, then the declination of « Orionis should be 
increased by 15”.557. Again, if we reyert to what I 
have said higher up (Para. 7 *) it may be inferred, tnat 
these errors proceed from assigning originally too great 
a difference of polar distance between the extreme stars 
from which the mean latitude is deduced (as for ex- 
ample between Arcturus, and Procyon:) hence the 
mean latitude, which is derived from both, will fall 
somewhat foo ow; both on account of the excess of 
this arc, and also of the error of polar distance of P D 


c —Pp We 


1 


16. Ir follows from this, that the successive small 
arcs of declination Dy, yv, v d, dé (Fig.3) will severally 
be too great, and this seems to be the case with the de- 
- ¢linations of the twelve stars registered in Table II. 


17. Ir is true that in the foregoing example, where’ 
I have compared the results given by 4/debaran, Regu- 
lus and « Orionis, 1 have selected an extreme case ; but 


—_——--_—— 


—_——— = ee 


* See also infra, Pa. 17. 
14 


520 ACCOUNT OF ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS 


it is likewise evident, from what appears in Table IV. 
that were the mean of any number of northern and south- 
ern stars, to be taken separately at any two places of 
different latitudes, and in the order here described, the 
deviation would tend the same way as in the above 
exposition ; and this, it may be supposed, by a certain 
quantity, ‘hrown in from a distant zenith, on account of 
refraction, which cannot be corrected here for the quan- 
tity P «, nor done away by that due to the small arcs 
) y near the zeniths. Also that the latitude of ¢ will 
fall too low by a certain quantity (P D—P x) Dx + 
PEt AA where D «is the whole error affecting the de- 
clination of D; and the divisor 7, will be in some pro- 
portion of the error affecting the whole arc D @ (always 
in @xcess) from the extremities of which the mean la- 


titudes of Z and ¢ were deduced. 


18. Wrru the mean latitude given in Table II, we 
can therefore be no otherwise satisfied than from the fol- 
lowing consideration, which as far as it affects our lati- 


Lita 
tude seems to reduce the error D #4 ——_—A to a mere 
nothing. 


1g. Regulus, a star of the first magnitude, no doubt 
attentively observed from every part of Europe, owing 
to its being very near the ecliptic, and situated only 9 
minutes and 14 seconds from the zenith of the Madras 
Observatory, gives a latitude differing only from the 
mean resultsin Table II. by 20.22. This, no doubt, 
will be admitted to be a strong indication, that its decli- 
nation, such as laid down in the tables, is very accu- 
rate. Regulus may therefore, without inconveniency, 
be taken as a-visible point in the heavens, from which 
ta lay down the position of the other stars; by this 


NEAR FORT 8ST. GEORGE. 521 


means the zenith distances applied to it will give results 
consistent both with the observations at Greenwich, and 
at Madras, and thus form a link by which the two ze- 
niths may hereafter be connected. 


20. For this reason, in computing the Xth column 
in Table II. I have adopted the following process ; 


Ff 


Declination of Regulus, » de Wth2e 54’ 58%! 930 
Zenith distance of do. . . . O Q 1A .504 
BD, OF Arcturus Ney oo 617) FP 580.690 


— 


oe 


Corrected declin. of Arcturus, 20°12 12 .194 N. 
TH, 


Zenith distance of Regu/us, . .O Q 14 .504 
Zenith distance of Procyon, . ° ..7 21 11 .302 


, Difference 2: 27), 1095522298 
Declination of Regulus, . . +» 12 54 58 .930 


. Corrected declin. of Procyon, . 5 43 1 .032 


21. Iris greatly to be regretted that there are no 
instruments in the Madras Observatory, wherewith to 
take accurately great zenith distances ; for correspond- 
ing observations of stars near the zenith of Greenwich 
and of Paris, would have afforded powerful means for 
correcting, after the same manner, the declinations of 
all stars in that extensive space of the heavens which 
divides the two Observatories. 


On THE Sun’s DECLINATION. 


29. Ir isa fact deserving of notice, that the medium 
ef 20 observations of the sun, taken with the zenith 


r 


522 ACCOUNT OF ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS 


seetor, (Table V.) gives the latitude of the Observa- 
tory only 13° 4’ 3.328 which is less by 10”.326 than 
that brought out by the stars in Table II. 


_ 23. Tue great difficulty of observing the sun, when 
in the meredian in tropical climatés, owing to the great 
tremor of the atmosphere ar noon time, induced me not 
to consult it in laying down the latitude of this Obser- 
vatory. 


24. Howrver, on comparing the mean latitude in 
Table V. with the result of similar observations, for- 
merly taken with the same instrument by Mr. Goup- 
INGHAM, (56 in number) I found that his latitude by 
the sun, namely, 13° 4’ 5”.66, differed only by 2”.332 
from mine. ‘There could therefore remain no doubt 
that the sun gave a lower latitude than the stars; and 
1 was further confirmed in this opinion, on Major 
LamsBtTon communicating to me his remark, that when 
observing the sun, in various parts of the Peninsula, 


his results were likewise in defect. 


25. In order to make a further trial of this, let us 
compute the exact time when the sun was precisely in 
the parallel of the Mad7as Observatory, and then (taking 
the difference of longitude between Greenwich and this 
place to be well known) determine the sun’s declination 
for that moment, from what it is given in the nautical 
almanac for two preceding, and two succeeding moons. 


26. For this, taking the four zenith distances ob- 
served nearest and on each side of the zenith, and in- 
terpolating in the usual way *, we have 


is — 
* The formula of which is y = a+ P #Q x——+ Re — 


cea, &c. where xis to be found by resolying the equation. 


NEAR FORT ST. GEORGE. 523 


Apri] 24, 0 20 41” S, = 1781 + —@ 
25, °0. 9-50 /8, =< 596 4 "= BF 
26, 0. 9°39 N. = 579 — —¢ 
27, - 0 29°"°3 *N22"-4743 — 2 @ 
Hence: 
a b c a 
1781; 596; — 570; — I7AL 
— 1185; — 1175; — 1164 
+, 1Q; + 11 
iy Soil 
Therefore 2=11781; P=— 1158; Q = 10; —3- = Z 
 fa7: (Hence X = 4- +. bY Za. te 


< Blake 
= 1.50617 or 1 day 12h 8’ 52”.84. Therefore the sun 
was exactly in the parallel of the Observatory on the 
25th of April at 125 8’ 52”84 P. M. Madras time, and 
taking the difference of longitude to be 80° 18” 30” E. 
which gives in time 55 2i™ 4s, then the sun was in 


the said parallel on the 25th of April at 6h 47m 3g”, 
Greenwich time. 


27. Now by interpolating again for the sun’s declina- 
tion at that instant, we have by the ephemerides 
April-24, 12° 38 44 — 45524 — a 
25,12 58 3=—46710=6 


96, 13 18 4—A7884 ~¢ 
27,13 37°25 — 49045 =d 
Hence: 
a Be. ‘3 d 


45524; 46710; 47884; 49045 
1186; -1174; 1161 
7 AZ5-— 13; / 


Beal fe 


>. 


524 ACCOUNT OF ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS 


Therefore a = 45524; P—11860;.Q. — —12, anda = 
pede and y—a 4. Px4Qu. 7} — 13° 4’ 3.159, which 


differs only from the mean latitude by the sun (Table 
V.) by 0”.169. 


28. It is, own, no easy matter to give a reason for 
so great adeviation. The difference between this posi- 
tion of the sun when in the parallel of the Observatory, 
and the latitude of that place as given by the stars, being 
10”.326, no error in the difference of longitude assumed 
between the Greenwich and Madras Observatories can 
accouut for it. For if we take y — 13° 4’ 13”.654 or 
A7053”.654 (Table If.) then resolving the equation we 


have, « — —2—1+ W2—1)* 4 2y7—4 = 1,day 28912 

2 2 2 
or] day 65 -56™ 193.9, which gives a difference of 8 
minutes and 43 seconds of time for moving through 
10”.226 of a degree in declination. So that if we 


suppose the sun to be in the parallel given by the stars, 


the interval of time allowed for the difference of longi-. 


tude. between Madras and Greenwich must be dimi- 
nished by that quantity, which is far beyond any un- 
‘certainty that may still subsist on that head. - 


2g. AGAIN; as to the time of apparent noon at 
Madras, the sun’s transit was always observed with the 
fixed transit instiument, whilst I was observing it with 
the zenith sector ; and these contemporary observations 
agreed always toa second of time. There can there- 
fore be but little irregularity to apprehend from this 
element, and we are compelled, though under equal 
objections and difficulties, to ascribe the error to the 
declination either as assigned to the sun in the ephe- 
merides, or to the stars in the catalogue for 1802 ; and 
and I believe the former are the most likely to create 
suspicion. : 


NEAR FORT ST. GEOBGE. §25 


‘30. Wuere great talents are combined with the 
most perfect instruments and assiduous practice, the 
cause can only be ascribed to that important correction 
on which we are still so yery uncertain : and on this I 
shall venture an opinion, not altogether unsupported by 
experiments *; which is, that the declination of the sun 
being deduced from observations taken at noon, and 
that of the stars at ight time, the effects of refraction 
at these different periods may possibly vary materially, 
and what is allowed for zenith distances of the stars, be 
too much for zenith distances of the sun; a surmise 
which explains at once why the sun, in the present in- 
stance, gives a lower latitude than the stars. This 
strongly suggests the expediency of further experiments 
‘for ascertaining a point, which, if established, would be 
highly conductive to important discoveries, in an inte- 
resting but imperfectly known branch of natural philo- 
sophy. 

JOHN WARREN, 


OsservaTory, zear Fort St. 
George, 1ft of March, 1808. 


== 


* See Asiatic Researches Volume IX. Article 1st, Page 13, the 
experiments on terrestrial refraction, where the refraction at night 
was something more than double what it was in the day-time, 
ewing (it is supposed) to the increased moisture of the atmosphere. 


IX. 


TRANSLATIONS of two Letters of Napir Suan, 
with INTRODUCTORY OBSERVATIONS in a LETTER 
to the PRESIDENT. 


BY BRIGADIER GENERAL JOHN MALCOLM. 


TO HENRY COLEBROQE, Es@. ; 
President of the Asiatic Society. 


| 
MY DEAR SIR, 


Ty the course of researches into the history of Persia, 
my attention was particularly drawn to a collection of 
letters, and original state papers, of Napir Suan, pub- 
lished after his decease by his favourite secretary Mir- 
za Menepi. This collection is held in the highest 
estimation in Persia, not only from the light it throws 
upon the history of that nation, but from the stile in 
which it is written, and which 1s considered to be the 
best model for those who desire to attain excellence in 


this branch of writing. 


I nave the pleasure to transmit, for the considera 
_ tion of the Asiatic Society, translations .of two of these 
letters which appear to be strongly illustrative of the 
character of NApir Suan, and the history of the pe- 
tiod at which they were written, and which may per- 
haps be deemed on that account not unworthy of a place 
in the Society’s Researches. ’ 


Tue first is addressed to MuHAMmup Att Kuan, 
Beglerbeg* of Fars, and must from its tenor have been 


a 
et 


ea ee ee ee 


Cen eee 


* Goyernor of Persia proy er: 


hl td nas 


TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS, &c. 527 


written early in the year 1731, a few months previous to 
the dethronement of SHan Tamasy, which took place 
in the month of August of that year. Naprr Suan 
published, at the period at which he wrote this letter, a 
proclamation or manifesto addressed to the inhabitants 
of Persia, in which, after stating his own successes 
against the dfghans and the other enemies of his coun- 
try, and the evils which appeared likely to arise from 
the shameful peace which had been concluded with the 
Turks, heannounces his intention of marching after the 
feast of Naw Rox (which occurred that year on the 223d 
of Ramzon or 10th of March) and of not only obliging 
tbe Turks to consent to more just terms, but of de- 
Priving of dignity and power, and considering as infi- 
dels, all those who should oppose his intentions. This 
manifesto, as well as his letter to the Feglerbeg of Fars, 
sufficiently prove, that his designs were at that moment 
more directed against his own sovereign than that of 
Constantinople. 


Tuere is no epoch in the life of Naprr Suan at 
which he acted with more consummate art and policy, 
than upon this occasion. The crown of Persia was 
completely within his grasp. But he appears to have 
considered it as indispensable to have his right univer- 
sally acknowledged by his countrymen before he seized 
it- He had within a period of thirteen years risen from 
obscurity to unrivalled pre-eminence in the service of 
his weak monarch; and, by his wonderful valour and 
conduct, had not only rescued his country from the 
Afghans, the Turks andthe Russians, who taking advan- 
‘tage of the decline of the Sofaviyah dynasty and conse- 
quent dissentions of the nobles of the empire, had made 


themselves. masters of its richest cities and finest pro~ 


528 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS 


vinces; but he had received the military spirit of the 
Persians, and roused a nation sunk in sloth and luxury, 
to great-and successful exertion. But neither this 
success, the imbecility of Suan Famasp, nor a reli- 
ance upon his own fame and strength, could induce him 
to take the last step of usurpation, until he had by his 
arts excited a complete contempt in the minds of his 
countrymen for their reigning sovereign, and a pride in 
his glory, that was likely to make his elevation seem 
more the accomplishment of their wishes than of their 
ambition. The great ability with which he laboured to 
effect this object, is admirably shown in his letter to 
Munammep Att Kuan. He commences by stating 
his victories over the Afghans, whom he had not only 
completely expelled from the empire, but pursued into 
their own territories. He next exposes the impoliti¢ 
and humiliating conditions of the treaty which the king 
had concluded with the Zwrkish government; and, on 
the ground of its bringing disgrace on Persia, asserts 
his right and intention, as the successful champion of . 
the independence of his country, to abrogate the igno- 
minious engagement; and while he flatters the na- 
tional spirit of the Persians by anticipating success 
against their ancient rivals the Turks, he endeavours to 
enflame all their bigotry by giving the colour of reli- 
gion to the cause which he has undertaken ; and calls 
upon them, with the well feigned zeal of an enthusiast, 
to fight for the preservation and existence of the holy © 
sect of Shiak, a schism which, as appears from his whole 

life, he always considered to be a heresy, and which it - 
was the first and last object of his reign to eradicate and 

destroy ; and, to make the effect of this letter complete, 

he concludes it with the usual declaration of all Muham- 

medan leaders who have made religion the pretext of 


OF NADIR SHAH, &c , 529 


war, that he should consider and panish as infidels all 
those that refused their concurrence and aid in the 
sacred cause te which he professed himself devoted. 
Tuer second letter is from De/hi, and must have been 

written immediately after the arrival of Napria Suan 
in that city, in the month of February 1738. It com- 
mences with a clear statement of the causes of his in- 
vasion of Hindustan; which is followed by a concise 
relation of his military operations, and a particular ac- 
count of the celebrated battle of Karnal, in which he 
defeated the emperor of IJndid. The account of oc- 
currences before the action, the action itself, the sub- 
sequent visit which Naprr received from MunamMep 
Suan, and his resolution to replace that monarch upon 
the throne of his ancestors, are stated with equal 
perspicuity and force, and the whole of this letter is 
written in a Jess inflated stile than any oriental compo- 
sition of a similar nature which has fallen under my 
observation. It records events of almost unparalleled 
magnitude, and the expression is (as far as I can judge) 
never more warm than what the subject justifies, and 
indeed requires. 


Tuese lettets are perhaps calculated to give the 
reader a more favourable impression of the character of 
Napir Suan, than any thing before published relating 
to that great and successful conqueror ; who is- chiefly 
known in Europe by the report of his tyranny and 
cruelties, and above all by the massacre of Delhi, which 
reached European narrators through the exaggerated 
statements of the surviving inhabitants of that unfor- 
tunate city. It is far from my intention to trouble 
you with what the Persian advocates of NADIR SHAH 
state in vindication of his conduct upon that memorable 
occasion ; nor do I mean to enter in this place into 

Vou. A, Mm 


530 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS 


any inquiry fegarding the character and actions of this 
extraordinary man ; but you will, Iam assured, forgive 
me, if I offer some observations on the manner in 
which the history of Napier Suan and of several other 
Asiatic princes of eminence have been given by 


I 


Luropean writers, 


‘In describing eastern despots, there has often ap- 
peared to me astronger desire to satisfy the public of 
the author’s attachment to freedom and his abhorrence 
to tyranny, and despotic power, under every shape, 
than to givea clear and just view of those characters 
whose history was the immediate object of his labours. 
This usage may no doubt, in some points of view, 
appear laudable. It may have a tendency to impress 
those who peruse the work with a still greater love of 
the first of all human blessings, rational liberty. 
But others, who look to a volume of Asiatic 
history with no other desire but that of obtaining 
historical trath, and a correct knowledge of the so- 
cial and political state of the nation that is described, 
will be disposed to regret that there was any prejudice 
on the mind of an author or translator, that gave him a 
bias unfavourable to the gratification of their hopes. 
They will wish, that he had looked upon the political 
world with more toleration; and though they may not 
censure his warm admiration of the government of his 
own country, they will lament the existence of a feeling 
which was adverse to an impartial consideration of events 
illustrative of the general history of the human mind, 
and which has led him to stamp with general and un- 
guahified reprobation rulers, who, however low their pre- 
tentions may be rated, if tried by the standard of 
countries towards whom that over which they reigned 
had no one point of affinity, must have stood high in 
the scale, if measured by that more applicable principle, 


< 


OF NADIR SHAH, &c. 531 


which takes as its foundation, the actual state of the 
community in which such characters were born, the 
means which they possessed, and the actions which 
they achieved ; and, on this fair and just ground, pro- 
nounces with truth and discernment, on the right they 
had, from their qualities and achievements, to that pre- 
eminence which they attained. 


Tr such an author were to write the histcry of 
Napir Suan, he would probably see something more 
than a mere usurper and tyrant in the man, who, born 
in a low rank of life, at a period when his country was 
overrun by foreign invaders, raised himself by the force 
of his own genius and courage to the highest military 
rank; attacked, defeated, and expelled every enemy 
from Persia; and afterwards, with the universal con- 
sent of his countrymen, seized the sceptre which his 
valor had saved, and whicha weaker hand could not 
have wielded. Such an historian, after dwelling with 
pleasure if not enthusiasm, on the early events of his 
life, would accompany Naprr with satisfaction in his 
war upon those barbarous 4fghan tribes, who fora 
series of years had committed the most horrid ravages 
in Persia; and though it would be impossible to com- 
mend the motives that led that monarch to attack the 
Emperor: of India, the extraordinary valour and conduct 
which he displays in that enterprise, the exercise he 
gave by it to that military spirit which he had with such 
difficulty rekindled among his countrymen, and the 
magnanimity with which he restored the crown (which 
he had conquered) to the weak representative of the 
illustrious house of Zzmur, might, without offence to 
truth, be stated by such a writer in mitigation of that 
insatiable desire of glory which prompted the enter- 
prise, and of those excesses by which it was attended. 


M m 2 


482 TEANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS 


Tue actions of Napir Suan, until the period of 
his return from Judia, are a theme of constant praise 
among his conntrymen. Of the remainder of his 
life they say, that, though it was not unmarked by 
great deeds, it was too evident that he had become 
intoxicated with success, and no longer acted under the 
guidance of reason ; and all Persian authorities agree, 
that, after he had in a paroxysm of rage, or rather mad= 
ness, put out the eyes of his eldest son Reza Kuut 
Mirza, he became altogether insane. But neither this 
act of attrocity, nor the other cruelties which Naprr 
cominitted towatds the close of his re gn, have eradicated 
from the minds of his countrymen the sentiments of 
veneration which they entertain for his memory, as the 
deliverer of his country from its numerous, cruel, and 
insolent enemies. 


I must trust to your indulgence to excuse the 
tength of this letter. If the accompanying translations 
are deemed worthy of being inserted in the transac- 
tions of the Asiatic Society, I hope to be able to for- 
ward hereafter others of a similar kind. 


Tam, My Dear Sir, 
vrih sincere respect and esteem 
Yours faithfully, 


; JOHN MALCOLM. 
gist October, 1808. : 


OF NADIR SHAH, &c. 533 


Lj EcDeB ok Red: 


{Written before Navin Suau ascended the throne,) 
addressed to MunamMeDd Axi Kuan, Beglerbeg of 
Fars ; and giving an account of the conquest of Heraq. 


r . 
To the highest of the exalted in station, tne Chief of 
the great Nobles Munammep Ati Kuay, these happy 
tidings be conveyed. 

Aipep by the bounty of an all powerful Creator, 
and the happy auspices of the house of HaipeEr * and 
the twelve holy Dams (on whom be eternal mercy,) 
with my crescent formed and all subduing scimitar, 
which in glory resembles the recent moon, and with 
my powerful and victorious army, and soldiers of pro- 
pitious destiny, who are those sent from heaven, | 
have, under the influence of good fortune, surpassed | 
~ all others in the capture of fortresses and cities. 

‘Av this happy and auspicious period, the host of 
Afghans of the tribe of AgpALut, who fled from the 
edge of the conquering swords of my dragon-like 
warriors, retired, as a spider within its web {, into the 
fort of Herat. Their hearts were distracted with fear, 
and the pillars of patience and fortitude, that had sup- 
ported their resolution, were cast down. Reduced to 


—_— 


P= > 


* Art. Here the tribe of Shiahs are meant, who are supposed 
to be under Ax1’s protection, and in fact part of his family. 

+ Sentences marked in italics, are passages from the Koran, of 
which [ have concisely rendered the meaning. 

{ From the Koran. The passage literally signifies “ like unto the 
spider that maketh bimself a house.’ But the weakest of 
houses surely is the spider's. : 


Mm 3 


534 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS 


distress by the complicated evils of famine and of the 
sword, they implored mercy; and “ as clemency is 
enjoined to the powerful,” I permitted them to eva- 
cuate the fort ; and have sent (with a view to disperse 
them) sixty thousand of this tribe with their families, 

who were reduced to great misery, to the city of i i 
Shahyar in the province of Khorasan. By the favour 
and blessing of that omnipotent being, by whom I have 
been protected, the fort of Herat isin my possession ; 
and the vat of the tribe of Afghans, as also of the 
Ghelyahs * of Candahar, who were in the bounds of 
alliance with them, have submitted’; and have placed 
upon their necks the collar of obedience. 


In the midst of these actions, by which the whole 
country from Herat to Candahar has been completely 
subdued, and the disturbers of tranquillity on the 
borders of Kforasan exemplarily punished, I learn by 
a letter from MUHAMMED Keza Kuan, who was sent 

ambassador to the court of Rrm-+, that he has con- 
cluded a treaty with the king, by which itis agreed that 
the Turkish empire shall possess the territory on the 
other bank of the river Aras; and the Persian, all 
upon this: but no arrangement appears to have been 
made for the liberation of the prisoners of the sect of 
Axi who are confined in the ¥urkizsh dominions. 


Is is an incontestible truth, that the existence of 
humble persons, like us, who, from the favour of a 
divine providence, have obtained rank and pre-emi- 
nence over others, is for no other purpose than that we 
should be the friends of the sect of Shiaht, that we 


——— damien ial 


* A particular tribe of Afghans. 


| Constantinople. 


OF NADIR SHAH, &c. 535 


should relieve the distress and dispel the grief of the 
poor and afflicted; (‘for to protect the rnled is 
the duty of the ruler.”) That we should combat 
the enemies of the weak, and eradicate the distemper 
of sedition from the body of the state: not deaf : deaf 
to the voice of the helpless and unmindful of those that 
are prisoners) we should break such sacred engage- 
ments, to conciliate the approbation and yield to the 
power of a proud enemy. 


By the great and powerful God, this day is big with 
ruin to their enemies and with joy to thesect of Shzahs, 
the discomfiture of the evil-minded is the glory and 
exaltation of the followers of Atr. When the avenger 
is at hand the wicked tremble and are appalled. Their 
eyes roll wildly like one in the agonies of death. Let the 
danger pass over, and it is forgotten. They revile and 
mock with their tongues. 


_ Tuts is a just description of the Turkish tribe. Why 
should we listen to more prevarications? Or why 
confine ourselyes to the bank of the ras *; 
when it is manifest, that the peace, which has been 
concluded, is contrary to the will of God and irrecon- 
cileable to the wisdom or dignity of imperial greatness. 


I HAVE stated to the minister of the exalted prince, 
that such a peace cannot be permanent, and that Icon- 
clude the mission of an ambassador to have been an act 
of compulsion, as I cannot believe that the prince 
would, under other circumstances, have consented to 
such a degradation of his dignity. But at all events, 
as offerings are continually made in the palaces of the 
lords of the faithful, and the holy men with broken 


ee a mes ee 


* Araxes. 


Mm 4 


530 _ TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS 


hearts are praying to their divine creator for the re- 
lease of the Musu/manprisoners; it wasmy determination, 
after receiving leave from the holy prince of regions * 
Aui Ign Mausa Reza (on whom be eternal blessings) 
to march on the second day after the feast of Feter + 
towards the disputed quarter, aided by the divine power, 
and accompanied by an army raging like the troubled 
ocean. 


VERSES. 


{shall overflow my banks, and fly like an impatient lover to his 
mistress ; 

Like a torrent, will I rush, with my breast eyer on the earth. 

Hariz! if thy footsteps desire to gain, by the true path, the holy 
house, 

Carry along with thee the virtue of the exalted of Nejef. 


I HAVE represented also, that I have sent the high 
in dignity, Mansum Aur Bea Gerarrt, ambassador 
to the court of Rem, and that he is attended by a re- 
spectable escort; and that heis-fully acquainted with 
my wishes and sentiments. 


You will nodoubt be rejoiced to hear, that, as it was 
io be hoped from the goodness of God, this peace with 
the Turks is not likely toendure; and you. may rest 
in expectation of my approach. For, by the blessing 
of the most high, I will advance immediately, with an 
army elated-with success, skilled in siéges, numerous as 
emmets, valiant as lions ; and combining with the 
vigor of youth the prudence of age. I will attend on 
the exalted prince, and then proceed towards the 
Turkish frontier. 


mea ee 


nn ee 


en ee ee ee er 


* Onc of the twelve Imams, who died at Meshed in Khorasan, 
where he is buried 


+ This feast happens at the conclusion of the month of Ramzan, 


OF NADIR SHAH, &C. a7 


VERSE. 


Let the cup-bearer tell our enemy, the worshipper of fire, 
To cover his head with dust ; 
For the water, that had departed, is returned into its channel. 


Sucu of the tribe of S/zazhs, as are backward on this 
great occasion, and are reconciled to this shameful 
peace, should be expelled from the faithful seat; and 
for ever counted among its enemies. To slaughter 
them will be meritorious; to’ permit their existence, 
impious. 


a 
n 


I have heard, that, during the reign of Murasim, 

A woman of Ajim was taken by the foe: 

Her eyes became channels for torrents of blood. 

She thus complained of her wretched state. 

“© Oh Mutasim ! why art thou supine ? I caii for justice! 
«Thy subject is a prisoner in the hands of thine enemy, 

«* Thou art the flame in the lamp of the country. 

“© On thee depends the shame and glory of the nation. 

“© Thou art the protector of the poor and wretched : 

All their children are the children of their sovereign ! 
Her masters, astonished at these exclamations, 

In rage struck her on the face ; 

And said, “ now let your monarch Murasim, 

With all the renowned heroes of Persia, 

Collect an innumerable army, 

And come, if they chose, to thy rescue.” 

This speech soon reached the great Murtasim, 

Who immediately published throughout Persia, 

That all, who pretended to the name of men, A 
Should instantly assemble in arms. x 
When the monarch had completed his mighty preparations. 

He soo heaped destruction on the heads of his enemies *. 

“* To release one prisoner from the hand of the foe, 


a 
n 


ry 
“ 


* -This story is related by historians, of Mura’sim, the son of 


Ha’run’avt Ra’syrp, and eighth KfAalif of the house. of Asas. 
* D’ Herbelot Bibl. Or. 630. 


538 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS 


«¢ If an incomparable army were assembled, 

«¢ At this moment, when numbers of the Shiahs of Persia 

« Are prisoners in the hand of cruel men, 

<< And, with their lamentable cries uttered morn and eve, 

«¢ Have rendered dark and gloomy the azure sky ; 

« It is acknowledged by the tribe of Shiahs, 

«© That the king + of KAorasan, the Imam of theage, 

<< Is not considered by the men of Persia 

<* As less honourable, nor of Jesser fame, than Murasim! 

‘«¢ Then, by the mercy and greatness of the creator, 

“© Vietory is still declared to these soldiers. 

« Under the auspices of the most merciful of the world, 

«¢ J have taken ample vengeance on the Afghans. 

“¢ Aided by the fortune of the Jord of Khorasan, 

‘© | have been revenged on the whole tribe of the Afghans. 

« There remains not in this quarter, at this period, 

« Aucht of that tribe but their name. 

“ In this war great actions have been fought, 

«© The Kezel-bashes * became each a sharp pointed thorn. ., 

«© From the slaughter that has been made, and the blood that has 
been shed, 

«€ Our high polished scimitars have received a purple stain. 

«© } have taken from the worthless foe, 

« With my sword, the region from Herat to Candahar t 

“* By the sacred temple of the lord + of Nejef, 

«© We will turn with vehemence to that quarter : 

« Wewill perform a pilgrimage to that threshold : 

«© And we will afford protection to our prisoners ; 

se We will take ample vengeance of the Turks. 

© We will punish { all our foes. 

‘© Andin this war, whoever continues inactive, 

“« Or from baseness remains in pretended ignorance, — 

«© Both his property and his blood are lawful prize, 

s¢ He is to be considered out of the pale of the true faith.” 


—=—= 


+ Att Mausa Reza, the seventh Imam, buried at Meshed. 


* Persians; literally Redheads, a name given to them, from the 
circumstance of SHau Ismarz having directed all true followers of 
the sect of Shiah to wear red caps. 


+ Axi, the son in law of the prophet, whois buried at Neje/. 
$ Literally, furbish the garments. 


— —: = 


OF NADIR SHAH, &c. 5390 


Most Noble Lord, if the state of the province of 
Fars will permit, lose not a moment in repairing to the 
court of the most exalted prince at Jspahwun; and re- 
present to him that, as the peace which has been con- 
cluded will benefit no person whosoever, and canin no 
light be Viewed as proper or reputable, it neither meets 
the approbation of the nobles nor the commonalty of 
the enipire. 


Bur, if youshould be prevented from moving to the 
capital, owing to the dispute with the 4rads not being 
adjusted, let me be instantly informed. If you are 
able to quell these troubles, it is well. But, if you 
require aid, make me acquainted; and a detachment 
of my victorious army shall march to your support. 

Keep me regularly informed of the news of your 
quarter. 


LE:TTE RIL 


From Navin Suan, to his son Reza Kuri Mirza, 
giving an account of the conquest of Delhi. 


r 
To the exalted and glorious son of our wishes the 
valiant Reza Kuxr Mi‘rza, who is our vicegerent in 

fran, the seat of our empire; our most beloved, the 
pre-eminent in royal rank, allied to us in dignity :—be 
these glorious commands known. 


AGREEABLY to our former communications, after 
the defeat of Afghan prince, Asurer Ati’ Merpan 
KHAN was appointed our ambassador to the court of 
Aiindustan for the purpose of rcpresenting to that court, 


5 


540 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS 


that as the turbulent Afghans of Candahar and its neigh- 
bouring provinces were to be considered equal enemies 
to both states, it would be advisable to appoint an 
army from Hindustan, to occupy the passes and prevent 
the retreat of the marauders. The emperor Munam- 
MED SHAH gave a ready assent, and concluded a treaty 
to the proposed effect. After the return of our am- 
bassador, we sent MunammMep Atri Kuan to the 
court of the Jndian emperor to repeat our instances on 
this subject, and MunamMep Suan confirmed his 
former engagement. 


AFTER our glorious and victorious standards returned 
to. Candahav, we understood from our conqnering 
generals employed with a part of our force in the re- 
duction of the Afghans of Kallat and Ghizni, that 
Mvwammep Suan had in norespect fulfilled his en- 
gagements ; and that no appearance of an /mdian army 
had been seen in that quarter, This intelligence in- 
duced us to send with the utmost expedition, Mu- 
HAMMED Kuan TurKomAN tothe court of Delhi to 
remind the Emperor of /his.promises ; but that sove- 
reign and his ministers, in dereliction of their former 


_engageiments, treated the subject with neglect omitted | 


answering our letters, and even put restraint on the 
person of our ambassador. 


In this situation we were impelled to march against. 
the dfehans of Ghizni and Cabul, and after punishing 
the refractory mountaineers in that quarter, as we con- 
sidered the neglect and contempt with which Mv- 
HAMMED SHAu_ had tehaved, and his conduct to our 
ambassador irreconcileable with friendship, we marched 
towards Shihjehinibad. 


‘ 


. 


é 


OF NADIR SHAH, &c. 5A1 


Or our success in reducing the provinces of 
Peshavir and taking possession of Lahore, the former 
seat of empire, our beloved son has already been in- 
formed. We marched from that city the last day of 
Shaval, and on Friday the 10th of Zelkdd reached 
Ambala, forty farfakhs from Shdhjehdnabad. We here 
learnt, that Mun’ammep Sau had collected from 
Hindustién and the Dec’ hin a numerous force, and ac- 
companied by all his nobles, by an army of three 
hundred thousand men, three hundred pieces of can- 
non, three or four hundred elephants, and other equip- 
ments in proportion, had marched from De/hi and ar- 
rived at Pdnipet, a village twenty farsakhs from 
Ambala. We immediately directed the superfluous 
and heavy baggage of our conquering army to be left 
at Ambala, and advanced to meet the enemy. Mu- 
HAMMED SHAH also left Pdmipet and marched to 
Carnél, which is twenty-five farsakhs from Delhi. 


Iw the course of our march we detached a force of 
five or six thousand men in advance, who had orders 
to observe the appearance, numbers and order of 
MuittammMep Snan’s army. ‘This body, when about 
two farsakhs from Carnd/, fell in with the advance 
of the Hindustani army, ‘which amounted to twelve 
thousand men: these they attacked and _ totally 
routed ; presenting us with their general and many 
others, whom they made prisoners. | 


Tuis signal defeat put a stop to MuHAmMep 
Suaun’s further advance. He halted at Carnd/ and 
surrounded his army with a trench: he also con- 
structed ramparts and batteries on which he placed 
his cannon. 


We had: sent a detachment to march to the east 


5A2 TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS 


of Mun’amMMeEpD SuHan’s camp and post themselve 
on the road that led to Delhi: this party received 
accounts on the night of Tuesday the 15th, that 
Saaper Kuan, known by his ttle of Burhan ul 
Mulk, and one of the chief nobles of the empire 
had reached Ma/abat accompanied by an army of 
-30,000 men, atrain of artillery, and a number of 
elephants, and intended forcing a junction with Mu- 
H'AMMED SHAH. 


Witsn a view of intercepting this force, we marched 
our army, two hours before day break, to the east of 
Carnal, and occupied the road between that village and 
Panipet. ‘This movement, we hoped, would force 
Mun’saMMrED SHAH from his entrenchments. About 
an hour and a half after day light we had passed Carndl, 
and gained the east side of the Hindustini camp, 
when the advance guard made prisoners some stragglers 
of SaapET Kuan’s party, from whose information we 
learnt, that that general had succeeded in his design 
of forming a junction with the emperor; in whose 
camp he had arrived at ten o'clock the preceding 


night. . 


On this intelligence we were pleased to order 
our royal tents to be pitched on the ground which we 
then occupied, opposite to the camp of MunamMep 
Suan, from whom we were distant about one 


farsakh. 


As the junction of Saaper Kuan had been the 
cause of MuHAMMED SuAn’s delays, he conceived on 
that event his appointments to be complete; and, 
leaving two thirds of his cannon for the protection of 
his camp, he advanced with a great part of his army, 
a third of his artillery, and a number of his elephants, 
at twelve o'clock the same day, half a farsakh in the 


OF NADIR SHAH, &c., 5A3 


direction of our royal army; and drew up _his 
troops in order of battle. Placing himself in the 
centre of the advanced lines, he stationed the remainder 
of his troops in therear as a support. ‘Their numbers 
were incredible. They occupied, as close as they 
could be drawn up in depth, from the front line to 
the entrenched camp, a distance of half a farsakh ; and 
their front was of equal extent. The ground was 
every where dark with their numbers, and to judge 
from appearance, we should suppose they were ten or 


twelve times more numerous than the army of the 
Abdal Gardoghly. 


We, whose only wishes were for such a day, after 
appointing guards for our camp and invoking the 
support of a bouutiful creator, mounted and advanced 
to give battle. 


For two complete hours the battle raged with 
violence, and a heavy fire from cannon and musquetry 
was kept up. After that, by the aid of the Almighty, 
our lion-hunting heroes broke the enemy’s line, and 
chaced them from the field of action, dispersing them 
in every direction. 


SaapetT Kuan mounted on his state elephant, his 
Nisua Mun’amMep. Kuan and other relations, fell 
prisoners into our hands. Samsa’m Axti Kuaw 
Davran Amir uL Omra Bana’per, the first minister 
of the empire, was wounded. One of his sons, with 
his brother Muzerer KuAn, was slain; and another 
. of his sons, Mix Aa’sH’ve, was taken prisoner. He 
_ himself died the following day of his wounds. 


Wastt1 Kuan, the commander of the emperor’s 
body guard, Swap’ar Kaan, Amrr Kutt Kaan, 
Air Munammes Kuan, Mir Husen Kiran, 


544A TRANSLATIONS OF TWO LETTERS 


Kua’sa AsHrer Kuan, Ati-yAr Kuan, A’AKIL 
Bec Kuan, Suanp’ap Kuan Afghan, AnMED ALI 
Kuan, Razin Rar Kuan, commander of the artil- 
lery, as also Suir Kuat’v, with about three hundred 
other nobles and leaders, of whom fifteen were com- 
manders of seven thousand, of four and of three thou- 
sand, were slain. 


Mvuw’amMep Suan, with Nizam ut Mork, 
ruler of the seven provinces of the Dee hin, and a chief 
noble of the empire, Kamer vt Din Kuan, chief 
vizier, and some other nobles of less note, protected 
by a covering party which had been left, made good 
their retreat within the entrenchments, and escaped the 
shock of our victorious swords 


Tuts action lasted two hours; and for two hours 
and a half more were our conquering soldiers engaged 
in pursuit. When one hour of the day remained, the 
field was entirely cleared of the enemy; and as the 
entrenchments of their camp were strong, and the 
fortifications formidable, we would not permit our army 
to assault it. 


An immense treasure, a numberof grand elephants, 
the artillery of the emperor, and great spoils of every 
description, were the reward of our victory. Upwards 
of twenty thousand of the enemy were slain on the 
field of battle, and a much greater number were made 
prisoners. 


IMMEDIATELY after this action, we surrounded the 
emperor’s camp, and took measures to prevent all com- 
munication with the adjacent country, preparing at 
the same time our cannon and mortars to level with 
the ground the fortification which had been erected. 


VR val - ee 


: 


OF NADIR SHAH, &c, 545 


As the utmost confusion reigned in the imperial 
camp, and all discipline was abandoned, the emperor, 


‘compelled by irresistible necessity, after the lapse of 


one day, sent NizAn vuxi-Muxx, on Thursday the 
17th, to our royal camp; and the day following 
Mun’AMMeD Sau himself, attended by his nobles, 
came to our heaven-like presence, in an afflicted state. 


WHEN the emperor was approaching, as we are our- 
selves of a Turkoman family, and Mun’ammMep SHaw 
is a Trkoman, and the lineal descendant of the noble 
house of GaurGa’n’1; we sent our dear son Nasir 


“Aur Kian beyond the bounds of our camp to meet 


him. Theemperor entered our tents, and delivered 
over to him the signet of our empire. He remained 
that day a cuestin our royal tent. 


ConsIDERING our affinity as Turkomans, and also 
teflecting on the favors and honors that befitred the 
dignity and majesty of a king of kings; we bestowed 
such upon the emperor, and ordered his royal pavilions, 
his family and his nobles, to be preserved; and we 
have established him in a manner equal to his great 


dignity. 


At this time, the Emperor with his family and alli 
the lords of Hindustan who marched from camp, are 
arrived at De/hi : and on Thursday the 29th of Z/kdd, 
we moved our glorious standard towards that capital. 


Ir is our royal intention, from the consideration of 
the high birth of Mun’amMep Suan, of his descent 
from the house of Gaurea’n’r, and of his affinity, to us 


_ a Turkoman, to fix him on the throne of empire, and 


» _ to place the crown of royalty upon his head, 


» 


Worm. Na 


5A6 TRANSLATIONS OF: TWO LETTERS 


Praise be to God, glory to the most high, who ha: 
granted us the power to perform such action ! For thi 
great grace which we have received from the Almighty, 
we must ever remain grateful. 


Gop has made the seven great seas like unto the 
vapour of the desart, beneath our glorious and con 
queringe footstepsand those of our faithful and victoriou 
heroes. He has made, in our victorious mind, thi 
thrones of kings, and the deep ocean of earthly glon 
more despicable than the light bubble that floats or 
the surface of the wave ; and no doubt his extraordinary 


mercy, which he bas now shown, will be evident to al 
mankind. 


As we have taken possession of a great number o 
cannon, we send 26,000 Moghals of Iran and Turan 
with a detachment from our own conquering army, anc 
a body of artillery with some large elephants, whon 
we have directed to march to Cabu/. No doubt ou 
sons will inform us of the affairs of that quarter. 


ArTER the arrival of your letter, we will either orde 
the detachment which we have sent, to proceed te 
Balkh or to go to Herat. 


We have appointed the high in dignity Aa‘’suun 
Kuan to march to Ba/kh, after the Nau rox, (22d 
March) which he no doubt will do. 


ConsIDER our glorious victory as derived from the 
bounty of the creator of fortune beyond all calculation. 
Make copies of this our royal mandate and disperse 
them over our empire, that the well wishers of our 
throne may be happy and rejoice, and our secret 
enemies be dejected, and confounded. Be you con- 


CF NADIR SHAH, &c. . 547 


stantly employed in adorning and arranging your go- 
vernment ; placing your hopes in the favor of the 
most high, so that by the blessing of God, all those, 
whether near or distant, that are not reconciled to our 
glorious state, and are brooding mischief, may be 
caught in their own snares; and all real friends, who 
are under our dominion, may attain their wishes, and 


prosper under the auspices of our munificent goyern- 
ment. 


Dated 20th Zilkéd, 1115 Hejira, 
Shahjehanabad or Dehli. 


END OF THE TENTH VOLUME. 


DIRECTIONS TO THE BINDER. 


- Plate 1. to front — 


Af. —. 
2M. = 
See 
WV, Seer 
A, — 
B. oi 
en ee 


Table I. — 
4]. If. IV. and 
Plate (VI. — 


Printed by S. Rovusszau, 
Wood Street, Spa Fields. 


Ve 


— Pag 


226 


124 


141 
209 


385 
393: - . 
aly 9 
A333 

AAD 
515. & 
517 

517 


tL. - 


SS 


VN VANAN e< e \ x Ex % ‘X \ x ay \ Ni < 
Ce UNL ' NaN AN A 
YY BENS ar SOON ROAM